00generalcatalogue201415 01 14

Index
Motor protection circuit breakers 1

Contactors 2
Motor
control and Motor protection relays 3
protection Electromechanical starters 4
Soft starters 5
AC motor drives MON
ENT
STOP
RUN
Pushbuttons and selector switches 7
Control and Signal towers and beacons 8

signalling Limit, micro and foot switches 9
Rotary cam switches 10
Switch disconnectors ON
I
11
OFF
0
Fuse holders and fuses 12

Circuit Miniature and residual circuit breakers NEW 13
protection
and isolation Surge protection devices 14
7)
13(
5
Modular contactors 15
3
1
(7)
13
5
3
5.10 1
CN2 14
(8)
A1 6
4
2
24V A2
0Hz
50/6
ctor
conta
lar
Modu
2
R1
0, 0,
0,
Earth leakage relays

LA
RH
ETE
LK
G
R 0,
16
EA 0,
0,0 t(sec
0,0
T
I
TR SE
RE
1,
1 2 O reesn
ma
2, tx
0,
0,2 In(A In0,x
oreest
au tx1 reesn
ma
ST Inx tx
TE In1x
OIN
T
C
In0,x
FU
oreest
au tx1
Inx
reesn
ma
In1x In1x
nT
S
IN L
A
C
IE tx
In0,x
oreets
au tx1
Inx
reesn
ma In1x Inx
tx
In0,x
oreest
au tx1
Inx
In1x
In0,x
Time relays 17
Protection relays 18
Automation Level control relays 19

and control Micro PLCs 20
Switching power supplies 21
Automatic battery chargers 22
Metering instruments and current transformers 23

Power factor controllers and thyristor modules 24
Energy Automatic transfer switch controllers 25

management Engine and generator controllers 26
Software and applications NEW 27
Expansion modules and accessories 28
2014 new products
• Insulated • ADXC soft starters • Spring-clamp • Auto-monitor contact • Control stations and
polycarbonate IP65 ADXC soft starters have a terminal contact and elements base-mount contact
enclosures 45mm wide casing. They can LED elements These particular NC and LED elements
A new frame size allows be installed either on 35mm LOVATO Electric add contacts, used with LOVATO Electric
mounting direct-on-line DIN rail or fixed on a new spring-clamp non-illuminated latch release the new
starters and changeover mounting plate, by scews, are terminal types to the emergency stop insulated
contactor assemblies up to suitable for soft start and existing screw and pushbuttons, provide polycarbonate LPZ
38A. stop, by current limitation, of faston terminal for constant monitoring control stations
Available in two versions, with three-phase asynchronous contact and LED of exact mounting and featuring modern
a deep cover (M25) or a motors rated up to 45A. elements, all to be mounted operation of the NC contacts. design and aesthetics in line
shallow one (M24), for Alarms are available, across on the LPXAU120 adapter. Once the contacts are with
different configurations of the range, for overcurrent, This type of push-in installed on the mounting pushbuttons and selector
electromechanical or over temperature and over connecting technology is time adapter in a correct way and switches.
electronic devices which can voltage conditions. The 600V saving during wiring since it with a correct running of the The types include empty
be fixed to the standard version is also equipped with is a tool-less operation. equipment, they work as stations, with 1 to 6 holes,
supplied metal plate. two relay outputs for remote normal NC contacts. having excellent protection
signalling of alarms and Their trait is to break to degrees per IEC IP66, 67,
bypass relay closing. normally-open state and, in 69K and UL Type 4/4X. The
so doing, isolate the circuit extreme sturdiness allows
when malfunctions take use in every type of
place, for instance after the application. To ease wiring
contact detaches from the inside the new LPZ
adapter or if these two come pushbutton stations,
loose from the pushbutton dedicated contact and LED
itself, due to strong vibrations elements have been made to
or shock of some sort. directly fit onto the control
station base. This sort of
installation provides for all
wiring to be entirely within
the base. As a result, cover
opening and fixing are safe,
quick and simple operations.
• IP65 enclosed switch • Fuse holders 10x38 • Miniature and • Surge protection • Interface protection
disconnectors size residual circuit devices PMVF 51
LOVATO Electric have The range is composed of: breakers LOVATO Electric release two The PMVF 51 interface
completed the line of one-pole, one-pole with light LOVATO Electric include in its new types of surge protection protection gives all the
enclosed switch indicator, one-pole + neutral, product offering new modular devices for photovoltaic functions and controls
disconnectors by introducing two-pole, three-pole and devices dedicated to protect applications, compliant with required by the Italian
a new enclosure frame size in three-pole + neutral versions. people and installations. They the new EN 50539-11 CEI 0-21 standard (June 2012
between the two available Using the available are miniature circuit breakers standard. edition and subsequent
GAZ1 and GAZ3 types. The accessories, multi-pole types (MCBs) up to 125A and The new products, available revisions) regarding low-
new GAZ2 version is available can be assembled starting residual current circuit with removable plug-in voltage connection of micro-
empty or already complete from the single-pole device. breakers (both RCBOs and cartridges, are used in generation systems, such as
with either a three or four- In addition, there is an RCCBs). installations with voltage up solar or wind installations,
pole switch disconnector, insertable label to identify The MCBs have a high to 1200VDC. By using their between the energy
rated 63A, 80A or 100A in each single pole. UL breaking capacity of 10kA contact remote feature, generation system and the
IEC AC21A duty. The IP65 certifications, as Listed or and most are certified by UL indication of the device status national power grid. In
protection degree allows Recognized (cULus or cURus) for USA and Canada as can be remoted so as to addition to compulsory
them to be installed in severe for USA and Canada supplementary protectors per signal when replacement is voltage and frequency
ambient conditions. depending on type, have now UL 1077. needed. The new SPDs have controls, when current
This product range has been been obtained for all high Iscpv short-circuit transformers are connected
extended to include new 10x38mm fuse holders, both current rating up to 1000A. with the PMVF51 interface
changeover switches, in both AC and photovoltaic DC This current value is very protection, it can also put at
three and four-pole versions, versions. important because it disposal current and energy
rated 25A to 125A in IEC indicates the maximum measurements as well as
AC21A duty, housed in current which their thermal unbalanced power control
insulated enclosures. disconnector is capable of with the optional dedicated
isolating. expansion module installed.
• New GE series handles

New design for the direct operating and door-coupling
handles introduced for GE switch disconnectors -
160 to 1600A ratings.
OFF and ON positions are clearly and precisely
identifiable.
2014 new products
• Micro PLC with • Automatic battery • Digital multimeters • DME energy meters • Data concentrator
built-in RS485 chargers BCG DMG 600 - DMG 610 Four new models complete DME CDPV1 for
LRD20R D024 P1 The new BGC battery charger (96x96mm) the existing range: photovoltaic
is a new version of series introduces switching DMG6… digital multimeters, DME D115 T1 (40A single monitoring
the Micro PLCs, technology even for the 12A for single or three-phase phase, 2-module type) DME CDPV1 is a device
featuring integrated 12VDC and 10A 24VDC systems, permit to view improves legibility of specifically for monitoring
RS485 serial ratings of lead-acid battery electrical quantities of the installation energy and power photovoltaic installations. By
interface, which applications. Two voltage installation on their backlight measurements by users, connecting at least two single
provides for simple levels can be selected, LCD screen and, by installing DME D130 (63A single or three-phase DMED energy
automated function suitable for different sorts of one of the EXP series phase) is expandable with meters to the data concentrator
integration, typical of the LRD battery and maximum communication modules EXP series modules (e.g. for in an installation, the user can
series with supervision and charging current can be (USB, RS232, RS485, load supervision); while obtain energy produced by the
control software. adjusted. The battery Ethernet), these DME D121 (63A single PV installation, energy drawn
Transducers, field and user chargers are enhanced by measurements can be phase) and DME D320 (CT by loads and ultimately, energy
commands can all be easily automatic protections and accessible to the supervision /5A three phase) have a built- exchanged (import and export)
elaborated by the Micro PLC indication LEDs for alarm software via appropriate in RS485 communication port with the energy provider.
to program its outputs. and battery operating protocol. making these two directly DME CDPV1 is already duly
conditions. The DMG 610 type is already integrable in supervision programmed to automatically
The relay output is equipped with built-in RS485 systems. calculate the percentages of
automatically activated interface. Data collection can Therefore, acquired data of produced (total and partial) and
whenever a malfunction of be done directly on the the energy meters can be consumed apparent power,
the system takes place. multimeter front as well, by centralised and then average power values and the
connecting the CX01 or CX02 developed with software operating status of the AC/DC
dongle to its optical port, elaboration. inverter (if it is equipped with
without having to open the any digital outputs).
electrical panel. It is customisable by the user
by setting up additional values
to control the installation
efficiency. In addition, with the
EXM series expansion modules,
DME CDPV1 can also be used
to supervise loads according to
• Supervision and energy management logic functions, defined by the
software user and based on the energy
The new software is based on the most modern availability. By adding an
technology that provides for the management of Ethernet communication port in
multiclient access through Web browser, thus allowing addition to the RS485 already
supervision and control of installations by any computer built in, remote control and
whatsoever. supervision can be done by the
Graphic pages, data logs and trend graphs can be software.
created and easily navigated. Moreover, alarms and .
functions can be operated to send emails with
notifications and reports.
supports all LOVATO Electric products
equipped with communication interface.
• Current transformer • Automatic power • Automatic transfer • Dual power supply • APP
DM0T factor controllers switch controllers module ATL DPS1 Configuration and
LOVATO Electric extend the DCRL (96x96mm) ATL 600 / 610 LOVATO Electric release a maintenance operations, often
series of its solid-core current The new DCRL3 and DCRL5 (144x144mm) dual power supply module for done in intolerable ambiance
transformers to include new power factor controllers have The automatic transfer switch the product offering of due to weather or noisy
DM0T 50 to 150A types. 3 and 5 steps respectively controllers ATL 600 and automatic transfer switching. conditions, are now easier to
The new transformers are built in to connect capacitor ATL 610 permit to supervise This new device is capable of do for all LOVATO Electric
tested according to a class 1 banks. When needed, two two power sources interacting checking the voltage values at products with communication
accuracy and reduce line extra steps can be added by with the user through the its inputs and identifying interface on front compatible
current to a 5A secondary installing the EXP10 06 backlight graphic LCD and which is the ideal to use and with CX02 dongle. Indeed,
value. They have screw expansion module to obtain a LED synoptic capable of connect to its output. tablets and smartphones with
terminals on the secondary maximum of 7 steps in total. viewing the installation status, ATL DPS1 is suitable to Android or iOS operating
and sealable terminal blocks The backlight icon LCD with complete text and supply motorised changeover system can connect to them
are standard supplied. viewing is made up of graphs. switches and circuit breakers. using the new application
symbols and texts which offer The ATL 610 version has the The module functionality is called directly
a clear, intuitive image of the 12 or 24VDC supply inputs in done by a microprocessor. downloadable from Google
installation status. The addition to the 110…240VAC The two single-phase voltage Play or iTunes. Therefore, it is
controllers are equipped with inputs of the ATL 600 type, inputs are independent, no longer necessary to
all the functions and alarms to and comes equipped with two isolated from each other and connect and switch on a PC
guarantee long capacitor expansion slots for EXP series each capable of supplying the using cables to change
bank life. modules to combine internal measuring circuit. configurations, set up
An optical communication additional digital inputs and Additional controls are made parameters or even clone
port is available on the outputs and communication on the output voltage to check device programming. With
controller front and provides function, such as USB, that the device operation is this APP, a file previously
for controller setup, RS232, RS485, Ethernet. In correctly carried out. In case saved can be uploaded;
programming and data this way, the ATS switchboard of malfunction, the red LED commands can be sent;
collection for diagnotics and can be remotely controlled will switch on to signal it; measured quantities can be
elaboration, in a safe way, by through supervision software. voltage flow is stopped and read from LOVATO Electric
using the CX01 or CX02 not available at output devices. The events can be
dongle, without having to terminals. The green LEDs on viewed and saved in a text file
disconnect and open the the module front permit to and later copied and sent by
electrical panel. constantly monitor the status email.
of the power sources,
availability of input lines and
presence of the module
output voltage.
• Communication devices CX
The CX communication dongles available as USB and
Wi-Fi versions allow connection between tablets,
smartphones, PCs and LOVATO Electric products with
front optical communication interface.
The story of a family,
the spirit of a company
Since 1922 Italian design

LOVATO Electric head offices were first established in In the Bergamo headquarters, the research staff and design
Bergamo, Italy, in 1922: the starting point of a great experts develop both innovative and reliable products by
industrial adventure. The Cacciavillani family has taking advantage of the most modern tool and software
managed the company for four generations. systems available in the marketplace.
“Making reliable, innovative products and
offering services to meet customers’
expectations, continue to be our company’s
mission since four generations.”
Massimiliano Cacciavillani
Managing Director
Leading-edge manufacturing facilities

LOVATO Electric design and make products with the most
advanced technology.
Highly qualified technical assistance

A team of specialised technicians provide quick and professional
assistance relating to products and applications.
The “Technical Assistance” office specialises in all pre- and post-sales
activities giving customers all the necessary support for:
- Product selection - Product designation
- Certifications - Cross-reference with
- Product commissioning competitors’ products
- Assistance in case of malfunction
International presence
LOVATO Electric presence in the major world markets is the result
of the perpetual internationalisation strategy.
LOVATO Electric Italy together with its foreign subsidiary
companies and network of importers represent the reference
point for the global distribution of its products in over 100 countries.
UNITED KINGDOM
LOVATO ELECTRIC LTD
www.Lovato.co.uk
GERMANY
LOVATO ELECTRIC GmbH
www.LovatoElectric.de
SPAIN
LOVATO ELECTRIC S.L.U.
www.LovatoElectric.es
UNITED STATES
OF AMERICA
LOVATO ELECTRIC INC.
www.LovatoUsa.com
CANADA
LOVATO ELECTRIC CORP.
www.Lovato.ca
POLAND
LOVATO ELECTRIC SP. Z O.O.
www.LovatoElectric.pl
ITALY
LOVATO ELECTRIC S.p.A. CZECH REPUBLIC
LOVATO ELECTRIC S.R.O.
www.LovatoElectric.com www.LovatoElectric.cz
TURKEY .
LOVATO ELEKTRIK LTD
www.LovatoElectric.com.tr
UNITED ARAB
EMIRATES
LOVATO ELECTRIC ME FZE
www.LovatoElectric.ae
ROMANIA
LOVATO ELECTRIC SRL
www.LovatoElectric.ro
CHINA
LOVATO ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO LTD
www.LovatoElectric.cn
11
foreign
subsidiaries
90 importers
Present in over
100
countries
Successful products and
solutions
Machine builders Pumping, irrigation Power factor Lifting systems

(OEM) and piping correction
• Motor protection circuit • Motor protection circuit • Contactors • Motor protection circuit
breakers breakers • Switch disconnectors breakers
• Contactors • Contactors • Fuse holders • Contactors
• Motor protection relays • Motor protection relays • Miniature and residual • Motor protection relays
• Electromechanical starters • Electromechanical starters circuit breakers • Electromechanical starters
• Soft starters • Soft starters • Metering instruments and • Soft starters
• AC motor drives • AC motor drives CTs • AC motor drives
• Pushbuttons and selector • Pushbuttons and selector • Automatic power factor • Pushbuttons and selector
switches switches controllers switches
• Signal towers and beacons • Signal towers and beacons • Thyristor modules • Signal towers and beacons
• Limit, micro and foot • Rotary cam switches • Setup and remote control • Limit, micro and foot
switches software switches
• Switch disconnectors
• Rotary cam switches • Fuse holders • Switch disconnectors
• Switch disconnectors • Miniature and residual • Fuse holders
• Fuse holders circuit breakers • Miniature and residual
• Miniature and residual • Time relays circuit breakers
circuit breakers • Protection relays • Time relays
• Surge protection devices • Level control relays and • Protection relays
• Time relays electrodes • Micro PLCs
• Protection relays • Micro PLCs • Switching power supplies
• Micro PLCs
• Switching power supplies
• Metering instruments and
CTs
Photovoltaic Generating sets Electric power Energy
applications distribution management
• Contactors • Motor protection circuit • Motor protection circuit • Soft starters

• Switch disconnectors breakers breakers • AC motor drives
• Fuse holders • Contactors • Switch disconnectors • Micro PLCs
• Fuses • Pushbuttons and selector • Miniature and residual • Metering instruments and
switches circuit breakers CTs
• Miniature and residual
circuit breakers • Rotary cam switches • Surge protection devices • Automatic power factor
• Surge protection devices • Changeover switches • Modular contactors controllers
• Switching power supplies • Fuse holders • Earth leakage relays • Automatic transfer switch
• Miniature and residual • Time relays controllers
• Metering instruments and
CTs circuit breakers • Protection relays • Engine and generator
• Surge protection devices controllers
• Interface protection relays • Micro PLCs
• Earth leakage relays • Software and applications
• Software and applications • Switching power supplies
• Protection relays • Automatic battery chargers
• Automatic battery chargers • Metering instruments and
• Automatic transfer switch CTs
controllers • Automatic transfer switch
• Metering instruments and controllers
CTs • Software and applications
• Engine and generator
controllers
• Software and applications
Quality and certifications
LOVATO Electric S.p.A. was among the first Italian

companies, in 1992, to hold the quality management
system certification, in compliance with the standard
ISO 9001
also maintaining an Environment

Management System, certified
according to the standard
ISO 14001
Our laboratory is authorised to conduct
type testing for the emission of certification
ACAE/LOVAG
Qualified laboratory
according to standards
It covers an area of
2 EN ISO/IEC 17025
850m subdivided in
diverse specialised sectors Tests conducted according to
national and
international
standards prescriptions
Main tests:
- Making and breaking capacities
- Short-circuit with comparator system
- Temperature rise
- Thermal protection functionality
- Verification of dielectric properties
- Verification of terminals mechanical properties
- Verification of IK code degree of protection (impact withstand)
- Verification of IP code degree of protection (ingress protection
against water jets)
- Shock and vibration withstand
- Electrical and mechanical durability
- Low current-low voltage contact functionality
- Ambient simulation in climatic chamber
- Glow-wire ignitability of insulating parts
- Immunity to conducted and radiated emission fields
- Immunity to surges, fast transients / bursts and electrostatic
discharges.
International fairs
Dubai, Istanbul, Hanover, Moscow and Nuremberg are
just a few of the exhibition events
LOVATO Electric yearly take part in.
Training courses
- Basic level for entire production
- Advanced level with practical training
- Webinars.
General catalogue Pushbuttons and selector switches
QUALITY TOUCH!
Ø22mm series
Metering instruments and current transformers
Digital measuring instruments
Flush mount LCD touch-

screen power analyzers,
expandable
Order
code
DMG 900
Description
Graphic 128x112 pixel 1

Qty
per
pkg
n°
Wt
[kg]
0.566
General characteristics
DMG 900... expandable digital power analyzers are available
with a flush-mount housing, 96x96mm/3.8x3.8in size. The
wide graphic touch screen display provides extremely simple
interacting between the instrument and the user.
The high performance of the power analyzers gives very
touch-screen LCD, accurate measurements and can control energy distribution
- Product information
harmonic analysis,
2014
systems, to detect and prevent energy problems which could
4 channels, auxiliary supply compromise quality and supply.
100-440VAC/110-250VDC. The main features include an extensive power supply voltage
Multilanguage: Italian, range, high measurement accuracy, expandability up to 4
English, French, Spanish plug in expansion modules.
and Portuguese There also is available the DMG 900T measurement
2015
10mm transducer which can be used with the DMG 900RD remote
DMG 900 L01 Graphic 128x112 pixel 1 0.566
touch-screen LCD, display. The DMG 900T, without display, is arranged for
LOW ACTUATOR PROFILE harmonic analysis, mounting inside the panel board, on 35mm DIN rail, and is an
- Overall dimensions
The external actuator bezel has a low profile DMG 900... 4 channels, auxiliary supply ideal solution for installations where the measurements of
and reduced front thickness. 100-440VAC/110-250VDC. various multimeters must be remotely viewed.
The DMG 900RD remote display connected to the DMG 900T
GENERAL DMG 900 D048
Multilanguage: English, Czech,
Polish, German and Russian
Graphic 128x112 pixel 1 0.580
transducer can display the measurements on the panel front
while power connections remain inside the panel.
CATALOGUE 7
HIGH DEGREE OF PROTECTION
CUSTOMISING CAPABILITY
To simplify stock management, the new series allows
quick replacement of the actuator cap or lens of spring
touch-screen LCD,
harmonic analysis, auxiliary
supply 12-24-48VDC
Main measurements and functions include:
– Voltage: phase, line and system values (neutral-earth too)
– Supply voltage value for the DC supply type only
– Current: phase values
- Wiring diagrams
IEC IP66, IP67, IP69K and UL TYPE 4X return types since these are also sold as accessories. DMG 900T Measurement transducer, 1 0.570 – Neutral current calculated and true values
The actuators have been tested to ensure a degree of harmonic analysis, – Power: apparent, active and reactive phase and total values
protetection per IEC IP66, IP67, IP69K and UL type 4X, 4 channels, auxiliary supply – P.F.: Power Factor per phase and total
100-440VAC/110-250VDC, – Cosϕ per phase and total
appropriate for use even in extreme ambient conditions. RS232/RS485 port – Frequency of measured voltage value
DMG 900T... – Voltage and current asymmetry
DMG 900T D048 Measurement transducer, 1 0.590
harmonic analysis, – Total harmonic distortion (THD) of voltage and current
4 channels, auxiliary supply – Harmonic analysis of voltage and current up to the 63° order
12-24-48VDC, – HIGH-LOW-AVERAGE value functions for all measurements
- Technical characteristics.
QUICK AND EASY ACTUATOR REDUCED DIMENSIONS AND CONTACT ELEMENTS RS232/RS485 port – Maximum demand of power and current values
– Flow direction of harmonic power values
INSTALLATION INTERAXIS Remote display for DMG 900T... – Energy meters for active, reactive, apparent partial and
Click! 30 DMG 900RD Graphic 128x112 pixel touch 1 0.396 total values with programmable tariff functions
(1.18”) – Hour counter for programmable total and partial hours
30 screen LCD, with 3m/9.8ft
(1.18”) long connecting cable – Pulse counter for general use: pulse counting for water,
gas, etc. consumption with expansion module only
– Energy quality analysis to EN 50160 with expansion
40 (1.57”)
module only.
Order Description
DMG 900RD code
40 (1.57”)
Operational characteristics
- Miniaturised size – Auxiliary supply voltage range:
DMG 900 and DMG 900 T EXPANSION MODULES.
- High electric conductivity - 5V 1mA 90-484VAC / 93.5-300VDC for DMG 900 and DMG 900T;
Inputs and outputs.
- Up to 9 contact elements can be 9-70VDC for DMG 900 D048 and DMG 900T D048
- The mounting adapter and the installed, 3 rows of 3 elements EXP10 00 4 digital opto-isolated inputs
– Voltage measurement range:
actuators each have clearly visible - Screw or faston termination EXP10 01 4 static opto-isolated outputs 20-830VAC phase-to-phase
- Actuator fixing on the mounting reference indications making the - Contact operation: double breaking
Ø22.5 EXP10 02 2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated 10-480VAC phase-neutral
surface, through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87in snap-on fitting between the two action, direct opening operation and
(0.88”) – Use in medium and high-voltage systems with voltage
drilled hole, is obtained using its easy and intuitive. self cleaning. EXP10 03 2 relay outputs rated 5A 250VAC
transformers
threaded ring, easily rotated by - The new series provides a minimum EXP10 04 2 analog opto-isolated inputs 0/4-20mA or – Rated input current: 5A or 1A by CT
hand or by socket spanner/wrench. 30x40mm (1.18x1.57in) pitch HIGH-LUMINOSITY LED PT100 or 0-10V or 0...±5V – Current measurement range: 0.01-10A or 0.002-1.2A
Click!
between two actuators on a INTEGRATED LAMP HOLDERS – Current measurement range with CT up to 10,000A
EXP10 05 2 analog opto-isolated outputs 0/4-20mA or
mounting surface. 0-10V or 0...±5V – Frequency measure range: 45-66Hz / 360-440Hz
- Minimum pitch between drilled holes – True RMS measurements for voltage and current values
for double and triple touch actuators Communication ports. – Accuracy:
is 30x55mm (1.18x1.97in). EXP10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface • Voltage: ±0.2% (50-830VAC)
EXP10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface • Current: ±0.2% (0.1-1.1In)
43mm (1.69in) • Power: ±0.5% f.s.
EXP10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface • Power factor: ±0.5%
EXP10 13 Opto-isolated Ethernet interface with Web • Frequency: ±0.05%
- Electrical contacts and LED lamp - Miniaturised size server function • Active energy: Class 0.5S (IEC/EN 62053-22)
EXP 10...
holders are snapped onto the - Long electrical life: 100,000h • Reactive energy: Class 2 (IEC/EN 62053-23)
mounting adapter. EXP10 14 Opto-isolated Profibus-DP interface
- There is an anti-rotation fastener, - Over-voltage protection – Non-volatile memory for data and event (last 100) storage
duly sized to avoid actuator rotation - Withstand to vibrations EXP10 15 GPRS/GSM modem – Communication protocol Modbus®-RTU, ASCII and
on the mounting surface and to give - Protection against stray currents in EXP10 30 Data storage, clock-calendar (RTC) with backup TCP with communication expansion modules only
an orientation reference point for wiring battery for data logging – Programming and remote control by software with
users during panel installation and - Total depth, from the external - Flickering phenomenon reduction communication expansion modules only
EXP10 31 Data storage, with Energy Quality (EN 50160),
during contact fitting on the mounting surface to the end of - Steady and flashing light versions – Housing:
clock-calendar (RTC) with backup battery for
actuator. the first contact element is merely - Supply voltages:
• 18-30VAC/DC
data logging
• Flush mount 96x96mm/3.8x3.8in for DMG900... and
DMG 900RD
22
- This anti-rotation fastener collapses 43mm (1.69in).
inside the gasket to allow fitting also • 85-140VAC • 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) fixing for DMG 900T
when drilled holes are round without • 185-265VAC. – IEC protection degree: IP65 on front for DMG 900... and
reference index. DMG 900RD; IP20 at terminals for DMG 900... - DMG 900T.
- The sealing gasket for the actuator
mounting surface has a gripping EXP10 series expansion modules and accessories
action (suction effect) offering a See pages 22-28 and 29.
surface prefixing property.
Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: GOST and UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices-Multimeter for all.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2,
IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508, CSA C22.2 n°14.
Software and accessories Expansion modules Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
7-2 page 22-29 page 22-28 page 22-32 page 22-35 page 22-42 22-15
Other literature
- Brochures and pamphlets
- Technical instructions.
LovatoElectric.com
- New products - Download:
- Videos • General catalogue
- Online news • Leaflets and technical
- Fairs instructions
- Events and training sessions • Software upgrade
- Contacts • Drivers and utilities
• 2D / 3D CAD drawings.
Youtube Channel Social Networks

Page 1-2 Page 1-2
SM1A SM1B
• Thermal trip adjustment ranges 9-32A • Thermal trip adjustment ranges 0.1-32A
(5 choices) (15 choices)
• IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V: • IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V:
– 50kA – 100kA (ranges 0.1-10A)
• Suitable for mounting in consumer – 25kA (ranges 9-32A)
switchboards, minimum 58mm/2.3in deep. • Suitable for mounting in consumer
switchboards, minimum 58mm/2.3in deep.
Page 1-2 Page 1-3
SM1C SM2A
• Same characteristics per SM1B breaker • Thermal trip adjustment ranges 28-50A
• Suitable for mounting in consumer (3 choices)
switchboards, minimum 45mm/1.8in deep. • IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V:
– 50kA.
Page 1-3 Page 1-10
SM3A LMS25
• Thermal trip adjustment ranges 45-100A • Thermal trip adjustment ranges 0.1-25A
(4 choices) (13 choices)
• IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V: • IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V:
– 50kA. – 100kA (ranges 0.1-6.3A)
– 6kA (ranges 6.3-10A)
– 4kA (ranges 10-25A)
• Suitable for mounting in consumer
switchboards, minimum 45mm/1.8in deep.
MOTOR PROTECTION CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1
Wide adjustment range

0.1 to 100A
IEC breaking capacity Icu 50kA
(400V) up to 100A
Suitable for isolation
Comprehensive line of accessories
Front mount contacts
Automatic trip indicators
High reliability and accuracy of
tripping.
SEC. - PAGE
Motor protection circuit breakers
Breakers SM1A, SM1B and SM1C ...................................................................................................................................... 1 - 2
Breakers SM2A and SM3A ................................................................................................................................................. 1 - 3
Add-on blocks and accessories for SM1A, SM1B and SM1C ............................................................................................... 1 - 4
Add-on blocks and accessories for SM2A and SM3A .......................................................................................................... 1 - 8
Starters LMS25 ................................................................................................................................................................. 1 - 10
Add-on blocks and accessories for LMS25 ......................................................................................................................... 1 - 11
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 1 - 12
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 1 - 15
Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 1 - 16
P ROTECTION
Short-circuit tripping indicator, standard supplied

on all circuit breakers, type SM1.
Reset the indicator, as illustrated, to restore the
breaker.
AND
M OTOR C ONTROL
With thermal and magnetic trip releases
Motor protection circuit Order Thermal Short circuit Qty Wt General characteristics
1 breakers SM1 up to 32A code trip breaking per The SM1 is a modern series of circuit breakers with
adjustment capacity pkg thermal and magnetic trip releases and high breaking
range at 400V capacity. Motor control and protection, up to 15kW at
Icu Ics 400V/20HP 480V/30HP 600V, are possible by choosing
[A] [kA] [kA] n° [kg] the suitable adjustment range, 0.1 to 32A.
A magnetic trip indicator integrated on the SM1 breakers
IEC breaking capacity Icu 50kA at 400V. avoids dangerous closing operations during short-circuit
11 SM1A 40 9-14 50 25 5 0.352 conditions, previously disconnected by the breaker.
11 SM1A 44 13-18 50 25 5 0.352 The SM1 types are suitable for isolation according to
11 SM1A 48 17-23 50 25 5 0.352 IEC/EN 60947 standards.
Their high breaking capacity consents to exclude
11 SM1A 52 20-25 50 25 5 0.352 protection fuses on the majority of the installations.
11 SM1A 56 24-32 50 25 5 0.352
IEC breaking capacity Icu 100kA (0.1-10A) / 25kA (9-32A) at 400V. Operational characteristics
– IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V
11 SM1B 00 0.1-0.16 100 100 5 0.278
– IEC rated impulse withstand voltage: 6kV
11 SM1B 04 0.16-0.25 100 100 5 0.278 – IEC rated frequency: 50/60Hz
11 SM1A...
11 SM1B 08 0.25-0.4 100 100 5 0.278 – Maximum rated current: 32A
11 SM1B 12 0.4-0.63 100 100 5 0.278 – Number of adjustment ranges:
SM1A: 5 (9 to 32A)
11 SM1B 16 0.63-1 100 100 5 0.278
SM1B: 15 (0.1 to 32A)
11 SM1B 20 1-1.6 100 100 5 0.278 SM1C: 15 (0.1 to 32A)
11 SM1B 24 1.6-2.5 100 100 5 0.352 – IEC breaking capacity: see page 1-17
11 SM1B 28 2.5-4 100 100 5 0.352 – Power dissipation: 2.2-9.7W
– Magnetic tripping: 12In max
11 SM1B 32 4-6.5 100 100 5 0.352 – IEC thermal tripping class: 10A
11 SM1B 36 6.3-10 100 100 5 0.352 – Phase failure / Single phase sensitive
11 SM1B 40 9-14 25 12.5 5 0.352 – Mechanical life: 100,000 cycles
11 SM1B 44 13-18 25 12.5 5 0.352 – Electrical life: 100,000 cycles
– Mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
11 SM1B 48 17-23 25 12.5 5 0.352 – Mounting position: Any
11 SM1B 52 20-25 25 12.5 5 0.352 – IEC utilisation category: A
11 SM1B... – IEC degree of protection: IP20.
11 SM1B 56 24-32 25 12.5 5 0.352
IEC breaking capacity Icu100kA (0.1-10A) / 25kA (9-32A) at 400V.
Suitable for mounting in modular consumer switchboards .
Certifications obtained: EAC; and UL Listed, for USA and
11 SM1C 00 0.1-0.16 100 100 5 0.278 Canada (cULus - File E93602); CCC for some SM1B types
11 SM1C 04 0.16-0.25 100 100 5 0.278 only (consult Customer Service for details; see contact
11 SM1C 08 0.25-0.4 100 100 5 0.278 details on inside front cover).
See UL/CSA details under NOTE on the bottom left side.
11 SM1C 12 0.4-0.63 100 100 5 0.278
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
11 SM1C 16 0.63-1 100 100 5 0.278 IEC/EN 60947-2, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508,
11 SM1C 20 1-1.6 100 100 5 0.352 CSA C22.2 n° 14.
11 SM1C 24 1.6-2.5 100 100 5 0.352 2.3Nm/20lbin
max
11 SM1C 28 2.5-4 100 100 5 0.352
1Nm/9lbin
11 SM1C 32 4-6.5 100 100 5 0.352 max
11 SM1C...
11 SM1C 36 6.3-10 100 100 5 0.352 ®
ov
ato
11 SM1C 40 9-14 25 12.5 5 0.352 TES

T
T
11 SM1C 44 13-18 25 12.5 5 0.352 1Nm/9lbin
L Lo
va
to
TES max
11 SM1C 48 17-23 25 12.5 5 0.352
11 SM1C 52 20-25 25 12.5 5 0.352
NOTE: When more than one breaker are mounted, side by side, without
11 SM1C 56 24-32 25 12.5 5 0.352 leaving space between each to consent free air circulation on the
breaker sides, and have simultaneous operation, the thermal trip
The SM1C version permits mounting in enclosures and modular adjuster must be positioned at a value 15% higher than the rated motor
consumer switchboards with minimum depth of at least 45mm between
the DIN rail and the opening. See page 1-12 for exact breaker dimensions. current.
No front-mount auxiliary contacts 11 SMX11... can be used.
Maximum UL/CSA horsepower rating

Thermal General use
Type 1 Phase [HP] 3 Phase [HP]
adjustment range at 600V (FLA)
[A] 120V 230V 200-208V 230V 480V 600V [A]
SM1…00 0.1-0.16 –– –– –– –– –– –– 0.16
SM1…04 0.16-0.25 –– –– –– –– –– –– 0.25
SM1…08 0.25-0.4 –– –– –– –– –– –– 0.4
SM1…12 0.4-0.63 –– –– –– –– –– –– 0.63
1 1
SM1…16 0.63-1 –– –– –– –– /2 /2 1
1 3
SM1…20 1-1.6 –– /10 –– –– /4 1 1.6
NOTE: SM1…24 1.6-2.5 –– 1
/6 1
/2 1
/2 1 11/2 2.5
All data mentioned is valid for 11SM1A, 11SM1B
and 11SM1C types; UL Listed in USA and Canada 1 1 3 3
SM1…28 2.5-4 /8 /3 /4 /4 2 3 4
as “manual motor controller suitable as motor
1 1
disconnect”, delivering not more than 5000rms SM1…32 4-6.5 /4 /2 11/2 11/2 3 5 6.5
symmetrical amperes, 600VAC, and use with class J 1
fuses only. Trip current is 120%. SM1…36 6.3-10 /2 11/2 2 3 5 71/2 10
3
The appropriate thermal trip range of the
SM1…40 9-14 /4 2 3 3 10 10 14
controller should be selected on the basis of the SM1…44 13-18 1 3 5 5 10 15 18
motor nameplate full-load current since the
horsepower ratings given are for indication and SM1…48 17-23 11/2 3 5 71/2 15 20 23
reference purposes only.
Single-phase horsepower ratings are based on SM1…52 20-25 2 3 5 71/2 15 20 25
wiring the three poles in series; see wiring
scheme on page 1-15. SM1…56 24-32 2 5 10 10 20 30 32
Add-on blocks/Accessories Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

1-2 pages 1-4 to 7 pages 1-12 and 13 pages 1-15 and 16 pages 1-16 and 17
With thermal and magnetic trip releases
Motor protection circuit Order Thermal Short circuit Qty Wt General characteristics
breakers SM2A - SM3A code trip breaking per The SM2A and SM3A types are circuit breakers with a 1
adjustment capacity (IEC) pkg wide adjustment range, 28 to 100A, in only two frame
up to 100A range at 400V sizes enabling motor control and protection up to 45kW
Icu Ics at 400V/75HP 480V/100HP 600V.
[A] [kA] [kA] n° [kg] A magnetic trip indicator and padlockable operating
handle are integrated on the SM2A and SM3A breakers.
IEC breaking capacity Icu 50kA at 400V. Both are suitable for isolation according to IEC/EN 60947
11 SM2A 68 28-40 50 25 1 1.040 standards.
11 SM2A 72 36-45 50 25 1 1.040 Their high breaking capacity consents to exclude
protection fuses on the majority of the installations.
11 SM2A 76 40-50 50 25 1 1.040
IEC breaking capacity Icu 50kA at 400V. Operational characteristics
11 SM3A 84 45-63 50 25 1 2.266 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V
– IEC rated impulse withstand voltage: 6kV
11 SM3A 88 57-75 50 25 1 2.266 – IEC rated frequency: 50/60Hz
11 SM3A 92 70-90 50 25 1 2.266 – Maximum rated current: 50A (SM2A) and 100A (SM3A)
11 SM3A 96 80-100 50 25 1 2.266 – Number of adjustment ranges:
SM2A: 3 (28 to 50A)
SM3A: 4 (45 to 100A)
– IEC breaking capacity: See table on page 1-17
– Power dissipation:
SM2A: 7.1-20W
SM3A: 10-38W
11 SM2A... – Magnetic tripping: 13In max
– IEC thermal tripping class: 10
– Phase failure / Single phase sensitive
– Life (cycles): Mechanical Electrical (Ie AC3)
SM2A 50,000 25,000
SM3A 50,000 25,000
– Mounting:
SM2A - Screw fixing or on 35mm DIN rail
(IEC/EN 60715)
SM3A - Screw fixing or on DIN rail 35mm
(IEC/EN 60715) or 75mm (IEC/EN 60715)
– Mounting position: Any
– IEC utilisation category: A
– IEC degree of protection: IP00.

Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E155982); CSA certified (File 73212).
See UL/CSA details under NOTE below bottom table.
IEC/EN 60947-2, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
11 SM3A...
leaving space between each to consent free air circulation on the
adjuster must be positioned at a value 15% greater than the rated
motor current.

Thermal 1 Phase [HP] FLA Max
Type 3 Phase [HP]
adjustment range (not mentioned max at Fuse /
by UL/CSA) 600V CB
[A] 120V 230V 200-208V 230V 480V 600V [A] [A]
SM2A 68 28-40A 3 71/2 15 15 30 40 40 150
SM2A 72 36-45A 5 71/2 15 15 30 40 45 175
SM2A 76 40-50A 5 10 15 20 40 50 50 200
SM3A 84 45-63A 5 15 20 25 50 60 63 250
SM3A 88 57-75A 71/2 15 25 25 60 75 75 300
SM3A 92 70-90A 10 20 30 30 75 100 90 350
SM3A 96 80-100A 10 20 40 40 75 100 100 400
NOTE:
For SM2A types: UL Listed for USA and Canada and CSA certified as manual motor controller, short circuit 65kA 480V; 25kA 600V; max fuse / CB (see table).
Suitable for group installation.
CSA: Maximum fuse / CB 350A. UL: SPCD according NEC; suitable as motor disconnect 600Y/347V.
Suitable as tap conductor protection in group installation 65kA 480Y/277V, 25kA 600Y/347V. Maximum fuse / CB 500A. Trip amps 125%.
For SM3A84 and SM3A88 types: UL Listed for USA and Canada and CSA certified as manual motor controller, short circuit 65kA 480V; 30kA 600V; max fuse /
CB (see table). Suitable for group installation.
Suitable as tap conductor protection in group installation 65kA 480Y/277V, 30kA 600Y/347V. Maximum fuse / CB 1200A. Trip amps 125% .
For SM3A92 and SM3A96 types: UL Listed for USA and Canada and CSA certified as manual motor controller, short circuit 65kA 480V; 10kA 600V; max fuse /
CB (see table). Suitable for group installation.
Suitable as tap conductor protection in group installation 65kA 480Y/277V. Maximum fuse / CB 1200A. Trip amps 125%.
The appropriate thermal trip range of the controller should be selected on the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current since the horsepower ratings
given are for indication and reference purposes only.
Single-phase horsepower ratings are based on wiring the three poles in series; see wiring scheme on page 1-15.

pages 1-8 and 9 page 1-14 pages 1-15 and 16 pages 1-16 and 17 1-3
Add-on blocks and accessories for SM1 types
Order code Characteristics Qty Wt General and operational characteristics

1 per ADD-ON AUXILIARY BLOCKS
pkg – Snap on to the front or the right side of the breaker
n° [kg] – Maximum combination: 3 SMX... blocks with
6 auxiliary contacts in total of which 2 on front (SM1C
Add-on auxiliary contacts. excluded) and 4 on the side
11 SMX11 20 Front mount 2NO 10 0.013 (2 normal contacts and 2 indicators)
11 SMX11 11 Front mount 1NO+1NC 10 0.013 – IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith:
6A (2.5A for SMX11...)
11 SMX12 11 Side mount 1NO+1NC 10 0.045 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V (250V for
11 SMX12 02 Side mount 2NC 10 0.045 SMX11...)
11 SMX12 20 Side mount 2NO 10 0.045 – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
11 SMX11... 11 SMX12... C600 Q600 (C300 R300 for SMX11...)
11 SMX13 11 Side-mount indicator 10 0.045 – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm/9lbin
contacts for thermal and – Conductor cross section minimum-maximum
magnetic tripping (1 or 2 wires): 0.75-2.5 mm2 or 18/14 AWG
1NO+1NC – Width of side-mount auxiliary contacts equal to 0.5
Undervoltage trip releases. standard DIN 46880 module.
11 SMX14 BC 110VAC 50/60Hz 5 0.125
UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP RELEASE
11 SMX14 CL 230VAC 50/60Hz 5 0.125 – Connectable to the left side of the breaker
11 SMX14 EA 400VAC 50/60Hz 5 0.125 – Consumption in-rush/holding: 12/3.5VA
11 SMX15 CL 230VAC 50/60Hz 5 0.140 – Drop-out voltage: 0.35-0.7Us
with early-make contacts – Pick-up voltage: 0.85-1.1Us
– Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm/9lbin
11 SMX15 EA 400VAC 50/60Hz 5 0.140 – Conductor cross section minimum-maximum
11 SMX13 11 11 SMX14... with early-make contacts (1 or 2 wires): 0.75-2.5mm2 or 18/14 AWG.
Shunt trip releases.
11 SMX16 AF 24VAC 50/60Hz 5 0.124 SHUNT TRIP RELEASE
– Connectable to the left side of the breaker
11 SMX16 BC 110VAC 50/60Hz 5 0.124 – In-rush consumption: 20VA
11 SMX16 CL 230VAC 50/60Hz 5 0.124 – Operating limits: 0.7-1.1Us
11 SMX16 EA 400VAC 50/60Hz 5 0.124 – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm/9lbin
– Conductor cross section minimum-maximum
Padlockable attachment for operating lever. (1 or 2 wires): 0.75-2.5mm2 or 18/14 AWG.
11 SMX18 10 3 padlocks max Ø 5mm 1 0.049
Adjuster sealing kit. TERMINAL BLOCK FOR BUSBAR SUPPLY
– Imax 63A
11 SMX18 12 For all types 1 0.006 – Maximum tightening torque: 2.3Nm/20lbin
Padlockable door coupling handle. – Conductor cross section minimum-maximum:
11 SMX15... 11 SMX16... 4-25mm2 or 10/4 AWG.
11 SMX18 14 3 padlocks maximum 1 0.720
IP65. Red/yellow
THREE-PHASE CONNECTION BUSBAR
11 SMX18 15 3 padlocks maximum 1 0.760 – Imax 63A
IP65. Black – SMX90 3... 45mm/1.77” spacing to reduce the width
Terminal block for busbar supply. to the minimum
11 SMX90 30 For all types 10 0.048 – SMX90 4... 54mm/2.13” spacing to consent to fit one
side-mount auxiliary contact block on the breaker.
Safety cover.
11 SMX90 31 For unused busbar terminals 10 0.005 Certifications and compliance
11 SMX18 10 Three-phase connection busbars 45mm/1.77” spacing. Certifications obtained: EAC for all; UL Listed, for USA
and Canada (cULus - File E93602), under motor
11 SMX90 32 For 2 breakers without 10 0.027 controllers, for auxiliary contacts, releases and
side-mount contacts padlockable attachment of operating lever; CCC for
11 SMX90 33 For 3 breakers without 10 0.050 SMX12... and SMX13 11 auxiliary contacts.
side-mount contacts Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
11 SMX90 34 For 4 breakers without 10 0.071 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
side-mount contacts
11 SMX90 35 For 5 breakers without 10 0.092
side-mount contacts
11 SMX90 30 11 SMX90 31 Three-phase connection busbars 54mm/2.13” spacing.
11 SMX90 42 For 2 breakers complete with 10 0.031
side-mount contacts
side-mount contacts
side-mount contacts
11 SMX90 3... 11 SMX90 45 For 5 breakers complete with 10 0.081
11 SMX90 4... side-mount contacts
Not suitable for fixing on SM1C types.
Tripping is indicated by flag indicator on front.
Dimensions Wiring diagrams

1-4 pages 1-12 and 13 pages 1-15 and 16

per SM1 - CONTACTOR CONNECTION 1
pkg The SMX90 03, SMX31... and SMX32 41 rigid
n° [kg] connections electrically and mechanically fasten
the breaker together with the contactor forming a
Rigid SM1 breaker-contactor connections. single-unit starter for quick installation on 35mm
11 SMX90 03 11 SMX90 03 For SM1 breaker with BG 10 0.025 DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715).
mini-contactor.
SMX31 41 STARTER ASSEMBLY ADAPTER PLATES
SMX31 42 SMX31 41 For SM1 breaker with 10 0.044
BF09A-BF25A contactor. The elements consent to preassemble starters and to
SMX32 41 form trim and compact single-unit equipment for quick
Complete with cover
and easy installation.
SMX31 42 For SM1 breaker with 10 0.046 The starter adapter plates install on 35mm DIN rail
BF09D-BF25D and (IEC/EN 60715).
BF09L-BF25L contactor.
Complete with cover SURFACE MOUNT ENCLOSURE
SMX32 41 For SM1 breaker with 10 0.050 – Top or bottom entry:
BF26A-BF38A contactor. • PG16 threaded knockouts for SMX17 10
Complete with cover • 22.5mm/0.88” knockouts for SMX17 11
Adapter plates. – Rear entry:
• 22.5mm/0.88” knockouts
11 SMX90 10 Adapter plate for 1 0.058 – Holds a SM1 breaker equipped with one side-mount
direct-on-line starter (SM1 contact block, one front-mount block (except for
breaker and BG or SM1C) and either one shunt or undervoltage release
BF09A-BF38A contactors) – Earth/ground terminal included
11 SMX90 12 Adapter plate for reversing 1 0.095 – Operating temperature: -5...+40°C
contactor assembly (SM1 – Storage temperature: -50...+80°C.
breaker and BG or
11 SMX90 10 11 SMX90 12 BF09A-BF38A contactors) FLUSH MOUNT ENCLOSURE
11 SMX90 14 Adapter plate for star-delta 1 0.118 – Use with breaker, complete with 1 front-mount (except
starter (SM1 breaker and for SM1C) and 1 side-mount blocks and one shunt or
45mm/1.77” wide undervoltage release
contactors BF09A-BF38A) – Earth/ground terminal included
– 103x144mm/4.05x5.67” cutout
11 SMX90 18 35mm DIN rail 1 0.025 – Operating temperature: -5...+40°C
(IEC/EN 60715) for cable – Storage temperature: -50...+80°C.
bypass of contactor used
with SMX90 14 plate ENCLOSURE ACCESSORIES
11 SMX90 19 35mm DIN rail extension 1 0.025 PADLOCKABLE ROTARY ACTUATOR:
Surface mount enclosures. – Suitable for SMX17 10 or SMX17 20 type only
– Raises the degree of protection of the enclosure
11 SMX17 10 IP40. 100mm/4” wide 1 0.404 to IEC IP65
11 SMX17 11 IP40. 85mm/3.3” wide 1 0.358 – 3 padlocks maximum.
Flush mount enclosure.
ACTUATOR WITH EMERGENCY PUSH-BUTTON:
11 SMX90 14 11 SMX17 20 IP40. 122mm/4.8” wide, 1 0.341 – Suitable for SMX17 11 only
103x144mm/4.05x5.67” – Raises the degree of protection of the enclosure to
cutout IEC IP65.
ACCESSORIES FOR ENCLOSURES.
Padlockable rotary actuator. Certifications and compliance
11 SMX17 30 IP65. Grey-black. 1 0.110 Certifications obtained: EAC for all SMX... types and pilot
For SMX17 10 and lights; UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus -
SMX17 20 enclosures File E93602), under motor controllers, for SMX90 03,
SMX31 41 and SMX32 41 connections.
11 SMX17 35 IP65. Red-yellow. 1 0.142 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, UL508,
For SMX17 10 and CSA C22.2 n° 14.
SMX17 20 enclosures
Actuator with emergency stop button.
11 SMX17 10 11 SMX17 20 11 SMX17 40 IP65. For SMX17 11 10 0.174
11 SMX17 11 enclosure
IP65 membrane complete with rim.
11 SMX17 45 For SMX17 11 enclosure 10 0.035
Neutral connection.
11 SMX17 50 For SMX17 10 and 10 0.026
SMX17 20 enclosures only
Pilot light.
23 NEONVV Green 10 0.006
23 NEONRV Red 10 0.006
11 SMX17 35 11 SMX17 40 Marking elements.
BFX30 Blank label for writing 50 0.002
To obtain IP65 degree of protection, mount the 11 SMX17 45 membrane.
The device obtained with this actuator is not suitable for isolation per
IEC/EN 60947-2 standards.
Complete with required voltage. Available voltages:
– AC 50/60Hz 24/110/220-240 (indicate 220)/380-415 (indicate 380) VAC.
11 SMX17 45

pages 1-12 and 13 pages 1-15 and 16 1-5
Combinations
1 Front-mount contacts Side-mount contacts Side-mount contacts
Undervoltage trip release Undervoltage trip release with auxiliary
Shunt trip release contacts
TEST
SMX14... SMX15
SMX16...
SMX1311 SMX12... SMX1311 SMX12...
SMX11...
Not suitable for use with SM1C type.

Only one add-on block can be fixed on the left side of the breaker.
One of the following combinations can be mounted on the right side of the breaker:
– One each of SMX13 11 and SMX12...
or one only SMX13 11
or one only SMX12 ...
Three-phase connection busbars

SMX90 30 SMX90 35
SMX90 31
SMX90 34
ST
TE
SMX90 33 TE
ST
SMX90 32
T
®
Three-phase connection busbar,

TES
®
45mm/1.77” spacing (breakers
TES
T
without add-on blocks)
®
ST
TE
ST
TE
ST
TE
ST
TE
ST
TE
ST
TE
SMX90 45
SMX90 30 SMX90 31
SMX90 44
ST
TE
ST
TE
SMX90 43
®
ST
TE
SMX90 42 ®
TE
ST Three-phase connection
®
busbar, 54mm/2.13”
spacing (breakers with
ST
TE
ST
add-on blocks)
TE
ST
TE
ST
TE
ST
TE
ST
TE

Combinations
Rigid breaker-contactor connection and protection cover 1
TE
ST TE
ST TE
ST
SM1...
SM1...
®
SM1...
SMX31 41 SMX32 41
SMX31 42
SMX90 03
BG...
BF09-BF25
BF26A-BF38A
Padlockable attachment Adjuster sealing kit Padlockable door coupling handle

for operating lever
SMX18 14
SMX18 15
SMX18 10 SMX18 12
Surface mount enclosure SMX17 11 complete with

Surface mount enclosure SMX17 10 or SMX17 11
emergency stop button SMX17 40.
SMX12...
®
TEST
®
SMX13 11
SMX17 40
SMX15... SMX11...
SMX16...
SMX14...
Flush mount enclosure SMX17 20 SMX17 11
For BF09A-BF25A contactors.

For BF09D-BF25D and BF09L-BF25L contactors.
One only add-on block can be mounted on each
side of the breaker.

Add-on blocks and accessories for SM2A and SM3A types

1 per ADD-ON AUXILIARY BLOCKS
pkg – Insert on the top front or snap on the left side of the
n° [kg] breaker
– Maximum combination: 4 SMX... blocks with
Add-on auxiliary contacts. 8 auxiliary contacts in total of which 2 on front and 6
11 SMX20 11 Front mount 1 changeover 10 0.016 on the sides (2 normal contacts and 4 indicators)
11 SMX20 11 (SPDT) – IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith:
11 SMX21 11 11 SMX21 11 Front mount 1NO+1NC 10 0.018 10A (2.5A for SMX21 11)
– IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
11 SMX22 02 Side mount 2NC 2 0.046 690V (250V for SMX20... and SMX21...)
11 SMX22 11 Side mount 1NO+1NC 2 0.046 – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
11 SMX22 20 Side mount 2NO 2 0.046 A600 Q300 (C300 R300 for SMX20... and SMX21...)
– Maximum tightening torque: 1.2Nm/10.3lbin
11 SMX23 11 Side-mount indicator 1 0.092 – Conductor cross section minimum-maximum
contacts (1NO+1NC) for (1 or 2 wires): 0.5-2.5mm2 or 18/14 AWG.
thermal trip and (1NO+1NC)
for magnetic trip UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP RELEASE
Undervoltage trip releases. – Snap on to the right side of the breaker
11 SMX24 BC 110VAC 50/60Hz 1 0.136 – Consumption inrush/holding: 20.2/7.2 VA; 13/2.4 W
– Drop-out voltage: 0.35-0.7Us
11 SMX24 CL 230VAC 50/60Hz 1 0.136 – Pick-up voltage: 0.85-1.1Us
11 SMX22...
11 SMX24 EA 400VAC 50/60Hz 1 0.136 – Maximum tightening torque: 1.2Nm/10.3lbin
11 SMX25 CL 230VAC (50/60Hz) 1 0.136 – Conductor cross section minimum-maximum
with early-make contacts (1 or 2 wires): 0.5-2.5mm2 or 18/14 AWG.
11 SMX25 EA 400VAC (50/60Hz) 1 0.136 SHUNT TRIP RELEASE
with early-make contacts – Snap on to the right side of the breaker
Shunt trip releases. – In-rush consumption: 20.2VA; 13W
11 SMX26 AF 24VAC 50/60Hz 1 0.132 – Operating voltage: 0.7-1.1Us
– Maximum tightening torque: 1.2Nm/10.3lbin
11 SMX26 BC 110VAC 50/60Hz 1 0.132 – Conductor cross section minimum-maximum
11 SMX26 CL 230VAC 50/60Hz 1 0.132 (1 or 2 wires): 0.5-2.5mm2 or 18/14 AWG.
11 SMX26 EA 400VAC 50/60Hz 1 0.132
11 SMX23 11 Padlockable door coupling rotary actuator. Certifications obtained: EAC for all; UL Listed, for USA
11 SMX28 05 IP65. 3 padlocks maximum. 1 0.102 and Canada (cULus - File E93601), and CSA Certified
Black colour (File 703212), as Auxiliary Devices, for auxiliary contacts
11 SMX28 10 IP65. 3 padlocks maximum. 1 0.110 and releases.
Red-yellow colour Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
See diagram on p. 1-16 for the exact operation.
11 SMX24...
11 SMX25...
11 SMX26...

1-8 page 1-14 pages 1-15 and 16
Add-on blocks and accessories for SM2A and SM3A types
Combinations
SMX24...
1
SMX25...
SMX26...
ato
ov
LL
SMX23 11
SMX22...
SMX20 11
SMX21 11
Padlockable door coupling rotary actuator SMX28 05 - SMX28 10
max.
ø 8Ømm
max 8mm
Minimum 75mm distance from door edge

(hinge side) for correct operation of door
shaft mechanism. See page 1-14 for more
details.

page 1-14 pages 1-15 and 16 1-9
Manual motor starters
Manual motor starter Order code Thermal Short circuit Qty Wt General characteristics
1 LMS25 up to 25A trip breaking per The LMS25 manual motor starter is particularly suitable for
adjustment capacity (IEC) pkg controlling small operating machines.
range at 400V Releases and auxiliary contacts make it also suitable for
Icu Ics more complex uses.
[A] [kA] [kA] n° [kg] The LMS25 manual motor starter is suitable for isolation
according to IEC/EN 60947 standards.
IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V: 100kA (0.1-6.3A) / Wall and flush-mount enclosures allow to install the LMS25
6kA (6.3-10A) / 4kA (10-25A). starter in the most disparate environmental conditions (dust,
11 LMS25 016T 0.1 - 0.16 100 100 5 0.193 humidity, aggressive environmental agents, etc.).
11 LMS25 025T 0.16 - 0.25 100 100 5 0.193
11 LMS25 04T 0.25 - 0.4 100 100 5 0.193 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V
11 LMS25 063T 0.4 - 0.63 100 100 5 0.193 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage: 6kV
11 LMS25 1T 0.63 - 1 100 100 5 0.193 – IEC rated frequency: 50/60Hz
– Maximum rated current: 25A
11 LMS25 1V6T 1 - 1.6 100 100 5 0.193 – 13 adjustment ranges 0.1 to 25A
11 LMS25 2V5T 1.6 - 2.5 100 100 5 0.266 – IEC breaking capacity: see table on page 1-17
11 LMS25 4T 2.5 - 4 100 100 5 0.266 – Power dissipation: 2-15W
– Magnetic tripping: 12In max
11 LMS25 6V3T 4 - 6.3 100 100 5 0.266 – IEC thermal tripping class: 10
11 LMS 25...
11 LMS25 10T 6.3 - 10 6 3 5 0.266 – Phase failure / Single phase sensitive
11 LMS25 16T 10 - 16 4 2 5 0.266 – Mechanical life: 100,000 cycles
– Electrical life 25A (IEC AC3): 100,000 cycles
11 LMS25 20T 16 - 20 4 2 5 0.266 – Mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) or screw
11 LMS25 25T 20 - 25 4 2 5 0.266 fixing
– Mounting position: Any
– IEC utilisation category: A

Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed for USA and Canada
(cULus - File E155982). See UL/CSA details under NOTE
below bottom table.
IEC/EN 60947-2, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
leaving space between each to consent free air circulation on the
adjuster must be positioned at a value 15% greater than the rated
motor current.

Thermal FLA max
Type 1 Phase [HP] 3 Phase [HP]
adjustment range at 600V
[A] 120V 230V 200-208V 230V 480V 600V [A]
LMS25 016T 0.1-0.16 - - - - - - 0.16
LMS25 025T 0.16-0.25 - - - - - - 0.25
LMS25 04T 0.25-0.4 - - - - - - 0.4
LMS25 063T 0.4-0.63 - - - - - - 0.63
1
LMS25 1T 0.63-1 - - - - - /2 1
3 3
LMS25 1V6T 1-1.6 - - - - /4 /4 1.6
1 1 1
LMS25 2V5T 1.6-2.5 - /6 /2 /2 1 11/2 2.5
1 1 3
LMS25 4T 2.5-4 /8 /4 /4 1 2 3 4
1 1
LMS25 6V3T 4-6.3 /4 /2 11/2 11/2 3 5 6.3
1
LMS25 10T 6.3-10 /2 1 2 3 5 71/2 10
LMS25 16T 10-16 1 2 3 5 10 10 16
LMS25 20T 16-20 11/2 3 5 5 10 15 20
LMS25 25T 20-25 2 3 5 71/2 15 20 25
NOTE:
UL Listed in USA and Canada as manual motor controller. Fuses only 30A suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 5000rms symmetrical
amperes, 600VAC. Trip current is 125%.
The appropriate thermal trip range of the controller should be selected on the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current since the horsepower ratings
given are for indication and reference purposes only.
Single-phase horsepower ratings are based on wiring the three poles in series; see wiring scheme on page 1-15.

1-10 pages 1-11 page 1-15 pages 1-15 and 16 pages 1-16 and 17
Add-on blocks and accessories for LMS25 types

per ADD-ON AUXILIARY CONTACTS 1
pkg – Connectable to right or left side of starter
n° [kg] – Maximum combination: 2 LMH... blocks, one on right
and one on left side of starter (4 auxiliary contacts max in
Add-on auxiliary contacts. Side mount. total)
11 LMH 01 1NC 10 0.037 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 500V
11 LMH 10 1NO 10 0.036 – IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith: 6A
– IEC operational current AC15: 3.5A 230V; 2A 400V
11 LMH 11 1NO + 1NC 10 0.042 – IEC protection fuse (gL or gG): 6A maximum
11 LMH 20 2NO 10 0.037 – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm/9lbin
Undervoltage trip release. – Conductor cross section minimum-maximum
11 LMH... 11 LMU... - 11 LMA... (1 or 2 wires): 0.75-2.5mm2 or 18/14 AWG
11 LMU To fit inside starter. 10 0.066 – Width of the auxiliary contacts LMH... equal to 0.5
For all types standard DIN 43880 modules.
Shunt trip release.
11 LMA To fit inside starter. 10 0.064 UNDERVOLTAGE AND SHUNT TRIP RELEASES
For all types – Must be fitted inside the motor starter.
11 SMX90 32 Terminal block for busbar supply. Undervoltage Shunt
11 SMX90 30 For all types 10 0.048 Release range 0.35-0.7Us ––
Operating range 0.85-1.1Us 0.7-1.1Us
Safety cover. On-load factor 100% ––
11 SMX90 31 For unused busbar 10 0.005
terminals TERMINAL BLOCK FOR BUSBAR SUPPLY
Three-phase connection busbars 45mm/1.77” spacing. – Imax 63A
11 SMX90 32 For 2 breakers without 10 0.028 – Maximum tightening torque: 2.3Nm/20lbin
side-mount contacts – Conductor cross section minimum-maximum:
11 SMX90 30 11 SMX90 31 4-25mm2 or 10/4 AWG.
11 SMX90 33 For 3 breakers without 10 0.050
side-mount contacts THREE-PHASE CONNECTION BUSBAR
11 SMX90 34 For 4 breakers without 10 0.071 – Imax 63A
side-mount contacts – SMX90 3... 45mm/1.77” spacing to reduce the width to
11 SMX90 35 For 5 breakers without 10 0.092 the minimum
side-mount contacts – SMX90 4... 54mm/2.13” spacing to consent to fit one
side mount auxiliary contact block on the breaker.
Three-phase connection busbars 54mm/2.13” spacing.
11 SMX90 42 For 2 breakers complete 10 0.031 SURFACE MOUNT ENCLOSURE
with side-mount contacts – Top or bottom entry:
11 SMX90 43 For 3 breakers complete 10 0.056 • M25 threaded knockouts
with side-mount contacts – Rear entry:
• 15.5mm/0.6” knockouts
11 SMX90 44 For 4 breakers complete 10 0.081 – Up to two auxiliary contact blocks may be mounted
11 LMZ111 - 11 LMZ112
with side-mount contacts – Earth/ground terminal included
11 SMX90 45 For 5 breakers complete 10 0.089 – Operating termperature: -5...+40°C
with side-mount contacts – Storage termperature: -50...+80°C.
Surface mount enclosures.
FLUSH MOUNT ENCLOSURE
11 LMZ 111 IP55. 80mm/3.15” wide 1 0.260 – Cutout size 70x115mm/2.76x4.53”
11 LMZ 112 IP54. 80mm/3.15” wide 1 0.273 – Up to two auxiliary contact blocks may be mounted
Flush mount enclosures. – Earth/ground terminal included
– Operating termperature: -5...+40°C
11 LMZ 113 IP55. 85mm/3.35” wide 1 0.204 – Storage termperature: -50...+80°C.
11 LMZ 114 IP41. 85mm/3.35” wide 1 0.184
ACCESSORIES FOR ENCLOSURES. ACCESSORIES FOR ENCLOSURES
Locking mechanism. Locking mechanism:
– Prevents closing operation: 3 padlocks maximum.
11 LMZ 105 3 padlocks maximum 10 0.091 Emergency stop button:
11 LMZ113 - 11 LMZ114
Normal stop button. IP55 protection. – Turn to release
11 LMZ 106 For LMZ 111, LMZ113 1 0.051 – Red push-button Ø 35mm/1.38”
and LMZ 114 NOTE: Once mounted on the enclosure, these accessories
raise the degree of protection from IP41 to IP55.
Neutral connection.
11 LMN PE For all types 10 0.010 Certifications and compliance
Pilot light. Certifications obtained: EAC for all; UL Listed for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E155982), under motor controllers, for
23 NEONVV Green 10 0.006 auxiliary contacts and trip releases.
23 NEONRV Red 10 0.006 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
Spare rubber membrane complete with rim for enclosures. IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
11 LMZ105 11 LMZ106
11 LMM For LMZ 111, LMZ113 10 0.012
and LMZ 114 enclosures
M25 to PG16 entry adapter.
11 LM M25 PG16 For LMZ111 and 10 0.009
11 LMNPE
LMZ112 enclosures
Specify rated voltage. Add suffix 60 if frequency is 60Hz. Available voltages:
– AC 50Hz 24/48/110/220-240 (indicate 220)/380-415 (indicate 380)/
440-460 (indicate 440)/480 and 575VAC.
Complete with required voltage. Available voltages:
– AC 50/60Hz 24/110/220-240 (indicate 220)/380-415 (indicate 380) VAC.
23 NEON...V

page 1-15 pages 1-15 and 16 1-11
Dimensions [mm (in)]
Breakers SM1A - SM1B SM1A - SM1B

1 with side-mount auxiliary contacts only
80.5
with front and side-mount auxiliary contacts
80.5
(3.17”) (3.17”)
18 9 SMX12... 18 9 SMX12...
(0.71”) (0.35”) (0.71”) (0.35”)
(3.46”)
(1.39”)
(1.75”)
(1.75”)
(1.39”)
(3.58”)
(3.46”)
(3.58”)
(1.90”)
35.3
44.5
44.5
35.3
48.3
88
(2.18”)
91
88
91
55.5
44.5 44.5 23.5 SMX11 11
4.8 44.4 4.8 (0.92”)
(1.75”) (0.19”) 14.3 (1.75”) 44.4 SMX11 20
SMX14... (1.75”) SMX14... (0.19”) (1.75”)
(0.56”)
SMX15... SMX13 11 SMX13 11 72.2
72.2 SMX15...
SMX16... (2.84”) SMX16... SMX11... (2.84”)
82.5 82.5
(3.25”) (3.25”)
SM1C
with side-mount auxiliary contacts only
80.5
(3.17”)
18 9 SMX12...
(0.71”) (0.35”)
(3.46”)
(1.75”)
(1.39”)
(3.58”)
44.5
35.3
88
91
44.5 4.8 44.4

(1.75”) (0.19”) (1.75”)
SMX14...
SMX15... SMX13 11 72.2
SMX16... (2.84”)
82.5
(3.25”)
Breakers SM1 with SMX90 03 connector SM1 with SMX31 41 connector SM1 with SMX31 42 connector
and BG contactors and BF09A-BF25A contactors and BF09D/L-BF25D/L contactors
44.5 44.5 85 44.5 102.8
(1.75”) (1.75”) (3.35”) (1.75”) (4.05”)
(6.30”)
160
SMX90 03
(7.25”)
(7.25”)
184.2
184.2
SMX31 41 SMX31 42
SM1 with SMX32 41 connector SM1... with SMX18 14 or SMX18 15 door coupling handle
and BF26A-BF38A contactors
44.5 94 min. 140 / max. 395
82.9 (min 5.51” / max 15.55”)
(1.75”) (3.70”) (3.26”)
45.1 104.5 36 (1.42”)
22.5 22 1...4
(1.77”) (0.88”) (4.11”) 28...32
(0.87”) (0.04”...0.16”)
23 (1.10”...1.26”)
22
(0.87”) (0.90”)
(1.10”...1.26”)
61.8 (2.43”)
Ø16 (0.63”)
36 (1.42”)
(4.33”)
(2.56”)
28...32
(3.54”)
110
65
90
(7.61”)
193.2
SMX32 41
Ø3 (0.12”)
Ø2
.6
(0.1
0” SMX18 14
) SMX18 15
SMX18 14
SMX18 15
1-12
Connection busbars 45mm/1.77” spacing Terminal block for Safety cover These elements mounted with SM1...
SMX90 32 - SMX90 33 - SMX90 34 busbar supply
SMX90 30
SMX90 31 breakers with no auxiliary contacts
1
SMX90 30
29 (1.14”)
29 (1.14”)
SMX90 3...
13.5 13.5
45 (1.77”) (0.53”) (0.53”)
SMX90 31
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
Connection busbars 54mm/2.13” spacing Terminal block for Safety cover These elements mounted with SM1...
SMX90 42 - SMX90 43 - SMX90 44 busbar supply SMX90 31 breakers with auxiliary contacts SMX12... or SMX13 11
SMX90 30
SMX90 30
29 (1.14”)
29 (1.14”)
SMX90 4...
13.5 13.5
54 (2.13”) (0.53”) (0.53”)
SMX90 31
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
Enclosures SMX17 10 with SMX17 30 or SMX17 35 handle SMX17 11 with SMX17 40 button
100 (3.94”) 134.4 (5.29”) 85.4 (3.36”) 173 (6.81”)
.5 ) .5 )
Ø4 .18” 109 (4.29”) Ø4 .18” 109 (4.29”)
(0 (0
181.2 (7.13”)
181.2 (7.13”)
170 (6.69”)
164 (6.46”)
170 (6.69”)
SMX17 40
42 (1.65”) 44.1 (1.74”)
PG16
(0.75”)
Ø22.5
19.2
(0.91”)
SMX17 3...
23.1
(0.88”)
SMX17 20 with SMX17 30 or SMX17 35 handle Cutout

94 (3.70”) 39.4
122 (4.80”) (1.55”)
144 (5.67”)
164 (6.46”)
SMX17 3...
14
(0.55”) 103 (4.05”)
1-13
Breakers SM2A with SMX2... contacts Breakers SM3A with SMX2... contacts
1 10 (0.39”)
SMX20 11
17 (0.67”) SMX24...
SMX25...
121 (4.76”)
102 (4.01”)
SMX24...
SMX20 11
SMX21 11 12 SMX24...
146 (5.75”)
138 (5.43”)
127 (5”)
SMX20 11
20 SMX25... SMX22... (0.47”) SMX21 11
SMX21 11 (0.79”) SMX26... 52 (2.05”) 23 (0.90”) SMX25... 77 (3.03”)
SMX22... SMX26... SMX26...
SMX24...
SMX25...
SMX26...
SMX20 11
SMX21 11
140 (5.51”)
130 (5.12”)
125 (4.92”)
45 (1.77”)
85 (3.35”)
89 (3.50”)
116 (4.57”)
155 (6.10”)
150 (5.90”)
165 (6.50”)
45 (1.77”)
89 (3.50”)
5
(1.97”)
5
SMX22... (1.97”)
SMX23 11 SMX22...
9
(0.35”) 30 18 8 (0.31”) SMX23 11
(1.18”) (0.71”) 109 (4.29”)
18 (0.71”) 55 (2.16”) 127 (5”)
SMX23 11 132 (5.20”) 9 30 18 8 (0.31”)
144 (5.67”) (0.35”) (1.18”) (0.71”) 138 (5.43”)
18 (0.71”) 70 (2.75”) 153 (6.02”)
SMX23 11 169 (6.65”)
SM2A with SMX28 05 or SMX28 10 door coupling handle
3.2 (0.12”)
25
(0.98) 1...4 (0.04”...0.16”)
SMX28 05
SMX28 10
(0.96”)
5
2.
24.3
)
Ø2 .88”
0
(
5
(1.97”)
min. 75
min. 55 / max. 130 33 17 (2.95”)
(min 2.16” / max 5.12”) (1.30”) (0.67”)
132 (5.20”)
SMX28 05
SMX28 10
25 3.2 (0.12”)
(0.98) 1...4 (0.04”...0.16”)
140 (5.51”)
(0.96”)
5
2.
24.3
)
Ø2 .88”
(0
5
(1.97”)
min. 75
min. 131 / max. 327 33 17 (2.95”)
(min 5.16” / max 12.87”) (1.30”) (0.67”)
16 55 132 (5.20”)
(0.63”) (2.16”)
Mounting on DIN rail.
SM3A with SMX28 05 or SMX28 10 door coupling handle
3.2 (0.12”)
25
(0.98) 1...4 (0.04”...0.16”)
SMX28 05
SMX28 10
(0.96”)
5
2.
24.3
)
Ø2 .88”
(0
5
(1.97”)
min. 75
min. 55 / max. 104 33 17 (2.95”)
(min 2.16” / max 4.09”) (1.30”) (0.67”)
158 (6.22”)
SMX28 05
SMX28 10
25 3.2 (0.12”)
(0.98) 1...4 (0.04”...0.16”)
165 (6.50”)
(0.96”)
5
2.
24.3
)
Ø2 .88”
(0
5
(1.97”)
min. 75
min. 105 / max. 327 33 17 (2.95”)
(min 4.13” / max 12.87”) (1.30”) (0.67”)
16 70 158 (6.22”)
(0.63”) (2.75”)
Mounting on DIN rail.
1-14
Manual starters LMS25 Enclosures LMZ111 - LMZ112 LMZ113 - LMZ114

with side-mount LMH... contacts
30.8 9 (0.35”)
with LMZ106 emergency stop button
80 95.5
with LMZ106 emergency stop button 1
(1.21”) 85 80 12.5
(3.15”) (3.76”) (3.35”) (3.15”) (0.49”)
(2.95”)
(1.37”)
(1.77”)
(3.15”)
55
75
35
45
80
55 (2.16”)
(2.16”)
(4.13”)
(5.08”)
105
(5.31”)
129
135
4 38
(0.16”) (1.50”)
LMZ106
73.5 LMZ106
LMH... (2.89”)
83
(3.27”)
Cutout
39
(1.53”)
Drilling for 69.5
surface fixing
(0.73”)
(2.74”)
18.5
M25
60
(4.53”)
(2.36”)
115
126 (4.96”)
105 (4.13”)
55
(2.16”)
M4
M4 70
(2.75”)
M4
Connection busbars 45mm/1.77” spacing Terminal block for Safety cover These elements mounted with LMS25...
SMX90 32 - SMX90 33 - SMX90 34 busbar supply SMX90 31 breakers with no auxiliary contacts
SMX90 30
SMX90 30
29 (1.14”)
29 (1.14”)
SMX90 3...
13.5 13.5
45 (1.77”) (0.53”) (0.53”)
SMX90 31
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
Connection busbars 54mm/2.13” spacing Terminal block for Safety cover These elements mounted with LMS25...
SMX90 42 - SMX90 43 - SMX90 44 busbar supply SMX90 31 breakers with LMH... auxiliary contacts
SMX90 30
SMX90 30
29 (1.14”)
29 (1.14”)
SMX90 4...
13.5 13.5
54 (2.13”) (0.53”) (0.53”)
SMX90 31
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
Wiring diagrams
MOTOR PROTECTION CIRCUIT BREAKERS

SM1A…. – SM1B… – SM1C… and SM2A… – SM3A… and LMS25…
Three-phase Singe phase or DC
LINE LINE
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2
LOAD LOAD
1-15
Wiring diagrams
ADD-ON BLOCKS
1 For SM1… types
Front mount auxiliary contacts Side mount auxiliary contacts Side mount undervoltage trip releases Side mount shunt trip release
SMX11 20 SMX11 11 SMX12 11 SMX12 20 SMX12 02 SMX13 11 SMX14... SMX15... SMX16...
13 23 13 21 33 41 33 43 31 41 57 65 D1 D1 O7 C1
U<
U<
14 24 14 22 34 42 34 44 32 42 58 66 D2 D2 O8 C2
For SM2A… and SM3A types

Front mount auxiliary contacts Side mount auxiliary contacts Side mount undervoltage trip releases Side mount shunt trip release
SMX20 11 SMX21 11 SMX22 11 SMX22 20 SMX22 02 SMX23 11 SMX24... SMX25... SMX26...
12 14 13 21 33 41 33 43 31 41 57 65 77 85 D1 D1 O7 C1
U<
U<
11 14 22 34 42 34 44 32 42 58 66 78 86 D2 D2 O8 C2
➊ ➋
Change in event of magnetic and/or thermal tripping.
Change in event of magnetic tripping.
NOTE: During breaker testing, only contacts 57-58 and 65-66 switch.
For LMS25 types Side-mount auxiliary contacts Inside-fitted undervoltage trip and shunt trip releases
LMH 01 LMH 10 LMH 11 LMH 20 LMU... LMA...
The termination of the LMH... 32 34 44 32 44 34
auxiliary contacts has more than D1 C1
one numbering due to the fact that 11 13 13 21 13 23
the block can assume various
mounting positions. U<
The numbering in boldface
indicates when it is mounted on the
left side of the breaker. D2 C2
12 14 14 22 14 24
31 33 43 31 43 33
Technical characteristics
THERMAL TRIP CHARACTERISTIC (AVERAGE TIME)

Three-phase balanced operation Two-phase operation (phase failure/single phasing)
Opening time [s] Opening time [s]
10000 10000
2h 2h
1h 1h
30min 30min
1000 1000
10min 10min
5min 5min
2min 2min
100 100
1min 1min
COLD COLD
10 10
HOT HOT
1 1
0.1 0.1
0.01 0.01
0.001 0.001 x Ie[A]

1.05 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 20 30 40 50 6070 100 x Ie[A] 1.15 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 20 30 40 50 6070 100
1 1.2 1
Tripping times can have a ±20% deviation with respect to the average tripping curve values above.
1-16
TYPE SM1A SM1B SM1C SM2A SM3A LMS25

CONTACT AND RELEASE CHARACTERISTICS 1
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690
Rated impulse voltage Uimp kV 6
Rated frequency Hz 50/60
Maximum rated current A 32 32 32 50 100 25
Number of adjustment ranges N° 5 15 15 3 4 13
Power dissipation W 2.2-9.7 2.2-9.7 2.2-9.7 7.1-20 10-38 2-15
Magnetic tripping A 12 x In 12 x In 12 x In 13 x In 13 x In 12 x In
Mechanical life cycles 100,000 100,000 100,000 25,000 25,000 100,000
Electrical life (Ie max AC3) cycles 100,000 100,000 100,000 50,000 50,000 100,000
Maximum tightening Nm 2.3 2.3 2.3 4.5 6 1.8
torque for terminals lbin 20 20 20 40 53 16
Tool PH2 PH2 PH2 PZ2 Allen 4mm PZ2
Minimum-maximum conductor
section connectable 1 or 2 wires
AWG N° 16-10 16-10 16-10 18-3 10-1/0 14-8
Flexible without lug mm2 1-6 1-6 1-6 0.75-25 10-50 0.75-4
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Temperature Operating °C -20...+60 -20...+60 -20...+60 -20...+70 -20...+70 -25...+60
Storage °C -50...+80 -50...+80 -50...+80 -50...+80 -50...+80 -25...+70
Compensation °C -20...+50 -20...+50 -20...+50 -20...+50 -20...+50 -5...+40
Maximum altitude m 3000
Mounting position Any
Mounting 35mm DIN rail Screw fixing Screw fixing Screw fixing
(IEC/EN 60715) or 35mm DIN rail or DIN rail 35mm or 35mm DIN rail
(IEC/EN 60715) (IEC/EN 60715) (IEC/EN 60715)
or 75mm
(IEC/EN 60715)
When fitting more than one breaker side by side, without leaving space between each to consent free air circulation on the breaker sides, and have simultaneous operation, the thermal trip adjuster must be
positioned at a value 15% higher than the rated motor current.
N.B. PH = Phillips; PZ = Pozidriv; Allen is metric type.
IEC breaking capacity

Type IEC rated short-circuit breaking capacity [kA] Protection fuses when I > Icu
(IEC gL or gG fuses)
230V 400V 500V 690V 230V 400V 500V 690V
Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics [A] [A] [A] [A]
SM1A 40 100 100 50 25 10 5 4 2 100 80 63
SM1A 44…SM1A 56 100 100 50 25 10 5 4 2 125 80 63
SM1B 00…SM1B 20 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
SM1B 24…SM1B 28 100 100 100 100 100 100 8 8 35
SM1B 32 100 100 100 100 100 100 8 8 40
SM1B 36 100 100 100 100 42 21 8 8 63 50
SM1B 40 100 100 25 12.5 10 5 2 2 80 63 50
SM1B 44…SM1B 56 100 100 25 12.5 4 2 2 2 100 80 63
SM1C 00…SM1C 20 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
SM1C 24…SM1C 28 100 100 100 100 100 100 8 8 35
SM1C 32 100 100 100 100 100 100 8 8 40
SM1C 36 100 100 100 100 42 21 8 8 63 50
SM1C 40 100 100 25 12.5 10 5 2 2 80 63 50
SM1C 44…SM1C 56 100 100 25 12.5 4 2 2 2 100 80 63
SM2A 68 - SM2A 72 100 100 50 25 10 5 4 2 160 100 63
SM2A 76 100 100 50 25 10 5 4 2 160 100 80
SM3A 84 100 100 50 25 12 6 6 3 160 100 80
SM3A 88 100 100 50 25 8 4 5 3 160 125 100
SM3A 92 - SM3A 96 100 100 50 25 8 4 5 3 160 125 125
LMS25 016T...LMS25 1V6T 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
LMS252V5T 100 100 100 100 3 3 2.5 2.5 25 20
LMS25 4T 100 100 100 100 3 3 2.5 1.9 35 25
LMS25 6V3T 100 100 100 100 3 2.2 2.5 1.9 50 35
LMS25 10T 100 100 6 3 3 2.2 2.5 1.9 80 50 35
LMS25 16T 6 6 4 2 2.5 1.9 2 1.5 80 80 63 35
LMS25 20T - LMS25 25T 6 4.5 4 2 2.5 1.9 2 1.5 80 80 63 50
Fuses are used only in those cases when the value of short-circuit current at the breaker installation point exceeds the breaking capacity of the breaker.
Fuse not required.
1-17
Page 2-4 Page 2-8
THREE-POLE CONTACTORS FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS

• IEC Ith ratings in AC1 duty at 40°C: 16 to 1600A • IEC Ith ratings in AC1 duty at 40°C:
• IEC Ie ratings in AC3 440V duty: 6 to 630A 20 to 1600A
• IEC Power ratings in AC3 400V duty: • IEC Power ratings in AC1 400V duty:
2.2 to 335kW 14 to 950kW
• UL/CSA ratings: 3 to 500HP at 480V and 600V • UL/CSA general use: 16 to 1000A
• AC, DC and DC low-consumption coil. • AC, DC and DC low-consumption coil.
Page 2-12 Page 2-13
FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS

WITH 2NO+2NC MAIN POWER POLES WITH 4NC MAIN POWER POLES AND FOR
• IEC Ith ratings in AC1 duty at 40°C: PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS
20 to 60A • IEC Ith ratings in AC1 duty at 40°C:
• UL/CSA general use: 20 to 55A 25 to 40A and UL/CSA general use: 20 to 55A
• AC, DC and DC low-consumption coil. for 4NC types
• IEC 125A operational current in DC1 duty at
55°C with 4NO main poles in series for
BFD80 types
• AC, DC and DC low-consumption coil.
Page 2-14 Pag. 2-15
CONTACTORS FOR POWER FACTOR CONTROL RELAYS

CORRECTION • AC, DC and DC low-consumption coil
• With limiting resistors included • Screw or Faston termination
• IEC Power ratings at 400V: 7.5 to 60kvar • 4, 8 or 11 auxiliary contact composition.
• UL/CSA ratings: 9 to 65kvar at 480V;
10 to 70kvar at 600V
• AC control coil.
CONTACTORS 2
Three-pole versions up to 630A

in IEC AC3 duty
Four-pole versions up to 1600A
in IEC AC1 duty
Versions for power factor
correction up to 60kvar at 400VAC
Four-pole versions with 2NO+2NC
or 4NC main poles
Low-consumption versions with
DC control circuit for control relays
and 9-38A contactors in IEC AC3
duty
Versions with AC or DC control
Extensive choice of add-on blocks
and accessories
Certified by primary international
authorities.
SEC. - PAGE
Contactors
Three-pole ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 4
Four-pole .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 8
Four-pole with 2NO and 2NC poles or 4NC poles ................................................................................................................ 2 - 13
Four-pole with 4NO poles for photovoltaic applications ............................................................................................................ 2 - 13
For power factor correction ............................................................................................................................................... 2 - 14
Control relays .................................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 15
Add-on blocks and accessories
For BG series mini-contactors ............................................................................................................................................ 2 - 16
For BF series contactors .................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 18
For B series contactors ...................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 26
Spare parts
AC coils for BF series contactors ........................................................................................................................................ 2 - 28
DC coils for BF series contactors ....................................................................................................................................... 2 - 29
AC/DC coils for B series contactors .................................................................................................................................... 2 - 30
Main contacts for BF series contactors ............................................................................................................................... 2 - 31
Main contacts and arc chutes for B series contactors ......................................................................................................... 2 - 31
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 2 - 32
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 2 - 44
Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 2 - 48 P ROTECTION
Positive (force) guided contacts ......................................................................................................................................... 2 - 57
AND
M OTOR C ONTROL
Contactors
BG series 3 poles 4 poles

mini-contactors IEC Coil in IEC Coil in
Ie (AC3) AC DC Ith (AC1) AC DC
2 BG06 6A –– –– ––
BG09 9A 20A
BGF09 9A 20A
BGP09 9A 20A
Unique features BG12 12A –– –– ––
• Highly conductive auxiliary contacts with four • Three-pole mini-contactors, 6 to 12A IEC AC3
contact points duty / 3 to 7.5HP 480V - 3 to 10HP 600V UL/CSA
• AC and DC versions of same size • Four-pole mini-contactors, 20A IEC AC1 duty
• Quick connect - snap on accessory mounting • Versions with 2NO+2NC main power poles
• Distinct contact status indication • Highly conductive auxiliary contacts
• Up to four auxiliary contacts can be mounted • AC or DC auxiliary supply
• Mechanical interlock only 5mm deep • Low-consumption DC versions
• Positive (force) guided contacts • Screw, faston and rear PCB solder pin
(mechanically-linked per IEC) termination.
BF series 3 poles 4 poles

contactors IEC Coil in IEC Coil in
Ie AC DC DC Ith AC DC DC
(AC3) (AC1)
BF09 9A 25A
BF12 12A 28A –– ––
BF18 18A 32A
BF25 25A –– –– –– ––
BF26 26A 45A
BF32 32A –– –– –– ––
• Three-pole contactors, 9 to 110A IEC AC3 duty / BF38 38A 56A
5 to 75HP 480V - 7.5 to 100HP 600V UL/CSA BF50 50A –– 90A –– ––
Unique features • Four-pole contactors, 25 to 125A in AC1 duty BF65 65A –– 110A ––
• Highly conductive auxiliary contacts with four • Power factor correction contactors, 7.5 to 60kvar
contact points at 400V IEC / 9 to 65kvar at 480V UL/CSA BF80 80A –– 125A ––
• Quick connect - snap on accessory mounting • Types with 2NO+2NC or 4NC main power poles BF95 95A –– –– –– –– ––
• Distinct contact status indication • Types for photovoltaic applications BF110 110A –– –– –– –– ––
• Up to four auxiliary contacts can be mounted • Highly conductive auxiliary contacts
• Mechanical interlock only 5mm deep • AC or DC auxiliary supply Low-consumption version.
• Positive (force) guided contacts • Low-consumption versions for control relays and
(mechanically-linked per IEC) 9-38A contactors in IEC AC3 duty.
B series 3 poles 4 poles

contactors IEC Coil both IEC Coil both
Ie (AC3) AC DC Ith (AC1) AC DC
B115 110A 160A
Unique features
• 3 frame sizes offering 11 different contactors B145 150A 250A
• Coil operates indifferently on AC or DC supply voltage B180 185A 275A
• Coil with low in-rush and holding B250 265A 350A
• Coil removable without disconnecting power wiring
• Red indicator when contactor is energised B310 320A 450A
• Unique right-angle magnet design - limits contact B400 420A 550A
bounce B500 520A 700A
• Safety feature prevents contactor to be energised
without arc chute in place and locked B630 630A 800A
• Convertible auxiliary contact block (2NO + 1NC or B630 1000 1000A
1NO + 2NC), maximum of 4 blocks per contactor B1250 –– 1250A ––
for a total of 12 contacts
• Contactor terminals with bolt, washer and nut • Three-pole contactors, 110 to 630A IEC AC3 duty B1600 –– 1600A ––
• Simple horizontal or vertical interlock • Four-pole contactors, 160 to 1600A IEC AC1 duty For AC1 / general use duty only.
• Positive (force) guided contacts • 100 to 500HP 600V UL/CSA
(mechanically-linked per IEC) • Screw termination.
General information - IEC contactors

Lovato Electric comprehensive line of contactors can be divided in to three basic configurations as illustrated
above. Each of these have unique features but all are designed for long life and have finger-safe protection.
Lovato Electric facilities, where these contactors are manufactured, work under ISO 9001 quality conditions, per
IQNet certification since 1992 and constantly maintained by passing yearly quality assurance audits. The design
and manufacture of the contactors and accessories have taken into consideration the most demanding
requirements of international standards.
Non-reversing and reversing IEC starters

Contactors can be combined with either manual motor starters of the SM series, providing thermal and magnetic
protection up to 100A, or single or three-pole thermal bimetallic overload relays, with or without single-phase
protection up to 420A, to obtain non-reversing or reversing starters. Equipment can be assembled together or
independently mounted through the use of specifically designed accessories.
Non-reversing starter Reversing starter
2-2
Contactors
Contactors BF00, BF09A ... BF38A
THE IDEAL SOLUTION!

4-TERMINAL COIL
A1 A2
Connecting cables can be coupled to 2

the coil both on the line and load
ends of the contactor.
45mm WIDE CONTACTORS
Ratings up to 38A - 18.5kW IEC AC3 /
30HP UL - merely 45mm wide: exceptional
benefit for electric panel dimensions. A1 A2
BUILT-IN SURGE SUPPRESSOR

The BF00 to BF38 contactors with standard voltage
DC coils include a built-in surge suppressor.
WIDE OPERATING RANGE

BF...D contactors are equipped with a wide
LOW-CONSUMPTION COILS
operating range coil and are particularly
The BF...L contactors feature a 2.4W low
useful in applications subject to
consumption.
considerable voltage variations, such as in
This characteristic widely allows their direct control
electric traction railway equipment.
by PLC outputs.
SIDE ADD-ON FOURTH STARTER ASSEMBLY TERMINAL ADAPTABILITY FRONT PROTECTION COVER FOR
POLE Terminals are suitable for every type BREAKER - CONTACTOR
For the 45A and 56A AC1 of cable: flexible, rigid, according to CONNECTIONS
ratings, a side-mount AWG standards and interlocked with
fourth power pole can be any type of cable terminal.
snapped on the three-pole Power pole, auxiliary and coil
contactor. screws can be tightened using one
This solution permits to optimise single type of screwdriver.
inventory.
The assembly and wiring of

electromechanical starters is SNAP-ON INSTALLATION
MECHANICAL INTERLOCK extremely fast and reliable. Versatile
Smaller-size contactors, 9 electrical and mechanical
to 25A in AC3, can be connecting systems provide easy
mechanically and and foolproof assembly of compact
electrically interlocked with starters.
larger-size contactors, 26 to
38A AC3. The front cover, fixed between
The BFX50 01 mechanical interlock breaker and contactor, provide
comprises two built-in NC auxiliary protection to the connections.
contacts to make the electrical EFFORTLESS THERMAL
interlock as well. OVERLOAD RELAY LINK
IP20 CONNECTION SECURITY

35mm DIN RAIL MOUNTING AND Mounting and removal of the add-
FIXING on auxiliary contacts and
accessories, along with BF09 to
BF38 AC contactor coil replacement
are quick and easy operations and
are done with no tools.
During the connection of the

The ease of terminal access and
thermal overload relay to the
space is combined with IP20 finger
Contactor mounting on and contactor, its auxiliary contact is RUBBER PAD INSERT FOR NO DIN safety, to prevent touching of live
removal from a 35mm DIN rail are simultaneously linked to the RAIL SLIDING parts.
tool-less operations and are done contactor coil terminal rigid
by simply applying pressure on the connector.
contactor. The complete overload relay fixing
is obtained with one single
operation and without other
connections.
A rubber insert prevents the

contactors from sliding on the
35mm DIN rail even when out of
tolerance or mounted vertically.
2-3
Contactors
Three-pole contactors with AC control circuit
BG06 A-BG12 A BF09 A-BF25 A BF26 A-BF38 A BF50-BF110 B115-B180 B250-B400
Three-phase motor control in AC3 duty UL/CSA details

Order code IEC operating current Maximum IEC power at 55°C (AC3)
Maximum UL/CSA horsepower ratings
Ith (AC1) Ie (AC3) Single phase Three phase
AC coil 40°C 55°C 70°C 440V at 55°C 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V 1000V 120V 240V 200V 240V 480V 600V
[A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP]
11 BG06 01 A 16 14 12 6 1.5 2.2 2.4 2.5 3 3 –– 1
/3 1 11/2 2 3 3
11 BG06 10 A (60°C)
11 BG09 01 A 20 18 15 9 2.2 4 4.3 4.5 5 5 –– 1
/2 11/2 2 3 5 5
11 BG09 10 A (60°C)
11 BGF09 01 A 20 18 15 9 2.2 4 4.3 4.5 5 5 –– 1
/2 11/2 2 3 5 5
11 BGF09 10 A (60°C)
11 BGP09 01 A 20 18 15 9 2.2 4 4.3 4.5 5 –– –– 1
/2 11/2 2 3 5 ––
11 BGP09 10 A (60°C)
11 BG12 01 A 12 20 18 15 12 3.2 5.7 6.2 5.5 5 5 –– 1
/2 11/2 3 3 71/2 10
11 BG12 10 A 12 (60°C)
BF09 01 A 12 25 20 18 9 2.2 4.2 4.5 4.8 5.5 7.5 –– 3
/4 2 3 3 5 71/2
BF09 10 A 12
BF12 01 A 12 28 23 20 12 3.2 5.7 6.2 6.2 7.5 10 –– 1 2 5 5 71/2 10
BF12 10 A 12
BF18 01 A 12 32 26 23 18 4 7.5 9 9 10 10 –– 1 3 5 5 10 15
BF18 10 A 12
BF25 01 A 32 26 23 25 7 12.5 13.4 13.4 15 11 –– 2 3 71/2 71/2 15 15
BF25 10 A
BF26 00 A 12 45 36 32 26 7.3 13 14 14 15.6 18.5 –– 2 5 71/2 71/2 15 20
BF32 00 A 12 56 45 40 32 8.8 16 17 17 20 22 –– 3 71/2 10 10 20 25
BF38 00 A 56 (60) 45 (48) 40 (42) 38 11 18.5 18.5 18.5 20 22 –– 3 71/2 10 15 30 30
11 BF50 00 12 90 80 65 50 14.3 25 27.2 27.2 33.2 43.5 25 5 10 10 15 30 40
11 BF65 00 12 110 90 70 65 18.5 33 36 36 45.3 59.7 30 –– –– 20 25 50 60
11 BF80 00 125 100 80 80 23 41 46 46 56 74 37 –– –– 25 30 60 75
11 BF95 00 125 100 80 95 27.6 50 55 55 56 74 45 –– –– 30 30 60 75
11 BF110 00 125 100 80 110 33 61 66 70 59 80 45 –– –– 30 40 75 100
11 B115 00 160 150 110 110 33 61 66 70 80 100 63 –– –– 30 40 75 100
11 B145 00 250 235 190 150 46 80 88 93 100 120 75 –– –– 50 50 100 125
11 B180 00 275 250 200 185 57 100 108 115 123 144 103 –– –– 60 75 150 150
11 B250 00 350 300 250 265 83 140 155 164 176 212 156 –– –– 75 100 200 250
11 B310 00 450 370 300 320 100 170 188 200 213 256 180 –– –– 100 125 250 300
11 B400 00 550 430 360 420 130 225 247 263 271 352 208 –– –– 125 150 350 400
11 B500 00 700 550 500 520 156 290 306 328 367 416 312 –– –– 150 11 200 11 400 11 450 11
11 B630 00 800 640 540 630 198 335 368 368 368 440 368 –– –– 200 11 250 11 500 11 500 11
11 B630 1000 00 1000 850 700 –– For AC1/Resistive duty only, see page 2-8. –– –– –– –– –– ––
11 B1250 24 1250 1050 880 –– For AC1/Resistive duty only, see page 2-8. No UL –– –– –– –– ––
11 B1600 24 1600 1360 1120 –– For AC1/Resistive duty only, see page 2-8. No UL –– –– –– –– ––
Complete order code with coil voltage digit or with voltage digit followed by 60 (if 60Hz). Indicate rated voltage of the mechanical latch, preceded by the letter C if in DC. Available voltages are:
Standard voltages are as follows: – AC 50/60Hz 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415V indicate 380
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V – DC 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240V indicate 220.
-- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 / 575 60 (V). Example: 11 B145L 00 110 220 for contactor B145 without auxiliary contacts, with
Example: 11 BG06 10 A230 for mini-contactor BG06, three poles, with one NO contact and 110-125VAC/DC coil and mechanical latch powered at 220-240VAC.
230VAC 50/60Hz coil. G495 mechanical latch cannot be mounted.
11 BG06 10 A460 60 for mini-contactor BG06 with one NO contact and 460VAC 60Hz Complete the order code with the digit of the coil voltage. For 110-125VAC (50/60Hz) indicate 110 or
coil. 220-240VAC (50/60Hz) indicate 220.
The coil of the contactor can be powered indifferently in AC or DC. Complete the order code only with the Example: 11 B1250 24 110 for contactor B1250, three poles, with 2NO+4NC auxiliary contacts and 110-
digit of the coil voltage. Standard voltages are: 125VAC 50/60Hz coil.
-- AC/DC 24 / 48 / 60 / 110-125 (indicate 110) / 220-240 (indicate 220) / 380-415 (indicate 380) / Maximum voltage is limited at 300V for UL. For certified type up to 600V, consult Customer Service for
440-480V (indicate 440). information; see contact details on inside front cover.
Example: 11 B145 00 110 for contactor B145, three poles, without auxiliary contacts and with
For voltages 024 / 230 / 400VAC 50-60Hz: 10 pieces/package.
110-125VAC/DC coil. For all other voltages: 1 piece/package.
The 24VAC/DC voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors. Highly conductive auxiliary contact.
Other voltages available on request. For use at this other current value, a 16mm2 cable, headed with a fork terminal, must be used.
If predisposed for mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…SL.00 11 No UL/CSA ratings; data given for indication and reference purposes only.
If already fitted with mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…L.00 . 12 Definite-purpose (DP) contactors are available. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact
details on inside front cover.
Add-on blocks / Accessories Spare parts Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
2-4 pages 2-16 to 27 pages 2-28 to 31 pages 2-32 to 38 page 2-44 pages 2-48 to 71
Contactors
Three-pole contactors with AC control circuit

Certifications obtained:
Register of
shipping
UL UL R L 2
C E C I R
Canada S A C N O
Type USA USA A C C A S
BG06 A
B500-B630
B630 1000 B1250-B1600 BG09 A
BG12 A 12
UL/CSA UL/CSA Short circuit Type of terminal Incorporated Quantity Weight BGF09 A
General Fuse class current RMS auxiliary per BGP... A
(purpose) use sym. 600VAC contacts pkg BF09 A 12
[A] Type/[A] [kA] UL/CSA NO NC n° [kg] BF12 A 12
16 K5/30 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 10 0.180 BF18 A 12
1 –– 10 0.180 BF25 A
20 K5/30 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 10 0.180 BF26 A 12
1 –– 10 0.180 BF32 A 12
20 K5/30 5 Faston –– 1 10 0.180 BF38 A
1 –– 10 0.180 BF50 12
20 K5/30 5 Rear PCB solder pin –– 1 10 0.197 BF65 12
1 –– 10 0.197 BF80
20 K5/30 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 10 0.180 BF95
1 –– 10 0.180 BF110
25 RK5/60 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 1 0.367 B115
1 ––
0.367 B145
28 RK5/70 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 1 0.367 B180
1 ––
0.367 B250
32 RK5/80 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 1 0.367 B310
1 ––
0.367 B400
32 RK5/100 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 1 0.367 B500
1 ––
0.367 B630
45 RK5/100 5 Clamp-screw –– –– 1 0.432 B630 1000
55 RK5/125 5 Clamp-screw –– –– 1 0.432 B1250
55 RK5/150 5 Clamp-screw –– –– 1 0.432 B1600
90 RK5/200 5 Lug-clamp 13 –– –– 1 1.350
Certified products.
110 RK5/225 10 Lug-clamp 13 –– –– 1 1.350
UL - UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93602) for BG…
125 RK5/250 10 Lug-clamp 13 –– –– 1 1.360 BF110 types indicated, as Motor Controllers – Contactors, except for
125 RK5/250 10 Lug-clamp 13 –– –– 1 1.360 BGP09… types which are UL Recognized, for USA and Canada
( File E93602 – Component - Products having this type of
125 RK5/250 10 Lug-clamp 13 –– –– 1 1.360 marking are intended for use as components of complete
workshop-assembled equipment).
160 RK5/500 5 Screw-nut –– –– 1 5.290 BGP is UL rated up to 300V; for type with rating up to 600V,
250 RK5/500 5 Screw-nut –– –– 1 5.400 consult Customer Service for information – see contact details
on inside front cover.
275 RK5/500 10 Screw-nut –– –– 1 5.400 UL Listed for USA only (File E93602) for B115…B400 types
350 L/800 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 9.575 indicated, as Motor Controllers – Contactors.
UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E172189) for B500...
450 L/800 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 9.575 B630 1000 and B500 SL... B630 SL types as Industrial Control
Switches.
550 L/800 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 9.575 CSA - BF09…BF95 and B115…B400 contactors are also CSA certified, for
700 L/1200 11 18 11 Screw-nut –– –– 1 18.000 Canada only (File 54332).
In addition, BF12…, BF25…, BF38… and BF65… types are CSA
800 L/1500 11 18 11 Screw-nut –– –– 1 18.620 certified as “Elevator Equipment” (File 54332, class 2411).
1000 L/1500 11 18 11 Screw-nut –– –– 1 21.400 See technical characteristics on page 2-63 for BF12-BF38 and page
2-65 for BF65.
No UL –– –– Screw-nut 2 4 1 48.000
No UL –– –– Screw-nut 2 4 1 50.000

13 IEC/EN 60947-1 designation: Pillar terminal. UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14 for all types; UL 60947-1,
UL 60947-4-1A, CSA C22.2 n° 60947-1, CSA C22.2
n° 60947-4-1 for B115... B630 1000 types.
Plastic materials are compliant with standards IEC/EN 60335;
for all BF09…BF38 versions only, add suffix V260 to the
standard product order code.
Example: BF09 10 A230V260 for BF09, three poles, with one
NO contact and 230V 50/60Hz coil with compliant plastic
materials.
pages 2-16 to 27 pages 2-28 to 31 pages 2-32 to 38 page 2-44 pages 2-48 to 71 2-5
Contactors
Three-pole contactors with DC control circuit
BG06 D-BG12 D BF09 D-BF25 D BF26 D-BF38 D BF50 C-BF110 C B115-B180 B250-B400
BG09 L BF09 L-BF25 L BF26 L-BF38 L
Three-phase motor control UL/CSA details
Order code IEC operating current Maximum IEC power at 55°C (AC3)Maximum UL/CSA horsepower ratings
DC coil DC coil Ith (AC1) Ie (AC3) Single phase Three phase
440V
Low consumption 40°C 55°C 70°C at 55°C 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V 1000V 120V 240V 200V 240V 480V 600V
[A] [A] [A] [A] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP]
11 BG06 01 D –– 16 14 12 6 1.5 2.2 2.4 2.5 3 3 –– 1
/3 1 11/2 2 3 3
11 BG06 10 D –– (60°C)
11 BG09 01 D 11 BG09 01 L 20 18 15 9 2.2 4 4.3 4.5 5 5 –– 1
/2 11/2 2 3 5 5
11 BG09 10 D 11 BG09 10 L (60°C)
11 BGF09 01 D 11 BGF09 01 L 20 18 15 9 2.2 4 4.3 4.5 5 5 –– 1
/2 11/2 2 3 5 5
11 BGF09 10 D 11 BGF09 10 L (60°C)
11 BGP09 01 D –– 20 18 15 9 2.2 4
4.3
4.5
5
–– –– 1
/2 11/2 2 3 5
––
11 BGP09 10 D –– (60°C)
11 BG12 01 D 12 –– 20 18 15 12 3.2 5.7 6.2 5.5 5 5 –– 1
/2 11/2 3 3 71/2 10
11 BG12 10 D 12 –– (60°C)
BF09 01 D 12 BF09 01 L 12 25 20 18 9 2.2 4.2 4.5 4.8 5.5 7.5 –– 3
/4 2 3 3 5 71/2
BF09 10 D 12 BF09 10 L 12
BF12 01 D 12 BF12 01 L 12 28 23 20 12 3.2 5.7 6.2 6.2 7.5 10 –– 1 2 5 5 71/2 10
BF12 10 D 12 BF12 10 L 12
BF18 01 D 12 BF18 01 L 12 32 26 23 18 4 7.5 9 9 10 10 –– 1 3 5 5 10 15
BF18 10 D 12 BF18 10 L 12
BF25 01 D BF25 01 L 32 26 23 25 7 12.5 13.4 13.4 15 11 –– 2 3 71/2 71/2 15 15
BF25 10 D BF25 10 L
BF26 00 D 12 BF26 00 L 12 45 36 32 26 7.3 13 14 14 15.6 18.5 –– 2 5 71/2 71/2 15 20
BF32 00 D 12 BF32 00 L 12 56 45 40 32 8.8 16 17 17 20 22 –– 3 71/2 10 10 20 25
BF38 00 D BF38 00 L 56 (60) 45 (48) 40 (42) 38 11 18.5 18.5 18.5 20 22 –– 3 71/2 10 15 30 30
11 BF50 C 00 12 –– 90 80 65 50 14.3 25 27.2 27.2 33.2 43.5 25 5 10 10 15 30 40
11 BF65 C 00 12 –– 110 90 70 65 18.5 33 36 36 45.3 59.7 30 –– –– 20 25 50 60
11 BF80 C 00 –– 125 100 80 80 23 41 46 46 56 74 37 –– –– 25 30 60 75
11 BF95 C 00 –– 125 100 80 95 27.6 50 55 55 56 74 45 –– –– 30 30 60 75
11 BF110 C 00 –– 125 100 80 110 33 61 66 70 59 80 45 –– –– 30 40 75 100
11 B115 00 –– 160 150 110 110 33 61 66 70 80 100 63 –– –– 30 40 75 100
11 B145 00 –– 250 235 190 150 46 80 88 93 100 120 75 –– –– 50 50 100 125
11 B180 00 –– 275 250 200 185 57 100 108 115 123 144 103 –– –– 60 75 150 150
11 B250 00 –– 350 300 250 265 83 140 155 164 176 212 156 –– –– 75 100 200 250
11 B310 00 –– 450 370 300 320 100 170 188 200 213 256 180 –– –– 100 125 250 300
11 B400 00 –– 550 430 360 420 130 225 247 263 271 352 208 –– –– 125 150 350 400
11 B500 00 –– 700 550 500 520 156 290 306 328 367 416 312 –– –– 150 11 200 11 400 11 450 11
11 B630 00 –– 800 640 540 630 198 335 368 368 368 440 368 –– –– 200 11 250 11 500 11 500 11
11 B630 1000 00 –– 1000 850 700 –– For AC1/Resisteve duty only, see page 2-8. –– –– –– –– –– ––
Complete order code with coil voltage digit. Example: 11 B145 00 110 for contactor B145, three poles, without auxiliary contacts and with
For BG09…D 24VDC version complete with built-in surge suppressor, add suffix V120 to the standard 110-125VAC/DC coil.
order code. The 24VAC/DC voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors.
The BF09-BF38D types already have a standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor). Other voltages available on request.
Standard voltages are as follows: If predisposed for mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…SL.00 .
– DC 012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220V. If already fitted with mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…L.00 .
Example: 11 BG06 10 D012 for mini-contactor BG06, three poles, with one NO contact and 12VDC coil. Indicate rated voltage of the mechanical latch, preceded by the letter C if in DC.
11 BG09 10 D024 V120 for mini-contactor BG09, three poles, with one NO contact and 24VDC Standard voltages are:
coil, complete with built-in TVS (diode) suppressor. – AC 50/60Hz 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415V
Low-consumption version. indicate 380
No add-on auxiliary contacts or mechanical interlock can be mounted on BG... type contactors. – DC 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240V indicate 220.
Complete order code with coil voltage digit. Example: 11 B145L 00 110 C48 for contactor B145, three poles, without auxiliary contacts, with
The BF09-BF38L types already have a standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor). 110-125VAC/DC coil and mechanical latch powered at 48VDC.
Standard voltages are as follows: G495 mechanical latch cannot be mounted.
– DC 024 / 048V.
Maximum voltage is limited at 300V for UL. For certified type up to 600V, consult Customer Service for
Example: 11 BG09 01 L024 for mini-contactor BG09, three poles, with one NC contact and 24VDC information; see contact details on inside front cover.
low-consumption coil. Highly conductive auxiliary contact.
Maximum combinations of add-on blocks are given on page 3-19. For use at this other current value, a 16mm2 cable, headed with a fork terminal, must be used.
The coil of the contactor can be powered indifferently in AC or DC. Complete the order code only with the 11 No UL/CSA ratings; data given for indication and reference purposes only.
digit of the coil voltage. 12 Definite-purpose (DP) contactors are available. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact
Standard voltages are: details on inside front cover.
– AC/DC 24 / 48 / 60 / 110-125 (indicate 110) / 220-240 (indicate 220) / 380-415 (indicate 380) /
440-480V (indicate 440).
Contactors
Three-pole contactors with DC control circuit

Register of
shipping
UL UL R L 2
C E C I R
Canada S A C N O
Type USA USA A C C A S
BG06 D
B500-B630
B630 1000 BG09 D
BG12 D
UL/CSA UL/CSA Short circuit Type of terminal Incorporated Quantity Weight BGF09 D
General Fuse class current RMS auxiliary per BGP09 D

(purpose) use sym. 600VAC contacts pkg BF09 D - BF09 L
BF12 D - BF12 L
[A] Type/[A] [kA] UL/CSA NO NC n° [kg]
BF18 D - BF18 L
16 K5/30 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 10 0.214
BF25 D - BF25 L
1 –– 10 0.214
BF26 D - BF26 L
20 K5/30 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 10 0.214
BF32 D - BF32 L
1 –– 10 0.214
BF38 D - BF38 L
20 K5/30 5 Faston –– 1 10 0.210
BF50 C
1 –– 10 0.210
BF65 C
20 K5/30 5 Rear PCB solder pin –– 1 10 0.240
BF80 C
1 –– 10 0.240
BF95 C
20 K5/30 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 10 0.214
BF110 C
1 –– 10 0.214
B115
25 RK5/60 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 1 0.494
B145
1 –– 1 0.494
B180
28 RK5/70 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 1 0.494
B250
1 –– 1 0.494
B310
32 RK5/80 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 1 0.494
B400
1 –– 1 0.494
B500
32 RK5/100 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 1 0.494
B630
1 –– 1 0.494
B630 1000
45 RK5/100 5 Clamp-screw –– –– 1 0.559
Certified products.
55 RK5/125 5 Clamp-screw –– –– 1 0.559
55 RK5/150 5 Clamp-screw –– –– 1 0.559 UL - UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus File E93602) for BG…BF110
types indicated, as Motor Controllers – Contactors, except for
90 RK5/200 5 Lug-clamp 13 –– –– 1 1.885 BGP09… types which are UL Recognized, for USA and Canada
( File E93602 – Component). Products having this type of
110 RK5/225 5 Lug-clamp 13 –– –– 1 1.885 marking are intended for use as components of complete
125 RK5/250 10 Lug-clamp 13 –– –– 1 1.895 workshop-assembled equipment.
BGP is UL rated up to 300V; for type with rating up to 600V,
125 RK5/250 10 Lug-clamp 13 –– –– 1 1.895 consult Customer Service for information – see contact details
125 RK5/250 10 Lug-clamp 13 –– –– 1 1.895 on inside front cover.
UL Listed for USA only (File E93602) for B115…B400 types
160 RK5/500 10 Screw-nut –– –– 1 5.290 indicated, as Motor Controllers – Contactors.
UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E172189) for B500...
250 RK5/500 10 Screw-nut –– –– 1 5.400 B630 1000 and B500 SL... B630 SL types as Industrial Control
275 RK5/500 10 Screw-nut –– –– 1 5.400 Switches.
CSA - BF09…BF95 and B115…B400 contactors are also CSA certified, for
350 L/800 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 9.635 Canada only (File 54332).
450 L/800 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 9.635 In addition, BF12…, BF25…, BF38… and BF65… types are CSA
certified as “Elevator Equipment” (File 54332, class 2411).
500 L/800 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 9.635 See technical characteristics on page 2-63 for BF12-BF38 and page
2-65 for BF65.
700 13 L/1200 11 18 11 Screw-nut –– –– 1 18.060
800 13 L/1500 11 18 11 Screw-nut –– –– 1 18.620
1000 13 L/1500 11 18 11 Screw-nut –– –– 1 21.400 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14 for all types; UL 60947-1,

13 IEC/EN 60947-1 designation: Pillar terminal. UL 60947-4-1A, CSA C22.2 n° 60947-1, CSA C22.2
n° 60947-4-1 for B115... B630 1000 types.
Example: BF09 10 D024 V260 for BF09, three poles, with one
NO contact and 24VDC coil with compliant plastic materials.
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with AC control circuit
BG09 T4 A BF09 A T4A-BF18 T4 A BF26 T4 A-BF38 T4 A BF65 40 - BF80 40 B115 4-B180 4 B250 4-B400 4
Resistive load control UL/CSA details

Order code IEC operating current Maximum IEC power at 40°C (AC1) UL/CSA
Ith (AC1) General
AC coil 40°C 55°C 70°C 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V 1000V (purpose) use
[A] [A] [A] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [A]
11 BG09 T4 A 20 18 15 (60°C) 8 14 14 15 16 22 –– 20
11 BGF09 T4 A 20 18 15 (60°C) 8 14 14 15 16 22 –– 20
11 BGP09 T4 A 20 18 15 (60°C) 8 14 14 15 16 –– –– 20
BF09 T4 A 25 20 18 9.5 16 17 18 21 27 –– 25
BF12 T4 A 28 23 20 10 18 19 20 23 32 –– 28
BF18 T4 A 32 26 23 12 21 22 23 26 36 –– 32
BF26 T4 A
45 36 32 17 30 31 33 37 51 –– 45
BF38 T4 A
56 (60) 45 (48) 40 (42) 21 36 38 40 45 62 –– 55
11 BF50 40 90 80 65 34 59 64 65 74 98 –– 90
11 BF65 40 110 90 70 41 72 78 80 95 112 –– 110
11 BF80 40 125 100 80 47 82 90 90 108 128 –– 125
11 B115 4 00 160 150 110 57 98 107 115 129 173 250 160
11 B145 4 00 250 235 190 91 150 162 180 196 270 390 250
11 B180 4 00 275 250 200 95 160 177 200 213 298 430 275
11 B250 4 00 350 300 250 124 214 234 255 282 380 560 350
11 B310 4 00 450 370 300 158 270 293 325 350 488 700 450
11 B400 4 00 550 430 360 200 345 377 400 452 598 870 550
11 B500 4 00 700 550 500 252 438 478 500 575 755 1100 700
11 B630 4 00 800 640 540 288 500 545 580 655 860 1250 800
11 B630 1000 4 00 1000 850 700 350 600 630 725 750 1000 1600 1000
11 B1250 4 24 1250 1050 880 480 830 900 905 1100 1450 2000 No UL/CSA
11 B1600 4 24 1600 1360 1120 550 950 1000 1160 1200 1650 2500 No UL/CSA
Complete order code with coil voltage digit or voltage digit followed by 60 if 60Hz. G495 mechanical latch cannot be mounted.
Standard voltages are as follows: Complete the order code with the digit of the coil voltage. For 110-125VAC 50/60 Hz indicate 110 or
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V 220-240VDC 50/60 Hz indicate 220.
-- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 / 575 60 (V). Example: 11 B1250 4 24 110 for contactor B1250, four poles, with 2NO+4NC auxiliary contacts and
Example: 11 BG09 T4 A230 for mini-contactor BG09, four poles, with 230VAC 50/60Hz coil. 110-125VAC/DC 50/60Hz coil.
11 BG09 T4 A460 60 for mini-contactor BG09, four poles, with 460VAC 60Hz coil. Maximum voltage is limited at 300V for UL. For certified type up to 600V. Consult Customer Service for
The coil of the contactor can be powered indifferently in AC or DC. Complete the order code only with the information; see contact details on inside front cover.
digit of the coil voltage. Standard voltages are:
Whenever the BF26 T4 or BF38 T4 types need to be mechanically interlocked with either the BFX50 00 or
-- AC/DC 24 / 48 / 60 / 110-125 (indicate 110) / 220-240 (indicate 220) / 380-415 (indicate 380) / BFX50 01, the add-on fourth pole of one of the contactors needs to be removed from the right side and
440-480V (indicate 440). fitted on the left side.
Example: 11 B145 4 00 110 for contactor B145, four poles, without auxiliary contacts and with For use at this other current value, a 16mm2 cable, headed with a fork terminal, must be used.
110-125VAC/DC coil. Definite-purpose (DP) contactors are available. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact
The 24VAC/DC voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors. details on inside front cover.
Other voltages available on request.
If predisposed for mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…4SL 00 .
If already fitted with mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…4L.00 .
Indicate rated voltage of the mechanical latch, preceded by the letter C if in DC.
Standard voltages are:
-- AC 50/60Hz 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415V indicate 380
-- DC 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240V indicate 220.
Example: 11 B145 4L 00 110 C220 for contactor B145, four poles, without auxiliary contacts, with
110-125VAC/DC coil and mechanical latch powered at 220-240VDC.
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with AC control circuit
IEC utilisation current with poles in parallel

If the poles of the contactors are arranged in parallel, the
operating current is the one indicated in the table multiplied
by the K factor given below, which account for the unequal
distribution of the current in the various poles. 2
To limit distribution inequality, it is advisable to use
paralleling links (see pages 2-16, 2-21 and 2-26).
2 POLES in parallel: K = 1.6

B500 4-B630 4 3 POLES in parallel: K = 2.2
B630 1000 4 B1250-B1600 4 4 POLES in parallel: K = 2.8
UL/CSA Short circuit Type of terminal Incorporated auxiliary Quantity Weight Certifications obtained:
Fuse current RMS contacts per
class sym. 600VAC pkg UL UL R
Type / [A] [kA] UL/CSA NO NC n° [kg] C E C I
Canada S A C N
K5 / 30 5 Clamp-screw none none 10 0.180 Type USA USA A C C A
K5 / 30 5 Faston none none 10 0.180 BG09 T4 A
K5 / 30 5 Rear PCB solder pin none none 10 0.197 BGF09 T4 A
RK5 / 60 5 Clamp-screw none none 1 0.367 BGP09 T4 A
RK5 / 70 5 Clamp-screw none none 1 0.367 BF09 T4 A
RK5 / 200 5 Lug-clamp 11 none none 1 1.554 BF38 T4 A
RK5 / 225 10 Lug-clamp 11 none none 1 1.554 BF50 40
RK5 / 250 10 Lug-clamp 11 none none 1 1.570 BF65 40
RK5 / 500 10 Screw-nut none none 1 6.220 BF80 40
RK5 / 500 10 Screw-nut none none 1 6.340 B115 4
RK5 / 500 10 Screw-nut none none 1 6.340 B145 4
L/800 18 Screw-nut none none 1 11.195 B180 4
L/1200 12 18 12 Screw-nut none none 1 20.910 B400 4
–– –– Screw-nut 2 4 1 57.500 B630 1000 4
–– –– Screw-nut 2 4 1 58.400 B1250 4

11 IEC/EN 60947-1 designation: Pillar terminal. B1600 4

12 No UL/CSA ratings; data given for indication and reference purposes only.
Certified products.
UL - UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus File E93602) for BG…BF110
BGP09… types which are UL Recognized, for USA and Canada
marking are intended for use as components of complete
workshop-assembled equipment.
consult Customer Service for information – see contact details
indicated, as Motor Controllers – Contactors.
UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E172189) for
B500 4... B630 1000 4 and B500 4SL... B630 4SL types as
Industrial Control Switches.
Canada only (File 54332).
See technical characteristics on page 2-63 for BF12-BF38 and page
2-65 for BF65.

UL 60947-4-1A, CSA C22.2 n° 60947-1, CSA C22.2
n° 60947-4-1 for B115 4... B630 1000 4.
Example: BF09 T4 A230 V260 for BF09, four poles, 230V
50/60Hz coil with compliant plastic materials).
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with DC control circuit
BG09 T4 D BF09 T4 D-BF18 T4 D BF26 T4 D-BF38 T4 D BF50C 40-BF80C 40 B115 4-B180 4 B250 4-B400 4
BF09 T4 L-BF18 T4 L BF26 T4 L-BF38 T4 L
Resistive load control UL/CSA details
Order code IEC operating current Maximum IEC power at 40°C (AC1) UL/CSA
DC coil DC coil Ith (AC1) General
Low consumption 40°C 55°C 70°C 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V 1000V (purpose) use
[A] [A] [A] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [A]
11 BG09 T4 D –– 20 18 15 (60°C) 8 14 14 15 16 22 –– 20
11 BGF09 T4 D –– 20 18 15 (60°C) 8 14 14 15 16 22 –– 20
11 BGP09 T4 D –– 20 18 15 (60°C) 8 14
14
15
16
–– –– 20
BF09 T4 D BF09 T4 L 25 20 18 9.5 16 17 18 21 27 –– 25
BF18 T4 D BF18 T4 L 32 26 23 12 21 22 23 26 36 –– 32
BF26 T4 D BF26 T4 L 45 36 32 17 30 31 33 37 51 –– 45
BF38 T4 D BF38 T4 L 56 (60) 45 (48) 40 (42) 21 26 38 40 45 62 –– 55
11 BF65C 40 –– 110 90 70 41 72 78 80 95 112 –– 110
11 BF80C 40 –– 125 100 80 47 82 90 90 108 128 –– 125
11 B115 4 00 –– 160 150 110 57 98 107 115 129 173 250 160
11 B145 4 00 –– 250 235 190 91 150 162 180 196 270 390 250
11 B180 4 00 –– 275 250 200 95 160 177 200 213 298 430 275
11 B250 4 00 –– 350 300 250 124 214 234 255 282 380 560 350
11 B310 4 00 –– 450 370 300 158 270 293 325 350 488 700 450
11 B400 4 00 –– 550 430 360 200 345 377 400 452 598 870 550
11 B500 4 00 –– 700 550 500 252 438 478 500 575 755 1100 700
11 B630 4 00 –– 800 640 540 288 500 545 580 655 860 1250 800
11 B630 1000 4 00 –– 1000 850 700 350 600 630 725 750 1000 1600 1000
Complete order code with coil voltage digit. If predisposed for mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…4SL 00 .
The BF09-BF38D types already have a standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor). If already fitted with mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…4L.00 .
Standard voltages are as follows: Indicate rated voltage of the mechanical latch, preceded by the letter C if in DC.
– DC 012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220VDC. Standard voltages are:
Example: 11 BG09 T4 D012 for mini-contactor BG09, four poles, with 12VDC coil. – AC 50/60Hz 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415V indicate 380
Low consumption version. Complete the order code with coil voltage digit. – DC 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240V indicate 220.
The BF09-BF38L types already have a standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor). Example: 11 B145L 00 110 C48 for contactor B145, four poles, without auxiliary contacts, with
Standard voltages are as follows: 110-125VAC/DC coil and mechanical latch powered at 48VDC.
– DC 024 / 048V G495 mechanical latch cannot be mounted.
Example: BF09 T4 L024 for contactor BF09, four poles, with 24VDC low-consumption coil.
Maximum voltage is limited at 300V for UL. For certified type up to 600V consult Customer Service for
Maximum combinations add-on blocks are page 2-19. information; see contact details on inside front cover.
The coil of the contactor can be powered indifferently in AC or DC. Complete the order code only with the For use at this other current value, a 16mm2 cable, headed with a fork terminal, must be used.
digit of the coil voltage.
-- AC/DC 24 / 48 / 60 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415 indicate 380 /
440-480V indicate 440.
Example: 11 B145 00 110 for contactor B145, four poles, without auxiliary contacts and with
110-125VAC/DC coil.
The 24VAC/DC voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors.
Other voltages available on request.
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with DC control circuit
IEC utilisation current with poles in parallel

If the poles of the contactors are arranged in parallel, the
operating current is the one indicated in the table multiplied
by the K factor given below, which account for the unequal
distribution of the current in the various poles. 2
To limit distribution inequality, it is advisable to use
paralleling links (see pages 2-16, 2-21 and 2-26).
2 POLES in parallel: K = 1.6

B500 4-B630 4 3 POLES in parallel: K = 2.2
B630 1000 4 4 POLES in parallel: K = 2.8
UL/CSA Fuse Short circuit Type of terminal Incorporated auxiliary Quantity Weight Certifications obtained:
class RMS sym. contacts per
600VAC pkg UL UL R
Type / [A] [kA] UL/CSA NO NC n° [kg] C E C I
Canada S A C N
K5 / 30 5 Clamp-screw –– –– 10 0.220 Type USA USA A C C A
K5 / 30 5 Faston –– –– 10 0.220 BG09 T4 D
K5 / 30 5 Rear PCB solder pin –– –– 10 0.242 BGF09 T4 D
RK5 / 60 5 Clamp-screw –– –– 1 0.498 BGP09 T4 D
RK5 / 80 5 Clamp-screw –– –– 1 0.498 BF09 T4 D - BF09 T4 L
RK5 / 225 5 Lug-clamp 11 –– –– 1 2.035 BF38 T4 D - BF38 T4 L
RK5 / 250 5 Lug-clamp 11 –– –– 1 2.100 BF65 C 40
RK5 / 500 10 Screw-nut –– –– 1 6.220 BF80 C 40
RK5 / 500 10 Screw-nut –– –– 1 6.340 B115 4
RK5 / 500 10 Screw-nut –– –– 1 6.340 B145 4
L/800 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 11.195 B180 4
L/800 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 11.195 B250 4
L/800 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 11.195 B310 4
L/1200 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 20.910 B400 4
L/1200 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 21.880 B500 4
L/1500 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 25.600 B630 4
No UL/CSA ratings; data given for indication and reference purposes only. B630 1000 4

11 IEC/EN 60947-1 designation: Pillar terminal.
Certified products.
UL - UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus File E93602) for BG…BF110
BGP09… types which are UL Recognized, for USA and Canada
marking are intended for use as components of complete
consult Customer Service for information – see contact details
indicated, as Motor Controllers – Contactors.
UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E172185) for
B500 4... B630 1000 4 and B500 4SL... B630 4SL types as
Industrial Control Switches.
Canada only (File 54332).
See technical characteristics on page 2-63 for BF12-BF38 and page
2-65 for BF65.

UL 60947-4-1A, CSA C22.2 n° 60947-1, CSA C22.2
n° 60947-4-1 for B115 4... B630 1000 4.
Example: BF09 T4 D024 V260 for BF09, four poles, 24VDC coil
with compliant plastic materials).
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with control circuit: AC and DC
Mini-contactor Order code IEC rated conventional Qty Wt Operational characteristics

four power poles, free air thermal current Ith per
pkg
2 NO and 2 NC 40°C 55°C 60°C
2 BG series [A] [A] [A] n° [kg] Type UL/CSA Protection fuse Conductor
AC COIL. General use IEC gG UL K5 section
Terminals: clamp screw. [A] [A] [A] [mm2] [AWG]
11 BG09 T2 A 20 18 15 1 0.170 BG09...T2 20 20 30 0.75-2.5 18-12
DC COIL.
Terminals: clamp screw.
11 BG09 T2 D 20 18 15 1 0.175 Certifications obtained: CCC, EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
NOTE: No coil change or replacement is possible. Canada (cULus - File E93602), as Motor Controllers -
Contactors.
11 BG09 T2... Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Contactors Order code IEC rated conventional Qty Wt Operational characteristics

four power poles, free air thermal current Ith per Type UL/CSA Protection fuse Conductor
40°C 55°C 60°C pkg General use IEC gG ULRK5 section
2 NO and 2 NC [A] [A] [A] n° [kg] [A] [A] [A] [mm2] [AWG]
BF series AC COIL.
BF09 T2 A 25 20 18 1 0.340 BF09 T2 25 32 60 1-6 16-10
BF18 T2 A 32 26 23 1 0.340 BF18 T2 32 40 80 1-6 16-10
BF26 T2 A 45 36 32 1 0.420 BF26 T2 45 50 100 1.5-10 14-6
BF38 T2 A 56 (60) 45 (48) 40 (42) 1 0.420 BF38 T2 55 80 150 2.5-16 14-6
DC COIL.
Terminals: clamp screw. Certifications and compliance
BF18 T2 D 32 26 23 1 0.470 Certifications obtained: EAC, CCC, RINA; UL Listed for USA
and Canada (cULus - File E93602) and CSA certified for
BF26 T2 D 45 36 32 1 0.540 Canada (File 54332), as Motor Controllers - Contactors.
BF38 T2 D 56 (60) 45 (48) 40 (42) 1 0.540 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
DC COIL. Low consumption (2.4W). IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
BF09 T2... Terminals: clamp screw. Plastic materials are compliant with standards IEC/EN 60335;
BF18 T2 L 32 26 23 1 0.470 standard product order code.
BF26 T2 L 45 36 32 1 0.540 Example: BF09 T2 A230 V260 for BF09, 2NO+2NC main
BF38 T2 L 56 (60) 45 (48) 40 (42) 1 0.540 poles, 230V 50/60Hz coil with compliant plastic materials).
Complete with coil voltage digit if 50/60Hz or with voltage digit followed
by 60 if 60Hz. Standard voltages are:
– AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 /110 / 230 / 400V
– AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 /
575 60 (V).
Example: 11 BG09 T2 A230 for mini-contactor BG09 T2, 2 poles NO and
2 poles NC, with 230VAC 50/60Hz coil.
11 BG09 T2 A460 60 for mini-contactor BG09 T2, 2 poles NO
and 2 poles NC, with 460VAC 60Hz coil.
Complete with coil voltage digit.
The BF18-BF26-BF38 T2D types already have a standard supplied built-in
TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor).
– DC 012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220V.
Example: 11 BG09 T2 D012 for mini-contactor BG09 T2, 2 poles NO and
2 poles NC, with 12VDC coil.
Low-consumption version.
Complete the order code with coil voltage digit.
The BF18-BF26-BF38 T2L types already have a standard supplied built-in
TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor).
Standard voltages are as follows:
– DC 024 / 048V.
Example: BF18 T2 L024 for contactor BF18 T2, 2 poles NO and 2 poles
NC, with 24VDC low-consumption coil.
Maximum combinations of add-on blocks are given on page 2-19.
For use at this other current value, a 16mm2 cable, headed with a fork
terminal, must be used.
2-12 pages 2-16 to 25 pages 2-28 to 31 page 2-32 and 33 page 2-45 pages 2-48 to 65
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with control circuit: AC and DC
Contactors Order code IEC rated conventional Qty Wt Operational characteristics

four power poles, free air thermal current Ith per Type UL/CSA Protection fuse Conductor
40°C 55°C 60°C pkg General use IEC gG ULRK5 section
4 NC [A] [A] [A] n° [kg] [A] [A] [A] [mm2] [AWG]
BF series AC COIL. 2
BF18 T0 A 32 26 23 1 0.340 BF18 T0 32 40 80 1-6 16-10
BF26 T0 A 45 36 32 1 0.420 BF26 T0 45 50 150 1.5-10 14-6
DC COIL.
Terminals: clamp screw. Certifications and compliance
BF18 T0 D 32 26 23 1 0.470 Certifications obtained: EAC, CCC, RINA; UL Listed for USA
BF26 T0 D 45 36 32 1 0.540 and Canada (cULus - File E93602) and CSA certified for
Canada (File 54332), as Motor Controllers - Contactors.
DC COIL. Low consumption (2.4W). Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
Terminals: clamp screw. IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
BF18 T0 L 32 26 23 1 0.470 Plastic materials are compliant with standards IEC/EN
60335; for BF18 and BF26 versions only, add suffix V260
to the standard product order code.
BF18 T0...
Example: BF18 T0 A230 V260 for BF18, four NC main
poles, 230VAC 50/60Hz coil with compliant plastic
materials).
NOTE: The BF18-BF26 T0D and BF18 T0L types have a

standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage
Suppressor).
Contators Order IEC rated operational Qty Wt General characteristics

code current in DC1 55°C per The contactors are specifically made with magnetic
four NO power poles to pkg elements in the arc extinction chambers to obtain high
connect in series for [A] n° [kg]
DC load operational capabilities. They are used to
disconnect and isolate the load between the photovoltaic
photovoltaic applications AC COIL. panel and the AC/DC inverter.
BF series Terminals: lug clamp (IEC pillar terminal). For add-on contact blocks, accessories and spare parts,
11BFD80 40 125 1 1.440 consider indications of the corresponding standard BF80
types (11BF80 40… and 11 BF80C 40…).
DC COIL.
Terminals: lug clamp (IEC pillar terminal). Italian Fire Department Directives
11BFD80 C 40 125 1 1.910 These directives provide for an disconnecting device for
all current-carrying elements, that can be operated by
Complete with coil voltage digit if 50/60Hz or with voltage digit followed
remote control switch, placed in an easily reached and
by 60 if 60Hz. Standard voltages are:
– AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 /110 / 230 / 400V marked position, in order to safely isolate each part of the
– AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 / installation within the fire system compartment including
575 60 (V). the photovoltaic (PV) generator.
Example: BF18 T0 A230 for contactor BF18 T0, 4 NC power poles, with As an alternative, the PV generator must be installed,
230VAC 50/60Hz.
either externally of the fire system compartment or
11 BFD80 40 024 for contactor BFD80 40, 4 NO power poles,
with 24VAC 50/60Hz for photovoltaic application. internally but in a dedicated compartment with adequate
Complete with coil voltage digit. fire-resistant features. For such function, specifically
Standard voltages are: designed contactors for on-load use in IEC DC1 duty up
– DC 012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220V. to 1000VDC are available.
BFD80 40... Example: BF18 T0 D012 for contactor BF18 T0, 4 NC power poles, with
12VDC coil.
Low-consumption version. Operational characteristics
Complete the order code with coil voltage digit. Use in IEC DC1 duty
– DC 024 / 048V. Type IEC operational voltage Ue
Example: BF18 T0 L024 for contactor BF18 T0, 4 NC power poles, with 400V 600V 800V 1000V
24VDC low-consumption coil.
Maximum combinations of add-on blocks are given on page 2-19. IEC max current Ie in DC1 with L/R
For use at this other current value, a 16mm2 cable, headed with a fork 1ms with 4 poles in series
terminal, must be used.
[A] [A] [A] [A]
BFD80… 125 125 95 75
Wiring scheme
4 poles

IEC IEC/EN 60947-4-1.
pages 2-18 to 25 pages 2-28 to 31 page 2-32 and 33 page 2-45 pages 2-48 to 67 2-13
Contactors
Contactors for power factor correction with AC control circuit
BFK contactors (including Order code Maximum IEC operational Qty Wt Operational characteristics
limiting resistors) power at 50°C (AC-6b) per Type IEC rated IEC - UL/CSA
440V operational protection fuse
240V 400V 480V 690V pkg current 440V gG-SC
2 [kvar] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar] NO n° [kg] [A] [A]
AC COIL.
BFK09 10A 4.5 7.5 9 10 1 10 0.413 BFK09 12 16
BFK12 10A 7 12.5 14 16 1 10 0.413 BFK12 18 25
BFK18 10A 9 15 17 20 1 10 0.413 BFK18 23 40
BFK26 00A 11 20 22 25 – 10 0.472 BFK26 30 40
BFK32 00A 14 25 27.5 30 – 10 0.472 BFK32 36 63
BFK38 00A 17 30 33 36 – 10 0.472 BFK38 43 63
11 BF50K 00 22 38 41 46 – 5 1.440 BF50K 58 80
11 BF65K 00 26 45 50 56 – 5 1.470 BF65K 70 100
11 BF70K 00 30 50 56 65 – 5 1.470 BF70K 75 125
11 BF80K 00 34 60 65 70 – 5 1.470 BF80K 90 125
Consult Customer Service (see contact details on inside front cover) for the Ambient operating temperature: 50°C. For ambient
BFK... use of contactors to switch with delta/wye connection. temperatures higher than 50°C and up to 70°C, the
One NO auxiliary contact (SPST) incorporated. maximum operating power values indicated in the table
Complete order code with coil voltage digit or with voltage digit followed by must be reduced by a percentage equal to the difference
60 if 60Hz.
Standard voltages are: between the operating ambient temperature and 50°C.
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400VAC E.g.: Using a BFK26 00 contactor at the ambient temperature
-- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 / of 60°C, the maximum operating power (at 400V) of the
575 60 (V). contactor will be equal to 20kvar – 10% = 18kvar.
Example: BFK09 10 A230 for contactor BFK09 with one NO contact and Operating cycle: 120 cycles/h
230VAC 50/60Hz coil.
BFK09 10 A460 60 for contactor BFK09 with one NO contact Electrical life: 200,000 cycles.
and 460VAC 60Hz coil.
Add-on auxiliary contacts
The following contact blocks, can be fitted on the BFK
contactors: BFX12..., G418..., G481..., G482... and G218.
Type UL/CSA rated Maximum UL/CSA
current operational power at voltage: Certifications and compliance
240-600VAC 240V 480V 600V Certification obtained: CCC, EAC; UL Listed for USA and
[A] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar] Canada (cULus - File E93602), as Motor Controllers -
Magnetic Capacitive Switches.
BFK 09 12 4.5 9 10 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
BFK 12 18 7 14 16 IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
BFK 18 23 9 17 20 Plastic materials are compliant with standards IEC/EN 60335;
for BFK versions only, add suffix V260 to the standard
BFK 26 30 11 22 27.5 product order code.
BFK 32 36 14 27.5 32 Example: BF18K 10 A230 V260 for BF18K contactor having
BFK 38 43 17 33 36 1 NO auxiliary contact and 230VAC 50/60Hz coil with
compliant plastic materials.
BF50 K 58 22 41 46
BF65 K 68 26 50 56
BF70 K 72 30 60 65
BF80 K 78 34 65 70
Kits to assemble BFK Order code For contactor Qty Wt General characteristics
contactors per To optimise contactor stock management, a kit is available
pkg to transform normal three-pole contactors into BFK
n° [kg] types for power factor correction. The table to the left
indicates which kits to purchase depending on the standard
11 G460 BF09 10A - BF12 10A - 10 0.072 contactor in stock.
BF18 10A - BF26 00A -
BF32 00A - BF38 00A
11 G464 BF50 00 - BF65 00 - 10 0.080
BF80 00
11 G46...
2-14 pages 2-18 and 25 pages 2-28 page 2-39 page 2-44 pages 2-59 and 65 to 67
Contactors
Control relays with control circuit: AC and DC
Control relays Order code Configuration and Quantity Wt Operational characteristics

BG00 type number of contacts per – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V
(SPST ea) package – IEC rated conventional free air thermal current Ith: 10A
NO NC n° [kg] – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
AC COIL. Terminals: clamp screw.
• BG types: A600-Q600 2
• BF types: A600-P600
11 BG00 40 A 4 0 1 0.170 – Low-consumption version of BG types cannot accept
11 BG00 31 A 3 1 1 0.170 additional contacts.
NOTE: No coil change or replacement is possible.
11 BG00 22 A 2 2 1 0.170
Terminals: Faston. Certifications and compliance
11 BGF00 40 A 4 0 1 0.160 Certification obtained: CCC, EAC, UL Listed for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93602), as Motor Controllers -
11 BGF00 31 A 3 1 1 0.160 Auxiliary contactors for all; RINA for BF00 types.
11 BG00... 11 BGF00 22 A 2 2 1 0.160 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
DC COIL. Terminals: clamp screw. IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Plastic materials are compliant with standards
11 BG00 40 D 4 0 1 0.175 IEC/EN 60335; for BF00 version only, add suffix V260 to
11 BG00 31 D 3 1 1 0.175 the standard product order code.
11 BG00 22 D 2 2 1 0.175 Example: BF00 40 A230 V260 for BF00 control relay
having 4 NO auxiliary contacts and 230VAC 50/60Hz coil
Terminals: Faston. with compliant plastic materials.
11 BGF00 40 D 4 0 1 0.165
11 BGF00 31 D 3 1 1 0.165 NOTE: The BF00...D and BF00...L types have a standard
supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor).
11 BGF00 22 D 2 2 1 0.165
DC COIL. Low-consumption (2.3W).
11 BGF00... 11 BG00 40 L 4 0 1 0.175
11 BG00 31 L 3 1 1 0.175
11 BG00 22 L 2 2 1 0.175
Terminals: Faston.
11 BGF00 40 L 4 0 1 0.165
11 BGF00 31 L 3 1 1 0.165
11 BGF00 22 L 2 2 1 0.165
Control relays Order code Configuration and Quantity Wt

BF00 type number of contacts per
(SPST ea) package
NO NC n° [kg]
AC COIL.
BF00 40 A 4 0 1 0.340
BF00 31 A 3 1 1 0.340
BF00 22 A 2 2 1 0.340
BF00 04 A 0 4 1 0.340
DC COIL.
BF00 40 D 4 0 1 0.470
BF00 31 D 3 1 1 0.470
BF00... A... BF00 22 D 2 2 1 0.470
BF00 04 D 0 4 1 0.470
DC COIL. Low consumption (2.4W).
BF00 40 L 4 0 1 0.470
BF00 31 L 3 1 1 0.470
BF00 22 L 2 2 1 0.470
BF00 04 L 0 4 1 0.470
Complete order code with coil voltage digit or with voltage digit followed by
60 if 60Hz.
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V
-- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 /
575 60 (V).
Example: 11 BG00 40 A230 for control relay BG00 with four NO auxiliary
contacts and 230VAC 50/60Hz coil.
BF00... D... BF00 40 A460 60 for control relay BF00 with four NO auxiliary
BF00... L... contacts and 460VAC 60Hz coil.
-- DC 012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220V.
Example: BF00 40 D012 for control relay BF00 with four NO contacts
and 12VDC coil.
Low-consumption version.
– DC 024 / 048V.
Example: 11 BG00 40 L024 for control relay BG00 with four NO auxiliary
contacts and 24VDC low-consumption coil.
Maximum combinations of add-on blocks are given on page 2-19.
All contacts are highly conductive.
Add-on blocks / Accessories Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

pages 2-16 to 25 page 2-32 and 33 page 2-45 pages 2-48 to 61 2-15
Contactors
Add-on blocks and accessories for BG series mini-contactors
Add-on blocks and Order code Characteristics Max Qty Wt Operational characteristics for add-on auxiliary contacts
accessories qty per per
contactor pkg Type BGX10... BGXF10...
BGX11...
n° n° [kg]
2 Auxiliary contacts. Screw terminals.
IEC rated conventional free air A 10 10
thermal current Ith
11 BGX10 02 2NC 1 10 0.021 IEC rated insulation voltage Ui V 690 690
11 BGX10 11 1NO + 1NC 1 10 0.021 voltage Ui
11 BGX10 20 2NO 1 10 0.021 Terminals Type M3 Faston
11 BGX10... (20-11-02) 11 BGX10 04 4NC 1 10 0.028 screw 1x6.3mm
11 BGX11 11 2x2.8mm
11 BGX10 13 1NO + 3NC 1 10 0.028
Width mm 6.9 6.9
11 BGX10 22 2NO + 2NC 1 10 0.028
Tightening torque Nm 0.8-1 ––
11 BGX10 31 3NO + 1NC 1 10 0.028
lbin 7-9 ––
11 BGX10 40 4NO 1 10 0.028
Conductor section
Auxiliary contacts for reversing and changeover assemblies. maximum with 1 or 2 cables
Screw terminals. flexible without lug mm2 2.5 2.5
11 BGX11 11 1NO + 1NC 1 10 0.021 flexible with lug mm2 2.5 2.5
11 BGX10... (40-31-22-13-04) 11 BGX11 22 2NO + 2NC 1 10 0.028 AWG n° 14 14
11 BGX11 22 Auxiliary contacts. Faston terminals. UL/CSA and AC A600 A600
11 BGXF10 02 2NC 1 10 0.021 IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation DC Q600 Q600
11 BGXF10 11 1NO + 1NC 1 10 0.021 Mechanical life cycles 20 20
11 BGXF10 20 2NO 1 10 0.021 (million)
11 BGXF10 04 4NC 1 10 0.028 SM1 breaker - mini-contactor connecting kits
11 BGXF10 13 1NO + 3NC 1 10 0.028 See page 1-5.
11 BGXF10 22 2NO + 2NC 1 10 0.028
Positive (force) guided contacts
11 BGXF... 11 BGXF10 31 3NO + 1NC 1 10 0.028 See page 2-57.
11 BGXF10 40 4NO 1 10 0.028
Mechanical interlock. Certifications and compliance
11 BGX50 00 For all BG...A 1 10 0.008
and BG...D Type cULus EAC CCC
Quick connect surge suppressors. BGX10... ––
11 BGX77 048 48VAC/DC (Varistor) 10 0.007 BGX11... ––
11 BGX77 125 48-125VAC/DC (Varistor) 10 0.007 BGXF10... –– ––
11 BGX77... - 11 BGX77 240 125-240VAC/DC (Varistor) 10 0.007 BGX50 00 –– ––
11 BGX78 225 - 11 BGX78 225 225VDC (Diode) 10 0.007 BGX7... –– ––
11 BGX79... BGX80 00 –– –– ––
11 BGX79 048 48VAC 10 0.007
(Resistor-Capacitor) G32... –– –– ––
11 BGX79 125 48-125VAC 10 0.007 SMX90... –– –– ––
(Resistor-Capacitor) Certified products;
11 BGX79 240 125-240VAC 10 0.007
(Resistor-Capacitor) - UL Recognized for USA only (File E197069) as Panel and
Switchboard Accessories - Component.
11 BGX79 415 240-415VAC 10 0.007 Products having this type of marking are intended
11 BGX50 00 (Resistor-Capacitor) for use as components of complete workshop-assembled
equipment.
Modular shroud. cULus - UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601) as
11 BGX80 00 Raises protection to IEC 20 0.006 Auxiliary Devices - Component.
IP40 w/consumer boards
Compliant with standards: UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14,
Paralleling links. Clamp-screw terminals.
IEC/EN 60947-1; IEC/EN 60947-5-1 for auxiliary contacts.
11 G323 For 2 poles 10 0.009
11 G324 10 0.009
11 G325 For 4 poles 10 0.014
11 G326 10 0.014
11 SMX90 21 Rigid connecting kits.
11 SMX90 22 11 SMX90 21 For star-delta starter 10 0.040
composed by 3-contactor
combination of BG types
(line-star-delta)
11 SMX90 22 For reversing contactor 1 0.026
assembly composed by
mini-contactors BG
Cannot be used with BG...L types.
Cannot be used with BG...D and BG...L types.
Suitable for left-hand mini-contactor only of BGT and BGTP reversing
and BGC changeover assemblies.
The shroud can be used with BG... types with screw termination only and
with no auxiliary contacts, surge suppressor or mechanical interlock
mounted.
It raises the front degree of protection of the mini-contactor when these
are used in consumer switchboards.
Cannot be used with BGX80 00 shroud.
Contactors with one NC auxiliary contact, 01 type, are usually used for
reversing assemblies.
The relay cannot be directly mounted on the contator. Use the RF38 type and
the RFX38 04 independent mounting base.
The SM1 breaker can be directly fitted using the SMX90 03 rigid connector.
All contacts are each SPST.
Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

2-16 page 2-39 page 2-46 pages 2-48 to 61
Contactors
Add-on blocks and accessories for BG series mini-contactors
Combinations: Mounting position on BG...A and BG...D mini-contactors Combinations: Mounting position on BG...L mini-contactors
G326 G326
G325 G325
2
G324 G324
G323 G323
BGX77... BGX77...
BGX78 225 BGX78 225
BGX79... BGX79...
BGX80 00 BGX80 00
BGX10 40 - BGXF10 40
BG...A BGX10 31 - BGXF10 31
BGX10 22 - BGXF10 22 BG...L
BG...D
BGX10 13 - BGXF10 13
BGX10 04 - BGXF10 04
BGX10 20 - BGXF10 20
BGX10 11 - BGXF10 11
BGX10 02 - BGXF10 02
Suitable for screw-termination contactors without BGX10... auxiliaries, BGX50 00 interlock or BGX7...
surge suppressor.
Not suitable for BG...D types.
Combinations for reversing and changeover contactors assembled with BG...A and BG...D types
BGX77...
BGX78 225
BGX79...
BGX10 40 - BGXF10 40
BG...A BGX10 31 - BGXF10 31
BG...D BGX10 22 - BGXF10 22
BGX50 00 BGX10 13 - BGXF10 13
BGX10 04 - BGXF10 04
BGX77... BGX10 20 - BGXF10 20

BGX78 225 BGX10 11 - BGXF10 11
BGX10 40 - BGXF10 40 BGX79... BGX10 02 - BGXF10 02
BGX10 31 - BGXF10 31
BGX10 22 - BGXF10 22
BGX10 13 - BGXF10 13
BGX10 04 - BGXF10 04 BGX10 10 - BGXF10 20
BGX11 22 BGX10 11 - BGXF10 11
BGX10 02 - BGXF10 02
BGX11 11
Not suitable for BG...D types.
For left-hand mini-contactor of BGT, BGTP and BGC contactor assemblies only.
See page 4-5.
Connections for reversing contactor assembly Connections for star-delta assembly

SMX90 21
SMX90 21
SMX90 22
BGX50 00
BG...
BG...A
BG...D SMX90 21
SMX90 22

page 2-39 page 2-46 pages 2-48 to 61 2-17
Contactors
Add-on blocks and accessories for BF series contactors
Add-on blocks Order code Characteristics Max Qty Wt Operational characteristics for add-on auxiliary contacts
qty per per Type G418 G484 G218 G482
contactor pkg G428 BFX10 G481
G485 BFX12
2 n°
Auxiliary contacts with front centre mounting.
n° [kg]
G486
Screw terminals. G487
BFX10 02 2NC 1 5 0.030 IEC conventional free A 10 10 10 0.1
air thermal current Ith
BFX10 11 1NO + 1NC 1 5 0.030
IEC rated insulation V 690 690 690 690
BFX10 20 2NO 1 5 0.030 voltage Ui
BFX10... 11 G484 03 3NC 1 5 0.039 Terminals: Screw M3.5 M3 –– ––
11 G484 12 1NO + 2NC 1 5 0.039 Width mm 7 7 –– ––
11 G484 21 2NO + 1NC 1 5 0.039 Faston mm –– –– 1x6.35 1x6.35
11 G484 30 3NO 1 5 0.039 2x2.8 2x2.8
BFX10 04 4NC 1 5 0.048 Tightening torque Nm 0.8-1 0.8-1 –– ––
BFX10 13 1NO + 3NC 1 5 0.048 lbin 7-9 7-9 –– ––
BFX10 22 2NO + 2NC 1 5 0.048 Conductor section
BFX10 31 3NO + 1NC 1 5 0.048 maximum with
1 or 2 cables
BFX10 40 4NO 1 5 0.048 flexible w/o lug mm2 2.5 2.5 –– ––
11 G484...
BFX10 11 11 1NO+1NC and 1 5 0,048 flexible c/w lug mm2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
1EM+1LB (1 early
make+1 late break) AWG n° 14 14 14 14
Auxiliary contacts for front lateral mounting. Screw terminals. Terminal protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
per IEC/EN 60529
11 G418 01 1NC 2 10 0.014
UL/CSA and AC A600 A600 A600 A600
11 G418 01D 1LB (late break) 2 10 0.014 IEC/EN 60947-5-1 DC P600 Q600 P600 P600
11 G418 10 1NO 2 10 0.014 designation
11 G418 10A 1EM (early make) 2 10 0.014 Mechanical life cycles 10 10 10 10
Auxiliary contacts for front lateral mounting. Faston terminals. (million)
BFX10... 11 G218 1NO or 1NC reversible 2 10 0.011
SM1 breaker - contactor connecting kits
11 G481 02 2NC 2 10 0.013 See page 1-5.
11 G481 11 1NO + 1NC 2 10 0.013
11 G481 20 2NO 2 10 0.013 Maximum assembly combination of add-on blocks
See pages 2-22 to 2-25.
11 G482 Changeover contact 2 10 0.013 Positive (force) guided contacts see page 2-57.
Adapter for auxiliary contact side mounting.
11 G280 for G218 2 10 0.008 Certifications and compliance
11 G419 for G418 2 10 0.010 Type cULus CSA EAC CCC
11 G483 for G481 and G482 2 10 0.010 BFX10... –– ––
Auxiliary contacts for side mounting. BFX12... –– –– ––
11 G418... 11 G218
Screw terminals. G218 ––
BFX12 02 2NC for BF00, 2 5 0.044 G418..., G428... ––
BF09-BF38 G481... ––
BFX12 11 1NO+1NC for BF00, 2 5 0.044 G482 ––
BF09-BF38 G484... ––
BFX12 20 2NO for BF00, 2 5 0.044 G485... ––
BF09-BF38 G486... ––
11 G428 01 1NC 2 10 0.024 G487... ––
11 G481... 11 G428 01D 1LB (late break) 2 10 0.024 Certified products; pending for BFX10 1111
11 G482 - UL Recognized for USA only (File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices
11 G428 10 1NO 2 10 0.024
- Component.
11 G428 10A 1EM (early make) 2 10 0.024 Products having this type of marking are intended
for use as components of complete workshop-assembled
Delayed auxiliary contacts 1NO + 1NC (pneumatic operation) equipment.
on energisation for front centre mounting . cULus - UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601) as
Screw terminals. Auxiliary Devices.
CSA - CSA certified for Canada only (File 54332) as Auxiliary Devices for
11 G485 3 3s 1 1 0.040 motor controllers.
11 G485 6 6s 1 1 0.040
11 G485 15 15 s 1 5 0.040 Add-on auxiliary contacts are compliant with the following
11 G428... BFX12... standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
11 G485 30 30 s 1 5 0.040 CSA C22.2 n° 14.
11 G485 60 60 s 1 5 0.040
11 G485 120 120 s 1 1 0.040 The contacts can also be fitted on B type contactors using the adapter
G358. See pages 2-26 and 2-27.
Delayed auxiliary contacts 1NO + 1NC (pneumatic operation) Highly conductive contacts.
on de-energisation for front centre mounting . Gold-plated contacts inside tight casing for use in pollutant environments.
Screw terminals. The Ith value refers to 125VAC and 30VDC.
IEC IP20 protection is warranted to equipment wired with insulated Faston
11 G486 3 3s 1 1 0.040 terminals.
IEC IP20 protection is warranted to equipment wired with minimum
11 G486 6 6s 1 1 0.040 0.75mm² conductor section.
Designation in DC is Q600 for these types.
11 G486 15 15 s 1 5 0.040 IEC IP20 protection is warranted to equipment wired with insulated
11 G485... 11 G486 30 30 s 1 5 0.040 Faston terminals.
11 G486... For particularly severe ambient conditions, consult Customer Service for
11 G487 11 G486 60 60 s 1 5 0.040 information; see contact details on inside front cover.
IEC IP20 protection is warranted to equipment wired with minimum
11 G486 120 120 s 1 1 0.040 1mm² conductor section. Mechanical life is 3 million cycles.
11 G487 70 ms 1 1 0.040 All contacts are each SPST except G482 which is SPDT.

2-18 page 2-40 pages 2-46 and 47 pages 2-48 to 65
Contactors
BF00 A, Maximum assembly combination for alternating-current contactors BF00 A, BF09 A-BF110
Maximum assembly combination for direct-current contactors BF50 C-BF110 C
BF09 A-BF110, Front centre mount Front lateral mount Side mount
BF50C-BF110C
2
BFX10 02 BFX10 04 G485... G222... BFX50 02 G269 2 G418... G428... BFX12 02

BFX10 11 BFX10 13 G486... G272... BFX50 03 G218 G419+ BFX12 11
G481... G418...
BFX10 20 BFX10 22 G487 G482 G280+ BFX12 20
G218
BFX10 31 G483+ BFX50 00
1 type G481...
BFX10 40 only of: G483+ BFX50 01
G318... G482
G319 225
G322...
n°of blocks n°of blocks n°of blocks n°of blocks n°of blocks n°of blocks
1 type only 1 type only
Control relay BF00 A 1 1 1 1 1 –– 1 or 2 1 or 2 1
Three poles BF09 A-BF25 A 1 1 1 1 1 –– 1 or 2 1 or 2 1
BF26 A-BF38 A 1 1 1 1 1 –– 1 or 2 1 or 2 1
Contactors
1 1 or 2
OR
OR
OR
OR
BF50-BF110 1 1 1 + –– 1 2 ––
BF50 C-BF110 C 1 1 1 1 –– 1 1 or 2 2 ––
Four poles BF09 A-BF25 A 1 1 1 1 1 –– 1 or 2 1 or 2 1
BF26 A-BF38 A 1 1 1 1 1 –– 1 1 or 2 1
BF50-BF80 1 1 1 1 –– 1 1 or 2 2 ––
BF65 C-BF80 C 1 1 1 1 –– 1 1 or 2 2 ––
Mounting of BFX50 03 interlock is not possible when BFX10... block with 4 contacts and/or G222 latch are mounted.
To fit the mechanical interlock, the add-on fourth pole needs to be mounted on the left side of the one of the contactors.
One only side-mount block can be fitted on each contactor whenever the BFX50 0... interlock is mounted.
One BFX10... or delayed G48... contact block can be mounted on the G222 or G272 mechanical latch.
G222 mechanical latch.
G272 mechanical latch.
BF00 D, Maximum assembly combination for direct-current contactors BF00 D, BF09 D-BF38 D
Maximum assembly combination for direct-current contactors BF00 L, BF09 L-BF38 L
BF09 D-BF38 D,
Front centre mount Front lateral Side mount
BF00 L, BF09 L-BF38 L mount
BFX10... BFX10... G485... G222... 1 type only BFX50... BFX12...

...02 ...11 ...20 ...04 ...13 ...22 ...31 ....40 G486... ...02 ...03 ...00 ...01
G487
n° of blocks n° of blocks n° of blocks
1 type only 1 type only
Control relay BF00 D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BF00 L 1 –– 1 –– 1 1 1 –– ––
Three poles BF09 D-BF25 D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BF26 D-BF38 D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Contactors
BF09 L-BF25 L 1 –– 1 –– 1 1 1 –– ––
OR
BF26 L-BF38 L 1 –– 1 –– 1 1 1 –– ––
Four poles BF09 D-BF25 D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BF26 D-BF38 D –– 1 –– –– –– 1 1 1 1 1
BF09 L-BF25 L 1 –– 1 –– 1 1 1 –– ––
BF26 L-BF38 L –– 1 –– –– –– –– –– 1 1 –– ––
Mounting of BFX50 03 interlock is not possible when BFX10... block with 4 contacts and/or G222 latch are mounted.
One only side-mount block can be fitted on each contactor whenever the BFX50 0... interlock is mounted.
One BFX10... or delayed G48... contact block can be mounted on the G222 or G272 mechanical latch.
To fit the mechanical interlock, the add-on fourth pole needs to be mounted on the left side of the one of the contactors.
For other assembly combination, consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover.

page 2-40 pages 2-46 and 47 pages 2-48 to 67 2-19
Contactors
Add-on blocks Order code Characteristics Max Qty Wt Operational characteristics

qty per per Type BFX42 BFX50 01
contactor pkg BFXD42
n° n° [kg]
2 Fourth pole.
IEC conventinal free air
thermal current Ith
A 56 10
BFX42 For BF26 A-BF32 A 1 1 0.100 IEC rated insulation

and BF38 A voltage Ui V 690 690
BFXD42 For BF26 D-BF32 D 1 1 0.108 Terminals: Screw M4 M3
BF38 D-BF26 L- Width mm 12.5 7
BF32 L - BF38L
Tightening torque Nm 2.5-3 0.8-1
Mechanical interlock.
lbin 21.6-26.4 7-9
BFX50 00 Side mount for 1 5 0.039
BFX42 BF00, BF09-BF38 Conductor section
BFXD42 Maximum with
BFX50 01 Side mount with 2NC 1 5 0.052 1 or 2 cables
contacts for BF00, flexible w/o lug mm2 16 2.5
BF09-BF38
flexible c/w lug mm2 16 2.5
BFX50 02 Front mount, low 1 5 0.006
profile for BF00, AWG n° 6 14
BF09-BF38 Terminal protection IP20 IP20
BFX50 03 Front mount for 1 5 0.023 per IEC/EN 60529
BF00, BF09-BF38 UL/CSA and AC –– A600
BFX89 10 Spacer for interlocking 1 10 0.017 IEC/EN 60947-5-1 DC –– Q600
BF09-BF38 AC/DC designation
contactors Mechanical life (million) cycles 10 10
11 G269 2 Front mount for 1 5 0.034
BF50-BF110 Type G222 G272
BFX50 00 BFX50 01 Mechanical latch. Rated control circuit
Screw terminals. voltage AC (50/60 Hz) V 24-415 24-415
11 G222 For BF00, BF09-BF38 1 1 0.070 DC V 12-240 12-240
11 G272 For BF50-BF110 1 1 0.070 Power consumption
Manual closing mechanism. with control AC VA 40 40
11 G454 For BF00, BF09-BF38 1 1 0.021 DC W 70 70
11 G455 For BF50-BF110 1 1 0.021 Minimum energising
Quick connect surge suppressors drop-out ms 10 10
for BF00A, BF09-BF38A AC contactors. pick-up ms 50 100
BFX77 048 48VAC/DC (Varistor) 10 0.012 Tightening torque Nm 0.8-1 0.8-1
BFX50 02 BFX50 03
11 G269 2 BFX77 125 48-125VAC (Varistor) 10 0.012 lbin 7-9 7-9
BFX77 240 125-240VAC (Varistor) 10 0.012 Conductor section
BFX79 048 48VAC (Resistor-Capacitor) 10 0.012 Maximum with
1 or 2 cables
BFX79 125 48-125VAC (Resistor-Capacitor) 10 0.012 flexible w/o lug mm2 4 4
BFX79 240 125-240VAC (Resistor-Capacitor) 10 0.012 flexible c/w lug mm2 2.5 2.5
BFX79 415 240-415VAC (Resistor-Capacitor) 10 0.012 AWG n° 14...12 14...12
Surge suppressor for BF50-BF110 contactors, front mount.
Faston terminals. The condition is front IP20 protection.
11 G318 48 48VAC/DC (Varistor) 10 0.010 Maximum assembly combination of add-on blocks

11 G318 125 48-125VAC/DC (Varistor) 10 0.010 See page 2-19, 2-22 to 2-25.
11 G222... 11 G454
11 G272... 11 G455 11 G318 240 125-240VAC/DC (Varistor) 10 0.010
Positive (force) guided contacts
11 G318 415 240-415VAC/DC (Varistor) 10 0.010 See page 2-57 for BFX5001.
11 G319 225 225VDC (Diode) 10 0.010
11 G322 48 48VAC (Resistor-Capacitor) 10 0.010 Certifications and compliance
11 G322 220 48-240VAC (Resistor-Capacitor) 10 0.010
Type cULus CSA EAC
11 G322 380 240-415VAC (Resistor-Capacitor) 10 0.010
BFX42 - BFXD42 –– ––
Suppressor mounting adapter for G318-G319-G322.
BFX50... –– ––
11 RE244 For 35mm DIN rail 10 0.004
BFX77... (IEC/EN 60715) BFX77... –– ––
BFX79... BFX79... –– ––
Different sized contactors can be interlocked.
Example: BF09-BF25 with BF26-BF38. G269 2 ––
BFX50 01 contacts are each SPST.
Replace with the digit of the voltage if 50 or 60Hz and with the letter C G222... ––
followed by the digit of the voltage if DC.
Standard voltages are: G272... ––
– 50/60Hz 24 / 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 /
380-415V indicate 380. Certified products.
– DC 12 / 24 / 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240V indicate 220. - UL Recognized for USA only (File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices
Component.
Products having this type of marking are intended
for use as components of complete workshop-assembled
equipment.
cULus - UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93602) as
Magnetic motor controllers.
11 G318... 11 RE244 CSA - CSA certified for Canada only (File 54332) as Auxiliary Devices for
11 G319 225 motor controllers.
11 G322...
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

2-20 pages 2-40 and 41 page 2-47 pages 2-48 to 67
Contactors
Accessories for BF series contactors
Accessories Order code Characteristics Qty Wt Operational characteristics of enlarged and auxiliary
per terminals
pkg
n° [kg] Type G231 G232 G285 G271
Rigid connecting kits for three-pole reversing contactor G288 2
assembly. Tightening Nm 1.5-1.8 2.5-3 0.8-1 5
BFX31 01 For contactors 1 0.052 torque lbin 13.2-18 7-9 7.9 44.3
BF09 - BF25 side by side Tool Type PH1 PH2 PH1 Metric
with BFX50 02 or BFX50 03 Allen 4
BFX31... interlock
BFX32... BFX31 02 For contactors 1 0.054
BF09 - BF25 side by side Certifications and compliance
with BFX50 00 or BFX50 01 Certifications obtained: GOST for all; UL Listed, for USA
interlock and Canada (cULus - File E93602), under Magnetic Motor
BFX32 01 For contactors 1 0.060 Controllers for BFX31 01, BFX31 02, BFX32 01,
BF26 - BF38 side by side BFX31 31, BFX32 31 and BFX32 32 as rigid kits, G271
with BFX50... interlock and G288 as enlarged terminal kits.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, UL508,
Rigid connecting kits for star-delta starters. CSA C22.2 n° 14.
BFX31 31 For contactors BF09-BF25 1 0.058
BFX 80 (line-star-delta)
(line-star-delta)
(line-delta) and
BF09-BF25 (star)
Sealing cover.
BFX80 For contactors 10 0.001
BF00, BF09-BF38
Screw fixing adapters for contactors.
BFX89 01 Universal base to screw fix 5 0.016
BF09-BF38 contactors
BFX89 01 BFX89 02
BFX89 02 Screw fixing brackets for 10 0.002
BF09-BF38 contactors
Power terminal shroud.
11 G265 IP20 protection for 3-pole 10 0.015
BF50 to BF110 types
Paralleling links.
11 BA135 2 poles for BF09-BF25 types 10 0.001
11 G265 11 BA235 2 poles for BF26-BF38 types 10 0.003
11 BA435 3 poles for BF50-BF110 types 10 0.030
One-pole enlarged terminals.
11 G231 1-6 mm2 for BF09-BF25 types 12 0.009
11 G232 1-16 mm2 for BF26-BF38 types 12 0.014
Three-pole enlarged terminals.
11 G271 1-50 mm2 for BF50-BF110 10 0.142
11 BA135 11 BA435 types
11 BA235
Four-pole enlarged terminals.
11 G288 1x50mm2 for contactors 10 0.194
BF50-BF110 types
Auxiliary terminal.
11 G285 For BF50-BF110 types 8 0.009
Marking element for BF00, BF09-BF110 contactors.
11 G231 11 G285 BFX30 Blank label for writing 50 0.001
11 G232
For 3-pole contactors, BF50-BF110 types only.
N.B. Two pieces are required per contactor.
An additional 1-50mm2 conductor can be fitted in the contactor terminal.
11 G271
11 G288

pages 2-40 and 41 page 2-47 page 2-48 to 67 2-21
Contactors
Add-on blocks for

AC contactors
2 Combinations: Mounting position on BF00 A and BF09 A-BF110 contactors
Table with combinations: See page 2-19.
G222...❷
G272...
G454 ❸ (for contactors BF00 A, BF09 A-BF38 A)
G485... G455 ❸ (for contactors BF50-BF110)

G486...
G487
BFX10...❷
G484...
BFX10...
G418...
BF00 A
BFX50 00 BF09 A-BF110
BFX50 01 BFX77...
BFX79... G218
G481...
G482
❶
BFX12... G419❶
G280❶ BFX50 02
(for contactors BF00A, BF09 A-BF38 A)
G483❶
BFX50 03
(for contactors BF00 A, BF09 A-BF38 A)
G418...❶ G428...❶
G218❶
G269 2
(for contactors BF50-BF110)
G481...❶
G482❶
Mounting not possible if front lateral contacts or mechanical interlock BFX50 00 or BFX50 01 are mounted.
If the G222 latch is mounted, no front lateral contacts can be fitted on contactors BF00A and BF09A to BF38A.
No add-on block can be mounted on front when the manual closing mechanism G454 or G455 is fitted.
Combinations: Mounting position on BF00 A and BF09 A-BF38 A Combinations: Mounting position on BF50-BF110 G485...
G486...
contactors with mechanical latch G222 fitted contactors with mechanical latch G272 fitted G487
Table with combinations: See page 2-19. Table with combinations: See page 2-19.
G485... BFX10...
G486...
G487
G484...
BFX10...
BFX10...
G484...
BFX10...
BF50-BF110
G418...
BF00 A
BF09 A-BF38 A
G218
2
27
BFX77...
G
BFX79...
G481...
G482
22
G2
G318...
G319...
G322...
G418... G269 2
BFX50 00 G218
BFX12...
BFX50 01
G481... Mounting not possible if front lateral

G482 contacts are fitted.

2-22 pages 2-40 and 41 pages 2-46 and 47 pages 2-48 to 67
Contactors
Add-on blocks for

DC and DC low consumption contactors
Combinations: Mounting position on BF00 and BF09-BF38, D and L versions
Table with combinations: See page 2-19.
2
G485...
G486...
BFX10... G487
BFX10...
G222...❷ G454❸
BF00 D
BF09 D-BF38 D
BF00 L
BF09 L-BF38 L❷
BFX50 02
BFX50 00 BFX12...
BFX50 01
BFX50 03❶
Mounting not possible when the G222 mechanical latch is fitted.

The G222 mechanical latch cannot be fitted on BF26 L - BF38 L four-pole types.
No add-on block can be mounted on front when the G454 manual closing mechanism is fitted.
Combinations: Mounting position on BF50 C - BF110 C contactors

with G272 mechanical latch fitted G485...
Table with combinations: See page 2-19. G486...
G487
BFX10...
G484...
BFX10...
G418...
BF50 C-BF110 C
G218
2
27
G
G481...
G482
G318...
G319...
G322...
G418... G269 2
G218
G481...
G482
No add-on block can be mounted on front when the G455 manual closing mechanism is fitted.
Mounting not possible if front lateral contacts are fitted.

pages 2-40 and 41 pages 2-46 and 47 pages 2-48 to 67 2-23
Contactors
Accessories for
AC, DC and DC low consumption contactors
2 Combinations
G271
BA435
G265
G285
BA235
G232
G231
BA135
BF50-BF110
BF26-BF38
BFX80
BF00
BF09-BF25
Cable Plate
6-50mm2 2.5x9mm (max)
BF50-BF110
Dimensions Technical characteristics

2-24 page 2-41 pages 2-48 to 67
Contactors
Accessories for
AC, DC and DC low consumption contactors
Rigid reversing contactor assembly connecting kits for BF09-BF25 contactors with Rigid reversing contactor assembly connecting kits for BF09-BF25 contactors with 2
BFX50 02 or BFX50 03 mechanical interlock BFX50 00 or BFX50 01 mechanical interlock
BFX31 01 BFX31 02
BFX50 02
BFX50 03
BFX50 02
BFX50 03
BFX50 00
BFX31 01 BFX50 01
BFX31 02
RF38
RF38
Rigid reversing contactor assembly connecting kits for BF26-BF38 contactors Rigid star-delta starter assembly connecting kits for BF09-BF25 contactors
with BFX50 02 or BFX50 03 mechanical interlock
BFX32 01
BFX50 02 BFX31 31
BFX50 02
BFX50 03
BFX31 31
BFX32 01
BFX50 00
BFX50 01 RF38
RF38
Rigid star-delta starter assembly connecting kits for BF26-BF38 contactors Rigid star-delta starter assembly connecting kits for BF26-BF38 (line-delta) and
BF09-BF25 (star) contactors
BFX32 31
BFX32 32
BFX32 32
BFX32 31
RF38
RF38

pages 2-40 and 41 page 2-47 pages 2-48 to 67 2-25
Contactors
Add-on blocks and accessories for B series contactors
Add-on blocks Order code Characteristics Max Qty Wt Operational characteristics of auxiliary contacts
qty per per Type G350-G354
contactor pkg
IEC conventional free-air thermal A 16
n° n° [kg]
2 Faston terminals.
current Ith
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui V 690
Auxiliary contacts for side mounting.
Terminals Faston mm 1-6.35
11 G350 2NO+1NC or 1NO+2NC 4 1 0.082 2-2.8
reversible (SPST ea)
Conductor section maximum
11 G354 1NO+1NC (SPST ea) 4 1 0.078 with 1 or 2 cables flexible c/w lug mm2 2.5
Contact block adapter. AWG n° 14
11 G350 - 11 G354 11 G358 To fit auxiliary contacts 4 5 0.050 UL/CSA and AC A600
BFX10, G484, G485, IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation
G486 and G487 types, DC P600
on B115-B630 1000 Mechanical life (million) cycles 5
contactors; see page
2-18. Operational characteristics of mechanical latch
Mechanical interlock. Type G495
11 G355 Side by side 1 1 0.026 Rated control AC (50/60Hz) V 48-480
11 G356 1 One on top of other 1 1 0.120 circuit voltage DC V 48-480
11 G356 2 One on top of other 1 1 0.126 Power consumption AC VA 1500
11 G356 3 One on top of other 1 1 0.132 DC W 1100
11 G358
11 G356 4 One on top of other 1 1 0.140 Minimum energising drop-out ms 40
11 G356 5 One on top of other 1 1 0.146 pick-up ms 300
11 G356 6 One on top of other 1 1 0.150 Terminals Faston mm 1-6.3x0.8
Mechanical latch. 2-2.8x0.8
11 G495
For B115-B630 1 1 0.795 Operational characteristics of terminal adapters
Type G370-G371
Tightening torque Nm 1
Accessories Order code Characteristics Qty Wt
per lbin 8.9
pkg Tool Type Phillips 2
n° [kg] Conductor section mm² 4
Power terminal protection. 1 or 2 cables AWG 10
11 G360 For contactor B115 6 0.026
11 G361 For contactors B145-B180 6 0.026 Certifications obtained:
11 G363 For contactors 6 0.046 Type CSA GOST CCC
B250-B310-B400
11 G360 - 11 G361 - 11 G363 G350
G354 ––
11 G528 For contactor B500 4 1 0.265
G355 –– ––
G356 ... –– ––
11 G530 For contactor B630 4 1 0.266
G360 –– ––
3 pole star connecting bars.
G361 –– ––
11 BA1595 For B115-B145-B180 1 0.065
G362 –– ––
11 BA1721 For B250-B310-B400 1 0.140
G363 –– ––
11 BA1846 For B500-B630 1 0.341
11 G527 - 11 G528 - 11 G529 G370 –– ––
2 pole bars for parallel arrangement.
11 G530 Certified products.
11 BA1594 For B115-B145-B180 1 0.095 - UL Recognized for USA only (File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices -
11 BA1720 For B250-B310-B400 1 0.149 Component.
Products having this type of marking are intended
11 BA1845 For B500-B630 1 0.322 for use as components of complete workshop-assembled
Terminal adapter. equipment.
CSA - CSA certified for Canada only (File 54332) as Auxiliary Devices for
11 G370 To transform Faston terminals 10 0.003 motor controllers.
of auxiliary contacts and coils Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
11 G370
into screw terminals IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14; add-on
11 G371 To transform both coil Faston 5 0.022 auxiliary contacts also comply with IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
terminals into screw terminals
Marking elements.
Only one piece can be mounted on B1250 or B1600 type.
11 BA126 1 Label for alphanumeric symbols 50 0.001 Not suitable for B630 1000, B1250, B1600.
11 BA126 2 Label for writing 50 0.001 For use with three-pole B630 1000, consult Customer Service;
11 G371 see contact details on inside front cover.
3958 Set of 100 alphanumeric 1 0.010 Allowed distances see page 2-70.
symbols To interlock two contactors B1250 or B1600, it is imperative to use two
pieces of type G356 6, one fixed on the left side and the other on the
right.
Replace with the digit of the voltages if 50 or 60 Hz or with the letter C
followed by voltage if DC. The standard voltages are:
– AC 50/60Hz 48 - 110/125 indicate 110 - 220/240 indicate 220 -
11 BA126 1 11 BA126 2 380/415 indicate 380
– DC 48 - 110/125 indicate 110 - 220/240 indicate 220
It can be mounted only in contactors if predisposed for it.

Except for B310 and B310 4.
3958... Provided for one pole terminal only. Example: For three-pole contactors,
purchase 3 pieces for the upper terminals only or 6 pieces for all upper
and lower terminals.
Replace with the required alphanumeric symbol; each package contains
100 pieces of the same symbol.

2-26 pages 2-42 and 43 page 2-47 pages 2-68 to 71
Contactors
Add-on blocks and accessories for B series contactors
Combinations: Mounting position on B115-B630 contactors G527 (for B500 00)

G528 (for B500 4 00)
G529 (for B630 00)
G530 (for B630 4 00)
2
G356...
G370
G371
G363
G355
G350 M
8
G354
G360 (for B115)

G361 (for B145-B180)
6
M
BA1846
BA1845
B500
B630
BA1720
B250 BA1721
B310
B400
BA126 2
BA126 1
BA1595 BA1594
B115 3958
B145
B180
The add-on auxiliary contact blocks G350 and G354 can be applied to contactors Contact blocks, BFX10 with 2 contacts, G484, G485, G486 and G487 types, can
B115-B630 1000 only up to a maximum of four pieces for each contactor, for a total of be mounted using the G358 adapter, refer to page 2-18 for exact types and
12 contacts. order codes of the blocks.
The contact block G350 provides a 2NO+1NC or 1NO+2NC combination depending on A maximum of four adapters can be possibly used per contactor and each
its mounting position; see the drawing delow. The G354 block consists of 1NO+1NC. adapter can hold one BFX10, G484, G485, G486 and G487.
BFX10 20 BFX10 11 BFX10 02
53 63
93 01 51 61
BFX10...
54 64
94 02 52 62
G484 30 G484 21 G484 12 G484 03

G484...
53 63 73 53 61 73 53 61 71 51 61 71
G354 G350 G350 G354
G485...
G486...
G487
41 73 73
D
C
B
E
01 13
A
F
G
13
54 64 74 54 62 74 54 62 72 52 62 72
42 74
02 14 74
14
53
113 53
113 81
21
or
or
81
54 21
54 82
G485 ... G486 ... - G487
114
114 22
82
22
G371 G358
61 61 93
121 121 33 57 65 67 55
62
122 62
122 94
34
34
94 122 122
62
62
33
93 121
61 121
61 58 66 68 56 G358
22
82
22 114
82 54 114
21 54
or
or
G358
81
21 113
81 53 113
53
14
74 14 02
74 42
13
73 13 01
73 41
G354 G350 G350 G354 G358

pages 2-42 and 43 page 2-47 pages 2-68 to 71 2-27
Contactors
Spare parts for BF series contactors
AC coils Order code Rated frequency Qty Wt Operational characteristics for BFX91 A or BFX92 A coils
and voltage per AC control
pkg Rated voltage at 50/60, 60Hz V 12-600
[Hz] [V] n° [kg]
2 For contactors BF00 A-BF09 A-BF12 A-BF18 A-BF25 A
Operating voltage limits
50/60Hz coil 50Hz pick-up % Us 80-110
BFX91A 024 50/60 24VAC 1 0.085 powered at drop-out % Us 20-55
BFX91A 048 48VAC 1 0.085 60Hz pick-up % Us 85-110
BFX91A 110 110VAC 1 0.085 drop-out % Us 20-55
BFX91A 230 230VAC 1 0.085 60Hz coil 60Hz pick-up % Us 80-110
BFX91A 400 400VAC 1 0.085 powered at drop-out % Us 20-55
BFX91A 024 60 60 24VAC 1 0.085 Average coil consumption at 20°C
BFX91A 048 60 48VAC 1 0.085 50/60Hz coil 50Hz in-rush VA 75
BFX91A 120 60 120VAC 1 0.085 powered at holding VA 9
BFX91A... BFX91A 220 60 220VAC 1 0.085 60Hz in-rush VA 70
BFX91A 230 60 230VAC 1 0.085 holding VA 6.5
BFX91A 460 60 460VAC 1 0.085 60Hz coil 60Hz in-rush VA 75
BFX91A 575 60 575VAC 1 0.085 powered at holding VA 9
For contactors BF26 A-BF32 A-BF38 A. Dissipation at 50Hz W 2.5
BFX92A 024 50/60 24VAC 1 0.088
BFX92A 048 48VAC 1 0.088
BFX92A 110 110VAC 1 0.088 Operational characteristics for BA705 coil
BFX92A 230 230VAC 1 0.088 AC control
BFX92A 400 400VAC 1 0.088 Rated voltage at 50/60, 60Hz V 12-600
BFX92A 024 60 60 24VAC 1 0.088 Operating voltage limits
BFX92A 048 60 48VAC 1 0.088 50/60Hz coil 50Hz pick-up % Us 80-110
BFX92A 120 60 120VAC 1 0.088 powered at drop-out % Us 20-55
BFX92A 220 60 220VAC 1 0.088 60Hz pick-up % Us 85-110
BFX92A 230 60 230VAC 1 0.088 drop-out % Us 40-55
BFX92A 460 60 460VAC 1 0.088 60Hz coil 60Hz pick-up % Us 80-110
BFX92A... powered at
BFX92A 575 60 575VAC 1 0.088 drop-out % Us 20-55
For BF50-BF65-BF80-BF95-BF110 contactors. Average coil consumption at 20°C
11 BA705 024 50/60 24VAC 1 0.145 50/60Hz coil 50Hz in-rush VA 220
11 BA705 048 48VAC 1 0.145 powered at holding VA 18
11 BA705 110 110VAC 1 0.145 60Hz in-rush VA 200
11 BA705 230 230VAC 1 0.145 holding VA 15
11 BA705 400 400VAC 1 0.145 60Hz coil 60Hz in-rush VA 220
11 BA705 024 60 60 24VAC 1 0.145 powered at holding VA 18
11 BA705 048 60 48VAC 1 0.145 Dissipation at 50Hz W 6
11 BA705 120 60 120VAC 1 0.145
11 BA705 220 60 220VAC 1 0.145 Materials
11 BA705... Class F enamelled copper wire.
11 BA705 230 60 230VAC 1 0.145
11 BA705 460 60 460VAC 1 0.145 Special versions
11 BA705 575 60 575VAC 1 0.145 For coils with non standard voltages, consult Customer
Service for information; see contact details on inside front
Four-terminal coil. cover.
2-28
Contactors
Spare parts for BF series contactors
DC coils Order code Rated Qty Wt Operational characteristics for BA911 coil
voltage per DC control
pkg Rated voltage V 12-600
[V] n° [kg]
For BF50 C-BF110 C contactors.
Operating limits pick-up % Us 80-110 2
drop-out % Us 10-25
11 BA911 12 12VDC 1 0.380 Average dissipation 20°C W 15
11 BA911 24 24VDC 1 0.380 in-rush/holding
11 BA911 48 48VDC 1 0.380
Materials
11 BA911 60 60VDC 1 0.380 Class F enamelled copper wire.
11 BA911 110 110VDC 1 0.380
11 BA911 125 125VDC 1 0.380 Special versions
For coils with non standard voltages, consult Customer
11 BA911 220 220VDC 1 0.380 Service for information; see contact details on inside front
11 BA911... NOTE: No coil replacement for contactors BF00 D, cover.
BF09 D-BF38 D, BF00 L, BF09 L-BF38 L, is possible.
2-29
Contactors
Spare parts for B series contactors
AC/DC coils Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt Operational characteristics

AC 50/60 Hz and DC per AC and DC control
pkg For contactor type B115 - B145 - B180
[V] n° [kg]
2 Coil for B115-B145-B180 contactors.
Supply voltage AC and DC
Rated control voltage V 24-480
11 BA11574 24 24VAC/DC 1 0.800 Operating limits pick-up % Us 80-110
11 BA11574 48 48VAC/DC 1 0.800 drop-out % Us 20-60
11 BA11574 60 60VAC/DC 1 0.800 Consumption in-rush VA/W 300
11 BA11574 110 110-125VAC/DC 1 0.800 holding VA/W 10
11 BA11574 220 220-240VAC/DC 1 0.800 Dissipation W 10
11 BA11574 380 380-415VAC/DC 1 0.800
11 BA11574 440 440-480VAC/DC 1 0.800
Coil for B250-B310-B400 contactors. For contactor type B250 - B310 - B400
11 BA1699 24 24VAC/DC 1 1.800 Supply voltage AC and DC
11 BA1699 48 48VAC/DC 1 1.800 Rated control voltage V 24-480
Coil
11 BA1699 60 60VAC/DC 1 1.800 Operating limits pick-up % Us 80-110
11 BA1699 110 110-125VAC/DC 1 1.800 drop-out % Us 20-60
11 BA1699 220 220-240VAC/DC 1 1.800 Consumption in-rush VA/W 300
11 BA1699 380 380-415VAC/DC 1 1.800 holding VA/W 10
11 BA1699 440 440-480VAC/DC 1 1.800 Dissipation W 10
Coil for B500-B630-B630 1000 contactors.
11 BA1800 48 48VAC/DC 1 3.400 For contactor type B500 - B630 -
Bridge rectifier 11 BA1800 60 60VAC/DC 1 3.400 B630 1000
11 BA1800 110 110-125VAC/DC 1 3.400 Supply voltage AC and DC
11 BA1800 220 220-240VAC/DC 1 3.400 Rated control voltage V 48-480
11 BA1800 380 380-415VAC/DC 1 3.400 Operating limits pick-up % Us 80-110
11 BA1800 440 440-480VAC/DC 1 3.400 drop-out % Us 20-60
Coil for B1250-B1600 contactors. Consumption in-rush VA/W 400
11 BA1800 110 110-125VAC 1 3.400 holding VA/W 18
11 BA1800 220 220-240VAC 1 3.400 Dissipation W 18
Coil protection Order code For contactor Qty Wt For contactor type B1250 - B1600
per
pkg Supply voltage in AC only
n° [kg] Rated control voltage V 110-240
Bridge rectifier (Faston terminals). Operating limits pick-up % Us 80-110
11 BA1575 1 B115-B145-B180 1 0.170 drop-out % Us 20-60
11 BA1700 1 B250-B310-B400 1 0.230 Consumption in-rush VA/W 800
11 BA1799 B500-B630-B630 1000 1 0.520 holding VA/W 45
B1250-B1600 Dissipation W 40
Coil protection
Materials
11 BA1553 B115-B145-B180 1 0.042 Class F enamelled copper wire.
Coil assembly
11 BA1678 B250-B310-B400 1 0.079
11 BA1803 B500-B630-B630 1000 1 0.164 Coil assembly
B1250-B1600 Comprises the coil, bridge rectifier, fixed core, coil
protection, cross piece and fixing screws.
Coil assembly (Coil, rectifier and coil protection).
11 BA1546 B115-B145-B180 1 1.220 Special versions
11 BA1671 B250-B310-B400 1 2.290 For coils with non standard voltages, consult Customer
Service for information; see contact details on inside front
11 BA1796 B500-B630-B630 1000 1 4.650 cover.
B1250-B1600
Available for AC supply only.
Add the coil voltage digit. Standard voltages are:
– AC/DC 24 / 48 / 60 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 /
380-415 indicate 380 / 440-480V indicate 440.
Example: 11 BA1546 110 for B115-B180 contactor coil assembly
suitable for 110-125VAC/DC supply.
Add the coil voltage digit. Standard voltages are:
– AC/DC 48 / 60 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 /
380-415 indicate 380 / 440-480V indicate 440.
Example: 11 BA1796 110 for B500-B1600 contactor coil assembly
suitable for 110-125VAC/DC supply.
For B1250 and B1600, add only 110 for 110-125VAC or 220 for
220-240VAC since these are the only standard voltages available.
During coil replacement operations, always reinsert dampers (1 pair for
B115-B180; 2 pairs for B250-B1600) and fixed magnetic core which one
finds in the original coil assembly.
2-30
Contactors
Spare parts for B series contactors
Main contacts Order code For contactor Qty Wt Special versions

for BF contactors per For non standard spare contact configurations, contact
pkg Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
n° [kg]
Main contacts
NOTE: For B1250 and B1600 contactor spares, consult 2
Customer Service for information; see contact details on
3 or 4 pole set complete with screws. inside front cover.
BFX99 026T BF26 1 0.038
BFX99... BFX99 026F BF26 T4 1 0.051
BFX99 032T BF32 1 0.070
BFX99 038T BF38 1 0.070
BFX99 038F BF38 T4 1 0.093
11 G274 BF50 1 0.095
11 G274 4 BF50 40 1 0.127
11 G275 BF65 1 0.095
11 G275 4 BF65 40 1 0.127
11 G274... - 11 G275... - 11 G276... 11 11 G276 BF80 1 0.111
G475 - 11 G476 11 G276 4 BF80 40 1 0.148
11 G475 BF95 1 0.111
11 G476 BF110 1 0.111
Main contacts and arc Order code For contactor Qty Wt

chutes for B contactors per
pkg
n° [kg]
Main contacts
3 or 4 pole set complete with Allen screws and key for
contact replacement.
11 G380 B115 1 0.440
11 G380 4 B115 4 1 0.580
11 G381 B145 1 0.440
11 G381 4 B145 4 1 0.580
11 G382 B180 1 0.440
11 G382 4 B180 4 1 0.580
11 G383 B250 1 0.770
11 G383 4 B250 4 1 1.030
11 G385 B310 1 0.770
11 G380... - 11 G381... - 11 G382...
11 G383... - 11 G384... - 11 G385... 11 G385 4 B310 4 1 1.030
11 G525... - 11 G526... - 11 G537... 11 G384 B400 1 0.770
11 G384 4 B400 4 1 1.030
11 G525 B500 1 2.520
11 G525 4 B500 4 1 3.360
11 G526 B630 1 2.660
11 G526 4 B630 4 1 3.550
11 G537 B630 1000 1 2.660
11 G537 4 B630 1000 4 1 3.550
11 G538 B1250 24 1 5,040
11 G538 4 B1250 4 24 1 6,720
11 G539 B1600 24 1 5,320
11 G539 4 B1600 4 24 1 7,100
Arc chutes.
11 BA1588 B115-B145-B180 1 0.755
11 BA1589 B115 4-B145 4-B180 4 1 1.000
11 BA1713 B250-B310-B400 1 1.210
11 BA1714 B250 4-B310 4-B400 4 1 1.600
11 BA1838 B500-B630-B630 1000 1 1.910
11 BA1839 B500 4-B630 4- 1 2.490
Arc chute B630 1000 4
2-31
Contactors
THREE AND FOUR-POLE BG MINI-CONTACTORS AND CONTROL RELAY WITH AC OR DC COIL

BG... mini-contactors or control relay BG... mini-contactors with screw terminals and RF...9 thermal relay
44 4.4
”)
44
(0 4
.16
”)
(1.73”) (0.17”) (0 4 57
.16
(1.73”)
2 4.4
(0.17”)
57
(2.24”)
(2.24”)
(1.97”)
(2.28”)
(2.28”)
(1.97”)
50
58
58
50
(3.71”)
94.2
8.5 34.9 3.2
9.7 34.9 (1.37”)
(0.33”) (0.38”) (1.37”) (0.12”) RF...9
8.5
(0.33”) 7.6
8.5 44 89.2 (0.30”)
(0.33”) (1.73”) (3.51”)
BGP... BGF...
with rear PCB solder pins with Faston terminals
44 4.4 4.4 44
”)
(0 Ø4
(1.73”) (0.17”) (0.17”) (1.73”)
.16
4.4 4.4
(0.17”) (0.17”)
Ø1.4 (0.06”)
58 (2.28”)
(2.09”)
(1.97”)
(1.97”)
(2.28”)
53
50
50
58
8.5 9.7 57
(0.33”) (0.38”) (2.24”) 8.5 9.7 34.9 57
8.5 5.6 (0.33”) (0.38”) (1.37”) (2.24”)
(0.33”) (0.22”) 8.5
(0.33”)
8.5
(0.33”) 8.5
Recommended PCB drillings 1.7-2mm.
(0.33”)
BF CONTACTORS WITH AC COIL

BF09A - BF12A - BF18A - BF25A three poles BF00A... control relay
with RF...38 thermal relay BF09T...A - BF12T...A - BF18T...A four poles
45 45
(1.77”) (1.77”)
6.2 10.9 80.7 6.2 10.9 80.7
(0 4.2
(0 4.2
”)
”)
(0.24”) (3.18”) (0.24”)
.17
.17
(0.43”) (0.43”) (3.18”)
(2.79”)
(3.19”)
(2.79”)
(3.19”)
71
81
71
81
(4.96”)
126
35 35
(1.38”) (1.38”)
RF...38
7.9 81.2
(0.31”) 14.6 (3.20”)
(0.57”)
BF26A - BF32A - BF38A three poles BF26 T...A - BF38 T...A four poles
with RF...38 thermal relay
45 61
(1.77”) (2.40”)
7.9 14.6 90 14.6 90
(0 4.2
(0 4.2
”)
”)
(0.31”) (3.54”) 7.9 (0.57”) (3.54”)

.17
.17
(0.57”)
(0.31”)
(3.54”)
(3.15”)
(3.54”)
(3.15”)
90
80
90
80
(5.31”)
134.8
35 35
(1.38”) 15.9 (1.38”)
RF...38 (0.62”)
7.9 81.5
(0.31”) 14.6 (3.21”)
(0.57”)
BF50 00 - BF65 00 - BF80 00 - BF95 00 - BF110 00 three poles BF50 40 - BF65 40 - BF80 40 - BDF80 40 four poles
with RF...95 3 thermal relay
75
(2.95”) 98
(3.86”)
14 23.5 23.5
113.5 107
”)
(0.55”) 14 (0.92”)
”)
(0.92”)
(0 6
(0 6
.24
(4.47”) (4.21”)
.24
(0.55”)
(4.33”)
(4.88”)
(4.88”)
(4.41”)
110
124
124
112
(7.16”)
182
55 78
(2.16”) (3.07”)
RF...95 3
24.6 16.5 111

(0.97”) (0.65”) (4.37”)
2-32
Contactors
THREE AND FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS IN DC

BF09... - BF12... - BF18... - BF25...D and L three poles BF00...D and BF00...L control relays
with RF...38 thermal relay BF09 T... - BF18 T... D and L four poles
45
(1.77”) 45
2
6.2 10.9 98.5 (1.77”)
(0 4.2
”)
(0.24”)
.17
(0.43”) (3.88”) 10.9 98.5
(0 Ø4.2
(0.43”)
”)
6.2 (3.88”)
.17
(0.24”)
(2.79”)
(3.19”)
71
81
(2.79”)
(3.19”)
71
81
(4.96”)
126
35
(1.38”) 35
RF...38 (1.38”)
7.9 81.2
(0.31”) 14.6 (3.20”)
(0.57”)
BF26... - BF32... - BF38... D and L three poles BF26 T... - BF38 T... D and L four poles
with RF...38 thermal relay 61
45 (2.40”)
(1.77”) 14.6 107.5
(0 4.2
”)
7.9 (4.23”)
.17
7.9 14.6 107.5 (0.57”)
(0 4.2
”)
(0.31”) (4.23”) (0.31”)

.17
(0.57”)
(3.15”)
(3.54”)
80
90
(3.15”)
(3.54”)
80
90
(5.31”)
134.8
35
35 15.9 (1.38”)
(1.38”) (0.62”)
RF...38
7.9 81.2
(0.31”) 14.6 (3.20”)
(0.57”)
BF50C 00 - BF65C 00 - BF80C 00 - BF95C 00 - BF110C 00 three poles

with RF...95 3 thermal relay
75
(2.95”)
14 23.5 150.5
(0.55”)
”)
(0.92”) (5.92”)
(0 6
.24
(4.41”)
(4.88”)
112
124
(7.16”)
182
55
(2.16”)
RF...95 3
24.6 16.5 149.5

(0.97”) (0.65”) (5.88”)
BF65C 40 - BF80C 40 - BFD80C 40 four poles
98
(3.86”)
14 23.5
(0.55”) 144
(0.92”)
”)
(0 6
(5.67”)
.24
(4.88”)
(4.33”)
124
110
78
(3.07”)
2-33
Contactors
B CONTACTORS WITH AC/DC COIL

B115 - B145 - B180 three poles
2 40
120
(4.72”)
40
184
(7.24”)
4
(1.57”) (1.57”) 114
(0.16”)
B (4.49”)
A
(6.69”)
(5.90”)
(6.69”)
(5.90”)
(4.72”)
170
150
170
150
120
(0 Ø7.5
”)
(12.68”)
.29
322
90
M6 (3.54”)
M8 56.5
20
(0.79”) (2.22”)
166.1
40 40 (6.54”)
(1.57”) (1.57”)
127.5
(5.02”)
CONTACTOR TYPE A B
B115 M6 15 (0.59”)
B145 M8 20 (0.79”)
B180 M8 20 (0.79”)
B115 4 - B145 4 - B180 4 four poles
160
(6.30”) 184
40 40 40 (7.24”)
(1.57”) 4
(1.57”) (1.57”) 114
(0.16”)
B (4.49”)
A
(6.69”)
(5.90”)
(6.69”)
(5.90”)
(4.72”)
170
150
170
150
120
(0 Ø7.5
”)
.29
130
M6 (5.12”)
CONTACTOR TYPE A B
B115 M6 15 (0.59”)
B145 M8 20 (0.79”)
B180 M8 20 (0.79”)
2-34
Contactors
B250 - B310 - B400 three poles

145
(5.71”)
47.5 47.5
(1.87”) (1.87”)
25 M10X35 144
225
(8.86”) 5
2
(0.98”) (0.20”)
(5.67”)
(7.09”)
(8.03”)
(7.05”)
(8.03”)
(5.51”)
180
204
179
204
140
)
9”
0.3
0(
(14.57”)
Ø1
370
M8 110
(4.33”)
25 56.8
M1 (2.24”)
(0.98”) 0
166.1
47.5 47.5 (6.54”)
(1.87”) (1.87”)
145
(5.71”)
B250 4 - B310 4 - B400 4 four poles
192.5
(7.58”)
47.5 47.5 47.5
(1.87”) (1.87”) (1.87”) 225
25 (8.86”) 5
M10X35 144
(0.98”) (0.20”)
(5.67”)
(7.05”)
(8.03”)
(8.03”)
(7.09”)
(5.51”)
179
204
204
180
140
”)
.39
0 (0
Ø1
M8 157.5
(6.20”)
2-35
Contactors
B500 - B630 three poles
194
(7.64”)
263
65 65
2 A
(2.56”)
B
(2.56”) 177.5
(6.99”)
(10.35”)
6
(0.24”)
(10.63”)
(9.05”)
(6.69”)
(9.05”)
230
170
270
230
C
)
7”
0.4
2(
Ø1
150
M10 (5.90”)
CONTACTOR TYPE A B C
B500 M10 35 (1.38”) 265 (10.43”)
B630 M12 40 (1.57”) 270 (10.63”)
B500 4 - B630 4 four poles
259
(10.20”)
65 65 65 263
(2.56”) (2.56”) (2.56”) (10.35”)
6
177.5
A B (0.24”)
(6.99”)
(10.63”)
(9.05”)
(9.05”)
(6.69”)
230
230
170
270
C
”)
.47
(0
2
Ø1
215
M10 (8.46”)
CONTACTOR TYPE A B C
B500 M10 35 (1.38”) 265 (10.43”)
B630 M12 40 (1.57”) 270 (10.63”)
2-36
Contactors
B630 1000 three poles
194
(7.64”)
263
60
(2.36”)
65
(2.56”)
65
(2.56”)
M12 207.6
(8.17”)
(10.35”)
6
(0.24”) 2
147.2
(5.79”)
(18.74”)
(10.63”)
(9.05”)
(9.05”)
(6.69”)
230
476
270
230
170
)
7”
0.4
2(
Ø1
150
M10 (5.90”)
B630 1000 four poles
259
(10.20”) 263
65 65 65 (10.35”)
60 (2.56”) (2.56”) (2.56”) 6
(2.36”) M12 207.6 (0.24”)
(8.17”)
147.2
(5.79”)
(18.74”)
(10.63”)
(9.05”)
(6.69”)
(9.05”)
476
230
270
170
230
)
7”
0.4
2(
Ø1
215
M10 (8.46”)
2-37
Contactors
B1250 - B1600 three poles

540
(21.16”)
500
2 80
(3.15”)
(19.68”)
130
288
40 (11.34”) 10
(1.57”) (5.12”) M12
(0.39”)
(14.17”)
(12.60”)
360
320
B1250 - B1600 four poles

670
(26.38”)
630
(24.80”)
80
(3.15”) 288
40 130 (11.34”)
(1.57”) M12 10
(5.12”) (0.39”)
(14.17”)
(12.60”)
360
320
B115 - B145 - B180 - B250 - B310 - B400 - B500 - B630 - B630 1000 - B1250 - B1600
10
(0.39”)
Minimum safety distance

from metal parts.
Minimum space needed to replace the coil.
B115-B145-B180 B250-B310-B400 B500÷B630 1000

A A 120 (4.72”) 145 (5.71”) 170 (6.69”)
B 100 (3.94”) 110 (4.33”) 160 (6.30”)
B If dimension B is respected, coil replacement is
possible without removing power wiring.
2-38
Contactors
CONTACTORS FOR POWER FACTOR CORRECTION

BFK09 10A - BFK12 10A - BFK18 10A BFK26 00A - BFK32 00A - BFK38 00A
10.9 116.6 14.6 125.5
(0.43”) (4.59”) 7.9 (0.57”) (4.94”)
6.2
(0.24”) (0.31”)
2
(0 Ø4.2
(0 Ø4.2
”)
”)
.17
.17
(4.45”~)
(2.79”)
(3.19”)
(4.84”~)
113~
(3.15”)
(3.54”)
123~
71
81
80
90
35
(1.38”) 35
45 (1.38”)
(1.77”) 45
(1.77”)
BF50K 00 - BF65K 00 - BF70K 00 - BF80K 00

23.5
13.9 (0.92”) 148.3
(0.55”) (5.84”)
(0 Ø6
”)
.24
(6.30”~)
160~
(4.41”)
(4.88”)
112
124
55
(2.16”)
75
(2.95”)
ADD-ON BLOCKS WITH BG MINI-CONTACTORS

BGX10... auxiliary contacts BGX50 00 interlock with BGX10... or BGXF... auxiliary contacts BGX77 or BGX78 or BGX79...
and BGX77 or BGX78 or BGX79 suppressor suppressor only
88
(3.46”)
44 82 88 6 44
(3.23”) (3.46”) (0.24”) (1.73”) 56 26
(1.73”) 26 (2.20”)
26 (1.02”)
(1.02”) (1.02”)
(1.18”)
(0.94”)
(2.28”)
(1.18”)
(2.28”)
(2.28”)
23.8
30
58
30
58
58
BGX50 00 BGX10... - BGX77... 7.75

Valid for BGX11... contacts as well when mounted BGX78... - BGX79...
(0.30”) BGX77... - BGX78...
BGX79...
on left-hand contactor of BGT or BGC assembly BGXF10...
(p. 4-5).
BGX80 00 shroud Paralleling links G323 - G324 G325, G326

(0.83”)
21
10 12
(0.47”)
(0.92”)
(0.39”) G325 G326

23.5
44 G323 G324
59 37 37 9 12
(1.73”) 10 (0.35”) (0.47”)
(2.32”) (1.46”) (0.39”) 12 (1.46”)
(0.47”)
15 16
(0.63”)
(2.28”)
(1.91”)
(0.59”)
48.5
58
BGX80 00
2-39
Contactors
ADD-ON BLOCKS WITH BF CONTACTORS

Auxiliary contacts BFX10... w/2 contacts BFX10... w/4 contacts BFX12...
2 21.4
(0.84”)
29
42.8
(1.68”)
10
(0.39”)
36.5
(1.14”) (1.44”)
(1.63”)
(1.63”)
41.4
41.4
4.3
(0.17”)
G484... G418... G218

8 8
28.2 (0.31”) (0.31”)
(1.11”)
28 27
36 (1.10”) (1.06”)
(1.42”)
(1.85”)
(1.81”)
46.9
46
(1.60”)
40.6
G481..., G482 G280 adapter with G218 contact G419 adapter c/w G418 contacts, G428 contacts
G483 adapter c/w G481 or G482 contacts
8 9.5
(0.31”) 9.5 57
(0.37”) 52.5 (0.37”)
(2.07”) (2.24”)
36 10.3 12.3
(1.42”) (0.40”) (0.48”
(1.69”)
(2.01”)
(1.74”)
43
44.2
51
G485..., G486..., G487 Fourth pole
delayed contacts BFX42 BFXD42
16 16
28 (0.63”) 84.8 (0.63”) 104
(1.10”) (3.34”) (4.09”)
45.7
(1.80”)
(1.76”)
44.7
(3.54”)
(3.54”)
90
90
15.9 15.9
(0.62”)
Interlocks
BFX50 00, BFX50 01 BFX50 02 BFX50 03
10 90 (3.54”) 15
(0.39”) (0.59”)
31.9
(1.15”)
(1.61”)
41
BFX50 02 BFX50 02
2-40
Contactors
Interlock Surge suppressors

G269 2 G318, G319 225, G322
15 8
(0.59”) (0.31”)
2
31.9 23
(1.15”) (0.90”)
(1.61”)
(1.61”)
41
41
G222, G272 latch G454, G455 manual closing BFX80 sealing cover
35
(1.38”)
45 20 45
(1.77”) (0.79”) (1.77”) 4.5
32.1 (0.18”)
29.1 (1.26”)
(1.14”)
(1.52”)
38.7
(1.57”)
(1.54”)
39.2
40
Rigid connecting kits Rigid connecting kits

BFX31 01 BFX32 01
(0 4.2
(0 4.2
”)
”)
90 90 100 90
.16
.16
Ø
Ø
(3.54”) (3.54”) (3.94”) (3.54”)
80 (3.15”)
92 (3.62”)
83 (3.27”)
71 (2.79”)
35 35
BFX31 01 (1.38”) BFX32 01
(1.38”)
G231 terminal G232 terminal G271, G288 terminal

1-pole 1-pole 3 and 4-pole
66.5❸ 49
33.5 34.5 (2.62”) (1.93”)
12 (1.36”)
10 (1.32”)
(0.98”)
(0.47”)
(1.14”)
24.8
(0.39”)
28.9
(0.67”)
(0.63”)
13.6 (0.53”)
17
16
16.5 (0.65”)
11.3
(0.44”)
90mm (3.54”) for G288 terminal only.
G285 auxiliary terminal BFX89 01 fixing base BFX89 02 fixing bracket

(0.67”)
17.1
25 10 9.7
11.5 (0.98”) 45 Ø4.3 (0.39”) (0.38”)
(0.83”)
(0.45”) (1.77”) 14.5 (0.17”)

21
(0.57”)
Ø4.3
(0.83”)
16 (0.63”)
(0.17”)
21
31.8
(2.95”)
(1.77”)
(3.38”)
(1.25”)
75
45
86
11.6
(0.46”)
Ø4.3
(0.17”)
35
(1.38”) Ø3.5
(0.14”)
2-41
Contactors
ADD-ON BLOCKS WITH B CONTACTORS

G350, G354 auxiliary contacts G358 adapter
14.5
111.5
(0.57”)
(4.39”)
2
(2.38”)
60.6
30
(1.18”)
G356 interlocks G356 interlocks

15 29.8
(0.59”) (1.17”)
Terminal protection G360, G361
❶
31.9 102 50
(1.25”) (4.01”) (1.97”)
(2.68”)
68
For interaxis dimensions, refer to page 2-70.
Terminal protection
G363 G527, G529
35.2 127.5 56.5 185
(1.38”) (5.02”) (2.22”) (7.28”) 167 83
(4.61”)
(3.81”)
117
96.7
2-42
Contactors
G528, G530 terminal protection

250 167 83
(9.84”) (6.57”) (3.27”)
2
(4.61”)
117
BA1594, BA1720 2-pole bar G495 latch

B 5
(0.20”)
A
E1 E2
85
PARALLEL POLE BAR A B C (3.35”)
BA1594 45 (1.77”) 32 (1.26”) Ø14 (0.55”) CONTACTOR TYPE A
BA1720 53 (2.09”) 50 (1.97”) Ø18 (0.71”) B115 - B145 - B180 221 (8.70”)
B250 - B400 255 (8.86”)
B500 - B630 300 (11.81”)
BA1845 2-pole bar

80 (3.15”)
40
(1.57”) Ø13 (0.51”) 10
(0.39”)
(0.79”)
20
(2.56”)
65
2-43
Contactors
Wiring diagrams
THREE-POLE CONTACTORS IN AC
BG06 A - BG09 A - BGF09 A - BGP09 A - BG12 A BF26 A - BF32 A - BF38 A B1250 24 - B1600 24...
BF09 A - BF12 A - BF18 A - BF25 A BF50 - BF110
...10 ...01 B115 - B630 1000
The input electronic circuit
2 A1
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5 13 A1
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5 21
L1 L2 L3 of the contactor coil is
L1 L2 L3 designed and tested
A1 1 3 5 A1 according to IEEEC 62.41
standards and can
withstand a 10kV impulse
voltage (1.2/50μs) with 50
Joule energy.
The use of an auxiliary
A2 2 4 6 14 A2 2 4 6 22 reduced voltage
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 A2 2 4 6 A2 transformer is
T1 T2 T3 recommended for higher
T1 T2 T3 values.
THREE-POLE CONTACTORS IN DC
BG06 D - BG09 D - BGF09 D - BGP09 D - BG12 D BF09 D - BF12 D - BF18 D - BF25 D
BG06 L - BG09 L - BGF09 L - BGP09 L - BG12 L BF09 L - BF12 L - BF18 L - BF25 L
...10 ...01 ...10 ...01
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
A1 1 3 5 13 A1 1 3 5 21 A1 1 3 5 13 A1 1 3 5 21
A2 2 4 6 14 A2 2 4 6 22 A2 2 4 6 14 A2 2 4 6 22
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
BF26 D - BF32 D - BF38 D

BF26 L - BF32 L - BF38 L BF50C - BF110C
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5
A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
CONTACTORS FOR POWER FACTOR CORRECTION

BFK09 A - BFK12 A - BFK18 A
BFK26 A - BFK32 A - BFK38 A - BF50K - BF65K - BF70K - BF80K
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5
A1 13

14
A2
2 4 6
T1 T2 T3
Auxiliary contact 13-14 is found on

BFK09 A - BFK12 A - BFK18 A types only.
2-44
Contactors
Wiring diagrams
FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS IN AC
BG09 T4 A - BGF09 T4 A - BGP09 T4 A B1250 4 - B1600 4
BF09 T4 A - BF38 T4 A
BF50 40 - BF65 40 - BF80 40 - BFD80 40
B115 4 - B630 1000 4 L1 L2 L3 L4 2
L1 L2 L3 L4
A1 1 3 5 7 A1
A2 2 4 6 8 A2
T1 T2 T3 T4
T1 T2 T3 T4
The input electronic circuit of the contactor coil is designed and tested according to
IEEEC 62.41 standards and can withstand a 10kV impulse voltage (1.2/50μs) with
50 Joule energy.
The use of an auxiliary reduced voltage transformer is recommended for higher values.
FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS IN DC
BG09 T4 D - BGF09 T4 D - BGP09 T4 D BF09 T4 D - BF38 T4 D BF65C 40 - BF80C 40 - BFD80C 40
BF09 T4 L - BF38 T4 L
L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L3 L4
A1 1 3 5 7 A1 1 3 5 7 A1 1 3 5 7
A2 2 4 6 8 A2 2 4 6 8 A2 2 4 6 8
T1 T2 T3 T4 T1 T2 T3 T4 T1 T2 T3 T4
FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS IN AC WITH 2NO+2NC MAIN POLES WITH 4NC MAIN POLES
BG09 T2 A BF09 T2 A - BF18 T2 A - BF26 T2 A - BF38 T2 A BF18 T0 A - BF26 T0 A
1 R1 R3 3 R1 1 3 R3 R1 R3 R5 R7
A1 NO NC NC NO A1 NC NO NO NC A1 NC NC NC NC
A2 2 R2 R4 4 A2 R2 2 4 R4 A2 R2 R4 R6 R8
FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS IN DC WITH 2NO+2NC MAIN POLES WITH 4NC MAIN POLES
BG09 T2 D BF18 T2 D - BF26 T2 D - BF38 T2 D BF18 T0 D - BF26 T0 D
BF18 T2 L - BF26 T2 L - BF38 T2 L BF18 T0 L
1 R1 R3 3 R1 1 3 R3 R1 R3 R5 R7
A1 NO NC NC NO A1 NC NO NO NC A1 NC NC NC NC
A2 2 R2 R4 4 A2 R2 2 4 R4 A2 R2 R4 R6 R8
CONTROL RELAYS IN AC
BG00 40 A - BGF00 40 A BG00 31 A - BGF00 31 A BG00 22 A - BGF00 22 A BF00 04 A
BF00 40 A BF00 31 A BF00 22 A
A1 13 23 33 43 A1 13 21 33 43 A1 13 21 31 43 A1 11 21 31 41
A2 14 24 34 44 A2 14 22 34 44 A2 14 22 32 44 A2 12 22 32 42
CONTROL RELAYS IN DC
BG00 40 D - BGF00 40 D BG00 31 D - BGF00 31 D BG00 22 D - BGF00 22 D
BG00 40 L - BGF00 40 L BG00 31 L - BGF00 31 L BG00 22 L - BGF00 22 L
A1 13 23 33 43 A1 13 21 33 43 A1 13 21 31 43
A2 14 24 34 44 A2 14 22 34 44 A2 14 22 32 44
BF00 40 D BF00 31 D BF00 22 D BF00 04 D

BF00 40 L BF00 31 L BF00 22 L BF00 04 L
A1 13 23 33 43 A1 13 21 33 43 A1 13 21 31 43 A1 11 21 31 41
A2 14 24 34 44 A2 14 22 34 44 A2 14 22 32 44 A2 12 22 32 42
2-45
Contactors
Wiring diagrams
ADD-ON BLOCKS FOR BG MINI-CONTACTORS

Auxiliary contacts
BGX10 02 BGX10 11 BGX10 20 BGX10 04 BGX10 13 BGX10 22 BGX10 31 BGX10 40
BGXF10 02 BGXF10 11 BGXF10 20 BGXF10 04 BGXF10 13 BGXF10 22 BGXF10 31 BGXF10 40
2 51 61 53 61 53 63 51 61 71 81 53 61 71 81 53 63 71 81 53 63 73 81 53 63 73 83
52 62 54 62 54 64 52 62 72 82 54 62 72 82 54 64 72 82 54 64 74 82 54 64 74 84
Special auxiliary contacts Surge suppressor

BGX11 11 BGX11 22 BGX77... BGX78... BGX79...
51 63 51 61 73 83 ~ + ~
+
–
52 64 52 62 74 84
~ -- ~
Rigid connections
SMX90 21 SMX90 22
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
A1 1 3 5 11 A1 1 3 5 11
A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 A2 2 4 6 12 A2 2 4 6 12
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
ADD-ON BLOCKS FOR BF CONTACTORS

Auxiliary contacts
BFX10 02 BFX10 11 BFX10 20 G484 30 G484 21 G484 12 G484 03
51 61 53 61 53 63 53 63 73 53 61 73 53 61 71 51 61 71
52 62 54 62 54 64 54 64 74 54 62 74 54 62 72 52 62 72
BFX10 04 BFX10 13 BFX10 22 BFX10 31 BFX10 40

51 61 71 81 53 61 71 81 53 61 71 83 53 61 73 83 53 63 73 83
52 62 72 82 54 62 72 82 54 62 72 84 54 62 74 84 54 64 74 84
Auxiliary contact
G218
02 04 04 02
03
94 01
92 01
92 03
94
91 93 93 91
93 91 91 93
92
01 94
03 94
03 92
01
04 02 02 04
The termination of the G218 auxiliary contact has more than one numbering due to the fact that the block can assume various mounting positions.
See the numbering in boldface for a correct interpretation.
2-46
Contactors
Wiring diagrams
Auxiliary contacts
BFX12 02 BFX12 11 BFX12 20 G418 10 G418 10A G418 01 G418 01D
G428 10 G428 10A G428 01 G428 01D
252 262 154 162 154 164 04 08 02 02
281 271 183 171 183 173 93 97 91 91 2
282 272 184

153 172
161 184
153 174
163 94
03 98
07 92
01 96
05
251 261
Mechanical latch
G481 20 G481 11 G481 02 G482 G222... - G272...
NO NO NO NC NC NC
114 124 114 122 112 122 114 111
A1
93 03 93 01 91 01 94 91
A2
94 04 94 02 92 02 92 E1 E2
113 123 113 121 111 121 112
NO NO NO NC NC NC
The termination of the BFX12... / G418... / G481... / G482 auxiliary contacts has more than one numbering due to the fact that the block can assume various mounting
positions. See the numbering in boldface when the block is mounted on the left side of the contactor.
Add-on pole Interlock c/w Delayed auxiliary contacts Surge suppressor

BFX42 contacts G485... G486... - G487 G318... - BFX77... G319 225 G322... - BFX79...
BFXD42 BFX50 01
~ + ~
L4
7 131 131 57 65 67 55
+
–
~ -- ~
8 132 132 58 66 68 56
T4
Rigid connecting kits

BFX31 01 - BFX31 02 - BFX32 01 BFX31 31 - BFX32 31 - BFX32 32
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5
A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
ADD-ON BLOCKS FOR B CONTACTORS Mechanical latch

G350 - G354 auxiliary contacts G495
G354 G350 G350 G354
A1
41
01 73
13 73
13
42
02 74
14 74
14
53
113 53
113 81
21
81
54
or
21
114 54 82
or
114 22
82
22
61 61 93 A2
E1 E2
121 121 33
62
122 62
122 94
34
03 04
34
94 122
62 122
62
33
93 121
61 121
61 91 92
22
82
22 114
82 54 114
21
81
54
21 113
or
81 113
or
53 53
14
74 14 02
74 42
13
73 13 01
73 41
G354 G350 G350 G354
2-47
Contactors
MOUNTING POSITION OF CONTACTORS

ON VERTICAL PLANE For BF series contactors, this inclination can reach ± 90°, that is with the terminals
The performances given in this catalogue have been established with contactors are facing towards left and right.
mounted on a vertical plane with line terminals facing upwards and load terminals For BG mini-contactors:
2 facing downwards.
All contactors can be mounted with a ± 30° inclination to the
– Position A, with coil terminals A1-A2 facing downwards, is not recommended.
– The position with coil terminals A1-A2 facing upwards is not recommended for
vertical axis of the contactor without any derating. mini-contactors with NC contacts.
±30°
0°
±3
A1
A2
Pos. A
ON VERTICAL PLANE WITH 30° INCLINATION

All contactors can be mounted on a plane which varies in respect to the vertical up This inclination is greater than the one prescribed by main naval registers.
to ± 30° angle.
On the average, a 5% increase of the minimum pick-up voltage in -30° position can
be noted.
ON HORIZONTAL PLANE (FOR BF SERIES CONTACTORS)

Considerable performance variations can be noted. The variables which could influence the contactor performance, in addition to the
It is necessary to check the two possible mounting positions: two mounting positions, are:
– when the contactor is energised, the movable equipment moves upwards. – type of contactor
– when the contactor is energised, the movable equipment moves downwards. – type of control
In the first case, it is difficult to close the contactor while in the second, to open it. – contact configuration
– number and type of add-on blocks
– permissible tolerance of auxiliary voltage variation
– ambient temperature.
NOTE: Position B is not recommendable.
Customer Service can provide further information

concerning operational performance of contactors
mounted on a horizontal plane; see contact details on
inside front cover.
DYNAMIC TYPE TESTS

Our contactors have sustained dynamic testing, with contactor mounting position
rotated ± 22.5° in respect to the three orthogonal axes.
2-48
Contactors
IEC UTILISATION CATEGORY AC3 UL/CSA DUTY FOR AC MOTOR SWITCHING

POLE CHARACTERISTICS MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS
Squirrel-cage induction motors; breaking at rated motor current. Three-phase AC induction motors; breaking at
rated motor current.
MAXIMUM IEC OPERATIONAL POWER at ambient temperature 55°C. UL/CSA RATINGS at ambient temperature 55°C 2
Contactor IEC operational IEC operational power Maximum horsepower ratings (60Hz)
type current Three phase
(Ue 440V) 220/230V 380/400V 415V 440V 500V 660/690V 1000V 200-208V 240V 480V 600V
[A] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP]
BG06 6 1.5 2.2 2.4 2.5 3 3 -- 1½ 2 3 3
BG09 9 2.2 4.0 4.3 4.5 5 5 -- 2 3 5 5
BG12 12 3.2 5.7 6.2 5.5 5 5 -- 3 3 7½ 10
BF09 9 2.2 4.2 4.5 4.8 5.5 7.5 -- 3 3 5 7½
BF12 12 3.2 5.7 6.2 6.2 7.5 10 -- 5 5 7½ 10
BF18 18 4 7.5 9 9 10 10 -- 5 5 10 15
BF25 25 7.0 12.5 13.4 13.4 15 18 -- 7½ 7½ 15 15
BF26 26 7.3 13 14 14 15.6 18.5 -- 7½ 7½ 15 20
BF32 32 8.8 16 17 17 20 22 -- 10 10 20 25
BF38 38 11 18.5 18.5 18.5 20 22 -- 10 15 30 30
BF50 50 14.3 25 27.2 27.2 33.2 43.5 25 10 15 30 40
BF65 65 18.5 33 36 36 45.3 59.7 30 20 25 50 60
BF80 80 23 41 46 46 56 74 37 25 30 60 75
BF95 95 27.6 50 55 55 56 74 45 30 30 60 75
BF110 110 33 61 66 70 59 80 45 30 40 75 100
B115 110 33 61 66 70 80 100 63 30 40 75 100
B145 150 46 80 88 93 100 120 75 50 50 100 125
B180 185 57 100 108 115 123 144 103 60 75 150 150
B250 265 83 140 155 164 176 212 156 75 100 200 250
B310 320 100 170 188 200 213 256 180 100 125 250 300
B400 420 130 225 247 263 271 352 208 125 150 350 400
B500 520 156 290 306 328 367 416 312 150 200 400 450
B630 630 198 335 368 368 368 440 368 200 250 500 500
No UL/CSA ratings; data given for indication and reference purposes only.
ELECTRICAL IEC LIFE FOR MOTOR CONTROL AC3 440V

Electrical life of contactors
BF110
B180
B115
B145
B250
B310
B400
B630
BF09
B500
BF18
BF25
BF26
BF50
BF65
BF12
BF38
BF32
BF80
BF95
10
3
MILLION CYCLES
BG 09
2
BG 6
12
BG
0
0.5
0.3
0.2
0.1
3
10
30
2
25
20
50
300
200
5
1000
95 100
400
520 600
420 500
[A]
6
12
18
50
80
630
26
32
65
38
310
250
110
150
185
2-49
Contactors
IEC DC UTILISATION CATEGORY

POLE CHARACTERISTICS
MAXIMUM OPERATIONAL CURRENT

2 IEC Voltage Contactor IEC Maximum current Ie [A] in categories:
Ue DC1 with L/R 1ms DC3 - DC5 with L/R 15ms
and poles in series and poles in series
Type 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
24V BG06 9 12 14 -- 6 7 9 --
BG09 12 15 16 16 7 8 10 10
BG12 12 15 16 -- 7 8 10 --
BF09 15 18 20 20 10 13 15 15
BF12 17 20 22 20 12 15 18 15
BF18 17 20 22 22 12 15 18 18
BF25 20 23 23 -- 15 18 22 --
BF26 25 28 28 28 18 20 25 30
BF32 30 32 32 -- 20 25 30 --
BF38 35 36 36 36 24 28 32 32
BF50 45 60 60 60 30 35 50 55
BF65 50 70 70 70 35 45 55 60
BF80 70 100 100 100 40 60 80 90
BF95 70 100 100 -- 40 60 80 --
BF110 70 100 100 -- 40 60 80 --
48V BG06 8 11 14 -- 5 7 9 --
BG09 10 14 16 16 6 8 10 10
BG12 10 14 16 -- 6 8 10 --
BF09 13 18 20 20 9 11 15 15
BF12 15 20 22 20 11 13 18 15
BF18 15 20 22 22 11 13 18 18
BF25 18 23 23 -- 13 18 22 --
BF26 21 28 28 28 15 20 25 30
BF32 26 32 32 -- 17 22 28 --
BF38 30 34 34 34 20 25 28 28
BF50 40 60 60 60 25 35 50 55
BF65 50 70 70 70 25 40 50 60
BF80 60 100 100 100 30 50 70 90
BF95 60 100 100 -- 30 55 75 --
BF110 60 100 100 -- 30 55 75 --
75V BG06 4 7 8 -- 2 4 5 --
BG09 4 9 10 10 2 5 6 6
BG12 4 9 10 -- 2 5 6 --
BF09 12 17 20 20 8 10 13 15
BF12 13 18 20 20 10 12 15 15
BF18 15 20 20 20 11 13 16 16
BF25 18 23 23 -- 13 16 18 --
BF26 18 25 25 25 13 18 20 25
BF32 22 28 32 -- 15 20 28 --
BF38 23 29 33 33 17 22 28 28
BF50 40 60 60 60 22 30 45 55
BF65 50 70 70 70 25 40 50 60
BF80 60 100 100 100 30 50 70 90
BF95 60 100 100 -- 30 50 70 --
BF110 60 100 100 -- 30 50 70 --
2-50
Contactors
IEC Voltage
Ue
Contactor IEC Maximum current Ie [A] in categories:
DC1 with L/R 1ms DC3 - DC5 with L/R 15ms
2
Type 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
110V BG06 3 6 8 -- 1 3 4 --
BG09 3 8 10 10 1 4 5 5
BG12 3 8 10 -- 1 4 5 --
BF09 6 12 15 16 2 7 11 12
BF12 6 13 16 16 2 8 12 16
BF18 6 13 16 18 2 8 12 13
BF25 6 16 18 -- 2 10 15 --
BF26 6 22 24 24 2 13 18 20
BF32 8 25 27 -- 2.5 15 20 --
BF38 8 32 34 34 2.5 18 23 23
BF50 8 50 55 60 3 25 30 45
BF65 8 60 60 70 3 30 35 50
BF80 8 80 85 100 3 40 60 75
BF95 8 80 85 -- 3 40 60 --
BF110 8 80 85 -- 3 40 60 --
160V BG06 -- 4 6 -- -- 2 3 --
BG09 -- 4 8 8 -- 3 4 4
BG12 -- 4 8 -- -- 3 4 --
220V BG06 - - 1 - - - 0.5 -
BG09 - - 2 2 - - 0.8 0.8
BG12 - - 2 - - - 0.8 -
BF09 4 8 10 12 0.75 1.5 5 7
BF12 4 8 11 12 0.75 1.5 6 7
BF18 4 8 11 13 0.75 1.5 6 8
BF25 4 8 12 -- 0.75 1.5 8 --
BF26 5 12 14 14 0.75 1.5 10 15
BF32 5 14 16 -- 1 3 12 --
BF38 5 20 26 26 1 4 15 15
BF50 6 36 45 50 1 5 20 25
BF65 6 36 50 60 1 5 25 30
BF80 6 40 55 70 1 7 35 40
BF95 6 40 55 -- 1 7 35 --
BF110 6 40 55 -- 1 7 35 --
300V BF09 -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- 5
BF18 -- -- -- 11 -- -- -- 5
BF26 -- -- -- 16 -- -- -- 10
BF38 -- -- -- 25 -- -- -- 12
BF65 -- -- -- 60 -- -- -- 25
BF80 -- -- -- 70 -- -- -- 35
2-51
Contactors
IEC DC UTILISATION CATEGORY


2 IEC Voltage Contactor IEC Maximum current Ie [A] in categories:
Ue DC1 with L/R 1ms DC3 - DC5 with L/R 15ms
Type 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
75V B115 160 160 160 160 140 140 140 140
B145 220 220 220 220 160 160 160 160
B180 260 260 260 260 180 180 180 180
B250 350 350 350 350 280 280 280 280
B310 375 375 375 375 310 310 310 310
B400 400 400 400 400 350 350 350 350
B500 650 650 650 650 550 550 550 550
B630 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
110V B115 100 130 130 130 70 100 120 120
B145 110 150 150 150 80 120 140 140
B180 120 170 170 170 90 140 160 160
B250 160 300 300 300 150 250 280 280
B310 195 350 350 350 170 290 310 310
B400 250 400 400 400 200 350 350 350
B500 320 550 600 600 320 550 550 550
B630 460 800 800 800 460 800 800 800
220V B115 -- 100 130 130 -- 80 100 120
B145 -- 130 150 150 -- 90 120 140
B180 -- 150 170 170 -- 100 140 160
B250 -- 250 300 300 -- 200 250 280
B310 -- 300 350 350 -- 230 290 310
B400 -- 350 400 400 -- 280 350 350
B500 -- 450 600 600 -- 450 550 550
B630 -- 700 800 800 -- 700 800 800
330V B115 -- -- 100 130 -- -- 80 120
B145 - - 130 150 -- -- 90 140
B180 -- -- 150 170 -- -- 100 160
B250 -- -- 250 300 -- -- 200 280
B310 -- -- 300 350 -- -- 230 310
B400 -- -- 350 400 -- -- 280 350
B500 -- -- 450 600 -- -- 450 550
B630 -- -- 700 750 -- -- 650 700
460V B115 -- -- -- 100 -- -- -- 80
B145 -- -- -- 130 -- -- -- 90
B180 -- -- -- 150 -- -- -- 100
B250 -- -- -- 250 -- -- -- 200
B310 -- -- -- 300 -- -- -- 230
B400 -- -- -- 350 -- -- -- 280
B500 -- -- -- 450 -- -- -- 450
B630 -- -- -- 700 -- -- -- 700
2-52
Contactors
IEC UTILISATION CATEGORIES DC1, DC3 AND DC5.

CHOICE CRITERIA POLES IN SERIES
The elements to be considered for the contactor choice are: It is important to use contactors with the indicated number of poles in series
-- Rated operational current Ie
-- Rated operational voltage Ue
depending on operating voltage.
The poles in series can be connected to one single polarity or divided between the
2
-- Utilisation category and L/R time constant two polarities of the circuit indifferently.
-- Eventual verification of electrical life. NOTE. For voltages lower than 30V, the diagrams given in figures 3 and 4 are not
recommendable since voltage drops can take place. In these cases, it is better to use
OPERATING CONDITIONS poles in parallel considering the notes given in the following section.
Indicated current is valid for:
-- Ambient temperature 55°C
-- Operating cycles: up to 120 cy/h with 60% on-load factor
up to 250 cy/h with 30% on-load factor.
Examples of poles in series:

1 POLE 2 POLES 3 POLES 4 POLES
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 Fig. 4
POLES IN PARALLEL
It is possible to increase the electrical life by placing poles in series when using The value can be obtained by multiplying the rated current of one pole by the K
voltages which require 1 or 2 poles in parallel. factor given below; e.g.: if one pole carries 10A, three poles in parallel can carry
Poles in parallel do not increase the maximum operational current given in the 10 x 2.2 = 22A.
previous pages; that is, if one pole has a maximum operational current in DC5 of 8A, Therefore, the operating current is the one indicated in the tables, multiplied by the
two poles in parallel, it will always be 8A. K factor given below which takes into consideration the unequal current division on
With poles in parallel, it is possible to increase the rated contact capacity (Ith) only if the various poles.
the contactor opens and closes in no-load conditions or when used as resistance 2 POLES in parallel K = 1.6
shunts. 3 POLES in parallel K = 2.2
In this case, the contact capacity can be increased. 4 POLES in parallel K = 2.8
Examples of poles in parallel:

1 POLE in series and 1 POLE in series and 1 POLE in series and 2 POLE in series and
2 POLES in parallel 3 POLES in parallel 4 POLES in parallel 2 POLES in parallel
Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7 Fig. 8
MAXIMUM OPERATIONAL CURRENT OTHER CONDITIONS

See tables on pages 2-50 to 2-52. For different operating conditions or voltage not included among those indicated in
the tables, on pages 2-50 to 2-52, consult Customer Service; see contact details on
inside front cover.
2-53
Contactors
IEC SELECTION GUIDE FOR LIGHTING CIRCUIT SWITCHING

GENERAL INFORMATION Depending on the number and type of lamps, it is also important to bear in mind the
The elements which are to be considered for the contactor choice are: main discriminating characteristics given below for the contactor choice:
– Type of lamp – Incandescent lamps contactor making capacity
2 – Power factor (cos)
– With or without power factor correction
– Lamps not corrected rated contactor current in AC1
– Lamps corrected rated contactor current in AC3
– Value of current when switching on and in running The table below summarises the major characteristics depending on the more
conditions. commonly used type of lamps:
Type of lamps Switching on Switching off
Multiple of In cos Multiple of In cos
Incandescent 15 1 1 1
Mixed light 1.3 1 1 1
Fluorescent 1.15 - 1.3 0.2 1 0.3 - 0.5 (not corrected)
1 (corrected)
High-pressure mercury vapour 1.5 - 1.75 0.2 1 0.45 - 0.7 (not corrected)
High-pressure sodium vapour 1.3 - 1.5 0.2 1 0.3 - 0.5 (not corrected)
Low-pressure sodium vapour 1 0.2 - 0.5 1 0.2 - 0.5 (not corrected)
Metal halide 1.7 - 2.1 0.2 1 0.4 - 0.5 (not corrected)
Lamp Lamp Rated Capacitor Maximum number [n] of lamps for each contactor pole
features power current capacity
BG06 BF09 BF80
BG09 BF12 BF26 BF95
[W] [A] [μF] BG12 BF18 BF25 BF32 BF38 BF50 BF65 BF110 B115 B145 B180
INCANDESCENT 60 0.27 - 30 48 92 118 129 203 240 296 370 425 462
220/240V 50/60Hz 100 0.45 - 18 28 55 71 77 122 144 177 222 255 277
200 0.91 - 8 14 27 35 38 60 71 87 109 126 137
300 1.4 - 5 9 17 22 25 39 46 57 71 82 89
500 2.3 - 3 5 10 13 15 23 28 34 43 50 54
1000 4.6 - 1 2 5 6 7 11 14 17 21 25 27
MIXED LIGHT 100 0.45 - 20 33 57 77 88 122 144 177 244 311 377
220/240V 50/60Hz 160 0.72 - 12 20 36 48 55 76 90 111 152 194 236
250 1.13 - 8 13 23 30 35 48 57 70 97 123 150
500 2.3 - 4 6 11 15 17 23 28 34 47 60 73
1000 4.6 - 1 3 5 7 8 11 14 17 23 30 36
ELECTRONIC BALLAST FLUORESCENT Single mounting 16 / 18 0.1 (6.8) 48 80 160 220 220 400 450 500 750 1050 1200
220/240V 50/60Hz 32 / 36 0.18 (6.8) 27 44 88 122 122 222 250 277 416 583 666
50 / 58 0.27 (10) 17 29 59 82 82 148 166 185 277 388 444
Dual mounting 2x16 / 18 0.18 (10) 26 44 88 122 122 222 250 277 416 583 666
2x32 / 36 0.35 (10) 13 22 45 62 62 114 128 142 214 300 342
2x50 / 58 0.52 (22) 9 15 30 42 42 76 86 96 144 201 230
STANDARD FLUORESCENT Not corrected 15 0.35 - 25 42 74 100 114 157 185 228 314 400 485
220/240V 50/60Hz Single 20 0.37 - 24 40 70 94 108 148 175 216 297 378 459
mounting
40 0.44 - 20 34 59 79 90 125 147 181 250 318 386
65 0.7 - 12 21 37 50 57 78 92 114 157 200 242
115 1.5 - 6 10 17 23 26 36 43 53 73 93 113
140 1.5 - 6 10 17 23 26 36 43 53 73 93 113
Corrected 15 0.11 4.5 24 40 62 94 94 200 200 200 533 533 533
Single 20 0.16 4.5 24 40 62 94 94 200 200 200 533 533 533
mounting
40 0.24 4.5 24 40 62 94 94 200 200 200 458 500 520
65 0.4 7 15 25 40 50 57 125 128 128 275 300 312
115 0.7 18 6 10 15 23 23 50 50 50 133 133 133
140 0.7 18 6 10 15 23 23 50 50 50 133 133 133
DUO circuit 2 x 20 0.26 - 54 57 100 153 153 211 250 307 423 538 653
(lead-lag) 2 x 40 0.46 - 19 32 56 86 86 119 141 173 239 304 369
2 x 65 0.7 - 12 21 37 57 57 78 92 114 157 200 242
2 x 115 1.3 - 6 11 20 30 30 42 50 61 84 107 130
2 x 140 1.5 - 6 10 17 26 26 36 43 53 73 93 113
In = Rated lamp current.
For 220/240V circuits, either single-phase (between phase and neutral) or 2-wire (between phase and phase), the maximum number of lamps is as per the table.
For three-phase circuits with neutral 380/415V or 220/240V, the maximum number of lamps controlled by the same contactor is n • 3.
For three-phase 380/415V circuits without neutral, the maximum number of lamps controlled by the same contactor is n • 3.
Electrical life is 100,000 cycles up to 55°C.
Incorporated capacitor.
Total.
3-54
Contactors
Lamp Lamp Rated Capacitor Maximum number [n] of lamps for each contactor pole
features power current capacity
BG06 BF09 BF80
BG09 BF12 BF26 BF95
[W] [A] [μF] BG12 BF18 BF25 BF32 BF38 BF50 BF65 BF110 B115 B145 B180 2
HIGH-PRESSURE MERCURY VAPOUR Not corrected 50 0.61 - 10 16 26 36 44 65 73 82 122 172 196
220/240V 50/60Hz 80 0.8 - 7 12 20 27 33 50 56 62 93 131 150
125 1.2 - 5 8 13 18 22 33 37 41 62 87 100
250 2.2 - 3 4 7 10 12 18 20 22 34 47 54
400 3.4 - 2 3 5 6 7 11 13 14 22 30 35
700 5.5 - 1 3 4 4 7 8 9 13 19 21
1000 8 - 1 2 2 3 5 5 6 9 13 15
Corrected 50 0.29 7 15 25 40 60 60 128 128 128 258 342 342
80 0.42 8 13 22 35 52 53 95 107 112 178 250 285
125 0.7 10 8 14 22 31 35 57 64 71 107 150 171
250 1.3 18 4 7 12 16 19 30 34 38 57 80 92
400 2.1 25 2 4 7 10 11 19 21 23 35 50 57
700 3.6 40 - 2 4 6 6 11 12 13 20 29 33
1000 5.3 60 - 1 3 4 4 7 8 9 14 19 22
380/415V 50/60Hz Not corrected 2000 8 - - 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 8 9
Corrected 2000 5.5 35 - 1 2 2 4 5 5 8 11 13
HIGH-PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR Not corrected 150 1.8 - 3 5 8 12 15 22 25 27 41 58 66
220/240V 50/60Hz 250 3 - 2 3 5 7 9 13 15 16 25 35 40
400 4.7 - 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 15 22 25
600 7.1 - - 1 2 3 3 5 6 6 10 15 16
1000 10.4 - - 1 2 2 3 4 4 7 10 11
Corrected 150 0.83 20 - 9 14 19 21 45 45 45 90 120 120
250 1.5 36 - 5 7 10 11 25 25 25 50 66 66
400 2.4 48 - 3 5 6 7 16 18 18 31 43 50
600 3.5 68 - 2 3 4 4 10 12 12 20 28 34
1000 6.3 120 - 1 1 2 2 6 7 7 11 16 19
LOW-PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR Not corrected 35 1.5 - 4 6 10 14 18 26 30 33 50 70 80
220/240V 50/60Hz 55 1.5 - 4 6 10 14 18 26 30 33 50 70 80
90 2.4 - 3 4 6 9 11 16 18 20 31 43 50
135 3.1 - 2 3 5 7 8 12 14 16 24 33 38
150 3.2 - 2 3 5 6 8 12 14 15 23 32 37
180 3.3 - 2 3 4 6 8 12 13 15 22 31 36
Corrected 35 0.31 20 - 6 10 14 18 45 45 45 120 120 120
55 0.42 20 - 6 10 14 18 45 45 45 120 120 120
90 0.63 30 - 4 6 9 11 30 30 30 80 80 80
135 0.94 40 - 3 5 7 8 22 22 22 60 60 60
150 1 40 - 3 5 6 8 22 22 22 60 60 60
180 1.2 40 - 3 4 6 8 22 22 22 60 60 60
METAL HALIDE Not corrected 35 0.3 - - 28 50 66 80 100 150 167 250 330 400
220/240V 50/60Hz 70 0.5 - - 16 28 40 50 60 90 100 150 200 240
150 1 - - 8 14 20 25 30 45 50 75 100 120
250 3 - - 3 5 7 9 13 15 16 25 35 40
400 3.5 - - 2 4 6 7 11 12 14 21 30 34
1000 10 - - 1 1 2 2 4 4 5 7 10 12
2000 17 - - - 1 1 2 2 2 4 6 7
Corrected 35 0.17 6 - 33 60 65 65 200 240 260 400 420 440
70 0.28 12 - 20 36 40 40 120 145 155 240 255 265
150 0.6 20 - 9 17 18 18 56 68 74 112 118 120
250 1.5 32 - 5 7 8 10 26 28 28 46 50 53
400 2 35 - 4 5 6 7 20 22 25 35 37 40
1000 5.8 95 - 1 1 2 2 6 7 8 12 12 13
2000 11.5 148 - - - 1 1 3 3 4 6 6 6
380/415V 50/60Hz Not corrected 2000 10.3 - - - - 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 7
3500 18 - - - - - - 1 1 1 2 3 4
Corrected 2000 6.6 60 - - 1 1 1 3 3 4 6 7 7
3500 11.6 100 - - - - - 2 2 2 3 3 4
For 220/240V circuits, either single-phase (between phase and neutral) or 2-wire (between phase and phase), the maximum number of lamps is as per the table.
For three-phase circuits with neutral 380/415V or 220/240V, the maximum number of lamps controlled by the same contactor is n • 3.
For three-phase 380/415V circuits without neutral, the maximum number of lamps controlled by the same contactor is n • 3.
Electrical life is 100,000 cycles up to 55°C.
3-55
Contactors
CONTACTORS FOR LIGHTING APPLICATIONS FOR NORTH AMERICA

In general, the North American market refers to lighting contactor ratings in hand, discharge lamps with ballast have highly inductive closing current and its
Amperes, without distinction between incandescent or ballast type of load. duration depends on the type of lamp. Thus, ratings are selected for mixed lamp
Incandescent lamps with tungsten filament have very low Ohmic resistance when loads which consider the higher incandescent in-rush given below.
2 cold. As a result, the closing current is very high but also very short. On the other
Lamp Maximum current [A] per contactor pole

features
BG09
BG12 BF09A BF12A BF18A BF25A BF26A BF32A BF38A BF50 BF65 BF80 BF95 BF110 B115 B145 B180
INCANDESCENT
120-240VAC 50/60Hz 8.1 15 17 20 27 35 36 42 60 80 90 105 120 130 145 180
MIXED LIGHT
120-240VAC 50/60Hz 9.2 15 17 20 26 30 35 40 55 65 80 85 90 110 140 170
ELECTRONIC BALLAST FLUORESCENT
120-240VAC 50/60Hz Single mounting 5 8 10 12 16 18 22 25 40 45 50 60 70 75 105 120
Double mounting 5 8 10 12 16 18 22 25 40 45 50 60 70 75 105 120
STANDARD FLUORESCENT
120-240VAC 50/60Hz Not corrected, 9 15 17 20 26 30 35 40 55 65 80 85 90 110 140 170
single mounting
Corrected, 6 10 12 14 16 23 23 25 50 50 55 55 60 110 120 125
single mounting
DUO circuit (lead-lag) 14 15 18 20 26 40 42 45 55 65 80 95 90 110 140 170
HIGH-PRESSURE MERCURY VAPOUR
120-240VAC 50/60Hz Not corrected 6.8 10 12 15 17 22 25 27 40 45 50 55 60 75 105 120
Corrected 5.6 10 12 14 16 22 24 25 40 45 50 55 60 75 105 120
380-415VAC 50/60Hz Not corrected - - - - 8 12 16 16 24 24 32 32 35 40 65 75
Corrected - - - - 5.5 10 12 12 22 28 28 30 30 44 60 72
HIGH-PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR
120-240VAC 50/60Hz Not corrected 6 9.4 11 13 15 22 25 27 40 45 50 53 55 75 110 120
Corrected - 7.5 9 10 12 15 16 17 38 44 44 46 48 72 103 120
LOW-PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR
120-240VAC 50/60Hz Not corrected 7.2 9 10 13 15 20 22 27 40 45 50 53 55 75 105 120
Corrected - 3.5 3.5 5 5 6 8 10 20 23 23 25 25 70 72 75
METAL HALIDE
120-240VAC 50/60Hz Not corrected - 9 10 10 15 17 21 27 40 45 50 53 55 75 105 120
Corrected - 8 8 10 11 12 14 15 40 44 50 53 55 70 75 80
380-415VAC 50/60Hz Not corrected - - - - - 8 10 11 21 21 30 33 35 40 60 70
Corrected - - - - 5 6 7 7 23 25 25 25 25 40 43 45
Duo mounting or circuit, with power factor improvement, is obtained by matching an inductive circuit to a capacitive circuit.
2-56
Contactors
POSITIVE (FORCE) GUIDED CONTACTS

Positive (force) guided contacts are a requirement in safety circuits to correctly be in closed position simultaneously with a normally-open power contact. For this
monitor the status of normally open power contacts. Guided contacts imply that purpose and to satisfy standard requirements, particular constructional details, such
Normally Open (NO) and Normally Closed (NC) operate together reciprocally but can as minimum gap tolerance through which the mobile contact travels are necessary
never be simultaneously closed, even in the case NO contacts weld. Due to ever-
growing importance of safety in all aspects of electrotechnology, a few years ago,
and the points of actuation are closer to the actual contact position. All this guarantees
an appropriate clearance between NO and NC contacts in case of failure or malfunction.
2
IEC/EN authorities introduced in product standards, details to define the In the past, mirror contacts were called positively-guided contacts, forced contacts,
terminology, requirements, tests, specifics and symbology of auxiliary contacts with linked contacts or positively-driven contacts.
these characteristics as follows: A typical application of this type of contact is in control circuits of equipment and
machinery where it is important to have a highly reliable monitoring of the contactor
– IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Annex F status. Besides, it is recommended to include an automatic control of redundancy
Applied to contactors with built-in and add-on auxiliary contacts (self-checking function) for the circuit of contacts to guarantee the utmost safety to
This standard includes details about “Requirements for auxiliary contact linked with the installation.
power contact” and has designated them as "mirror contacts". It is applied to The symbol of this type of contact is given after the table and identifies mirror
auxiliary contacts mechanically linked with power contacts of a contactor. contacts, marked directly on the contactor itself or included in the relative
A contactor can have more than one mirror contact. documentation for types with built-in auxiliary contact.
A mirror contact is defined to be a normally-closed auxiliary contact which cannot The following table given the types of contactors and relative connectable auxiliary
contacts that have been tested and certified as “mirror contacts”.
Type of auxiliary contacts Type of auxiliary contacts
G481…(3 types)+G483
G481…(3 types)+G483
BGX10 02 - BGX1011
BGX10 02 - BGX1011
BFX1002 - BFX1011 -
BFX1004 - BFX1013 -
BFX1002 - BFX1011 -
BFX1004 - BFX1013 -
BFX10222 BFX1031
BFX10222 BFX1031
BFX1201 - BFX1211
BFX1201 - BFX1211
G484 03 - G48412 -
G484 03 - G48412 -
G48102 - G48111 -
G48102 - G48111 -
Type of contactor Type of contactor
G218 + G280
G218 + G280
G350 - G354
G350 - G354
BFX50 01
BFX50 01
BGX1004
BGX1004
G48421
G48421
Built-in
Built-in
G218
G481
G218
G481
BG0601 A/D/F – – – – – – – – – BF26T4 A/D/L – – – –
BG0610 A/D/L – – – – – – – – – – BF3200 A/D/L – – – –
BG0901 A/D/L – – – – – – – – – BF3800 A/D/L – – – –
BG0910 A/D/L – – – – – – – – – – BF38T4 A/D/L – – – –
BG09 T4 A/D – – – – – – – – – – BF5000 AC/DC – – – – – – – – –
BG1201 A/D/L – – – – – – – – – BF5040 AC – – – – – – – – –
BG1210 A/D/L – – – – – – – – – – BF6500 AC/DC – – – – – – – – –
BF0901 A/D/L – – BF6540 AC/DC – – – – – – – – –
BF0910 A/D/L – – – BF8000 AC/DC – – – – – – – – –
BF09 T4 A/D/L – – – BF8040 AC/DC – – – – – – – – –
BF1201 A/D/L – – BF9500 AC/DC – – – – – – – – –
BF1210 A/D/L – – – BF11000 AC/DC – – – – – – – – –
BF12 T4 A – – – B11500 - B18000 – – – – – – – – – –
BF1801 A/D/L – – B115400 - B180400 – – – – – – – – – –
BF1810 A/D/L – – – B25000 - B40000 – – – – – – – – – –
BF18T4 A/D/L – – – B250400 - B400400 – – – – – – – – – –
BF2501 A/D/L – – B50000 - B630 1000 – – – – – – – – – –
BF2510 A/D/L – – – – B500400 - B6301000 4 – – – – – – – – – –
BF2600 A/D/L – – – –
– IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Annex L

Applied to auxiliary contact elements Mechanically linked contacts elements are combinations of n Make contact
These elements are designated to be “mechanically linked” and can be included in element(s) and m Break contact element(s) designed in such a way that they cannot
devices for control circuits where the actuation force is provided internally, for be in closed position simultaneously. This signifies that:
instance control relays (LOVATO Electric BG00 and BF00). – “While any of the n Make contact element(s) is closed, none of the m Break
Though linkage between the auxiliary and main contacts is in no way considered by contact element(s) shall be closed.”
this other standard, this does not prevent a given auxiliary contact to comply with – “While any of the m Break contact element(s) is closed, none of the n Make
and satisfy both requirements for “mirror contact” described above and for contact element(s) shall be closed.”
“mechanically linked contact” given below. A control circuit device can have more than one group of mechanically-linked
Moreover, it is also very important to be aware of the fact that control circuit devices contact elements.
actuated externally (e.g. push buttons or limit switches) do not have mechanically A typical application of mechanically linked contact elements is self-monitoring in
linked contact elements. Such devices, in safety applications, generally have machine control circuits.
contacts with direct opening action. This type is characteristic and standard supplied in several types of LOVATO Electric
In the past, mechanically linked contact elements have been referred to as forced control relays and auxiliary contact blocks which have at least one NO and one NC
contacts, positively activated contacts or linked contacts. contacts.
Details about "Special requirements for mechanically linked contact elements" are The symbol for mechanical linkage is identified in the circuit diagrams by a double
defined by the standard as: parallel line connecting a filled circle on each of the mechanically linked contacts as
illustrated below:
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.
2-57
Contactors
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS

CHOICE CRITERIA AMBIENT OPERATING CONDITIONS
The contactor during the closing transition is influenced by electrical currents Ambient temperature: 50 °C.
having high frequencies and high amplitudes. For temperatures higher than 50°C up to 70 °C, stated maximum operational power
2 The frequencies of these currents range between 1 and 10kHz; the amplitudes must
have values lower than the maximum permissible current peak of the contactor to
ratings are to be reduced by a percentage equal to the difference between the
ambient temperature and 50°C.
be used. Operating cycle: 120 cy/h
Electrical life: 100,000 cycles.
SELECTION GUIDE
Contactor IEC Maximum IEC Fuse IEC maximum operational power
rated permissible maximum at voltages:
current peak operational 220V
current voltage 230V 380V 415V 500V
gG 240V 400V 440V 660/690V
Type [A] [A] [V] [A] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar]
BF09 A 12 500 690 16 4.5 7.5 9 10
BF12 A 16 550 690 25 6 11 12 14
BF18 A 22 1000 690 32 9 15 16 18
BF25 A 22 1000 690 32 9 15 16 18
BF26 A 30 1400 690 40 11 20 22 22
BF32 A 38 1700 690 50 14 25 27 30
BF38 A 42 1900 690 63 16 28 30 34
BF50 60 2500 1000 80 23 40 44 50
BF65 70 2700 1000 100 26 45 50 56
BF80 90 3000 1000 125 34 60 65 70
BF95 90 3000 1000 125 34 60 65 70
BF110 90 3000 1000 125 34 60 65 70
B115 130 3200 1000 200 50 87 93 115
B145 150 3400 1000 200 57 100 108 130
B180 170 3600 1000 250 65 112 122 150
B250 240 5100 1000 315 91 158 172 210
B310 265 5900 1000 315 105 184 200 245
B400 320 7500 1000 400 122 211 230 280
B500 500 9000 1000 630 190 330 360 430
B630 610 11000 1000 800 230 400 432 520
The use of contactors with the above operational powers is allowable only when the LIMITING INDUCTANCES
peak current, in the installation point of the power factor correction board, is lower The use of limiting inductances is imperative when the system inductances (line
than the values stated in the table. transformer and cables), upstream of the power factor correction panel, are not
If this condition is not verified, it is necessary to use limiting inductances or specific able to maintain the maximum connecting current within the limit value of the
contactors stated on page 2-14. Consult Customer Service (see contact details on contactor used.
inside front cover) to obtain detailed information on the correct use of contactors
without limiting inductances. FAST DISCHARGE RESISTANCES OF CAPACITORS
The use of the contactor, according to the wiring diagram given, allows the fast
discharge of the capacitors as well as the instantaneous disconnection of the
capacitors from the mains when the coil is de-energised.
The resistances, indicated in the following table, guarantee the discharge within a
maximum time of 2 seconds.
L1 L2 L3
FU1
R
0
1
1 3 5 .1 .1
KM1
2 4 6 .2 .2
U V W
Capacitor power Voltage 220-230V Voltage 380-500V

[kvar] [] [W] [] [W]
2.5-5 3900 12 8200 12
10-15 1800 25 4300 25
20-50 1000 50 2200 50
2-58
Contactors
SPECIAL CONTACTORS FOR POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS

GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS The BFK version, figure 1, is designed for three-phase switching. The peculiarity of
These contactors are equipped with early-make contacts. This special type of this type is in the contacts, suitable to connect limiting resistors, which close only
contact has the purpose of connecting for a very brief interval, 2-3ms, during the for the time needed to limit any in-rush current peak and then reopen to avoid
contactor closing, resistors which limit the connecting current of the capacitors.
These resistors are then excluded when the closing operation is complete and the
eventual flow of residual currents through the resistors. 2
current capacity is conveyed to the main contacts. With this type of circuit, it is AMBIENT OPERATING CONDITIONS
possible to obtain minor wear of all the components of the system especially fuses Ambient temperature: 50 °C
and capacitors ensuring a longer life and better reliability. For ambient temperature higher than 50°C up to 70°C, maximum operational power
The contactors are particularly suitable for use in automatic power factor correction ratings, indicated in the table, are to be reduced by a percentage equal to the difference
panels since there is no need of limiting inductances and a source of heat has been between the ambient temperature and 50°C.
eliminated. In this way, these modular electric switchboards can be more compact. Operating cycles: 120 cy/h.
Electrical life: 200,000 cycles.
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5
A1 13

14
A2
2 4 6
T1 T2 T3
Auxiliary contact 13-14 is found on

BFK09 A - BFK12 A - BFK18 A types only.
CHOICE OF CONTACTORS TYPE BFK/BF...K ACCORDING TO IEC

Contactor Built-in IEC rated IEC fuse Maximum IEC power
auxiliary operational current gG at 50°C (AC6b)
contacts 220V
NO 230V 380V 415V 500V
440V 240V 400V 440V 690V
Type n° [A] [A] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar]
BFK09 A 1 12 16 4.5 7.5 9 10
BFK12 A 1 18 25 7 12.5 14 16
BFK18 A 1 23 40 9 15 17 20
BFK26 A –– 30 40 11 20 22 25
BFK32 A –– 36 63 14 25 27.5 30
BFK38 A –– 43 63 17 30 33 36
BF50 K –– 58 80 22 38 41 46
BF65 K –– 70 100 26 45 50 56
BF70 K –– 75 125 30 50 56 65
BF80 K –– 90 125 34 60 65 70
NOTE: See page 2-12 for order codes.
Consult Customer Service (see contact details on inside front cover) for the use of contactors to switch within delta connection.
CHOICE OF CONTACTORS TYPE BFK/BF..K ACCORDING TO cULus LISTING

Contactor Built-in UL/CSA UL/CSA Maximum UL/CSA operational
auxiliary rated current protection fuse power at voltage:
contacts SC/gG
NO (SPST) 440V 240V 480V 600V
Type n° [A] [A] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar]
BFK 09 1 12 16 4.5 9 10
BFK 12 1 18 25 7 14 16
BFK 18 1 23 40 9 17 20
BFK 26 –– 30 40 11 22 27.5
BFK 32 –– 36 63 14 27.5 32
BFK 38 –– 43 63 17 33 36
BF50 K –– 58 80 22 41 46
BF65 K –– 68 100 26 50 56
BF70 K –– 72 125 30 60 65
BF80 K –– 78 125 34 65 70
NOTE: See page 2-14 for order codes.
Consult Customer Service (see contact details on inside front cover) for information about the use of contactors to switch within delta/wye connection.
2-59
Contactors
IEC OPERATIONAL CHARACHERISTICS BG00 AND BF00

TYPE BG00 BF00 A BF00 D BF00 L
POLE CONTACT CHARACTERISTICS
2 Poles n° 4
Conventional free air A 10
thermal current Ith (40°C)
Frequency limit Hz 25-400
UL/CSA and AC A600
IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation DC Q600 P600
Terminals A 7.5 8.3
B 4 3.5
Screw M3 M3.5
B
A Phillips 2 2
Quick-connect Faston 1x6.35mm - 2x2.8mm ––
Tightening torque Nm 0.8...1 1.5...1.8
for contact terminals min-max lbft 0.59-0...74 1.03...1.33
Tightening torque Nm 0.8...1
for coil terminals min-max lbft 0.59...0.74
Phillips 2
Conductor section connectable with 1 or 2
wires min...max AWG stranded n° 18...12 16...10
Flexible w/o lug mm2 0.75...2.5 1...6
Flexible c/w boot-lace mm2 2x1.5 or 1x2.5 1...4
ferrule
Flexible c/w spade lug mm2 2x1.5 or 1x2.5 1...4
Terminal protection according to IEC/EN 60529 IP20
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature °C -40...+60 -50...+70
Storage temperature °C -55...+70 -60...+80
Operation position Normal On vertical plane
Allowable ±30°
Fixing Screw or 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
Derating for use at 61-400 Hz. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.
IP20 protection warranted by wired equipment; minimum 0.75mm2 conductor section for BG00 or 1mm2 for BF00.
NO and NC auxiliary contacts are highly conductive; all SPST.
ELECTRICAL RATINGS BASED ON IEC/EN 60947-5-1 UTILIZATION CATEGORIES AND UL508/CSA C22.2 n°14
IEC/EN IEC/EN Conventional Rated operational current Ie [A] VA rating
designation utilization enclosed thermal at rated operational voltage Ue
category current Ithe
UL designation –– Thermal Maximum Amperes (AC) 60Hz Maximum
continuous VA
test current 120VAC 240VAC 380VAC 480VAC 600VAC
Alternating current [A] Make Break Make Break Make Break Make Break Make Break Make Break
A600 AC-15 10 60 6 30 3 19 1.9 15 1.5 12 1.2 7200 720
Direct current Maximum Amperes (DC) Make or Break
125VDC 250VDC 301VDC 400VDC 500VDC 600VDC 300V or less
P600 DC-13 5 1.1 0.55 0.2 0.31 0.27 0.2 138 138
Q600 DC-13 2.5 0.55 0.27 0.1 0.15 0.13 0.1 69 69
Value at 301V is valid for UL/CSA up to 600VDC; the others are valid for IEC/EN.
Voltage valid for UL/CSA only.
2-60
Contactors
TYPE BG00 BF00 A BF00 D BF00 L

AC CONTROL
Rated control voltage at 50/60Hz or 60Hz V 12-575 12-600 –– ––
Operating voltage limits 2
50/60Hz coil 50Hz pick-up % Us 75-115 80-110 –– ––
powered at drop-out % Us 20-55 20-55 –– ––
60Hz pick-up % Us 75-115 80-110 –– ––
drop-out % Us 20-55 20-55 –– ––
60Hz coil 60Hz pick-up % Us 75-115 80-110 –– ––
powered at drop-out % Us 20-55 20-55 –– ––
Average coil consumption at 20°C
50/60Hz coil 50Hz in-rush VA 30 75 –– ––
powered at holding VA 4 9 –– ––
60Hz in-rush VA 25 70 –– ––
holding VA 3 6,5 –– ––
60Hz coil 60Hz in-rush VA 30 75 –– ––
powered at holding VA 4 8 –– ––
Dissipation at holding 20°C 50Hz W 0.95 2.5 –– ––
DC CONTROL
Rated control voltage V 6-250 -–– 6-415 6-415
Operating voltage limits pick-up % Us 75-115 –– 70-125 80-110
drop-out % Us 10-20 –– 10-40 10-40
Average consumption at 20°C (in-rush/holding) W 3.2 –– 5.4 2.4
OPERATING TIMES
Average time for Us AC closing NO ms 12-21 8-24 –– ––
control in opening NO ms 9-18 10-20 –– ––
closing NC ms 17-26 17-30 –– ––
opening NC ms 7-17 7-18 –– ––
DC closing NO ms 18-25 –– 54-66 75-91
opening NO ms 2-3 –– 14-17 15-19
closing NC ms 3-5 –– 24-30 24-30
opening NC ms 11-17 –– 47-57 67-81
LIFE
Mechanical AC control cycles 20 million
DC control cycles 20 million
MAXIMUM OPERATING RATE
Mechanical operations cycles/h 3600
2.3W for low-consumption BG00...L version.
NC closing time for BF00 04D is 23-29ms while NC opening time is 40-49 ms.
NC closing time for BF00 04L is 25-31ms while NC opening time is 56-68 ms.
2-61
Contactors
IEC OPERATIONAL CHARACTERISTICS BG06, BG09 AND BG12

TYPE BG06 BG09 BG12
2 Power poles n° 3 3-4 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690 690 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6 6 6
Operational frequency Hz 25-400 25-400 25-400
Operational Conventional free air A 16 20 20
current thermal Ith (40°C)
AC3 (440V 55°C) A 6 9 12
AC4 (400V) A 3.3 4.0 4.8
Short-time allowable current A 96 96 96
for 10s (IEC/EN 60947-1)
Maximum fuse size gG A 16 20 20
Type 1 or2 aM A 6 10 16
Making capacity (RMS value) A 92 92 120
Breaking capacity 440V A 72 72 96
at voltage 500V A 72 72 72
690V A 72 72 72
Consumption per m 10 10 10
pole and resistance Ith W 2.6 4 4
(average values)
AC3 W 0.36 0.81 1.44
Terminals A 7.5 7.5 7.5
B 4 4 4
B
screw M3 M3 M3
A
Phillips 2 2 2
Quick-connect Faston –– 1x6.35mm or 2x2.8mm ––
Solder –– PCB solder pin ––
Tightening torque Nm 0.8...1 0.8...1 0.8...1
for pole and coil terminals min-max lbft 0.59...0.74 0.59...0.74 0.59...0.74
Phillips 2 2 2
Conductor section connectable
with 1 or 2 wires min...max
AWG stranded n° 18...12
Flexible w/o lug mm2 0.75...2.5
Flexible c/w boot-lace mm2 2x1.5 or 1x2.5
ferrule
Flexible c/w spade lug mm2 2x1.5 or 1x2.5
Terminal protection to IEC/EN 60529 IP20
AUXILIARY CONTACT CHARACTERISTICS
Type of contact n° 1-NO or NC based on configuration (SPST)
Thermal current Ith A 10
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation AC A600
DC Q600
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature °C -40...+60
Storage temperature °C -55...+70
Operating Normal On vertical plane
position Allowable ± 30°
Rated voltage Ui for BGP... types is 500V and 300V only for UL ratings.
Derating for use at 61-400Hz. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.
Current values guarantee an electrical life of about 50,000 cycles.
Dimensions and drilling distances are given on page 2-32.
IP20 protection warranted by wired equipment; minimum 0.75mm2 conductor section.
NO or NC auxiliary is highly conductive.
Other characteristics are the same as the mechanical characteristics of the poles.
2-62
Contactors
TYPE BG06 BG09 BG12

AC CONTROL
Rated voltage at 50/60Hz, 60Hz V 12-575
powered at drop-out % Us 20-55
60Hz pick-up % Us 75-115
drop-out % Us 20-55
60Hz coil 60Hz pick-up % Us 75-115
50/60Hz coil 50Hz in-rush VA 30
powered at holding VA 4
60Hz in-rush VA 25
holding VA 3
60Hz coil 60Hz in-rush VA 30
Dissipation at 20°C at 50Hz W 0.95
DC CONTROL
Operating voltage limits pick-up % Us 75-115
drop-out % Us 10-25
Average consumption at 20°C (in rush-holding) W 3.2 3.2 3.2
OPERATING TIMES
Average time for Us closing NO ms 12-21
control in opening NO ms 9-18
AC
closing NC ms 17-26
opening NC ms 7-17
closing NO ms 18-25
opening NO ms 2-3
DC
closing NC ms 3-5
opening NC ms 11-17
LIFE
Mechanical AC control cycles 20 million
DC control cycles 20 million
Electrical (Ie at 400V AC3) cycles 500,000
Mechanical operations cy/h 3600
2.3W for low-consumption type BG09...L.
continuous VA
A600 AC-15 10 60 6 30 3 19 1.9 15 1.5 12 1.2 7200 720
Q600 DC-13 2.5 0.55 0.27 0.1 0.15 0.13 0.1 69 69
Value at 301V is valid for UL/CSA up to 600VDC; the others are valid for IEC/EN.
Voltage valid for UL/CSA only.
2-63
Contactors
IEC OPERATIONAL CHARACTERISTICS BF09-BF38

TYPE BF09 BF12 BF18 BF25 BF26 BF32 BF38
2 Power poles n° 3-4 3-4 3-4 3 3-4 3 3-4
Rated impulse withstand kV 6
votage Uimp
Operational frequency Hz 25-400
Operational Conventional free air A 25 28 32 32 45 56 56(60)
AC3 (440V 55°C) A 9 12 18 25 26 32 38
AC4 (400V) A 4.9 7.9 8.5 10 11.5 13.5 15.5
Short-time allowable current for 10s
(IEC/EN 60947-1) A 110 110 130 160 200 320 320
Max fuse size gG A 25 32 32 50 50 63 63
aM A 10 12 20 25 32 32 40
Making capacity (RMS value) A 90 120 180 250 260 320 380
Breaking capacity 440V A 72 96 144 200 208 256 304
at voltage 500V A 72 96 120 184 184 240 240
690V A 71 94 94 102 168 192 192
Consumption and m 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0 2.0 2.0
resistance per pole Ith W 1.6 2.0 2.6 2.6 4.0 6.0 6.0
(average values)
AC3 W 0.2 0.4 0.8 1.6 1.4 2.0 2.9
Terminals Type Clamp-screw
A 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 13 13 13
B 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 5.5
B
A
Screw M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M4 M4 M4
Phillips 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Tightening torque Nm 1.5...1.8 1.5...1.8 1.5...1.8 1.5...1.8 2.5...3 2.5...3 2.5...3
for pole terminal min-max Ibft 1.1...1.5 1.1...1.5 1.1...1.5 1.1...1.5 1.8...2.2 1.8...2.2 1.8...2.2
Tightening torque Nm 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1
for coil terminals min-max lbft 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74
Phillips 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
AWG stranded n° 16...10 16...10 16...10 16...10 14...6 14...6 14...6
Flexible w/o lug mm2 1...6 1...6 1...6 1...6 2.5...16 2.5...16 2.5...16
Flexible c/w insulated
boot-lace ferrule mm2 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-10 1-10 1-10
Flexible c/w insulated
spade lug mm2 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-10 1-10 1-10
Power terminal protection
according to IEC/EN 60529 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
AUXILIARY CONTACT CHARACTERISTICS
Type of contact n° 1-NO or NC based on configuration (SPST) ––
Thermal current Ith A 10 ––
UL/CSA and AC A600 ––
IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation DC Q600 ––
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Derating for use at 61-400Hz. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside IP20 protection on front.
front cover. For this other current value, use 16mm2 wire with spade cable terminal.
Current values guarantee an electrical life of about 200,000 cycles. NO or NC auxiliary is highly conductive. Other characteristics are the same as the mechanical
IP20 protection warranted by wired equipment; minimum 1mm2 conductor section. characteristics of the poles.
ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT - Magnetic Motor Controllers per CSA certification File 54332 - Class 2411-03, to requirements of B44.1-04/SME A17.5-2004.
Contactors, three or four poles, open type, operating coil 600VAC or less, 380VDC or less.
Maximum horsepower ratings CSA
Type Single phase Three phase General
120V 240V 200-208V 240V 480V 600V use
[HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [A]
BF12 1
/2 11/2 3 3 71/2 71/2 28
BF25 11/2 3 5 71/2 15 15 32
BF38 3 5 10 10 20 20 55
2-64
Contactors
TYPE BF09 BF12 BF18 BF25 BF26 BF32 BF38

AC CONTROL
drop-out % Us 20-55
60Hz in-rush VA 70
holding VA 6.5
powered at 60Hz holding VA 9
Dissipation at holding 20°C 50Hz W 2.5
DC CONTROL - normal and low consumption
Operating limits
pick-up three-pole from % Us 70
BF...D to % Us 125
four-pole from %Us 70 80
BF...D to %Us 125 125
three and four from % Us 80
pole BF...L to % Us 110
drop-out for all from %Us 10
versions to %Us 40
Average coil consumption BF...D W 5.4
20°C (in rush-holding) BF...L W 2.4
OPERATING TIMES
Average time for AC closing NO ms 8-24 8-24
Us control in opening NO ms 10-20 10-20
closing NC ms 14-28 9-20
opening NC ms 7-18 9-17
DC closing NO ms 54-66 53-65
BF...D opening NO ms 14-17 14-18
types
DC closing NO ms 75-91 76-92
BF...L opening NO ms 15-19 16-20
types
LIFE
Mechanical AC control cycles 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
(million) DC control cycles 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
Electrical (Ie at 400VAC3) (million) cycles 2.0 2.0 1.6 1.2 1.6 1.6 1.4
NC closing time for BF...T0A types is 9-25ms while NC opening time is 9-15ms. NC closing time for BF...T0D types is 23-29ms while NC opening time is 40-49ms.
NC closing time for BF...T0A types is 11-29ms while NC opening time is 6-14ms. NC closing time for BF...T0L types is 25-31ms while NC opening time is 56-68ms.
continuous VA
A600 AC-15 10 60 6 30 3 19 1.9 15 1.5 12 1.2 7200 720
Q600 DC-13 2.5 0.55 0.27 0.1 0.15 0.13 0.1 69 69
Value at 301V is valid for UL/CSA up to 600VDC; the others are valid for IEC/EN. Voltage valid for UL/CSA only.
2-65
Contactors
IEC OPERATIONAL CHARACTERISTICS BF50-BF110

TYPE BF50 BF65 BF80 BF95 BF110
2 Power poles n° 3-4 3-4 3-4 3 3
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 8
Operational Conventional free air A 90 110 125 125 125
AC3 (440V 55°C) A 50 65 80 95 110
AC4 (400V) A 28 31 38 43 43
(IEC/EN 60947-1) A 390 390 480 760 880
Maximum fuse size gG A 100 125 160 160 160
aM A 50 80 80 100 125
Making capacity (RMS value) A 800 1090 1200 1200 1200
Breaking capacity 440V A 800 1090 1200 1200 1200
at voltage 500V A 660 830 1050 1050 1050
690V A 500 630 800 800 800
Consumption and m 0.8 0.8 0.6 0.6 0.6
resistance per pole Ith W 6.5 9.7 9.4 9.4 9.4
(average values)
AC3 W 2.0 3.4 3.8 5.4 7.3
Terminals Type Lug clamp
A 12.3 12.3 12.3 12.3 12.3
B 12 12 12 12 12
B
Screw M6 M6 M6 M6 M6
A Metric
Allen 4 4 4 4 4
Tightening torque Nm 4...5
for pole terminal min-max Ibft 2.95...3.69
Tightening torque Nm 0.8...1
for coil terminals min-max lbft 0.59...0.74
Phillips 1
AWG N° 14...2/0
Flexible w/o lug mm2 4...50 4...50 6...50 6...50 6...50
Flexible c/w lug mm2 4...50 4...50 6...50 6...50 6...50
Power terminal protection
according to IEC/EN 60529 IP20
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Fixing Screw or DIN rail 35mm and 75mm (IEC/EN 60715)
IEC/EN 60947-1 designation: Pillar terminal.
In addition to the main terminal which has dimensions as mentioned above, there is a second terminal entry 12.3x3.8mm (0.5x0.15in) for flexible busbars.
IP20 protection warranted to three-pole contactors only by mounting the G265 protection.
Only three-pole versions can be mounted on 35mm DIN rail.
ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT - Magnetic Motor Controllers per CSA certification File 54332 - Class 2411-03, to requirements of B44.1-04/SME A17.5-2004.
Contactors, three or four poles, open type, operating coil 600VAC or less, 380VDC or less.
Maximum horsepower ratings CSA
Type Single phase Three phase General
120V 240V 200-208V 240V 480V 600V use
[HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [A]
BF65 3 10 15 15 40 50 110
2-66
Contactors
TYPE BF50 BF65 BF80 BF95 BF110

AC CONTROL
drop-out % Us 40-55
60Hz in-rush VA 200
holding VA 15
Dissipation at 20°C 50Hz W 6
DC CONTROL
Rated voltage V 12-600
Operating voltage pick-up % Us 80-110
limits drop-up % Us 10-25
Average consumption 20°C W 15
(in rush-holding)
OPERATING TIMES
Average time closing NO ms 13-28
for Us AC
opening NO ms 6-19
control in
closing NO ms 60-90
DC
opening NO ms 7-12
LIFE
Mechanical AC control cycles 15 15 15 15 15
(million) DC control cycles 15 15 15 15 15
Electrical (Ie at 400V in AC3) (million) cycles 1.5 1.4 1.3 1.2 0.8
2-67
Contactors
IEC OPERATIONAL CHARACTERISTICS B115-B1600

TYPE B630
B115 B145 B180 B250 B310 B400 B500 B630 B1250 B1600
1000
2 POLE CHARACTERISTICS
Power poles n° 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4
Rated impulse withstand votage Uimp kV 8
Operational Conventional free air
current thermal Ith (40°C) A 160 250 275 350 450 550 700 800 1000 1250 1600
AC3 (440V 55°C) A 110 150 185 265 320 420 520 630 – – –
AC4 (400V) A 47 57 65 92 110 133 175 210 – – –
(IEC/EN 60947-1) A 1100 1300 1500 2200 2900 3600 4050 5040 5600 6500 8300
Maximum fuse size gG A 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1000 1250 1600
aM A 125 160 200 250 400 400 500 630 – – –
Making capacity (RMS value) A 1100 1500 1850 2750 3150 4200 5000 6300 6300 6300 6300
Breaking capacity 440V A 1300 1500 1850 2500 3000 4000 5000 6300 6300 6300 6300
at voltage 500V A 1100 1400 1600 2250 2700 3400 4500 5600 5600 5600 5600
690V A 880 1200 1480 2200 2520 3360 4000 5000 5000 5000 5000
1000V A 600 800 1000 1500 1700 2300 2700 3400 3400 3400 3400
Consumption and m 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.07 0.07
resistance per pole Ith W 7.7 14.5 20.3 24.5 40.5 52.0 68.6 90 140 110 180
(average values)
AC3 W 4.0 6.8 9.7 12.5 20 32 35.0 56 – – –
Terminals A mm 15 20 20 25 25 25 35 40 60 80 80
B
(0.6”) (0.8”) (0.8”) (1”) (1”) (1”) (1.4”) (1.6”) (2.4”) (3.1”) (3.1”)
B mm 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 10 10
A (0.16”) (0.16”) (0.16”) (0.2”) (0.2”) (0.2”) (0.23”) (0.23”) (0.23”) (0.39”) (0.39”)
Screw
+ hex
nut M6 M8 M8 M10 M10 M10 M10 M12 2-M12 2-M12 2-M12
10 13 13 17 17 17 17 19 19 19 19
mm (0.39”) (0.51”) (0.51”) (0.67”) (0.67”) (0.67”) (0.67”) (0.75”) (0.75”) (0.75”) (0.75”)
Quick-connect (coil) Faston 1x6.35mm (0.25”) or 2x2.8mm (0.11”)
Coil with G371 Phillips 2 (Ø7mm/0.3in)
Pole tightening torque Nm 10 18 18 35 35 35 35 55 55 55 55
lbft 7.4 13.3 13.3 25.8 25.8 25.8 25.8 40.6 40.6 40.6 40.6
Coil tightening torque with G371 fitted Nm 1
lbft 0.74
Maximum conductor section mm 20x3 25x3 25x3 30x4 30x5 30x5 50x5 60x5 60x5 100x5 100x5
1 or 2 bars (0.2x0.12”) (1x0.12”) (1x0.12”) (1.2x0.16”) (1.2x0.2”) (1.2x0.2”) (2x0.2”) (2.4x0.2”) (2.4x0.2”) (4x0.2”) (4x0.2”)
N° 1 wire
with lug mm2 70 120 150 240 -- -- -- -- – – –
N° 2 wire
with lug mm2 -- -- -- -- 150 150 240 240 – – –
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Fixing Screw
Spanner/wrench size.
G371: Adapter to transform coil faston terminals into screw type.
2-68
Contactors
TYPE B630
B115 B145 B180 B250 B310 B400 B500 B630 B1250 B1600
1000
AC CONTROL 2
Supply voltage The electromagnet can operate either in AC or DC AC only
Rated control voltage V 24-480 24-480 24-480 24-480 24-480 24-480 48-480 48--480 48-480 110-240 110-240
Operating pick-up % Us 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110
voltage limits drop-out % Us 20-60 20-60 20-60 20-60 20-60 20-60 20-60 20-60 20-60 20-60 20-60
Consumption in-rush VA/W 300 300 300 300 300 300 400 400 400 800 800
at 20°C holding VA/W 10 10 10 10 10 10 18 18 18 45 45
Dissipation at 20°C W 10 10 10 10 10 10 18 18 18 40 40
OPERATING TIMES
Making ms 60-100 60-100 60-100 80-120 80-120 80-120 110-180 110-180 110-180 120-210 300-450
Breaking ms 25-60 25-60 25-60 30-75 30-75 30-75 60-100 60-100 60-110 70-130 70-130
Life
Mechanical (million) AC/DC cycles 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5
Electrical (million) (Ie at 400V in AC3) cycles 1.1 1.1 1 1 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 – – –
Mechanical operations cy/h 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200
PARTICULAR CHARACTERISTICS
Indicator For contactor open or closed status
Safety feature Closing operations are prevented without arc chutes
CONTROL CIRCUIT UTILISATION CONTACTORS WITH MECHANICAL LATCH

The input electronic circuit of the contactor coil B115-B1600 is designed and tested Technical data of mechanical latch G495 type is stated on page 2-26.
according to IEEEC 62.41 and can withstand a 10 kV impulse voltage (1.2/50μs) Contactors B115-B630 type, can have mechanical latch included or can be
with 50 Joule energy. predisposed, to be completed with mechanical latch.
For higher values, the use of an auxiliary step-down voltage transformer is See pages 2-4 and 2-6 (3-pole version) or 2-8 and 2-10 (4-pole version).
recommended.
2-69
Contactors
MECHANICAL INTERLOCK BETWEEN CONTACTORS SIDE BY SIDE B115-B630

The G355 type in Fig. 1, can interlock contactors of the same size or of a different This interlock cannot be used with B1250 or B1600 contactor.
one (e.g.: B115 interlocked to B630). Consult Customer Service (see contact details on inside front cover) to interlock
B630 1000 three-pole contactors.
2 MECHANICAL INTERLOCK BETWEEN CONTACTORS ONE ON TOP OF THE OTHER B115-B630
It is G356... type, in Fig. 2 to 4, which is provided in six types to allow different The tables below indicate the interaxis which can be obtained with the various
fixing interaxis of contactors. interlock types; with terminal protections (INTERAXIS A) and without terminal
Contactors of the same size can be interlocked as well as different sizes. protection (INTERAXIS B).
INTERAXIS A [mm] - For contactors with terminal protection

KM1 B115-B145-B180 B250-B310-B400 B500-B630
KM2 B115 B250 B500 B115 B250 B500 B115 B250 B500
B145 B310 B630 B145 B310 B630 B145 B310 B630
B180 B400 B180 B400 B180 B400
G356 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
G356 2 286-305 --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
(11.26-12)
G356 3 305-345 330-345 --- 330-345 --- --- --- --- ---
(12-13.6) (13-13.6) (13-13.6)
G356 4 345-385 345-385 375-385 345-385 372-385 --- 375-385 --- ---
(13.6-15.15) (13.6-15.15) (14.8-15.15) (13.6-15.15) (14.8-15.15) (14.8-15.15)
G356 5 390-425 390-425 390-425 390-425 390-425 420-425 390-425 420-425 ---
(15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (16.5-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75)
G356 6 470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500
(18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7)
INTERAXIS B [mm] - For contactors without terminal protection

KM1 B115-B145-B180 B250-B310-B400 B500-B630
KM2 B115 B250 B500 B115 B250 B500 B115 B250 B500
B145 B310 B630 B145 B310 B630 B145 B310 B630
B180 B400 B180 B400 B180 B400
G356 1 225-265 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
(8.85-10.4)
G356 2 265-305 265-305 --- 265-305 265-305 --- --- --- ---
(10.4-12) (10.4-12) (10.4-12) (10.4-12)
G356 3 305-345 305-345 305-345 305-345 305-345 305-345 305-345 305-345 ---
(12-13.6) (12-13.6) (12-13.6) (12-13.6) (12-13.6) (12-13.6) (12-13.6) (12-13.6)
G356 4 345-385 345-385 345-385 345-385 345-385 345-385 345-385 345-385 345-385
(13.6-15.15) (13.6-15.15) (13.6-15.15) (13.6-15.15) (13.6-15.15) (13.6-15.15) (13.6-15.15) (13.6-15.15) (13.6-15.15)
G356 5 390-425 390-425 390-425 390-425 390-425 390-425 390-425 390-425 390-425
(15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75)
G356 6 470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500
(18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7)
To interlock two contactors B630 1000, use type G356 6 only. Interaxis B is 470-500mm (18.5-19.7”) for B630 1000, B1250 or B1600.
To interlock two contactors B1250 or B1600, it is imperative to use two pieces of The B1250 or B1600 cannot be interlocked with the other types of the B series.
type G356 6, one fixed on the left side and the other on the right; refer to Fig. 4.
KM1
KM1
B
G356 6 G356 6
B
G356...
A
G356...
B
KM2
KM2
Fig.1 Fig.2 Fig.3 Fig.4
2-70
Contactors
CONTACT BLOCKS APPLIABLE TO CONTACTORS WITH MECHANICAL INTERLOCK

Auxiliary contact blocks G350 or G354 can be mounted according to the
combinations below when the mechanical interlock is used (see parts in blue in
Figure 1) or the G358 adapter with the auxiliary blocks as per the combinations
given in Figure 2.
Technical characteristics are given on page 2-26.
2
Fig. 1
B115-B630
B115-B180
B250-B400
B500-B630 1000
Fig. 2
B115-B630
B115-B180
B250-B400
B500-B630 1000
2-71
Page 3-2 Page 3-4 Page 3-6
FOR BG SERIES MINI-CONTACTORS FOR BF SERIES CONTACTORS FOR B SERIES CONTACTORS

• Type RF9, phase failure sensitive, • Type RF38, phase failure sensitive, • Type RF200 and RF420, phase failure
manual resetting manual or automatic resetting sensitive, manual or automatic resetting
• Type RFA9, phase failure sensitive, • Type RFN38, non phase failure sensitive, • Type RFN200 and RFN420, non phase
automatic resetting manual or automatic resetting failure sensitive, manual or automatic
• Type RFN9, non-phase failure sensitive, • Type RF95, phase failure sensitive, resetting.
manual resetting manual resetting
• Type RFNA9, non-phase failure sensitive, • Type RFA95, phase failure sensitive,
automatic resetting. automatic resetting
• Type RFN95, non phase failure sensitive,
manual resetting
• Type RFNA95, non phase failure sensitive,
automatic resetting.
TYPE OF THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY

Type of contactor Phase failure/single phase sensitive Non phase failure / Page
non single phase sensitive
Manual/hand Automatic Manual/hand Automatic
reset reset reset reset
BG06...BG12 RF9 RFA9 RFN9 RFNA9 3-2 and 3
BF09...BF38 RF38 RFN38
3-4 and 5
BF50...BF110 RF95 RFA95 RFN95 RFNA95
B115...B180 RF200 RFN200
3-6 and 7
B250...B400 RF400 RFN400
Page 3-9
THERMISTOR PROTECTION RELAY

• 24VDC and 24 to 240VAC supply types.
RF38 features FRONT PROTECTION COVER OF CLEAR IDENTIFICATION OF THERMAL OVERLOAD

THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS RELAY MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC RESETTING
A sealable protection cover is The RF38 thermal
available. When fitted on to the overload relay is supplied
relay front, it precludes all possible configured for manual
adjuster tampering and involuntary resetting. Breaking the
activation of the “Reset” and plate below the “Reset”
“Stop” buttons of the thermal button allows for the automatic
overload relay. resetting configuration.
FIXING EASE OF THE THERMAL SEALABLE RELAY COVER

OVERLOAD RELAY A handy closing flap
While the thermal overload relay feature excludes any
is being linked to the contactor, tampering of the thermal
its auxiliary contact fits on and overload relay adjuster.
connects to the coil terminal by
rigid terminal.
Complete relay fixing is done in
a single operation, with no need
of other connections.
MOTOR PROTECTION RELAYS 3
Thermal overload relays for currents

between 0.09 and 420A
Phase failure sensitive and non
phase failure sensitive versions
Automatic and/or manual resetting
Independent or direct mounting on
contactor
Thermistor protection relay.
SEC. - PAGE
Thermal overload relays
For BG series mini-contactors ............................................................................................................................................ 3 - 2
For BF series contactors .................................................................................................................................................... 3 - 4
For B series contactors ...................................................................................................................................................... 3 - 6
Accessories ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3 - 8
Electronic relay
Thermistor protection relay ............................................................................................................................................... 3 - 9
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 3 - 10
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 3 - 11
P ROTECTION
AND
M OTOR C ONTROL
Motor protection relays
for BG series mini-contactors
Phase failure / Order code Adjustment Protection fuses Qty Wt Three-phase IEC motor powers
single phase sensitive range IEC UL per
aM gG K5 pkg 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V
Three poles (three phase) [A] [A] [A] [A] n° [kg] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]
MANUAL RESETTING.
Direct mounting on BG06, BG09, BG12 mini-contactors.
11 RF9 015 0.09 - 0.15 0.25 –– –– 1 0.116
3 11 RF9 023 0.14 - 0.23 0.5 –– 1 1 0.116
11 RF9 033 0.2 - 0.33 0.5 1 1 1 0.116
11 RF9 05 0.3 - 0.5 1 2 3 1 0.116
11 RF9 075 0.45 - 0.75 1 2 3 1 0.116 0.37
11 RF9...
11 RF9 1 0.6 - 1 2 4 3 5 0.116 0.37 0.37 0.55
11 RF9 1V5 0.9 - 1.5 2 4 6 5 0.116 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.75
11 RF9 2V3 1.4 - 2.3 4 6 10 5 0.116 0.37 0.55-0.75 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.1-1.5
11 RF9 33 2 - 3.3 4 10 10 5 0.116 0.55 1.1 1.1 1.1-1.5 1.5 2.2
11 RF9 5 3-5 6 16 15 5 0.116 0.75-1.1 1.5 1.5-2.2 2.2 2.2 3-3.7
11 RF9 75 4.5 - 7.5 8 20 25 5 0.116 1.5 2.2-3 3-3.7 3-3.7 3-3.7 4
11 RF9 10 6 - 10 10 32 30 5 0.116 2.2 3.7-4 4 3.7-4 4-5.5 ––
11 RF9 15 9 - 15 16 40 45 5 0.116 3.2 5.5 5.5-7.5 5.5 –– ––
AUTOMATIC RESETTING.
11 RFA9 015 0.09 - 0.15 0.25 –– –– 1 0.116
11 RFA9 023 0.14 - 0.23 0.5 –– 1 1 0.116
11 RFA9 033 0.2 - 0.33 0.5 1 1 1 0.116
11 RFA9 05 0.3 - 0.5 1 2 3 1 0.116
11 RFA9 075 0.45 - 0.75 1 2 3 1 0.116 0.37
11 RFA9... 11 RFA9 1 0.6 - 1 2 4 3 1 0.116 0.37 0.37 0.55
11 RFA9 1V5 0.9 - 1.5 2 4 6 1 0.116 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.75
11 RFA9 2V3 1.4 - 2.3 4 6 10 1 0.116 0.37 0.55-0.75 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.1-1.5
11 RFA9 33 2 - 3.3 4 10 10 1 0.116 0.55 1.1 1.1 1.1-1.5 1.5 2.2
11 RFA9 5 3-5 6 16 15 1 0.116 0.75-1.1 1.5 1.5-2.2 2.2 2.2 3-3.7
11 RFA9 75 4.5 - 7.5 8 20 25 1 0.116 1.5 2.2-3 3-3.7 3-3.7 3-3.7 4
11 RFA9 10 6 - 10 10 32 30 1 0.116 2.2 3.7-4 4 3.7-4 4-5.5 ––
11 RFA9 15 9 - 15 16 40 45 1 0.116 3.2 5.5 5.5-7.5 5.5 –– ––
NOTE: Two-pole (single phase) versions are available on request. The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always
Add the letter “S” in the order code e.g. 11RF9015 is three pole; check that the nameplate motor current is within the relay adjustment
11RFS9015 two pole. range.
The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be selected on No standard power ratings exist; select relay according to current
the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, across the line consumption.
starting is considered.
NOTE: To facilitate connection between the auxiliary NC
contact of the RF...9 thermal relay and terminal A2 of the
contactor, insert the conductor into the appropriate conduit
as shown.
RF9...
RFA9...

c
U
L C E C
u S A C
Type s A C C
RF9... - RFA9...
Certified products.
cULus – UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601)
as Auxiliary Devices – Thermal Overload Relays, 600VAC, open
type, ambient compensated, 5000 Amps RMS symmetrical
short circuit rating; the trip current is 120% FLA.
CSA – CSA certified for Canada only (File 54332) as Auxiliary
Devices for use with magnetic contactors.

UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Accessories Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

3-2 page 3-8 page 2-32 page 3-11 pages 3-12 and 13
for BG series mini-contactors
Non phase failure / Order code Adjustment Protection fuses Qty Wt Three-phase IEC motor powers
non single phase sensitive range IEC UL per
aM gG K5 pkg 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V
MANUAL RESETTING.
11 RFN9 015 0.09 - 0.15 0.25 –– –– 1 0.123
11 RFN9 023 0.14 - 0.23 0.5 –– 1 1 0.123
3
11 RFN9 033 0.2 - 0.33 0.5 1 1 1 0.123
11 RFN9 05 0.3 - 0.5 1 2 3 1 0.123
11 RFN9 075 0.45 - 0.75 1 2 3 1 0.123 0.37
11 RFN9...
11 RFN9 1 0.6 - 1 2 4 3 1 0.123 0.37 0.37 0.55
11 RFN9 1V5 0.9 - 1.5 2 4 6 1 0.123 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.75
11 RFN9 2V3 1.4 - 2.3 4 6 10 1 0.123 0.37 0.55-0.75 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.1-1.5
11 RFN9 33 2 - 3.3 4 10 10 1 0.123 0.55 1.1 1.1 1.1-1.5 1.5 2.2
11 RFN9 5 3-5 6 16 15 1 0.123 0.75-1.1 1.5 1.5-2.2 2.2 2.2 3-3.7
11 RFN9 75 4.5 - 7.5 8 20 25 1 0.123 1.5 2.2-3 3-3.7 3-3.7 3-3.7 4
11 RFN9 10 6 - 10 10 32 30 1 0.123 2.2 3.7-4 4 3.7-4 4-5.5 ––
11 RFN9 15 9 - 15 16 40 45 1 0.123 3.2 5.5 5.5-7.5 5.5 –– ––
11 RFNA9 015 0.09 - 0.15 0.25 –– –– 1 0.123
11 RFNA9 023 0.14 - 0.23 0.5 –– 1 1 0.123
11 RFNA9 033 0.2 - 0.33 0.5 1 1 1 0.123
11 RFNA9 05 0.3 - 0.5 1 2 3 1 0.123
11 RFNA9 075 0.45 - 0.75 1 2 3 1 0.123 0.37
11 RFNA9... 11 RFNA9 1 0.6 - 1 2 4 3 1 0.123 0.37 0.37 0.55
11 RFNA9 1V5 0.9 - 1.5 2 4 6 1 0.123 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.75
11 RFNA9 2V3 1.4 - 2.3 4 6 10 1 0.123 0.37 0.55-0.75 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.1-1.5
11 RFNA9 33 2 - 3.3 4 10 10 1 0.123 0.55 1.1 1.1 1.1-1.5 1.5 2.2
11 RFNA9 5 3-5 6 16 15 1 0.123 0.75-1.1 1.5 1.5-2.2 2.2 2.2 3-3.7
11 RFNA9 75 4.5 - 7.5 8 20 25 1 0.123 1.5 2.2-3 3-3.7 3-3.7 3-3.7 4
11 RFNA9 10 6 - 10 10 32 30 1 0.123 2.2 3.7-4 4 3.7-4 4-5.5 ––
11 RFNA9 15 9 - 15 16 40 45 1 0.123 3.2 5.5 5.5-7.5 5.5 –– ––
NOTE: The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always
selected on the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, check that the nameplate motor current is within the relay adjustment
across the line starting is considered. range.
No standard power ratings exist; select relay according to current
consumption.
NOTE: To facilitate connection between the auxiliary NC

contact of the RFN...9 thermal relay and terminal A2 of the
contactor, insert the conductor into the appropriate conduit
as shown.
RFN9...
RFNA9...

c
U
L C E C
u S A C
Type s A C C
RFN9... - RFNA9...
Certified products.
short circuit rating; the trip current is 120% FLA.

UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

page 3-8 page 2-32 page 3-11 page 3-12 and 13 3-3
for BF series contactors
aM gG pkg 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V
MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC RESETTING.
Direct mounting on BF09 - BF38 contactors.
Independent mounting with RFX38 04 base.
3 RF38 0016 0.1-0.16 0.25 –– 1 1 0.160 0.06
RF38 0025 0.16-0.25 0.5 –– 1 1 0.160 0.06 0.06 0.06-0.09 0.06-0.09 0.09-0.12
RF38 0040 0.25-0.4 0.5 1 3 1 0.160 0.06 0.09 0.09 0.12 0.12 0.18
RF38 0063 0.4-0.63 1 2 3 1 0.160 0.09 0.12-0.18 0.12-0.18 0.18 0.18 0.25
RF38 0100 0.63-1 2 4 3 5 0.160 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.37 0.25-0.37 0.37-0.55
RF38 0160 1-1.6 2 4 6 5 0.160 0.18-0.25 0.37-0.55 0.37-0.55 0.55 0.55-0.75 0.75
RF38... RF38 0250 1.6-2.5 4 6 10 5 0.160 0.37 0.75 0.75 0.75-1.1 1.1 1.1-1.5
RF38 0400 2.5-4 4 6 15 5 0.160 0.55-0.75 1.1-1.5 1.1-1.5 1.1 1.5-2.2 2.2-3
RF38 0650 4-6.5 8 16 25 5 0.160 1.1-1.5 2.2 2.2 2.2-3 3 4
RF38 1000 6.3-10 10 20 40 5 0.160 1.5-2.2 3-4 4 4 4-5.5 5.5-7.5
RF38 1400 9-14 16 32 50 5 0.160 3 5.5 5.5 5.5-7.5 5.5-7.5 11
RF38 1800 13-18 25 40 70 5 0.160 4 7.5 7.5-9 9 11 15
RF38 2300 17-23 25 50 90 5 0.160 5.5 11 9-11 11 11 18.5
RF38 2500 20-25 32 50 100 5 0.160 5.5 11 11 11 15 22
RF38 3200 24-32 40 63 120 1 0.160 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 30
RF38 3800 32-38 40 63 150 1 0.160 11 18.5 18.5 18.5 22 30
MANUAL RESETTING.
Direct mounting on BF50-BF110 contactors.
Complete with G261 links.
Independent mounting with G270 base.
11 RF95 3 33 20 - 33 40 63 110 1 0.365 7.5 11-15 11-15 15-18.5 15-18.5 22-25
11 RF95 3 42 28 - 42 50 80 150 1 0.365 9-10 15-18.5 18.5-22 18.5-22 22-25 30-33
11 RF95 3 50 35 - 50 50 100 175 1 0.365 10-11 22 25 25 30 37-40
11 RF95 3 65 46 - 65 80 125 200 1 0.365 15-18.5 25-30 30-33 30-33 33-40 45-55
11 RF95 3 82 60 - 82 100 200 250 1 0.365 22 33-40 37-45 37-45 45-55 59-75
11 RF95 3 95 70 - 95 100 200 350 1 0.365 22-25 40-45 45-51 45-55 55-63 75-80
11 RF95 3 110 90 - 110 125 200 350 1 0.365 30 55 55 55 75 90
11 RF95 3...
11 RFA95 3 33 20 - 33 40 63 110 1 0.365 7.5 11-15 11-15 15-18.5 15-18.5 22-25
11 RFA95 3 42 28 - 42 50 80 150 1 0.365 9-10 15-18.5 18.5-22 18.5-22 22-25 30-33
11 RFA95 3 50 35 - 50 50 100 175 1 0.365 10-11 22 25 25 30 37-40
11 RFA95 3 65 46 - 65 80 125 200 1 0.365 15-18.5 25-30 30-33 30-33 33-40 45-55
11 RFA95 3 82 60 - 82 100 200 250 1 0.365 22 33-40 37-45 37-45 45-55 59-75
11 RFA95 3 95 70 - 95 100 200 350 1 0.365 22-25 40-45 45-51 45-55 55-63 75-80
11 RFA95 3 110 90 - 110 125 200 350 1 0.365 30 55 55 55 75 90
11 RFA95 3...
UL RK5 fuse class for RF38 types and UL K5 fuse class for RF…95 types. No standard powers ratings exist; select relay according to current
consumption.
NOTE: Two pole (single phase) versions are available on request. The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always
Add the letter “S” in the order code e.g. RF381000 is three pole; RFS381000 two check that the nameplate motor current is within the relay adjustment
pole. range.
The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be selected on
the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, across the line Certifications and compliance
starting is considered.
Register of
c shipping
U L
L C E C R
u S A C O
Tipo s A C C S
RF38 –– ––
RF95
RFA95 ––
Certified products.
short circuit rating up to 82A FLA range and 10000 Amps RMS
for 95A and 110A FLA range; the trip current is 120% FLA.
UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

3-4 page 3-8 pages 2-32 and 2-33 page 3-11 pages 3-12 and 13
for BF series contactors
aM gG pkg 230V 400V 415V 440V 550V 690V
Direct mounting on BF09 - BF38 contactors.
Independent mounting with RFX38 04 base.
RFN38 0016 0.1-0.16 0.25 –– 1 1 0.160 0.06 3
RFN38 0025 0.16-0.25 0.5 –– 1 1 0.160 0.06 0.06 0.06-0.09 0.06-0.09 0.09-0.12
RFN38 0040 0.25-0.4 0.5 1 3 1 0.160 0.06 0.09 0.09 0.12 0.12 0.18
RFN38 0063 0.4-0.63 1 2 3 1 0.160 0.09 0.12-0.18 0.12-0.18 0.18 0.18 0.25
RFN38 0100 0.63-1 2 4 3 1 0.160 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.37 0.25-0.37 0.37-0.55
RFN38 0160 1-1.6 2 4 6 1 0.160 0.18-0.25 0.37-0.55 0.37-0.55 0.55 0.55-0.75 0.75
RFN38...
RFN38 0250 1.6-2.5 4 6 10 1 0.160 0.37 0.75 0.75 0.75-1.1 1.1 1.1-1.5
RFN38 0400 2.5-4 4 6 15 1 0.160 0.55-0.75 1.1-1.5 1.1-1.5 1.1 1.5-2.2 2.2-3
RFN38 0650 4-6.5 8 16 25 1 0.160 1.1-1.5 2.2 2.2 2.2-3 3 4
RFN38 1000 6.3-10 10 20 40 1 0.160 1.5-2.2 3-4 4 4 4-5.5 5.5-7.5
RFN38 1400 9-14 16 32 50 1 0.160 3 5.5 5.5 5.5-7.5 5.5-7.5 11
RFN38 1800 13-18 25 40 70 1 0.160 4 7.5 7.5-9 9 11 15
RFN38 2300 17-23 25 50 90 1 0.160 5.5 11 9-11 11 11 18.5
RFN38 2500 20-25 32 50 100 1 0.160 5.5 11 11 11 15 22
RFN38 3200 24-32 40 63 125 1 0.160 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 30
RFN38 3800 32-38 40 63 150 1 0.160 11 18.5 18.5 18.5 22 30
MANUAL RESETTING.
11 RFN95 3 42 28 - 42 50 80 150 1 0.365 9-10 15-18.5 18.5-22 18.5-22 22-25 30-33
11 RFN95 3 50 35 - 50 50 100 175 1 0.365 10-11 22 25 25 30 37-40
11 RFN95 3 65 46 - 65 80 125 200 1 0.365 15-18.5 25-30 30-33 30-33 33-40 45-55
11 RFN95 3 82 60 - 82 100 200 250 1 0.365 22 33-40 37-45 37-45 45-55 59-75
11 RFN95 3 95 70 - 95 100 200 350 1 0.365 22-25 40-45 45-51 45-55 55-63 75-80
11 RFN95 3 110 90 - 110 125 200 350 1 0.365 30 55 55 55 75 90
11 RFN95 3... Direct mounting on BF50-BF110 contactors.
11 RFNA95 3 42 28 - 42 50 80 150 1 0.365 9-10 15-18.5 18.5-22 18.5-22 22-25 30-33
11 RFNA95 3 50 35 - 50 50 100 175 1 0.365 10-11 22 25 25 30 37-40
11 RFNA95 3 65 46 - 65 80 125 200 1 0.365 15-18.5 25-30 30-33 30-33 33-40 45-55
11 RFNA95 3 82 60 - 82 100 200 250 1 0.365 22 33-40 37-45 37-45 45-55 59-75
11 RFNA95 3 95 70 - 95 100 200 350 1 0.365 22-25 40-45 45-51 45-55 55-63 75-80
11 RFNA95 3 110 90 - 110 125 200 350 1 0.365 30 55 55 55 75 90
UL RK5 fuse class for RFN38 types and UL K5 fuse class for RF…95 types. No standard power ratings exist; select relay according to current
11 RFNA95 3... consumption.
NOTE: The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always
selected on the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, check that the nameplate motor current is within the relay adjustment
across the line starting is considered. range.

c
U
L C E C
u S A C
Type s A C C
RFN38 ––
RFN95
RFNA95
Certified products.
short circuit rating up to 82A FLA range and 10000 Amps RMS
for 95A and 110A FLA range; the trip current is 120% FLA.

UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

page 3-8 pages 2-32 and 2-33 page 3-11 page 3-12 and 13 3-5
for B series contactors
aM gG K5 pkg 230V 400V 415V 440V 550V 690V
Independent screw fixing or direct mounting on contactors:
B115-B145-B180 using G372 links
3 B250-B310-B400 using G373 links
RF200 100 60-100 100 160 500 1 2.150 18.5-25 33-51 37-55 37-59 45-63 59-92
RF200 125 75-125 125 200 500 1 2.150 22-37 40-63 45-63 51-75 55-80 75-110
RF200 150 90-150 160 250 500 1 2.150 25-45 51-80 55-80 55-92 63-100 92-140
RF200 200 120-200 200 315 500 1 2.150 37-59 75-100 75-100 75-110 92-140 129-184
B145-B180 using G375 links
RF420 250 150-250 250 400 800 1 2.460 45-75 92-132 92-147 100-150 110-162 140-220
RF420 300 180-300 315 500 800 1 2.460 55-92 100-162 110-162 129-184 129-198 180-280
RF420 420 250-420 500 630 800 1 2.460 75-110 129-198 147-220 150-220 180-280 250-368
NOTE: The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be NOTE: For 1000V powers, consult Customer Service for information;
selected on the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, see contact details on inside front cover.
RF200... - RF420... across the line starting is considered. The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always
check that the nameplate motor current is within the relay adjustment
range.
RELAYS FOR B500 AND B630 CONTACTORS

MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC RESETTING. Certifications and compliance
B115-B400 Consult Customer Service for the relative order codes and Certifications obtained:
detailed information; see contact details on inside front cover. c
U
L E
u A
Type s C
RF200
RF420
Certified products.
G372 as Auxiliary Devices – Thermal Overload Relays, 600VAC, open
G373 type, ambient compensated, 5000 Amps RMS symmetrical
G375
G376 short circuit rating up to 150A FLA range, 10000 Amps RMS
for 200A up to 300A FLA range and 18000 Amps for the 420A;
the trip current is 120% FLA.

UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
RF200
RF420

3-6 page 3-8 pages 2-34, 35 and 3-10 page 3-11 pages 3-12 and 13
for B series contactors
aM gG K5 pkg 230V 400V 415V 440V 550V 690V
B250-B310-B400 using G373 links 3
RFN200 100 60-100 100 160 500 1 2.150 18.5-25 33-51 37-55 37-59 45-63 59-92
RFN200 125 75-125 125 200 500 1 2.150 22-37 40-63 45-63 51-75 55-80 75-110
RFN200 150 90-150 160 250 500 1 2.150 25-45 51-80 55-80 55-92 63-100 92-140
RFN200 200 120-200 200 315 500 1 2.150 37-59 75-100 75-100 75-110 92-140 129-184
B145-B180 using G375 links
RFN420 250 150-250 250 400 800 1 2.460 45-75 92-132 92-147 100-150 110-162 140-220
RFN420 300 180-300 315 500 800 1 2.460 55-92 100-162 110-162 129-184 129-198 180-280
RFN420 420 250-420 500 630 800 1 2.460 75-110 129-198 147-220 150-220 180-280 250-368
NOTE: The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be NOTE: For 1000V powers, consult Customer Service for information;
selected on the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, see contact details on inside front cover.
RFN200... - RFN420... across the line starting is considered. The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always
check that the nameplate motor current is within the relay adjustment
range.
RELAYS FOR B500 AND B630 CONTACTORS.

MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC RESETTING. Certifications and compliance
B115-B400 Consult Customer Service for the relative order codes and Certifications obtained:
detailed information; see contact details on inside front cover. c
U
L E
u A
Type s C
RFN200
RFN420
Certified products.
G372 as Auxiliary Devices – Thermal Overload Relays, 600VAC, open
G373 type, ambient compensated, 5000 Amps RMS symmetrical
G375
G376 short circuit rating up to 150A FLA range, 10000 Amps RMS
for 200A up to 300A FLA range and 18000 Amps for the 420A;
the trip current is 120% FLA.

UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
RFN200
RFN420

page 3-8 pages 2-34 and 3-10 page 3-11 pages 3-12 and 13 3-7
Add-on blocks and accessories for thermal overload relays
Order code For relay Qty Wt Operational characteristics

per ELECTRICAL RESET G228
pkg Control circuit voltage
n° [kg] AC (50/60Hz) V 12 - 550
Set of links for direct contactor mounting. Power consumption in AC VA 300
11 G372 RF...200 on B115-B145-B180 1 0.250 Minimum reset time ms 20
contactor
3 11 G373 B250-B310-B400 1 0.360 Terminals Faston 6.3x0.8
11 G375 RF...420 on B145-B180 1 0.313 NOTE: Coils can remain supplied for a maximum interval of
RFX38 02 11 G376 contactor B250-B310-B400 1 0.500 500ms; 3 consecutive operations are allowed, followed by a
5 minute interval. Reset only if at least 1min has passed
Protection cover for thermal overload relay-contactor assembly. from overload tripping.
RFX38 02 RF38 on contactor BF09 - 10 0.014 It is recommended to use the wiring diagram on page 3-11.
BF12 - BF18 - BF25
RFX38 03 RF38 on contactor BF26- 10 0.014 INDIPENDENT MOUNTING
BF32 - BF38 – Conductor cross section with one cable:
• 6...10mm2 / AWG 8 for RFX38 04
Protection shrouds for power terminals. • 35mm2 / AWG 2 for G270
11 G262 RF...95...3 10 0.003 – Tightening torque:
11 G361 RF...200 6 0.026 • 2...2.5Nm / 1.5...1.8 lbft for RFX38 04
• 3.9Nm/2.88 lbft for G270.
11 G363 RF...420 6 0.046
RFX38 03 Independent mounting. Certifications and compliance
Screw fixing or 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) mounting. Certifications obtained:
RFX38 04 RF...38 5 0.082 c
U
11 G270 RF...95 10 0.148 L C E
Electrical reset. u S A
11 G228 RF...9 - RF...95 5 0.072 Tipo s A C
Sealing device. G361 ––
11 G262
RFX38 01 RF...38 - RF...200 - RF...420 10 0.002 G363 ––
11 G233 RF...9 - RF...95 1 0.006 G372 ––
Electric button NO. G373 ––
11 G244 RF...9 - RF...95 10 0.011 G375 ––
Marking element. G376 ––
11 RB6 RF...9 - RF...95 100 0.003 G270 ––
Set of 100 alphanumeric symbol. RFX38 04 ––
3958 RF...9 - RF...95 1 0.002 Certified products.
Front IP20 protection is warranted to contactor-thermal relay connections. cULus – UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601)
Independent mounting base for any RF95 relay. as Auxiliary Devices for thermal overload relays.
Remove the links fixed on RF...95 and use those supplied with the base. CSA – CSA certified for Canada only (File 54332) as Kits for
Replace with voltage digit. industrial control equipment.
RFX38 04 Standard voltages are:
– AC 50/60Hz 24V / 48V / 110-125V / 220-240V / 380-415V.
Replace with the required alphanumeric symbol. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1,
Each package contains 100 pieces of the same symbol. UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Combinations G372
G373
G375
11 G228 11 G244 G376
G262
(per RF...95 3)
G270
G361
G363
RF...200
RF...420
RFX38 01
G233
RF...95 3
RFX38 04
G228
RF...9 G244
3958...
RB6
RF...38
RFX38 01

3-8 page 3-10 page 3-11 pages 3-12 and 13
Add-on blocks and accessories for thermal overload relays.
Electronic relay and accessory
Protection cover for thermal overload relay-contactor assembly
BF26-BF38
BF09-BF25
RFX38 02
RFX38 03
RF...38
RF...38
Thermistor protection relay Order code Rated auxiliary Qty Wt. General characteristics
supply voltage per The DRPT is a thermal protection relay for motors
pkg equipped with thermistor PTC sensors immersed in the
[V] n° [kg] winding heads. The maximum number of thermistors to
be used is limited by the resistance of all the sensors
DC supply (version for 35 mm DIN rail IEC/EN 60715). connected in series; total ohmic value is not to exceed
31 DRPTC 24 24VDC 1 0.269 1.5kΩ at 25°C.
AC supply (version for 35 mm DIN rail IEC/EN 60715). The DRPT type has fail-safe operation: the protective
feature trips even in the case the PTC circuit is
31 DRPT 24 24VAC 1 0.269 disconnected or there is a lack of voltage.
31 DRPT 110 110VAC 1 0.269 Resetting is manual or automatic.
31 DRPT 220 220-240VAC 1 0.269
ACCESSORY – Supply circuit
Order code Description Qty Wt • Rated frequency: 50-60Hz for AC types only
per • Operational limits: 0.85-1.1 Us
31 DRPT... pkg • Maximum dissipation: 2.5W
n° [kg] • Connection: permanent.
– Measuring circuit
31 CE106 Adapter for screw 10 0.008 • Type of connectable PTC sensor: According to
fixing of DRPT relay DIN 44081
on mounting plate. • Total PTC resistance at 25°C: ≤1.5kΩ
Galvanic isolation between supply and measuring circuits does not exist. • Tripping resistance: 2.7-3.1kΩ
• Resetting resistance: 1.5-1.8kΩ
• Voltage at PTC terminals: ≤ 2.5VDC.
– Remote resetting
• Control: NC contact opening
• Contact voltage: 5VDC
• Current consumption: about 1mA.
– Relay output
• Arrangement: 1 relay with 2 changeover contacts
• Rated operational voltage Ue: 250VAC
• Conventional free air thermal current Ith: 5A
• Designation to IEC/EN 60947-5-1: B300
• Mechanical life: 50x106 cycles
• Electrical life (with rated load): 2x105 cycles.
– Indications
• Green LED indicator for power ON
• Red LED indicator for relay state TRIP
– Connections
• Conductor section 2x1.5mm2 with ferrule (max)
• Tightening torque: 0.8-1.2Nm.
– Ambient conditions
• Operating temperature: -10...+60°C
• Storage temperature: -30...+80°C.
– Housing
• Snap on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
• For screw fixing, use CE106 adapter
• Degree of protection
– IP40 housing
– IP20 terminals.

Certifications obtained: EAC.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60255-5.

page 3-10 page 3-11 3-9
RFX38 04 base c/w RF...38 thermal relay G270 base c/w RF...95 thermal relay
45 88.4 55
(1.77”) (3.48”) 102
(2.16”)
34 (4.01”)
7.9 14.6 .2 83 9.7 16.5 .2
(0.31”) (0.57”) (1.34”) Ø4 16”) (3.27”) (0.38”) (0.65”) 43 Ø4 16”) 95.4
(0. (1.69”) (0. (3.75”)
(2.89”)
(2.77”)
73.5
(3.35”)
70.3
(3.11”)
85
3
79
7.9 14.6
(0.31”) (0.57”)
11 16.5
(0.43”) (0.65”)
RF...200 thermal relay with links G372 and G373
127.5 166.1
(5.02”) (6.54”)
40 40
23.8 (1.57”) 122
(0.94”) (1.57”)
(4.80”)
G372
G373
(1.52”)
38.6
.4
Ø5 21”)
(0.
(6.77”)
172
(2.91”)
(4.46”)
113.4
74
M8
20 56.5
(0.79”) (2.22”)
40 40
(1.57”) (1.57”)
RF...420 thermal relay with links G375 and G376

145 165.4
(5.71”) (6.51”)
25 47.5 47.5 153.3
(0.98”) (1.57”) (1.57”) (6.03”)
G375
G376
(1.76”)
44.8
.4
Ø5 21”)
(0.
(7.46”)
189.6
(4.77”)
(2.91”)
121.2
74
M1
25 0 56.8
(0.98”) (2.24”)
47.5 47.5
(1.57”) (1.57”)
ADD-ON BLOCKS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS RF...9 and RF...95

G228... reset G244 button
63 89.7 54.5
(2.48”) (3.53”) (2.14”)
19 13.3 10
(0.75”) (0.52”) (0.39”)
(1.05”)
(1.41”)
(1.41”)
26.7
35.8
35.8

DRPT relay CE106 adapter
45 100 22.5 10
(1.77”) (3.94”) (0.88”) (0.39”)
(3.11”)
(3.70”)
(3.30”)
79
94
84
Ø4.5
(0.18”)
3-10
Wiring diagrams
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR BG MINI-CONTACTORS

RF9 - RFN9 RFA9 - RFNA9
RESET
TEST
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
95 97 1 3 5 95 97 1 3 5
96 98 2 4 6 96 98 2 4 6 3
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR BF CONTACTORS

RF38 - RFN38 RF95 - RFN95 RFA95 - RFNA95
RESET
RESET
STOP
TEST
TEST
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
95 97 1 3 5 95 97 1 3 5 95 97 1 3 5
96 98 2 4 6 96 98 2 4 6 96 98 2 4 6
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR B CONTACTORS

RF200 - RFN200
RF420 - RFN420 L1 L2 L3
1 3 5
RESET
STOP
TEST
95 97
1 3 5
2 4 6
96 98
2 4 6
T1 T2 T3
ADD-ON BLOCKS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS RF9 - RF95

Electric reset L1 L2 L3
G228
A1 1 3 5
BF...
A2 2 4 6
R
RESET
TEST
E1 G228... 95 97 1 3 5
RF...
E2 96 98 2 4 6
L
L1
T1 T2 T3

DRPT 24VDC
24VAC C Automatic Manual Remote
Reset Reset Reset
110VAC
220...240VAC Set point
L1 Hysteresis
Remote
L2 reset
L3
F2 A1
S1 A2
F1
TEST
1 3 5 A1 T1 T2 S1 11 21
RESET
K1 K1 T2
S1
2 4 6 A2 DRPT 12 14 22 24
ON
S2
TRIP
12
S3 K1 11
M1
14
Rmax =1.5kΩ (25°C) 22
K1 21
24
3-11
Phase failure/single phase sensitive hand reset RF9 RF38 RF95 RF200 RF420
Phase failure sensitive automatic reset RFA9 RFN38 RFA95 RFN200 RFN420
Non phase failure/non single phase sensitive hand reset RFN9 RFN95
Non phase failure/non single phase sensitive automatic reset RFNA9 RFNA95
POWER CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui V 690 690 690 1000 1000
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 8 6 8 6 6
3 Frequency limit Hz 0-400 0-400 0-400 50-60 50-60
Operational range from A 0.09 0.1 14 60 150
to A 15 38 110 200 420
Tripping class 10A
Particular characteristics Test button - Trip indicator
Connection Direct With current
transformers
Yoke
Terminals Type Screw and washer clamp Screw and flat washer
Terminal width mm 9.8 12.6 9 20 25
Phillips n° 2 2 2 13mm 18mm
Tightening torque Nm 2.3 2...2.5 3.9 18 35
for power terminals lbft 1.7 1.5...1.8 2.88 13.3 25.9
Maximum conductor section connectable
AWG N° 10 8 2 -- --
Flexible w/o lug mm2 6 10 35 -- --
Flexible c/w lug mm2 10 6 -- 150 2 x 150
Bar mm -- -- -- 25 x 3 30 x 5
Dissipation per phase W 0.7-2.4 0.7-2.4 2.0-4.2 0.7-2.4 0.7-2.4
AUXILIARY CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS
Available NO n° 1
contacts NC n° 1
IEC rated insulation voltage V 690
IEC conventional free air A 10
thermal current Ith
Terminals with Screw M3.5
screw and washer Terminal width mm 8
Phillips n° 1 2 1 2 2
Maximum conductor section connectable
Flexible w/o lug mm2 2.5
Flexible c/w lug mm2 2.5
Tightening torque Nm 1 0.8...1 1 0.8...1 0.8...1
for auxiliary terminals lbft 0.74 0.59...0.74 0.74 0.59...0.74 0.59...0.74
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation B600 - P600 B600-R300 B600-P600 B600-R300 B600-R300

AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperatureo °C -20...+55 -25...+60 -20...+55 -25...+60 -25...+60
Storage temperature °C -55...+70 -50...+70 -55...+70 -50...+70 -50...+70
Compensation temperature °C -15...+55 -20...+60 -15...+55 -20...+60 -20...+60
Operation position Normal On vertical plane
Allowable ±30°
Mounting On contactor or separately
With manual and automatic resetting.
For currents higher than 420A, consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.
Standard supplied.
Metric wrench/spanner.
C600-R300 for automatic reset type.
3-12
TRIP CHARACTERISTIC FOR RF THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS (AVERAGE TIME)

Three-phase balanced operation Two-phase operation (phase failure/single phase)
RF9 RF38 RF95 RF9 RF38 RF95

RFA9 RFN38 RFA95 RFA9 RFA95
RFN9 RFN95
RFNA9 RFNA95
Opening time [s] Opening time [s] 3

10000 10000
2h 2h
1h 1h
30min 30min
1000 1000
10min 10min
5min 5min
2min 2min
100 100
1min 1min
COLD COLD
HOT HOT
10 10
1
1 x Ie [A] 1.15 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 x Ie [A]
1.05 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 10
1 10
RF200 RF420 RF200 RF420

RFN200 RFN420
Opening time [s] Opening time [s]

10000 10000
2h 2h
1h 1h
30min 30min
1000 1000
10min 10min
5min 5min
2min 2min
100
100 COLD
1min
1min
COLD
HOT
HOT 10
10
1
1 1.15 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 x Ie [A]
1.05 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 x Ie [A] 1 10
10
1
Tripping times can have a ±20% deviation with respect to the average tripping curve values above.
3-13
Page 4-2 Page 4-5
DIRECT-ON-LINE STARTERS WITH AND WITHOUT REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES

THERMAL RELAY • For three-phase motor control 9-25A 440V /
• Motor ratings up to 95A 440V in IEC AC3 duty 4-12.5kW 400V, in IEC AC3 duty and up to
• General use up to 65A / motor rating up to 15HP 600V per UL/CSA
52A 600V per UL/CSA • Versions with built-in or external
• Versions with Start-Stop/Reset buttons or Reset mechanical interlock
button. • Complete with rigid connections
• PCB version 9A 440V / 4kW 400V in IEC
AC3 duty; 5HP 300V per UL/CSA.
Page 4-5 Page 4-6
CHANGEOVER CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES STAR-DELTA STARTERS OPEN FRAME

• For 20A loads at ≤40°C in IEC AC1 duty • Suitable for three-phase motor control,
• For 20A general use per UL/CSA 16A-690A 440V / 7.5kW-375kW 400V
• With built-in mechanical interlock. ratings in IEC AC3 duty.
Page 4-7 Page 4-8
STAR-DELTA STARTERS IN NON-METALLIC EMPTY NON-METALLIC ENCLOSURES

ENCLOSURE • Versions without pushbuttons, with Reset
• Suitable for three-phase motor control, 16-60A button only or Start-Stop/Reset buttons
440V / 7,5kW-30kW 400V ratings in IEC AC3 • For starters, with pushbuttons and metal
duty. plate
• Suitable to contain BG mini-contactor or
BF09A to BF110 contactors, up to 110A
440V rating in IEC AC3 duty; up to 52A at
600V for UL/CSA.
ELECTROMECHANICAL STARTERS 4
Direct-on-line starters in
non-metallic enclosure complete
with or without thermal relay
Versions with RESET or
START/STOP pushbuttons
Non-metallic enclosures for
customer-assembled starters
Reversing and changeover
contactor assemblies
Star-delta starters, open frame and
in non-metallic enclosure versions.
SEC. - PAGE
Direct-on-line starters - Full voltage across the line - Non reversing
Enclosed with thermal relay ............................................................................................................................................... 4 - 2
Enclosed without thermal relay .......................................................................................................................................... 4 - 3
Combinations .................................................................................................................................................................... 4 - 10
Reversing contactor assemblies
With BG series mini-contactors ....................................................................................................................................... 4 - 5
With BF series contactors ................................................................................................................................................ 4 - 5
Changeover contactor assemblies
With BG series mini-contactors ....................................................................................................................................... 4 - 5
Star-delta starters
Open frame ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4 - 6
Enclosed ........................................................................................................................................................................... 4 - 7
Non-metallic enclosure for starters .................................................................................................................................... 4 - 7
Empty non-metallic enclosures
Enclosures ........................................................................................................................................................................ 4 - 8
Accessories and spare parts .............................................................................................................................................. 4 - 8
Combinations .................................................................................................................................................................... 4 - 9
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 4 - 16
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 4 - 20 P ROTECTION
AND
M OTOR C ONTROL
Electromechanical starters
Direct-on-line starters - Full voltage across the line.
Non reversing three phase
Enclosed with thermal Order code Relay IEC technical Qty Wt Components
overload relay adj characteristics per Starter enclosure Contactor Thermal Auxiliary
range (≤440V) pkg relay contact
Ie kW block
[A] [A] [kW] n° [kg]
Starters with Start and Stop/Reset pushbuttons .
M0 P009 121 0.6-1 1 0.18-0.25 1 0.760 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 1 ––
M0 P009 121V5 0.9-1.5 1.5 0.37 1 0.760 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 1V5 ––
M0 P009 122V3 1.4-2.3 2.3 0.55-0.75 1 0.760 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 2V3 ––
4 M0 P009 1233 2-3.3 3.3 1.1 1 0.760 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 33 ––
M0 P...12 M0 R...12 M0 P009 125 3-5 5 1.5-2.2 1 0.760 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 5 ––
M0 P009 1275 4.5-7.5 7.5 2.2-3 1 0.760 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 75 ––
M0 P009 1210 6-10 10 3-4 1 0.760 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 10 ––
M0 P012 1215 9-15 12 5.5 1 0.760 M0 PA BG12 10A RF9 15 ––
M1 P009 12A4 0.63-1 1 0.25 1 1.040 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 0100 ––
M1 P009 12A5 1-1.6 1.6 0.37-0.55 1 1.040 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 0160 ––
M1 P009 12A6 1.6-2.5 2.5 0.75 1 1.040 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 0250 ––
M1 P009 12A7 2.5-4 4 1.1-1.5 1 1.040 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 0400 ––
M1 P...12 M1 R...12
M1 P009 12A8 4-6.5 6.5 2.2-3 1 1.040 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 0650 ––
M1 P009 12A9 6.3-10 10 3-4 1 1.040 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 1000 ––
M1 P009 12B0 9-14 13 5.5 1 1.040 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 1400 ––
M1 P018 12B1 13-18 18 7.5 1 1.040 M1 PA BF18 10A RF38 1800 ––
M2 P025 12B2 17-23 23 11 1 1.220 M2 PA BF25 10A RF38 2300 ––
M2 P025 12B3 20-25 25 11 1 1.220 M2 PA BF25 10A RF38 2500 ––
M2 P032 12B4 24-32 32 15 1 1.300 M2 PA BF32 00A RF38 3200 G418 10
M25 P038 12B5 32-38 38 18.5 1 2.880 M25 PA BF38 00A RF38 3800 G418 10
M2 P...12 M2 R...12 M3 P050 12B6 35-50 50 18.5-22 1 3.760 M3 PA BF50 00 RF95 3 50 G418 10
M3 P065 12B7 45-65 65 30 1 3.760 M3 PA BF65 00 RF95 3 65 G418 10
M3 P080 12B8 60-82 80 37-45 1 3.760 M3 PA BF80 00 RF95 3 82 G418 10
M3 P095 12B9 70-95 95 45 1 3.760 M3 PA BF95 00 RF95 3 95 G418 10
Starters with Reset pushbuttons .
M0 R009 121 0.6-1 1 0.18-0.25 1 0.720 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 1 ––
M0 R009 121V5 0.9-1.5 1.5 0.37 1 0.720 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 1V5 ––
M0 R009 122V3 1.4-2.3 2.3 0.55-0.75 1 0.720 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 2V3 ––
M0 R009 1233 2-3.3 3.3 1.1 1 0.720 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 33 ––
M25 P038 12 M0 R009 125 3-5 5 1.5-2.2 1 0.720 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 5 ––
M0 R009 1275 4.5-7.5 7.5 2.2-3 1 0.720 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 75 ––
M0 R009 1210 6-10 10 3-4 1 0.720 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 10 ––
M0 R012 1215 9-15 12 5.5 1 0.720 M0 RA BG12 10A RF9 15 ––
M1 R009 12A4 0.63-1 1 0.25 1 0.995 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 0100 ––
M1 R009 12A5 1-1.6 1.6 0.37-0.55 1 0.995 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 0160 ––
M1 R009 12A6 1.6-2.5 2.5 0.75 1 0.995 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 0250 ––
M1 R009 12A7 2.5-4 4 1.1-1.5 1 0.995 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 0400 ––
M1 R009 12A8 4-6.5 6.5 2.2-3 1 0.995 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 0650 ––
M25 R038 12 M1 R009 12A9 6.3-10 10 3-4 1 0.995 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 1000 ––
M1 R009 12B0 9-14 13 5.5 1 0.995 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 1400 ––
M1 R018 12B1 13-18 18 7.5 1 0.995 M1 RA BF18 10A RF38 1800 ––
M2 R025 12B2 17-23 23 11 1 1.165 M2 RA BF25 10A RF38 2300 ––
M2 R025 12B3 20-25 25 11 1 1.165 M2 RA BF25 10A RF38 2500 ––
M2 R032 12B4 24-32 32 15 1 1.260 M2 RA BF32 00A RF38 3200 G418 10
M25 R038 12B5 32-38 38 18.5 1 2.600 M25 RA BF38 00A RF38 3800 G418 10
M3 R050 12B6 35-50 50 18.5-22 1 3.410 M3 RA BF50 00 RF95 3 50 G418 10
M3 R065 12B7 46-65 65 30 1 3.410 M3 RA BF65 00 RF95 3 65 G418 10
M3 R080 12B8 60-82 80 37-45 1 3.410 M3 RA BF80 00 RF95 3 82 G418 10
M3 R095 12B9 70-95 95 45 1 3.410 M3 RA BF95 00 RF95 3 95 G418 10
M3 P...12
Complete order code with coil voltage digit
(if 50/60Hz) or with voltage digit followed by 60 Operational characteristics
(if 60Hz).
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V Refer to page 4-3 for details.
-- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 /
575 60 (V). Special M3... versions
Example: M0 R009 12 024 1 for direct-on-line starter in M0 type Refer to page 4-3 for details.
enclosure with Reset button, 9A/AC3 contactor with 24VAC
50/60Hz coil and 0.6-1A thermal overload relay.
M0 P009 12 024 60 1 for direct-on-line starter in M0 type UL/CSA HP ratings
enclosure with Start and Stop/Reset buttons , 9A /AC3 See page 4-4
contactor with 24VAC 60Hz coil and
0.6-1A thermal overload relay.
Protection fuses are to be mounted externally by the user.
M3 R...12
Combinations Dimensions Wiring diagrams

4-2 pages 4-10 to 15 pages 4-16 and 17 page 4-20
Enclosed without thermal Order code Maximum operating Qty Wt Components

overload relay current (≤440V) per Starter enclosure Contactor Thermal Auxiliary
pkg standard standard relay to contact
[A] n° [kg] supplied supplied purchase standard
Starters with Start and Stop/Reset pushbuttons . separately supplied
M0 P009 10 10 1 0.667 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 ––
M0 P012 10 12 1 0.667 M0 PA BG12 10A RF9 ––
M1 P009 10 13 1 0.910 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 ––

4
M1 P018 10 18 1 0.910 M1 PA BF18 10A RF38 ––
M0 P...10 M0 R...10
M2 P025 10 25 1 1.060 M2 PA BF25 10A RF38 ––

M2 P032 10 32 1 1.162 M2 PA BF32 00A RF38 G418 10
M25 P038 10 38 1 2.360 M25 PA BF38 00A RF38 G418 10
M3 P050 10 50 1 3.110 M3 PA BF50 00 RF95 3 G418 10

M1 P...10 M1 R...10 M3 P065 10 65 1 3.110 M3 PA BF65 00 RF95 3 G418 10
M3 P080 10 80 1 3.110 M3 PA BF80 00 RF95 3 G418 10
M3 P095 10 95 1 3.110 M3 PA BF95 00 RF95 3 G418 10
Starters with Reset pushbutton .
M0 R009 10 10 1 0.627 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 ––
M0 R012 10 12 1 0.627 M0 RA BG12 10A RF9 ––
M1 R009 10 13 1 0.867 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 ––

M1 R018 10 18 1 0.867 M1 RA BF18 10A RF38 ––
M2 P...10 M2 R...10
M2 R025 10 25 1 1.020 M2 RA BF25 10A RF38 ––

M2 R032 10 32 1 1.110 M2 RA BF32 00A RF38 G418 10
M25 R038 10 38 1 2.320 M25 RA BF38 00A RF38 G418 10
M3 R050 10 50 1 3.070 M3 RA BF50 00 RF95 3 G418 10

M3 R065 10 65 1 3.070 M3 RA BF65 00 RF95 3 G418 10
M3 R080 10 80 1 3.070 M3 RA BF80 00 RF95 3 G418 10
M25 P038 10 M3 R095 10 95 1 3.070 M3 RA BF95 00 RF95 3 G418 10
Complete order code with coil voltage digit if 50/60Hz or with voltage digit For thermal overload relay selection, refer to pages 3-2 or 3-3.
followed by 60 if 60Hz. For thermal overload relay selection, refer to pages 3-4.
Standard voltages are as follows: For thermal overload relay selection, refer to pages 3-4 or 3-5.
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V
-- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 /
575 60 (V). Operational characteristics
Example: M0 R009 10 024 1 for direct-on-line starter in M0 type
enclosure with Reset button, 9A /AC3 contactor with 24VAC – Cable entry:
50/60Hz coil. • M0/M1//M2… - 2 knockouts PG13.5/M20 on
M0 P009 10 024 60 1 for direct-on-line starter in M0 type enclosure top and bottom
enclosure with Start and Stop/Reset buttons , 9A /AC3 • M25… - 2 knockouts PG16/M25-PG29/M32 on
contactor with 24VAC 60Hz coil. enclosure top and bottom
Protection fuses are to be mounted externally by the user.
M25 R038 10 • M3… - Smooth surfaces; can be drilled by customer
– Ambient conditions:
• Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
– Degree of protection: IP65 for all; type 4/4X industrial
control environment for M1 / M2 / M25... and M3... UL
versions.
Special M3... versions

In addition to standard-indicated versions, cULus
certified starters are available up to 52A motor control or
65A general use rating max.
Add suffix UL to the order code,
e.g. M3 P050 10 024UL.
M3 P...10
UL/CSA HP ratings
See page 4-4

Certifications obtained: EAC for all; UL Listed for USA and
Canada (cULus – File E93602) and CSA certified for
Canada and USA (cCSAus – File 94157) as Magnetic
Motor Controllers, enclosed type, for all M0-M1-
M2P/R… starters and M3P/R50-65…UL types as
indicated in “Special M3” above.
IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
M3 R...10

pages 4-9 to 15 pages 4-16 and 17 page 4-20 4-3
Direct-on-line starters – Full voltage across the line.
Non reversing
CONFIGURATIONS FOR USA AND CANADA. NOTE: The HP / FLA values vary from one motor
to another; if possible, always verify the HP and
Order code T/O MAX UL/CSA HP RATINGS INDICATED ON STARTER FLA (or rated current) on the motor nameplate.
for magnetic motor starters RELAY (based on t/o relay adj range) Enclosure UL Type 1, 12, 4 and 4X industrial
in non-metallic enclosure ADJ control environment for M1, M2, M25 and
with 2 push buttons RANGE Single phase Three phase M3…UL versions; designation of control units
can be:
[A] 120V 240V 200V 240V 480V 600V N – without push buttons
R – with reset button only
M0P0091 0.6 - 1 - - - - ½ ½ P – per table, with start-stop push buttons
M0P0091V5 0.9 - 1.5 - - - - ¾ ¾ S – with start selector and stop push button.
Consult Customer Service for any other
M0P0092V3 1.4 - 2.3 - - - ½ 1 1 combination required (e.g. with other type of
4 M0P00933 2 - 3.3 - ¼ ¾ 1½ ½ 2 contactors, contactor assemblies or definite-
purpose version, different overload version or
M0P0095 3-5 - ½ 1 1 3 3 range, additional pilot lights, extra electrical or
electronic elements); see contact details on inside
M0P00975 4.5 - 7.5 - ¾ 1½ 2 5 5 front cover. Refer to below for specified
M0P00910 6 - 10 ½ 1½ 2 3 5 5 standard configurations.
M0P01215 9 - 15 ½ 1½ 3 3 7½ 10 Complete the order code by indicating:

M1P009A4 0.63 - 1 - - - - - ½ – 10 if required without thermal overload
relay
M1P009A5 1 - 1.6 - - - - ½ ¾ – 12 if required with three-phase overload
relay
M1P009A6 1.6 - 2.5 - - ½ ½ 1 1½ – 13 if required with single-phase overload
M1P009A7 2.5 - 4 - - ¾ ¾ 2 3 relay
– 15 if required with automatic reset of
M1P009A8 4 - 6.5 ¼ ½ 1 1½ 3 5 overload relay for M0 types
M1P009A9 6.3 - 10 ½ 1½ 2 3 5 7½ – 17 if required with disconnect switch for
M2 and M3 types
M1P009B0 9 - 14 ¾ 2 3 3 5 7½ – 42 if required with reversing contactor
combination for M2 and M3 types.
M1P012B0 9 - 14 1 2 5 5 7½ 10 Complete the order code by indicating coil
M1P018B1 13 - 18 1 3 5 5 10 15 voltage required:
– 02460 for 24V 60Hz
M2P025B2 17 - 23 1½ 3 5 7½ 15 15 – 04860 for 48V 60Hz / 42V 50Hz
M2P025B3 20 - 25 2 3 7½ 7½ 15 15 – 12060 for 120V 60Hz / 110V 50Hz
– 22060 for 220V 60Hz / 200V 50/60Hz
M2P026B2 17 - 23 1½ 3 5 7½ 15 20 – 23060 for 230V 60Hz / 220V 50Hz
– 46060 for 460V 60Hz / 400V 50Hz
M2P026B3 20 - 25 2 5 7½ 7½ 15 20 – 57560 for 575V 60Hz.
M2P026B4 24 - 32 2 5 7½ 7½ 15 20 Maximum HP ratings per UL and CSA can be
different when definite-purpose contactors are
M2P032B4 24 - 32 3 7½ 10 10 20 25 considered. Consult with Customer Service for
M25P038B5 32 - 38 3 7½ 10 15 30 30 further information; see contact details on
inside front cover.
M3P050B6UL 35 - 50 3 10 10 15 30 40 Short circuit protective device – This enclosed
starter is suitable for use on a circuit capable of
M3P065B7UL 46 - 65 - - 15 15 40 50 delivering not more than 5,000 rms
M3P080B8 60 - 82 - - 25 30 60 75 symmetrical amperes, 600V max, when
protected with Class RK5 type, Fuse size 200A.
M3P095B9 70 - 95 - - 30 30 60 75 Maximum UL ratings is 52A for motor control
and 65A for general use.
Short circuit protective device – This enclosed
starter is suitable for use on a circuit capable of
delivering not more than 10,000 rms
symmetrical amperes, 600V max, when
protected with Class RK5 type, Fuse size 225A.
No CSA or UL certification. Indicated values
correspond to UL/CSA magnetic contactor
ratings and for indication and reference
purposes only.
UL/CSA data for M25 types not available at the
time of catalogue printing so for indication and
reference purposes only.
– CSA certified for Canada and USA (cCSAus -
File 94157) as Magnetic Motor Controllers at
max 600VAC, max 15HP per single phase,
max 60HP three phase, max 125A with
general purpose enclosure.
– UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File
E93602) as Magnetic Motor Controllers –
Enclosed.
Markings:
Line (voltage and frequency value)
Amps (overload adjustment range)
Max HP (horsepower value)
Control (coil and frequency value)
Caution: Bonding between conduits must be
provided.

Reversing and changeover contactor assemblies
Reversing contactor Order code IEC Max. IEC Built-in Qty Wt General characteristics
assemblies Ie (AC3) power auxiliary per REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
≤440V AC3 contacts pkg Supplied complete, ready for quick mounting.
≤55°C 400V at The various versions are composed as follows:
≤55°C BGR... Screw termination, external mechanical
[A] [kW] NO NC n° [kg] interlock BGX50 00, power and auxiliary wiring.
BGT... Screw termination, built-in mechanical interlock
AC COIL. and power wiring only.
Terminals: clamp screw. BGTP... Rear PCB solder pin termination, built-in
External interlock with power and auxiliary wiring. mechanical interlock only.
11 BGR09 01 A 9 4 0 1 1 0.394 No thermal overload relay can be directly mounted to
BG... reversing contactor assemblies.
4
11 BGR... 11 BGR12 01 A 12 5.7 0 1 1 0.394
BFA... Screw termination, mechanical interlock
BFA009 42 9 4.2 0 1 1 0.760 BFX50 02 and power wiring.
BFA012 42 12 5.7 0 1 1 0.760 The thermal overload relay RF38... can be directly
BFA018 42 18 7.5 0 1 1 0.760 mounted to BFA... reversing contactor assemblies; for
selection, refer to section 3.
BFA025 42 25 12.5 0 1 1 0.760
CHANGEOVER CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
Built-in interlock with power wiring only. Supplied complete, ready for quick mounting as follows:
11 BGT09 10 A 9 4 1 0 1 0.380 BGC09 T4Four-pole contactors with built-in mechanical
11 BGT12 10 A 12 5.7 1 0 1 0.380 interlock. No power or auxiliary wiring included.
Rear terminals: PCB solder pins. Operational characteristics
Built-in interlock only. Type Maximum IEC operational power
11 BGTP09 01 A 9 4 0 1 1 0.400 at ≤55°C (AC3)
230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V
DC COIL. [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]
BFA... Terminals: clamp screw.
External interlock with power and auxiliary wiring. BGR09 2.2 4 4.3 4.5 5 5
BGT09 2.2 4 4.3 4.5 5 5
11 BGR09 01 D 9 4 0 1 1 0.460
BGTP09 2.2 4 4.3 4.5 5 –
11 BGR12 01 D 12 5.7 0 1 1 0.460
BGR12 3.2 5.7 6.2 5.5 5 5
Built-in interlock with power wiring only. BGT12 3.2 5.7 6.2 5.5 5 5
11 BGT09 10 D 9 4 1 0 1 0.445 BFA009 2.2 4.2 4.5 4.8 5.5 7.2
11 BGT12 10 D 12 5.7 1 0 1 0.445 BFA012 3.2 5.7 6.2 6.2 7.5 10
Rear terminals: PCB solder pins. BFA018 4 7.5 9 9 10 10
11 BGT... Built-in interlock only. BFA025 7 12.5 13.4 13.4 15 11
11 BGTP09 01 D 9 4 0 1 1 0.460 at ≤40°C (AC1)
BGC09 T4 8 14 14 15 16 22
Single phase Three phase
120V 240V 208V 240V 480V 600V
[HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP]
BGR09 ½ 1½ 2 3 5 5
BGT09 ½ 1½ 2 3 5 5
BGTP09 ½ 1½ 2 3 5 -
11 BGTP... BGR12 ½ 1½ 3 3 7½ 10
BGT12 ½ 1½ 3 3 7½ 10
Changeover contactor Order code IEC Operating UL/CSA Qty Wt BFA009 ¾ 2 3 3 5 7½
current (AC1) General per BFA012 1 2 5 5 7½ 10
assemblies Use pkg BFA018 1 3 5 5 10 15
≤40°C ≤55°C ≤60°C BFA025 2 3 7½ 7½ 15 15
[A] [A] [A] [A] n° [kg] NOTE: BGR09, BGT09, BGR12, BGT12… types are UL Listed for USA
AC COIL. and Canada as “Magnetic Motor Controller – Reversing Contactors”. All
these are rated 20A general (purpose) use and suitable for use on a
Terminals: clamp screw. circuit capable of delivering more than 5kA symmetrical. Amps at 600V
Built-in interlock only. max when protected by fuses class K5 rated no more than 30A.
BGTP09 type is UL Recognized for USA and Canada as “Magnetic
11 BGC09 T4 A 20 18 15 20 1 0.365 Motor Controller – Component – reversing contactors”. Max HP
rating up to 300VAC only; rated 20A general (purpose) use.
DC COIL. BGC… types are UL Listed for USA and Canada as “Magnetic Motor
Terminals: clamp screw. Controller – Changeover contactor”.
11 BGC09 ... Built-in interlock only. No coil change or replacement is possible for any BG… types.
11 BGC09 T4 D 20 18 15 20 1 0.450 Add-on blocks

Refer to section 2, pages 2-16 and 2-18.
Complete order code with coil voltage digit or with voltage digit followed Special add-on auxiliary contacts 11 BGX11 11 or
by 60 if 60Hz.
11 BGX11 12 must be used on the left-side contactor of
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V the BGT reversing assemblies.
-- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 / For the right-side contactor, normal 11 BGX10... types of
575 60 (V). auxiliary contacts can be used instead.
Example: 11 BGR09 01 A024 for reversing contactor assembly with Refer to page 2-16 for details.
2 mini-contactors BG09 having 1 NC auxiliary contact each
and 24VAC 50/60Hz coil. Certifications and compliance
11 BGR09 01 A024 60 for reversing contactor assembly with Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada
2 mini-contactors BG09 having 1 NC auxiliary contact each (File E93602) for BGR09, BGT09, BGR12, BGT12, BFA...
and 24VAC 60Hz coil.
Complete order code with coil voltage digit.
and BGC... (see NOTE above).
Standard voltages are: UL Recognized, for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93602
-- DC 012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220V. Component), for BGTP09; products having this type of
Example: 11BGC09 T4 D012 is a changeover contactor assembly with marking are intended for use as components of complete
2 mini-contactors BG09 having 4 main poles each and 12VDC
coil. workshop-assembled equipment.
One auxiliary contact for each contactor. Compliant with standards IEC/EN 60947-1,
Maximum voltage is limited at 300V for UL. For certified type up to 600V, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
consult Customer Service; see contact details on front inside cover.
Add-on blocks Combinations Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

pages 2-16 and 2-17 pages 4-13 to 15 page 4-18 page 4-20 pages 2-48 to 2-67 4-5
Star-delta starters
Open frame Order code Three-phase Qty Wt Operational characteristics

motor control. per IEC standard motor powers
Max IEC operating pkg
current (≤440V) 230V 400V 440V 500V
[A] n° [kg] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]
Complete star-delta starters, open frame, for starting
time up to 12 seconds and a maximum of 30 operations/hour.
BFA009 70 16 1 1.700 4 7.5 7.5 7.5
BFA012 70 22 1 1.700 5.5 11 11 11
4 BFA018 70 28 1 1.700 7.5 15 11 11
BFA025 70 35 1 1.800 11 18.5 18.5 22
BFA026 70 43 1 1.800 11 22 22 25
BFA032 70 50 1 1.900 15 25 25 25
BFA038 70 60 1 1.900 15 30 30 30
BFA... 21 DYF50 E 85 1 5.200 25 45 45 59
21 DYF65 E 110 1 5.200 30 59 63 75
21 DYF80 E 140 1 6.265 40 75 80 100
21 DYF95 E 145 1 6.265 40 75 80 100
21 NYF115 220 1 19.000 63 110 129 147
21 NYF145 260 1 19.000 80 132 162 185
21 NYF180 310 1 19.000 92 160 185 210
21 NYF250 480 1 22.650 145 250 280 315
21 NYF310 530 1 22.650 160 295 335 368
21 NYF400 690 1 25.000 220 375 425 450
Thermal relay adjustment range

Choose the thermal relay adjustment range considering a value
equal to 58% of rated motor current (Ie).
Example: Ie=100A; 58% Ie=58A.
The suitable relay range is 46-65A.
During the setup, the relay is to be regulated at 58A.
For DYF... type For NYF... type

Digit defining Relay IEC aM DYF Digit defining Relay IEC aM NYF
thermal adj fuses starters thermal adj fuses starters
relay range range A A 50 65 80 95 relay range range A A 115 145 180 250 310 400
42 28-42 80 100 60-100 200
50 35-50 100 125 75-125 250
65 46-65 125 150 90-150 315
82 60-82 160 200 120-200 400
95 70-95 200 250 150-250 500
300 180-300 630
Complete order code with the coil voltage digit or 420 250-420 800
the coil voltage digit followed by 60 if 60Hz.
Standard voltage are as follows: Components
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V
-- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / Starter Contactors Thermal Time relay Auxiliary contacts fitted Rigid
230 60 (V). overload on contactor: connections
Example: BFA009 70 024 for BFA009 star-delta Line Delta Star relay Line Delta Star
starter with 24VAC 50/60Hz power
supply. BFA009 70 BF09 10A BF09 01A BF09 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 –– BFX10 11 BFX31 31
BFA009 70 024 60 for BFA009 star-delta BFA012 70 BF12 10A BF12 01A BF09 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 –– BFX10 11 BFX31 31
starter with 24VAC 60Hz power supply.
The thermal overload relay is not included and BFA018 70 BF18 10A BF18 01A BF12 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 –– BFX10 11 BFX31 31
must be purchased separately.
BFA025 70 BF25 10A BF25 01A BF18 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 –– BFX10 11 BFX31 31
Refer to the example given under Thermal relay
adjustment range, for a correct choice and then to BFA026 70 BF26 00A BF26 00A BF18 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 BFX10 11 BFX10 11 BFX32 32
page 3-4 for the order code.
The thermal overload relay is included. Replace with BFA032 70 BF32 00A BF32 00A BF25 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 BFX10 11 BFX10 11 BFX32 32
digit of thermal relay; see tables above, under BFA038 70 BF38 00A BF38 00A BF25 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 BFX10 11 BFX10 11 BFX32 32
Thermal relay adjustment range.
To be mounted by the customer. DYF50 E BF50 00 BF50 00 BF32 00 RF95 3 TM ST BFX10 20 BFX10 11 BFX10 11 ––
Fuses for type 1 co-ordination. For type 2
DYF65 E BF65 00 BF65 00 BF32 00 RF95 3 TM ST BFX10 20 BFX10 11 BFX10 11 ––
co-ordination, consult Customer Service; see
contact details on inside front cover. DYF80 E BF80 00 BF80 00 BF50 00 RF95 3 TM ST BFX10 20 BFX10 11 BFX10 11 ––
TM ST with auxiliary supply 24...240VAC.
TM ST A440 with auxiliary supply 380...440VAC. DYF95 E BF95 00 BF95 00 BF50 00 RF95 3 TM ST BFX10 20 BFX10 11 BFX10 11 ––
NYF115 B115 00 B115 00 BF65 00 RF200 TM ST G350 G354 BFX10 11 ––
NOTE: For higher powers and voltages, or NYF145 B145 00 B145 00 BF80 00 RF200 TM ST G350 G354 BFX10 11 ––
suitable for heavy-duty starting (centrifugal
fans, mills, crushers) that is with starting NYF180 B180 00 B180 00 B115 00 RF200 TM ST G350 G354 G354 ––
time exceeding 12s, consult Customer NYF250 B250 00 B250 00 B145 00 RF420 TM ST G350 G354 G354 ––
Service; see contact details on inside front NYF310 B310 00 B310 00 B180 00 RF420 TM ST G350 G354 G354 ––
cover.
NYF400 B400 00 B400 00 B250 00 RF420 TM ST G350 G354 G354 ––
Reference stardards
Compliant with stardards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-9.

4-6 page 4-18 pages 4-21 to 23
Star-delta starters.
Non-metallic enclosure for starters
Enclosed starters Order Three-phase motor Qty Wt Operational characteristics

control. per IEC standard motor powers
Max IEC operating pkg
current (≤440V) 230V 400V 440V 500V
[A] n° [kg] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]
Star-delta starters in enclosure with Start and Stop/Reset
buttons. Starting time up to 12 seconds and a maximum of
30 operations/hour.
M3 P009 70 16 1 3.540 4 7.5 7.5 7.5
M3 P012 70 22 1 3.540 5.5 11 11 11 4
M3 P018 70 28 1 3.540 7.5 15 11 11
M3 P025 70 35 1 3.650 11 18.5 18.5 22
M3 P026 70 43 1 3.650 11 22 22 25
M3 P...70... - M3 PA70 M3 P032 70 50 1 3.800 15 25 25 25
M3 P038 70 60 1 3.800 15 30 30 30
With switch disconnector, rotary door-coupling handle – Cable entry: Smooth surface; can be drilled by
GAX61 and Start and Stop/Reset buttons. customer
M3 P009 73 16 1 3,700 – Ambient conditions:
M3 P012 73 22 1 3,700 • Operating temperature: -25...+60°C
M3 P018 73 28 1 3,700 – Degree of protection: IEC IP65 for M3P…; UL Type 1,
M3 P025 73 35 1 3,800 12, 4/4X for M3…UL versions.
Complete order code with the coil voltage digit
or the coil voltage digit followed by 60 if 60Hz. M3 P026 73 43 1 3,800
Standard voltage are as follows: Special M3... versions
M3 P032 73 50 1 4,300 In addition to standard-indicated versions, cULus
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V
-- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 M3 P038 73 60 1 4,300 certified starters are available up to 52A motor control
/ 230 60 (V). rating max. This is also valid for the enclosure with
Example: M3P009 70 024 for M3P009 star- Enclosure for star-delta starter, complete with Start and
Stop/Reset buttons, metal plate fixed with piece of general use rating of 65A.
delta starter with 24VAC 50/60Hz
power supply. 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail. Add suffix UL to the order code, e.g. M3 PA70UL.
M3P009 70 02460 for M3P009
star-delta starter with 24VAC 60Hz M3 PA70 –– 1 2.240 Certifications and compliance
power supply. Certifications obtained: UL Listed, for USA and Canada
The thermal overload relay is not included and
(File E93602), as Magnetic Motor Controllers - Enclosed
must be purchased separately.
Choose the thermal relay adjustment range (starters) and - Enclosures for M3...PUL types.
considering a value equal to 58% of rated motor Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
current (Ie). IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14 for starters;
Example: Ie=10A; 58% Ie = 5.8A. The suitable UL 508A for M3P A70UL.
relay range is 4-6.5A, set at 5.8A, so the order
code to select is RF380650).
Refer to page 3-4 for the order codes available.
Suitable for BFA...70 starters. Maximum available space inside M3P... star-delta starters and M3 PA70 enclosure
TM ST with auxiliary supply 24...240VAC;
TM ST A440 with auxiliary supply 380...400VAC.
NOTE: For higher powers and voltage

ratings or suitable for heavy-duty starting
(centrifugal fans, mills, crushers) that is
with starting time exceeding 12s, consult
Customer Service; see contact details on 80.5
inside front cover.
146
125.5 73.5
66.5
Components
Type Enclosure Contactors T/o Time Auxiliary contacts fitted Rigid Switch
relay relay on contactor: connec- disconnector
Line Delta Star Line Delta Star tions
M3P009 70 M3 PA70 BF09 10A BF09 01A BF09 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 –– BFX10 11 BFX31 31 GA016 A
M3P026 70 M3 PA70 BF26 00A BF26 00A BF18 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 BFX10 11 BFX10 11 BFX32 32 GA063 SA

page 4-15 page 4-19 page 4-21 4-7
Accessories and spare parts
Empty enclosures Order code Contactor type Thermal Degree Qty Wt Enclosure Maximum operating current
relay of per type (≤440V)
protect. pkg A
n° [kg] M0... 12
Enclosures with Start-Stop/Reset pushbuttons. M1... 18
M0PA BG06, BG09, RF9 IP65 1 0.490 M2... 32
BG12
M24N 38
M1PA BF09A, BF12A, RF38 IP65 1 0.545
BF18A M25... 38
4 M2PA BF25A, BF26A RF38 IP65 1 0.715 M3... 110
BF32A General characteristics
M25PA BF38A RF38 IP65 1 0.990 Enclosures are supplied with the following accessories:
M...PA M3PA BF50, BF65, RF95 3 IP65 1 1.900 Accessory Type of enclosure
BF80, BF95,
M25 RA
M25 PA
M0 RA
M1 RA
M2 RA
BF110
M0 PA
M1 PA
M2 PA
Enclosures with Reset pushbutton. Description Type
M0RA BG06, BG09, RF9 IP65 1 0.445 Contact MX 20P 1
BG12 holder MX 21P 1 1 1
M1RA BF09A, BF12A, RF38 IP65 1 0.500
BF18A Buttons: LPC B1176 1 1 1 1
- Start/Reset LPC B2104 1 1 1 1
M2RA BF25A, BF26A RF38 IP65 1 0.670 - Start
BF32A LPC B1113 1 1 1 1
M25RA BF38A RF38 IP65 1 0.970 Contact for LPX C10 1 1 1 1
M3RA BF50, BF65, RF95 3 IP65 1 1.850 Start button
BF80, BF95, Stop/Reset MX 10P 1 1
M...RA BF110 button MX 11P 1 1
Enclosures without external pushbuttons. extension
MX 12P 1 1 1 1
M0N BG06, BG09, RFA9 IP65 1 0.405 Unused hole MX 01 1 1 1 1
BG12 threaded plug
M1N BF09A, BF12A, RF38 IP65 1 0.460 – M3 PA enclosure: 2 Start and Stop/Reset pushbuttons,
BF18A 2 G285 auxiliary terminals and 1 MX30 mounting plate
M2N BF25A, BF26A RF38 IP65 1 0.640 – M3 RA enclosure: 1 Reset pushbutton,
BF32A 2 G285 auxiliary terminals and 1 MX30 mounting plate
M24N BG.../ IP65 1 0.625 – M3N enclosure: Supplied without accessories to be
BF09A...BF25A purchased separately including MX 30 mounting plate.
M25N BF38A RF38 IP65 1 0.940 Enclosures can house the following devices:
M...N M0 = BG… with/without RF9
M3N BF50, BF65, RF95 3 IP65 1 1.800 M1 = BF09A-BF12A-BF18A with/without RF38
BF80, BF95, M2 = BF25A-BF26A-BF32A, assemblies BFA…42
BF110 with/without RF38
To be purchased separately; refer to page 2-4 for contactor choice. M24N = BF25A-BF26A-BF32A, assemblies BGR/BGT/BGC
To be purchased separately. and BFA…42 without overload
Refer to pages 3-2 to -6 for thermal overload relay choice.
For use of the overload relay in the M24N, consult Customer Service; see M25 = BF26…BF38A, assemblies BGR/BGT/BGC and
contact details on inside front cover. BFA…42 with/without overload
Reversing contactor assemblies BGR…, BGT…, BFA…42 and changeover M3 = BF50…BF110 and all assemblies with/without
types BGC… can also be fitted in M24N and M25… types. See pages 4-4, overload.
4-13 and 4-15.
MX 31 metal mounting plate included. Operational characteristics:
MX 30 metal mounting plate included. – Cable entry:
To install eventual pushbuttons, selectors and/or other control
accessories, use the series and mount the relay contact • M0/M1//M2… - 2 knockouts PG13.5/M20 on
elements on the cover using the LPX AU120 mounting adapter. See enclosure top and bottom
section 7.
• M24N/M25… - 2 knockouts PG16/M25-PG29/M32
on enclosure top and bottom
Accessories and Order code Description Qty Wt • M3… - Smooth surfaces; can be drilled by customer
spare parts per – Ambient conditions:
pkg • Operating temperature: -25...+60°C
n° [kg] • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
– Degree of protection: IEC IP65 for all; UL Type 1, 12,
MX 01 Threaded plug for unused holes, 10 0.007 4/4X for M0/M1/M2/M24N/M25… types and M3…UL
grey RAL7035 versions.
MX 10P Stop/Reset button extension 5 0.010 Special M3… versions
rod for M0 enclosure In addition to standard-indicated versions, cULus
MX 11P Stop/Reset button extension 5 0.010 certified starters and enclosures are available up to 52A -
rod for M1 enclosure motor control and 65A general use rating max (MX30
MX 12P Stop/Reset button extension 5 0.010 plate, earth/ground and neutral terminal plates are always
MX 20P
MX 21P rod for M2 enclosure included in this case).
Add suffix UL to the order code of enclosures
MX 20P Mounting base for LPX C... 5 0.014 e.g. M3N UL.
contact on M0 enclosure
MX 21P Mounting base for LPX C... 5 0.014 Certifications obtained: EAC for all; for M3NUL type, UL
contact on M1, M2, M25 Listed for USA and Canada (cULus – File E300050) as
enclosure Industrial control panels; for M0/M1/M2PA/RA/N and
MX 30 Metal mounting plate for M3N 1 0.500 other M3…UL types, UL Listed for USA and Canada
MX 31 Metal mounting plate for M24N 1 0.400 (cULus – File E93602) under magnetic motor controllers
and M25 enclosures as Polymeric enclosures - and CSA certified for Canada
and USA (cCSAus – File 94157) as Non-metallic
enclosures. UL/CSA pending for M24N and M25… types.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN
60947-4-1, UL 508, CSA CS22.2 n°14; UL 508A and CSA
C22.1 for M3NUL type.

M...PA EMPTY ENCLOSURES

M0PA M1PA M2PA M25PA M3PA
M3PA
M...RA EMPTY ENCLOSURES

M0RA M1RA M2RA M25RA M3RA
M3RA
M...N EMPTY ENCLOSURES
M0N M1N M2N
M24N M25N M3N
Metal mounting Metal mounting Metal mounting plate

plate MX31 plate MX31 MX 30
(standard supplied) (standard supplied) (to purchase separately)

pages 4-16 and 17 page 4-20 4-9
M...P... STARTERS, ENCLOSED

M0 P009 12... M0 P009 10... M1 P009 12... M1 P009 10... M2 P025 12... M2 P025 10...
M0 P012 12... M0 P012 10... M1 P018 12... M1 P018 10... M2 P032 12... M2 P032 10...
M...R... STARTERS, ENCLOSED

M0 R009 12... M0 R009 10... M1 R009 12... M1 R009 10... M2 R025 12... M2 R025 10...
M0 R012 12... M0 R012 10... M1 R018 12... M1 R018 10... M2 R032 12... M2 R032 10...
M25... STARTERS, ENCLOSED

M25 P03812... M25 P03810... M25 R03812... M25 R03810...
M3... STARTERS, ENCLOSED

M3 P050 12... to M3 P050 10... to M3 R050 12... to M3 R050 10... to
M3 P095 12... M3 P095 10... M3 R095 12... M3 R095 10...

4-10 pages 4-16 and 17 page 4-20
Maximum combinations for M0... and M1... starters in 2) Middle position 2 3) Lower position 3
enclosure Based on the enclosure type, in this position, the The STOP/RESET button is mounted in this position,
For the fitting of add-on blocks and electronic relays in user finds either the Start button or threaded plug. except for the enclosure without buttons.
the starters, consult our Customer Service; see contact Various actuators can be fitted in this This button activates the thermal overload relay via a
details on inside front cover. position, such as flush or extended buttons, mechanical actuator.
The enclosure cover can be equipped with various types selectors or pilot lights, as illustrated below. In eventual applications without thermal overload
of actuators and pilot lights, per following details: To fit the actuators (not required for 8 LP2T IL…P relay, this button can be removed and the hole
1) Upper position 1 pilot lights), the mounting base, type MX 20 for M0 closed up by the threaded plug MX 01.
The cover must be drilled in this position, with a enclosure, or type MX 21P for M1 enclosure, must
22.5mm hole, by the user and LPL... or 8 LP2T IL…P also be purchased. The contact or LED elements are
pilot light can be fitted. snapped onto this mounting base. 4
To fit the LPL... (not type 8 LP2T IL…P) pilot light No adapter or base is needed for 8 LP2T IL...P and
head, the mounting base, type MX 20P for M0 8 LP2T Z...
enclosure or type MX 21P for M1 enclosure, must
also be purchased. The LED element is snapped onto
this mounting base.
No adapter or base is needed for 8 LP2T IL...P
and 8 LP2T Z...
m
.5m
17 1 x
LPX LP...
LPX LE...
Time relay TM... LPX LPS...
Protection relay PMV10 A440
LPL...
Level control relay LVM25 240 LPX C0... LPX C0...
Priority change relay LVMP 05 LPX C1... LPX C1...
(one only relay on the left LPX CS... LPX CS...
of the contactor)
MX 20P (M0) 8 LP2T IL...P
MX 21P (M1) 8 LP2T Z...
MX 01
1 LPC BL...
LPC QL...
2
LPC B...
LPC Q...
3
LPC S3...
MO... M1...
LPC S...
LPC SL1...
BF09A
BF12A
BF18A LPC B7...
LPC BL7...
BG...
LPC B73...
RF9 RF38

pages 4-16 and 17 page 4-20 4-11
Maximum combinations for M2... starters in enclosure 2) Middle position 2 This button activates the thermal overload relay via a
For the fitting of add-on blocks and electronic relays in Based on the enclosure type, in this position, mechanical actuator. In eventual applications without
the starters, consult our Customer Service; see contact the user finds either the Start button or threaded thermal overload relay, this button can be removed
details on inside front cover. plug. and the hole closed up by the threaded plug MX 01.
The enclosure covers can be equipped with various Various actuators can be fitted in this Various actuators can be fitted in this
types of actuators and pilot lights, per following details: position, such as flush or extended buttons, position, such as flush or extended buttons,
1) Upper position 1 selectors or pilot lights, as illustrated in the side selectors or pilot lights, as illustrated in the drawing
The cover must be drilled in this position with a figure. below. To fit the actuators (not required for
22.5mm hole by the user; LPL... or 8 LP2T IL…P To fit the actuators (not required for 8 LP2T IL…P 8 LP2T IL…P pilot light), the mounting base type
pilot light can be fitted. pilot light), the mounting base type MX 21P must MX 21P must also be purchased. The contact or LED
4 To fit the LPL... pilot light, the mounting base type also be purchased. elements are snapped onto this mounting base.
MX 21P must also be purchased. The LED element is The contact or LED elements are snapped onto this No adapter or base is needed for 8 LP2T IL...P and
snapped onto this mounting base. mounting base. 8 LP2T Z...
No adapter or base is needed for 8 LP2T IL...P and No adapter or base is needed for 8 LP2T IL...P and 4) Upper position 4
8 LP2T Z... 8 LP2T Z... The cover must be drilled in this position
3) Lower position 3 with a 22.5mm hole by the user whenever an
The STOP/RESET button is mounted in this position, external handle is needed for a switch
except for the enclosure without buttons. disconnector fitted in the enclosure.
mm x1
35 PMV20/30/40/50/55/60/70... protection relay
PMF20 A... protection relay
or PMA20/30... protection relay
m LMV20... level control relay GAX63
.5m (one relay only on right side of the contactor)
17 GAX63 B
2 xx
ma
LPX LP...
LPX LE...
LPX LPS...
Time relay TM... LPL...
Protection relay PMV10 A440
Level control relay LVM25 240 LPX C0... LPX C0...
Priority change relay LVMP 05 LPX C1... LPX C1...
(two relays or one only on left LPX CS... LPX CS...
8 LP2T IL...P
and one on right side 8 LP2T Z...
of the contactor)
MX 21P
4 MX 01
1 LPC BL...
LPC QL...
2
LPC B...
LPC Q...
3
MX 21P
M2... M2... M2... LPC S3...
BF25A n°2 BF09A n°2 BF18A BF09A BF25A

BF26A n°2 BF12A n°2 BF25A BF12A BF26A
BF32A BF18A BF32A LPC S...
LPC SL1...
LPC B7...
LPC BL7...
ON
I
GAX7 090
OFF
BFX50 02 LPC B73...
GA016 A
GA025 A
RF38 RF38 RF38 GA032 A LPC B6...

4-12 pages 4-16 and 17 page 4-20
Maximum combinations for starters in M24N enclosure

In addition to a direct-on-line, full voltage across the line, starter or reversing contactor assembly, various other electromechanical devices can be fitted. The cover of the
M24N enclosure can be used across the entire surface to mount pushbuttons, measuring instruments, switch disconnectors GA016A…GA032A type. No contact blocks or
other additional accessories can be mounted on the contactor face of AC BF series; they can only be fitted on the contactor side since the cover is shallow.
Eventually pushbuttons, selector switches and/or other control accessories of the series can be used and contact or LED elements can be mounted directly
inside on the cover with the LPX AU120 mounting adapter; refer to section 7.
MX 31 internal metal mounting plate is standard-supplied.
The wall fixing holes and the cover closing

captive screws are positioned outwards with
4
respect to the sealing gasket. This guarantees the
protection degree of the enclosure against
infiltrations liquid (IEC IPX5 / UL Type 4X).
The base has ribbing which facilitates the

fixing of DIN rails, metal mounting plates and
electronic printed boards.
Grid references, marked by letters and numbers,

are engraved on the interior surface of the cover.
This grid allows to quickly identify the exact
drilling points where pushbuttons, handles or
pilot lights will be mounted.
A safety sealing system keeps the cover and

base together to avoid inopportune opening and
tampering.
Available space for fitting other electrical or electronic devices
103
156
82,6
M24N M24N M24N M24N

BG06 BF09A...BF25A BGR... - BGT... - BGC... without overload BF09A BF12A
BG09 without overload n° 2 BF09A n° 2 BF12A BF18A BF25A
BG12 n° 2 BF18A n° 2 BF25A with GA016A...GA032A
without overload All without overload
BFA...42 without overload
BFX50 02
ON
I
OFF
BFX50 01

pages 4-16 and 17 page 4-20 4-13
Maximum combinations for starters in M25… enclosure

In addition to a direct-on-line, full voltage across the line, starter or reversing contactor assembly, various other electromechanical devices can be fitted. The cover of the
M25 enclosure can be used across the entire surface to mount pushbuttons, measuring instruments, switch disconnectors GA016A…GA040A type. Possible contact
blocks or other additional accessories can be mounted on the contactor face of AC or DC BF series or on the contactor side since the cover is deep.
Eventually pushbuttons, selector switches and/or other control accessories of the series can be used and contact or LED elements can be mounted directly
inside on the cover with the LPX AU120 mounting adapter; refer to section 7.
MX 31 internal metal mounting plate is standard-supplied.
The wall fixing holes and the cover closing

captive screws are positioned outwards with
4 respect to the sealing gasket. This guarantees the
protection degree of the enclosure against liquid
infiltrations (IEC IPX5 / UL Type 4X).

Grid references, marked by letters and numbers,

are engraved on the interior surface of the cover.
This grid allows to quickly identify the exact
drilling points where pushbuttons, handles or
pilot lights will be mounted.

base together to avoid inopportune opening and
tampering.
103
156
156
148
37,5
M25...038... M25... M25... M25...

BF38 BF26 - BF32 BGR... - BGT... - BGC with or without overload RF9 BF09 BF12 BF18
with or without with or without n° 2 BF26 - n° 2 BF32 - n° 2 BF38 with or without BF26 BF32 BF38
overload overload overload RF38 with GA016A...GA040A
BFA...42 with or without overload RF38
BFX50 02
ON
I
OFF
RF38... RF38...
RF38...
BF09A...BF38A with
BFX50 01

4-14 pages 4-16 and 17 page 4-20
Direct-on-line starters
Maximum combinations for starters in M3… enclosure

In addition to a direct-on-line, full voltage across the line, starter or reversing contactor assembly, star-delta starters can be installed as illustrated at the lower right as well as
various other electromechanical devices. The cover of the M3 enclosure can be used across the entire surface to mount pushbuttons, measuring instruments or switch
disconnectors GA016A…GA125A, etc.
MX 30 internal metal mounting plate is standard supplied with M3P… and M3R… types; not included with the M3N, it can be purchased separately.
With the specifically designed hinges, the cover

remains attached to the base, fully open, while
the wiring work is being carried out. By
applying slight pressure on the hinges, the
cover can be released from the base.
4
The cover closing captive screws and the wall M3...
fixing holes are positioned outwards with
respect to the sealing gasket. This guarantees
the protection degree of the enclosure against M3 P050 12...
liquids infiltrations (IEC IPX5 / UL Type 4X). M3 P095 12...

base together to avoid inopportune opening
and tampering.
Grid references, marked by letters and

numbers, are engraved on the interior surface
of the cover. This grid allows to quickly
identify the exact drilling points where
pushbuttons, handle or pilot lights will be
mounted.
A properly predrilled metal mounting plate

(MX 30 standard supplied except for M3N)
permits to quickly and precisely fix equipment
in place.

92.7
92.7
80.5
244
244
146
185 185
89
125.5 73.5
89
89
66.5
M3... M3... M3... M3P...70

n° 1 BF50 n° 1 BF95 n° 2 BF50 n° 2 BF65 n° 2 BF95 n° 1 BF50 n° 1 BF65 n° 1 BF95 Star-delta combinations with t/o relay RF38,
+ n° 1 GA...
n° 1 BF65 n° 1 BF110 n° 2 BF80 n° 2 BF110 n° 1 BF80 n° 1 BF110 TM ST timer and contactors:
n° 1 BF80 BF09A BF12A BF18A
BF25A BF26A BF38A
20.2
CN
RF95
RF38

pages 4-16 and 17 page 4-20 4-15
DIRECT-ON-LINE STARTERS - EMPTY ENCLOSURES

M0 M1
140.4 155.4
(5.53”) (6.12”)
88 133.3 88
148.3
(3.46”) (5.25”) (3.46”)
44 44 (5.84”)
(1.73”) Ø4.5 119.5 (1.73”) Ø4.5 134.5
(0.18”) (4.70”) (0.18”) (5.29”)
4
(6.89”)
(7.24”)
175
184
(7.95”)
(7.60”)
202
193
49
(1.93”)
(0.76”)
49
19.4
(1.93”)
(0.76”)
19.4
PG13.5 / M20 knockouts
on top and bottom
PG13.5 / M20 knockouts
on top and bottom
M2 M24N
162.3 (6.39”)
110 (4.33”)
169.4 (6.70”)
55 (2.16”)
Ø4.5 (0.18”) 148.5 (5.85”)
175 (6.89”) 98.5 (3.88”)
210 (8.27”)
234 (9.21”)
225 (8.86”)
52 (2.05”) Drilling for surface fixing

60 (2.36”) Ø 4.5 (0.18”)
153.5 (6.04”)
(1.10”)
(0.90”)
22.8
28
PG16 / M25
PG13.5 / M20 PG29 / M32
PG16/M25 knockouts on top
knockouts on top and bottom and bottom
184 (7.24”)
4-16
M25 Drilling for surface fixing

165 (6.50”)
Ø 4.5 (0.18”)
175 (6.89”) 158,5 (6.24”) 153.5 (6.04”)
148,5 (5.85”)
184 (7.24”)
210 8.27”)
52 (2.05”)
(1.10”)
28
PG16 / M25
PG29 / M32
148,5 (5.85”)
knockouts on top
and bottom
M3 Drilling for surface fixing

190.9 (7.51”) Ø 6.2 (0.24”)
183.8 (7.24”) 178 (7.01”)
13 220 (8.66”) 170 (6.69”)
(0.51”)
238 (9.37”)
280 (11.02”)
REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES

BGR... with external interlock BGT... with internal interlock
88 88
(3.46”) (3.46”)
”)
(0 Ø4
4.4 4.4 6
”)
(0 Ø4
.16
4.4 4.4
.16
(0.17”) (0.17”) (0.24”) (0.17”) (0.17”)

(1.97”)
(2.28”)
(2.28”)
(1.97”)
50
58
58
50
8.5 9.7 34.9 56 56

(2.20”) 9.7 8.5 34.9
0.33”) (0.38”) (1.37”) (0.33”) (1.37”) (2.20”)
(0.38”)
8.5 8.5
(0.33”) (0.33”)
8.5 8.5
(0.33”) (0.33”)
BGTP... with rear PCB solder pins and internal interlock BFA...42 with external interlock
88 4.4 4.4
(0 4.2
”)
(3.46”) (0.17”) (0.17”) 90 90

.16
Ø
(3.54”) (3.54”)
(0.05”)
Ø1.4❶
(2.28”)
(1.97”)
(2.09”)
58
50
53
(3.27”)
(2.79”)
83
71
9.7 8.5 56
(0.38”) (0.33”) (2.20”)
8.5 5.6
(0.33”) (0.22”)
8.5 35
(1.38”)
(0.33”) Recommended PCB drillings 1.7-2mm (0.07-0.08”).
4-17
CHANGEOVER CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES

BGC09 T4... with internal interlock
88
(3.46”)
”)
(0 Ø 4
4.4 4.4
.16
(0.17”) (0.17”)
(2.28”)
(1.97”)
58
50
8.5 34.9 56
9.7
4 (0.38”)
8.5
(0.33”)
(0.33”) (1.37”) (2.20”)
8.5
(0.33”)
STAR-DELTA STARTERS OPEN FRAME

BFA... 70... on 35mm DIN rail, without thermal overload relay
197.5
(7.77”)
152.5
(6.00”) 11 B
(0.43”) STARTER TYPE A B
BFA009 70 130.5 (5.14”) 109.5 (4.31”)
10 BFA012 70 130.5 (5.14”) 109.5 (4.31”)
(0.39”)
BFA018 70 130.5 (5.14”) 109.5 (4.31”)
(3.54”)
BFA025 70 130.5 (5.14”) 109.5 (4.31”)

90
BFA026 70 135 (5.14”) 119 (4.68”)

A
BFA032 70 135 (5.14”) 119 (4.68”)

BFA038 70 135 (5.14”) 119 (4.68”)
DYF... on mounting plate, with thermal overload relay

250 141
(9.84”) (5.55”)
(0.63”)
15 (0.59”) 15 (0.59”)
16.1
(5.55”)
(6.22”)
141
158
(1.94”)
49.4
NYF... on mounting plate, with thermal overload relay

A C
B
STARTER TYPE A B C
NYF115 340 (13.38”) 870 (34.25”) 195 (7.68”)
NYF145 340 (13.38”) 870 (34.25”) 195 (7.68”)
NYF180 340 (13.38”) 870 (34.25”) 195 (7.68”)
NYF250 440 (17.32”) 1000 (39.37”) 235 (9.25”)
NYF310 440 (17.32”) 1000 (39.37”) 235 (9.25”)
NYF400 440 (17.32”) 1000 (39.37”) 235 (9.25”)
4-18
STAR-DELTA STARTERS IN ENCLOSURE - EMPTY ENCLOSURE FOR STAR-DELTA STARTERS

M3P...70 - M3 PA70
190.9
(7.51”)
183.8
(7.24”)
280 170
(11.02”) (6.69”)
4
(8.66”)
220
(0.51”)
13
205
(8.07”)
(5.75”)
(7.28”)
146
185
244
(9.61”)
4-19
Wiring diagrams
DIRECT-ON-LINE STARTERS IN ENCLOSURE

M...P LINE M...R LINE LINE DIAGRAM 2
Connect the eventual two-wire
control (e.g. automatism) between
6 6 terminal .3 of the contactor and
terminal 96 of the thermal overload
5 5 relay.
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 IMPORTANT
A1 1 3 5 13 (53) A1 1 3 5 13 (53) 1 3 5 -- Remove jumpers 5 and 6 and
connect the auxiliary line to
I terminals A1 and .3 for a control
circuit with a voltage value
A2 2 4 6 14 (54) A2 2 4 6 14 (54) 2 4 6 different than the supply.
4 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 -- Remove jumper 5 and connect
the neutral to terminal A1 for a
1 1 control circuit between phase
4 3 and neutral.
95 97 95 97 -- SINGLE-PHASE SUPPLY
The main circuit must be
R configured according to Diagram
R
3 in the case of a single-phase
line or motor.
96 98 96 98 -- FUSES
2 A set of three fuses must be
connected upstream of the
I starter in the event no
appropriate protection is
included in the system.
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
LOAD LOAD LOAD
Diagram 1 - Incorporated button control Diagram 2 - External button control Diagram 3 - Power connection
for 1-phase motors
REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLY

BGR... BGT...
A1 A1
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
A1 1 3 5 21 A1 1 3 5 21 1 3 5 13 13 1 3 5
KM1 KM2 KM1 KM2

A2 2 4 6 22 A2 2 4 6 22 2 4 6 14 14 2 4 6
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
A2 A2
BFA...42 BGTP09...
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
A1 1 3 5 21 A1 1 3 5 21 A1 21 1 3 5 1 3 5 21 A1
KM1 KM2 KM1 KM2
A2 2 4 6 22 A2 2 4 6 22 A2 22 2 4 6 2 4 6 22 A2
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
CHANGEOVER CONTACTOR ASSEMBLY

BGC09...
L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L3 L4
A1 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 A1
KM1 KM2
A2 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 A2
T1 T2 T3 T4 T1 T2 T3 T4
4-20
Wiring diagrams
STAR-DELTA STARTERS, OPEN FRAME AND ENCLOSED

BFA009...039 - M3P009...038 70
LINE
...V - ...Hz
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
4
KM2 KM3 KM1
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5
FR1
2 4 6
U2 U1
V2 M V1
W2 3~ W1
U2 U1
V2 M V1
W2 3~ W1
BFA009 70... BFA025 70 BFA26 70 - BFA038 70

M3P009 70...M3P025 70 M3P026 70...M3P038 70
21 21
S1 S1
22 22
13 53 13 53
S2 KM2 S2 KM2
14 54 14 54
1 1
63 13 63 13
KM2 KM1 KM2 KM1
64 14 64 14
17 17 17 17
KT1 KT1
(TM ST) (TM ST)
18 28 18 28
4 6 7 4 6 7
96 22 62 96 62 62
KM3 KM1 KM3 KM1
96 21 61
96 61 61
3 5 3 5
FR1 KT1 A1 A1 A1 A1 FR1 KT1 A1 A1 A1 A1
(TM ST) KM1 KM3 KM2 (TM ST) KM1 KM3 KM2
95 A2 A2 A2 A2 95 2 A2 A2 A2 A2
2
95 95
4-21
Wiring diagrams
STAR-DELTA STARTERS, OPEN FRAME DYF50... DYF95

LINE
...V - ...Hz
L1 L2 L3
4 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
KM2 KM3 KM1

2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5
FR1
2 4 6
U2 U1
V2 M V1
W2 3~ W1
U2 U1
V2 M V1
W2 3~ W1
95
95
FR1
96
96
21
S1
22
13 53
S2 KM2
14 54
63 53
KM2 KM1
64 54
17 17
KT1
(TM ST)
18 28
62 62
KM3 KM1
61 61
KT1 A1 A1 A1 A1
(TM ST) KM1 KM3 KM2
A2 A2 A2 A2
4-22
Wiring diagrams
STAR-DELTA STARTERS, OPEN FRAME NYF...
1 3 5
KM1
2 4 6
4
1 3 5
KM3
2 4 6
1 3 5
KM2
2 4 6
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 LINE
...V - ...Hz
FR1
2 4 6
U2 U1
V2 M V1
W2 3~ W1
U2 U1
V2 M V1
W2 3~ W1
95
95
FR1
96
96
21
S1
22
13 33
S2 KM2
14 34
13 53
KM2 KM1
14 54
17 17
KT1
(TM ST)
18 28
62 62
KM3 KM1
61 61
KT1 A1 A1 A1 A1
(TM ST) KM1 KM3 KM2
A2 A2 A2 A2
4-23
ADXC ADX...BP ADX...B

• Two phase control • Three phase control • Three phase control
• IEC rated starter current Ie 12 to 45A • For standard duty, IEC starting current • For severe duty, IEC starting current 5•Ie
• IEC rated motor power 5.5-22kW at 400VAC and 3.5•Ie • IEC rated starter current Ie 17 to 245A
9-37kW at 600VAC • IEC rated starter current Ie 22 to 231A ratings
• UL/CSA ratings 3 to 25HP at 400VAC and ratings • IEC rated motor power 7.5 to 132kW at
10 to 40HP at 600VAC • IEC rated motor power 9.2 to 110kW at 380/415VAC
• Built-in bypass relay 380/415VAC • Reduced voltage soft starter with torque
• Total protection against over temperature and • Reduced voltage soft starter with torque control and built-in bypass contactor
wrong phase sequence control and built-in bypass contactor • Maximum starting current limitation
• Initial voltage, ramp up and ramp down time • Maximum starting current limitation • PC remote control supervision
adjustable on front • PC remote control supervision • Modbus-RTU and property ASCII
• LED indication for starter status • Modbus-RTU and property ASCII communication protocols
• DIN rail and mount only 45mm wide. communication protocols • LCD backlit screen.
• LCD backlit screen.
Wide input
voltage range: No jumpers or dip
208-500VAC switches
50/60Hz
Page 5-3
ADX
• Three phase control
• For severe duty, IEC starting current 5•Ie
• IEC rated starter current Ie 310A to1200A
ratings
• IEC rated motor power 160kW to 630kW at
380/415VAC
• Reduced voltage soft starter with torque
control, predisposed for external bypass
contactor
• Maximum starting current limitation Alarm and
• PC remote control supervision Torque event log
control
• Modbus-RTU and property ASCII
communication protocols
LCD screen and
• LCD backlit screen.
user-friendly
keypad for control
parameters and
programming in
Standard multilanguage
supplied RS232
and RS485
serial ports
Internal bypass Programmable

contactor up to inputs and outputs
245A rating
SOFT STARTERS 5
12A to 1200A starter ratings

Standard and severe duty types
Internal bypass contactor up to 245A
rating
Torque ramp starting
Total motor protection incorporated
Clock calendar
Digital control and adjustment
RS232 and RS485 serial ports for
remote supervision and control
Modbus®-RTU and proprietary
ASCII communication protocols.
SEC. - PAG.
Soft starters
ADXC type with integrated bypass relay ............................................................................................................................. 5 - 2
ADX...BP type for standard duty with integrated bypass contactor ...................................................................................... 5 - 3
ADX...B type for severe duty with integrated bypass contactor ............................................................................................ 5 - 3
ADX... type for severe duty predisposed for external bypass contactor ............................................................................... 5 - 3
Remote keypad and accessories ........................................................................................................................................ 5 - 4
Remote control software ................................................................................................................................................... 5 - 5
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 5 - 6
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 5 - 7
Technnical characteristics ............................................................................................... 5 - 8
P ROTECTION
CONTROL AND
M OTOR
Soft starters
Two phase control
ADXC type Order code IEC rated Rated motor Qty Wt General characteristics
starter power per ADXC… is a compact type of soft starter, 45mm wide
current 40°C pkg and easy to use, for three phase squirrel-cage induction
Ie IEC UL/CSA motors; soft starts and soft stops rated motor load
[A] [kW] [HP] n° [kg] currents up to 45A.
It is based on a current limiting starting methodology to
With built-in bypass relay. Three-phase 400VAC motor control. limit the maximum starting current. ADXC… reduces the
Auxiliary supply: starter 110…400VAC (L1-L2-L3 inputs); start mechanical load on motor shafts, gearboxes and drive
command 110-400VAC (A1-A2 terminals). belts.
ADXC 012 400 12 5.5 3 1 0.500 Ramp up, ramp down and initial voltage time settings can
ADXC 016 400 16 7.5 7.5 1 0.500 be independently adjusted by built-in potentiometers.
Main features are:
ADXC 025 400 25 11 10 1 0.500 – For three phase induction motors up to 22kW / 25HP
5 ADXC 032 400
ADXC 037 400
32
37
15
18.5 20
15 1
1
0.500
0.700
at 400VAC and 37kW / 40HP at 600VAC
– Maximum input voltage: 400VAC 50/60Hz for ADX…
400…; 600VAC 50/60Hz for ADXC…600…
ADXC 045 400 45 22 25 1 0.700 – Built-in bypass relay
With built-in bypass relay. Three-phase 400VAC motor control. – Wrong phase sequence and over temperature
ADXC 012... Auxiliary supply: starter 110…400VAC (L1-L2-L3 inputs); start protection
ADXC 032... command 24VAC/DC (A1-A2 terminals). – Alarm for wrong phase sequence; line voltage and/or
ADXC 012 400 24 12 5.5 3 1 0.500 frequency out of limits (over and undervoltage);
overcurrent, over temperature, irregular ramp up and
ADXC 016 400 24 16 7.5 7.5 1 0.500 current flow during bypass; motor voltage unbalance
ADXC 025 400 24 25 11 10 1 0.500 – Simple setting and installation
ADXC 032 400 24 32 15 15 1 0.500 – 2 relay outputs for alarms (NC) and bypass closing
(NO) for ADXC…600 R2
ADXC 037 400 24 37 18.5 20 1 0.700 – 35mm DIN rail mounting (IEC/EN 60715)
ADXC 045 400 24 45 22 25 1 0.700 – Ideal for hydraulic lifts, conveyor belts, compressors,
With built-in bypass relay. Three-phase 600VAC motor control. pumps, hoisting devices, blowers, fans, mixers.
Auxiliary supply: starter 100…240VAC (A1-A2 separate
1-phase); start command 100-240VAC (ST terminals). Operational characteristics
With 2 relay outputs. – Number of controlled phases: 2
– Input voltage L1-L2-L3:
ADXC 012 600 R2 12 9 10 1 0.500 • 220-400VAC -15%...+10% for ADXC…400 and
ADXC 016 600 R2 16 11 15 1 0.500 ADXC…400 24
ADXC 025 600 R2 25 20 20 1 0.500 • 220-600VAC -15%…+10% for ADXC…600 R2
– Frequency range: 50/60Hz ±10% self-configurable
ADXC 037... ADXC 032 600 R2 32 22 30 1 0.500 – Self powered for ADXC…400… types
ADXC 045... ADXC 037 600 R2 37 30 30 1 0.700 – Separate single phase auxiliary power supply A1-A2:
ADXC 045 600 R2 45 37 40 1 0.700 100-240VAC -15%...+10% for ADXC…600 R2
– Start command:
For operating temperature higher than 40°C, derate starter power; see • A1-A2 24VAC/DC ±10% (ADXC…400 24)
values given in the technical characteristics on page 5-8, in Rated current
In per IEC/FLA current per UL. • A1-A2 110…400VAC -15%...+10% (ADXC…400)
• ST 100…240VAC -15%...+10% (ADXC…600 R2)
Current control – Ramp up time: 1-20 seconds
ADXC… gradually increases the current – Ramp down time: 0-20 seconds
Starting
current
limit at 75% ramp-up time if the motor – Initial voltage: 0-85%

speed has yet to reach rated value, to – 3 indication LEDs “alarm” (red – alarm conditions with
avoid locked rotor state before time diverse number of flashes), “ramp/bypass” (yellow –
elapsing. flashing in ramp phase / constantly on with bypass relay
connected) and “supply” (green – constantly on with
power supply flow)
Time [s]
– Degree of protection: IEC IP20.
ts
At 75% ramp-up time setting Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada
(cULus – File E223223) under Solid State Motor
Typical settings
The following settings are standard ones for the
Type of Initial Time setting Controllers as reduced voltage starters; EAC and CCC
different applications; they are for indication and application voltage Ramp up Ramp down pending completion at time of catalogue printing.
reference purposes only. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
After the installation, it is recommended to always [%] [s] [s] IEC/EN 60947-4-2, UL 508, CSA C22.2 n°14.
parameterise the soft starter with the motor Hydraulic lift 40 2 0
connected to find the best settings and then test it.
Initial voltage adjustment is the first operation Piston compressor 40 3 0
followed by the ramp-up time setting and the ramp-
down time is last, if any is required.
Screw compressor 50 10 0
Scroll compressor 40 1 0
Low inertia fan 40 10 0
High inertia fan 40 15-20 0
Pump 40 10 10
ADXC adjustments Centrifugal blower 40 5 0
Conveyor 50 1 5
A
A Initial voltage: 0-85% of the motor control power.
B B Ramp up time: 1-20 seconds. Initial to maximum load voltage time.
C C Ramp down time: 0-20 seconds. Maximum to no load voltage time.

5-2 page 5-6 page 5-7 page 5-8
Soft starters
Three phase control
ADX type Order code IEC rated IEC rated Qty Wt General characteristics
starter motor power per ADX is a reduced voltage soft starter with torque control
current Ie (380/415V) pkg and maximum starting current limit. It is used for the
[A] [kW] n° [kg] progressive starting and stopping of asynchronous three-
phase squirrel-cage motors.
For standard duty (starting current 3.5•Ie). The integrated bypass contactor ADX...BP or ADX...B
With integrated bypass contactor. types, drastically limits dissipation, as a result,
Auxiliary supply: starter Us 208-240VAC; equipment for electric panel cooling ventilation can be
start command 24VDC. eliminated and the enclosure size can be reduced as well.
51 ADX 0022BP 22 9.2 1 7.900 CONTROL
51 ADX 0034BP 34 15 1 8.000 During starting: Torque control acceleration, current limit
51 ADX 0048BP 48 22 1 8.300 control and booster.
During stopping: Torque control deceleration, dynamic
51 ADX 0058BP 58
51 ADX 0068BP 68
26
30
1
1
14.900
14.900
braking and free-wheel.
In emergency conditions: Starting without protection
5
51 ADX 0082BP 82 37 1 14.900 direct-on-line starting using integrated bypass contactor.
Remote control: PC supervision by connection with
51 ADX 0092BP 92 45 1 15.700 RS232/RS485 converter, modem or GSM modem.
51 ADX 0022BP - 51 ADX 0048BP 51 ADX 0114BP 114 55 1 15.700 Automatic call function (Autocall) in case of alarm
51 ADX 0017B - 51 ADX 0045B 51 ADX 0126BP 126 63 1 28.000 conditions by sending a message to a cellular phone
(SMS-Short Message Service) and/or to a mailbox.
51 ADX 0150BP 150 75 1 36.000 Property ASCII and Modbus®-RTU communication
51 ADX 0196BP 196 92 1 36.000 protocols.
51 ADX 0231BP 231 110 1 36.000 KEYPAD OPERATIONS
For severe duty (starting current 5•Ie). – Liquid-crystal backlit 2-line 16-character display
With integrated bypass contactor. – Multilanguage capability (Italian, English, French,
Auxiliary supply: starter Us 208-240VAC; Spanish)
start command 24VDC. – Basic, advanced and function programming menus
– Keypad stop and start
51 ADX 0017B 17 7.5 1 7.900 – Motor and mains parameter readings:
51 ADX 0030B 30 15 1 8.000 • line voltage values (L-L)
51 ADX 0045B 45 22 1 8.300 • phase current
• active and apparent power values per phase
51 ADX 0060B 60 30 1 14.900 • power factor per phase
51 ADX 0075B 75 37 1 14.900 • kWh
51 ADX 0085B 85 45 1 14.900 – Time sequential events log
– Clock calendar with backup battery.
51 ADX 0110B 110 55 1 15.700
PARTICULAR FUNCTIONS
51 ADX 0125B 125 59 1 15.700 Digital inputs and programmable relay outputs. Analog
51 ADX 0142B 142 75 1 34.000 input (0...10V, 0...20mA or 4...20mA) for ramp
acceleration and/or deceleration, motor start and stop
51 ADX 0190B 190 90 1 37.000
control thresholds, programmable relay enable and
51 ADX 0245B 245 132 1 37.000 disable control thresholds. Analog output
51 ADX 0058BP - 51 ADX 0092BP For severe duty (starting current 5•Ie). (0...10V, 0...20mA or 4...20mA) for current, torque,
51 ADX 0060B - 51 ADX 0085B Predisposed for external bypass contactor. motor thermal status and power factor readings.
Auxiliary supply: starter Us 208-240VAC; Input programming for second motor.
start command 24VDC. PROTECTION
51 ADX 0310 310 160 1 50.000 – Motor: Dual thermal protection class (one during
starting phase and the other during running) or by
51 ADX 0365 365 200 1 50.000 PTC sensor, locked rotor, current asymmetry,
51 ADX 0470 470 250 1 90.000 minimum torque and starting time too long
51 ADX 0568 568 315 1 90.000 – Auxiliary voltage: Voltage value too low
– Power voltage: Phase failure, phase sequence and
51 ADX 0640 640 355 1 110.000 frequency out of limits
51 ADX 0820 820 440 1 170.000 – Control inputs and analog output: Static 24VDC
51 ADX 1200 1200 630 1 185.000 short-circuit protection with automatic resetting.
– Starter: Overcurrent, high temperature, SCR and
by-pass contactor malfunction.
– Number of phases controlled: 3
– Input voltage:
• 208-500VAC ±10% for ADX...BP and ADX...B
• 208-415VAC ±10% for ADX...
– Mains frequency: 50-60Hz ±5%
– Auxiliary supply voltage: 208-240VAC ±10%
– Auxiliary consumption: 20VA
– Rated starter current Ie:
• 22-231A for ADX...BP
• 17-245A for ADX...B
• 310-1200A for ADX...
– Motor current: 0.5-1 Ie
– Overload current:
51 ADX 0114BP - 51 ADX 0126BP • 105% Ie continuous for ADX...BP and ADX...B
51 ADX 0110B - 51 ADX 0125B • 115% Ie continuous for ADX...
Certifications obtained: EAC for all; CCC for ADX 0110B
and ADX 0125B types only.
Compliant with standard: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-4-2.
208-600VAC ±10% on request.

Voltages on request: higher than 415V to 690V maximum.
Accessories Dimensions Technical characteristics

pages 5-4 and 5 pages 5-6 and 7 page 5-9 5-3
Soft starters
Remote keypad and accessories for ADX... types
Remote keypad Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

for ADX... types per The flush-mount ADX TAST remote keypad is identical to
pkg the one on board the soft starter except for the start and
stop controls of the motor, which are permanently
n° [kg] disabled. With this keypad, starter setup can be
conducted, motor readings and operating data displayed
51 ADX TAST Remote keypad 1 0.350 and data and parameter transfer (ADX remote keypad)
96x96mm, 2x16 backlit made as well.
LCD, 208-240VAC supply A backup copy of the starter data and parameter setup is
c/w 3m/10ft long obtainable with the transfer functions. As a result quick
connecting cable and easy setup operations can be done especially with
51 C2 PC ADX connecting 1 0.090 machines assembled in series.
cable, 1.8m/6ft long The baud transmission rate, the contrast and backlight
5 51 ADX TAST
51 C3 PC GSM modem
connecting cable,
1 0.210 can also be adjusted by this keypad.
It is supplied standard with a 3m long cable and suitable
1.8m/6ft long connectors to complete the link to the ADX
RS485 port. The three terminals of the keypad supply are
51 C4 PC 4 PX1 1 0.147 removable.
converter drive
Accessories connecting cable,
For longer distances, this keypad can be connected to the
ADX RS232 port via RS232/RS485 converter.
for ADX... types 1.8m/6ft long
51 C5 ADX Analog modem 1 0.111 Advantages
connecting cable, – Flush mount
1.8m/6ft long – Messages in selectable language
51 C6 ADX 4 PX1 1 0.102 – Readings display
converter drive – Parameter setup
connecting cable, – Two-way data and parameter transfer.
1.8m/6ft long
51 C7 ADX GSM modem 1 0.101 – Auxiliary supply voltage: 208-240VAC ±10%
51C4 “FUNK-ANLAGEN” – Power consumption: 6.9VA
connecting cable, – Dissipation: 3.2W
1.8m/6ft long – Mains frequency: 50/60Hz
51 C8 ADX remote keypad 1 0.081 – RS485 port: RJ44 connector
connecting cable, – Supply: Removable 3-pole 2.5 mm2 terminal block.
3m/10ft long – Display: 2 line, 16 character backlit LCD
4 PX1 RS232/RS485 converter 1 0.600 – LED indication (3): POWER, RUN and FAULT
drive, opto-isolated, – Keys (6) ENTER/START, RESET/STOP,
220-240VAC PREVIOUS, NEXT, and
31 PA 96X96 Protective cover (IP54) 1 0.077 • Operating temperature: -10...+60°C
Consult Customer Service for modem details; see contact details on • Storage temperature: -20...+70°C
4PX1 inside front cover. – Flush mount enclosure
RS232/RS485 opto-isolated converter drive, 38,400 Baud-rate maximum, – Degree of protection on front: IP41; IP54 with
automatic or manual TRANSMIT line supervision, 220-240VAC ±10%
supply (110-120VAC available on request). protective cover.

Compliant to standards: IEC/EN 61000-6-1 and
IEC/EN 61000-6-3 for 4 PX1 types.
Dimensions
5-4 page 5-7
Soft starters
Remote control software
Remote control software Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

for ADX... types per – Display of all the monitored data by the ADX starter
pkg – Virtual ADX keypad with access to all functions
– Parameter adjustment, only accessible with password,
n° [kg] saving on disc and subsequent reloading on ADX
starter
51 ADX SW PC-ADX remote control 1 0.550 – Display of starter events log showing time and date
software with proprietary entry
ASCII and Modbus® RTU – Graphic display of monitored data during operation
protocols and a set of – Connection through RS232/RS485 converter or
connecting cables 51 C2, modem
51 C3, 51 C5, 51 C7 for – GSM-modem management with SMS or e-mail
communications via transmission
RS232 port, analog
or GSM modem
– AUTOCALL function for automatic PC call
– Program configuration in 4 languages (Italian, English,
5
Spanish and French)
The remote control software consents to the PC supervision – Easy installation and setup.
of all ADX soft starter functions, including: parameter setup,
51 ADX SW real-time readout display, graphics of monitored parameter Advantages
data during operation and starter events log display, each – GSM network management for inaccessible
with time and date entry. applications where there are no telephone lines
The PC-ADX connection is made by cable via the RS232 port, – Call management during alarm conditions for SMS or
RS232/RS485 converter, analog or GSM modem. email transmission
The RS232 port is not suitable for permanent connections. – No limit for remote control distance
The connection via modem permits the ADX starter to advise – Possibility of remote motor starting
alarm conditions, that is an automatic link to the remote PC. – Reduction of service time
GSM modem represents the ultimate solution for unmanned – Reduction of maintenance and downtime.
applications or where there are no telephone lines.
Interesting communication features are available with this Operational characteristics
type of modem, such as: Minimum hardware requirements of the personal
– SMS (Short Message Service): At alarm conditions, the computer:
ADX can send its ID and alarm code, with time and date – Windows 95/98 operating system
entry. The advantage is the possibility of reaching service – Minimum Pentium 100MHz or processor
people, without delay, wherever they are located. – Minimum 16MB of free RAM
– Email (via Internet): a message with the same structure as – About 4MB of free hard disk memory
mentioned above can be transmitted to a specified – Graphic card having at least 800x600 resolution
mailbox. The advantages of this type of message with – One free serial interface port
respect to the SMS are that any communication, received – CD-ROM drive.
through Internet mail server, is permanent and a vast
number of these can be received and reviewed at any
time.
Example of main window frame using 51 ADX SW remote control software
5-5
Soft starters
Soft Starters
ADXC012...ADXC032... ADXC037...ADXC045...
153.8 (6.05”) 36
109.8 (4.32”) Ø5.2 (0.20”) 45 (1.77”) (1.42”)
45 (1.77”)
❶
❶
5.2 (0.20”)
4.8 (0.19”)
® ®
ADXC ADXC
121 (4.76”)
30 60 30 60
35mm
125 (4.92”)
35mm
U U
132 (5.20”)
125 (4.92”)
105 (4.13”)
115 (4.53”)
105 (4.13”)
123 (4.84”)
DIN rail
0 85% 0 85%
5 10
t
5 10
t DIN rail
1 20s IEC/EN 1 20s
IEC/EN
60715
5 10 5 10
ALARM
0 20s
t ALARM
0 20s
t
60715
RAMP / BYPASS RAMP / BYPASS
SUPPLY SUPPLY
6.46 (0.25”)
F1 F2 12 11/21 24 F1 F2 ST
5 ❶
❶
106 (4.17”) ❶ 2 x M5 150 (5.90”) ❶ 2 x M5
ADX 0022BP - ADX 0126BP

ADX 0017B - ADX 0125B
A C
TYPE A B C D E
ADX 0022BP 157 (6.18”) 372 (14.64”) 223 (8.78”) 131 (5.16”) 357 (14.05”)
ADX 0034BP 157 (6.18”) 372 (14.64”) 223 (8.78”) 131 (5.16”) 357 (14.05”)
ADX 0048BP 157 (6.18”) 372 (14.64”) 223 (8.78”) 131 (5.16”) 357 (14.05”)
ADX 0058BP 157 (6.18”) 534 (21.02”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 517 (20.35”)
ADX 0068BP 157 (6.18”) 534 (21.02”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 517 (20.35”)
ADX 0082BP 157 (6.18”) 534 (21.02”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 517 (20.35”)
ADX 0092BP 157 (6.18”) 534 (21.02”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 517 (20.35”)
B
E
ADX 0114BP 157 (6.18”) 584 (22.99”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 567 (22.32”)
ADX 0126BP 157 (6.18”) 584 (22.99”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 567 (22.32”)
ADX 0017B 157 (6.18”) 372 (14.64”) 223 (8.78”) 131 (5.16”) 357 (14.05”)
ADX 0030B 157 (6.18”) 372 (14.64”) 223 (8.78”) 131 (5.16”) 357 (14.05”)
ADX 0045B 157 (6.18”) 372 (14.64”) 223 (8.78”) 131 (5.16”) 357 (14.05”)
ADX 0060B 157 (6.18”) 534 (21.02”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 517 (20.35”)
ADX 0075B 157 (6.18”) 534 (21.02”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 517 (20.35”)
ADX 0085B 157 (6.18”) 534 (21.02”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 517 (20.35”)
D
ADX 0110B 157 (6.18”) 584 (22.99”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 567 (22.32”)
ADX 0125B 157 (6.18”) 584 (22.99”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 567 (22.32”)
ADX 0150BP - ADX 0231BP

ADX 0142B - ADX 0245B
A C
TYPE A B C D E
ADX 0150BP 273 (10.75”) 600 (23.62”) 285 (11.22”) 230 (9.05”) 640 (25.20”)
ADX 0196BP 273 (10.75”) 680 (26.77”) 310 (12.20”) 230 (9.05”) 640 (25.20”)
ADX 0231BP 273 (10.75”) 680 (26.77”) 310 (12.20”) 230 (9.05”) 640 (25.20”)
ADX 0142B 273 (10.75”) 600 (23.62”) 285 (11.22”) 230 (9.05”) 560 (25.20”)
ADX 0190B 273 (10.75”) 680 (26.77”) 310 (12.20”) 230 (9.05”) 640 (25.20”)
ADX 0245B 273 (10.75”) 680 (26.77”) 310 (12.20”) 230 (9.05”) 640 (25.20”)
B
E
5-6
Soft starters
Soft Starters
ADX 0310 - ADX 1200
A C
B
E
F
TYPE A B C D E F
ADX 0310 640 (25.20”) 600 (23.62”) 380 (14.96”) 620 (24.41”) 400 (15.75”) 100 (3.94”)
ADX 0365 640 (25.20”) 600 (23.62”) 380 (14.96”) 620 (24.41”) 400 (15.75”) 100 (3.94”)
ADX 0470 790 (31.10”) 650 (25.59”) 430 (16.93”) 770 (30.31”) 450 (17.72”) 100 (3.94”)
ADX 0568 790 (31.10”) 650 (25.59”) 430 (16.93”) 770 (30.31”) 450 (17.72”) 100 (3.94”)
ADX 0640 790 (31.10”) 650 (25.59”) 430 (16.93”) 770 (30.31”) 450 (17.72”) 100 (3.94”)
ADX 0820 910 (35.83”) 950 (37.40”) 442 (17.40”) 830 (32.68”) 920 (36.22”)
ADX 1200 910 (35.83”) 950 (37.40”) 442 (17.40”) 830 (32.68”) 920 (36.22”)
❶ Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
Remote keypad
ADX TAST Cutout
31
(1.22”)
92
9 (3.62”)
96 10 (0.35”)
(0.39”) 63
(3.78”) (2.48”)
PA96X96
(3.54”)
(3.62”)
(3.78”)
90
92
96
Wiring diagrams
ADXC...400 ADXC...400 24 ADXC...600 R2
5-7
Soft starters
TYPE ADXC012 ADXC016 ADXC025 ADXC032 ADXC037 ADXC045

With built-in bypass relay With built-in bypass relay
Motor Type Asynchronous three phase Asynchronous three phase
Power (40°C) at 220…240VAC 3kW / 3HP 4kW / 5HP 5.5kW / 7.5HP 9kW / 10HP 9kW /10HP 11kW / 15HP
at 380…415VAC 5.5kW / 5HP 7.5kW / 7.5HP 11kW / 10HP 15kW / 15HP 18.5kW /20HP 22kW / 25HP
at 440…480VAC 5.5kW 7.5HP 9kW / 10HP 11kW / 15HP 18.5kW / 20HP 22kW / 25HP 22kW / 30HP
at 550…600VAC 9kW / 10HP 11kW /15HP 20kW / 20HP 22kW / 30HP 30kW / 30HP 37kW / 40HP
Supply voltage Input voltage Ue (L1-L2-L3) 220…400VAC -15…+10% (ADXC…400…); 220…600VAC -15…+10% (ADXC…600R2)
Start command Uc A1-A2: 24VAC/DC ±10% (ADXC…40024);
A1-A2: 110…400VAC -15…+10% (ADXC…400);
ST: 100…240VAC -15…+10% (ADXC…600R2)
5 Auxiliary power Us Self powered for ADXC…400…; A1-A2: 100…240VAC -15%...+10% separate single phase for ADXC…600R2
Frequency 50/60Hz ±10% self-configurable
Undervoltage recovery 174VAC (for all)
Overvoltage recovery 466VAC (ADXC…400…); 700VAC (ADXC…600R2)
Control input current 0.4…1mA (ADXC…40024); 0.5…5mA (ADXC…400); 0,4…3mA (ADXC…600R2)
Starting / stopping method Voltage control
Number of controlled phases 2
Number of starts/hour at 40°C 20 10 10
(Overload cycle: AC53B: 3-5:175) (Overload cycle: AC53B: 4-6: 354) (Overload cycle:
AC53B: 3.5-5: 335)
Minimum load current 1A 1A 5A 5A 5A 5A
Rated current In at 40°C IEC 12A 16A 25A 32A 37A 45A
according to IEC test results) at 50°C IEC 11A 15A 23A 28A 34A 40A
at 60°C IEC 10A 13,5A 21A 24A 31A 34A
FLA current at 40°C UL 12A 17A 25A 32A 32A 41A
(based on UL test results) at 50°C UL 11A 15A 23A 28A –– ––
at 60°C UL 10A 14A 21A 24,3A –– ––
Class RK5 fuse at 400V/600VAC Max size 20A 20A 25A 35A 50A 50A
UL/CSA short circuit symmetrical Suitable for use on circuit delivering no more than 5000A rms when protected by RK5 class fuse
Motor protection Wrong phase sequence
Cooling system Natural
Status indication LEDs 1 red ALARM; 1 yellow RAMP/BYPASS; 1 green SUPPLY
RELAY OUTPUTS (ADXC…600R2 only)
NC alarm contact (11, 12) 3A 250VAC / 3A 30VDC
NO bypass contact (21, 24) 3A 250VAC / 3A 30VDC
INPUT POWER CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS (L1, L2, L3, T1, T2, T3)
Number and type of terminals 6 fixed M4 screw
Conductor cross section (min…max) 2.5…10mm² (AWG 2x10…2x14)
Tightening torque /Tool 2.5Nm (22lbin) / Pozidriv bit 2
Cable stripping length 8mm / 0.31”
AUXILIARY SUPPLY CONNECTIONS (A1, A2)
Number and type of terminals 9 fixed M3 screw
Conductor cross section (min…max) 0.5…1.5mm² (AWG 10…18)
Tightening torque / Tool 0.65Nm (5.3lbin) / Pozidriv bit 0
AUXILIARY CONNNECTIONS (11, 12, 21, 24, ST, F1, F2)
Type of terminals M3 screw
Conductor cross section (min…max) 0.05…1.5mm² (with cable terminal) (AWG 14…12)
Tightening torque / Tool 0.45Nm (4lbin) / Pozidriv bit 0
INSULATION
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui 630VAC (ADX…400…); 690VAC (ADXC…600R2)
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 2.5kV
IEC Power frequency withstand voltage 2kV
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -20°C…+40°C with no derating; >40°C…+60°C with derating (see IEC/UL rated current values given above)
Storage temperature -40°C…+80°C
Relative humidity <95% non condensing at 40°C
Maximum pollution degree 2
Installation category III
Maximum altitude 1000m
HOUSING
Mounting Screw fixing on mounting plate or on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
IEC degree of protection IP20
Valid for ADXC...600R2 types.
5-8
Soft starters
TYPE ADX...BP - ADX...B ADX...

(with integrated by-pass (prearranged for external
contactor) by-pass contactor)
Motor Type Asynchronous three phase
Power 9.2-110kW (ADX...BP) 160-630kW
7.5-132kW (ADX...B)
Rated current 22-231 (ADX...BP) 310-1200A
17-245A (ADX...B)
Supply voltage Power circuit 208 - 500VAC ±10% standard 208 - 415VAC ±10% standard
(208-600VAC ±10% on request) Other voltages up to 690VAC
maximum on request)
Rated supply voltage 208 - 240VAC ±10% 208 - 240VAC ±10%
Frequency 50 or 60Hz ±5% self-configurable
5
Starting Torque ramp with maximum current control
Stopping Free wheel or torque ramp deceleration
Braking DC dynamic by external contactor
Protection Auxiliary supply Voltage too low
Power supply Phase failure, frequency out of limits, minimum and maximum
voltage and phase sequence, 24VDC static short circuit
Motor Overload at starting (trip class 2, 10A, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35
and 40), overload during running (trip class 2, 10A, 10, 15, 20
25 and 30), locked rotor, current asymmetry, minimum torque
and maximum starting time
Starter Overcurrent and high temperature
Analog inputs and outputs 24VDC static short circuit
Functions Clock calendar (RTC) With back-up battery
Event log 20 event registrations in date and time sequential order
Operating data mermory Hour counter, one each for energy usage, number of
startings, motor running and maintenance expiry
Multilanguage capability Italian / English / Spanish / French
Setup configuration By incorporated or remote keypad or PC
Keyboard Display and LED indicators LCD, 2 line x 16 character, backlight, POWER, RUN, FAULT
Membrane keys ENTER/START, RESET/STOP, PREVIOUS, NEXT, and
Setup parameters Adjustment menus: basic, advanced, functions, clock and controls
Readings display Voltage, current, power factor (cos), torque,
power (kVA, kW, kvar) and energy usage
Graphic display Current and torque
Display Operating status, events, alarms, event log, data
Control inputs Voltage 24VDC (no need for external feeder)
Fixed functions 2 for starting and stopping/reset
Multifunction input Free-wheel stopping, external alarm, motor preheat,
(digital functions) on board control, alarm inhibition, thermal protection
manual reset, cascade starting and keypad lock
Multifunction input Motor protection via PTC probes, acceleration and/or
(analog functions) deceleration ramp via analog input, analog input thresholds for
motor starting and stopping, analog input thresholds for
programmable relay enable and disable, PT100 input thresholds
for motor starting and stopping and PT100 input thresholds for
programmable relay enable and disable
Relay outputs Voltage and capacity 250VAC 5A (AC1)
Fixed functions 1 with 1 NO + 1NC (2 SPST) contacts for overall alarm
Programmable functions 3 each with 1 NO (SPST) contact for running motor, motor starting,
braking, current tripping threshold, maintenance expiry, etc.
Analog output Format configuration 0-20mA, 4-20mA or 0-10V
Associated source Current, torque, motor thermal status and power factor
Communications interface RS232 port Setup and remote control
RS485 port Used for remote keypad only
Cooling system Natural Types ADX0022BP-48BP and ADX0017B-45B ––
Forced Types ADX0058BP-231BP and ADX0060B-245B All types
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -10...+45°C (higher up to maximum 55°C with derating)
Storage temperature -30°...+70°C
Maximum altitude 1000m (higher up with derating)
Operating position Vertical ±15°
IEC IP20 for ADX0022BP to ADX0126BP and ADX0017B to ADX0125B only.
5-9
VE1 AND VFNC3 TYPES VFS15 TYPE VFPS1 TYPE

• Single-phase 200-240VAC supply • Three-phase 380-500VAC supply • Three-phase 380-480VAC supply
• Three-phase motor power, 0.2 to 2.2kW / • Three-phase motor power, 0.4 to 15kW / • Three-phase motor power 18.5 to 630kW /
0.25 to 3HP ratings at 230VAC 0.5 to 20HP ratings at 400VAC 25 to 1000HP ratings at 400VAC
• Compliant with IEC/EN 61800-3 standards, • Compliant with standards IEC/EN 61800-3, • Compliant with standards IEC/EN 61800-3,
first environment, without external suppressors first environment cat C2 or second first environment cat. C2 or second
• Optional three-phase motor inductances for VFN3. environment cat. C3, without external environment cat. C3, without external
suppressors suppressors
• Integrated dynamic braking circuit • Integrated dynamic braking circuit up to
• Optional three-phase motor inductances 220kW
• Optional braking resistors. • Optional three-phase motor inductances
• Optional braking resistors.
Description VE1 VFNC3 VFS15 VFPS1

1-phase 1-phase 3-phase 3-phase
Method of control
Constant torque V/f
Sensorless vector ––
Automatic torque boost
Variable torque (for pump and fan)
Energy saving
Vector with encoder feedback –– –– ––
Maximum output frequency 650Hz 400Hz 500Hz 500Hz
Overload 150% for 60s 150% for 60s 150% for 60s 120% for 60s
Serial communications RS485 n° 1 n° 1 n° 1 n° 2
Protocols Modbus-RTU, Modbus-RTU, Modbus-RTU, Modbus-RTU,
Modbus-ASCII Toshiba PROFIBUS, Toshiba PROFIBUS, Toshiba
Digital inputs (inputs marked with can be configured as analog or digital) 5 4+1 6+2 6+1
Digital outputs 1 1 2 3
Analog inputs (inputs marked with can be configured as analog or digital) 1 1 2+1 2+1
Analog outputs 1 1 1 2
Sequencer (frequency/time cycles) –– –– ––
Onboard potentiometer ––
Auto-tuning ––
PID adjustment
SLEEP function
WAKE-UP function –– –– ––
FIRE function –– –– ––
Frequency potentiometer ––
3-wire motor running
DC braking ––
Built-in braking circuit –– ––
Preset speed frequency 8 15 15 15
Pump and fan functions
Auto-speed adjustment ––
Motor PTC thermistor input –– ––
Safety stop per EN ISO 13849-1 cat. 3 –– –– ––
AC MOTOR DRIVES 6
Versions for single-phase up to

2.2kW / 3HP and three-phase up to
630kW / 1000HP
Special function for pump and fan
control using PID algorithm
Active earth leakage protection
EMC suppressor built-in all
versions
Selectable motor control mode:
V/f, vector, energy saving
Selectable digital and analog input
and output functions
IEC IP55 version available on
request
HVAC version, compliant with
IEC/EN 61000-3-12 standards,
available on request.
SEC. - PAGE
Motor drives
VE1 single-phase type ....................................................................................................................................................... 6 - 2
VFNC3 single-phase type ................................................................................................................................................... 6 - 3
VFS15 three-phase type ..................................................................................................................................................... 6 - 4
VFPS1 three-phase type .................................................................................................................................................... 6 - 5
Accessories
Three-phase inductances ................................................................................................................................................... 6 - 6
Braking resistors ............................................................................................................................................................... 6 - 6
Other accessories .............................................................................................................................................................. 6 - 7
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 6 - 8
P ROTECTION
AND
M OTOR C ONTROL
AC motor drives
Single phase
VE1 type Order code Output 3-phase Qty Weight General characteristics
current motor power per VE1 is a very compact motor drive with high
at 230V pkg performance, V/f and boost torque control along with
[A] [kW] [HP] n° [kg] advanced features such as PID and sequential control. It
is versatile, easy to install and program and can be used
Single-phase supply 200-240VAC 50/60Hz. in numerous applications. It has a digital display to
Three-phase motor output 240VAC max. simplify parameterising which can also be done remotely
Built-in EMC suppressor (for 1° environment cat. C2). using the RS485 port. Motor speed can be adjusted with
VE1 02 A240 1.8 0.2 0.25 1 1.200 the front potentiometer or by using one of the preset V/f
VE1 04 A240 2.6 0.4 0.5 1 1.200 curves, each provided with dedicated acceleration and
deceleration ramps.
VE1 07 A240 4.3 0.75 1 1 1.200 It can be used in general applications such as automatic
VE1 15 A240 7.5 1.5 2 1 1.800 door controls, on conveyor belts, assembly, packaging
VE1 22 A240 10.5 2.2 3 1 1.800 and packing machinery, or for pump and fan control.
SPEED REFERENCE SIGNALS

Reference signals for speed adjustment are obtained by:
6 M – Front potentiometer
VE1... – Voltage signals: 0-10V
VE1... – Current signals: 4-20mA
– 8 preset speeds
– RS485 serial signals.
V/f CURVE PROGRAMMING SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
VE1 can handle 3 V/f preset curves and one PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS
programmed by the user. Sequencer – 5 digital multifunction inputs
The user can program frequency-time cycles made up – PNP 12VDC connection; 24VDC on request.
3 V/f preset curves of a maximum of 8 steps, each characterised by motor
I – General use speed, rotation direction and step duration. PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS
The sequence cycle can be carried out in diverse – 1 programmable relay
(V)%
modes: – 1 analog 0-10V.
100
− One single cycle with final motor stopping
B=10%, C=8% − One single cycle with final motor running at last PROTECTION
speed set – Overload
Conveyor belts and − Repeat cycles with no pause. – Overvoltage
B assembly machinery – Minimum voltage
C The sequence cycle can be stopped at any moment.
– Output short circuit
1 2.5 50 650 Hz Hz – Earth/ground leakage dispersion
(3.0) (60) F3
– Over-temperature
F2 – Restart after momentary power loss, with
II – High initial torque programmable number of attempts.
F1
(V)%
100 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
B=15%, C=10.5% t1 t2 t3 t4 t – PID adjustment with sleep and wake-up functions
– Sequencer (work cycles)
-F4
B Hoisting/lifting, grinders/ – Motor control: V/f constant torque, variable
C mills and agitators PID control torque, programmable motor start and stop curves
In some applications, such as pumps or fans, the (1 programmable by user)
1 2.5 50 650 Hz output frequency of the drive is defined by the target to – Hour counter: Motor running hours and power supply
(3.0) (60)
keep pressure or flow constant. Typically, by using the on hours.
III – Variable curve analog input, feedback is monitored and, with the PID
offset control, the motor drive sets motor speed to Operational characteristics
(V)% obtain the target set-point. – Input voltage: 200-240VAC single phase
100 VE1 PID control also includes the following functions: – Output voltage: 0-240VAC three phase
B=25%, C=7.7%
− Sleep: When the PID output frequency is lower than – Rated operational current: 1.8-10.5A
a programmed limit, that is the motor speed is close – Mains frequency: 50/60Hz
Pumps and fans
B to the allowable minimum when propulsion is not – Output frequency: 0-650Hz
needed, the motor drive completely stops the motor – Current voltage: 150% for 60s
C
for energy saving. – IEC degree of protection: IP20
1 2.5 50 650 Hz − Wake-up: During sleep phase, when the PID output – Ambient conditions
(3.0) (60)
frequency is higher than the programmed limit, the • Operating temperature: -10…+40°C (up to 50°C
BOOST motor drive picks up motor control again at a with forced ventilation or 20% output current
Torque boost can be applied on all preset curves with suitable speed to reach the target set-point without derating)
up to 10% a manual starting. • Maximum altitude: 1000m
Voltage to overcome very high inertia load conditions. • Relative humidity: 95%.
PID calculated frequency
(V)%
Generated frequency Certifications and compliance
100 Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada
01-10
Each function also has a programmable delay time to (cULus – File E360929) as Power Conversion Equipment.
B
avoid inopportune and repetitive start-stop motor Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61800-5-1,
cycles. IEC/EN 61800-3 – first environment cat. C2,
C Hz IEC/EN 60721-3-3, UL 508 C, CSA C22.2 n°14.
1 2.5 50 Hz
(3.0) (60)
1 Programmable V/f curve Wake up

delay
The user can customise a curve by defining 4 voltage /
delay
frequency points.
(V)% Sleep
V4 (Vmax)
V3 (Vmid2)
V2 (Vmid1)
t
V1 (Vmin)
Hz
F1 F2 F3 F4 650.00
Accessories Dimensions
6-2 page 6-6 and 7 page 6-8
AC motor drives
Single phase
VFNC3 type Order code Output 3-phase Qty Weight General characteristics
current motor power per VFNC3 is an ultra-compact motor drive with high
at 230V pkg performance and extremely reliable (printed circuit
[A] [kW] [HP] n° [kg] surface protection per IEC/EN 60721-3-3).
Easily installed, VFNC3 is equipped with a front display
Single-phase supply 200-240VAC 50/60Hz. and innovative jog dial control, which simplifies the
Three-phase motor output 240VAC max. programming and control pocesses of the drive and
Built-in EMC suppressor (for 1° environment cat. C1). motor. The on-board RS485 interface permits an overall
VFNC3S 2002 PLW 1.4 0.2 0.25 1 0.900 remote control (supervision and communication
VFNC3S 2004 PLW 2.4 0.4 0.54 1 1.000 protocols). VFNC3 can be used in simple applications
such as extractor fans, ventilators, conveyor belts,
VFNC3S 2007 PLW 4.2 0.75 1 1 1.300 machine tools, car washes, fitness equipment, but also in
VFNC3S 2015 PLW 7.5 1.5 2 1 2.000 applications of intermediate complexity, such as pumps,
VFNC3S 2022 PLW 10 2.2 3 1 2.000 waterworks.
The vector control and the possibility to enable the motor
Operation up to 50°C without derating. auto-tuning warrants efficiency and high torques even
with very low operating frequencies.
6
M SPEED REFERENCE SIGNALS
VFNC3... VFNC3... Reference signals for speed adjustment are obtained by:
– Front jog dial control (potentiometer)
– External potentiometer: 1-10kΩ
– Voltage signal: 0-10V
– Current signal: 4-20mA
– Remote keypad option
– 15 preset speeds via digital inputs
– RS485 serial signals.
PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS
– Selectable PNP or NPN I/O logic
– 4 digital multifunction inputs
– 1 digital configurable as analog input.
PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS
“Side by Side”
Traditional models need – 1 relay with changeover contact
installation
side space between – 1 static configurable as analog 0-10V/4-20mA.
Multiple units can be
units for sufficient
installed without side
cooling air circulation. PROTECTION
clearance for space saving. – Overcurrent and overvoltage
– Input phase loss
– Output phase loss
– Motor drive overload
– Motor overload
– Output short circuit
– Motor stall.
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
– PID function for pump and fan application
– Dual set of independent parameters and ramps for two
different motor controls
– Automatic restarting and instantaneous speed tuning
– 15 viewable frequency values
– Start-up DC injection
– DC injection braking
– Motor control: constant torque V/f, sensorless vector,
variable torque.
– Input voltage: 200-240VAC single-phase
– Output voltage: ≤ input voltage
– Rated operational current: 1.4-10A
– Mains frequency: 50/60Hz
– Output frequency: 0.1-400Hz
– Frequency modulation: 2-16kHz
– Current overload: 150% for 60s; 200% for 0.5s
– IEC degree of protection: IP20
• Maximum altitude: 3000m (with derating)
• Relative humidity: 5-95% (with no condensing).

(File E204788) as Power Conversion Equipment;
CSA certified for Canada (File 231252) as Motor
Controllers - Miscellaneous.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61800-5-1,
IEC/EN 61800-3 - first environment cat. C1,
IEC/EN 60721-3-3, UL508 C, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
page 6-6 and 7 page 6-8 6-3
AC motor drives
Three phase
VFS15 type Order code Output 3-phase Qty Weight General characteristics
current motor power per The numerous functions available together with the
at 400V pkg constructive features consent the VFS15 speed control to
Heavy load be used in a host of industrial and civil sectors, such as:
[A] [kW] [HP] n° [kg] waterworks and methane piping ducts, cement, paper,
chemical and petrochemical industries.
Three-phase supply 380-500VAC 50/60Hz . The EASY function key allows direct switching to a
Three-phase motor output 500VAC max. customised menu with typical programming parameters
Built-in EMC suppressor (for 2° environment cat. C3). for a dedicated application in order to quickly reach them
VFS15 4004 PLW 1.5 0.4 0.5 1 1.800 for eventual consultation or changes.
VFS15 4007 PLW 2.3 0.75 1 1 1.800 SPEED REFERENCE SIGNALS
VFS15 4015 PLW 4.1 1.5 2 1 1.800 Reference signals for speed adjustment are obtained by:
– Front potentiometer
VFS15 4022 PLW 5.5 2.2 3 1 3.200 – External potentiometer: 1-10kΩ
VFS15 4037 PLW 9.5 4 5 1 3.200 – Voltage signal: 0-10V
VFS15 4055 PLW 14.3 5.5 7.5 1 5.500 – Current signal: 4-20mA
6 VFS15 4075 PLW 17 7.5 10 1 5.500
– Keypad on front
VFS15 4110 PLW 27.7 11 15 1 8.400 – 15 preset speeds via digital inputs
VFS15... – RS485 serial signals.
VFS15 4150 PLW 33 15 20 1 8.400
PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS
Operational chacteristics for normal load conditions – Selectable PNP or NPN I/O logic
Type Current 3-phase motor power – 6 digital multifunction inputs
at 400VAC – 2 digital configurable as analog input.
VFS15 4004 PLW 2.1A 0.75kW 1HP PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS
– 1 relay with changeover contact and 1 relay with NO
VFS15 4007 PLW 3A 1.1kW 1.5HP contact; 1 transistor and 1 analog configurable as
VFS15 4015 PLW 5.4A 2.2kW 3HP 0-10VDC or 4-20mA.
VFS15 4022 PLW 6.9A 3kW 4HP PROTECTION
VFS15 4037 PLW 11.1A 5.5kW 7.5HP – Overcurrent and overvoltage
– Input and output phase loss
VFS15 4055 PLW 17A 7.5kW 10HP – Drive, motor and braking resistor overload
VFS15 4075 PLW 23A 11kW 15HP – Drive overtemperature and excessive torque
VFS15 4110 PLW 31A 15kW 20HP – Earth/ground fault.
VFS15 4150 PLW 38A 18.5kW 25HP SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
– PID function for pump and fan application
Operation up to 50°C without derating.
150% overload for 60 seconds. – Dual set of independent parameters and ramps for two
200-240VAC three-phase version available on request; consult Customer different motor controls
Service for details; see contact details on inside front cover. – Automatic restarting and instantaneous speed tuning
120% overload for 60 seconds. – 15 viewable frequency values
– DC-Bus access for DC power supply
– Capacitor pre-charge circuit
– Integrated dynamic braking circuit; optional external
VFS15... M braking resistor
– Motor control: constant torque V/f, variable torque,
sensorless vector
– Automatic motor torque boost control
– Logic “Myfunction” mode permits to combine among
each other inputs, outputs and drive states including
ON/OFF delay timing, to elaborate more complex
functions and comparators
– DC injection braking
– Auto-tuning
– Frequency potentiometer (speed adjustment via 2
external pushbuttons)
– Quick parameter search and programming
– Sequential starting control for sets of motors
– SLEEP function: automatic motor stopping after
continuous running at minimum frequency
“Side by Side”
Traditional models need – Start-up DC injection
installation
side space between – OVERRIDE function for summing analog VIA-VIB inputs.
Multiple units can be
units for sufficient
installed without side
cooling air circulation.
– Input voltage: 380-500VAC three-phase
clearance for space saving. – Output voltage: ≤ input voltage
– Rated operational current: 1.5-38A three-phase
– Output frequency: 0-500Hz
– Current overload for 60s: 120% for normal load;
150% for heavy load
– Low speed torque: 200% 0.3Hz
– IEC degree of protection: IP20; IP54 on request
• Maximum altitude: 1000m
Certifications and complience
Controllers - Miscellaneous; AS C-tick.
Compliant with standards: EN 50178, IEC/EN 61800-3 -
first environment cat. C2 or second environment cat. C3,
UL508 C, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
AC motor drives
Three phase
VFPS1 type Order code Output 3-phase Qty Weight General characteristics
current motor power per VFPS1 is a motor drive combining the most advanced and
at 400V pkg optimised mode for energy saving with a compact and
complete line as well as a function software dedicated to
[A] [kW] [HP] n° [kg] pump and fan applications.
Three-phase supply 380-480VAC 50/60Hz. The on-board EMC surge suppressor and standard-
Three-phase motor output 480VAC max. supplied (up to 315kW type) DC inductance consent to
Built-in EMC suppressor (for 2° environment cat. C3). radically reduce harmonic distortions and noise
disturbances generated by the motor drive and to limit the
VFPS1 4185 PLWP 41 18.5 25 1 22.200 input current to a maximum value of 1.1 times output
VFPS1 4220 PLWP 48 22 30 1 23.700 current.
VFPS1 4300 PLWP 66 30 40 1 32.500 QUICK mode provides for a customised menu of 32
specific parameters for a single application, inhibiting
VFPS1 4370 PLWP 79 37 50 1 32.800 access to all the other parameters.
VFPS1 4450 PLWP 94 45 60 1 54.000 SPEED REFERENCE SIGNALS
VFPS1 4550 PLWP 116 55 75 1 54.000 Reference signals for speed adjustment are obtained by:
VFPS1 4750 PLWP 160 75 100 1 54.000 – External potentiometer: 1-10kΩ
VFPS1 4900 PCWP 179 90 125 1 100.000
– Voltage signal: 0 to 10V or -10 to +10V 6
– Current signal: 4-20mA or 0-20mA
VFPS1 4110 KPCWP 215 110 150 1 100.000 – Keypad on front
Three-phase supply 380-440VAC 50Hz/380-480VAC 60Hz. – 15 preset speeds via digital inputs
Three-phase motor output 440/480VAC max. – RS485 serial signals.
VFPS1...
Built-in EMC suppressor (for 2° environment cat. C3).
PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS
VFPS1 4132 KPCWP 259 132 200 1 108.000 – Selectable PNP or NPN I/O logic
VFPS1 4160 KPCWP 314 160 250 1 118.000 – 6 digital multifunction inputs
VFPS1 4220 KPCWP 427 220 350 1 161.000 – 1 digital configurable as analog input.
VFPS1 4250 KPCWP 481 250 400 1 194.000 PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS
– 1 relay with changeover contact
VFPS1 4280 KPCWP 550 280 450 1 204.000 – 2 static usable as pulse train
VFPS1 4315 KPCWP 616 315 500 1 204.000 – 2 analog configurable as 0-10VDC, 0-20mA or 4-20mA.
VFPS1 4400 KPCWP 759 400 600 1 302.000 PROTECTION
VFPS1 4500 KPCWP 941 500 700 1 320.000 – Overcurrent and overvoltage
– Output short circuit and earth/ground leakage
VFPS1 4630 KPCWP 1181 630 1000 1 462.000 – Drive, motor and braking resistor overload
Operation up to 50°C without derating. – Drive overtemperature
Consult Customer Service for details regarding the following; see contact – Motor stall
details on inside front cover: – Too low torque.
240VAC three-phase available on request except for VPS1 4110 KPCWP
type. SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
600VAC three-phase available on request. – PID function for pump and fan application
Indicated ratings are for normal load; available on request for heavy load – Dual set of independent parameters and ramps for two
conditions.
different motor controls
– Automatic restarting and instantaneous speed tuning
– 15 viewable frequency values
– DC-Bus access for DC power supply
VFPS1... M – Built-in DC reactor for reduced harmonic content at
input
– DC braking board standard-supplied up to
220kW/350HP rating; optional external braking
resistors
– DC injection at starting
– Motor control: constant torque V/f, variable torque,
torque boost with automatic starting, sensorless
vector, vector control in closed-loop conditions
– Auto-tuning
– Frequency potentiometer; speed adjustment via
2 external push buttons
– SLEEP function: automatic motor stopping after
continuous running at minimum frequency
– FIRE control function: specified speed maintained even
in alarm conditions
– Built-in PTC thermistor input.
– Output voltage: ≤ input voltage
– Rated operational current: 41-1181A
– Mains frequency: 50/60Hz ±5%
– Output frequency: 0.5-500Hz
– Current overload: 120% for 60s, 135% for 2s
– IEC degree of protection: IP00 for all except
VFPS1 4185 PLWP with IP20; IP55 on request
• Maximum altitude: 1000m without derating; up to
3000m with derating
Controllers - Miscellaneous; AS C-tick.
IEC/EN 61800-3 - first environment cat. C2 or second
environment cat. C3, UL508 C, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
AC motor drives
Accessories
Three-phase inductances Order code Ie mH For motor Qty Weight General characteristics
drive rating per The three-phase inductances, IND type, can be connected
pkg to the drives type VFNC3..., VFS11... and VFPS1... in the
[A] [kW] n° [kg] following ways:
– On the motor drive input to reduce the harmonic
IND2020 12 1 0.75...4 1 1.850 content upstream, with the subsequent reduction of
IND2030 25 0.6 5.5...11 1 2.670 input current consumption of the drive itself.
IND3040 50 0.2 15...22 1 7.220 – On the motor drive output to limit peak voltages
generated by drives on the motor or in case there are
IND4040 100 0.15 30...45 1 14.410 more motors connected in parallel, controlled
IND4075 150 0.08 55...75 1 21.680 simultaneously by the drive itself.
IND4090 300 0.04 90...110 1 27.000 The inductances can be used at the motor drive input
having single-phase power supply.
IND5060 400 0.03 132...160 1 37.600 For the correct choice, select the inductance with Ie
IND5080 600 0.02 220...250 1 45.000 current rating equal to or greater than the rated current of
IND7070 800 0.016 280...315 1 62.000 the drive they will be used with.
6 IND... For other drive ratings, consult Customer Service; see contact details on Operational characteristics
inside front cover.
– Class: H
– Current: 12-800A
• Operating temperature: -25...+100°C.
Reference standards
Braking resistors Order code Power Capacity Qty Weight General characteristics
per The braking resistors can be connected to motor drives
pkg VFS15… and VFPS1…; see the table below the order
codes.
[W] [Ω] n° [kg]
ROF20100 200 100 1 0.210 Operational characteristics for ROF... and ROPPE...
ROF20150 200 150 1 0.220 – Maximum applicable voltage: 1000V
– Connection: With 250mm cable for ROF; directly on
ROF35060 350 60 1 0.610 the resistor terminal for ROPPE
ROF50035 500 35 1 0.773 – Degree of protection: IP54 for R0F; IP20 for ROPPE.
ROF80030 800 30 1 1.570
Reference standards
ROPPE11430 1300 30 1 3.856 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60204-1,
ROPPE12515 2200 15 1 5.200 IEC/EN 60664-1.
ROF... ROPPE14008 4000 8 1 6.780
ROPPE... ROPPE24003 8000 3 1 11.000
Drive type Resistor type

ROF20150 VFS15 4004 PLW
VFS15 4007 PLW
ROF20100 VFS15 4015 PLW
VFS15 4022 PLW
ROF35060 VFS15 4037 PLW
VFS15 4055 PLW
ROF50035 VFS15 4075 PLW
ROF80030 VFS15 4110 PLW
VFS15 4150 PLW
ROPPE11430 VFPS1 4185 PLWP
VFPS1 4300 PLWP
VFPS1 4450 PLWP
VFPS1 4550 PLWP
VFPS1 4750 PLWP
VFPS1 4110 KPCWP
VFPS1 4132 KPCWP
VFPS1 4160 KPCWP
VFPS1 4220 KPCWP
VFPS1 4250 KPCWP
VFPS1 4280 KPCWP
VFPS1 4315 KPCWP
VFPS1 4400 KPCWP
VFPS1 4500 KPCWP
VFPS1 4630 KPCWP
For details and choice on braking resistors, consult Customer
Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
Dimensions
6-6 page 6-11
AC motor drives
Accessories
Others Order code Description Qty Weight Reference standards

per Compliant with standards: EN 50178, IEC/EN 61000-6-2,
pkg IEC/EN 61000-6-3 for MITOS… and RKP… types.
n° [kg]
For VE1 type motor drives.
VEX C00 Connecting cable for VE1 1 0,080
RS485 port with PC USB
port, 1.8m long
For VFNC3-VFS15-VFPS1 type motor drives.
MITOSVT6 Remote control panel with 1 0.200
functions: motor running,
VEX C00 inverse rotation, speed
adjustment and quantities
control. IP65.
16 character-2 line display.
Cable excluded 6
MITOSVT6ECO Remote control panel for 1 0.200
quantities retention and
control of a system (PID:
pressure, temperature, etc).
IP65.
16 character-2 line display.
MITOS Cable excluded
RJ45SH05000 Connecting cable RJ45 for 1 0.140
MITOS..., RKP002Z or
USB001Z to motor drive.
5m long
RKP002Z Remote control panel 1 0.280
with functions: motor
running, speed adjustment,
quantities control and
parameter setting. IP20.
4 character-7 segment
display.
Cable excluded
USB001Z Motor drive programming 1 0.260
module
51 PT25H101K 1kOhm potentiometer 1 0.100
10 turns, complete with
operating knob
51 PT35H11K 1kOhm potentiometer 1 0.052
1 turn, complete with
operating knob
The VE1 programming software is standard supplied with the cable.
RJ45 cable to be purchased separately; order code RJ45SH05000.
For USB001Z module PC USB port connection, use a normal USB
cable, USB1.1/2.0 compatible, type A-B connection, maximum
recommendable length 1m only.
Ask Customer Service for the motor drive remote control software; see
contact details on the inside front cover.
Dimensions
page 6-11 6-7
AC motor drives
SINGLE PHASE MOTOR DRIVES

VE1 02 A240 - VE1 04 A240 - VE1 07 A240 VE1 15 A240 - VE1 22 A240
63 (2.48”) 139.2 (5.48”) 108 (4.25”) 147.3 (5.80”)
131 (5.16”)
122 (4.80”)
131 (5.16”)
121 (4.76”)
141 (5.55”)
141 (5.55”)
6 61 (2.40”) 136 (3.35”) 108 (4.25”)
144.2 (5.68”)
72 (2.83”)❶ 118 (4.64”)❶
In a control panel when more than one VE1 is installed side by side, provide sufficient air circulation space, of at least 5cm / 2” between each, in order to ensure proper cooling effect.
VFNC3S 2002 PLW...VFNC3S 2007 PLW VFNC3S 2015 PLW - VFNC3S 2022 PLW
72 (2.83”) 105 (4.13”)

60 (2.36”) A 93 (3.66”) 156 (6.14”)
Ø5
(0.20”) Ø5
(0.20”)
118 (4.64”)
143 (5.63”)
142 (5.59”)
B
5 5
(0.20”) (0.20”)
TYPE A B
VFNC3S 2002PL W 102 (4.01”) 131 (5.16”)
VFNC3S 2004PL W 121 (4.76”) 118 (4.64”)
VFNC3S 2007PL W 131 (5.16”) 118 (4.64”)
THREE PHASE MOTOR DRIVES

VFS15 4004 PLW - VFS15 4007 PLW - VFS15 4015 PLW
(0.20
5
Ø5 107 (4.21”) 153 (6.02”) 7.5

(0.20”) (0.29”)
STATUS
RUN
%
PRG
MON
Hz
RUN STOP
EASY MODE
121.5 (4.78”)
130 (5.12”)
.5
R2
13 (0.51”)
93 (3.66”)
VFS15 4022 PLW...VFS15 4037 PLW

2 - Ø5
(0.25”)
140 (5.51”) 160 (6.30”)

6.5
(0.20”) 7.5
(0.29”)
170 (6.69”)
157 (6.18”)
(0.55”)
14
2-R2.5
7 126 (4.96”)
(0.27”)
6-8
AC motor drives
VFS15 4055 PLW - VFS15 4075 PLW

(0 Ø11 .5
.43 R2
”)
(0.31”)
8
150 (5.90”) 170 (6.69”) 7.5
(0.20”)
(0.29”)
Ø5
STATUS
RUN
%
PRG
MON Hz
RUN STOP
210 (8.27”)
220 (8.66”)
EASY MODE
6
(0.47”)
12
2-R2.5
10 130 (5.12”)
(0.39”)
VFS15 4110 PLW - VFS15 4150 PLW

(0 Ø14 R3
.55
(0.35”)
”)
9
180 (7.09”) 190 (7.48”) 7.5

(0.27”)
(0.29”)
7
310 (12.20”)
295 (11.61”)
STATUS
RUN
%
PRG
MON Hz
RUN STOP
EASY MODE
(0.79”)
20
2-R3
10 160 (6.30”)
(0.39”)
THREE PHASE MOTOR DRIVES

VFPS1 4185 PLWP VFPS1 4220 PLWP...VFPS1 4370 PLWP
A C A C
Ø9 Ø11.5
(0.35”) (0.45”)
E
B
E
Fig. 1
D
D
Fig. 2
TYPE Fig. A B C D E F
VFPS1 4185 PLWP 1 230 (9.05”) 409 (16.10”) 191 (7.52”) 210 (8.27”) 386 (15.20”) 16 (0.63”)
VFPS1 4220 PLWP 2 240 (9.45”) 420 (16.53”) 212 (8.35”) 206 (8.11”) 403 (15.87”) —
VFPS1 4300 PLWP 2 240 (9.45”) 550 (21.65”) 242 (9.53”) 206 (8.11”) 529 (20.83”) —
VFPS1 4370 PLWP 2 240 (9.45”) 550 (21.65”) 242 (9.53”) 206 (8.11”) 529 (20.83”) —
6-9
AC motor drives
VFPS1 4450 PLWP...VFPS1 4750 PLWP

A C
Ø9
(0.35”)
Fig. 3
VFPS1 4900 PCWP

VFPS1 4110 KPCWP...VFPS1 4630 KPCWP
A C
Ø11.5
(0.45”)
B
E
Fig. 4
TYPE Fig. A B C D E
VFPS1 4450 PLWP 3 320 (12.60”) 630 (24.80”) 290 (11.42”) 280 (11.02”) 605 (23.82”)
VFPS1 4550 PLWP 3 320 (12.60”) 630 (24.80”) 290 (11.42”) 280 (11.02”) 605 (23.82”)
VFPS1 4750 PLWP 3 320 (12.60”) 630 (24.80”) 290 (11.42”) 280 (11.02”) 605 (23.82”)
VFPS1 4900 PCWP 4 310 (12.20”) 680 (26.77”) 375 (14.76”) 250 (9.84”) 650 (25.59”)
VFPS1 4110 KPCWP 4 310 (12.20”) 680 (26.77”) 375 (14.76”) 250 (9.84”) 650 (25.59”)
VFPS1 4132 KPCWP 4 350 (13.78”) 782 (30.79”) 375 (14.76”) 298 (11.73”) 758 (29.84”)
VFPS1 4160 KPCWP 4 330 (12.99”) 950 (37.40”) 377 (14.84”) 285 (11.22”) 920 (36.22”)
VFPS1 4220 KPCWP 4 430 (16.93”) 950 (37.40”) 377 (14.84”) 350 (13.78”) 920 (36.22”)
VFPS1 4250 KPCWP 4 585 (23.03”) 950 (37.40”) 377 (14.84”) 540 (21.26”) 920 (36.22”)
VFPS1 4280 KPCWP 4 585 (23.03”) 950 (37.40”) 377 (14.84”) 540 (21.26”) 920 (36.22”)
VFPS1 4315 KPCWP 4 585 (23.03”) 950 (37.40”) 377 (14.84”) 540 (21.26”) 920 (36.22”)
VFPS1 4400 KPCWP 4 880 (34.64”) 1150 (45.27”) 377 (14.84”) 831 (32.71”) 1120 (44.09”)
VFPS1 4500 KPCWP 4 880 (34.64”) 1150 (45.27”) 377 (14.84”) 831 (32.71”) 1120 (44.09”)
VFPS1 4630 KPCWP 4 1108 (43.62”) 1150 (45.27”) 377 (14.84”) 1065 (41.93”) 1120 (44.09”)
6-10
AC motor drives
ACCESSORIES
Three-phase inductances
IND...
Type A B C D E ØF
IND2020 115 (4.53”) 80 (3.15”) 125 (4.92”) 78 (3.07”) 55 (2.16”) 5.5 (0.22”)
IND2030 115 (4.53”) 90 (3.54”) 125 (4.92”) 78 (3.07”) 65(2.56”) 5.5 (0.22”)
IND3040 170 (6.69”) 115 (4.53”) 190 (7.48”) 115 (4.53”) 85 (3.35”) 6.5 (0.25”)
C
IND4040 240 (9.45”) 135 (5.31”) 230 (9.05”) 146 (5.75”) 80 (3.15”) 8.5 (0.33”)
IND4075 240 (9.45”) 170 (6.69”) 220 (8.66”) 146 (5.75”) 105 (4.13”) 8.5 (0.33”)
IND4090 240 (9.45”) 195 (7.68”) 220 (8.66”) 146 (5.75”) 120 (4.72”) 8.5 (0.33”)
ØF ØF
IND5060 350 (13.78”) 170 (6.69”) 325 (12.79”) 240 (9.45”) 105 (4.13”) 12.5 (0.49”)
D E IND5080 350 (13.78”) 190 (7.48”) 325 (12.79”) 240 (9.45”) 125 (4.92”) 12.5 (0.49”)
A B IND7070 440 (17.32”) 200 (7.87”) 420 (16.53”) 245 (9.64”) 120 (4.72”) 12.5 (0.49”)
6
Braking resistors Remote control panel
ROF... MITOS...
B B
D E D
55 (2.16”)
65 (2.56”)
D B
Ø
120 (4.72”) 31
(1.22”)
36
(1.42”)
Cutout
C
C
A
L
107 (4.21”)
C
56 (2.20”)
Ø
Ø Ø
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3
Type ROF 20 ROF 35 ROF 50 ROF 80

Fig. 1 2 2 3
A 192 (7.56”) 169 (6.65”) 299 (11.77”) 240 (9.45”)
B 30 (1.18”) 80 (3.15”) 80 (3.15”) 80 (3.15”)
C 180 (7.09”) 140 (5.51”) 180 (7.09”) 254 (10”)
D 25 (0.98”) 20 (0.79”) 20 (0.79”) 52 (2.05”)
E –– 45 (1.77”) 45 (1.77”) ––
L –– –– –– 275 (10.83”)
Ø 5 (0.20”) 5 (0.20”) 5 (0.20”) 6 (0.24”)
Braking resistors Remote control panel

ROPPE... RKP002Z
80 (3.15”)
C
115 (4.53”)
(0.64”)
16.2
(0.36”
9.2
Ø6.5
(0.25”)
E D
A B Cutout
Type ROPPE 114 ROPPE 125 ROPPE 140 ROPPE 240

A 386 (15.20”) 506 (19.92”) 626 (24.64”) 626 (24.64”)
63 (2.48”)
B 107 (4.21”) 107 (4.21”) 107 (4.21”) 197 (7.75”)

(0.64”)
C 260 (10.24”) 260 (10.24”) 260 (10.24”) 260 (10.24”)

16.4
D 80 (3.15”) 80 (3.15”) 80 (3.15”) 160 (6.30”)

E 366 (14.41”) 486 (19.13”) 606 (23.86”) 606 (23.86”)
(0.41”)
10.4
35.9 4.6
(1.41”) (0.18”)
98 (3.86”)
6-11
Page 7-4 to 7 and 10 Page 7-8 and 11 Page 7-9 and 11
7-26 to 28 and 31 7-29 and 32 7-30 and 33
BUTTON ACTUATORS Ø22mm DOUBLE AND TRIPLE TOUCH SELECTOR SWITCH
• Spring return flush, extended and shrouded ACTUATORS Ø22mm ACTUATORS Ø22mm
• Push-push flush and extended • Double touch with or without indicator • Knob
• Mushroom-head • Triple touch. • Lever
• Mechanical reset • Key
• Illuminated. • Illuminated.
Page 7-12 and 13 Page 7-14 to 23 Page 7-23

7-36 to 41
PILOT LIGHTS Ø22mm ADD-ON ELEMENTS, CONTROL STATIONS
• Monoblock LED ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS FOR • 1 to 6 way option without actuators
PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES • Complete units with 1 button.
MONOBLOCK BUZZERS Ø22mm • Mounting adapter
• Pulse-tone. • Contact elements
• LED integrated elements
COMMUNICATION INTERFACES Ø22mm • Lamp holders
• USB • Labelling and label holders
• RJ45. • Bulbs.
Page 7-34 Page 7-35
METAL POTENTIOMETER DRIVES Ø22mm METAL JOYSTICKS Ø22mm

• Graduated scale • 2 directions
• Variable index. • 4 directions
• 2 directions with mechanical interlock
• 4 directions with mechanical interlock
• Complete with contact elements.
PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES 7
Simple and snap on installation

Highly conductive contacts
Robust for severe ambient
conditions
Contact operation: double breaking
action, direct opening operation
and self cleaning.
SEC. - PAGE
Ø22mm series
Pushbutton actuators, spring return ................................................................................................................................ 7 - 4
Push-push button actuators ............................................................................................................................................ 7 - 4
Mechanical reset button, spring return ............................................................................................................................ 7 - 5
Pushbutton actuators with symbol, spring return ........................................................................................................... 7 - 5
Mushroom-head pushbutton actuators ........................................................................................................................... 7 - 7
Double and triple-touch button actuators, spring return ................................................................................................. 7 - 8
Selector switch actuators ............................................................................................................................................... 7 - 9
Illuminated button actuators, spring return .................................................................................................................... 7 - 10
Illuminated push-push button actuators ......................................................................................................................... 7 - 10
Illuminated mushroom-head actuators .......................................................................................................................... 7 - 10
Double-touch button actuators, spring return, with indicator ........................................................................................ 7 - 11
Illuminated selector actuators .......................................................................................................................................... 7 - 11
Pilot light heads .............................................................................................................................................................. 7 - 12
Monoblock LED pilot lights, steady light ........................................................................................................................ 7 - 12
Monoblock buzzers ......................................................................................................................................................... 7 - 13
USB-RJ45 communication interfaces .............................................................................................................................. 7 - 13
Accessories, spare parts and labels ................................................................................................................................ 7 - 14
series control stations ..................................................................................... 7 - 23
8 LM2T Ø22mm metal series
Pushbutton actuators, spring return ................................................................................................................................ 7 - 26
Push-push button actuators ............................................................................................................................................ 7 - 26
Mechanical reset button, spring return ............................................................................................................................ 7 - 27
Pushbutton actuators with symbol, spring return ........................................................................................................... 7 - 27
Mushroom-head pushbutton actuators ........................................................................................................................... 7 - 28
Double and triple-touch button actuators, spring return ................................................................................................. 7 - 29
Selector switch actuators ............................................................................................................................................... 7 - 30
S IGNALLING
Illuminated button actuators, spring return .................................................................................................................... 7 - 31

Illuminated push-push actuators ................................................................................................................................... 7 - 31
Illuminated mushroom-head actuators .......................................................................................................................... 7 - 32
Double-touch button actuators, spring return, with indicator ........................................................................................ 7 - 32
Illuminated selector actuators ........................................................................................................................................ 7 - 33
Pilot light heads .............................................................................................................................................................. 7 - 34
Potentiometers drives ..................................................................................................................................................... 7 - 34
AND
Joysticks ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7 - 35
Accessories, spare parts and labels ................................................................................................................................. 7 - 36
C ONTROL
Mounting adapter and contact - lamp holder - test elements .......................................................................................... 7 - 39
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 7 - 44
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 7 - 49
Pushbuttons and selector switches
Ø22mm series
QUALITY TOUCH!
10mm
LOW ACTUATOR PROFILE

The external actuator bezel has a low profile
and reduced front thickness.
7
CUSTOMISING CAPABILITY
To simplify stock management, the series includes
HIGH DEGREE OF PROTECTION actuators without cap or lens and separate caps and
The actuators have been tested to guarantee a degree of lenses for quick installation or replacement on spring
protetection per IEC/EN IP66, IP67, IP69K and UL Type 4X, return and push-push types; all these are sold as
appropriate for use even in extreme ambient conditions. accessories.
QUICK AND EASY ACTUATOR REDUCED DIMENSIONS AND CONTACT ELEMENTS

INSTALLATION INTERAXIS
Click! 30
(1.18”)
30
(1.18”)
40 (1.57”)
- Miniaturised size
40 (1.57”)
- High electric conductivity - 5V 1mA

- Up to 9 contact elements can be
installed, 3 rows of 3 elements
- The mounting adapter and the - Available versions: Front and base
actuators each have clearly visible mount with screw terminals while
- Actuator fixing on the mounting reference indications making the front-mount only with faston and
snap-on fitting between the two Ø22.3 spring-clamp terminals
surface, through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” (0.88”)
drilled hole, is obtained using its easy and intuitive. - Contact operation: double breaking
threaded ring, easily rotated by Minimum pitch: action, direct (positive) action
hand or by socket spanner/wrench. - 30x40mm (1.18x1.57”) between operation and wiping effect.
Click!
drillings for two actuators on a
mounting surface HIGH-LUMINOSITY LED ELEMENTS
- 30x55mm (1.18x1.97”) between
drillings for two double and triple-
touch actuators or when spring
clamp contacts are used.
43mm (1.69”)
- Electrical contacts and LED elements - Miniaturised size

are snapped onto the mounting - Long electrical life: 100,000h
- There is an anti-rotation fastener, adapter. - Versions for base mounting and with
duly sized to avoid actuator rotation - The activation of the middle contacts screw or spring-clamp terminals
on the mounting surface and to give is standard supplied on all non- - Overvoltage protection
an orientation reference point for illuminated spring return and - Withstand vibrations
users during panel installation and push-push button or selector - Protection against stray currents in
during contact fitting on the switch actuators. - Total depth, from the external wiring
actuator. mounting surface to the end of - Flickering phenomenon reduction
- This anti-rotation fastener collapses the first contact element is just - Steady and flashing light versions
inside the gasket to allow fitting also 43mm (1.69”). - Supply voltages:
when drilled holes are round without • 12-30VAC/DC
reference index. • 85-140VAC
- The sealing gasket for the actuator • 185-265VAC
mounting surface has a gripping - Test elements installed beside and
action (suction effect) offering connected with the relative LED
additional adhesion properties. element allow checking if all LED
elements of the installation are
working properly.
7-2
Ø22mm series
ELEGANT STYLE AND ERGONOMIC DESIGN

All the series elements have an ergonomic design and, at the same time,
particular care has been given to minimum detail aesthetics.
LONG ACTUATOR MECHANICAL LIFE

High performance characteristics assure 5,000,000 cycle mechanical life for
spring-return actuators, 1,000,000 for double and triple touch units and
300,000 for emergency-stop types.
MATERIALS RESISTANT TO OILS, SOLVENTS AND

HYDROCARBONS
USAGE AT EXTREME TEMPERATURE 7

CONDITIONS
Operation temperature range between -25° and +70°C.
UL LISTING FOR USA AND CANADA ALONG

WITH EAC AND CCC CERTIFICATIONS.
DOUBLE AND TRIPLE TOUCH EMERGENCY STOP ACTUATORS SELECTOR SWITCH ACTUATORS EXTENSIVE CHOICE OF ACCESSORIES
ACTUATORS
- Pilot light heads and monoblock

- Knob design assures excellent grip LED-integrated pilot lights (IP65).
- IEC IP66, IP67, IP69K and UL Type 4X

degree of protection
- Actuator structure suitable to
- Double touch button actuators, with
warrant direct opening operation
2 flush or 1 flush and 1 extended
with mechanical latching for - Monoblock buzzers (IP40).
buttons
emergency stopping per ISO 13850
- Triple touch button actuators with
and IEC/EN 60947-5-5. - High visibility on front or side and
2 flush and middle extended butons
- Auto-monitor contact elements are actuator inscription shows exact
- Versions with or without indicator.
available with functions to: switch position
• Constantly control the correct
MECHANICAL RESET BUTTONS
installation (mounting adapter and
NC contact with the actuator) and - Communication interfaces (IP65)
proper operation of the NC contact USB and RJ45 types for Ethernet and
• Open the circuit in the case of data transmission in both directions
malfunctions (e.g. the contact with equipment.
detaches from the mounting
adapter due to strong vibrations or CONTROL STATIONS
shock).
- Use of Ronis keys
- Rod adjustment directly on acutator

front (1...4mm / 0.04...0.16”)
- IEC/EN IP66, IP67 and IP69K and UL

- There is a green line around the Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X and 12K
actuator body to spot when the protection degrees
emergency stop is at rest or - Activation of the middle contacts is - Empty pushbutton stations with 1 to
activated. standard supplied on 2 and 3 6 way option and complete control
- Use of Ronis keys position selector switches. stations with various mushroom-
- Various accessories available (e.g. head stop buttons
yellow E-stop disks, padlockable - Quick installation and wiring ease
protection and rubber actuator with the relative base-mount contact
- Up to 6 contact elements can be and LED elements, snap in place on
boots).
mounted. the base
- Installation of screw and spring-
clamp terminal contact and LED
elements also on the internal cover
surface.
7-3
Ø22mm series
Pushbutton actuators, Order code Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

spring return per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
n° [kg] – Ambient conditions:
Flush (without mounting adapter). Spring return. • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
LPC B102 Black 10 0.025 – Degree of protection:
LPC B103 Green 10 0.025 • Per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K
• Per UL/CSA: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
LPC B104 Red 10 0.025
LPC B105 Yellow 10 0.025 Materials
LPC B10... Polyamide.
LPC B106 Blue 10 0.025
LPC B108 White 10 0.025 Mechanical endurance
Extended (without mounting adapter). Spring return. Operating force: <0.5kg / 1.1lb (actuator).
Mechanical life:
LPC B202 Black 10 0.027
- Spring return actuators: 5,000,000 cycles
LPC B203 Green 10 0.027 - Push-push actuators: 500,000 cycles.
LPC B204 Red 10 0.027
Mounting adapter
LPC B205 Yellow 1 0.027
See page 7-18.
7 LPC B20... LPC B206 Blue 1 0.027 Type: LPX AU120.
LPC B208 White 1 0.027 Actuators are installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.89” drilling
with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm / 1.69lbft) also
Shrouded (without mounting adapter). Spring return.
on the cover of LPZ control stations.
LPC B302 Black 10 0.027 The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator.
LPC B303 Green 10 0.027
Contact elements for spring-return button actuators
LPC B304 Red 10 0.027
See page 7-18, 7-21 or 7-22.
Type Termination
LPC B306 Blue 1 0.027
LPC B30... Front-mount types snap onto LPX AU120 mounting
LPC B308 White 1 0.027 adapter (to purchase separately).
Up to 9 contacts can be fitted: 3 each on the left, middle
and right, one behind the other.
Push-push button Order code Colour Qty Wt They can also be fitted internally on the cover surface of
per pkg LPZ control stations, up to 3 elements per actuator.
actuators
n° [kg] 1NO LPX C10 Screw
Flush (without mounting adapter). LPX CF10 Faston
Push on-push off. LPXCS10 Spring clamp
LPC Q102 Black 10 0.025 1EM LPX C10A Screw
LPC Q103 Green 10 0.025 1NC LPX C01 Screw
LPC Q104 Red 10 0.025 LPX CF01 Faston
LPC Q105 Yellow 1 0.025 LPX CS01 Spring clamp
LPC Q10... LPC Q106 Blue 1 0.025 1LB LPX C01D Screw
LPC Q108 White 1 0.025 Base mount types snap into LPZ control station base.
Extended (without mounting adapter). See example on page 7-25.
Push on-push off. Up to 3 contacts can be fitted per control station actuator.
LPC Q202 Black 10 0.027 1NO LPX CB10 Screw
LPC Q203 Green 10 0.027 1NC LPX CB01 Screw
LPC Q204 Red 10 0.027
Contact elements for push-push button actuators
LPC Q205 Yellow 1 0.027 See page 7-18.
LPC Q20...
LPC Q206 Blue 1 0.027 Type: LPX C10A (1EM early make, screw terminals)
LPX C01 (1NC, screw terminals)
LPC Q208 White 1 0.027
Contacts snap onto LPX AU120 adapter and also
Use contact elements LPX C10A (EM) and LPXC01 (NC) only. internally on the cover surface of LPZ control stations.
Contact elements LPX C10 (NO) and LPX C01D (LB) cannot be fitted on
these actuators. Up to 6 contacts can be fitted: 2 each on the left, middle
and right, one behind of the other; up to 3 elements per
control station actuator.
All these actuators are standard supplied with action plug

for middle contacts.

Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada,
(cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices; EAC, CCC.
Pending at time of catalogue printing: RINA.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14
Add-on blocks Accessories and spare parts Dimensions

7-4 pages 7-18 and 22 pages 7-14 to 17 page 7-44
Ø22mm series
Mechanical reset buttons, Order code Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

complete unit, per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
n° [kg] – Fine rod adjustment (1-4mm/0.04-0.16”) on front with
spring return screwdriver by removing actuator cap for mechanical
Flush (5.2mm/0.2” stroke). Adjustable length 0-150mm/5.9”. reset buttons
Complete with shaft (without mounting adapter). Spring return. – Ambient conditions:
LPC R1002 Black 10 0.038 • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
LPC R1003 Green 10 0.038 • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
– Degree of protection:
LPC R1004 Red 10 0.038 • Per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K
LPC R1196
LPC R1006 Blue 10 0.038 • Per UL/CSA: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
LPC R1196 Blue (RESET) 10 0.038
Mechanical endurance
Extended (5.2mm/0.2” stroke). Adjustable length 0-150mm/5.9”. Operating force: <0.5kg / 1.1lb (actuator).
Complete with shaft (without mounting adapter). Spring return. Mechanical life: 5,000,000 cycles.
LPC R2004 Red 1 0.040
Mounting adapter
With “RESET” caption on actuator.
N.B. Not suitable for LPZ control stations. See page 7-12.
Type: LPX AU120.
Actuators are installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.89” drilling
Pushbutton actuators, Order code Symbol Colour Qty Wt with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm / 1.69lbft) also 7
spring return, with symbol per pkg on the cover of LPZ control stations except for LPC R…
n° [kg] types.
Flush (without mounting adapter). Spring return. The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator;
necessary for LPC R… types only when contact elements
LPC B1102 O Black 10 0.025 are fitted.
LPC B1104 Red 10 0.025
LPC B1113 I Green 10 0.025 Contact elements for mechanical reset buttons
See page 7-18 or 7-21.
LPC B1118 White 10 0.025
Type Termination
LPC B1123 II Green 1 0.025
Front mount types snap onto LPX AU120 mounting
LPC B11... LPC B1128 White 1 0.025 adapter (to purchase separately), if any contacts are
LPC B1132 STOP Black 1 0.025 needed.
LPC B1134 Red 10 0.025 Up to 6 contacts can be fitted: 3 each on the left and
right, one behind the other.
LPC B1142 Black 10 0.025
1NO LPX C10 Screw
LPC B1148 White 10 0.025
LPX CF10 Faston
LPC B1152 Black 10 0.025
LPX CS10 Spring clamp
LPC B1158 White 10 0.025
1EM LPX C10A Screw
LPC B1163 START Green 10 0.025
1NC LPX C01 Screw
LPC B1168 White 1 0.025
LPX CF01 Faston
LPC B21... LPC B1176 R Blue 1 0.025
LPC B1178 White 1 0.025
1LB LPX C01D Screw
LPC B1196 RESET Blue 10 0.025
LPC B1502 Black 10 0.025 Contact elements for spring-return button actuators
LPC B1512 Black 10 0.025 See pages 7-18, 7-21 or 7-22.
Extended (without mounting adapter). Spring return. Type Termination
LPC B2102 O Black 10 0.027 Front-mount types snap onto LPX AU120 mounting
adapter (to purchase separately).
LPC B2104 Red 10 0.027 Up to 9 contacts can be fitted: 3 each on the left, middle
LPC B2132 STOP Black 1 0.027 and right; one behind the other.
LPC B2134 Red 10 0.027 They can also be fitted internally on the cover surface of
control stations LPZ, up to 3 elements per actuator.
Arrow symbol can be used to indicate right or left.
Arrow symbol can be used to indicate up or down. 1NO LPX C10 Screw
LPX CF10 Faston
1EM LPX C10A Screw
1NC LPX C01 Screw
LPX CF01 Faston
1LB LPX C01D Screw
Base-mount types snap into LPZ control station base.
See example on page 7-25.
Up to 3 contacts can be fitted per control station actuator.
1NO LPX CB10 Screw
1NC LPX CB01 Screw
The LPC B… actuators are standard supplied with action

plug for middle contacts.

Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14

pages 7-18 and 22 pages 7-14 to 17 page 7-44 7-5
Ø22mm series
Pushbutton actuators, Order code Symbol Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

spring return, with symbol per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
Spring return (without mounting adapter). • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
LPCB18 50 0.027 – Degree of protection:
• Per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K
LPCB22 50 0.027 • Per UL/CSA: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
LPCB23 50 0.027
Materials
LPCB25 + 50 0.027 Polyamide.
LPCB26 – 50 0.027
LPC B1253 LPCB27 50 0.027 Operating force: <0.5kg / 1.1lb (actuator).
LPCB28 50 0.027 Mechanical life: 5,000,000 cycles.
LPCB29 50 0.027 Mounting adapter
See page 7-18.
ALTO
LPCB30 50 0.027
Type: LPX AU120.

BASSO
LPCB31 50 0.027 Actuators are installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.89” drilling
7 LPCB32
SX
50 0.027 with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm / 1.69lbft) also

DX
LPCB33 50 0.027 The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator.
LPCB34 MAN 50 0.027
Contact elements
LPCB35 AUTO 50 0.027 See page 7-18, 7-21 or 7-22.
LPCB38 TRIP 50 0.027 Type Termination
LPCB39 TEST 50 0.027 Front-mount types snap onto LPX AU120 mounting
LPCB40 50 0.027
LPCB41 50 0.027 and right, one behind the other.
They can also be fitted internally on the cover surface of
LPCB42 50 0.027
LPZ control stations, up to 3 elements per actuator.
LPCB43 50 0.027 1NO LPX C10 Screw
LPCB44 50 0.027 LPX CF10 Faston
LPCB45 50 0.027 LPX CS10 Spring clamp
LPCB46 50 0.027 1EM LPX C10A Screw
LPCB47 50 0.027 1NC LPX C01 Screw
LPX CF01 Faston
LPCB48 50 0.027
LPCB49 50 0.027
1LB LPX C01D Screw
LPCB52 50 0.027
LPCB53 50 0.027 See example on page 7-25.
LPCB54 50 0.027
1NO LPX CB10 Screw
LPCB55 50 0.027
1NC LPX CB01 Screw
LPCB56 START
STOP
50 0.027
LPCB57 III 50 0.027 All these actuators are standard supplied with action plug
for middle contacts.
LPCB58 IV 50 0.027
LPCB59 50 0.027 Certifications and compliance
LPCB60 50 0.027 (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices; EAC, CCC.
LPCB61 50 0.027 Pending at time of catalogue printing: RINA.
Compliant with standards, IEC/EN 60947-1,
LPCB62 50 0.027 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n°14.
LPCB63 50 0.027
LPCB64 50 0.027
LPCB65 50 0.027
LPCB66 50 0.027
LPCB67 50 0.027
LPCB68 50 0.027
LPCB69 50 0.027
Add letter “L” if illuminated type is required.
For the type of actuator, add: 1 for flush or 2 for extended.
Add the actuator colour: 2 black only for non-illuminated type;
3 green, 4 red, 5 yellow, 6 blue, 8 white or 7 transparent for illuminated
version.
Products available on specific request for a minimum multiple quantity of
50 pieces per type.
Consult Customer Service for assistance; see contact details on inside
front cover.
Symbol indicating dangerous voltage /IEC 60417 5036-a).
Examples of complete order codes:
+
LPC B2 25 8 – extended non-illuminated white pushbutton with symbol
LPC BL1 68 5 – flush illuminated yellow pushbutton actuator with symbol.

Ø22mm series
Mushroom head Order code Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

pushbutton actuators per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
SPRING RETURN. • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
Ø40mm/1.6” (without mounting adapter). – Degree of protection:
LPC B6142 Black 10 0.033 • Per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K
LPC B6143 Green 10 0.033
LPC B6144 Red 10 0.033 Materials
LPC B614... Polyamide.
LPC B6146 Blue 10 0.033 Mechanical endurance
Operating force: <0.5kg / 1.1lb (actuator).
SPRING RETURN.
Mechanical life:
Ø60mm/2.4” (without mounting adapter).
– Mushroom head spring return buttons: 5,000,000 cycles
LPC B6162 Black 10 0.038 – Mushroom head latch buttons: 300,000 cycles.
LPC B6163 Green 10 0.038
Mounting adapter
LPC B6164 Red 10 0.038 See page 7-18.
LPC B6165 Yellow 10 0.038 Type: LPX AU120.
LPC B616...
LPC B6166 Blue 10 0.038
Actuators are installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.89” drilling 7
LATCH, PULL TO RELEASE on the cover of LPZ control stations.
Ø40mm/1.6” (without mounting adapter). The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator.
For normal stopping.
Contact elements for mushroom-head spring return and
LPC B6742 Black 10 0.097
latch button actuators
For emergency stopping, ISO 13850 compliant. See page 7-18, 7-21 or 7-22.
LPC B674... LPC B6744 Red 10 0.097 Type Termination
LATCH, TURN TO RELEASE Front-mount types snap onto LPX AU120 mounting
Ø40mm/1.6” (without mounting adapter). adapter (to purchase separately).
For normal stopping. For SPRING-RETURN types, up to 9 contacts can be fitted:
LPC B6342 Black 10 0.046 3 each on the left, middle and right, one behind the other.
For LATCH types, up to 6 contacts can be fitted: 2 each
LPC B6344 Red 10 0.046
on the left, middle and right, one behind the other.
Ø30mm/1.2” (without mounting adapter). They can also be fitted internally on the cover surface of
LPC B6634 For emergency stopping, ISO 13850 compliant. LPZ control stations, up to 3 elements per actuator.
LPC B6634 Red 10 0.079 1NO LPX C10 Screw
Ø40mm/1.6” (without mounting adapter). LPX CF10 Faston
For emergency stopping, ISO 13850 compliant.
LPXCS10 Spring clamp
LPC B6644 Red 10 0.079
1EM LPX C10A Screw
LATCH, TURN KEY TO RELEASE
1NC LPX C01 Screw
Ø40mm/1.6” (without mounting adapter). Key code n° 455.
LPC B6644 For normal stopping. LPX CF01 Faston
LPC B6842 Black 10 0.083 LPX CS01 Spring clamp
LPC B6842R Black 1 0.083 1LB LPX C01D Screw
For emergency stopping, ISO 13850 compliant. Base-mount types snap into LPZ control station base.
LPC B6844 Red 10 0.083
LPC B6844R Red 1 0.083
1NO LPX CB10 Screw
Versions with different key codes.
LPC B684... Complete with the numeric code of the key. 1NC LPX CB01 Screw
The following versions are available: 421E, 458A, 520E, 3131A, 3433E.
Example of complete code: LPC B6844R 421E. AUTO-MONITOR CONTACT with MUSHROOM-HEAD LATCH
TYPES only: 2 elements max of this type can be mounted.
Extra two contacts can be fitted on the right.
Normal operation of auto-monitor contact In case of detachment of only the contact element Two elements per actuator can be fixed internally on the
mounted on surface or on cover of control and/or of the mounting adapter with contact cover surface of LPZ control stations of which one auto-
stations element monitor type. No LED element can be installed.
With contact type LPX C01SM Auto-monitor LPX C01SM Screw (2 stacked in the
1NC middle - LPX AU120
Contact .3-.4 closes when the If the contact LPX C01SM detaches from the actuator
.3 .1
LPX AU120 mounting adapter and due to strong vibrations or shock, the equipment can pos.1/3-4/6)
LPX…SM contact are fitted be restored to operating state only when proper
.4 .2
correctly on the mushroom-head mounting of the contact with the actuator is re- 1NO LPX C10 Screw (2 stacked on the right)
latch actuator. established resulting in contact .3-.4 closing.
Contact .1-.2 in series does not or LPX CF10 Faston (2 stacked on the right)
change state.
1NC LPX C01 Screw (2 stacked on the right)
LPX CF01 Faston (2 stacked on the right)
When the button is fully pressed,
.3 .1
contact .1-.2 opens and remains in
this state until the button is AUTO-MONITOR CONTACT with MUSHROOM-HEAD LATCH
.4 .2
released. .3 .1 .3 .1 TYPES only: 2 elements max of this type can be mounted.
Contact .3-.4 in series does not
change state. .4 .2 .4 .2 Only one of this type per actuator can be fixed internally on
the cover surface of LPZ control stations. No LED element
With contact type LPX C02SM can be installed.
.3 .1 .1
Contact .3-.4 closes when the If the contact LPX C012SM detaches from the Auto-monitor LPX C02SM Screw (2 stacked )
LPX AU120 mounting adapter and actuator due to strong vibrations or shock, the
LPX…SM contact are fitted equipment can be restored to operating state only 2NC
.4 .2 .2
correctly on the mushroom-head when proper mounting of the contact with the
latch actuator. actuator is All these actuators are standard-supplied with action plug
Both contacts .1-.2 in series do re-established resulting in contact .3-.4 closing. or for middle contacts.
not change state.
.3 .1 .1
When the button is fully pressed, Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada
both contacts .1-.2 open and
remain in this state until the button (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices; EAC, CCC.
.4 .2 .2
is released.
.3 .1 .1
Contact .3-.4 in series does not .3 .1 .1
change state. Compliant with standards, IEC/EN 60947-1,
.4 .2 .2
.4 .2 .2 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n°14.

pages 7-18 and 22 pages 7-14 to 17 page 7-44 7-7
Ø22mm series
Double-touch actuators, Order code Colour Symbols Qty Wt Operational characteristics

Two flush pushbuttons (without mounting adapter). • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
Both spring return. – Degree of protection:
LPC B7112 Black/Red –– 5 0.030 • Per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K
LPC B7113 Green/Red –– 5 0.030
LPC B7114 White/Black –– 5 0.030 Materials
Polyamide.
LPC B7122 Black/Red I-O 5 0.030
LPC B7123 Green/Red I-O 5 0.030 Mechanical endurance
LPC B7124 White/Black I-O 5 0.030
LPC B71...
Mechanical life: 1,000,000 cycles.
LPC B7133 Green/Red Start/Stop 5 0.030
Mounting adapter
One extended and one flush pushbuttons (without mounting
See page 7-18.
adapter). Both spring return.
Type: LPX AU120.
LPC B7212 Black/Red –– 1 0.030 Actuators are installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.89” drilling
LPC B7213 Green/Red –– 5 0.030 with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm / 1.69lbft) also
7 LPC B7214 White/Black –– 1 0.030
The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator.
LPC B7222 Black/Red I-O 5 0.030
LPC B7223 Green/Red I-O 5 0.030 Contact elements
See page 7-18, 7-21 or 7-22.
LPC B72... LPC B7224 White/Black I-O 1 0.030
Type Termination
LPC B7233 Green/Red Start/Stop 5 0.030
Front-mount types snap onto LPX AU120 mounting
For DOUBLE-TOUCH actuators, up to 6 contacts can be
Triple-touch actuators, Order code Symbols Qty Wt fitted: 2 each on the left, middle and right, one behind the
spring return per pkg other.
n° [kg] For TRIPLE-TOUCH actuators, up to 9 contacts can be
fitted: 3 each on the left, middle and right, one behind the
Two external flush and one middle extended buttons
other.
(without mounting adapter). Spring return.
LPC B7345 5 0.030 LPZ control stations, up to 3 elements per actuator.
1NO LPX C10 Screw
STOP LPX CF10 Faston
1EM LPX C10A Screw
LPC B73... LPC B7355 5 0.030 1NC LPX C01 Screw
LPX CF01 Faston
STOP LPX CS01 Spring clamp
1LB LPX C01D Screw
LPC B7365 5 0.030 See example on page 7-25.
For DOUBLE-TOUCH actuators, 2 contacts need to be
fitted, one on the left and one on the right.
STOP For TRIPLE-TOUCH actuators, 3 contacts need to be
fitted: one each on the left, middle and right.
1NO LPX CB10 Screw
LPC B7375 5 0.030 1NC LPX CB01 Screw

STOP Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

7-8 pages 7-18 to 22 pages 7-14 to 17 page 7-45
Ø22mm series
Selector switch actuators Order code Type of Qty Wt Operational characteristics

knob positions per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
n° [kg] – Standard key types supplied with key code n° 455
2 position (without mounting adapter). • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
LPC S120 10 0.037 • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
LPC S121 10 0.037 – Degree of protection:
3 position (without mounting adapter). • Per UL/CSA: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
LPC S130 10 0.037
LPC S1... Materials
LPC S131 10 0.037 Polyamide.
LPC S132 10 0.037
LPC S133 10 0.037 Mechanical life: 1,000,000 cycles.
Mounting adapter
Selector switch actuators Order code Type of Qty Wt See page 7-18.
positions per pkg Type: LPX AU120.
lever Actuators are installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.89” drilling
n° [kg]
2 position (without mounting adapter). on the cover of LPZ control stations. 7
LPC S220 10 0.040 The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator.
LPC S221 10 0.040 Contact elements
3 position (without mounting adapter). See page 7-18, 7-21 or 7-22.
LPC S230 10 0.040 Type Termination
LPC S231 10 0.040 Front-mount types snap onto LPX AU120 mounting
LPC S2... adapter (to purchase separately). Up to 6 contacts can be
LPC S232 10 0.040
fitted: 2 each on the left, middle and right or 3 each on
LPC S233 10 0.040 the left and right, one behind the other.
LPZ control stations, up to 3 elements per actuator.
Selector switch actuators Order code Type of Qty Wt
1NO LPX C10 Screw
key position per pkg
LPX CF10 Faston
n° [kg]
2 position (without mounting adapter).
1EM LPX C10A Screw
LPC S320 10 0.060
1NC LPX C01 Screw
LPC S320R 1 0.060
LPX CF01 Faston
LPC S321 10 0.060
LPC S321R 1 0.060
1LB LPX C01D Screw
LPC S340 10 0.060
LPC S3...
LPC S340R 1 0.060
3 position (without mounting adapter). Up to 3 contacts can be fitted per control station actuator.
LPC S330 10 0.060 1NO LPX CB10 Screw
LPC S330R 1 0.060 1NC LPX CB01 Screw
LPC S331 10 0.060
Activation of the middle contacts is coupled to the side
LPC S331R 1 0.060
contacts; the relative mechanism pins are standard supplied.
LPC S332 10 0.060
LPC S332R 1 0.060
LPC S333 10 0.060
LPC S333R 1 0.060
LPC S350 10 0.060 The middle contact activation, with respect to the right
and left side contact, can be changed by the user, if
LPC S350R 1 0.060
required, by removing one or both mechanism pins.
LPC S360 10 0.060 Consult the relative instructions available online in the
LPC S360R 1 0.060 Downloads section in www.LovatoElectric.com.
LPC S370 10 0.060 Type of position
LPC S370R 1 0.060 Maintained position.
LPC S380 10 0.060 Spring return position.
LPC S380R 1 0.060
• Key extraction position.
LPC S390 10 0.060
LPC S390R 1 0.060 Rotation angles
2 position 3 position
Versions with different key codes. 45°
Complete with the numeric code of the key. 45°
90°
The following versions are available: 421E, 458A, 520E, 3131A, 3433E.
Example of complete code: LPC S320R 421E.
Available only on specific request.
Contact activation of 2-position selector switch Contact activiation of 3-position selector switch Special versions
3 Versions with coloured keys are available upon request.
3
2 2 Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside
1 1 front cover.
Contacts Contacts
1 2 3 1 2 3 Certifications and compliance
A — — — A —
Pending at time of catalogue printing: RINA for all;
B B — — —
cULus, EAC, CCC for LPC S2... types.
C —
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

pages 7-18 to 22 pages 7-14 to 17 page 7-45 7-9
Ø22mm series
Illuminated button Order code Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

actuators, spring return per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
Flush (without mounting adapter). • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
Spring return. – Degree of protection:
LPC BL103 Green 10 0.025 • Per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K
LPC BL104 Red 10 0.025
LPC BL105 Yellow 10 0.025 Materials
Polyamide.
LPC BL10... LPC BL106 Blue 10 0.025
LPC BL107 Transparent 10 0.025
Extended (without mounting adapter). Spring return. Mechanical life:
LPC BL203 Green 10 0.027 – Spring-return actuators (flush, extended, mushroom
head): 5,000,000 cycles
LPC BL204 Red 10 0.027
– Push-push actuators: 500,000 cycles
LPC BL205 Yellow 10 0.027 - Latch mushroom-head actuators: 300,000 cycles.
LPC BL206 Blue 10 0.027
7 LPC BL20... LPC BL207 Transparent 10 0.027 Mounting adapter
See page 7-18.
Type: LPX AU120.
Illuminated push-push Order code Colour Qty Wt Actuators are installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.89” drilling
per pkg with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm / 1.69lbft) also
button actuators on the cover of LPZ control stations.
n° [kg] The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator.
Flush (without mounting adapter).
Push on-push off. Contact elements for illuminated spring-return and
LPC QL103 Green 10 0.025 mushroom-head latch actuators
See page 7-18, 7-21 or 7-22.
LPC QL104 Red 10 0.025
Type Termination
LPC QL105 Yellow 10 0.025
LPC QL10... LPC QL106 Blue 10 0.025 adapter (to purchase separately).
LPC QL107 Transparent 10 0.025 For TYPES LPC BL1/BL2/BL61…up to 6 contacts can be
Extended (without mounting adapter). fitted: 3 each on the left and right, one behind the other.
Push on-push off. For TYPES LPC BL66…up to 4 contacts can be fitted: 2
each on the left and right, one behind the other of which
LPC QL203 Green 10 0.027 3 NO contacts max only.
LPC QL204 Red 10 0.027 They can also be fitted internally on the cover surface of
LPC QL205 Yellow 10 0.027 LPZ control stations, up to 2 elements per actuator in
addition to the LED element in the middle position.
LPC QL206 Blue 10 0.027
LPC QL20... 1NO LPX C10 Screw
LPC QL207 Transparent 10 0.027
LPX CF10 Faston
Use contact elements LPX C10A (EM) and LPXC01 (NC) only.
Contact elements LPX C10 (NO) and LPX C01D (LB) cannot be fitted on
these actuators. 1EM LPX C10A Screw
1NC LPX C01 Screw
LPX CF01 Faston
Illuminated mushroom Order code Colour Qty Wt
per pkg LPX CS01 Spring clamp
head button actuators
n° [kg] 1LB LPX C01D Screw
SPRING RETURN. Base-mount types snap into LPZ control station base.
Ø40mm/1.6in (without mounting adapter). See example on page 7-25.
Up to 2 contacts can be fitted per control station actuator
LPC BL6143 Green 10 0.035 in addition to the LED element in the middle position.
LPC BL6144 Red 10 0.035 1NO LPX CB10 Screw
LPC BL6145 Yellow 10 0.035 1NC LPX CB01 Screw
LPC BL6146 Blue 10 0.035
LPC BL6148 White 1 0.035 Contact elements for illuminated push-push button
LPC BL614... actuators
LATCH, TURN TO RELEASE. See page 7-18.
Ø40mm/1.6in (without mounting adapter). Type: LPX C10A (1EM early make, screw terminals)
For normal stopping. LPX C01 (1NC, screw terminals)
LPC BL6643 Green 1 0.040 Contacts snap onto LPX AU120 adapter and also
LPC BL6645 Yellow 1 0.040 internally on the cover surface of LPZ control stations.
Up to 4 contacts can be fitted: 2 each on the left and
LPC BL6646 Blue 1 0.040 right, one behind the other; up to 2 elements per control
For emergency stopping, ISO 13850 compliant. station actuator in addition to the LED element in the
LPC BL6644 Red 10 0.040 middle position.
LED light elements

LPC BL664... See pages 7-20 to 22.

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

Ø22mm series
Double-touch actuators, Order code Colour Symbol Qty Wt Operational characteristics

spring return, per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
white indicator • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
Two flush pushbuttons (without mounting adapter).
Both spring return. • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
– Degree of protection:
LPC BL7112 Black/Red –– 5 0.030 • Per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K
LPC BL7113 Green/Red –– 5 0.030 • Per UL/CSA: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
LPC BL7114 White/Black –– 1 0.030 Materials
LPC BL7122 Black/Red I-O 5 0.030 Polyamide.
LPC BL7123 Green/Red I-O 5 0.030
LPC BL7124 White/Black I-O 5 0.030 Operating force: <0.5kg / 1.1lb (actuator).
LPC BL71... Mechanical life: 1,000,000 cycles.
LPC BL7133 Green/Red Start/Stop 5 0.030
One extended and one flush pushbuttons (without mounting Mounting adapter
adapter). Both spring return. See page 7-18.
LPC BL7212 Black/Red –– 1 0.030 Type: LPX AU120.
LPC BL7213 Green/Red –– 5 0.030 Actuators are installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.89” drilling
LPC BL7214 White/Black –– 1 0.030
with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm / 1.69lbft) also 7
LPC BL7222 Black/Red I-O 1 0.030 The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator.
LPC BL7223 Green/Red I-O 5 0.030 Contact elements
LPC BL72... LPC BL7224 White/Black I-O 5 0.030 See page 7-18, 7-21 or 7-22.
LPC BL7233 Green/Red Start/Stop 5 0.030 Type Termination
Illuminated selector Order code Colour Type of Qty Wt adapter (to purchase separately).
positions per pkg For DOUBLE-TOUCH TYPES, up to 6 contacts can be
switch actuators fitted: 3 each on the left and right, one behind the other.
n° [kg] For SELECTOR SWITCHES, up to 4 contacts can be fitted:
2 position (without mounting adapter). 2 each on the left and right, one behind the other.
LPC SL1203 Green 10 0.025 They can also be fitted internally on the cover surface of
LPZ control stations, up to 2 elements per actuator in
LPC SL1204 Red 10 0.025 addition to the LED element in the middle position.
LPC SL1205 Yellow 10 0.025 1NO LPX C10 Screw
LPC SL1206 Blue 10 0.025 LPX CF10 Faston
LPC SL1... LPC SL1208 White 10 0.025 LPX CS10 Spring clamp
LPC SL1213 Green 10 0.025 1EM LPX C10A Screw
LPC SL1214 Red 1 0.025 1NC LPX C01 Screw
LPC SL1215 Yellow 1 0.025 LPX CF01 Faston
LPC SL1216 Blue 1 0.025 LPX CS01 Spring clamp
LPC SL1218 White 10 0.025 1LB LPX C01D Screw
3 position (without mounting adapter). Base-mount types snap into LPZ control station base.
LPC SL1303 Green 10 0.025 See example on page 7-25.
LPC SL1304 Red 10 0.025 Up to 2 contacts can be fitted per control station actuator
in addition to the LED element in the middle position.
LPC SL1305 Yellow 10 0.025
1NO LPX CB10 Screw
LPC SL1306 Blue 10 0.025
1NC LPX CB01 Screw
LPC SL1308 White 10 0.025
LPC SL1313 Green 10 0.025
Selector switch type of positions
LPC SL1314 Red 1 0.025
Maintained position.
LPC SL1316 Blue 1 0.025 Spring return position.
Selector switch rotation angles
LPC SL1323 Green 10 0.025 2 position 3 position
LPC SL1324 Red 1 0.025 45° 45°
90°
LPC SL1326 Blue 1 0.025
LPC SL1333 Green 10 0.025 LED light elements
LPC SL1334 Red 1 0.025 See pages 7-20 to 7-22.
LPC SL1336 Blue 1 0.025 Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada
LPC SL1338 White 10 0.025 (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices; EAC, CCC.
Contact activation of 2-position selector switch Contact activation of 3-position selector switch
2 2 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
1 1
Contacts Contacts
1 2 1 2
A — — A —
B B — —
C —

Push buttons and selectors
Ø22mm series
Pilot light heads Order code Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
Without mounting adapter. • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
LPL 3 Green 10 0.024 – Degree of protection:
LPL 4 Red 10 0.024 • Per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K
LPL 5 Yellow 10 0.024
LPL 6 Blue 10 0.024 Materials
LPL... Polyamide.
LPL 7 Transparent 10 0.024
LPL 1187 Transparent 10 0.024 Mounting adapter
With symbol indicating dangerous voltage (IEC/EN 60417 5036-a). See page 7-18.
Type: LPX AU120.
Pilot light heads are installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.89”
drilling with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm /
1.69lbft) also on the cover of LPZ control stations.
The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator.
7 LED light elements

See pages 7-20 to 7-22.

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
LED integrated Order code Rated auxi- LED Qty Wt Operational characteristics
liary supply colour per pkg – Rated auxiliary supply voltage: 12VAC/DC, 24VAC/DC,
monoblock pilot lights voltage 110VAC, 230VAC (-15% to +10%)
steady light – Consumption: ≤20mA
n° [kg] – Installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.89” drilling with a
8 LP2T IL A3P 12VAC/DC Green 10 0.021 threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm / 1.69lbft) also on
8 LP2T IL A4P Red 10 0.021 cover of LPZ control stations
– Electrical life: >30,000 hours
8 LP2T IL A5P Yellow 10 0.021 – Screw termination
8 LP2T IL A6P Blue 10 0.021 – Maximum tightening torque: 0.8Nm / 0.59lbft
8 LP2T IL A8P White 10 0.021 – Side cable entry
8 LP2T IL...P 8 LP2T IL B3P 24VAC/DC Green 10 0.021 • Operating temperature: -5...+40°C
8 LP2T IL B4P Red 10 0.021 – Degree of protection per IEC/EN:
8 LP2T IL B5P Yellow 10 0.021 • IP65 on front
• IP20 at rear.
8 LP2T IL B6P Blue 10 0.021
8 LP2T IL B8P White 10 0.021 Materials
Polyamide and polycarbonate.
8 LP2T IL E3P 110VAC Green 10 0.024
8 LP2T IL E4P Red 10 0.024 Maximum conductor cross section
1 or 2 1.5mm2 or AWG16 cables.
8 LP2T IL E5P Yellow 10 0.024
8 LP2T IL E6P Blue 10 0.024 Wiring diagram
8 LP2T IL E8P White 10 0.024
8 LP2T IL M3P 230VAC Green 10 0.024 X2 X1
8 LP2T IL M4P Red 10 0.024
8 LP2T IL M5P Yellow 10 0.024 Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada
8 LP2T IL M6P Blue 10 0.024 (cULus - File E93602), as Motor Controllers - Accessory,
8 LP2T IL M8P White 10 0.024 indicator; EAC, CCC.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

Ø22mm series
Monoblock buzzers Order code Voltage Sound Qty Wt General characteristics

intensity per pkg Monoblock buzzers are used as sound indicators in
at 2500Hz automation systems and on-board machinery in the
[V] [dB] n. [kg] production processes,
Long life, low consumption values and compact size are
Pulse-tone. the main features of this product.
8 LP2T ZGB 24VAC/DC 80dB 10 0.020
8 LP2T ZGE 110VAC/DC 10 0.020 Operational characteristics
– Rated auxiliary supply voltage:
8 LP2T ZGM 230VAC 10 0.020 24VAC/DC; 110VAC/DC; 230VAC (±10%)
Value measured at a distance of 10cm (3.94in). – Rated frequency: 50-60Hz
8 LP2T ZG... – Consumption: <20mA
Pulse-tone sound graph – Installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.89” drilling with a
threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm / 1.69lbft) also on
Hz the cover of LPZ control stations
3500 – Service life: 30,000 hours (permanently powered)
– Screw termination
3000
– Maximum tightening torque: 0.8Nm / 0.59lbft
0.6s 0.2s 0.6s 0.2s 0.6s
2500 – Side cable entry
2000 • Operational temperature: -25...+55°C 7
1500
– Degree of protection per IEC/EN:
1000 • IP40 on front
• IP20 at rear.
500
Materials
0 s
0 0.8 1.4 2 Polyamide and polycarbonate.
0.6 1 1.6 2.2
Maximum conductor cross section
1 or 2 2.5mm2 or AWG12 cables.
Wiring diagram
X1
X2

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-3.
USB and RJ45 Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

communication interfaces per USB and RJ45 communication interface connectors are
pkh used in industrial environments, which in recent years
n° [kg] have seen an increase in the number of connections
between machines, production lines, equipment and
LPX S00 USB interface, 1 0,018 measuring instruments. These interfaces provide the
A-A connection type transmission of data in both directions between the
LPX S01 USB interface, 1 0,018 various devices.
A-B connection type
LPX S02 RJ45 interface, 1 0,026 Operational characteristics
Ethernet connection type – Transmission characteristics:
LPX S00 • USB: Universal Serial Bus Spec. Rev. 2.0 25-40Mb/s
• RJ45: 10 Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802.3an-2006.
– Installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.89” drilling with a
threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm / 1.69lbft) also on
the cover of LPZ control stations
• Operating temperature: -40°...+70°C
• Storage temperature: -40°...+85°C
LPX S01 – Degree of protection IEC/EN:
• IP65 with cap mounted
• IP20 without cap.
Materials
Polyamide and polycarbonate.

LPX S02
Compliant with standards: IEC 61076-3-107 (USB),
IEC 60603-7-51 (RJ45).

page 7-38 pag. 7-43 7-13
Ø22mm series
Accessories and Order code Description Qty Wt

spare parts per pkg
n° [kg]
LPX A127 Transparent diffuser for 10 0.001
double-touch buttons
LPX A130 Threaded plug for 10 0.007
unused drilled holes (grey)
LPX A140 Action plug for centre 50 0.001
LPX A130 contact
LPX A150 Rod for mechanical reset 10 0.006
button (l =150mm/5.91in)
LPX A170 Spare standard key set 10 0.008
for selector switches or
mushroom-head buttons,
LPX A140 key code n° 455
LPX A170R Spare key set for selector 1 0.008
switches or mushroom
7 head buttons, LPC.. R type
LPX AU00 Threaded ring for actuator 20 0.002
fixing
LPX P01 M20 cable gland with 50 0.012
threaded ring for LPZ
LPX AU00 control stations
LPX B0 Flush-extended spring 10 0.013
return actuator
with no cap or lens
LPX B3 Shrouded spring return 10 0.014
actuator with no cap or lens
LPX Q0 Flush-extended push-push 10 0.013
actuator with no cap
LPX QL0 Illuminated flush-extended 10 0.013
LPX P01 push-push actuator with
no lens
Flush cap for spring-return actuators.
LPX B102 Black 10 0.002
LPX B103 Green 10 0.002
LPX B104 Red 10 0.002
LPX B105 Yellow 10 0.002
LPX B106 Blue 10 0.002
LPX B108 White 10 0.002
LPX B0
Extended cap for spring-return actuators.
LPX B202 Black 10 0.003
LPX B203 Green 10 0.003
LPX B204 Red 10 0.003
LPX B205 Yellow 10 0.003
LPX B206 Blue 10 0.003
LPX B208 White 10 0.003
LPX B104 LPX B203
Flush lens for illuminated spring-return actuators.
LPX BL103 Green 10 0.002
LPX BL104 Red 10 0.002
LPX BL105 Yellow 10 0.002
LPX BL106 Blue 10 0.002
LPX BL107 Transparent 10 0.002
Extended lens for illuminated spring-return actuators.
LPX BL105 LPX BL206 LPX BL203 Green 10 0.003
LPX BL204 Red 10 0.003
LPX BL205 Yellow 10 0.003
LPX BL206 Blue 10 0.003
LPX BL207 Transparent 10 0.003
Versions with different key code. Complete with the numeric code of the
key. The following versions are available: 421E, 458A, 520E, 3131A, 3433E.
Example of complete code: LPX A170R421E.
Dimensions
7-14 page 7-45
Ø22mm series
Accessories and spare parts Order code Description Qty Wt

per pkg
n° [kg]
LPX AU100 Label holder for blank or 50 0.001
engraved plastic
LPX AU109 label
LPX AU109 Engravable silver plastic 50 0.002
label to use with
LPX AU100 holder
LPX AU105 Label holder for blank or 50 0.003
LPX AU100 engraved LPX AU108
label
LPX AU108 Engravable silver plastic 50 0.002
label to use with
LPX AU105 holder
LPX AU13 Rubber boot for flush 10 0.006
button LPC B1/BL1/R1...
LPX AU14 Rubber boot for buttons
LPC B2/B3/BL2/R2...
10 0.009 7
LPX AU105 LPX AU157 Rubber boot for double 10 0.007
and triple-touch buttons,
transparent
LPX AU167 Rubber boot for mush- 10 0.012
room head buttons,
LPC B63/B66/B67/BL66...
transparent
LPX AU108 LPX AU158 Padlockable protection, 10 0.005
LPX AU109 Ø5-8mm/0.2-0.31”
locks for buttons
LPC B66/B67/B68/BL66...;
for LPC B34... Ø5-6mm/
0.2-0.24” locks only
Other accessories.
8 LM2T A161 Ø30mm/1.2” hole size 10 0.002
adapter set for 22mm/
0.87” (use 2 per hole)
8 LM2T A185 Selector protection 10 0.004
shroud for knob type only
LPX AU158 8 LM2T A200 Socket spanner/wrench 1 0.184
for fixing ring fitting, metal
For flush and extended push buttons, comple the order code by adding the
digit of the required colour:
2 (black); 3 (green); 4 (red); 5 (yellow); 6 (blue); 7 (transparent); 8 (white).
For illuminated push buttons, add only digit 7 (transparent).
Cannot be used when LPX AU100 or LPX AU105 is fitted.
Cannot be used when LPX AU158 is fitted.
Cannot be used when LPX AU167 is fitted.
8 LM2T A185
Dimensions
page 7-38 7-15
Ø22mm series
Labels with text for Ordering code Text Qty Wt General characteristics
LPX AU100 legend holder per pkg The labels have indelible scratch-proof black lettering on
n° [kg] metalised grey polycarbonate background (adhesive).
General use. Special versions
8 LM2T AU206 Blank for writing 50 0.001 Labels in different languages are available.
8 LM2T AU207 Sheet with 108 labels 1 0.005 Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside
for laser printing front cover.
8 LM2T AU208 Sheet with 108 1 0.005
laser-printed labels
8 LM2T AGB230
8 LM2T AGB216 CLOSE 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB220 EMERGENCY 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB231 FAST 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB263 FAULT 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB215 FORWARD 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB228 LEFT 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB218 LOWER 50 0.001
7 8 LM2T AGB221 OFF 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB223 ON 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB211 OPEN 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB229 POWER ON 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB227 RAISE 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB226 RESET 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB222 REVERSE 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB217 RIGHT 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB241 RUNNING 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB224 SLOW 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB225 START 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB230 STOP 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB214 STOP RESET 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB240 THERMAL FAULT 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB237 TRIP 50 0.001
For selector switches.
8 LM2T AI233 AUTO-MAN 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI234 AUTO-O-MAN 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI241 MAN-AUTO 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI242 MAN-O-AUTO 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB235 FWD-O-REV 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB236 OFF-ON 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB232 STOP-START 50 0.001
International labels for push-buttons.
8 LM2T AU200 O 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU201 I 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU202 II 50 0.001
International labels for selector switches.
8 LM2T AU203 O-I 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU204 I-II 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU205 I-O-II 50 0.001
Recommended use with LPX AU109 blank label.
Sheet with 108 adhesive labels.
Complete code with required label text.
Dimensions
7-16 page 7-45
Ø22mm series
Plastic disk for mushroom Order code Text Qty Wt General characteristics
head pushbuttons per pkg The disks are made of non-adhesive plastic except
n° [kg] LPX AU110.
Plastic disks cannot be used with LPX AU158
LPX AU113 EMERGENCY/STOP 10 0.005 padlockable protection.
Ø90mm / 3.5”
LPX AU115 EMERGENCY/STOP 10 0.003
Ø60mm / 2.4”
LPX AU118 ARRET D’URGENCE / 10 0.003
NOT-AUS/
PARO EMERGENCIA
Ø60mm / 2.4”
LPX AU110 EMERGENCY STOP 12 0.001
LPX AU113 adhesive label, size
34.5x65mm/1.36x2.56”
LPX AU115
LPX AU110
Dimensions
page 7-45 7-17
Ø22mm series
Mounting adapter Order code Description Qty Wt Operational characteristics

per pkg – Any mounting position allowed.
n° [kg] – LPX AU120 adapter directly snaps onto the actuator
fixed on the mounting surface.
LPX AU120 Mounting adapter 10 0.019 – All LPX C… types snap onto LPX AU120 mounting
Rear view adapter:
(reference for element installation) • See the combinations given under “Contact
elements” in the right-hand column for each type of
pushbutton and selector switch.
• A maximum of 3 contacts or 2 contacts and 1 LED
LPX AU120 element (LPX L… mounted in the middle position)
can be fixed internally on the cover surface of LPZ
control stations.
– A maximum of 2 LPX C…SM contacts can be installed
on LPX AU120 adapter exclusively on non-illuminated
mushroom-head latch actuators:
1 3 2 1° row • In pos. 1-3 (on the left side only of LPX AU120; refer
4 6 5 2° row to REAR VIEW drawing), one only LPX C01SM or
7 9 8 3° row LPX C02SM element can be fitted.
• One extra LPX…SM can be installed in pos. 4-6
7 (stacked behind the first on the LPX AU120).
Contact elements Order code Function Qty Wt • With LPX C01SM, a maximum of two contacts LPX
per pkg C0… or LPX C1… can be fitted on the right side in
All SPST n° [kg] LPX AU120 pos. 2 and 5, one behind the other.
Screw termination. • On the internal surface of LPZ control station
Without mounting adapter. covers, one only LPX C01SM or LPX C02SM contact
.3 can be mounted on LPX AU120 pos. 1 (on the left).
LPX C10 10 0.011 With LPX C01SM, one extra element LPX C0… or
NO
.4 LPX C1… can be fitted on the right (LPX AU120
LPX C10A .7
10 0.011 pos. 2).
EM • No LED element can be used with LPX…SM types.
.8
– Maximum tightening torque for screw terminals:
LPX C... .1
LPX C01 10 0.011 1Nm / 0.74lbft.
NC – Ambient conditions:
.2
.5 • Operating temperature: -25…+70°C
LPX C01D 10 0.011 • Storage temperature: -40…+85°C.
LB
.6 – Degree of protection per IEC/EN:
Screw termination. Without mounting adapter. • IP20 for screw termination
Auto-monitor contact elements for non-illuminated latch • IP00 for Faston termination.
mushroom-head pushbuttons. General characteristics of contact elements
LPX C01SM 1 0.022 Wiping effect, dual scraping-oscillating action
.3 .1 IEC rated insulation voltage: 690V
1NC
IEC rated thermal current Ith: 10A
.4 .2
Conductivity: 5V 1mA
LPX C02SM 1 0.033 UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation: A600 Q600.
.3 .1 .1
2NC IEC operational power in AC15:
LPX C01SM LPX C02SM
.4 .2 .2
[V] 12 24 48 120 240 400 480 500 600
Screw termination. [A] 6 6 6 6 3 1.9 1.5 1.4 1.2
With mounting adapter.
.3 IEC operational power in DC13:
LPX E10 10 0.029
NO [V] 12 24 48 125 250 440 500 600
.4
.1 [A] 3 3 1.5 0.55 0.27 0.15 0.13 0.1
LPX E01 10 0.029
NC Short-circuit protection fuse: max calibre 10A gG/SC.
.2
Contact resistance: ≤20mΩ.
Faston termination. Terminals: Clamp screw with washer
Without mounting adapter. Faston 1-6.35mm(0.25”) or 2-2.8mm (0.11”).
LPX E... .3
LPX CF10 10 0.012
NO Stroke of contact elements
.4
.1 EM
LPX CF01 10 0.012
NC NO
.2 NC
Use LPX C10A (EM) or LPX C01 (NC) type only with push-push LB
actuators. Not suitable for push-push actuators.
Normally open contact with early make operation. 1 2 (0.08”) 3 (0.35”) 4 4.8mm
Direct (positive) opening action in accordance with IEC/EN 60947-5-1. (0.04”) 1.8 2.8 (0.16”) (0.19”)
Normally closed contact with late break operation. (0.07”) (0.11”)
Closed contact Open contact
Drillings - Minimum recommended distances
30 Maximum conductor cross section for screw terminals
(1.18”) 1 or 2 2.5mm2 or AWG14 cables.
LPX CF01 LPX CF10 30
(1.18”)
Mechanical and electrical endurance
Operating force: ≤0.5kg / 1.1lb (auxiliary contacts).
40 (1.57”)
Electrical life: 1,000,000 cycles for LPXC10/01/E10/E01,

LPXC01SM/C02SM, LPXCF10/01; 600,000 cycles for
LPXC10A/01D.
(1.57”)
40

Ø22.3 (+0.4, -0)
(0.88”) IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
When using Faston, pitch is 85mm / 3.35” minimum.

7-18 page 7-44 page 7-49
Ø22mm series
Test elements for Order code Description Qty Wt Operational characteristics

steady-light LED elements per – Supply voltage:
pkg • LPX T100 test element:
n° [kg] – 12...30VAC/DC for LPX LEB/LFB/LPB/LPSB...
– 85...140VAC/DC for LPX LEE...
LPX T100 Use with LED elements 10 0.011 – 185...265VAC/DC for LPX LEM...
in AC/DC, types LPX LE… • LPX T101 test element: 85-120VAC
(all), LPX LFB…, LPX LPB • LPX T102 test element: 185-265VAC
and LPSB… – For use with LED elements LPX LPBB/LPBE/LPBM…
LPX T101 Use with LED elements 10 0.011 types, consult Customer Service; see contact details
at 85-140VAC for types on inside front cover
LPX LFE… LPX LPE… and – Electrical life: 100,000 hours
LPX LPSE… – Snap onto LPX AU120 mounting adapter beside the
LPX T... LED element or stacked behind contact elements; also
LPX T102 Use with LED elements 10 0.011
at 185-265VAC for types internally on the LPZ control station cover
LPX LFM…, LPX LPM… and – Any mounting position allowed
e LPX LPSM… – Maximum tightening torque for screw terminals:
1Nm / 0.74lbft
Whenever test circuits include illuminated actuators connected with – Ambient conditions:
paralleled load, use two LPX T100 for each LED element. • Operating temperature: -25…+70°C
Refer to the wiring diagram below or online in the Downloads section at
www.LovatoElectric.com
• Storage temperature: -40…+85°C 7
With DC supply only for LPX T100 type, the LED element works at full – Degree of protection: IEC/EN IP20; UL/CSA Type 1.
voltage and brightness while with AC supply for all LPX T… types, the
LED element works at half voltage so with reduced brightness level. Mounting adapter
See page 7.18.
Type: LPX AU120.
For LPX T100 test element The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator
fixed to the mounting surface.
(AC) ~ (– DC)
1 or 2 2.5mm² or AWG 12 cables.
TEST Wiring Diargram

LPX T00 test element
X5 X1 X5
LPXT100 LPX T101 – LPX T102 test elements

X1 X5
X1

X1
(cULus – File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices, EAC; pending
LPX LE... for CCC and RINA.
LPX LPB... Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
LPX LPSB... IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 N°14.
LPX LFB...
X2
(AC) ~ (+ DC)
For LPX T101 and LPX T102 test elements
(AC) ~
TEST
LPXT101❸
LPXT102❹
LPXT101❸
X1 X5 LPXT102❹
X1 X5
X1 X5
X1 X1 X1 LPXT101❸
LPXT102❹
LPX LPE... LPX LPE... LPX LPE...
LPX LPM... LPX LPM... LPX LPM...
LPX LPSE... LPX LPSE... LPX LPSE...
LPX LPSM... LPX LPSM... LPX LPSM...
LPX LFE... LPX LFE... LPX LFE...
LPX LFM... LPX LFM... LPX LFM...
X2 X2 X2
(AC) ~
Use with LPX LFE.., LPX LPE… or LPX LPSE… type.

Use with LPX LFM…, LPX LPM… or LPX LPSM… type.
Accessories Dimensions Wiring diagrams

page 7-18 page 7-44 page 7-49 7-19
Ø22mm series
LED elements Order code Rated auxi- LED Qty Wt Operational characteristics
steady light liary supply colour per – Auxiliary supply voltage:
voltage pkg • LPX LP… with steady light
[V] n° [kg] 12-30VAC/DC; 85-140VAC; 180-265VAC
• LPX LE… with steady light
Steady light, screw termination. 12-30VAC/DC; 85-140VAC/DC; 180-265VAC/DC
Supplied without mounting adapter. • LPX LF… flashing light
LPX LP B3 12-30V Green 10 0.016 18-30VAC/DC; 85-140VAC; 180-265VAC
LPX LP B4 AC/DC Red 10 0.016 – Maximum consumption for:
• LPX LP… steady light and LPX LF… flashing light:
LPX LP B5 Yellow 10 0.016 17mA (12/18-30VAC/DC); 20mA (85-140VAC);
LPX LP B6 Blue 10 0.016 17mA (185-265VAC)
LPX LP B8 White 10 0.016 • LPX LE… steady light:
LPX LP... 11mA (12-30VAC/DC); 5mA (85-140VAC/DC);
LPX LP E3 85-140VAC Green 10 0.016 3mA (185-265VAC/DC)
LPX LP E4 Red 10 0.016 – Total protection for LPX LP… and LPX LF… types:
LPX LP E5 Yellow 10 0.016 • Against overvoltages
• Against stray currents in wiring
LPX LP E6 Blue 10 0.016 • To reduce flickering phenomenon
LPX LP E8 White 10 0.016 • To withstand vibrations
7 LPX LP M3 185-265VAC Green 10 0.016 – Simple protection for LPX LE… types:
Total protection against overvoltages • Against overvoltages
LPX LP M4 Red 10 0.016 • To withstand vibrations
and stray currents in wiring, to
LPX LP M5 Yellow 10 0.016 – Electrical life: 100,000 hours
reduce of flickering phenomenon
LPX LP M6 Blue 10 0.016 – Snap onto LPX AU120 mounting adapter in the middle
and withstand vibrations. position for each illuminated actuator, also internally on
LPX LP M8 White 10 0.016 the LPZ control station cover
– No other element can be stacked behind LED elements
– Any mounting position allowed
Order code Rated auxi- LED Qty Wt – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm / 0.74lbft
liary supply colour per – Ambient conditions:
voltage pkg • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
[V] n° [kg] (-25...+60°C for LPX LE...)
Steady light, screw termination. – Degree of protection per IEC/EN: IP20.
Supplied without mounting adapter.
LPX LE B3 12-30V Green 10 0.016 Mounting adapter
LPX LE B4 AC/DC Red 10 0.016 See page 7.18.
Type: LPX AU120.
LPX LE B5 Yellow 10 0.016 The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator
LPX LE B6 Blue 10 0.016 fixed to the mounting surface.
LPX LE B8 White 10 0.016
LPX LE E3 85-140V Green 10 0.016 1 o 2 2.5mm2 or AWG12 cables.
LPX LE E4 AC/DC Red 10 0.016
LPX LE E5 Yellow 10 0.016 Wiring diagram
LPX LE... LPX LE E6 Blue 10 0.016
X2 X1
LPX LE E8 White 10 0.016
LPX LE M3 185-265V Green 10 0.016
Simple protection AC/DC Certifications and compliance
LPX LE M4 Red 10 0.016 Certifications obtained: UL listed for USA and Canada
against overvoltages
LPX LE M5 Yellow 10 0.016 (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices; EAC, CCC.
and to withstand
LPX LE M6 Blue 10 0.016 Pending at time of catalogue printing: RINA.
vibrations. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
LPX LE M8 White 10 0.016 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
LED elements Order code Rated auxi- LED Qty Wt

flashing light liary supply colour per
voltage pkg
[V] n° [kg]
Flashing light, screw termination.
LPX LF B3 18-30V Green 10 0.016
LPX LF B4 AC/DC Red 10 0.016
LPX LF B5 Yellow 10 0.016
LPX LF B6 Blue 10 0.016
LPX LF... LPX LF B8 White 10 0.016
LPX LF E3 85-140VAC Green 10 0.016
LPX LF E4 Red 10 0.016
LPX LF E5 Yellow 10 0.016
LPX LF E6 Blue 10 0.016
LPX LF E8 White 10 0.016
LPX LF M3 185-265VAC Green 10 0.016
Total protection against overvoltages
LPX LF M4 Red 10 0.016
and stray currents in wiring, to
LPX LF M5 Yellow 10 0.016
reduce of flickering phenomenon
and withstand vibrations. LPX LF M6 Blue 10 0.016
LPX LF M8 White 10 0.016

7-20 page 7-18 page 7-44 page 7-49
Ø22mm series
Contact elements with Order code Function Q.ty Wt Operational characteristics

spring-clamp terminals per – Any mounting position allowed
pkg – Elements snap onto LPX AU120 adapter, also
n° [kg] internally on LPZ control station cover with maximum
of 3 LPX CS… contact or 2 LPX CS… contact and
Spring-clamp termination. 1 LPX LPS… LED elements (in middle position) per
Without mounting adapter. actuator
LPX CS10 .3 10 0.010 – Suitable for applications with vibration and/or impact
NO work conditions; cable retaining force guaranteed over
.4
.1
time in these conditions
LPX CS01 10 0.010 – Wiring also possible after installation with stacked
NC
LPX CS01 LPX CS10 .2 contacts
Not suitable for push-push actuators. – Ambient conditions:
Direct (positive) opening action in accordance with IEC/EN 60947-5-1. • Operating temperature: -25…+70°C
• Storage temperature: -40…+85°C
– Degree of protection IEC/EN: IP20.
LED elements Order code Rated auxi- LED Q.ty Wt
steady light with liary supply colour per Mounting adapter
voltage pkg See page 7-18.
spring-clamp terminals Type: LPX AU120.
[V] n° [kg]
The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator 7
Steady light, with screw-clamp termination. fixed to the mounting surface.
Without mounting adapter.
LPX LPS B3 12-30VAC/DC Green 10 0.015
CONTACT ELEMENTS
LPX LPS B4 Red 10 0.015 Wiping action and dual scaping-oscillating effect
LPX LPS B5 Yellow 10 0.015 IEC rated insulation voltage: 690V
LPX LPS B6 Blue 10 0.015 IEC rated thermal current Ith: 10A
LPX LPS...
Conductivity: 1mA 5V
LPX LPS B8 White 10 0.015 UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation: A600 Q600
LPX LPS E3 85-140VAC Green 10 0,015 IEC/EN operational characteristics in AC15 category:
LPX LPS E4 Red 10 0.015 [V] 12 24 48 120 240 400 480 500 600
LPX LPS E5 Yellow 10 0.015 [A] 6 6 6 6 3 1.9 1.5 1.4 1.2
LPX LPS E6 Blue 10 0.015 IEC/EN operational characteristics in DC13 category:
LPX LPS E8 White 10 0.015 [V] 12 24 48 125 250 440 500 600
Total protection against LPX LPS M3 185-265VAC Green 10 0.015 [A] 3 3 1.5 0.55 0.27 0.15 0.13 0.1
overvoltages and stray currents LPX LPS M4 Red 10 0.015 Short circuit protection fuse: max calibre 10A gG/SC
in wiring, to reduce flickering LPX LPS M5 Yellow 10 0.015 Contact resistance: ≤20mΩ
phenomenon and withstand LPX LPS M6 Blue 10 0.015 Terminals: Spring clamps.
vibrations. LPX LPS M8 White 10 0.015 Stroke of contact elements
NO
Drillings - Minimum recommended distances NC
30 1 1.8 3 4 4.8mm
(1.18”)
30
(0.03”) (0.07”) (0.11”) (0.16”) (0.19”)
(1.18”)
Closed contact Open contact
Mechanical and electrical endurance of contact
55 (2.16”)
elements
55 (2.16”)
Opening force: ≤0.5kg / 1.1lb

Electrical life: 1.000.000 cycles for LPX CS10/CS01.
LED ELEMENTS
– Supply voltage:
Ø22.3 (+0.4, -0)
Ø0.88” (+0.01, -0) 12-30VAC/DC; 85-140VAC; 185-265VAC
– Maximum consumption: 17mA (12-30VAC/DC); 20mA
(85-140VAC); 17mA (185-265VAC)
Push-in wiring technology for rigid cables or with ferrules only - no screwdriver needed – Total protection:
Cable retaining force guaranteed over time even in presence of vibrations and/or impacts • Against overvoltages
Push-in • Against stray currents in wiring
• To withstand vibrations
technology • To reduce flickering phenomenon
– Electrical life: 100,000 hours.
Wiring diagram for LED elements
X2 X1

1 or 2 2.5mm² or AWG14 cables.
Wiring with flat-blade screwdriver Cable removal For 2.5mm² section, use rounded cable terminal with
(for flexible bare cable without terminal) (always using flat-blade screwdriver) metal end at least 10mm / 0.39in long.

(cULus – File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices; EAC,CCC;
pending for RINA.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n°14.

page 7-18 page 7-44 pag. 7-49 7-21
Ø22mm series
Contact elements, base Order code Function Q.ty Wt Operational characteristics

mount on LPZ control per – Any mounting position allowed
pkg – Snap mount into fixing structures of LPZ control
stations n° [kg] station base
– Maximum of 3 LPX CB… contact or 2 LPX CB…
Screw termination. contact and 1 LPX LPB… LED elements (in middle
Direct snap-in mounting on LPZ control station base. pos. 3) for each actuator of LPZ control stations
LPX CB10 .3 10 0.012 – Wiring done directly in the base, so there is none with
NO or directly in the cover
.4
.1
– Tightening torque Tmax: 1Nm/9lbin
LPX CB01 10 0.012 – Ambient conditions:
NC
.2 • Operating temperature: -25…+70°C
LPX CB... • Storage temperature: -40…+85°C
Not suitable for push-push actuators.
Direct opening operation in accordance with IEC/EN 60947-5-1. – Degree of protection IEC/EN IP20.
LED elements, steady light Order code Rated auxi- LED Q.ty Wt General characteristics
base mount on LPZ control liary supply colour per CONTACT ELEMENTS
voltage pkg Wiping action and dual scaping-oscillating effect
stations [V] n° [kg] IEC rated insulation voltage: 690V
7 Screw termination.
IEC rated thermal current Ith: 10A
Conductivity: 1mA 5V
Steady light. UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation: A600 Q600
Direct snap-on mounting on LPZ… control station base.
IEC/EN operational characteristics in AC15 category:
LPX LPB B3 12-30VAC/DC Green 10 0.016
[V] 12 24 48 120 240 400 480 500 600
LPX LPB B4 Red 10 0.016
[A] 6 6 6 6 3 1.9 1.5 1.4 1.2
LPX LPB B5 Yellow 10 0.016
IEC/EN operational characteristics in DC13 category:
LPX LPB...
LPX LPB B6 Blue 10 0.016
[V] 12 24 48 125 250 440 500 600
LPX LPB B8 White 10 0.016
[A] 3 3 1.5 0.55 0.27 0.15 0.13 0.1
LPX LPB E3 85-140VAC Green 10 0.016
Short circuit protection fuse: max calibre 10A gG/SC
LPX LPB E4 Red 10 0.016 Contact resistance: ≤20mΩ
LPX LPB E5 Yellow 10 0.016 Terminals: Clamp screw and washer.
LPX LPB E6 Blue 10 0.016
LPX LPB E8 White 10 0.016 Stroke of contact elements
LPX LPB M3 185-265VAC Green 10 0.016 NO
Total protection against NC
overvoltages and stray currents in LPX LPB M4 Red 10 0.016
1 1.8 3 4 4.8mm
wiring, to reduce flickering LPX LPB M5 Yellow 10 0.016 (0.03”) (0.07”) (0.11”) (0.16”) (0.19”)
phenomenon and withstand LPX LPB M6 Blue 10 0.016
vibrations. LPX LPB M8 White 10 0.016 Closed contact Open contact
Mechanical and electrical endurance of contact

elements
Opening force: ≤0.5kg / 1.1lb
Electrical life: 1,000,000 cycles for LPX CB10/CB01.
LED ELEMENTS
– Supply voltage:
12-30VAC/DC; 85-140VAC; 185-265VAC
– Maximum consumption: 17mA (12-30VAC/DC);
20mA (85-140VAC); 17mA (185-265VAC)
Mounting position on the LPZ control station base – Total protection:
• Against overvoltages
LPX LPB... • Against stray currents in wiring
Fixing structures always mounted in
LPX CB... • To reduce flickering phenomenon
3 pieces middle pos.3
max/actuator • To withstand vibrations
– Electrical life: 100,000 hours.
Wiring diagram for LED elements
X2 X1

1 or 2 2.5mm² or AWG14 cables.

1 A 3 2 1B 3 2 (cULus – File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices.; EAC, CCC;
pending: RINA.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n°14.
Wiring diagrams
7-22 page 7-49
Ø22mm series
Without actuators Order code Description Cover Q.ty Wt General characteristics

colour per CONTROL STATIONS WITHOUT ACTUATOR
pkg – 1 to 6 ways
n° [kg] – Compact dimensions
LPZ P1 A5 For 1 actuator Yellow 1 0.107 – Easy wiring for base-mount contact and LED
elements; possible use of screw and spring-clamp
LPZ P1 A8 For 1 actuator Grey 1 0.107 terminal contact or LED elements on the inside
LPZ P2 A8 For 2 actuators Grey 1 0.152 surface of the cover using LPX AU120 mounting
LPZ P3 A8 For 3 actuators Grey 1 0.187 adapter
– Numerous cable entries.
LPZ P4 A8 For 4 actuators Grey 1 0.200
LPZ P1 A5 LPZ P5 A8 For 5 actuators Grey 1 0.240 CONTROL STATIONS WITH ACTUATOR
LPZ P6 A8 For 6 actuators Grey 1 0.290 Standard supplied with actuator, label holder and STOP
legend label excluding types with yellow cover, and one
base-mount NC contact.
Control station base
Fixing structures for contact and/or LED elements – Cable entry:
For each actuator: Maximum of 3 contacts or 2 contacts and 1 LED
• LPZ P1… knockouts:
– M16/PG11 (1 at rear and 1 on left side)
– M20/M25/PG13.5/M20 (1 each on top and
7
bottom)
• LPZ P2 A8 knockouts:
– M16/PG11 (2 at rear)
– M20/PG13.5 (1 on each side)
bottom)
• LPZ P3/P4/P5/P6 A8 knockouts:
– M16/PG11 (2 at rear)
LPZ P3 A8 – M20/PG13.5 (2 on each side)
1 A 3 2 1B 3 2 bottom)
– Any mounting position allowed
– Tightening torque of cover screws Tmax: 1.8Nm/16lbin
Easy identification reference • Operating temperature: -25…+70°C
Control station cover For actuator and corresponding contact • Storage temperature: -40…+85°C
and/or LED elements
(inside view) – Degree of protection:
• Per UL/CSA: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4 4X, 12, 12K.
Materials
Polycarbonate.
Anti-loosening action
Anti-rotation indents to extend Certifications and compliance
fixing ring gripping over time
Certifications obtained: EAC,CCC; UL Listed for USA and
Canada (cULus – File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices;
pending at time of catalogue printing: cULus for
LPZP6A8 and RINA for all types.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508A for types without actuators /
UL508 for types complete with actuator, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
With one actuator Order code Control Actuator Q.ty Wt

station description per
description pkg
n° [kg]
LPZ P1 B8 01 Grey, Mushroom-head 1 0.150
1 way button
LPZ P1 A8 LPC B6744 with
STOP legend
LPZ P1 B8 02 Grey, Mushroom-head 1 0.135
1 way button
LPZ P1 A8 LPC B6344 with
LPZ P1 B8 02 STOP legend
LPZ P1 B5 02 Yellow, Emergency stop 1 0.135
1 way button
LPZ P1 A5 LPC B6344
LPZ P1 B5 03 Yellow, Emergency stop 1 0.150
1 way button
LPZ P1 A5 LPC B6644
Version with red emergency stop, turn to release and yellow cover
compliant with ISO 13840.
LPZ P1 B5 03
7-23
Ø22mm series
COMBINATIONS FOR PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES

SPRING-RETURN BUTTONS
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX C...
LPX CF... LPX AU120
LPX CS... LPX AU120 LPX C...
LPX C... LPX CF...
LPC B10... LPC B20... LPC B30... LPX CF... LPX CS...
LPC B11... LPC B21... LPX CS... LPX C... LPX AU...
LPX C... LPX AU... LPX CF...
LPX CF... LPX CS...
LPX CS... LPX E...
LPX E...
PUSH-PUSH BUTTONS
LPX AU120
LPX C10A
LPX C01
LPC Q10... LPC Q20... LPX AU...
7 LPX C10A
LPX C01
MUSHROOM-HEAD SPRING-RETURN BUTTONS

LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX C... LPX AU...
LPC B614... LPC B616... LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
MUSHROOM-HEAD LATCH BUTTONS LPX C02SM

LPX C01SM
LPX C01SM LPX C02SM

LPX AU120
LPX AU120
LPX AU120
LPX C... LPX C...
LPX CF... LPX CF...
LPC B6634 LPC B634... LPC B664... LPC B674... LPC B684... LPX CS... LPX C... LPX C...
LPX CF... LPX CF...
LPX CS... LPX E...
LPX E... LPX AU... LPX AU... LPX AU...
DOUBLE-TOUCH BUTTONS
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS... LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPC B71... LPC B72... LPX CS...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
TRIPLE-TOUCH BUTTONS
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS... LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS... LPX C...
LPC B73...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
SELECTOR SWITCHES
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS... LPX AU120 LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX C... LPX AU... LPX C... LPX AU...
LPX CF... LPX CF...
LPC S1... - LPC S2... LPC S3... LPX CS... LPX CS...
LPX E... LPX E...
MECHANICAL SPRING-RETURN RESET BUTTONS
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS... LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX C... LPX AU...
LPX CF...
LPC R1... LPC R2... LPX CS...
LPX E...
7-24
Ø22mm series
COMBINATIONS FOR ILLUMINATED PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES

LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T... LPX L...
LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPC BL10... LPX CF...
LPC BL20...
LPX CS...
LPX T... LPX C...
LPX CF... LPX AU...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
LPX T...
PUSH-PUSH BUTTONS
LPX L...
LPX C10A
LPX C01
LPX T...
LPX AU120
LPC QL10... LPX C10A

7
LPC QL20... LPX AU...
LPX C01
LPX E01
LPX T...
MUSHROOM-HEAD SPRING-RETURN BUTTON

LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T... LPX L...
LPX C... LPX AU120

LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T... LPX C...
LPC BL614... LPX CF... LPX AU...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
LPX T...
MUSHROOM-HEAD LATCH BUTTON
LPX L...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T... LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPC BL664... LPX CF... LPX AU...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
LPX T...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T... LPX L...
LPX C... LPX AU120

LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T... LPX C...
LPC BL71... LPC BL72...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
LPX T...
2 AND 3 POSITION SELECTOR SWITCHES

LPX L...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T... LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF... LPX AU...
LPX CS...
LPC SL12... LPC SL13...
LPX E...
LPX T...
CONTROL STATIONS Example of 2 way control station equipped with selector switch, label holder and label along with pilot light
LPX LPB...
LPX CB... always fitted in middle pos. n°3
1 0 2
1 A 3 2 1B 3 2
7-25
Pushbutton actuators, Order code Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

Flush (without mounting adapter). Spring return. • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
8 LM2T B102 Black 10 0.033 – Degree of protection:
8 LM2T B103 Green 10 0.033 • Per IEC/EN: IP65
8 LM2T B104 Red 10 0.033
8 LM2T B10... 8 LM2T B105 Yellow 10 0.033 Materials
8 LM2T B106 Blue 10 0.033 An aluminium and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal
part whereas plastic parts are made of polyamide and
8 LM2T B108 White 10 0.033 polycarbonate.
Extended (without mounting adapter). Spring return.
8 LM2T B202 Black 10 0.035 Mechanical endurance
Operating force: 0.8kg / 1.7lb (actuator).
8 LM2T B203 Green 10 0.035 Mechanical life:
8 LM2T B204 Red 10 0.035 – Spring-return actuators: 1,000,000 cycles
8 LM2T B205 Yellow 10 0.035 – Push-push actuators: 500,000 cycles.
8 LM2T B20...
7 8 LM2T B206 Blue 10 0.035 Mounting adapter
8 LM2T B208 White 10 0.035 See page 7-39.
Shrouded (without mounting adapter). Spring return. Type: LM2T AU120.
The adapter is fixed to the mounting surface by means of
8 LM2T B302 Black 10 0.035 incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm /0.59lbft ).
8 LM2T B303 Green 10 0.035 Actuators latch onto the mounting adapter by simple
8 LM2T B304 Red 10 0.035 rotation through a Ø22mm/0.89” drilling also on the
cover of LPZ control stations.
8 LM2T B30... 8 LM2T B305 Yellow 10 0.035
8 LM2T B306 Blue 10 0.035 Contact elements for spring-return actuators
8 LM2T B308 White 10 0.035 See page 39.
Type: LM2T C10 (1NO)
LM2T CF10 (1NO Faston)
Push-push button Order code Colour Qty Wt LM2T C10A (1EM)
per pkg LM2T C01 (1NC)
actuators LM2T CF01 (1NC Faston)
n° [kg] LM2T C01D (1LB)
Flush (without mounting adapter). Push on-push off. Contact elements snap onto the mounting adapter.
8 LM2T Q102 Black 10 0.033 Up to 6 contacts can be fitted: 2 each on the left, middle
8 LM2T Q103 Green 10 0.033 Up to 2 contacts per actuator in addition to the LED
8 LM2T Q104 Red 10 0.033 element in the middle position can be internally fitted on
8 LM2T Q10... 8 LM2T Q105 Yellow 10 0.033 the cover surface of LPZ control stations.
To use contact elements in the middle position, install the
8 LM2T Q106 Blue 10 0.033 action plug LM2T A140 on the actuator; see page 7-36.
8 LM2T Q108 White 10 0.033
Extended (without mounting adapter). Contact elements for push-push button actuators
Push on-push off. See page 7-39.
Type: LM2T C10A (1EM)
8 LM2T Q202 Black 10 0.035 LM2T C01 (1NC)
8 LM2T Q20... 8 LM2T Q203 Green 10 0.035 Contact elements snap onto the mounting adapter.
8 LM2T Q204 Red 10 0.035 Up to 2 contacts can be fitted: 1 each on the right and left.
Up to 2 contacts per actuator in addition to the LED
8 LM2T Q205 Yellow 10 0.035 element in the middle position can be internally fitted on
8 LM2T Q206 Blue 10 0.035 the cover surface of LPZ control stations.
8 LM2T Q208 White 10 0.035
Use contact elements EM (8 LM2T C10A) and NC (8LM2T C01) only.
Certifications obtained: RINA, LROS, EAC, CCC,
Contact elements NO (8LM2T C10) and LB (8LM2T C01D) cannot be
fitted on these actuators. For the number of contact elements, refer to UL Listed, for USA and Canada (File E93601), as
indications in the right-hand column. Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

Mechanical reset button, Order code Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

complete unit, spring return per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
Flush (5.2mm/0.2” stroke). Adjustable length 0-140mm/5.5”. • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
Spring return (complete with shaft and mounting adapter). – Degree of protection:
8 LM2T R1002 Black 10 0.065 • Per IEC/EN: IP65
8 LM2T R1003 Green 10 0.065 • Per UL/CSA: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
8 LM2T R1004 Red 10 0.065 Materials
8 LM2T R1006 Blue 10 0.065 An aluminium and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal
8 LM2T R1196 Blue (RESET) 10 0.065 part whereas plastic parts are made of polyamide and
polycarbonate.
Extended (5.2mm/0.2” stroke). Adjustable length 0-140mm/
Spring return (complete with shaft and mounting adapter). Mechanical endurance
8 LM2T R1196 8 LM2T R2004 Red 10 0.067 Operating force: 0.8kg / 1.7lb (actuator)
With “RESET”caption on actuator.
Mechanical life: 1,000,000 cycles.
No contact elements can be fitted. Not suitable for use with LPZ control
stations. Mounting adapter
See page 7-39.
Type: LM2T AU120. 7
Pushbutton actuators, Order code Symbol Colour Qty Wt The adapter is fixed to the mounting surface by means of
per pkg incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft).
spring return, with symbol Actuators latch onto the mounting adapter by simple
n° [kg] rotation.
Flush (without mounting adapter). Spring return.
8 LM2T B1102 O Black 10 0.033 Contact elements for spring-return actuators
See page 7-39.
8 LM2T B1104 Red 10 0.033 Type: LM2T C10 (1NO)
8 LM2T B1113 I Green 10 0.033 LM2T CF10 (1NO Faston)
8 LM2T B1118 White 10 0.033 LM2T C10A (1EM)
LM2T C01 (1NC)
8 LM2T B1123 II Green 10 0.033 LM2T CF01 (1NC Faston)
8 LM2T B11... 8 LM2T B1128 White 10 0.033 LM2T C01D (1LB)
8 LM2T B1132 STOP Black 10 0.033 Contact elements snap onto the mounting adapter.
8 LM2T B1134 Red 10 0.033 and right, one behind the other.
8 LM2T B1142 Black 10 0.033 Up to 3 contacts per actuator can be internally fitted on
the cover surface of LPZ control stations.
8 LM2T B1148 White 10 0.033
To use contact elements in the middle position, install the
8 LM2T B1152 Black 10 0.033 action plug LM2T A140 on the actuator; see page 7-36.

8 LM2T B1158 White 10 0.033
8 LM2T B1163 START Green 10 0.033 Certifications and compliance
8 LM2T B1168 White 10 0.033 UL Listed, for USA and Canada (File E93601), as
8 LM2T B21...
8 LM2T B1176 R Blue 10 0.033 Auxiliary Devices.
8 LM2T B1178 White 10 0.033 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
8 LM2T B1196 RESET Blue 10 0.033
8 LM2T B1502 Black 10 0.033
8 LM2T B1512 Black 10 0.033
8 LM2T B2102 O Black 10 0.035
8 LM2T B2104 Red 10 0.035
8 LM2T B2132 STOP Black 10 0.035
8 LM2T B2134 Red 10 0.035
Arrow symbol can be used to indicate right or left.
Arrow symbol can be used to indicate up or down.

Mushroom head Order code Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

pushbutton actuators per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
Ø40mm/1.6in (without mounting adapter). – Degree of protection:
8 LM2T B6142 Black 10 0.037 • Per IEC/EN: IP65 for push-push and LM2T B654
8 LM2T B6143 Green 10 0.037 actuators; IP66 for others.
• Per UL/CSA: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K except for
8 LM2T B614... 8 LM2T B6144 Red 10 0.037 8 LM2T B616 which is Type 1, 2, 3R, 12, 12K.
8 LM2T B6145 Yellow 10 0.037 Materials
8 LM2T B6146 Blue 10 0.037 An aluminium and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal
SPRING RETURN. part whereas plastic parts are made of polyamide and
Ø60mm/2.4in (without mounting adapter). polycarbonate.
8 LM2T B6162 Black 10 0.043 Mechanical endurance
8 LM2T B6163 Green 10 0.043 Mechanical life:
8 LM2T B6164 Red 10 0.043 – Mushroom head spring return buttons: 1,000,000
8 LM2T B6165 Yellow 10 0.043 cycles
7 8 LM2T B616... 8 LM2T B6166 Blue 10 0.043
– Mushroom head latch buttons: 300,000 cycles.
Mounting adapter
LATCH, PULL TO RELEASE. See page 7-39.
Ø40mm/1.6in (without mounting adapter). Type: LM2T AU120.
For normal stopping. The adapter is fixed to the mounting surface by means of
8 LM2T B6242 Black 10 0.105 incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft).
8 LM2T B6244 Red 10 0.105 Actuators latch onto the mounting adapter by simple
rotation through a Ø22mm/0.89” drilling also on the
LATCH, TURN TO RELEASE. cover of LPZ control stations.
8 LM2T B624... Ø40mm/1.6in (without mounting adapter).
For normal stopping. Contact elements
8 LM2T B6342 Black 10 0.054 See page 7-39.
8 LM2T B6344 Red 10 0.054 Type: LM2T C10 (1NO)
LATCH, TURN TO RELEASE. LM2T C10A (1EM)
Ø40mm/1.6in (without mounting adapter). LM2T C01 (1NC)
For emergency stopping, ISO 13850 compliant. LM2T CF01 (1NC Faston)
8 LM2T B634... 8 LM2T B6644 Red 10 0.087 LM2T C01D (1LB)
LATCH, TURN KEY TO RELEASE.
Ø40mm/1.6in (without mounting adapter). FOR SPRING-RETURN MUSHROOM-HEAD BUTTONS
For normal stopping. Up to 6 contacts can be fitted: 2 each on the left, middle
8 LM2T B6542 Black 10 0.091 Up to 3 contacts per actuator can be internally fitted the
8 LM2T B6542G 1 0.091 cover surface of LPZ control stations.
8 LM2T B6544 Red 10 0.091 To use contact elements in the middle position, install on
8 LM2T B6644 the action plug LM2T A140 on the actuator; see page 7-36.
8 LM2T B6544G 1 0.091
Versions with different key codes. FOR LATCH MUSHROOM-HEAD BUTTONS
Complete with the numeric code of the key. The following versions are For LM2T B624… and LM2T B6644 types, up to 4
available: 501, 502, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509, 510. contacts can be fitted: 2 each on the left and right, one
Example of complete code: 8 LM2T B6542G505.
behind the other.
Up to 2 contacts per actuator can be internally fitted on
the cover surface of LPZ control stations, 1 each on the
left and right.
8 LM2T B654... For all others, up to 6 contacts can be fitted: 2 each on
the left, middle and right, one behind the other.
the cover surface of LPZ control stations.

UL Listed, for USA and Canada (File E93601), as
Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

7-28 pages 7-39 to 41 pages 7-36 to 38 pages 7-47
Double-touch actuators, Order code Colour Symbols Qty Wt Operational characteristics

Two flush push-buttons (without mounting adapter). • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
Both spring return. – Degree of protection:
8 LM2T B7112 Black/Red none 5 0.044 • Per IEC/EN: IP40.
8 LM2T B7113 Green/Red none 5 0.044 • Per UL/CSA: Type 1.
8 LM2T B7114 White/Black none 5 0:044 Materials
8 LM2T B7122 Black/Red I-O 5 0.044 An aluminium and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal
8 LM2T B7123 Green/Red I-O 5 0.044 part whereas plastic parts are made of polyamide and
polycarbonate.
8 LM2T B7124 White/Black I-O 5 0.044
8 LM2T B71... 8 LM2T B7133 Green/Red Start/Stop 5 0.044 Mechanical endurance
One extended and one flush push-buttons (without Operating force: 0.8kg / 1.7lb (actuator)
mounting adapter). Both spring return. Mechanical life: 1,000,000 cycles.
8 LM2T B7212 Black/Red none 5 0.044 Mounting adapter
8 LM2T B7213 Green/Red none 5 0.044 See page 7-39.
8 LM2T B7214 White/Black none 5 0.044 Type: LM2T AU120. 7
8 LM2T B7222 Black/Red I-O 5 0.044 incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft).
8 LM2T B7223 Green/Red I-O 5 0.044 Actuators latch onto the mounting adapter by simple
8 LM2T B7224 White/Black I-O 5 0.044 rotation through a Ø22mm/0.89” drilling also on the
8 LM2T B72... cover of LPZ control stations.
8 LM2T B7233 Green/Red Start/Stop 5 0.044
Contact elements
Triple-touch actuators, Order code Symbols Qty Wt See page 7-39.
per pkg Type: LM2T C10 (1NO)
spring return LM2T CF10 (1NO Faston)
n° [kg] LM2T C10A (EM)
Two external flush and one middle extended buttons LM2T C01 (1NC)
(without mounting adapter). All spring return. LM2T CF01 (1NC Faston)
8 LM2T B7345 5 0.044 LM2T C01D (LB)
Contact elements snap onto the mounting adapter.
STOP FOR DOUBLE-TOUCH BUTTONS

Up to 4 contacts can be fitted: 2 each on the left and
right, one behind the other.
8 LM2T B73... 8 LM2T B7355 5 0.044 the cover surface of LPZ control stations, 1 on the left
and right.
STOP FOR TRIPLE-TOUCH BUTTONS
8 LM2T B7365 5 0.044 the cover surface of LPZ control stations.
STOP Certifications and compliance

UL Listed, for USA and Canada (File E93601), as
Auxiliary Devices.
8 LM2T B7375 5 0.044 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
STOP

Selector switch actuators Order code Type of Qty Wt Operational characteristics

knob position per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
2 position (without mounting adapter). • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
8 LM2T S120 10 0.049 – Degree of protection:
8 LM2T S121 10 0.049 • Per IEC/EN: IP65
8 LM2T S130 10 0.049 Materials
8 LM2T S1... An aluminium and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal
8 LM2T S131 10 0.049 part whereas plastic parts are made of polyamide and
8 LM2T S132 10 0.049 polycarbonate.
8 LM2T S133 10 0.049
Mechanical life: 300,000 cycles.
Selector switch actuators Order code Type of Qty Wt Mounting adapter
lever position per pkg See page 7-39.
n° [kg] Type: LM2T AU120.
7 2 position (without mounting adapter).
incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm / 0.59in).
8 LM2T S220 10 0.050 Actuators latch onto the mounting adapter by simple
8 LM2T S221 10 0.050 rotation through a Ø22mm/0.89” drilling also on the
cover of LPZ control stations.
8 LM2T S230 10 0.050 Contact elements
See page 7-39.
8 LM2T S231 10 0.050 Type: LM2T C10 (1NO)
8 LM2T S2...
8 LM2T S232 10 0.050 LM2T CF10 (1NO Faston)
8 LM2T S233 10 0.050 LM2T C10A (1EM)
LM2T C01 (1NC)
LM2T CF01 (1NC Faston)
LM2T C01D (1LB)
Selector switch actuators Order code Type of Qty Wt Contact elements snap onto the mounting adapter.
key position per pkg Up to 4 contacts can be fitted: 2 each on the left and
n° [kg] right, one behind the other. For more, consult Customer
2 position (without mounting adapter). Service for advice; see contact details on inide front
cover.
8 LM2T S320 10 0.079 Up to 2 contacts per actuator can be internally fitted on
8 LM2T S320G 1 0.079 the cover surface of LPZ control stations, 1 on the left
8 LM2T S321 10 0.079 and right.
8 LM2T S321G 1 0.079 Type of positions
8 LM2T S340 10 0.079 Maintained position.
8 LM2T S3... 8 LM2T S340G 1 0.079 Spring return position.
3 position (without mounting adapter). • Key extraction position.
8 LM2T S330 10 0.080
Rotation angles
8 LM2T S330G 1 0.080 2 position 3 position
8 LM2T S331 10 0.080 45° 45°
90°
8 LM2T S331G 1 0.080
8 LM2T S332 10 0.080
8 LM2T S332G 1 0.080 Special versions
Versions with coloured keys are available upon request.
8 LM2T S333 10 0.080 Consult our Customer Service; see contact details on inside
8 LM2T S333G 1 0.080 front cover.
8 LM2T S350 10 0.080
8 LM2T S350G 1 0.080 Certifications obtained: RINA, LROS, EAC, CCC,
8 LM2T S360 10 0.080 UL Listed for USA and Canada )(cULus - File E93601), as
8 LM2T S360G 1 0.080 Auxiliary Devices.
8 LM2T S370 10 0.080 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
8 LM2T S370G 1 0.080
Versions with different key codes.
8 LM2T S380 10 0.080 Complete with the numeric code of the key. The following versions are
8 LM2T S380G 1 0.080 available: 501, 502, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509, 510.
Example of complete code: 8 LM2T S320G505.
8 LM2T S390 10 0.080 Available only on specific request.
8 LM2T S390G 1 0.080
Contact activation for 2-position selector switch Contact activation of 3-position selector switch
2 2
1 1
Contacts Contacts
1 2 1 2
A — — A —
B B — —
C —

7-30 pages 7-39 to 41 pages 7-36 to 38 pages 7-48
Illuminated button Order code Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

actuators, spring return per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
Flush with side visibility (without mounting adapter). • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
Spring return. – Degree of protection:
8 LM2T BL103 Green 10 0.033 • Per IEC/EN: IP65
8 LM2T BL104 Red 10 0.033 • Per UL/CSA: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
8 LM2T BL105 Yellow 10 0.033 Materials
8 LM2T BL10...
8 LM2T BL106 Blue 10 0.033 An aluminium and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal
8 LM2T BL107 Transparent 10 0.033 part whereas plastic parts are made of polyamide and
polycarbonate.
8 LM2T BL203 Green 10 0.035 Mechanical endurance
8 LM2T BL204 Red 10 0.035 Operating force: 0.8kg / 1.7lb (actuator).
Mechanical life:
8 LM2T BL205 Yellow 10 0.035 – Spring return buttons: 1,000,000 cycles
8 LM2T BL20... 8 LM2T BL206 Blue 10 0.035 – Push-push buttons: 500,000 cycles.
8 LM2T BL207 Transparent 10 0.035
Mounting adapter 7
See page 7-39.
Type: LM2T AU120.
Push-push button Order code Colour Qty Wt The adapter is fixed to the mounting surface by means of
actuators per pkg incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft).
n° [kg] Actuators latch onto the mounting adapter by simple
Flush with side visibility (without mounting adapter). rotation through a Ø22mm/0.89” drilling also on the
Push on-push off. cover of LPZ control stations.
8 LM2T QL103 Green 10 0.033 Contact elements for illuminated spring-return buttons
8 LM2T QL104 Red 10 0.033 See page 39.
8 LM2T QL105 Yellow 10 0.033 Type: LM2T C10 (1NO)
8 LM2T QL106 Blue 10 0.033 LM2T C10A (EM)
8 LM2T QL10...
8 LM2T QL107 Transparent 10 0.033 LM2T C01 (1NC)
Extended (without mounting adapter). LM2T CF01 (1NC Faston)
Push on-push off. LM2T C01D (LB)
8 LM2T QL203 Green 10 0.035 Up to 4 contacts can be fitted, 2 each on the left and right
8 LM2T QL204 Red 10 0.035 one behind the other, when one of the lamp-holders type
8 LM2T QL205 Yellow 10 0.035 LM2T DL400, LM2T VL230, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230,
8 LM2T QL20... LM2T L… or LM2T M… is used in the middle position.
8 LM2T QL206 Blue 10 0.035 Instead when using lamp-holder LM2T XL, LM2T YL,
8 LM2T QL207 Transparent 10 0.035 LM2TFL or LM2T GL…, up to 2 contacts only can be
Use contact elements EM (8LM2T C10A early make) and NC fitted one behind the other.
(8LM2T C01) only. On the cover of LPZ control stations, up to 2 contacts per
Contact elements NO (8LM2T C10) and LB (8LM2T C01D late break) actuator can be internally fitted, 1 each on the right
cannot be used with these actuators. For the number of contact and/or left, when one of the lamp-holders type
elements, refer to the right-hand column. LM2T DL400, LM2T VL230, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230,
LM2T L… or LM2T M… is used in the middle position.
Contact elements for illuminated push-push buttons

See page 7-39.
Type: LM2T C10A (EM)
LM2T C01 (1NC)
Up to 2 contact elements can be fitted 1 each on the left
and right along with one of the lamp-holders type
LM2T DL400, LM2T VL230, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230,
LM2T L… or LM2T M… in the middle position; also
internally on LPZ control station covers for each actuator.
Lamp-holder elements
See page 7-40 and 41.
Lamps
Maximum recommended power: 1.2W.
See page 7-36.

UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601), as
Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

Illuminated mushroom Order code Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

head button actuators per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
Ø40mm (without mounting adapter). – Degree of protection:
8 LM2T BL6143 Green 10 0.043 • Per IEC/EN: IP65 for mushroom-head actuators;
8 LM2T BL6144 Red 10 0.043 IP40 for double-touch actuators.
• Per UL/CSA: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K except for
8 LM2T BL6145 Yellow 10 0.043 8 LM2T BL7... which are Type 1.
8 LM2T BL614... 8 LM2T BL6146 Blue 10 0.043 Materials
8 LM2T BL6148 White 10 0.043 An aluminium and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal
LATCH, PULL TO RELEASE. part whereas plastic parts are made of polyamide and
Ø40mm (without mounting adapter). polycarbonate.
8 LM2T BL6243 Green 10 0.105 Mechanical endurance
8 LM2T BL6244 Red 10 0.105 Mechanical life: 1,000,000 cycles for spring return types
8 LM2T BL6245 Yellow 10 0.105 while for latch, 300,000 cycles only.
8 LM2T BL624... 8 LM2T BL6246 Blue 10 0.105 Mounting adapter
7 8 LM2T BL6248 White 10 0.105 See page 7-39.
Type: LM2T AU120.
incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft).
Double touch actuators, Order code Colour Symbol Qty Wt Actuators latch onto the mounting adapter by simple
spring return, white per pkg rotation through a Ø22mm/0.89” drilling also on the cover
n° [kg] of LPZ control stations.
indicator Contact elements
Two flush pushbuttons (without mounting adapter).
Both spring return. See page 7-39.
Type: LM2T C10 (1NO)
8 LM2T BL7112 Black/Red none 5 0.044 LM2T CF10 (1NO Faston)
8 LM2T BL7113 Green/Red none 5 0.044 LM2T C10A (1EM)
8 LM2T BL7114 White/Black none 5 0.044 LM2T C01 (1NC)
LM2T CF01 (1NC Faston)
8 LM2T BL7122 Black/Red I-O 5 0.044 LM2T C01D (1LB)
8 LM2T BL7123 Green/Red I-O 5 0.044 Contact elements snap onto the mounting adapter.
8 LM2T BL7124 White/Black I-O 5 0.044 MUSHROOM-HEAD BUTTONS
8 LM2T BL71... On LM2T BL61… actuators, the following can be fitted:
8 LM2T BL7133 Green/Red Start/Stop 5 0.044
Up to 4 contacts, 2 each on the left and right, one behind
One extended and one flush pushbuttons (without the other, when one of the lamp-holders type LM2T
mounting adapter). Both spring return. DL400, LM2T VL230, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230,
8 LM2T BL7212 Black/Red –– 5 0.044 LM2T L… or LM2T M… is used in the middle position.
8 LM2T BL7213 Green/Red –– 5 0.044 Instead when using lamp-holder LM2T XL, LM2T YL,
LM2TFL or LM2T GL…, up to 2 contacts only can be
8 LM2T BL7214 White/Black –– 5 0.044 fitted one behind the other.
8 LM2T BL7222 Black/Red I-O 5 0.044 On the cover of LPZ control station, up to 2 contacts per
8 LM2T BL7223 Green/Red I-O 5 0.044 actuator can be internally fitted, 1 each on the right
and/or left, when one of the lamp-holders type
8 LM2T BL72... 8 LM2T BL7224 White/Black I-O 5 0.044 LM2T DL400, LM2T VL230, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230,
8 LM2T BL7233 Green/Red Start/Stop 5 0.044 LM2T L… or LM2T M… is used in the middle position.
On LM2T BL62… actuators, the following can be fitted:
Up to 2 contacts, 1 each on the left and right, when one
of the lamp-holders type LM2T DL400, LM2T VL230,
LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230,
Instead when using lamp-holder LM2T XL, LM2T YL,
LM2TFL or LM2T GL…, up to 2 contacts can be fitted
one behind the other.
On the cover of LPZ control stations, up to 2 contacts per
actuator can be internally fitted, 1 each on the right
and/or left, when one of the lamp-holders type
Up to 4 contacts can be fitted: 2 each on the left and right,
one behind the other, when one of the lamp-holders type
Up to 2 contacts per actuator can be internally fitted on the
cover of LPZ control stations, 1 each on the right and/or left
when one of the lamp-holders type LM2T DL400,
LM2T VL230, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230, LM2T L… or
LM2T M… is used in the middle position.
Lamps
See page 7-36.
Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

Illuminated selector Order code Colour Type of Qty Wt Operational characteristics

switch actuators positions per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
2 position (without mounting adapter). • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
8 LM2T SL1203 Green 10 0.025 – Degree of protection:
8 LM2T SL1204 Red 10 0.025 • Per IEC/EN: IP65
IP40 for double-touch actuators.
8 LM2T SL1205 Yellow 10 0.025 • Per UL/CSA: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
8 LM2T SL1206 Blue 10 0.025 Materials
8 LM2T SL1... 8 LM2T SL1208 White 10 0.025 An aluminium and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal
8 LM2T SL1213 Green 10 0.025 part whereas plastic parts are made of polyamide and
polycarbonate.
8 LM2T SL1214 Red 10 0.025
8 LM2T SL1215 Yellow 10 0.025 Operating force: 0.8kg / 1.7lb (double touch actuator).
8 LM2T SL1216 Blue 10 0.025 Mechanical life: 300,000 cycles.
8 LM2T SL1218 White 10 0.025 Mounting adapter
3 position (without mounting adapter). See page 7-39.
Type: LM2T AU120.
8 LM2T SL1303 Green 10 0.025 The adapter is fixed to the mounting surface by means of 7
8 LM2T SL1304 Red 10 0.025 incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft).
8 LM2T SL1305 Yellow 10 0.025 Actuators latch onto the mounting adapter by simple
rotation through a Ø22mm/0.89” drilling also on the cover
8 LM2T SL1306 Blue 10 0.025 of LPZ control stations.
8 LM2T SL1308 White 10 0.025 Contact elements
8 LM2T SL1313 Green 10 0.025 See page 7-39.
8 LM2T SL1314 Red 10 0.025 Type: LM2T C10 (1NO)
8 LM2T SL1315 Yellow 10 0.025 LM2T C10A (1EM)
8 LM2T SL1316 Blue 10 0.025 LM2T C01 (1NC)
8 LM2T SL1318 White 10 0.025 LM2T CF01 (1NC Faston)
LM2T C01D (1LB)
8 LM2T SL1323 Green 10 0.025 Contact elements snap onto the mounting adapter.
8 LM2T SL1324 Red 10 0.025 Up to 4 contacts, 2 each on the left and right, one behind
8 LM2T SL1325 Yellow 10 0.025 the other, when one of the lamp-holders type
8 LM2T SL1326 Blue 10 0.025 LM2T L… or LM2T M… is used in the middle position.
8 LM2T SL1328 White 10 0.025 Instead when using lamp-holder LM2T XL, LM2T YL,
8 LM2T SL1333 Green 10 0.025 LM2TFL or LM2T GL…, up to 2 contacts only can be
fitted one behind the other.
8 LM2T SL1334 Red 10 0.025 On the cover of LPZ control station, up to 2 contacts per
8 LM2T SL1335 Yellow 10 0.025 actuator can be internally fitted, 1 each on the right
8 LM2T SL1336 Blue 10 0.025 and/or left, when one of the lamp-holders type
8 LM2T SL1338 White 10 0.025 LM2T L… or LM2T M… is used in the middle position.
Contact activiation of 2-position selector switch Contact activation of 3-position selector switch On 3-position selector versions, the following can be fitted:
2 2 Up to 4 contacts, 2 each on the left and right, one behind
the other, when one of the lamp-holders type
1 1 LM2T DL400, LM2T VL230, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230,
Contacts Contacts
1 2 1 2
A — — A — the cover of LPZ control stations, 1 each on the right
and/or left when one of the lamp-holders type
B B — — LM2T DL400, LM2T VL230, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230,
LM2T L… or LM2T M… is used in the middle position
C — NOTE: No lamp-holder type LM2T XL…, LM2T YL…,
LM2T FL… or LM2T GL… can be used with 3-position
versions.
Selector switch type of positions

Maintained position.
Spring return position.
Selector switch rotation angles
2 position 3 position
45° 45°
90°
Lamps
See page 7-36.
Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

Pilot light heads Order code Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

Without mounting adapter. • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
8 LM2T IL103 Green 10 0.024 – Degree of protection:
8 LM2T IL104 Red 10 0.024 • Per IEC/EN: IP65
8 LM2T IL105 Yellow 10 0.024
8 LM2T IL10... 8 LM2T IL106 Blue 10 0.024 Materials
An aluminium and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal
8 LM2T IL107 Transparent 10 0.024
8 LM2T IL1187 Transparent 10 0.024 polycarbonate.
With symbol indicating dangerous voltage (IEC/EN 60417 5036-a).
Mounting adapter
See page 7-28.
LM2T AU120 LM2T AL... Type: LM2T AU120.
LM2T AU160 LM2T A160 The adapter is fixed to the mounting surface by means of
Pilot light heads latch onto the mounting adapter by simple
7 rotation through a Ø22mm/0.89” drilling also on the cover
of LPZ control stations and exclusively with one of the
following lamp-holders, internally mounted in the middle
position: LM2T DL400, LM2T VL230, LM2T EL400,
LM2T DL400 LM2T ZL230, LM2T L... or LMQT M... for each light head.
LM2T FL... LM2T A190
LM2T GL... Lamp-holder elements
LM2T EL400 LM2T AT...
LM2T VL230
LM2T ZL230 Lamps
LM2T T100 Maximum recommended power: 1.2W.
LM2T YL... See page 7-36.
LM2T XL...
LM2T L... Certifications and compliance
LM2T M... Certifications obtained: RINA, LROS, EAC, CCC,
The mounting adapter is standard supplied so there is no need to
purchase it as a separate accessory. Auxiliary Devices.
Can be purchased separately. Refer to page 7-37. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Potentiometer drives Order code Characteristics Qty Wt Operational characteristics

– Suitable for potentiometers with 6-6.3mm/0.24-0.25”
n° [kg] diameter shaft
Complete with mounting adapter. – Minimum 40mm/1.6in shaft length
8 LM2T P100 With graduated scale 10 0.070 – Ambient conditions:
8 LM2T P110 With variable index 10 0.070 • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
Potenziometro non fornito. – Degree of protection: IP65 (warranted by potentiometers
with a cylindrical shaft).
8 LM2T P100
Materials
polycarbonate.
Mechanical life: 300,000 cycles.
Mounting adapter
See page 7-39.
Standard supply with actuator.
8 LM2T P110 The adapter is fixed to the mounting surface by means of
The potentiometer drives latch onto the mounting adapter
by simple rotation through a Ø22mm/0.89” drilling; not
suitable for LPZ control stations.

Certifications obtained: CCC, EAC.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.

Joysticks Order code Type of N° contact Qty Wt Operational characteristics

positions elements per – Any mounting position allowed
pkg – LM2T J2... types can be used with LPZ control stations
NO n° [kg] – Ambient conditions:
Without mechanical interlock. Label holder excluded. • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
Complete with contact elements. – Degree of protection:
8 LM2T J200 2 1 0.082 • IEC IP20 / UL/CSA Type 1 for contact elements
On front:
• Per IEC/EN: IP65
• Per UL/CSA Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
8 LM2T J201 2 1 0.082
Materials
parts whereas plastic parts are made of polyamide and
8 LM2T J400 4 1 0.104 polycarbonate.
The sealing boot is made of NBR rubber.
8 LM2T J... Mechanical endurance

(without mechanical interlock) 8 LM2T J401 4 1 0.104 Mechanical life: 1,000,000 cycles.
7
General characteristics of contact elements
Wiping action and dual scraping-oscillating effect
With mechanical interlock in centre position. IEC rated insulation voltage: 690V
Label holder excluded. Complete with contact elements. IEC rated thermal current Ith: 10A
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation: A300 Q300
8 LM2T J210 2 1 0.082 IEC operational power in AC15:
[V] 12 24 48 120 240
[A] 6 6 6 6 3
8 LM2T J211 2 1 0.082 IEC operational power in DC13:
[V] 12 24 48 125 250
[A] 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.27
8 LM2T J410 4 1 0.104 Short circuit protection fuse: max calibre 10A gG/SC
Contact resistance: ≤20mΩ
Terminals: Clamp screw with washer
Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm / 0.74lbft.
8 LM2T J411 4 1 0.104
Mounting adapter and contact elements
8 LM2T J...
The joystick is standard supplied with the mounting
(with mechanical interlock)
adapter and contact elements.
Accessories Order code Description Qty Wt The joystick latches onto the mounting adapter by simple
per rotation through a Ø22mm/0.89” drilling also on the
pkg cover of LPZ control stations. The mounting adapter and
n° [kg] contact elements of LM2T J2… types can be internally
8 LM2T AU101 2-4 directional holder 10 0.004 mounted on LPZ control stations covers.
for adhesive legends Contact elements snap onto the mounting adapter.
Two LM2T CJ... contacts are mounted with LM2T J2...
types while four with LM2T J4... versions.

Certifications obtained: CCC, EAC, UL Listed for USA and
8 LM2T AU101 Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Drillings - Minimum recommended

distances 4
3
65 (2.56”) 2
for LM2T J4... 1
50 (1.97”) 1 2
for LM2T J2... A
A
2
42.4 (1.67”)
D N
30 1 N
(3.74”)
95
(1.18”)
C
B B
Joystick positions and contact activation A B C D N A B N

LM2TCJ10 1 1
LM2TCJ10
2 instable 2 stable LM2TCJ01 2 2
Ø22.3
(0.88”) LM2TCJ10 3
4 instable 4 stable LM2TCJ01 4
Accessories and spare parts Dimensions

pages 7-36 to 38 page 7-48 7-35
Accessories and Order code Description Qty per Wt

spare parts pkg
n° [kg]
8 LM2T A12 Coloured diffuser for 10 0.001
double touch buttons
8 LM2T A130 Threaded plug for 10 0.007
unused drilled holes
8 LM2T A140 Action plug for centre 50 0.001
contact
8 LM2T A130
8 LM2T A150 Rod for mechanical 10 0.006
reset button
(l=140mm/5.5in max)
8 LM2T A160 BA9s bulb extractor 10 0.004
8 LM2T A161 30mm/1.2in hole size 10 0.002
adapter set for 22mm/
8 LM2T A140 0.87in (use 2 per hole)
8 LM2T A170 Spare key set for 1 0.008
7 selector or mushroom
head button
8 LM2T A170G Spare key set for 1 0.008
G series selector or
mushroom-head button
8 LM2T A185 Selector protection 10 0.004
shroud for knob
types only
8 LM2T A185
8 LM2T A190 Diffuser for pilot light 10 0.003
8 LM2T ALA024 Filament bulb BA9s 50 0.002
24VAC/DC 1.2W, size
10x28mm/0.4x1.1in
8 LM2T ALB024 Filament bulb BA9s 50 0.003
24VAC/DC 2W, size
10x28mm/0.4x1.1in
8 LM2T AL...
48VAC/DC 2W, size
10x28mm/0.4x1.1in
130VAC/DC 2W, size
10x28mm/0.4x1.1in
8 LM2T ALL006 MultiLED bulb BA9s 10 0.003
6VAC/DC 10x28mm
24VAC/DC 10x28mm
48VAC/DC 10x28mm
8 LM2T ALN130 Neon bulb BA9s 50 0.003
110/125VAC 10x28mm
8 LM2T ALN250 Neon bulb BA9s 50 0.003
220/250VAC 10x28mm
8 LM2T ALP130 Neon bulb BA9s 50 0.003
110/125VAC 10x28mm
8 LM2T ALP250 Neon bulb BA9s 50 0.003
220/250VAC 10x28mm
Complete the order coide by adding the digit of the selected colour:
3 (green); 4 (red); 5 (yellow); 6 (blue); 7 (transparent); 8 (white).
Versions with different key code. Complete with the numeric code of the key.
The following versions are available: 501, 502, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508,
509, 510.
Example of complete code: 8 LM2T A170G505.
Coloured key versions are available on request; consult Customer Service;
see contact details on inside front cover.
Add the digit of the selected colour: 3 (green); 4 (red); 5 (yellow).
Bulb size: 0.4x1.1in.
It is advisable to use the same colour of bulb as of the actuator to obtain
adequate light emission.
Not suitable for resistor-diode lamp holders.
Neon bulbs emit an amber light and may not be suitable for use with green
or blue pilot lights and illuminated actuators. Bulb size: 0.4x1.1in.
Glass with diffuser lens.
Plastic neon bulb.
Dimensions
7-36 page 7-48

spare parts per pkg
n° [kg]
8 LM2T AT... Printed label to be 50 0.001
inserted in pilot lights
and illuminated
pushbuttons
8 LM2T AT... 8 LM2T AU100 Legend holder 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU105 Legend holder (for 50 0.003
8 LM2T AU106 paper or
8 LM2T AU108 plastic
labels)
8 LM2T AU106 Blank paper label for 50 0.002
writing
(for LM2T AU105)
8 LM2T AU107 Transparent protection 50 0.001
for LM2T AU106 label
8 LM2T AU100 8 LM2T AU105 8 LM2T AU108 Blank plastic label for
engraving
50 0.002 7
(for LM2T AU105)
8 LM2T AU13 IP66 boot for 10 0.006
pushbuttons
LM2T B1/BL1/R1...
8 LM2T AU14 IP66 boot for extended 10 0.009
8 LM2T AU108 pushbuttons
8 LM2T AU106 LM2T B2/BL2/B3/R2...
8 LM2T AU157 IP66 boot for double 10 0.007
and triple buttons
(transparent)
8 LM2T AU167 IP66 protective boot 10 0.012
for mushroom head
buttons LM2T B624...
8 LM2T AU170 and LM2T B634...
(transparent)
8 LM2T AU170 Actuator gasket 10 0.006
Available only on specific request, consult Customer Service; see contact
details on inside front cover.
To preserve actuators degree of protection (IEC IP65 / UL Type 4X),
place their gasket between legend holder and mounting surface.
For flush and extended push-buttons, complete the order code by adding the
digit of the required colour:
2 (black); 3 (green); 4 (red); 5 (yellow); 6 (blue); 7 (transparent); 8 (white).
For illuminated push-buttons, add only digit 7 (transparent).
Dimensions
page 7-48 7-37
Labels with text for Order code Text Qty per Wt General characteristics
LM2T AU100 legend holder pkg The labels have indelible scratch-proof black lettering on
n° [kg] metalised grey polycarbonate background (adhesive).
General use. Special versions
8 LM2T AU206 Blank for writing 50 0.001 Labels in different languages are available.
8 LM2T AU207 Sheet with 108 labels 1 0.005 Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside
for laser printing front cover.
8 LM2T AU208 Sheet with 108 1 0.005
laser-printed labels
8 LM2T AGB230
8 LM2T AGB216 CLOSE 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB220 EMERGENCY 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB231 FAST 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB263 FAULT 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB215 FORWARD 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB228 LEFT 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB218 LOWER 50 0.001
7 8 LM2T AGB221 OFF 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB223 ON 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB211 OPEN 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB229 POWER ON 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB227 RAISE 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB226 RESET 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB222 REVERSE 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB217 RIGHT 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB241 RUNNING 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB224 SLOW 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB225 START 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB230 STOP 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB214 STOP RESET 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB240 THERMAL FAULT 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB237 TRIP 50 0.001
For selector switches.
8 LM2T AI233 AUTO-MAN 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI234 AUTO-O-MAN 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI241 MAN-AUTO 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI242 MAN-O-AUTO 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB235 FWD-O-REV 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB236 OFF-ON 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB232 STOP-START 50 0.001
International labels for pushbuttons.
8 LM2T AU200 O 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU201 I 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU202 II 50 0.001
International labels for selector switches.
8 LM2T AU203 O-I 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU204 I-II 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU205 I-O-II 50 0.001
Recommended use with LM2T AU206 blank label.
Sheet with 108 adhesive labels.
Complete code with label text required.
Plastic disk for mushroom Ordering code Text Qty per Wt General characteristics
pkg The disks are made of non-adhesive plastic.
head pushbuttons There is a 2x2mm / 0.08x0.08in index.
n° [kg]
8 LM2T AU113 EMERGENCY STOP 10 0.005 Special versions
Ø90mm / 3.5in The disk text in different languages is available.
8 LM2T AU115 EMERGENCY STOP 10 0.005 Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside
ERGENCY Ø60mm / 2.4in front cover.
EM
8 LM2T AU118 NOT AUS / 10 0.005
ARRET D’URGENCE /
PARO EMERGENCIA
Ø60mm / 2.4in
STOP
Dimensions
7-38 page 7-48
Mounting adapter Order code Description Qty Wt Operational characteristics

n° [kg] – The adapter is fixed to the mounting surface by means
of incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft) also
Only for metal series actuators. internally on LPZ control stations covers
8 LM2T AU120 Mounting adapter 10 0.019 – Contact elements snap onto the adapter
– Tightening torque: 1Nm/1.57lbft max (except Faston)
8 LM2T AU120 – Degree of protection per IEC/EN:
• IP20 for contacts elements with screw termination
• IP00 for contact elements with Faston termination
General characteristics of contact elements
Wiping action and dual scraping and oscillating effect,
Contact elements Order code Function Qty Wt IEC rated insulation voltage: 690V
per pkg IEC rated thermal current Ith: 10A
All SPST n° [kg] Conductivity: 5V 10mA.
Screw termination. UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation: A600 Q600
Without mounting adapter. IEC operational power in AC15: 7
.3
8 LM2T C10 10 0.011 [V] 12 24 48 120 240 400 480 500 600
NO
.4 [A] 6 6 6 6 3 1.9 1.5 1.4 1.2
.7
8 LM2T C10A 10 0.011 IEC operational power in DC13:
EM
.8 [V] 12 24 48 125 250 440 500 600
.1
8 LM2T C... 8 LM2T C01 10 0.011 [A] 3 3 1.5 0.55 0.27 0.15 0.13 0.1
NC
.2 Short-circuit protection fuse: max. calibre 10A gG/SC
8 LM2T C01D .5
10 0.011 Contact resistance: ≤20mΩ
LB Terminals: Clamp screw with washer
.6 Faston 1-6.35mm/0.25” or 2-2.8mm/0.11”.
Screw termination. Stroke of contact elements
With mounting adapter for metal series LM2T actuators.
.3 EM
8 LM2T E10 10 0.029
NO NO
.4 NC
.1 LB
8 LM2T E01 10 0.029
NC
8 LM2T E... .2 1 2 (0.08”) 3 (0.35”) 4 4.8mm
(0.04”) 1.8 2.8 (0.16”) (0.19”)
Faston termination
Without mounting adapter. (0.07”) (0.11”)
.3 Closed contact Open contact
8 LM2T CF10 10 0.012
NO
.4
.1
Maximum conductor cross section for screw terminals
8 LM2T CF01 10 0.012 1 o 2 2.5mm2 or AWG12 cables.
NC
.2
Not suitable for push-push actuators. Use LM2T C10A (EM) or Mechanical and electric endurance
LM2T C01 (NC) type only with push-push actuators. Operating force: 0.5kg / 1.1lb (contact elements).
Normally open contact with early make operation. Electrical life: LM2T C10 1,000,000 cycles
Direct (positive) opening action in accordance with IEC/EN 60947-5-1. LM2T CF10 1,000,000 cycles
Normally closed contact with late break operation. LM2T C01 1,000,000 cycles
8 LM2T CF01 LM2T CF01 1,000,000 cycles
LM2T C10A 600,000 cycles
Drillings - Minimum recommended distances LM2T C01D 600,000 cycles.
50 (1.97”) Certifications and compliance
42.4 (1.67”)
UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601), as

Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
30
(2.56”)
(1.18”)
65
8 LM2T CF10
Ø22.3
(0.88”)
When using Faston, pitch is 90mm/3.5” minimum.

page 7-47 page 7-49 7-39
Lamp-holders elements Order code Rated Type of Qty Wt Operational characteristics

without mounting adapter auxiliary bulb per – Operating supply voltage limits for all types:
supply voltage supplied pkg -15…+10% Ue
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – Any mounting position allowed
– Lamp-holder elements snap onto the adapter
Direct supply. – Only lamp-holder elements LM2T DL400,
8 LM2T EL400 ≤415VAC/DC No 10 0.011 LM2T VL230, LM2T EL400 and LM2T ZL230 can be
With resistor and diode. used with LPZ control stations
– Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm/1.57lbft
8 LM2T ZL230 230VAC Yes 10 0.015 – Ambient conditions:
130V, 2W • Operating temperature: -25...+60°C
8 LM2T EL400 8 LM2T YL... With transformer. • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
8 LM2T ZL230 8 LM2T GL... 8 LM2T YL110 110-120VAC Yes 1 0.086 – Degree of protection per IEC/EN: IP20.
24V, 1.2W
Mounting adapter
8 LM2T YL230 220-240VAC Yes 1 0.084 See page 7-39.
24V, 1.2W Type: 8 LM2T AU120.
8 LM2T YL400 380-415VAC Yes 1 0.087 The adapter is fixed on the mounting surface by means of
24V, 1.2W incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft) also
internally on LPZ control station covers.
7 Flashing.
8 LM2T GL048 24-48VAC No 1 0.027 Maximum conductor cross section
8 LM2T GL230 110-230VAC No 1 0.027 1 o 2 2.5mm2 or AWG 12 cables.
Wiring diagrams
Lamp-holders elements Order code Rated Type of Qty Wt Direct supply With resistor and diode
with mounting adapter auxiliary bulb per LM2T EL400 X1 LM2T ZL230 X1
supply voltage supplied pkg LM2T DL400 LM2T VL230

X2
X2
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg]
With transformer Flashing
Direct supply. LM2T YL... X1 LM2T GL...
X1
8 LM2T DL400 ≤415VAC/DC No 10 0.029 LM2T XL... LM2T FL...

X2 X2
With resistor and diode.
Test element X1
8 LM2T VL230 230VAC Yes 10 0.032 LM2T T100 X5
130V, 2W TEST
With transformer. Certifications and compliance

8 LM2T XL110 110-120VAC Yes 1 0.105 Certifications obtained: RINA, LROS, GOST, CCC,
8 LM2T DL400 - 8 LM2T VL230
24V, 1.2W UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601), as
Auxiliary Devices.
8 LM2T XL230 220-240VAC Yes 1 0.103 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
24V, 1.2W IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
8 LM2T XL400 380-415VAC Yes 1 0.106
24V, 1.2W
Flashing.
8 LM2T FL048 24-48VAC No 1 0.046
8 LM2T XL... - 8 LM2T FL... 8 LM2T FL230 110-230VAC No 1 0.046
Test element Order code Description Qty Wt

for lamp-holders without per
pkg
mounting adapter n° [kg]
Test element for lamp-holders.
8 LM2T T100 Test element 10 0.011
Filament bulb, BA9s U≤130VAC/DC max 2.6W (not supplied); maximum

dimensions 11x28 mm (0.4x1.1”). For higher voltages, use neon bulbs.
Not suitable for 3-position selectors.
Filament bulb, BA9s (not supplied); maximum dimensions 11x28mm
(0.4x1.1”). Suitable for AC duty only.
8 LM2T T100 Use bulbs with rated voltage equal to that of the power supply.
E.g.: With LM2T FL230, use 110VAC bulbs if power supply is 110VAC and
230VAC bulbs if power supply 230VAC. 2.6W max bulb rating.
MultiLED bulbs must not be fitted.
In case of test circuits for lamp-holders having load in parallel, two
LM2T T100 elements are required for each bulb.
Refer to the wiring diagram attached to the product or consult Customer
Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
In case of neon bulbs, consult Customer Service; see contact details on
inside front cover.
Only use with lamp-holder elements:
• With direct supply
• With resistor and diode
• LED LM2T LB… and LM2T MB… types.
Not suitable for use with test element.

7-40 page 7-47 and 48 page 7-49
LED elements steady light Order code Supply voltage LED Qty Wt Operational characteristics
colour per – Supply voltage:
pkg • 8 LM2T L… types:
[V] n° [kg] 12-30VAC/DC; 85-140VAC; 187-265VAC
• 8 LM2T M… types:
Screw termination. 18-30VAC/DC; 85-140VAC; 187-265VAC
Supplied without mounting adapter. – Maximum consumption:
8 LM2T LB3 18-30VAC/DC Green 10 0.016 17mA (12-30 / 18-30VAC/DC); 20mA (85-140VAC);
8 LM2T LB4 Red 10 0.016 17mA (185-265VAC)
– Protection:
8 LM2T LB5 Yellow 10 0.016 • Against overvoltages
8 LM2T LB6 Blue 10 0.016 • Against stray currents in wiring
8 LM2T L... 8 LM2T LB8 White 10 0.016 • To reduce flickering phenomenon
• To withstand vibrations
8 LM2T LE3 85-140VAC Green 10 0.016 – Electrical life: 100,000 hours
8 LM2T LE4 Red 10 0.016 – Snap onto LPX AU120 mounting adapter in the middle
8 LM2T LE5 Yellow 10 0.016 position for each illuminated actuator, also internally
on the LPZ control station cover
8 LM2T LE6 Blue 10 0.016 – No other element can be stacked behind LED elements
8 LM2T LE8 White 10 0.016 – Any mounting position allowed
8 LM2T LM3 187-265VAC Green 10 0.016 – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm/1.57lbft 7
8 LM2T LM4 Red 10 0.016 • Operating temperature: -25...+60°C
8 LM2T LM5 Yellow 10 0.016 • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
8 LM2T LM6 Blue 10 0.016 – Degree of protection: IP20.
8 LM2T LM8 White 10 0.016 Mounting adapter
Only LM2T LB… type is suitable for use with LM2T T100 test element. See page 7-39.
Type: 8 LM2T AU120.
The adapter is fixed on the mounting surface by means of
incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft) also
LED elements flashing light Order code Supply voltage LED Qty Wt internally on LPZ control station covers.
colour per
pkg Maximum conductor cross section
[V] n° [kg] 1 o 2 2.5mm2 or AWG12 cables.
Screw termination. Wiring diagram
X2 X1
8 LM2T MB3 18-30VAC/DC Green 10 0.016
8 LM2T MB4 Red 10 0.016
8 LM2T MB5 Yellow 10 0.016 Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC, CCC, UL Listed for USA and
8 LM2T MB6 Blue 10 0.016 Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices.
8 LM2T M... 8 LM2T MB8 White 10 0.016 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
8 LM2T ME3 85-140VAC Green 10 0.016 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14-95.
8 LM2T ME4 Red 10 0.016
8 LM2T ME5 Yellow 10 0.016
8 LM2T ME6 Blue 10 0.016
8 LM2T ME8 White 10 0.016
8 LM2T MM3 187-265VAC Green 10 0.016
8 LM2T MM4 Red 10 0.016
8 LM2T MM5 Yellow 10 0.016
8 LM2T MM6 Blue 10 0.016
8 LM2T MM8 White 10 0.016
Only LM2T MB… type is suitable for use with LM2T T100 test element.

page 7-47 and 48 pag. 7-49 7-41
COMBINATIONS FOR METAL SERIES PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES

LM2T C...
LM2T C... LM2T C... LM2T CF...
LM2T C... LM2T CF... LM2T CF... LM2T E...
LM2T CF... LM2T E...
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU...
LM2T AU...
LM2T B10... LM2T B20... LM2T B30...
LM2T B11... LM2T B21... LM2T AU170
LM2T AU170
LM2T AU140
PUSH-PUSH BUTTONS
LM2T C10A LM2T AU120

LM2T C01
LM2T AU...
7 LM2T Q10... LM2T Q20... LM2T AU170
NORMAL STOPPING MUSHROOM-HEAD BUTTONS

LM2T C... LM2T C...
LM2T C... LM2T CF... LM2T C... LM2T CF...
LM2T CF... LM2T E... LM2T CF... LM2T E...
LM2T AU120 LM2T AU120
LM2T AU... LM2T AU...
LM2T B614.. LM2T B616... LM2T B634... LM2T B654... LM2T AU170 LM2T AU170
LM2T AU140
MUSHROOM-HEAD LATCH BUTTONS

LM2T C...
LM2T C... LM2T CF...
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU...
LM2T B624... LM2T B6644 LM2T AU170
LM2T C...
LM2T AU120
LM2T B71... LM2T B72...
TRIPLE-TOUCH BUTTONS
LM2T C...
LM2T AU120
LM2T B73...
SELECTOR SWITCHES
LM2T C...
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU...
LM2T S1... LM2T S2... LM2T S3...

LM2T AU170
7-42
COMBINATION FOR METAL SERIES ILLUMINATED PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES

SPRING-RETURN BUTTONS LM2T C...
LM2T L... - LM2T M... LM2T CF...
LM2T DL400 - LM2T EL400
LM2T C... LM2T C...
LM2T VL230 - LM2T ZL230
LM2T CF... LM2T CF...
LM2T E...

LM2T YL...
LM2T C...
LM2T GL...
LM2T BL10... LM2T BL20... LM2T CF...
LM2T AU170 LM2T XL... LM2T AU170
LM2T E...
LM2T FL...
PUSH-PUSH BUTTONS LM2T L...

LM2T M...
LM2T EL400
LM2T C10A
LM2T ZL230
LM2T C01
LM2T C10A
LM2T C01
LM2T AU... LM2T AU... 7

LM2T YL...
LM2T GL...
LM2T QL10... LM2T QL20... LM2T AU170 LM2T XL... LM2T AU170
LM2T FL...
MUSHROOM-HEAD SPRING-RETURN BUTTON LM2T C...

LM2T DL400 - LM2T EL400 LM2T C...
LM2T C... LM2T VL230 - LM2T ZL230
LM2T CF... LM2T CF...
LM2T E...

LM2T BL614... LM2T YL...
LM2T C...
LM2T GL...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T FL...
MUSHROOM-HEAD LATCH BUTTON LM2T C...

LM2T L... - LM2T M...
LM2T CF...
LM2T VL230 - LM2T ZL230 LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...

LM2T BL624... LM2T YL...
LM2T C...
LM2T GL...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T FL...
LM2T L... - LM2T M...
LM2T CF...
LM2T AU120
LM2T C...
LM2T BL71... LM2T BL72... LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
2-POSITION SELECTOR SWITCHES LM2T C...

LM2T DL400 - LM2T EL400 LM2T C...
LM2T C... LM2T VL230 - LM2T ZL230 LM2T CF...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...

LM2T YL...
LM2T SL12... LM2T C...
LM2T GL...
LM2T CF...
LM2T XL... LM2T AU170
LM2T E... LM2T AU170
LM2T FL...
3-POSITION SELECTOR SWITCHES

LM2T L... - LM2T M...
LM2T CF...
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU...
LM2T SL13... LM2T C...

LM2T CF...
LM2T E... LM2T AU170
7-43
series dimensions [mm (in)]
PLATINUM SERIES PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES

Flush pushbutton with screw terminal contact or LED or test Flush pushbutton with Faston contact elements Drillings - Minimum recommended distances
elements
30
20.1 20.1 (1.18”)
(0.79”) 67.5 (2.66”) (0.79”) 30
(0.39”)
10
(0.39”)
67.5 (2.66”) 10 (1.18”)

1-6 max (0.39”) 1-6 max (0.39”)
10
(0.04-0.24” max)
10
0,95” (0.02, -0”)

(0.04-0.24” max)
24.1 (+0.4, -0)

62.8 (2.47”)
(1.16”)
(1.18”)
Ø29.5
(1.16”)
(1.38”)
(1.18”)
Ø29.5
(1.38”)
40 (1.57”)
30
35
30
35
40 (1.57”)
ADD-ON
43 ELEMENTS
n°1 LPX AU120
(1.69”) n°1 LPX AU120 ADD-ON
(possible LPX T...) n°1 LPX CF...
ELEMENTS
n°1 LPX C...
n°1 LPX... in middle
pos. on LPX AU120 adapter
3.2 (+0.2, -0) Ø22.3 (+0.4, -0)

0.12”(+0.01”, -0”) Ø0.88”(+0.02”, -0”)
When Faston contacts are used, the vertical
pitch must be 85mm(3.35”) minimum.
Mushroom-head pushbutton with auto-monitor contacts
LPX C01SM LPX C02SM
7 20.1
(0.79”) 20.1
45.6 41
(0.79”)
1-6max 41 1-6max 41 (0.79”) 41

20
(1.79”) (1.61”)
(0.04-0.24”max) (1.61”) (0.04-0.24”max) (1.61”) (1.61”)
(1.46”)
(1.38”)
(1.46”)
(1.38”)
(1.18”)
(1.18”)
(1.18”)
(1.18”)
(1.18”)
(1.18”)
(1.97”)
(1.97”)
37
35
37
35
Ø30
Ø30
Ø30
Ø30
30
30
50
50
43 43
(1.69”) LPX C01SM LPX AU120 (1.69”) LPX C02SM LPX AU120
Flush pushbutton with test element and spring-clamp terminal Drillings – Minimum recommended distances with
contact or LED elements LPX CS... - LPX LPS... spring-clamp terminal contact or LED elements
30
20.1 (1.18”)
(0.79”) 30
(0.39”)
67.5 (2.66”) 10 (1.18”)

1-6 max (0.39”)
10
0,95” (0.02, -0”)

(0.04-0.24” max)
24.1 (+0.4, -0)
(1.16”)
(1.18”)
(1.63”)
Ø29.5
41.5
(2.16”)
30
55
(2.16”)
55
43 ADD-ON
(1.69”) ELEMENTS
n°1 LPX AU120
(possible LPX T…)
n°1 LPX CS...
n°1 LPX LPS... in middle pos.
of LPX AU120 adapter
3.2 (+0.2, -0) Ø22.3 (+0.4, -0)

0.12”(+0.01”, -0”) Ø0.88”(+0.02”, -0”)
Pushbutton actuators
10 16.7 14.5
(0.39”) (0.66”) (0.57”)
(1.16”)
(1.16”)
(1.16”)
Ø29.5
Ø29.5
Ø29.5
Flush Push-push Extended Push-push Shrouded Complete with cap or lens.

LPC B1... LPC Q1... LPC B2... LPC Q2... LPC B30...
Illuminated flush LPX Q0 Illuminated extended Illuminated push-push LPX B3
LPC BL1... Illuminated push-push LPC BL2... LPC QL2...
LPX B0 LPC QL1... LPX QL0
Reset button (complete unit) Mushroom-head button actuators

24.1
24.1 (0.95”)
10.2 16.9 (0.95”)
(0.40”) (0.66”)
(2.36”)
(1.57”)
Ø60
Ø40
(1.16”)
(0.90”)
Ø29.5
Ø22.8
150 (5.90”) 150 (5.90”)

Spring return Spring return
Flush Extended
LPC B614... LPC B616...
LPC R1... LPC R2004 Illuminated spring return
LPC BL614...
Mushroom-head latch button actuators

41 36.4 41 24 41 41
(1.61”) (1.43”) (1.61”) (0.94”) (1.61”) (1.61”)
(1.18”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
Ø30
(1.57”)
Ø40
Ø40
Ø40
Ø40
Turn to release Turn to release

Push-pull Turn to release Turn key to release LPC B6634 LPC B6644
LPC B674... LPC B634... LPC B684... Illuminated turn to release
LPC BL664...
7-44
Selector switch actuators

27.3 27.5 22.3
(1.07”) (1.08”) (0.88”)
(1.16”)
(1.16”)
Ø29.5
Ø29.5
Knob Key
LPC S1... LPC S3...
Illuminated knob
LPC SL1...
Double-touch actuators Double-touch actuators Triple-touch actuators with Drillings - Minimum recommended distances
with or without indicator with or without indicator middle extended button 30
2 flush buttons 1 flush and 1 extended buttons (1.18”)
16.5 30
29.5 29.5 (0.65”) (1.18”)
10.2 15.7 29.5
(1.16”) (0.40”) (1.16”) (1.16”) 10
(0.62”)
0,95” (0.02, -0”)

(0.4
24.1 (+0.4, -0)

(2.16”)
54 (2.12”)
54 (2.12”)
54 (2.12”)
55
7
(2.16”)
55
LPC B71... - LPC B72... - LPC B73...
LPC BL71... LPC BL72...
3.2 (+0.2, -0) Ø22.3 (+0.4, -0)
0.12”(+0.01”, -0”) Ø0.88”(+0.02”, -0”)
Pilot light head LED-integrated monoblock Monoblock buzzers Interface connectors

pilot lights - steady light
10.8 38.4 10.8 36 16
(0.52”) (1.51”) (0.52”) (1.42”) (0.63”) 87 (3.42")
(1.16”)
(1.16”)
(1.14”)
Ø29.5
(1.16")
Ø29.5
Ø28.9
Ø29.5
(1.37")
34.7
(0.44")
11.2
1-6max
(0.04-0.24”max) Ø21.9
(0.86")
LPL... 8 LP2T IL...P LP2T ZG... LPX S...
Threaded plug for Knob selector Label holder Label Label holder Label Plastick disk for mushroom-head pushbuttons
unused drilled switch protection 30
(0.60”)
30
(0.49”)
(1.12”)
(0.48”)
Ø28.5
(1.18”)
holes
15.3
(1.18”)
12.4
12.1
27 26.5 1.5
21.3 27.5 28 27.5 (1.04”) (0.06”)
(1.10”) 1.5 (1.06”)
(0.59”)
Ø60 (2.36”)
(0.84”) (1.08”) (1.08”) (0.06”)
Ø90 (3.54”)
(1.12”)
15
Ø28.5
(1.14”)
45 (1.77”)
48 (1.89”)
(1.42”)
Ø29
Ø36
LPX A130 LM2T AU185 LPX AU100 LPX AU109 LPX AU105 LPX AU108
LM2T A...2... LPX AU112 LPX AU114
LPX AU113 LPX AU115
LPX AU118
Rubber boot for flush Rubber boot for Double/triple button boot Rubber boot for Padlockable protection for Cable gland
buttons extended buttons mushroom-head buttons mushroom-head latch buttons
except LPC B634...
30.7 16.8 41.5
(1.21”) (0.66”) 49 45
13.7 18.2 (1.63”) (1.93”) (1.77”)
(0.54”) (0.72”) CH24
(0.25”)
55.2 (2.17”)
6.4
(1.69”)
(0.35”) (1.11”)
28.1
(1.22”)
(1.22”)
Ø43
Ø31
Ø31
(0.33”)
8.4
M20
LPX AU13... LPX AU14... LPX AU157 LPX AU167 LPX AU158 LPX P01
CONTROL STATIONS WITHOUT ACTUATORS

LPZ P1 A8 LPZ P2 A8
60.4 (2.38”) 60.4 (2.38”)
Ø4 .17”
Ø4 .17”
56 (2.20”) 72 (2.83”)
(0
(0
58 (2.28”) 58 (2.28”) 56 (2.20”)

.3 )
.3 )
(0 4.8
)
(0 4.8
9”
)
9”
.1
.1
60.4 (2.38”)
45 (1.77”)
72 (2.83”)
105,4 (4.15”)
4.8
117 (4.61”)
90 (3.54”)
(0.19”)
(1.38”)
Ø22.3
35
Ø4 .17”
(0
72 (2.83”) Knockout for

.3 )
Knockout for
M16/PG11 M16/PG11 4.8 (0.19”)
(left side)
Ø22.3
(0.88”)
Knockout for
Ø4 .17”
(0
Knockout for Knockout for

.3 )
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
(on top and bottom) M16/PG11 M20/PG13.5
(one/side)
Knockout for
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
(on top and bottom)
CH24 = Spanner/Wrench size 24
7-45
CONTROL STATIONS WITHOUT ACTUATORS

LPZ P3 A8 LPZ P4 A8
72 (2.83”) 60.4 (2.38”) 60.4 (2.38”) 56 (2.20”)
56 (2.20”)
Ø4 .17”
Ø4 .17”
72 (2.83”) 58 (2.28”)
(0
58 (2.28”)
(0
(0 4.8
)
(0 4.8
.3 )
.3 )
)
9”
9”
.1
.1
Knockout for
139.4 /5.49”)
M20/PG13.5
151 (5.94”)
124 (4.88”)
(two/side) Knockout for

M20/PG13.5
174.4 (6.87”)
159 (6.26”)
151 (5.94”)
(two/side)
(1.38”)
35
4.8 (0.19”)
(1.38”)
35
Ø22.3
(0.88”)
4.8 (0.19”)
Ø4 .17”
(0
Knockout for
.3 )
M16/PG11 Ø22.3
(0.88”)
Knockout for
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
Ø4 .17”
Knockout for
(0
(on top and bottom)
.3 )
M16/PG11
7 Knockout for
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
(on top and bottom)
LPZ P5 A8 LPZ P6 A8
60.4 (2.38”) 56 (2.20”) 72 (2.83”) 60.4 (2.38”) 56 (2.20”)
Ø4 .17”
Ø4 .17”
72 (2.83”) 58 (2.28”) 58 (2.28”)
(0
(0
(0 4.8
(0 4.8
)
)
.3 )
.3 )
9”
9”
.1
.1
Knockout for
M20/PG13.5
208.4 (8.20”)
220 (8.66”)
193 (7.60”)
(two/side)
Knockout for
240,4 (9.46”)
225 (8.86”)
252 (9.92”)
M20/PG13.5
(two/side)
(1.38”)
35
4.8 (0.19”)
(1.38”)
35
Ø22.3
(0.88”)
4.8 (0.19”)
Ø4 .17”
(0
Knockout for
.3 )
M16/PG11 Ø22.3
(0.88”)
Ø4 .17”
(0
.3 )

M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16 M16/PG11
(on top and bottom)
Knockout for
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
(on top and bottom)
CONTROL STATIONS WITH ONE ACTUATOR

LPZ P1 B8 01 LPZ P1 B8 02
60.4 (2.38”) 60.4 (2.38”)
Ø4 .17”
Ø4 .17”
72 (2.83”) 72 (2.83”)
(0.19”)
(0.19”)
(0
(0
58 (2.28”) 56 (2.20”) 41.4 58 (2.28”) 56 (2.20”) 37.2

.3 )
.3 )
4.8
4.8
(1.63”) (1.46”)
60.4 (2.38”)
60.4 (2.38”)
45 (1.77”)
45 (1.77”)
72 (2.83”)
72 (2.83”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
Ø40
Ø40

4.8 M16/PG11 4.8 M16/PG11
Ø4 .17”
Ø4 .17”
(0
(0
.3 )
.3 )
(0.19”) (left side) (0.19”) (left side)

M16/PG11 M16/PG11
LPZ P1 B5 02 LPZ P1 B5 03
60.4 (2.38”) 60.4 (2.38”)
Ø4 .17”
Ø4 .17”
(0.19”)
(0.19”)
72 (2.83”)
(0
(0
58 (2.28”) 56 (2.20”) 37.2 72 58 (2.28”) 56 (2.20”) 41.4

.3 )
.3 )
4.8
4.8
(1.46”) (1.63”)
60.4 (2.38”)
60.4 (2.38”)
45 (1.77”)
45 (1.77”)
72 (2.83”)
72 (2.83”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
Ø40
Ø40

4.8 M16/PG11 4.8 M16/PG11
Ø4 .17”
Ø4 .17”
(0
(0
(left side)
.3 )
.3 )
(0.19”) (0.19”) (left side)

M16/PG11 M16/PG11
Top view for all LPZ P1...
Knockout for
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
(on top and bottom)
7-46
8 LM2T Ø22mm metal series dimensions [mm (in)]
METAL PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES

Flush pushbutton with contact or lamp-holder elements Flush pushbutton with Faston contact elements Drillings - Minimum recommended distances
(direct or resistor-diode type) or test element
50 (1.97”)
22.7 30
(0.89”) 43 (1.69”) (1.18”)
(0.39”)
22.7 43 (1.69”) 13.8
(0.39”)
(0.89”) 20.3 (0.54”) 20.3 13.8

1-6 max
10
(0.80”)
10
1-6 max (0.80”) (0.54”)

(0.04-0.24” max)
(1.67”)
(0.04-0.24” max)
42.4
66 (2.60”)
(1.17”)
(1.67”)
(1.18”)
Ø29.8
(1.67”)
(1.17”)
(1.18”)
Ø29.8
42.4
42.4
30
30
65 (2.56”)
ADD-ON n°1 LM2T AU120 n°1 LM2T AU120
ELEMENTS ADD-ON
n°1 LM2T C... - LM2T E... - LM2T T... ELEMENTS n°1 LM2T CF...
n°1 LM2T VL230 - LM2T ZL230
n°1 LM2T DL400... - LM2T EL400
n°1 LM2T L... - LM2T M...
Ø22.3 (+0.4, -0)

Ø0.88”(+0.02”, -0”)
When Faston contacts are used, the vertical

pitch must be 90mm (3.54”) minimum.
Pushbutton actuators 7
13.8 20.9 20.5
(0.54”) (0.82”) (0.81”)
(1.17”)
(1.17”)
Ø29.8
Ø29.8
(1.17”)
Ø29.8
Flush Extended Shrouded

LM2T B1... LM2T B2... LM2T B30...
Push-push Push-push Illuminated flush
LM2T Q1... LM2T Q2... LM2T BL1...
Illuminated extended Illuminated push-push
LM2T BL2... LM2T QL1...
Illuminated push-push
LM2T QL2...
Reset button (complete unit)
140 max 13.8 140 max 20.9

(5.51” max) 19.1 (0.54”) (5.51” max) 19.1 (0.82”)
(0.75”) (0.75”)
(1.17”)
(1.67”)
(1.67”)
(1.17”)
Ø29.8
Ø29.8
42.4
42.4
Ø20 Ø20
(0.79”) (0.79”)
LM2T R1... LM2T R2004
Mushroom-head button actuators

29.2
28.5 (1.15”) 29 32.6
(1.12”) (1.14”) 35.5 (1.28”)
(1.40”)
Ø60 (2.36”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
Ø40
Ø40
Ø40
Ø40
Spring return Spring return Push-pull Illuminated push-pull Turn to release

LM2T B614... LM2T B616... L2T B624... LM2T BL624... LM2T B634...
Illuminated spring return
LM2T BL614...
33.8 24.2 49
(1.33”) (0.95”) (1.93”)
(1.57”)
Ø40
(1.57”)
Ø40
Turn key to release Turn to release

LM2T B654... LM2T B6644
Double-touch actuators Double-touch actuators Triple-touch actuators with Drillings - Minimum recommended distances
with or without indicator with or without indicator middle extended button
2 flush buttons 1 flush and 1 extended buttons 50 (1.97”)
30
(1.18”)
28.5 28.5 28.5 17.4
(1.12”) 12 16
(1.12”) 12 (0.63”) (1.12”) 12 (0.68”)
(0.47”) ((0.47”) (0 (0.47”)
(1.67”)
42.4
54 (2.12”)
54 (2.12”)
54 (2.12”)
STOP
80 (3.15”)
LM2T B71... LM2T B72... - LM2T B73...

LM2T BL71... LM2T BL72...
Ø22.3 (+0.4, -0)

Ø0.88”(+0.02”, -0”)
7-47
8 LM2T Ø22mm metal series dimensions [mm (in)]
Selector switch actuators Pilot light head Potentiometer drive
56.8 (2.24”)
27.5 27.5 27.5 23.9 16.5 35
(1.08”) (1.08”) (1.08”) 27.5 (0.94”) (0.65”) (1.38”)
(1.08”)
(1.17”)
(1.17”)
(1.17”)
Ø29.8
Ø29.8
Ø29.8
(1 17”)
Ø29.8
(1.55”)
(1.17”)
Ø39.4
Ø29.8
Knob Illuminated knob Lever Key LM2T IL1... LM2T P100
LM2T S1... LM2T SL1... LM2T S2... LM2T S3... LM2T P110
Joystick with free actuation lever Joystick with mechanical latch lever
22.7 43 (1.69”) 22.7 43
(0.39”)
(0.39”)
1-6 max 70.5 (2.77”) (0.89”) 1.5 1-6 max 70.5 (2.77”) (0.89”) 1.5
(0.04-0.24” max) (0.06”) (0.04-0.24” max) (0.06”)
10
10
(1.67”)
(1.67”)
(1.16”)
(1.16”)
(1.18”)
(1.18”)
42.4
Ø29.5
Ø29.5
42.4
30
30
7 Only for
LM2T J40 LM2T J20
20.1
(0.79”)
Only for
LM2T J41 LM2T J21
20.1
(0.79”)
LM2T J20... - LM2T J40... LM2T J21... - LM2T J41...
Label holder Label Label holder Label Plastic disk for

mushroom-head pushbuttons
30
29.8 (1.18”)
(1.17”) 27.5 27.5
(1.12”)
27.8
Ø28.5
27.8 (1.08”) (1.08”) ERGENCY
(1.09”) EM
(0.59”)
(1.09”) ERGENCY
15.1
EM
Ø60 (2.36”)
Ø90 (3.54”)
48 (1.89”)
45-6 (1.79”)
(1.12”)
Ø28.5
(0.48”)
12.2
(0.61”)
15.4
(0.49”)
12.4
STOP
LM2T AU100 LM2T A... LM2T AU105 LM2T AU10... STOP

LM2T AU118
IP66 boot for flush and IP66 boot for extended and IP66 boot for double/triple IP66 boot for mushroom- Threaded plug for Knob selector switch
illumined flush buttons illuminated extended buttons touch buttons head buttons unused drilled holes protection
25 30 20.4
18.1 (1.18”) (0.80”) 35 21.3 27.5
(0.71”) (0.98”)
(1.38”) (0.84”) (1.08”)
(1.31”)
Ø33.4
(1.31”)
Ø33.4
(1.14”)
(1.42”)
55 (2.16”)
Ø29
Ø36
(1.73”)
Ø44
LM2T AU13... LM2T AU14... LM2T AU157 LM2T AU167 LM2T A130 LM2T AU185
Lamp-holder elements LED steady or flashing light Transformer or flashing

with direct supply or element lamp holder element
resistor and diode
10 (0.39”)
10 (0.39”)
51.3 (2.02”)
1-6 max
1-6 max 1-6 max (0.04-0.24” max)
(0.04-0.24”max)
(0.99”)
(0.04-0.24”max)
25.2
(1.18”)
(1.18”)
30
30
43 (1.69”)
43 (1.69”) 20.3
20.3 (0.80”)
(0.80”) 1-6 max 20.3
(0.04-0.24”max) (0.80”)
(1.46”)
(1.67”)
(1.67”)
(1.67”)
42.4
42.4
37
42.4
LM2T EL400 LM2T L... - LM2T M... LM2T YL... - LM2T GL...
LM2T DL400 LM2T XL... - LM2T FL...
LM2T ZL230
LM2T VL230
7-48
Wiring diagrams
FOR PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES

LPX C10 - LPX E10 - LPX CF10 LPX C10A LPX C01 - LPX E01 - LPX CF01 LPX C01D LPX C01SM LPX C02SM
LPX CS10 - LPX CB10 LM2T C10A LPX CS01 - LPX CB01 LM2T C01D
LM2T C10 - LM2T E10 LPZ P1 B... - LM2T C01
7 1 5 .3 .1 .3 .1 .1
3
8 2 6 .4 .2 .4 .2 .2
4
LP2T IL...P LP2T ZG... LPX T100 LPX T101

LPX L... LPX T102
X1 X1 X1 X1
7
X5 X2 X5 X5
LM2T EL400 LM2T ZL230 LM2T YL... LM2T GL... LM2T T100 LM2T L...
LM2T DL400 LM2T VL230 LM2T XL... LM2T FL... LM2T M...
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
X2 X2 X2 X2 X5 X5
TEST
7-49
Page 8-2 Page 8-3
SIGNAL TOWERS SIGNAL BEACONS

• Signal towers Ø70mm • Signal beacons Ø62mm
• Steady, blinking light or flash modules • Blinking or steady light modules
• Pulsed or continuous sound modules • Sound-light pulsed or continuous modules
• Incandescent and LED bulbs. • Incandescent and LED bulbs.
SIGNAL TOWERS AND BEACONS 8
Signal towers Ø70mm

Modular and combinations up to
7 modules
Steady or blinking light, pulsed or
continuous sound modules.
Signal beacons Ø62mm

Steady or blinking light, pulsed or
continuous sound modules.
SEC. - PAGE
Signal towers and beacons
Signal towers Ø70mm / Ø2.75” ....................................................................................................................................... 8 - 2
Signal beacons Ø62mm / Ø2.44” ..................................................................................................................................... 8 - 3
Accessorios ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8 - 4
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 8 - 6
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 8 - 7
S IGNALLING
AND
C ONTROL
Signal towers Order code Description Qty per Wt General characteristics

Ø70mm / Ø2.75” pkg Signal towers are fundamental elements in
n° [kg] manufacturing processes for the visual and audible
signalling of the system status.
Steady light modules BA15d fitting. The signal towers can be assembled by stacking up to
Bulb (8 LT7 ALB... and 8 LT7 ALL...) not included. 7 modules, in the following sequence, starting from the
8 LT7 EL1 Orange 1 0.082 top: red, yellow, orange, blue, green and white.
8 LT7 EL3 Green 1 0.082 The sound module, if any, must always be positioned at
the top of the signal tower.
8 LT7 EL4 Red 1 0.082
8 LT7 EL5 Yellow 1 0.082 Technical characteristics
8 LT7 EL6 Blue 1 0.082 – Maximum operational voltage: 250VAC/DC
– Consumption of flash and sound modules:
8 LT7 EL8 White 1 0.082 • LT7 FL B... in AC: 135mA
Blinking light modules. BA15d fitting. • LT7 FL B... in DC: 75mA
Bulb (8 LT7 ALB... and 8 LT7ALL...) not included. • LT7 FL E...: 20mA
8 LT7 GL B1 Orange, 24VAC/DC 1 0.083 • LT7 FL M...: 15mA
• LT7 S0 B: 25mA
8 LT7 GL B3 Green, 24VAC/DC 1 0.083 • LT7 S1 B: 40mA
8 LT7 GL B4 Red, 24VAC/DC 1 0.083 • LT7 S2 B: 200mA
8 LT7 GL B5 Yellow, 24VAC/DC 1 0.083 • LT7 S2 E: 40mA
• LT7 S2 M: 30mA
8 LT7 GL B6 Blue, 24VAC/DC 1 0.083 – Material: Polycarbonate or anodised aluminium
8 8 LT7 GL B8 White, 24VAC/DC 1 0.083 – Connections: Screw clamp terminals, maximum
8 LT7 GL E1 Orange, 110-120VAC 1 0.083 1.5mm2/16 AWG conductor section
– Tightening torque: 0.5Nm/4.5lbin
8 LT7 GL E3 Green, 110-120VAC 1 0.083 – Operating temperature: -20...+50°C; for 12VAC max up
8 LT7 GL E4 Red, 110-120VAC 1 0.083 to +40°C
8 LT7 GL E5 Yellow,110-120VAC 1 0.083 – Number of stackable elements: Seven.
– Degree of protection IEC/EN: IP65; IP54 for 8 LT7 S0B
8 LT7 GL E6 Blue, 110-120VAC 1 0.083 sound module.
8 LT7 GL E8 White, 110-120VAC 1 0.083
8 LT7 GL M1 Orange, 230-240VAC 1 0.083 Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed, for USA and
8 LT7 GL M3 Green, 230-240VAC 1 0.083 Canada (cULus - file E318016) as Power Circuit and
8 LT7 GL M4 Red, 230-240VAC 1 0.083 motor-mounted Apparatus - Stackable tower lights.
8 LT7 GL M5 Yellow, 230-240VAC 1 0.083 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-5-1,
IEC/EN 60947-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
8 LT7 GL M6 Blue, 230-240VAC 1 0.083
8 LT7 GL M8 White, 230-240VAC 1 0.083 Combinations
Flash modules. With 4-Joule xenon bulb.
8 LT7 FL B1 Orange, 24VAC/DC 1 0.092 Sound module Cover
(always on top) (supplied with
8 LT7 FL B3 Green, 24VAC/DC 1 0.092 LT7S … LT7 CM 01 and
M
LT7 CP 01 module)
8 LT7 FL B4 Red, 24VAC/DC 1 0.092
U
8 LT7 FL B5 Yellow, 24VAC/DC 1 0.092

I M
8 LT7 FL B6 Blue, 24VAC/DC 1 0.092

X
8 LT7 FL B8 White, 24VAC/DC 1 0.092

A
8 LT7 FL E1 Orange, 110-120VAC 1 0.092

M
8 LT7 FL E3 Green, 110-120VAC 1 0.092

LT7 EL … 8 LT7 FL E4 Red, 110-120VAC 1 0.092
T S
LT7ALB…
LT7 GL … 8 LT7 FL E5 Yellow, 110-120VAC 1 0.092 (incandescent
LT7 L…
LT7 FL … LT7 L …
bulb)
E N
8 LT7 FL E6 Blue, 110-120VAC 1 0.092

LT7 L… LT7ALL…
8 LT7 FL E8 White, 110-120VAC 1 0.092 (LED bulb)
E L E M
8 LT7 FL M1 Orange, 230-240VAC 1 0.092

8 LT7 FL M3 Green, 230-240VAC 1 0.092
8 LT7 FL M4 Red, 230-240VAC 1 0.092
8 LT7 FL M5 Yellow, 230-240VAC 1 0.092
7
8 LT7 FL M6 Blue, 230-240VAC 1 0.092

LT7 S … 8 LT7 FL M8 White, 230-240VAC 1 0.092
Pulsed or continuous sound modules complete with cover. Connection module
LT7CM 01 (metal)
8 LT7 S0 B 24VAC/DC, pulsed (90dB). 1 0.240 LT7CP 01(plastic)
IP54 protection
8 LT7 S1 B 24VAC/DC, 16 sound tones 1 0.240 LT7BP 01 LT7TM
(80dB max). IP65 protection (plastic) (metal)
LT7BM 02
8 LT7 S2 B 24VAC/DC pulsed (78dB) 1 0.240 LT7BM 01 (metal)
or continuous (metal) LT7BP 02
8 LT7 S2 E 110-120VAC 1 0.240
(75dB)sound (plastic)
8 LT7 S2 M 230-240VAC IP65 protection 1 0.240 Fixing base and extension tubes
Connection modules complete with cover.
LT7 CM 01 8 LT7 CP 01 For plastic tubes, black 1 0.110
LT7 CP 01 colour, bottom entry
8 LT7 CM 01 For metal tubes, black colour, 1 0.120
bottom entry
84.5dB for 8 LT7 S2 B.
82.6dB for 8 LT7 S2 B.
Accessories and spare parts Dimensions Wiring diagrams

8-2 page 8-4 pages 8-6 and 7 page 8-7
Signal beacons Order code Description Qty per Wt General characteristics

Ø62mm / Ø2.44” pkg Signal beacons are fundamental elements in
n° [kg] manufacturing processes for the visual and audible
signalling of the system status.
Steady light modules. BA15d fitting.
Bulb not included. Technical characteristics
8 LB6 EL1 Orange 1 0.060 – Maximum operational voltage: 250VAC/DC
8 LB6 EL3 Green 1 0.060 – Consumption of sound modules LB6 S2...: 150mA
– Material: Polycarbonate
8 LB6 EL4 Red 1 0.060 – Connections: Screw clamp terminals, maximum
8 LB6 EL5 Yellow 1 0.060 1.5mm2/16 AWG conductor section
8 LB6 EL6 Blu2 1 0.060 – Tightening torque: 0.5Nm/4.5lbin
– Operating temperature: -20...+50°C
8 LB6 EL8 White 1 0.060 – Degree of protection IEC/EN: IP54; IP30 if used with
Blinking or steady light modules. BA15d fitting. 8 LB6 BP 04, 8 LB6 BP 06 or 8 LB6 BP 08.
Bulb not included.
8 LB6 GL B1 Orange, 12-48VAC/DC 1 0.060 Reference standards
8 LB6 GL B3 Green, 12-48VAC/DC 1 0.060 IEC/EN 60947-1.
8 LB6 GL B4 Red, 12-48VAC/DC 1 0.060
8 LB6 GL B5 Yellow, 12-48VAC/DC 1 0.060 Combinations
8 LB6 GL B6 Blue, 12-48VAC/DC 1 0.060
8 LB6 GL B8 White, 12-48VAC/DC 1 0.060 Light and sound modules
8
8 LB6 GL M1 Orange, 24-230VAC 1 0.060 LB6 EL… - LB6 GL… - LB6 S2…B…
8 LB6 GL M3 Green, 24-230VAC 1 0.060 1 3 4 5 6 8
8 LB6 GL M4 Red, 24-230VAC 1 0.060

8 LB6 GL M5 Yellow, 24-230VAC 1 0.060
8 LB6 GL M6 Blue, 24-230VAC 1 0.060
8 LB6 GL M8 White, 24-230VAC 1 0.060 Fixing base and extension tubes
Sound-light pulsed or continuous modules. Bulb included.

8 LB6 S2 B1 Orange, 24VAC/DC (80dB) 1 0.060
LB6 BP 03 LB6 BP 05 LB6 BP 07
8 LB6 S2 B3 Green, 24VAC/DC (80dB) 1 0.060
8 LB6 S2 B4 Red, 24VAC/DC (80dB) 1 0.060
8 LB6 S2 B5 Yellow, 24VAC/DC (80dB) 1 0.060
LB6 BP 04 LB6 BP 06 LB6 BP 08
8 LB6 S2 B6 Blue, 24VAC/DC (80dB) 1 0.060
8 LB6 S2 B8 White, 24VAC/DC (80dB) 1 0.060
LT7 ALB…
(incandescent bulb) LT7 TP0100
LT7 ALL… LT7 BP 01 LT7 BP 02

(LED Bulb) (plastic) (plastic)
Only for sound-light modules.
LB6 EL …
LB6 GL …
LB6 S2...
Visual code Red Yellow Orange Blue Green White Interpretation of light and sound signals for signal
Meaning Danger. Warning and Mandatory Normal No specific towers and beacons
Emergency. Caution. command. situation. meaning. Light and sound signals are a fundamental element for
Abnormal Regular the safety of a system.
situation. operation. To avoid incorrect interpretations, a European standard
Sound Fast modulated Continuous Alternating Constant and Other sounds. has been introduced defining an equivocal meaning to
repetition or short sound. sound at. prolonged visual or audible signalling devices.
high-pitch constant tone sound Each colour or sound alarm corresponds to a specific
pulsing. after an alarm. state of operation of the connected system and various
levels of warning, as given in the following table,
Correlated Immediate Control Intervention No specific Depending on according to EN 981-IEC/EN 60073 standards.
actions intervention intervention needed for action. the situation. The white coloured module does not have a specific
to deal with required. mandatory meaning so it can be used as one may need.
dangerous action.
situation.

page 8-4 pages 8-6 and 7 page 8-7 8-3
Accessories and spare Order code Description Qty per Wt General characteristics
parts for signal towers and pkg The assembly operation of the signal towers is simple
n° [kg] and fast and does not require the use of any tools.
beacons The fixing of each element on top of the other is obtained
Fixing bases. by the bayonet insert joint, with slight pressure and
8 LT7 BP 01 Horizontal surface mount, 1 0.045 simple rotating movement. There are specific white
black plastic inscriptions to indicate the correct alignment.
with 100mm/3.94”
extension
8 LT7 BP 02 Vertical wall mount, 1 0.078
black plastic
Extension tube for plastic base, stackable sections.
8 LT7 TP 0100 100mm/3.94”, 1 0.029
black plastic
LT7 BP 01 Incandescent bulb, 5W, BA15d fitting.
8 LT7 ALB A 12VAC/DC 10 0.006
8 LT7 ALB B 24VAC/DC 10 0.006 1 1
8 LT7 ALB E 130VAC/DC 10 0.006 2
8 LT7 ALB M 260VAC/DC 10 0.006
LED bulb, BA15d fitting.
8 8 LT7 ALL A4 Red, 12VAC/DC 1 0,010
2
8 LT7 ALL A8 White, 12VAC/DC 1 0,010

LT7 BP 02
8 LT7 ALL B3 Green, 24VAC/DC 1 0.010
8 LT7 ALL B4 Red, 24VAC/DC 1 0.010
8 LT7 ALL B5 Yellow/Orange, 24VAC/DC 1 0.010
8 LT7 ALL B6 Blue, 24VAC/DC 1 0.010
8 LT7 ALL B8 White, 24VAC/DC 1 0.010
LT7 ALB…
8 LT7 ALL E3 Green, 110-120VAC 1 0.010
8 LT7 ALL E4 Red, 110-120VAC 1 0.010 Technical characteristics
8 LT7 ALL E5 Yellow/Orange, 110-120VAC 1 0.010 – Consumption of bulb fitted on light modules:
• LT7 ALB A: 420mA
8 LT7 ALL E6 Blue, 110-120VAC 1 0.010 • LT7 ALB B: 210mA
8 LT7 ALL E8 White, 110-120VAC 1 0.010 • LT7 ALB E: 43mA
8 LT7 ALL M3 Green, 230-240VAC 1 0.010 • LT7 ALB M: 22mA
• LT7 ALL A...: <60mA
8 LT7 ALL M4 Red, 230-240VAC 1 0.010 • LT7 ALL B...: <30mA
LT7 ALL…
8 LT7 ALL M5 Yellow/Orange, 230-240VAC 1 0.010 • LT7 ALL E...: <20mA
8 LT7 ALL M6 Blue, 230-240VAC 1 0.010 • LT7 ALL M...: <20mA.
8 LT7 ALL M8 White, 230-240VAC 1 0.010 Reference standards
Used with yellow or orange light modules. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-5-1,
IEC/EN 60947-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Accessories and spare Order code Description Qty per Wt

parts for signal towers pkg
n° [kg]
Ø70mm / Ø2.75” only
Fixing bases.
8 LT7 BM 01 Horizontal surface mount, 1 0.099
metal, black finish
8 LT7 BM 02 Vertical wall mount, 1 0.184
metal
Extension tubes for metal base, anodised aluminium,
LT7 BM 01 fixed non-stackable sections.
8 LT7 TM 0100 100mm / 3.94” 1 0.016
8 LT7 TM 0150 200mm / 7.9” 1 0.024
8 LT7 TM 0300 300mm / 11.8” 1 0.048
8 LT7 TM 0400 400mm / 15.75” 1 0.064
8 LT7 TM 0500 500mm / 19.7” 1 0.080
8 LT7 TM 1000 1000mm / 39.4” 1 0.160
LT7 BM 02
LT7 TM
Dimensions
8-4 page 8-7
Accessories and spare Order code Description Qty per Wt General characteristics
parts for signal beacons pkg The assembly operation of the signal beacons is simple
n° [kg] and fast and does not require the use of any tools.
Ø62mm / Ø2.44” There are specific white marks to indicate the correct
Fixing bases for light modules. alignment.
8 LB6 BP 03 Horizontal surface mount, 1 0.040
plastic, black colour
8 LB6 BP 05 For Ø22mm / Ø0.87” 1 0.040
hole type, black plastic
8 LB6 BP 07 For extension 1 0.020
connection, plastic,
LB6 BP03 black colour. Use with
fixing bases 8 LT7 BP 01
and 8 LT7 BP 02 2
1
Fixing bases for sound modules.
8 LB6 BP 04 Horizontal surface mount, 1 0.040
plastic, black colour
8 LB6 BP 06 For Ø22mm / Ø0.87” 1 0.040
LB6 BP05 hole type, black plastic
8 LB6 BP 08 For extension 1 0.020
connection, plastic,
black colour. Use with 8
fixing bases 8 LT7 BP 01
and 8 LT7 BP 02
LB6 BP07
LB6 BP04
LB6 BP06
LB6 BP08
Dimensions
page 8-7 8-5
SIGNAL TOWERS Ø70mm / Ø2.75”

Light modules Sound modules Connection modules
LT7 EL... LT7 S0 B LT7 S1... LT7 CM 01
LT7 GL... LT7 S2... LT7 CP 01
LT7 EL... LT7 FL...
(0.63”)
LT7 GL...
16
LT7 FL...
LT7 S1... Ø 60 (2.36”)
(0.51)
13
LT7 S0 B LT7 S2...
(0.51”)
13
92 (3.62”)
Ø 60 (2.36”)
72 (2.83”)
56 (2.20”)
45.5 (1.79”)
Ø 70 (2.75”) Ø 70 (2.75”) Ø 70 (2.75”) Ø 70 (2.75”)
473.5 (18.64”)
453.9 (17.87”)
8
381.5 (15.02”)
325.5 (12.81”)
269.5 (10.61”)
213.5 (8.40”)
157.5 (6.20”)
101.5 (4.00”)
LT7 CM 01 - LT7 CP 01
Ø5 (0.20”)
7 (0.2
7”)
.65”)
42 (1
48
(1
.89
”)
SIGNAL BEACONS Ø62mm / Ø2.44”

LB6 EL... LB6... LB6... LB6...
LB6 GL... with base LB6 BP 03 with base LB6 BP 05 with base LB6 BP 07
LB6 S2... and LB6 BP 04 and LB6 BP 06 and LB6 BP 08
62.5 (2.46”)
62.5 (2.46”)
62.5 (2.46”)
62.5 (2.46”)
17 (0.67”)
(1.22”)
(1.46”)
31
37
(0.92”)
23.5
Ø22
Ø85 (3.35”) (0.87”)
Ø62 (2.44”) Ø62 (2.44”) Ø62 (2.44”)
Ø5 (0.20”)
65 (2.56”)
(1.28”)
32.5
56.3 22.3 (0.88”)

(22.17”) (+0.4,-0 / +0.01, -0”)
With slits for sound light modules LB6 S2...

1...4 (0.04...0.16”)
8-6
ACCESSORIES - Extensions and bases

LT7 BP 01 LT7 BP 02 LT7 BM 01 LT7 BM 02
(0.43”)
Ø25 Ø25 Ø20
22 (0.87”)
11
(0.98”) (0.98”) Ø30 (0.79”) 71 (2.79”)
(0.71”)
(1.18”)
Ø20 Ø20
18
(0.79”) (0.79”) 105 (4.13”)
(0.35”)
20
9
(0.79”)
51 (2.01”)
(0.31”)
109 (4.29”)
Ø5
64.5 (2.54”)
8
Ø5 70 (2.75”) (0.20”)
122 (4.80”)
(0.20”)
54 (2.12”)
Ø5
(0.20”)
54 (2.12”)
(0.83”)
21
54 (2.12”)
38 (1.50”) 70 (2.75”)
(0.57”)
14.5
Ø67 (2.64”) 54 (2.12”)

(0.31”)
8
Ø70 (2.75”)
54 (2.12”)
Ø5
(0.20”) 8
54 (2.12”)
LT7 TP 0100 LT7 TM...

Ø25 Ø20
(0.98”) (0.79”)
Ø20
(0.87”)
(0.79”)
22
1000 (39.37”) max

122 (4.80”)
Wiring diagrams
SIGNAL TOWERS Ø 70mm SIGNAL BEACONS Ø 62mm

LT7... LB6...
LT7 CM 01 - LT7 CP 01 X1
BULB BULB
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
X2
L
N
Connect terminals C and 1 as indicated

to power the first module. If other
modules are fitted, the respective
terminals must be connected accordingly.
8-7
PLASTIC LIMIT SWITCHES METAL LIMIT SWITCHES PREWIRED METAL LIMIT SWITCHES
KB-KC TYPES KM-KN TYPES KP TYPE
• Dimensions to EN 50047 standards for KB type • Dimensions to EN 50047 standards for KM • Dimensions to EN 50047 stadards
• Dimensions compatible to EN 50047 for KC type type • 2 metre long cable
• Self-extinguishing polymer thermoplastic housing • Dimensions compatible to EN 50047 for KN • IEC degree of protection IP67.
• Removable and interchangeable auxiliary contact type
blocks • Aluminium-zinc alloy housing
• Bi-directional versions • Removable and interchangeable auxiliary
• Unique fixing mechanism of operating head contact blocks
• IEC degree of protection IP65 • Bi-directional versions
• M20 cable entry; PG13.5 or 1/2 NPT entry • Unique fixing mechanism of operating head
available. • IEC degree of protection IP65
• M20 cable entry; PG13.5 or 1/2 NPT entry
available.
PLASTIC LIMIT SWITCHES METAL LIMIT SWITCHES ROPE-PULL LEVER LIMIT SWITCHES
T SERIES PL SERIES FOR NORMAL STOPPING
• Dimensions to EN 50041 standards • Aluminium-zinc alloy housing • Self-extinguishing polymer thermoplastic
• Self-extinguishing polymer thermoplastic • Maximum of 2 auxiliary contacts housing
housing • IEC degree of protection IP40 and IP65 • Aluminium-zinc alloy housing
• Heads rotatable in 4 different 90° angle • PG11 cable entry. • IEC degree of protection IP40, IP65 and
positions IP66
• IEC degree of protection IP66 • PG11 and PG13.5 cable entry.
• PG13.5 cable entry.
ROPE-PULL LEVER LIMIT SWITCHES PLASTIC MICRO SWITCHES FOOT SWITCHES

FOR EMERGENCY STOPPING KS TYPE • Versions with or without protection cover
• Compliant to ISO 13850 standards • Polymer thermoplastic housing • Self-extinguishing polymer thermoplastic
• IEC degree of protection IP65 and IP66 • Changeover contact switch housing
• PG11 and PG13.5 cable entry. • IEC degree of protection IP00 or IP20. • Aluminium-zinc alloy housing
• IEC degree of protection IP54 and IP65
• M20 cable entry.
LIMIT, MICRO AND FOOT SWITCHES 9
Dimensions to EN 50047 standards

Dimensions compatible to
EN 50047
Dimensions to EN 50041 standards
Direct opening action of NC contacts
Extensive range of operating heads
Versions complete with
interchangeable and rotatable heads
Insertable and interchangeable
auxiliary contact blocks.
SEC. - PAGE
Metal and plastic limit switches, K series
(dimensions to/compatible to EN 50047)
Top push rod plunger ........................................................................................................................................................ 9 - 2
Top roller push plunger ...................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 3
Roller centre push lever ..................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 4
Roller side push lever ........................................................................................................................................................ 9 - 5
Roller lever ........................................................................................................................................................................ 9 - 6
Adjustable roller lever ........................................................................................................................................................ 9 - 8
Ceramic rod lever .............................................................................................................................................................. 9 - 10
Adjustable rod lever ........................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 11
Wobble stick, omnidirectional ............................................................................................................................................ 9 - 12
Hinge operating ................................................................................................................................................................. 9 - 13
Slotted lever ...................................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 14
Key operated ..................................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 15
Accessories and spare parts .............................................................................................................................................. 9 - 16
Prewired metal limit switches, K series .................................................................................................................... 9 - 18
Plastic limit switches T series (dimensions to EN 50041)
Top push rod plunger and roller lever.................................................................................................................................. 9 - 19
Wobble stick, omnidirectional and key operated ................................................................................................................. 9 - 20
Metal limit switches, PL series
Top push rod plunger, top roller push plunger, roller centre push lever ................................................................................ 9 - 21
Latch and manual release ................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 22
Manual reload and magnetic release .................................................................................................................................. 9 - 22
Bi-directional .................................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 22
Rope-pull lever limit switches for normal stopping ................................................................................................ 9 - 23
S IGNALLING
Rope-pull lever limit switches for emergency stopping, ISO 13850 compliant ................................................. 9 - 25
Plastic micro switches, K series .................................................................................................................................. 9 - 26
Foot switches, K series .................................................................................................................................................. 9 - 27
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 9 - 28
AND
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 9 - 35

C ONTROL
Limit, micro and foot switches
Limit switches, K series. One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047
Top push rod plunger Order code Contacts Plunger Qty Wt General characteristics
Plastic Metal material per The LOVATO ELECTRIC limit switches have been
body body pkg designed to satisfy requirements comprising quick
n° [kg] installation, easy wiring, simple setup, modularity,
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. sturdiness and constant reliability.
The body cover is hinged at the bottom and removable.
KB A1 S11 KM A1 S11 1NO+1NC Metal 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
Snap action remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB A1 S02 KM A1 S02 2NC Metal 5 configuration with no tools.
Snap action The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB A1 A11 KM A1 A11 1NO+1NC Metal 5 remarkable wiring ease.
Slow action make
before break Operational characteristics
– Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
KB A1 L11 KM A1 L11 1NO+1NC Metal 5 – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
KB A... - KM A... Slow action – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB A1 L02 KM A1 L02 2NC Metal 5 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
Slow action – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
KB A1 L20 KM A1 L20 2NO Metal 5 • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
Slow action • A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
KB A1 L12 KM A1 L12 1NO+2NC Metal 5 • 690VAC for KB-KC types
Slow action • 440VAC for KM-KN types
KB A1 L21 KM A1 L21 2NO+1NC Metal 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
Slow action • 6kV for KB-KC types
• 4kV for KM-KN types
9 KB A1 L03 KM A1 L03 3NC
Slow action
Metal 5
– Class II insulation for KB-KC only
– Contact resistance: <10mΩ
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
KC A1 S11 KN A1 S11 1NO+1NC Metal 5 – Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
Snap action – Housing:
KC A1 S02 KN A1 S02 2NC Metal 5 • KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
Snap action polymer thermoplastic
• KM-KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
KC A1 A11 KN A1 A11 1NO+1NC Metal 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
Slow action make 1
/2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
before break – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
KC A... - KN A... KC A1 L11 KN A1 L11 1NO+1NC Metal 5 – Operating force: 5N / 1.1lb
Slow action – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
KC A1 L02 KN A1 L02 2NC Metal 5 – Tightening torque:
Slow action • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
• Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC A1 L20 KN A1 L20 2NO Metal 5 • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
Slow action – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to – Ambient conditions:
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside • Storage temperature: -40 ... +70°C
front cover. • Pollution degree: 3
• IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
• IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.

Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
Limit switches.
M20 CABLE ENTRY Compliant with standards: EN 50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
For types with PG13.5 cable entry, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
add the letter P at the end of the order CSA C22.2 n° 14.
code while for 1/2 NPT, add N.
E.g. KBA1S11P - KBA1S11N
Forward travel of snap action contacts open K... L02 21-22

Return travel of snap action contacts closed 11-12
0 2.4 6mm
0” 0.09” 0.24”
K... S11 21-22
13-14 K... L20 13-14
21-22 23-24
13-14 0 2.4 6mm
0” 0.09” 0.24”
0 1.1 2.3 6mm
0” 0.04” 0.09” 0.24”
K... L12 21-22
K... S02 11-12 31-32
21-22 13-14
11-12 0 2.2 3 6mm
21-22 0” 0.09” 0.12” 0.24”
0 1.1 2.3 6mm K... L21 31-32
0” 0.04” 0.09” 0.24”
23-24
K... A11 25-26 13-14
17-18 0 2.4 2.8 6mm
0 1.4 2.5 6mm 0” 0,09” 0.11” 0.24”
0” 0.05” 0.1” 0.24”
K... L03 11-12
K... L11 13-14 21-22
21-22 31-32
0 2.1 3.3 6mm 0 2.2 6mm
0” 0.08” 0,13” 0.24” 0” 0.09” 0.24”

9-2 pages 9-16 and 17 page 9-28 page 9-35
Top roller push plunger Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt General characteristics
Ø11x4 n° [kg] installation, easy wiring, simple setup, modularity,
KB B1 S11 KM B1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KB B2 S11 KM B2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB B1 S02 KM B1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
of 45° angles.
KB B2 S02 KM B2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB B1 A11 KM B1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KB B2 A11 KM B2 A11 Slow action make Metal 5
KB B1 L11 KM B1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
KB B... - KM B... KB B2 L11 KM B2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB B1 L02 KM B1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
– UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
KB B2 L02 KM B2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
KB B1 L20 KM B1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
KB B2 L20 KM B2 L20 Slow action Metal 5 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
• 690VAC for KB-KC types
KB B1 L12 KM B1 L12 1NO+2NC Plastic 5 • 440VAC for KM-KN types
KB B2 L12 KM B2 L12 Slow action Metal 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
• 6kV for KB-KC types
KB B1 L21 KM B1 L21 2NO+1NC Plastic 5
• 4kV for KM-KN types 9
KB B2 L21 KM B2 L21 Slow action Metal 5 – Class II insulation for KB-KC only
KB B1 L03 KM B1 L03 3NC Plastic 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KB B2 L03 KM B2 L03 Slow action Metal 5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
– Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. – Housing:
KC B1 S11 KN B1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KC B2 S11 KN B2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 polymer thermoplastic
KC B1 S02 KN B1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
KC B2 S02 KN B2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 1
KC B1 A11 KN B1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
Slow action make – Operating force: 5N / 1.1lb
KC B2 A11 KN B2 A11 Metal 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
before break
– Tightening torque:
KC B... - KN B... KC B1 L11 KN B1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
KC B2 L11 KN B2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
• Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC B1 L02 KN B1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
KC B2 L02 KN B2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 – Ambient conditions:
KC B1 L20 KN B1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
Slow action • Storage temperature: -40 ... +70°C
KC B2 L20 KN B2 L20 Metal 5 • Pollution degree: 3
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to • IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. • IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside
front cover. Certifications and compliance
Ø11x4mm = Ø0.43x0.16”. Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed for USA and
Limit switches.
Compliant with standards: EN 50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
M20 CABLE ENTRY IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
For types with PG13.5 cable entry, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
add the letter P at the end of the order
E.g. KBB1S11P - KBB1S11N
Forward travel of snap action contacts open

K... L02 21-22
0 3.6 10.4mm
0” 0.14” 0.41”
K... S11 21-22
13-14 K... L20 13-14
21-22 23-24
13-14 0 3.6 10.4mm
0 2 3.9 10.4mm 0” 0.14” 0.41”
0” 0.08” 0.15” 0.41”
K... L12 21-22
K... S02 11-12 31-32
21-22 13-14
11-12 0 3.8 4.7 10.4mm
21-22 0” 0.15” 0.18” 0.41”
0 2 3.9 10.4mm
0” 0.08” 0.15” 0.41” K... L21 31-32
23-24
K... A11 25-26 13-14
17-18 0 3.8 4.7 10.4mm
0 1.9 3.8 10.4mm 0” 0.15” 0.18” 0.41”
0” 0.07” 0.15” 0.41”
K... L03 11-12
K... L11 13-14 21-22
21-22 31-32
0 4.2 5.7 10.4mm 0 3.8 10.4mm
0” 0.16” 0.22” 0.41” 0” 0.15” 0.41”

pages 9-16 and 17 page 9-28 page 9-35 9-3
Roller centre push lever Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt General characteristics
KB C1 S11 KM C1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KB C2 S11 KM C2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB C1 S02 KM C1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
of 45° angles.
KB C2 S02 KM C2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB C1 A11 KM C1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KB C2 A11 KM C2 A11 Slow action make Metal 5
KB C1 L11 KM C1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
KB C2 L11 KM C2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB C1 L02 KM C1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB C... - KM C...
KB C2 L02 KM C2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
KB C1 L20 KM C1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
KB C2 L20 KM C2 L20 Slow action Metal 5 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
KB C1 L12 KM C1 L12 1NO+2NC Plastic 5 • 440VAC for KM-KN types
KB C2 L12 KM C2 L12 Slow action Metal 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
9 KB C1 L21 KM C1 L21 2NO+1NC Plastic 5
KB C2 L21 KM C2 L21 Slow action Metal 5 – Class II insulation for KB-KC only
KB C1 L03 KM C1 L03 3NC Plastic 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KB C2 L03 KM C2 L03 Slow action Metal 5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
KC C1 S11 KN C1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KC C2 S11 KN C2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 polymer thermoplastic
KC C1 S02 KN C1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
KC C2 S02 KN C2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 1
KC C1 A11 KN C1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
Slow action make – Operating force: 6N / 1.34lb
KC C2 A11 KN C2 A11 Metal 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
before break
KC C1 L11 KN C1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
KC C2 L11 KN C2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC C... - KN C... • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC C1 L02 KN C1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
KC C2 L02 KN C2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 – Ambient conditions:
KC C1 L20 KN C1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
KC C2 L20 KN C2 L20 Metal 5 • Pollution degree: 3
front cover. Certifications and compliance
Limit switches.
E.g. KBC1S11P - KBC1S11N

K... L02 21-22
0 7.4 21mm
0” 0.29” 0.83”
K... S11 21-22
13-14 K... L20 13-14
21-22 23-24
13-14 0 7.4 21mm
0 1.8 8.15 21mm 0” 0.29” 0.83”
0” 0.07” 0.32” 0.83”
K... L12 21-22
K... S02 11-12 31-32
21-22 13-14
11-12 0 7.8 9.5 21mm
21-22 0” 0.31” 0.37” 0.83”
0 1.8 8.15 21mm
0” 0.07” 0.32” 0.83” K... L21 31-32
23-24
K... A11 25-26 13-14
17-18 0 7.8 9.5 21mm
0 3.9 7.4 21mm 0” 0.31” 0.37” 0.83”
0” 0.15” 0.29” 0.83”
K... L03 11-12
K... L11 13-14 21-22
21-22 31-32
0 7.4 10.2 21mm 0 7.8 21mm
0” 0.29” 0.40” 0.83” 0” 0.31” 0.83”

Roller side push lever Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt General characteristics
KB D1 S11 KM D1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KB D2 S11 KM D2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB D1 S02 KM D1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
of 45° angles.
KB D2 S02 KM D2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB D1 A11 KM D1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KB D2 A11 KM D2 A11 Slow action make Metal 5
KB D1 L11 KM D1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
KB D2 L11 KM D2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB D1 L02 KM D1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB D... - KM D... KB D2 L02 KM D2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
KB D1 L20 KM D1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
KB D2 L20 KM D2 L20 Slow action Metal 5 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
KB D1 L12 KM D1 L12 1NO+2NC Plastic 5 • 440VAC for KM-KN types
KB D2 L12 KM D2 L12 Slow action Metal 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
KB D1 L21 KM D1 L21 2NO+1NC Plastic 5
KB D2 L21 KM D2 L21 Slow action Metal 5 – Class II insulation for KB-KC only
KB D1 L03 KM D1 L03 3NC Plastic 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KB D2 L03 KM D2 L03 Slow action Metal 5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
KC D1 S11 KN D1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KC D2 S11 KN D2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 polymer thermoplastic
KC D1 S02 KN D1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
KC D2 S02 KN D2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 1
KC D1 A11 KN D1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
– Operating force: 6N / 1.34lb
KC D2 A11 KN D2 A11 Slow action make Metal 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
before break
KC D1 L11 KN D1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
KC D2 L11 KN D2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC D... - KN D... • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC D1 L02 KN D1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
KC D2 L02 KN D2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 – Ambient conditions:
KC D1 L20 KN D1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
KC D2 L20 KN D2 L20 Metal 5 • Pollution degree: 3
front cover.
Limit switches.
E.g. KBD1S11P - KBD1S11N

K... L02 21-22
0 6.9 19.5mm
0” 0.27” 0.77”
K... S11 21-22
13-14 K... L20 13-14
21-22 23-24
13-14 0 6.9 19.5mm
0 1.7 7.6 19.5mm 0” 0.27” 0.77”
0” 0.07” 0.30” 0.77”
K... L12 21-22
K... S02 11-12 31-32
21-22 13-14
11-12 0 7.25 8.5 19.5mm
21-22 0” 0.28” 0.33” 0.77”
0 1.7 7.6 19.5mm
0” 0.07” 0.30” 0.77” K... L21 31-32
23-24
K... A11 25-26 13-14
17-18 0 7.25 8.5 19.5mm
0 3.7 6.9 19.5mm 0” 0.28” 0.33” 0.77”
0” 0.14” 0.27” 0.77”
K... L03 11-12
K... L11 13-14 21-22
21-22 31-32
0 6.9 9.5 19.5mm 0 7.25 19.5mm
0” 0.27” 0.37” 0.77” 0” 0.28” 0.77”

Limit switches, K series.
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047
Roller lever plunger Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt General characteristics
KB E1 S11 KM E1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KB E2 S11 KM E2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB E3 S11 KM E3 S11 Rubber 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
of 45° angles.
KB E1 S02 KM E1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB E2 S02 KM E2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KB E3 S02 KM E3 S02 Rubber 5
KB E1 A11 KM E1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
KB E2 A11 KM E2 A11 Slow action make Metal 5 – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
before break – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB E3 A11 KM E3 A11 Rubber 5
– IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB E1 L11 KM E1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
KM E2 L11 Slow action Metal 5
KB E1... - KB E2...
KB E2 L11 • A600 Q300 for KB types
KM E1... - KM E2...
KB E3 L11 KM E3 L11 Rubber 5 • A300 Q300 for KM types
KB E1 L02 KM E1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 • 690V for KB types
KB E2 L02 KM E2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 • 440V for KM types
KB E3 L02 KM E3 L02 Rubber 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
• 6kVAC for KB types
9 KB E1 L20 KM E1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • 4kVAC for KM types
KB E2 L20 KM E2 L20 Slow action Metal 5 – Class II insulation for KB only
KB E3 L20 KM E3 L20 Rubber 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
– Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
KB E1 L12 KM E1 L12 1NO+2NC Plastic 5 – Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
KB E2 L12 KM E2 L12 Slow action Metal 5 – Housing:
KB E3 L12 KM E3 L12 Rubber 5 • KB types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
polymer thermoplastic
KB E1 L21 KM E1 L21 2NO+1NC Plastic 5 • KM types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
KB E2 L21 KM E2 L21 Slow action Metal 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
1
KB E3 L21 KM E3 L21 Rubber 5 /2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
– Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
KB E1 L03 KM E1 L03 3NC Plastic 5 – Operating torque: 3Ncm / 4.25ozin
KB E3... - KM E3... KB E2 L03 KM E2 L03 Slow action Metal 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
KB E3 L03 KM E3 L03 Rubber 5 – Tightening torque:
• Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
BI-DIRECTIONAL. • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KB E1 D02 KM E1 D02 2NC Plastic 5 – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
independent – Ambient conditions:
Ø19x5mm = Ø0.75x0,2”. • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
Ø50x10mm = Ø1.97”x0.39”. • Storage temperature: -40 ... +70°C
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to • Pollution degree: 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. • IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside • IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
front cover.
M20 CABLE ENTRY Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
For types with PG13.5 cable entry, Limit switches.
add the letter P at the end of the order Compliant with standards: EN 50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
E.g. KBE1S11P - KBE1S11N
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Forward travel of snap action contacts open K... L20 13-14

0 27° 85°
K... S11 21-22
13-14
21-22
K... L12 21-22
31-32
13-14
13-14
0 15° 30° 85°
0 28° 38° 85°
K... S02 11-12
21-22 K... L21 31-32
11-12 23-24
21-22 13-14
0 15° 30° 85° 0 28° 38° 85°
K... A11 25-26 K... L03 11-12

17-18 21-22
31-32
0 14° 27° 85°
0 28° 85°
K... L11 13-14
21-22 K... D02
0 30° 40° 85° 75° 28° 28° 75°
K... L02 21-22 21-22
11-12 11-12
0 27° 85°

Roller lever plunger Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt General characteristics
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. sturdiness and constant reliability.
KC E1 S11 KN E1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KC E2 S11 KN E2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KC E3 S11 KN E3 S11 Rubber 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
of 90° angles.
KC E1 S02 KN E1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KC E2 S02 KN E2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KC E3 S02 KN E3 S02 Rubber 5
KC E1 A11 KN E1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
KC E2 A11 KN E2 A11 Slow action make Metal 5 – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
before break – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KC E3 A11 KN E3 A11 Rubber 5
KC E1... - KC E2... KC E1 L11 KN E1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
KN E1... - KN E2... Slow action Metal 5
KC E2 L11 KN E2 L11 • A600 Q300 for KC types
KC E3 L11 KN E3 L11 Rubber 5 • A300 Q300 for KN types
KC E1 L02 KN E1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 • 690VAC for KC types
KC E2 L02 KN E2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 • 440VAC for KN types
KC E3 L02 KN E3 L02 Rubber 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
• 6kV for KC types
KC E1 L20 KN E1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • 4kV for KN types 9
KC E2 L20 KN E2 L20 Slow action Metal 5 – Class II insulation for KC only
KC E3 L20 KN E3 L20 Rubber 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
BI-DIRECTIONAL. – Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
KC E1 D02 KN E1 D02 2NC Plastic 5 • KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
independent polymer thermoplastic
Ø19x5mm = Ø0.75x0,2”. • KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
Ø50x10mm = Ø1.97”x0.39”. – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
1
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to /2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside – Operating torque: 3Ncm/4.25ozin
KC E3... - KN E3... front cover. – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
– Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
• Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
• Storage temperature: -40 ... +70°C
• Pollution degree: 3

Limit switches.
E.g. KCE1S11P - KCE1S11N

Return travel of snap action contacts closed
K... S11 21-22

13-14 K... L02 21-22
21-22 11-12
13-14 0 27° 85°
0 15° 30° 85°
K... S02 11-12 K... L20 13-14

21-22 23-24
11-12 0 27° 85°
21-22
0 15° 30° 85°
K... D02
K... A11 25-26
75° 28° 28° 75°
17-18
21-22
0 14° 27° 85°
11-12
K... L11 13-14
21-22
0 30° 40° 85°

One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047
Adjustable roller lever Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt General characteristics
KB F1 S11 KM F1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KB F2 S11 KM F2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB F3 S11 KM F3 S11 Rubber 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
of 180° angles.
KB F4 S11 KM F4 S11 Rubber 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB F1 S02 KM F1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KB F2 S02 KM F2 S02 Snap action Metal 5
KB F3 S02 KM F3 S02 Rubber 5 – Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
KB F4 S02 KM F4 S02 Rubber 5 – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
KB F1 A11 KM F1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB F2 A11 KM F2 A11 Slow action make Metal 5 – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
before break
KB F3 A11 KM F3 A11 Rubber 5 • A600 Q300 for KB types
KB F4 A11 KM F4 A11 Rubber 5 • A300 Q300 for KM types
KB F1 L11 KM F1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • 690V for KB types
KB F2 L11 KM F2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 • 440V for KM types
KB F3 L11 KM F3 L11 Rubber 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
• 6kVAC for KB types
9 KB F... - KM F...
KB F4 L11 KM F4 L11 Rubber 5 • 4kVAC for KM types
KB F1 L02 KM F1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – Class II insulation for KB only
KB F2 L02 KM F2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KB F3 L02 KM F3 L02 Rubber 5 – Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
KB F4 L02 KM F4 L02 Rubber 5 – Housing:
KB F1 L20 KM F1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • KB types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KB F2 L20 KM F2 L20 Slow action Metal 5 • KM types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
KB F3 L20 KM F3 L20 Rubber 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
1
KB F4 L20 KM F4 L20 Rubber 5 /2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
KB F1 L12 KM F1 L12 1NO+2NC Plastic 5 – Operating force: 3Ncm/4.25ozin
KB F2 L12 KM F2 L12 Slow action Metal 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
KB F3 L12 KM F3 L12 Rubber 5 – Tightening torque:
KB F4 L12 KM F4 L12 Rubber 5 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KB F1 L21 KM F1 L21 2NO+1NC Plastic 5 • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
M20 CABLE ENTRY
For types with PG13.5 cable entry, KB F2 L21 KM F2 L21 Slow action Metal 5 – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
add the letter P at the end of the order – Ambient conditions:
KB F3 L21 KM F3 L21 Rubber 5 • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
E.g. KBF1S11P - KBF1S11N KB F4 L21 KM F4 L21 Rubber 5 • Storage temperature: -40 ... +70°C
KB F1 L03 KM F1 L03 3NC Plastic 5 • Pollution degree: 3
KB F2 L03 KM F2 L03 Slow action Metal 5 • IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
KB F3 L03 KM F3 L03 Rubber 5
KB F4 L03 KM F4 L03 Rubber 5 Certifications and compliance
BI-DIRECTIONAL. Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. Limit switches.
KB F1 D02 KM F1 D02 2NC Plastic 5 Compliant with standards: EN 50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
independent IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
Ø19x5mm = Ø0.75x0.2”. CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Ø50x10mm = Ø1.97x0.34”.
Ø50x10mm (Ø1.97x0.35”) with offset alignment.
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
front cover.
Forward travel of snap action contacts open K ... L20 13-14

0 27° 85°
K ... S11 21-22
13-14
21-22
K ... L12 21-22
31-32
13-14
13-14
0 15° 30° 85°
0 28° 38° 85°
K ... S02 11-12
21-22 K ... L21 31-32
11-12 23-24
21-22 13-14
0 15° 30° 85° 0 28° 38° 85°
K ... A11 25-26 K ... L03 11-12

17-18 21-22
0 14° 27° 85° 31-32
0 28° 85°
K ... L11 13-14
21-22 K... D02
0 30° 40° 85° 75° 28° 28° 75°
K ... L02 21-22 21-22
11-12 11-12
0 27° 85°

Adjustable roller lever Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt General characteristics
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. sturdiness and constant reliability.
KC F1 S11 KN F1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KC F2 S11 KN F2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KC F3 S11 KN F3 S11 Rubber 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
of 180° angles.
KC F4 S11 KN F4 S11 Rubber 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
off. align. remarkable wiring ease.
KC F1 S02 KN F1 S02 2NC Plastic 5
KC F2 S02 KN F2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 Operational characteristics
KC F3 S02 KN F3 S02 Rubber 5 – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
KC F4 S02 KN F4 S02 Rubber 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
off. align. – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KC F1 A11 KN F1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
Slow action make • A600 Q300 for KC types
KC F2 A11 KN F2 A11 Metal 5 • A300 Q300 for KN types
before break
KC F3 A11 KN F3 A11 Rubber 5 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
KC F4 A11 KN F4 A11 Rubber 5 • 690VAC for KC types
off. align. • 440VAC for KN types
– IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
KC F... - KN F... KC F1 L11 KN F1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • 6kV for KC types
KC F2 L11 KN F2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 • 4kV for KN types 9
KC F3 L11 KN F3 L11 Rubber 5 – Class II insulation for KC only
KC F4 L11 KN F4 L11 Rubber 5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
off. align. – Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
KC F1 L02 KN F1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – Housing:
KC F2 L02 KN F2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 • KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KC F3 L02 KN F3 L02 Rubber 5 • KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
KC F4 L02 KN F4 L02 Rubber 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
off. align. 1
KC F1 L20 KN F1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
Slow action – Operating force: 3Ncm/4.25ozin
KC F2 L20 KN F2 L20 Metal 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
KC F3 L20 KN F3 L20 Rubber 5 – Tightening torque:
KC F4 L20 KN F4 L20 Rubber 5 • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
off. align. • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
Ø19x5mm = Ø0.75x0.2”. – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
Ø50x10mm = Ø1.97x0.34”.
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to – Ambient conditions:
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside • Storage temperature: -40 ... +70°C
front cover. • Pollution degree: 3
off. align. = offset alignment. • IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals

Limit switches.
E.g. KCF1S11P - KCF1S11N

K ... S11 21-22

13-14 K ... L11 13-14
21-22 21-22
13-14 0 30° 40° 85°
0 15° 30° 85°
K ... S02 11-12 K ... L02 21-22

21-22 11-12
11-12 0 27° 85°
21-22
0 15° 30° 85°
K ... L20 13-14
K ... A11 25-26 23-24
17-18
0 27° 85°
0 14° 27° 85°

Ceramic rod lever Order code Contacts Rod Qty Wt General characteristics
KB H1 S11 KM H1 S11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
Snap action remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB H1 S02 KM H1 S02 2NC Ceramic 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
Snap action of 45° angles.
KB H1 A11 KM H1 A11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
Slow action make remarkable wiring ease.
before break
KB H1 L11 KM H1 L11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5 – Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
Slow action – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
KB H1 L02 KM H1 L02 2NC Ceramic 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
Slow action – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB H1 L20 KM H1 L20 2NO Ceramic 5 – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
Slow action • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
• A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
KB H1 L12 KM H1 L12 1NO+2NC Ceramic 5 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
Slow action • 690VAC for KB-KC types
KB H... - KM H... KB H1 L21 KM H1 L21 2NO+1NC Ceramic 5 • 440VAC for KM-KN types
Slow action – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
9 KB H1 L03 KM H1 L03 3NC
Slow action
Ceramic 5
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KC H1 S11 KN H1 S11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
Snap action – Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
KC H1 S02 KN H1 S02 2NC Ceramic 5 – Housing:
Snap action • KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KC H1 A11 KN H1 A11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5 • KM-KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
Slow action make – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
before break 1
KC H1 L11 KN H1 L11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
Slow action – Operating torque: 3Ncm/4.25ozin
KC H1 L02 KN H1 L02 2NC Ceramic 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
Slow action – Tightening torque:
KC H1 L20 KN H1 L20 2NO Ceramic 5 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
Slow action • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
KC H... - KN H... IEC/EN 60947-5-1. – Ambient conditions:
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
front cover. • Storage temperature: -40 ... +70°C

Limit switches.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
M20 CABLE ENTRY
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
For types with PG13.5 cable entry,
E.g. KBH1S11P - KBH1S11N

K ... L02 21-22
0 27° 85°
K ... S11 21-22
13-14 K ... L20 13-14
21-22 23-24
13-14 0 27° 85°
0 15° 30° 85°
K ... L12 21-22
K ... S02 11-12 31-32
21-22 13-14
11-12 0 28° 38° 85°
21-22
0 15° 30° 85° K ... L21 31-32
23-24
K ... A11 25-26 13-14
17-18 0 28° 38° 85°
0 14° 27° 85°
K ... L03 11-12
K ... L11 13-14 21-22
21-22 31-32
0 30° 40° 85° 0 28° 85°

Adjustable rod lever Order code Contacts Rod Qty Wt General characteristics
KB L1 S11 KM L1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KB L2 S11 KM L2 S11 Snap action Steel 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB L1 S02 KM L1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
of 90° angles (180° for KC and KN types).
KB L2 S02 KM L2 S02 Snap action Steel 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB L1 A11 KM L1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KB L2 A11 KM L2 A11 Slow action make Steel 5
KB L1 L11 KM L1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
KB L2 L11 KM L2 L11 Slow action Steel 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB L1 L02 KM L1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB L... - KM L... – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
KB L2 L02 KM L2 L02 Slow action Steel 5 • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
KB L1 L20 KM L1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
KB L2 L20 KM L2 L20 Slow action Steel 5 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
KB L1 L12 KM L1 L12 1NO+2NC Plastic 5 • 440VAC for KM-KN types
KB L2 L12 KM L2 L12 Slow action Steel 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
KB L1 L21 KM L1 L21 2NO+1NC Plastic 5
KB L2 L21 KM L2 L21 Slow action Steel 5 – Class II insulation for KB-KC only
KB L1 L03 KM L1 L03 3NC Plastic 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KB L2 L03 KM L2 L03 Slow action Steel 5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
KC L1 S11 KN L1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KC L2 S11 KN L2 S11 Snap action Steel 5 polymer thermoplastic
KC L1 S02 KN L1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
KC L2 S02 KN L2 S02 Snap action Steel 5 1
KC L1 A11 KN L1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
Slow action make – Operating force: 3Ncm/4.25ozin
KC L2 A11 KN L2 A11 Steel 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
before break
KC L... - KN L... KC L1 L11 KN L1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
KC L2 L11 KN L2 L11 Slow action Steel 5 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC L1 L02 KN L1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
KC L2 L02 KN L2 L02 Slow action Steel 5 – Ambient conditions:
KC L1 L20 KN L1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
KC L2 L20 KN L2 L20 Steel 5 • Pollution degree: 3
BI-DIRECTIONAL. • IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. • IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
KB L1 D02 KM L1 D02 2NC Plastic 5
independent Certifications and compliance
KB L2 D02 KM L2 D02 2NC Steel 5 Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
M20 CABLE ENTRY independent Limit switches.
add the letter P at the end of the order Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to Compliant with standards: EN 50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
code while for 1/2 NPT, add N. IEC/EN 60947-5-1. IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
E.g. KBL1S11P - KBL1S11N
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside CSA C22.2 n° 14.
front cover.

Return travel of snap action contacts closed K ... L20 13-14
23-24
K ... S11 21-22 0 27° 85°
13-14
21-22 K ... L12 21-22
13-14 31-32
13-14
0 15° 30° 85°
0 28° 38° 85°
K ... S02 11-12
21-22 K ... L21 31-32
11-12 23-24
21-22 13-14
0 15° 30° 85° 0 28° 38° 85°
K ... A11 13-14 K ... L03 11-12

21-22 21-22
31-32
0 14° 27° 85°
0 28° 85°
K ... L11 25-26
17-18 K... D02
0 30° 40° 85° 75° 28° 28° 75°
K ... L02 21-22 21-22
11-12 11-12
0 27° 85°

Wobble stick, Order code Contacts Rod Qty Wt General characteristics

omnidirectional Plastic Metal material per The LOVATO ELECTRIC limit switches have been
KB M1 S11 KM M1 S11 1NO+1NC Flexible 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KB M2 S11 KM M2 S11 Snap action Semirigid 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB M1 S02 KM M1 S02 2NC Flexible 5 configuration with no tools.
The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB M2 S02 KM M2 S02 Snap action Semirigid 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KB M1 A11 KM M1 A11 1NO+1NC Flexible 5
KB M2 A11 KM M2 A11 Slow action make Semirigid 5 Operational characteristics
before break – Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
– Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
KB M1 L11 KM M1 L11 1NO+1NC Flexible 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB M2 L11 KM M2 L11 Slow action Semirigid 5 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB M1 L02 KM M1 L02 2NC Flexible 5 – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
• A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
KB M2 L02 KM M2 L02 Slow action Semirigid 5 • A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
KB M1 L20 KM M1 L20 2NO Flexible 5 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
KB M2 L20 KM M2 L20 Slow action Semirigid 5 • 690VAC for KB-KC types
• 440VAC for KM-KN types
KB M1... - KM M1... KB M1 L12 KM M1 L12 1NO+2NC Flexible 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
KB M2 L12 KM M2 L12 Slow action Semirigid 5 • 6kV for KB-KC types
9 KB M1 L21 KM M1 L21 2NO+1NC Flexible 5
KB M2 L21 KM M2 L21 Slow action Semirigid 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KB M1 L03 KM M1 L03 3NC Flexible 5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
KB M2 L03 KM M2 L03 Slow action Semirigid 5 – Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
– Housing:
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. • KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KC M1 S11 KN M1 S11 1NO+1NC Flexible 5 polymer thermoplastic
KC M2 S11 KN M2 S11 Snap action Semirigid 5 • KM-KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
– Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
KC M1 S02 KN M1 S02 2NC Flexible 5 1
KC M2 S02 KN M2 S02 Snap action Semirigid 5 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
KC M1 A11 KN M1 A11 1NO+1NC Flexible 5 – Operating torque: 1Ncm/1.42ozin
– Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
KC M2 A11 KN M2 A11 Slow action make Semirigid 5 – Tightening torque:
before break
KC M1 L11 KN M1 L11 1NO+1NC Flexible 5 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC M2 L11 KN M2 L11 Slow action Semirigid 5 • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC M1 L02 KN M1 L02 2NC Flexible 5 – Ambient conditions:
KC M2... - KN M2...
KC M2 L02 KN M2 L02 Slow action Semirigid 5 • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
KC M1 L20 KN M1 L20 2NO Flexible 5 • Storage temperature: -40 ... +70°C
KC M2 L20 KN M2 L20 Slow action Semirigid 5 • IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside • IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
front cover.
Limit switches.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
M20 CABLE ENTRY
E.g. KBM1S11P - KBM1S11N

K... L02 21-22
0 14°
K... S11 21-22
13-14 K... L20 13-14
21-22 23-24
13-14 0 14°
0 4° 14°
K... L12 21-22
K... S02 11-12 31-32
21-22 13-14
11-12 0 14.5° 30°
21-22
0 4° 14° K... L21 31-32
23-24
K... A11 25-26 13-14
17-18 0 14.5° 30°
0 7,5° 14°
K... L03 11-12
K... L11 13-14 21-22
21-22 31-32
0 14° 19° 0 14.5°

Hinge operating Order code Contacts Shaft Qty Wt General characteristics

Plastic Metal features per The LOVATO ELECTRIC limit switches have been
KB P1 L11 KM P1 L11 1NO+1NC Short 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
Slow action cylinder remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB P2 L11 KM P2 L11 1NO+1NC Long 5 configuration with no tools.
Slow action solid The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB P3 L11 KM P3 L11 1NO+1NC Long 5 remarkable wiring ease.
Slow action solid w/
reduction Operational characteristics
KB P1 L02 KM P1 L02 2NC Short 5 – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
Slow action cylinder – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB P2 L02 KM P2 L02 2NC Long 5 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB P... - KM P... Slow action solid – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
KB P3 L02 KM P3 L02 2NC Long 5 • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
Slow action solid w/ • A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
reduction – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
KB P1 L12 KM P1 L12 1NO+2NC Short 5 • 440VAC for KM-KN types
Slow action cylinder – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
KB P2 L12 KM P2 L12 1NO+2NC Long 5 • 6kV for KB-KC types
Slow action solid • 4kV for KM-KN types
KB P3 L12 KM P3 L12 1NO+2NC Long 5 – Class II insulation for KB-KC only 9
Slow action solid w/ – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
reduction – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
KB P1 L21 KM P1 L21 2NO+1NC Short 5 – Housing:
Slow action cylinder • KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KB P2 L21 KM P2 L21 2NO+1NC Long 5 polymer thermoplastic
Slow action solid • KM-KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
KB P3 L21 KM P3 L21 2NO+1NC Long 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
1
Slow action solid w/ /2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
reduction – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
– Operating torque: 15Ncm/21.2ozin
KB P1 L03 KM P1 L03 3NC Short 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
Slow action cylinder – Tightening torque:
KB P2 L03 KM P2 L03 3NC Long 5 • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
Slow action solid • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KB P3 L03 KM P3 L03 3NC Long 5 • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC P... - KN P... Slow action solid w/ – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
reduction – Ambient conditions:
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. • Storage temperature: -40 ... +70°C
KC P1 L11 KN P1 L11 1NO+1NC Short 5 • Pollution degree: 3
Slow action cylinder • IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
KC P1 L02 KN P1 L02 2NC Short 5 • IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
Slow action cylinder
KC P1 L12 KN P1 L12 1NO+2NC Short 5 Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed for USA and
Slow action cylinder Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
KC P1 L21 KN P1 L21 2NO+1NC Short 5 Limit switches.
Slow action cylinder Compliant with standards: EN 50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
KC P1 L03 KN P1 L03 3NC Short 5 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
Slow action cylinder CSA C22.2 n° 14.
M20 CABLE ENTRY
add the letter P at the end of the order IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
code while for 1/2 NPT, add N. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside
E.g. KBP1L11P - KBP1L11N front cover.
open
closed
K... L11 13-14 K... L21 31-32
21-22 23-24
0 7° 10° 13-14
0 7° 10°
K... L02 21-22
11-12 K... L03 11-12
0 7° 21-22
31-32
K... L12 21-22 0 7°
31-32
13-14
0 7° 10°

Slotted lever Order code Contacts Qty Wt General characteristics

Plastic Metal per The LOVATO ELECTRIC limit switches have been
KB Q1 L11 KM Q1 L11 1NO+1NC Slow action 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KB Q1 L02 KM Q1 L02 2NC Slow action 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB Q1 L12 KM Q1 L12 1NO+2NC Slow action 5 configuration with no tools.
The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB Q1 L21 KM Q1 L21 2NO+1NC Slow action 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KB Q1 L03 KM Q1 L03 3NC Slow action 5
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. Operational characteristics
KC Q1 L11 KN Q1 L11 1NO+1NC Slow action 5 – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
KC Q1 L02 KN Q1 L02 2NC Slow action 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
front cover. • A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
• 440VAC for KM-KN types
KB Q... - KM Q... – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
9 – Class II insulation for KB-KC only
– Housing:
• KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
1
– Operating torque: 15Ncm/21.2ozin
KC Q... - KN Q... • Pollution degree: 3

Limit switches.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
M20 CABLE ENTRY

E.g. KBQ1L11P - KBQ1L11N
open
closed
K... L11 13-14 K... L21 31-32
21-22 23-24
0 7° 10° 90° 13-14
0 7° 10° 90°
K... L02 21-22
11-12 K... L03 11-12
0 7° 90° 21-22
31-32
K... L12 21-22 0 7° 90°
31-32
13-14
0 7° 10° 90°

Key operated Order code Contacts Key Qty Wt General characteristics

Plastic shape per The LOVATO ELECTRIC limit switches have been
body pkg designed to satisfy requirements comprising quick
KB N1 L11 1NO+1NC Straight 5 0.092 The heads have axial rotation in any of 4 positions at 90°
KB N2 L11 Slow action Angled 5 0.092 angles.
KB N3 L11 Straight “T” 5 0.092 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
remarkable wiring ease.
KB N4 L11 Angled “T” 5 0.092
KB N1 L02 2NC Straight 5 0.092 Operational characteristics
KB N2 L02 Slow action Angled 5 0.092 – Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
KB N3 L02 Straight “T” 5 0.092 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB N4 L02 Angled “T” 5 0.092 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB N... – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
KB N1 L12 1NO+2NC Straight 5 0.096
Slow action A600 Q600
KB N2 L12 Angled 5 0.096 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V
KB N3 L12 Straight “T” 5 0.096 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp: 6kV
KB N4 L12 Angled “T” 5 0.096 – Class II insulation
KB N1 L21 2NO+1NC Straight 5 0.096 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
KB N2 L21 Slow action Angled 5 0.096 – Housing and operators in self-extinguishing
KB N3 L21 Straight “T” 5 0.096 double-insulation polymer thermoplastic
KB N4 L21 Angled “T” 5 0.096 1
/2 NPT available (see the side note for details) 9
KB N1 L03 3NC Straight 5 0.096 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
KB N2 L03 Slow action Angled 5 0.096 – Operating force: 8N/1.8lb
KC N... – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
KB N3 L03 Straight “T” 5 0.096 – Tightening torque:
KB N4 L03 Angled “T” 5 0.096 • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC N1 L11 1NO+1NC Straight 5 0.107 – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
KC N2 L11 Slow action Angled 5 0.107 – Ambient conditions:
KC N3 L11 Straight “T” 5 0.107 • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
KC N4 L11 Angled “T” 5 0.107 • Pollution degree: 3
KC N1 L02 2NC Straight 5 0.107 • IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
KC N2 L02 Slow action Angled 5 0.107 • IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
M20 CABLE ENTRY KC N3 L02 Straight “T” 5 0.107
add the letter P at the end of the order KC N4 L02 Angled “T” 5 0.107 Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed for USA and
code while for 1/2 NPT, add N. Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
E.g. KBN1L11P - KBN1L11N IEC/EN 60947-5-1. Limit switches.
The key is standard supplied. Compliant with standards: EN 50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
open CSA C22.2 n° 14.
closed
K... L11 13-14 K... L21 31-32
21-22 23-24
0 5 5.5 mm 13-14
0” 0.20” 0.22” in 0 5 5.5 mm
0” 0.20” 0.22” in
K... L02 21-22
11-12 K... L03 11-12
21-22
0 5 mm
0” 0.20” in 31-32
0 5 mm
K... L12 21-22 0” 0.20” in
31-32
13-14
0 5 5.5 mm
0” 0.20” 0.22” in
Accessories and spare Order code Description Qty Wt

parts for key operated per
pkg
switches n° [kg]
K X N1 Straight key 5 0.013
K X N2 Angled key 5 0.013
K X N3 Straight “T” key 5 0.012
K X N4 Angled “T” key 5 0.012
K X N5 Toggle key 5 0.019
KX N1 KX N2
KX N3 KX N4 KX N5

Accessories and spare parts for KB - KC - KM and KN type limit switches
Contact blocks Order Contacts Qty Wt General characteristics

code per The KXB contact blocks can be used with the K series of
pkg limit switches. Combinations of 2 contacts with slow or
n° [kg] snap action and, for KB and KM types only, 3 slow action
KX B S11 1NO+1NC Snap action 10 0.021 contacts are available.
The NC contacts have direct opening operation, a specific
KX B S02 2NC Snap action 10 0.021 safety principle.
KX B A11 1NO+1NC Slow action make before break 10 0.021 The particular four-point contacts warrant high
KX B L11 1NO+1NC Slow action 10 0.021 conductivity in any sort of application. The removal of the
contacts from the limit switch body provides remarkable
KX B L02 2NC Slow action 10 0.021 wiring ease and reduces installation time as well.
KX B L20 2NO Slow action 10 0.021 The KX C... bodies, complete with auxiliary contacts, can
KX B L12 1NO+2NC Slow action 10 0.026 be used as spare parts for the K series limit switches or
coupled with the KX A... operating heads, to obtain
KX B L21 2NO+1NC Slow action 10 0.026 complete limit switches in the required configurations.
KX B L03 3NC Slow action 10 0.026 The body cover is hinged at the bottom and removable to
have the best access. Each body includes the innovative
Not suitable for key operated KBN / KCN, hinged operating KBP / KCP /
KMP / KNP and slotted lever KBQ / KCQ / KMQ / KNQ types. locking bayonet mechanism of the operating head.
K X B...
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to Plastic and metal types are available.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
Not suitable for KC and KN types, KG and KR foot switches. Operational characteristics
– Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
Body complete with Order code Contacts Qty Wt – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
contact block Plastic Metal per – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
body body pkg • A600 Q300 for KX CB-KX CC types
• A300 Q300 for KX CM-KX CN types
9 n° [kg]
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. • 690VAC for KX CB-KX CC types
KX CB S11 KX CM S11 1NO+1NC Snap action 10 • 440VAC for KX CM-KX CN types
KX CB S02 KX CM S02 2NC Snap action 10 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
• 6kV for KX CB-KX CC types
KX CB A11 KX CM A11 1NO+1NC Slow action 10 • 4kV for KX CM-KX CN types
make before break – Class II insulation for KX CB-KX CC only
KX CB L11 KX CM L11 1NO+1NC Slow action 10 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KX CB L02 KX CM L02 2NC Slow action 10 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
KX CB... - KX CM... – Housing:
KX CB L20 KX CM L20 2NO Slow action 10 • KX CB-KX CC types - Self-extinguishing
KX CB L12 KX CM L12 1NO+2NC Slow action 10 double-insulation polymer thermoplastic
KX CB L21 KX CM L21 2NO+1NC Slow action 10 • KX CM-KX CN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
KX CB L03 KX CM L03 3NC Slow action 10 1
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
KX CC S11 KX CN S11 1NO+1NC Snap action 10 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
KX CC S02 KX CN S02 2NC Snap action 10 • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
KX CC... - KX CN... KX CC A11 KX CN A11 1NO+1NC Slow action 10 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
make before break • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KX CC L11 KX CN L11 1NO+1NC Slow action 10 – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
KX CC L02 KX CN L02 2NC Slow action 10 • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
KX CC L20 KX CN L20 2NO Slow action 10 • Storage temperature: -40 ... +70°C
Not suitable for key operated KBN / KCN, hinged operating KBP / KCP / • Pollution degree: 3
KMP / KNP and slotted lever KBQ / KCQ / KMQ / KNQ types. • IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to • IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
Not suitable for KC and KN types. Certifications and compliance
front cover. Certifications obtained: EAC for all, UL Listed for US and
M20 CABLE ENTRY Canada (File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices for
For types with PG13.5 cable entry, KX C... body types only. UL Recognized for USA and
add the letter P at the end of the order Canada (cURus - File E93601) as component - Auxiliary
code while for 1/2 NPT, add N. devices for auxiliary contacts only; products having this
E.g. KXCCL11P - KXCCL11N type of marking are intended for use as components of
complete workshop-assembled equipment.
Comply with standards: EN50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Forward travel of snap action contacts open KX ... L02 21-22
0 2.1 6mm
0” 0.08” 0.24”
KX ... S11 21-22
13-14 KX ... L20 13-14
21-22 23-24
13-14 0 2.1 6mm
0 0.5 2.3 6mm 0” 0.08” 0.24”
0” 0.02” 0.09” 0.24”
KX ... L12 21-22
KX ... S02 11-12 31-32
21-22 13-14
11-12 0 2.2 2.7 6mm
21-22 0” 0.09” 0.11” 0.24”
0 0.5 2.3 6mm KX ... L21 31-32
0” 0.02” 0.09” 0.24”
23-24
KX ... A11 25-26 13-14
17-18 0 2.2 2.7 6mm
0 1.1 2.1 6mm 0” 0.09” 0.11” 0.24”
0” 0.04” 0.08” 0.24”
KX ... L03 11-12
KX ... L11 13-14 21-22
21-22 31-32
0 2.1 2.9 6mm 0 2.2 6mm
0” 0.08” 0.11” 0.24” 0” 009” 0.24”

Accessories and spare parts for KB, KC, KM and KN type limit switches
Operating heads Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

per The KX A... operating heads can be used as spare parts
pkg for the K series limit switches or coupled with the KX C...
n° [kg] bodies to obtain complete limit switches in the required
KX A A1 Top push rod plunger 5 0.013 configurations.
The heads are made of metal and warrant sturdiness and
KX A A1 KX A B1 KX A B2 KX A B1 Plastic top roller push plunger 5 0.020 operating reliability in all conditions.
KX A B2 Metal top roller push plunger 5 0.020 The shape of the coupling section with the body of the K
KX A C1 Plastic roller centre push lever 5 0.020 series switches permits to orient the head in any 45°
angle position while the initial lever and rod position can
KX A C2 Metal roller centre push lever 5 0.020 be adjusted 360° at 15° angle positions.
KX A D1 Plastic roller side push lever 5 0.020 The head fixing to the body is achieved by the innovative
KX A D2 Metal roller side push lever 5 0.023 locking bayonet mechanism so there is no need of tools.
Tightening torque for eventual operating head actuator
KX A C1 KX A C2 KX A E1 Plastic roller lever plunger 5 0.039 fixing is 0.8Nm/7lbin.
KX A E2 Metal roller lever plunger 5 0.048
KX A E3 Rubber Ø50x10mm roller lever 5 0.055
plunger
KX A F1 Adjustable plastic roller lever 5 0.055
Ø19x5mm
KX A D1 KX A D2 KX A F2 Adjustable metal roller lever 5 0.065
Ø19x5mm
KX A F3 Adjustable rubber Ø50x10mm 5 0.065
roller lever
KX A F4 Adjustable offset rubber 5 0.081 9
Ø50x10mm roller lever
KX A H1 Ceramic rod lever 5 0.056
KX A L1 Adjustable plastic rod lever 5 0.043
KX A L2 Adjustable stainless steel 5 0.050
KX A E1 KX A E2 KX A E3 rod lever
KX A M1 Flexible wobble stick 5 0.032
KX A M2 Semirigid wobble stick 5 0.025
KX A F1 KX A F2
KX A F3 KX A F4 KX A H1
KX A L1 KX A L2 KX A M1 KX A M2
Cable glands and cable Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics
per The cable glands are in plastic with either M20 or PG13.5
conduit pkg thread and provide to keep the cable in place and
maintain the proper IP protection of the limit switch after
n° [kg] installation.
KX P01 M20 cable gland 50 0.009 Operational characteristics for cable gland
KX P02 PG13.5 cable gland 50 0.009 – Material: Self-extinguishing polyamide
KX P03 M20 rubber cable conduit 50 0.004 – IEC degree of protection: IP68
– Gland seal with cable diameter: 6-12mm/0.24-0.47”.
KX P... KX P03
Compliant with standards: EN 50262, UL508.
Dimensions
pages 9-28 and 29 9-17
Prewired metal limit switches, K series
Order code Contacts Cable Qty Wt Operational characteristics

length per – Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
pkg – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
m n° [kg] – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 5A
TOP PUSH ROD PLUNGER. B300 R300
KP A1 S11 1NO+1NC Snap action 2 1 0.286 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 400VAC
– IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp: 4kV
KP A1 L11 1NO+1NC Slow action 2 1 0.286 – Class I insulation
KP A2 S11 1NO+1NC Snap action 2 1 0.302 – Contact resistance: <25mΩ
– 2 metre long cable (5 cores, each 0.75mm2/18 AWG)
KP A2 L11 1NO+1NC Slow action 2 1 0.302
– Body housing: aluminium - zinc alloy
KP A1... KP A2... TOP ROLLER PUSH PLUNGER. – Operating force/torque:
KP B1 S11 1NO+1NC Snap action 2 1 0.290 • KP A types: 15N/3.4lb
• KP B types: 10N/2.2lb
KP B1 L11 1NO+1NC Slow action 2 1 0.290 • KP E, KP F and KP L types: 0.08Nm/0.7lbin
KP B2 S11 1NO+1NC Snap action 2 1 0.290 • KP M types: 0.1Nm/0.9lbin
– Tightening torque for switch fixing: 2.5Nm/22.1lbin
KP B2 L11 1NO+1NC Slow action 2 1 0.290
KP B3 S11 1NO+1NC Snap action 2 1 0.288 • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
KP B3 L11 1NO+1NC Slow action 2 1 0.288 • Storage temperature: -40 ... +70°C
KP B4 S11 1NO+1NC Snap action 2 1 0.296
KP B1... KP B2... KP B4 L11 1NO+1NC Slow action 2 1 0.296
M12 HEAD TOP ROLLER PUSH PLUNGER. Certifications and compliance
9 KP B5 L11 1NO+1NC Slow action 2 1 0.308 Limit switches.
KP B6 S11 1NO+1NC Snap action 2 1 0.310 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
KP B3... KP B4...
ROLLER LEVER PLUNGER.
KP E1 S11 1NO+1NC Snap action 2 1 0.336
KP E1 L11 1NO+1NC Slow action 2 1 0.336
KP E2 S11 1NO+1NC Snap action 2 1 0.336
KP E2 L11 1NO+1NC Slow action 2 1 0.336
ADJUSTABLE ROLLER LEVER.
KP B5... KP B6... KP F1 S11 1NO+1NC Snap action 2 1 0.344
KP F1 L11 1NO+1NC Slow action 2 1 0.344
ADJUSTABLE ROD LEVER.
KP L2 S11 1NO+1NC Snap action 2 1 0.342
KP L2 L11 1NO+1NC Slow action 2 1 0.342
OMNIDIRECTIONAL WOBBLE STICK.
KP M2 S11 1NO+1NC Snap action 2 1 0.298
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
KP B7... KP B8... For prewired switches with 1m long cable only, add suffix 010 at the end
of the order code.
Example: KP A1 S11 010 for prewired switch, top push metal rod
plunger, with 1NO+1NC snap action contacts and 1m long cable.
M12 head fixing.
Roller operation perpendicular to switch body.

KP E1... KP E2... KP A... S11 21-22 KP E... S11 21-22

13-14 KP F... S11 13-14
21-22 KP L... S11 21-22
13-14 13-14
0 1.0 1.9 5mm 0 14° 26° 74°

0” 0.04” 0.075” 0.20”
KP E... L11 21-22
KP A... L11 21-22 KP F... L11 13-14
13-14 KP L... L11
0 27° 45° 74°
0 1.9 3.3 5mm
0” 0.075” 0.13” 0.20”
KP M... S11 21-22
KP B... S11 21-22 13-14
13-14 21-22
21-22 13-14
13-14
0 5° 14°
0 1.7 3.3 8,7mm
KP F1... KP L2... KP M2 S11 0” 0.069” 0.13” 0.34”
KP B... L11 21-22

13-14
0 3.3 5.5 8,7mm

0” 0.13” 0.22” 0.34”

9-18 page 9-30 page 9-35
Plastic limit switches, T series. Dimensions to EN 50047
Top push rod plunger Order code Contacts Plunger Qty Wt Type Forward travel of snap action contacts open
material per Return travel of snap action contacts closed
pkg
n° [kg] TS1 01... 21-22
TS2 01... 13-14
Without reset button. 21-22
13-14
TS1 01 10 1NO+1NC Steel 1 0.120 [mm (in)]
0 6 (0.24”)
Snap action
TL1 01 10 1NO+1NC Steel 1 0.120 TL1 01... 21-22
TL2 01... 13-14
Slow action [mm (in)]
0 6 (0.24”)
With reset button on front.
TS1 05... 21-22
TS2 01 10 1NO+1NC Steel 1 0.130 TS2 05... 13-14
Snap action 21-22
13-14
TL2 01 10 1NO+1NC Steel 1 0.130
0 60°
TS1... - TL1... Slow action
TL1 05... 21-22
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to TL2 05... 13-14
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 0 60°
The TS-TL series limit switches are designed and
manufactured according to European standards
EN 50041 for dimensions.
The insulated housing of the limit switch is made of
self-extinguishing thermoplastic giving excellent
mechanical stability and is suitable, as a result, for 9
assembly on machinery or installations in the
general-purpose industrial field as well as saline
environments (for example close by the sea).
The housing sturdiness allows mounting of limit
switches in heavy duty applications.
The double-insulated housing of the limit switch warrants
TS2... - TL2... and protects internal circuits against shocks or impacts
and in industrial environments, against accidental ingress
of tools and accidental contact.
Roller lever Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt The contacts are dimensioned to ensure self cleaning of
material per the silver-alloy contact surfaces. Contacts (NC) of the TL
pkg series have direct (positive) opening action to prevent
n° [kg] sticking or welding.
Without reset button. Operational characteristics
TS1 05 20 A 1NO+1NC Plastic Ø20x5 1 0.120 – Maximum operating rate: 1200 cycles/h
TS1 05 21 A Snap action Metal Ø20x5 1 0.125 – Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
– Mechanical life: >10 million cycles (100,000 cycles
TS1 05 24 A Rubber Ø50x10 1 0.135 only for reset button versions)
TL1 05 20 A 1NO+1NC Plastic Ø20x5 1 0.120 – IEC utilisation category:
TL1 05 21 A Slow action Metal Ø20x5 1 0.125 • DC13 duty: 1.5A 24V
• AC15 duty: 6A 250V
TL1 05 24 A Rubber Ø50x10 1 0.135 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 6A
With reset button. – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 250VAC
TS2 05 20 AS 1NO+1NC Plastic Ø20x5 1 0.130 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
Snap action Metal Ø20x5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
TS2 05 21 AS 1 0.135 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
TS2 05 24 AS Rubber Ø50x10 1 0.145 – Operating force: 6N/1.35lb (TS...01 and TL...01)
TS1... - TL1... TL2 05 20 AS 1NO+1NC Plastic Ø20x5 1 0.130 – Operating force: 3Ncm/4.25ozin (TS...05 and TL...05)
Slow action Metal Ø20x5 – TS...05 and TL...05 have axial rotation in any of 4
TL2 05 21 AS 1 0.135 positions (90°)
TL2 05 24 AS Rubber Ø50x10 1 0.145 – TS...05 and TL...05 have lever inclination, 360°
adjustment
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to IEC/EN – Housing cable entry: PG13.5
60947-5-1.
Roller lever plunger limit switches with 30x5mm plastic roller are – Tightening torque:
available and can be ordered substituting the number 20 with 23 in the • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
above-given order codes. • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
Roller lever plunger limit switches with 35x15mm rubber roller are • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
available and can be ordered substituting the number 24 with 22 in the – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
above-given order codes.
Ø20x5mm = Ø0.79x0.2”. – Ambient conditions:
Ø50x10mm = Ø1.97x0.39”. • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
Ø30x5mm = Ø1.81x0.2”. • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
Ø35x15mm = Ø1.38x0.59”. • Pollution degree: 3
• IEC degree of protection: IP66

Limit switches.
TS2... - TL2... IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 81-1, EN 50041,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

page 9-27 page 9-30 page 9-35 9-19
T series plastic limit switches. Dimensions to EN 50041
Wobble stick, Order code Contacts Rod Qty Wt Type Forward travel of snap action contacts open
omnidirectional material per Return travel of snap action contacts closed
pkg
n° [kg] TS1 09... 21-22
13-14
Without reset button. 21-22
13-14
TS1 09 92 1NO+1NC Flexible 1 0.115
0 36°
Snap action
TL1 09 92 1NO+1NC Flexible 1 0.115 TL1 09... 21-22
13-14
Slow action
0 36°
TL2 10... 21-22

13-14
0 [mm (in)] 4.2 (0.17”)
The TS-TL series limit switches are designed and
manufactured according to European standards
EN 50041 for dimensions.
The insulated housing of the limit switch is made of
self-extinguishing thermoplastic giving excellent
mechanical stability and is suitable, as a result, for
assembly on machinery or installations in the
general-purpose industrial field as well as saline
TS1... - TL1... environments (for example close by the sea).
The housing sturdiness allows mounting of limit
9 Key operated Order code Contacts Key Qty Wt switches in heavy duty applications.
shape per The double-insulated housing of the limit switch warrants
pkg and protects internal circuits against shocks or impacts
and in industrial environments, against accidental ingress
n° [kg] of tools and accidental contact.
Without reset button. The contacts are dimensioned to ensure self cleaning of
Front key withdrawal . the silver-alloy contact surfaces. Contacts (NC) of the TL
TL2 10 10 1NO+1NC Straight 1 0.120 series have direct (positive) opening action to prevent
Slow action Angled sticking or welding.
TL2 10 11 1 0.120
TL2 10 12 Angled “T” 1 0.120 Operational characteristics
TL2 10 13 Straight “T” 1 0.120 – Maximum operating rate: 1200 cycles/h
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. – IEC utilisation category:
Version with key withdrawal on the left or on the right is available; replace • DC13 duty: 1.5A 24V
the last letter (A) of the order code respectively with S or D
(e.g. TL2 10 10S - left or TL2 10 10D - right). For further assistance, • AC15 duty: 6A 250V
consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 6A
front cover. – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 250VAC
The key is standard supplied. – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
– Operating torque: 1Ncm/1.42ozin (TS1 09... and
TL2... TL1 09...)
– Operating force: 8N/1.8lb (TL2 10...)
Order code Description Qty Wt – TL2 10... has axial rotation in any of 4 positions (90°)
per – TL2 10... has vertical or sideways key withdrawal
pkg – Housing cable entry: PG13.5
n° [kg] – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
Extra keys. • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
A 20746 Straight key 10 0.013 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
A 20747 Angled key 10 0.013 • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
P 32753 Angled “T” key 10 0.008 – Ambient conditions:
P 32752 Straight “T” key 10 0.008 • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
A 20748 Toggle key 2 0.085 • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
A 20746 A 20747 • Pollution degree: 3
• IEC degree of protection: IP66.

Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices - Limit
switches.
P 32753 P 32752 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 81-1, EN 50041,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
A 20748

9-20 page 9-27 page 9-30 page 9-35
Top push rod plunger Order code Contacts Degree of Qty Wt Type Travel [mm (in)] open
protection per
closed
pkg
PLN A1 A... 1.5 11.5
IEC n° [kg] 0.06” 0.45”
PLN A1 R... 11-12
PLN A1 A 1NC IP40 1 0.240
[mm (in)]
PLN A1 A W IP65 1 0.240 2.4 20
PLN A1 H... 0.09” 0.79”
PLN A2 A 2NC IP40 1 0.240 PLN A1 HSB... 11-12
PLN A2 A W IP65 1 0.240 [mm (in)]
PLN C1 A 1NO IP40 1 0.240 PLN A2 A... 1.5 6.5
0.06” 0.25”
PLN C1 A W IP65 1 0.240 PLN A2 R... 11-12
PLN...A... PLN C2 A 2NO IP40 1 0.240 21-22
PLN C2 A W IP65 1 0.240 [mm (in)]
PLN A2 H... 2.4 11.5
PLN U1 A 1NO+1NC IP40 1 0.240 0.09” 0.45”
PLN A2 HSB... 11-12
PLN U1 A W IP65 1 0.240
21-22
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to [mm (in)]
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 2.2 11.5
PLN C1 A... 0.09” 0.45”
PLN C1 R... 13-14
Top roller push plunger Order code Contacts Degree of Qty Wt [mm (in)]
protection per PLN C2 A... 4.2 6.4
pkg 0.16” 0.25”
PLN C2 R... 13-14
IEC n° [kg]
PLN A1 R 1NC IP40 1 0.230
23-24
[mm (in)]
9
PLN A1 R W IP65 1 0.230 PLN U1 A... 1.5 11.5
0.45”
PLN A2 R 2NC IP40 1 0.230 PLN U1 R... 21-22
PLN A2 R W IP65 1 0.230 13-14
5.9 (0.23”) [mm (in)]
PLN C1 R 1NO IP40 1 0.230 2.4 20
PLN U1 H... 0.09” 0.79”
PLN C1 R W IP65 1 0.230 PLN U1 HSB... 21-22
PLN C2 R 2NO IP40 1 0.230 13-14
PLN C2 R W IP65 1 0.230 10.4 (0.41”) [mm (in)]
PLN...R... PLN U1 R 1NO+1NC IP40 1 0.230
PLN U1 R W IP65 1 0.230 The PLN types are for general purpose use. The extensive
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to range of models with numerous of actuators and multiple
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. contact configurations is the optimal solution to the
diverse installation requirements.
Overall simple design, oversize contacts and choice
Roller centre push lever Order code Contacts Degree of Qty Wt materials ensure durable and safe operation. The metal
protection per alloy housing and resistant thermoplastic actuators
pkg warrant reliable heavy-duty features for any sort of
IEC n° [kg] operating conditions.
The PLN series limit switches are available with IEC IP40
PLN A1 H 1NC IP40 1 0.270 or IP65 degree of protection; this characteristic is
PLN A1 H W IP65 1 0.270 ensured by the use of appropriate sealing gasket.
PLN A2 H 2NC IP40 1 0.270 The IEC IP65 version is easily identified by the “W” suffix
of its order code and can be used in adverse ambient
PLN A2 H W IP65 1 0.270 conditions.
PLN U1 H 1NO+1NC IP40 1 0.270
PLN U1 H W IP65 1 0.270 Operational characteristics
With offset roller. – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
PLN A1 HSB 1NC IP40 1 0.290 – IEC utilisation category:
PLN A1 HSB W IP65 1 0.290 • DC13 duty: 10A 24V
PLN...H • AC15 duty: 5A 250V, 3A 400V
PLN A2 HSB 2NC IP40 1 0.290 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
PLN A2 HSB W IP65 1 0.290 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 400VAC
PLN U1 HSB 1NO+1NC IP40 1 0.290 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
PLN U1 HSB W IP65 1 0.290 – Housing cable entry: PG11 (PLN...W types only
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to complete with cable gland)
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. – Cable connection: screw terminal with clamp suitable
for cables up to 2.5mm2 / AWG 14
– Tightening torque for switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
• IEC degree of protection: IP40 / IP65 (see table
indications).

PLN...HSB W Certifications obtained: IMQ, EAC.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, EN 81-1.

page 9-31 page 9-35 9-21
Latch and manual release Order code Contacts Degree of Qty Wt Type Travel [mm (in)] open
protection per (The arrows indicate the closed
pkg direction of operation)
IEC n° [kg] PLN A1 RAG 1 7
0.04” 0.27”
Top roller push plunger. PLN A1 RAG W 21-22
PLN A1 RAG 1NC IP40 1 0.220 [mm (in)]
PLN A1 RAG W 1NC IP65 1 0.230
PL A1 AM 0,5 8
PL A1 AM W
0.02” 0.31”
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 21-22
PL A1 RM [mm (in)]
PL A1 RM W
PLN 978
8 0.5 0.5 8
0.31” 0.02” 0.02” 0.31”
11-12
PLN A1 RAG 21-22
[mm (in)]
Manual reload and Order code Contacts Degree of Qty Wt General characteristics
magnetic release protection per The PLN limit switches were initially made specifically for
pkg hoisting or lifting duty and then used in other diverse
IEC n° [kg] applications. The type with latch and manual release as
Top push rod plunger. well as the one with manual reload and magnetic release
are designed so the switch remains opened after the
9 PL A1 AM 1NC IP40 1 0.245 switching of the NC contact. In the first instance, the
PL A1 AM W 1NC IP65 1 0.250 contact closing is made by pushing the release button. In
Top roller push plunger. the second case, the reloading is obtained by pushing the
shaft end or else pulling it from the top for the IP65
PL A1 RM 1NC IP40 1 0.250 types.
PL A1 RM W 1NC IP65 1 0.260 The limit switches with dual operation can be replaced by
two standard switches, for the stop control of moving
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to mechanisms with two directions of running (e.g.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
automatic doors). It is equipped with two opposed
PL A1 AM operating mechanisms and one NC contact for each
mechanism (i.e. 2NC).
The simple constructive design, oversize contacts and
careful material combinations warrant safe and constant
operation. The metal-alloy housing and the thermoplastic
mechanism material of first-rate mechanical features
assure reliability and durability with any type of operating
condition.
– IEC utilisation category:
• DC13 duty: 10A 24V
• AC15 duty: 5A 250V, 3A 400V
PL A1 RM W – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
– IEC rated insulation voltage: 400VAC
Bi-directional Order code Contacts Degree of Qty Wt – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
protection per – Housing cable entry: PG11 (PL...W and PLN 978 types
pkg only complete with cable gland)
IEC n° [kg] – Cable connection: screw terminal with clamp suitable
for cables up to 2.5mm2/AWG 14
Rod plunger. – Tightening torque for switch fixing: 2.5Nm/22.1lbin
PLN 978 2NC IP65 1 0.265 – Ambient conditions:
independent • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to • Pollution degree: 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
• IEC degree of protection: IP40 / IP65 (see table
indications).

Certifications obtained: IMQ, EAC.
IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 81-1.
PLN 978

9-22 page 9-31 page 9-35
Rope-pull lever limit switches for normal stopping
Dimensions to EN 50047 Order code Contacts Ring Qty Wt Type Forward travel of snap action contacts open
material per Return travel of snap action contacts closed
pkg
n° [kg]
Without reset button. RS1 13... 21-22
13-14
RS1 13 10 1NO+1NC Steel 1 0.090 21-22
13-14
Snap action
0 [mm (in)] 6 (0.24”)
RS2 13 10 1NO+1NC Steel 1 0.090
Slow action RS2 13... 21-22
13-14
RS3 13 10 2NO Steel 1 0.090 0 [mm (in)] 6 (0.24”)
Slow action
RS3 13... 21-22
11-12
0 [mm (in)] 6 (0.24”)
TS1 13... 21-22

13-14
21-22
13-14
RS1 13 10 0 [mm (in)] 6 (0.24”)
RS2 13 10 TL1 13... 21-22
RS3 13 10 13-14
0 [mm (in)] 6 (0.24”)
Dimensions to EN 50041 Order code Contacts Ring Qty Wt

material per
pkg The RS and T series limit switches are designed and 9
manufactured according to European standards for
n° [kg] dimensions and operating characteristics.
Without reset button. The double-insulated housing of the limit switch is made
TS1 13 10 1NO+1NC Steel 1 0.117 of glass-reinforced self-extinguishing polyamide resin to
Snap action protect internal circuits against shocks or impacts and in
industrial environments, against accidental ingress of
TL1 13 10 1NO+1NC Steel 1 0.117 tools and accidental contact.
Slow action The contacts are dimensioned to ensure self cleaning of
the silver-alloy contact surfaces.
– Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h for RS...13 10;
1200 cycles/h for T...13 10
– IEC utilisation category
• DC13 duty: 1.5A 24V
• AC15 duty: 6A 250V
TS1 13 - TL1 10 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
– IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 250VAC
– Operating force: 25N/5.6lb
– Cable entry: PG11 for RS...13 10;
PG13.5 for T...13 10
• IEC degree of protection: IP65 for RS...13 10;
IP66 for T...13 10.

Limit switches.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 81-1, EN 50041,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

page 9-27 page 9-32 page 9-35 9-23
Rope-pull lever limit switches for normal stopping
Order code Contacts Degree Operating Qty Wt Type Travel [mm (in)] open
of force per closed
protection pkg 1,5 11
PLN U1 AT... 0.06” 0.43”
IEC [N] / [lb] n° [kg]
13-14
Without reset button 21-22
PLN U1 AT 1NO+1NC IP40 10 / 2.2 1 0.240 6 [mm (in)]
PLN U1 AT W IP65 10 / 2.2 1 0.240
0.24”
P2L 8...
PLN U1 AT25 1NO+1NC IP40 25 / 5.6 1 0.240 11-12
PLN U1 AT25 W IP65 25 / 5.6 1 0.240 21-22

0 [mm (in)] 10
0.39”
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. P2L 10... 31-32
41-42
13-14
23-24
PLN...AT...W
0 [mm (in)] 10
0.39”
Order code Contacts Degree Operating Qty Wt The PLN and P2L types are limit switches for general
of force per use.
protection pkg The simple constructive design, oversize contacts and
IEC [N] / [lb] n° [kg] careful material combinations warrant safe and constant
Without reset button. operation. The metal-alloy housing and the thermoplastic
mechanism material of first-rate mechanical features
9 P2L8 13 11 1NO+1NC IP65 40 / 9 1 0.459 assure reliability and durability with any type of operating
P2L8 13 12 IP65 120 / 27 1 0.459 condition.
P2L10 13 11 2NO+2NC IP65 40 / 9 1 0.459
P2L10 13 12 IP65 120 / 27 1 0.459 – Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. – IEC utilisation category
• DC13 duty: 10A 24V
• AC15 duty: 5A 250V; 3A 400V
– IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A for PLN
types; 6A for P2L types
– IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 400VAC
P2L... – Cable entry: PG11 (PLN...W and P2L types only
complete with cable gland)
suitable for cables up to 2.5mm2/AWG 14
– Tightening torque for switch fixing: 2.5Nm/2.21 lbin
• IEC degree of protection: IP40 / IP65 (see order code
table indications).

Certifications obtained: IMQ.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, EN 81-1.

9-24 page 9-32 page 9-35
Rope-pull lever limit switches for emergency stopping, ISO 13850 compliant.
Order code Contacts Force Qty Wt Type Travel [mm (in)] open
per closed
pkg
[N]/[lb] n° [kg] RS... 11-12
T... 21-22
With reset button.
0 [mm (in)] 6 (0.24”)
RS13 13 10 1NO + 1NC 25/5.6 1 0.092
TL13 13 10 1NO + 1NC 25/5.6 1 0.125 PLN... 11-12
21-22
PLN13 13 11 1NO + 1NC 60/13.5 1 0.248
0 [mm (in)] 8 (0.31”)
P2L13 13 11 1NO + 1NC 40/9 1 0.459
P2L13 13 12 1NO + 1NC 120/27 1 0.459 P2L13... 11-12
21-22
P2L15 13 11 2NO + 2NC 40/9 1 0.459
0 [mm (in)] 10 (0.39”)
P2L15 13 12 2NO + 2NC 120/27 1 0.459
P2L15... 31-32
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to IEC/EN
41-42
60947-5-1.
13-14
23-24
Example of wiring diagram
0 [mm (in)] 10 (0.39”)
TL13 13 10 MOTOR ROPE
RS13 13 10
M N General characteristics
3
The rope-operated switches for emergency stop are
mainly suitable for emergency stop or alarm systems for
CONTACT machinery which occupies a large space. This emergency
ELEMENT stop can be achieved from any point when the rope is
manually pulled each time.
9
START
The choice of the body, between plastic and metal, can
STOP
ROPE LEVER satisfy the most diversified requirements for sturdiness
SWITCH
and size.
R
S
T
– Mechanical life: 100,000 cycles
– IEC utilisation category
• DC13 duty: 1.5A 24V (10A 24V only for PLN-P2L)
PLN 13 13 11 • AC15 duty: 6A 250V (3A 400V only for PLN-P2L)
– IEC conventional thermal current Ith:
10A for RS, TL and PLN; 6A for P2L
250VAC (400V for PLN-P2L)
– Cable entry: PG11 for RS, PLN and P2L types (PLN
and P2L complete with cable gland); PG13.5 for TL13
only
P2L... • Pollution degree: 3
• IEC degree of protection: IP65 (T series: IP66).
per Operation
spare parts pkg
n° [kg]
Accessories.
Normal operation Rope Rope
P33032 P33033 P33032 Rope terminal clamp, Ø5mm 10 0.023 position traction breaking
P33033 Rope eye, Ø5mm 10 0.007
P33034 Turnbuckle M6x60 10 0.061 Certification and compliance
P33035 Eye bolt M8 10 0.030 Certifications obtained: EAC for all; UL Listed for USA and
P33036 Steel rope, Ø5mm 100[m] 4.900 Limit swtches for RS13 and TL13 types only.
P33034
The P33036 rope is sold in 100m/109.4yd roll; Ø5mm = Ø0.2”. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, ISO 13850; also
UL508, CSA-C22.2 n° 14 for RS and TL types.
P33035
P33036

page 9-27 page 9-32 page 9-35 9-25
Plastic micro switches, K series.
Accessories
Order code Contacts Terminal Qty per Wt Operational characteristics

pkg – Maximum operating rate: 240 cycles/min
n° [kg] – Switching time: 0.01-1ms
– Operating speed: 0.01mm-1m per second
TOP PUSH ROD - METAL PLUNGER. Pin. – Electrical life: 500,000 cycles
KS A1 S 1NO/NC Solder 10 0.031 – Mechanical life: 20 million cycles
KS A1 V 1NO/NC Screw 10 0.031 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 15A
KS A1 F 1NO/NC Faston 10 0.032 A600 P300
KS A1... KS A2... TOP PUSH ROD - METAL PLUNGER. High rod plunger. – IEC rating: AC15 240VAC 3A
KS A2 S 1NO/NC Solder 10 0.033 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 250VAC
KS A2 V 1NO/NC Screw 10 0.033 – Body housing: polymer thermoplastic
KS A2 F 1NO/NC Faston 10 0.034 – Operating force:
TOP PUSH ROD - METAL PLUNGER. Low rod plunger. • KS A1-KS A4 and KS B types: 2.5N/9oz
• KS A9 and KS C3 types: 1.5N/5.4oz
KS A3 S 1NO/NC Solder 10 0.033 • KS C1 types: 1N/3.6oz
KS A3 V 1NO/NC Screw 10 0.033 • KS C2 and KS L2: 1.3N/4.7oz
KS A3 F 1NO/NC Faston 10 0.035 • KS C9 types: 1.7N/6.1oz
KS A3... KS A4... • KS L1 types: 6.4N/23oz
TOP PUSH ROD - METAL PLUNGER. M12 fixing head. • KS L3 types: 0.1N/0.36oz
KS A4 S 1NO/NC Solder 10 0.052 – Tightening torque:
KS A4 V 1NO/NC Screw 10 0.052 • For M12 head fixing: 4.9-6.9Nm/3.6-5.1lbft
• For side screws: 0.6-1Nm/0.44-0.74lbft
KS A4 F 1NO/NC Faston 10 0.053 • For terminal screws: 0.7-1Nm/0.52-0.74lbft
PUSH BUTTON. – Ambient conditions:
9 KS A9 S 1NO/NC Solder 10 0.034 • Operating termperature: -25...+70°C
KS A9 V 1NO/NC Screw 10 0.034 • Pollution degree: 3
KS A9 F 1NO/NC Faston 10 0.035 • IEC degree of protection: IP00 or IP20 with terminal
TOP ROLLER PUSH PLUNGER. M12 fixing head. shroud.
KS A9... KS B1...
KS B1 S 1NO/NC Solder 10 0.057 Certifications and compliance
KS B1 V 1NO/NC Screw 10 0.057 Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Recognized for USA and
KS B1 F 1NO/NC Faston 10 0.058 Canada (File E172189) as Industrial Control
Switches - Component; products having this type of
TOP ROLLER PUSH PLUNGER. M12 fixing head, 90° roller. marking are intended for use as components of complete
KS B2 S 1NO/NC Solder 10 0.057 workshop - assembled equipment.
KS B2 V 1NO/NC Screw 10 0.057 Compliance with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61058-1, UL508,
KS B2 F 1NO/NC Faston 10 0.060 CSA C22.2 n° 14.
ROLLER CENTRE PUSH LEVER. 26.6mm/1.05” long lever.
KS B2... KS C1... KS C1 S 1NO/NC Solder 10 0.036
KS C1 V 1NO/NC Screw 10 0.036
KS C1 F 1NO/NC Faston 10 0.037
ROLLER CENTRE PUSH LEVER. 48.5mm/1.91” long lever.
KS C2 S 1NO/NC Solder 10 0.037
KS C2... KS C3... ROLLER CENTRE PUSH LEVER. 38mm/1.5” long lever.
ROLLER CENTRE PUSH LEVER. One-way roller lever.
KS C9... KS L1... METAL LEVER. 63mm/2.48” long flat lever.
KS L1 S 1NO/NC Solder 10 0.035
KS L1 V 1NO/NC Screw 10 0.035
KS L1 F 1NO/NC Faston 10 0.037
METAL LEVER. 54mm/2.13” long flat lever.
KS L2... KS L3... KS L2 V 1NO/NC Screw 10 0.035
METAL LEVER. 168.3mm/6.63” long flat cylindrical lever.
KS L3 V 1NO/NC Screw 10 0.037
ACCESSORIES.
KSS C01 Terminal shroud 10 0.007
KSS C01 KSS CB2 KSS CB2 Terminal shroud with conduit 10 0.015

9-26 page 9-33 page 9-35
Foot switches, K series.
Accessories
Order code Model Contacts Qty Wt General characteristics

Plastic Metal per The KG and KR foot switches are used to control machinery
body body pkg and other equipment, leaving the operator’s hands free to do
n° [kg] other functions. The sturdiness of the metal and plastic body
ONE PEDAL FOOT SWITCHES. With free actuation. and the wide range of the available versions provide the
proper solution for each control need.
KG1 00 S11 KR1 00 S11 Open 1NO+1NC 1 Main features are:
Snap action – Thermoplastic or metal version
KG1 00 L11 KR1 00 L11 Open 1NO+1NC 1 The plastic or metal body gives adequate robustness to
Slow action the foot switch, for installation in all ambient and
KG2 00 S11 KR2 00 S11 With 1NO+1NC 1 application conditions.
KG2 00 ... KR2 00 ... – Versions complete with or without pedal protection cover
KG2 20 ... cover Snap action
The cover assures protection against accidental foot
KG2 00 L11 KR2 00 L11 With 1NO+1NC 1 switch operation, due to sudden tool or heavy material
cover Slow action dropping or other shock or vibration. The type without
With safety lever. cover, open version, is instead immediately accessible and
KG1 10 S11 KR1 10 S11 Open 1NO+1NC 1 is preferred when the most important pedal operation is
Snap action to stop a machine.
– Versions with safety lever
KG1 10 L11 KR1 10 L11 Open 1NO+1NC 1 The safety mechanism prevents unintentional foot switch
Slow action activation and excludes the pedal pressing if the
KG2 10 S11 KR2 10 S11 With 1NO+1NC 1 operator’s foot is not completely in place.
cover Snap action – Stable pedal base
KG1 10 ... KR2 10 ... KG2 10 L11 KR2 10 L11 With 1NO+1NC 1 The foot switch is equipped with rubber feet and metal-
KR2 11 ... cover Slow action reinforced base for a firm and non-sliding position and a
more reliable and safe activation.
KG2 10 S22 KR2 10 S22 With 2NO+2NC 1 9
cover Snap action Operational characteristics
With pedal actuator lock. – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KG1 20 S11 KR1 20 S11 Open 1NO+1NC 1 – Conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
Snap action – Designation to IEC/EN 60947-5-1:
• A600 Q600 for KG types
KG1 20 L11 KR1 20 L11 Open 1NO+1NC 1 • A300 Q300 for KR types
Slow action – Tightening torque for contacts: 1Nm/0.74lbft
KG2 20 S11 KR2 20 S11 With 1NO+1NC 1 – Rated insulation voltage Ui:
cover Snap action • 690VAC for KG types
KG2 20 L11 KR2 20 L11 With 1NO+1NC 1 • 440VAC for KR types
cover Slow action – Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
• 6kV for KG types
With two-stage safety lever. • 4kV for KR types
KG2 11 S22 KR2 11 S22 With 2NO+2NC 1 – Class II insulation (KG types only)
cover 2-stage – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KGD 003 - KGD 004 snap action – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG fuse
– Cable connection: self-releasing screw terminal
Order code Model Contacts Qty Wt – Housing:
Plastic Metal (for each per • KG types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
body body pedal) pkg polymer thermoplastic
• KR types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
n° [kg] – Cable entry: M20
TWO PEDAL FOOT SWITCHES. With safety lever on both pedals. – Ambient conditions:
KGD 001 KRD 001 Both 1NO+1NC 1 • Operating temperature: -25 ... +70°C
w/cover Snap action • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
KGD 002 KRD 002 Both 2NO+2NC 1 – IEC degree of protection:
w/cover Snap action
• IP20 for terminals
Left pedal with free actuation and right pedal with safety lever. • IP54 for body housing
KGD 003 KRD 003 Left open 1NO+1NC 1 • IP65 available on request (add the letter S at the end
Right Snap action of the order code. E.g. KG1 00 S11 S).
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety
function according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1. w/cover
Consult Customer Service for information; see Certifications and compliance
KGD 004 KRD 004 Left 1NO+1NC 1 Certifications obtained: EAC for foot switches and cURus
contact details on inside front cover.
open Snap action
A possible second contact block can be fitted; for contacts only (see page 9-16 for details).
blocks with only 2 contacts in total can be used. Right 2NO+2NC Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
See accessories below and contact blocks on w/cover Snap action IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 60447.
page 9-16.
Accessories Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

The cable glands are in plastic with either M20 or PG13.5
per
thread and provide to keep the cable in place and maintain
pkg the proper IP protection of the switch after installation.
n° [kg]
Operational characteristics for cable gland
Accessories. – Material: Self-extinguishing polyamide
KGX 01 Kit of elements to activate 10 0.039 – IEC degree of protection: IP68
2° contact block – Gland seal with cable diameter: 6-12mm/0.24”-0.47”.
KGX 02 Contact block mounting 10 0.022 Certifications and compliance
bracket Certifications obtained: EAC.
KX P... KX P03 Compliant with standards: EN 50262, UL508.
Cable glands and cable conduit.
A possible second contact block can be fitted on KX P01 M20 cable gland 50 0.009
the left-hand pedal; blocks with only 2 contacts in KX P02 PG13.5 cable gland 50 0.009
total can be used. See accessories below and
contact blocks on page 9-16. KX P03 M20 rubber cable conduit 50 0.004
Dimensions
page 9-34 9-27
LIMIT SWITCHES K SERIES

KB A1... KC A1 KB B1... - KB B2... KC B1... - KC B2...
KM A1... KN A1 KM B1... - KM B2... KN B1... - KN B2...
12.5 Ø11 12.5
(0.49") (0.43 (0.49") 12.5
") (0.49")
11.5
(0.45") Ø11
(1.20")
Ø8
30.5
(0.78")
(0.31") Ø8 (0.43")
(1.20")
20
30.5
(0.78")
(0.31")
20
Ø4.3
Ø4.3 22 (0.16") 22
(0.16") (0.86") (0.86")
54.5 (2.14")
Ø4.3
54.5 (2.14")
Ø4.3 22 22(0.86")
44 (1.73")
(0.16")
44 (1.73")
20 (20) 20
(0.78") (0.16") 20 (0.78")
(0.78")
42 42 (1.65")
(40) 40(1.57")
M20 M20
30 30 50 (1.97") 30 30 30 50 (1.97") 30
(1.18") M20 (1.18") (1.18") (1.18") M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18")
60 (2.36")
KB C1... - KB C2... KC C1... - KC C2... KB D1... - KB D2... KC D1... - KC D2...

KM C1... - KM C2... KN C1... - KN C2... KM D1... - KM D2... KN D1... - KN D2...
12.5 12.5
(0.49") 12.5 (0.49")
(0.49") 12.5
Ø14
(0.55") Ø14 (0.49")
Ø14
(1.53")
41 (1.61")
(0.55")
(1.61")
(0.55”) Ø14
39
(1.30")
41
(0.55")
33
Ø4.3
(0.16")
Ø4.3
54.5 (2.14")
22 22
54.5 (2.14")
Ø4.3 22(0.86") Ø4.3 22(0.86")
(0.16")
44 (1.73")
44 (1.73")
(0.86") (0.86")
(0.16") 20 (0.78") (0.16") 20 (0.78")
20 42 (1.65") 20
(0.78") (0.78") 42 (1.65")
9 30 30
40(1.57")
50 (1.97")
M20
30
30 30
40(1.57")
50 (1.97")
M20
30
60 (2.36") (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18")
(1.18") M20 (1.18") (1.18") M20 (1.18")
KB E1... - KB E2... KC E1... - KC E2... KB E3... KC E3...

KM E1... - KM E2... KN E1... - KN E2... KM E3... KN E3...
42 (1.57")
40 (1.57")
40 (1.57")
40 (1.57")
69.5 (2.73")
69.5 (2.73")
54 (2.12")
54 (2.12")
Ø19
(0.74") Ø19
(0.74") Ø50x10
(1.97"x0.39") Ø50x10
(1.97"x0.39")
Ø4.3 22 Ø4.3 22
54.5 (2.14")
(0.86")
54.5 (2.14")
22(0.86") (0.16") Ø4.3 22(0.86")
44 (1.73")
(0.16") Ø4.3
44 (1.73")
(0.86")
20 (0.16") 20 (0.78") (0.16") 20 (0.78")
(0.78") 20
42 (1.65") (0.78") 42 (1.65")
40(1.57") 40(1.57")
M20 M20
50 (1.97") 30 50 (1.97") 30
30 30 30 30
M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18") M20 60 (2.36") (1.18")
(1.18") (1.18") (1.18")
KB F1... - KB F2... KC F1... - KC F2... KB F3... KC F3...

KM F1... - KM F2... KN F1... - KN F2... KM F3... KN F3...
42.5 (1.67")
42.5 (1.67")
40 (1.57")
40 (1.57")
81-125 (3.19"-4.92")
68 - 111 (2.67"-4.37")
84 - 127 (3.30"- 5")

66-110 (2.60"x4.33")
Ø50x10
(1.97"x0.39") Ø50x10
(1.97"x0.39")
22(0.86") 22(0.86")
20 (0.78") 20 (0.78")
Ø4.3 22
Ø4.3 (0.86")
54.5 (2.14")
54.5 (2.14")
(0.16") Ø4.3 (0.16") Ø4.3

44 (1.73")
44 (1.73")
22 (0.16") 20 (0.16")
(0.86") (0.78")
42 (1.65") 42 (1.65")
20
(0.78") 40(1.57") 40(1.57")
M20 M20
30 30 50 (1.97") 30 30 30 50 (1.97") 30
(1.18") M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18") (1.18") M20 (1.18") (1.18")
60 (2.36")
KB F4... KC F4... KB H1... KC H1...

KM F4... KN F4... KM H1... KN H1...
51.5-66.5 (2.02"-2.61")
51.5-66.5 (2.02"-2.61")
Ø10
26
50 (1.97")
(0.39")
(1.02")
50 (1.96")
81-125 (3.19"-4.92")
84 - 127 (3.30"- 5")
Ø10
26
94 (3.7")
(0.39")
94 (3.70")
Ø50x10 (1.02")
(1.97"x0.39") Ø50x10
(1.97"x0.39")
22(0.86")
20 (0.78")
Ø4.3
22 (0.16") 22
Ø4.3 (0.86") (0.86")
54.5 (2.14")
54.5 (2.14")
(0.16") Ø4.3 Ø4.3 22(0.86")

44 (1.73")
20
44 (1.73")
(0.16") 20 (0.16")
(0.78") (0.78") 20 (0.78")
42 (1.65") 42 (1.65")
40(1.57") 40(1.57")
M20 M20
50 (1.97") 30 30 30 50 (1.97") 30
30 30 (1.18")
(1.18") (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18") M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18")
9-28
LIMIT SWITCHES
KB L1... - KB L2... KC L1... - KC L2... KB M1... - KB M2... KC M1... - KC M2...
KM L1... - KM L2... KN L1... - KN L2... KM M1... - KM M2... KN M1... - KN M2...
33.6
(1.32") 33.6
(1.32")
32-208 (1.26"-8.19")
Ø3
(0.12") Ø3
140 (5.51")
(0.12")
32-208 (1.26"-8.19")
140 (5.51")
Ø6
(0.24")
200 (7.87”)
Ø6
200 (7.87”)
(0.23")
22
Ø4.3 22 Ø4.3
54.5 (2.14")
54.5 (2.14")
22(0.86") (0.86") Ø4.3
(0.16") (0.86") Ø4.3 (0.16") 22(0.86")
44 (1.73")
44 (1.73")
(0.16") 20 (0.78") 20 (0.16") 20 (0.78")
20 (0.78")
(0.78") 42 (1.65") 42 (1.65")
40(1.57") 40(1.57")
M20 M20
50 (1.97") 30 30 30 50 (1.97") 30
30 30 (1.18") (1.18")
M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18") M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36")
(1.18")
KB P1... KB P2... KB P3... KC P1... KC P2... KC P3...

KM P1... KM P2... KM P3... KN P1... KN P2... KN P3...
Ø12 (0.47”) Ext.
Ø8 (0.31”) Int.
Ø12 (0.47”) Ext.

Ø8 (0.31”) Int.
9
Ø8 (0.31")
Ø6.9 (0.27")
Ø8 (0.31")
Ø8 (0.31")
20 (0.79")
(0.27")
(0.31")
Ø6.9
Ø8
Ø3.3 (0.13")
(0.78")
Ø3.3 (0.13")
20
21 (0.83")
23.1 21 (0.83")
22 (0.91") 121 (4.76") 69 (2.71") 23.1
Ø4.3 121 (4.76")
54.5 (2.14")
(0.86") Ø4.3 22 (0.90") 69 (2.71")

(0.16")
44 (1.73")
20 (0.16") (20)
(0.78") 42
(40)
M20 M20 M20
30 30 30 50 (1.97") 30 30 30
30 (1.18")
(1.18") M20 (1.18") M20 (1.18") M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18") (1.18")
KB Q1 L... KC Q1 L... KB N1... - KB N2...

KM Q1 L... KN Q1 L... KM N1... - KM N2...
5.5 (0.22”)
5.5 (0.22”)
50.1 (1.97”)
50.1 (1.97”)
77 (3.03")
72.6 (2.86”)
72.6 (2.86”)
77 (3,03")
34 (1.34")
(1.52")
38,5
(0.79")
20
(0.78")
20
22 22
Ø4.3 Ø4.3 (0.86")
54.5 (2.14")
(0.86")
54.5 (2.14")
(0.16") Ø4.3 22(0.86") (0.16") 20

44 (1.73")
20 (0.16")
(0.78") 20 (0.78") (0.78")
42 (1.65")
40(1.57")
M20
50 (1.97") 30 30
30 30 (1.18") 30
M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18") M20 (1.18")
(1.18")
Keys
KC N1... - KC N2... KX N1 KX N2 KX N3 KX N4 KX N5
KN N1... - KN N2...
15 (0.59")
30 (1.18") 30 (1.18")
14 (0.55") 14 (0.55") 22 5x4.2 22 30 (1.18")
5x4.2 )
38.5 (1.51")
(0.87")
(0.37")
(0.87")
(0.37")
(0.2x0.18") (0.2x0.18")
9.5
(1.22")
9.5
43 (1.69")
(1.33")
30.9
34
9x4.6 9x4.6
13 (0.51")
7 (0.28")
17 (0.67")
(0.35x0.18") (0.35x0.18")
11 (0.43")
Ø4.3 22(0.86")
44 (1.73")
(0.16")
12.9 (0.51")
7.1 (0.28")
20 (0.78") Ø4.2
15 (0.59")
42 (1.65") (0.18")
12.9 (0.51")
40(1.57")
M20
50 (1.97") 30 5
60 (2.36") (1.18") (0.2")
Cable glands Cable conduit

KX P01 KX P02 KX P03
1.5 (0.06")
CH24 CH24
(0.22")
(0.35") (1.11")
5.6
(0.35") (1.11")
28.1
28.1
CH24
9
M20
(0.31")
PG13.5 M20
7.9
CH = Spanner/Wrench CH = Spanner/Wrench CH = Spanner/Wrench
9-29
PREWIRED METAL LIMIT SWITCHES, K SERIES

KP A1... KP A2... KP B1... - KP B2... KP B3... - KP B4... KP B5... - KP B6...
(0.47") M12x1
12
20 (0.79")
12
(0.47") (0.47")
M12x1
44.8 (1.76")
")
")
")
")
")
34 (1.34")
.17
.17
.17
.17
.17
(1.18")
(1.18")
(0
(0
(0
(0
(0
30
30
.3
.3
.3
.3
.3
Ø4
Ø4
Ø4
Ø4
Ø4
20 20 20 20
40 (1.58")
40 (1.58")
40 (1.58")
40 (1.58")
20
40 (1.58")
(0.79") (0.79") (0.79") (0.79") (0.79")
30 16 (0.63") 30 16 (0.63") 30 16 (0.63") 30 16 (0.63") 30 16 (0.63")

(1.18") (1.18") (1.18") (1.18") (1.18")
KP B7... - KP B8... KP E1... - KP E2... KP F1... KP L2... KP M2...
3 (0.12") 29
(1.14")
34,4
24 18 (0.71") (1.35") 4.5 (0.18")
122 (4.8")
max. 170 (6.69")
(0.94") 7.9 (0.31")
12
48-118 (1.89"-4.65")
M12x1 (0.47") 14 (0.55") 4.5 (0.18")
5.5 (0.22")
52 (2.05")
44.8 (1.76")
")
")
")
")
")
.17
.17
.17
.17
.17
(0
(0
(0
(0
(0
.3
.3
.3
.3
.3
Ø4
Ø4
Ø4
Ø4
Ø4
13.5 (0.49") 17.3 (0.68") 15.8
20 20 20 20
40 (1.58")
20
40 (1.58")
40 (1.58")
40 (1.58")
40 (1.58")
(0.79") (0.79") (0.79") (0.79") (0.79")
9
30 16 (0.63") 30 16 (0.63") 30 16 (0.63") 30 16 (0.63") 30 16 (0.63")
(1.18") (1.18") (1.18") (1.18") (1.18")
PLASTIC LIMIT SWITCHES, T SERIES

Limit switches without reset button TS1 05 20 - TL1 05 20 TS1 05 24 - TL1 05 24
61 (2.40")
TS1 01... - TL1 01... TS1 05 21 - TL1 05 21
58.5 (2.30")
16
(0.63") Ø50x10
Ø20x5 (1.97x0.39")
77 (3.03")
62 (2.44")
(0.78x0.19")
(1.36")
Rubber
34.5
Plastic
or metal
143 (5.63")
128 (5.03")
100.5 (3.95")
Ø5.3
31
60 (2.36")
30 (0.20") Ø5.3 Ø5.3

(1.22") 31 31
60 (2.36")
(1.18") 30 (0.20") 30 (0.20")

60 (2.36")
(1.18") (1.22") (1.22")

(1.18")
40 (1.57") 5.3x7,3 PG13

(0.20x0.28") 40 (1.57") 5.3x7,3 43 (1.69") PG13. 40 (1.57") 5.3x7,3 PG13.5
43 (1.69")
43 (1.69")
(0.20x0.28") (0.20x0.28")
Limit switches without reset button TL2 10... Keys

TS1 09... - TL1 09... P32752 P32753 A20746
16
12
(0.59")
(0.63") 13.5
(0.53") (0.47") 72
(0.78")
15
(2.83")
(0.78")
28.5
20
28.5 (1.12")
(1.10") 20
(1.10")
(1.12")
28
Ø6 (0.23") 28.5
6
Steel
28
(0.24") 15 (1.12")
5 5.5 (0.22") (0.59")
Ø4.5
5 (0.20") Ø4.5 (0.17")
195 (7.67")
(1.18")
(0.17")
30
(0.20") Ø4.5
(1.06")
27
(0.17")
107 (4.21")
A20747 A20748
Ø5.3
Ø5.3 (0.20")
(0.59")
60 (2.36")
31 30 31
60 (2.36")
30 (0.20")
15
(1.22") (1.18") (1.22") 35.5 26

(1.18") 43 (1.69") (1.02")
(1.40")
13
(0.51")
28.5
55 (2.16")
15 Ø4.5
(1.37")
40 (1.57") PG13.5 40 (1.57") PG13.5 (0.59") (0.17") (1.12")

35
5.3x7,3 43 (1.69") 5.3x7,3 43 (1.69")

(0.20x0.28") (0.20x0.28")
31.4 50
Ø4.2 (1.24") (1.97")
(0.16")
Limit switches with reset button TS2 05 20 - TL2 05 20 TS2 05 24 - TL2 05 24

TS2 01... - TL2 01... TS2 05 21 - TL2 05 21 61 (2.40")
58.5 (2.3")
Ø20x5 Ø50x10
16 (0.78x0.19") (1.97x0.39")
77 (3.03")
62 (2.44")
(0.63") Plastic Rubber

(1.36")
or metal
34.5
143 (5.63")
128 (5.03")
100.5 (3.95")
Ø5.3 4.3 4.3

(0.17") Ø5.3 Ø5.3
(0.20") 31 0.17") 31
(0.20")
60 (2.36")
30 31 30 30 (0.20")
60 (2.36")
60 (2.36")
(1.18") (1.22") (1.18") (1.22") (1.18") (1.22")
40 (1.57") 5.3x7,3 43 (1.69") PG13.5 40 (1.57") 5.3x7,3 43 (1.69") PG13.5 40 (1.57") 5.3x7,3 PG13.5
43 (1.69")
(0.20x0.28") (0.20x0.28") (0.20x0.28")
9-30
METAL LIMIT SWITCHES, PL SERIES

PLN...A PLN...AW PLN...R
20.5
(0.81”)
20.5 20.5
(0.81”) (0.81”)
(1.77”)
Ø20
45
(1.10”)
(1.10”) (0.79”)
28
28
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
(1.81”)
(1.81”)
(1.40”)
(1.40”)
35.5
35.5
35.5
46
46
46
PG11 PG11
PG11 Ø5.2
Ø5.2 Ø5.2
(0.20”) (0.20”) (0.20”)
72 (2.83”) 40.5 72 (2.83”) 40.5 72 (2.83”) 40.5
(0.53”)
(0.53”)
(0.53”)
13.5
13.5
13.5
84 (3.31”) (1.59”) (1.59”) 84 (3.31”) (1.59”)

84 (3.31”)
103.6 (4.08”)
PLN...RW PLN...H PLN...HW

20.5 20.5
20.5 (0.81”) (0.81”)
(0.81”)
Ø20
(2.05”)
(2.05”)
(1.77”)
52
Ø20 (0.79”)
52
45
(0.79”) Ø20
(0.79”)
(1.40”)
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
(1.81”)
(1.81”)
(1.40”)
35.5
35.5
35.5
46
46
46
PG11 9
PG11 Ø5.2 PG11
Ø5.2 Ø5.2
(0.20”) (0.20”) (0.20”)
72 (2.83”) 40.5 40.5 72 (2.83”) 40.5
(0.53”)
(0.53”)
72 (2.83”)
(0.53”) (1.59”)
13.5
13.5
13.5
84 (3.31”) (1.59”) (1.59”) 84 (3.31”)
84 (3.31”)
103.6 (4.08”) 103.6 (4.08”)
PLN...HSB PLN...HSBW 35 - 50
PLN A1 RAG
35 - 50
(1.38” - 1-97”) (1.38” - 1-97”)
20.5 20.5
(0.81”) 20.5
(0.81”) (0.81”)
(2.34”)
(2.34”)
Ø35
59.5
59.5
(1.81”)
(1.38”) Ø20
46
(0.79”)
Ø35
(1.38”)
(1.81”)
(1.40”)
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
35.5
35.5
35.5
46
46
46
PG11 PG11
Ø5.2 PG11
Ø5.2 Ø5.2
(0.20”) (0.20”) (0.20”)
72 (2.83”) 40.5 40.5
(0.53”)
72 (2.83”) 40.5 72 (2.83”)
(0.53”)
(0.53”)
13.5
(1.59”)
13.5
13.5
84 (3.31”) (1.59”) 84 (3.31”) 84 (3.31”) (1.59”)

103.6 (4.08”)
PLN A1 RAG W PLN A1 AM PL A1 AM W

20.5
(0.81”) 20.5
20.5 (0.81”)
(0.81”)
(1.18”)
(1.81”)
Ø20
30
46
(1.18”)
(0.79”)
30
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
35.5
46
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
(1.81”)
(1.40”)
35.5
35.5
46
46
PG11
PG11
Ø5.2
PG11 Ø5.2 (0.20”)
Ø5.2 40.5
72 (2.83”)
(0.53”)
(0.20”) (0.20”)
13.5
40.5 40.5 (1.59”)

72 (2.83”) 72 (2.83”) 84 (3.31”)
(0.53”)
(0.53”)
(1.59”)
13.5
13.5
84 (3.31”) (1.59”) 84 (3.31”) 103.6 (4.08”)

103.6 (4.08”)
PL A1 RM PL A1 RMW PLN 978

20.5 20.5
(0.81”) (0.81”)
20.5
(0.81”)
(1.81”)
(1.81”)
Ø20 Ø20
(1.30”)
46
46
(0.79”) (0.79”)
33
(1.81”)
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
(1.40”)
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
35.5
35.5
35.5
46
46
46
PG11
PG11 PG11
Ø5.2 Ø5.2
(1.30”)
Ø5.2
(0.20”) (0.20”)
33
(0.20”) 40.5 40.5

72 (2.83”)
(0.53”)
72 (2.83”)
(0.53”)
(1.59”)
13.5
(1.59”)
13.5
84 (3.31”) 84 (3.31”)
103.6 (4.08”) 72 (2.83”) 40.5
84 (3.31”) (1.59”)
103.6 (4.08”)
9-31
ROPE LEVER
Limit switches for normal stopping
RS1 13... - RS3 13... TS1 13... - TL1 13... PLN...AT
16
15 (0.63")
(0.59") 20.5
(0.81”)
46.5 (1.83")
Ø20
49 (1.93")
Ø20 (0.78")
(1.30”)
(0.78")
33
Ø20
(0.78")
5.3x7,3
Ø4.3 (0.20x0.28")
31
60 (2.36")
30
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
(0.16") 22 30
35.5
55 (2.16")
(1.22")
46
(0.86") (1.18") (1.18")
20 PG11
(0.78")
Ø5.2
Ø5.3 (0.20”) 40.5
30.5 40 72 (2.83”)
0.53”)
35 (0.20") 43 (1.59”)
13.5
(1.20") PG11 (1.37") (1.57") PG13.5 84 (3.31”)
(1.69")
PLN...ATW P2L...
20.4
(0.80”)
Ø27
(1.06”)
(2.39”)
60.8
Ø14.5
20.5 (0.57”)
(0.81”)
Ø20
(1.30”)
(0.78")
33
(1.42”)
36
9
(3.19”)
Ø5.2 81
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
35.5
(0.20”)
46
PG11
Ø5.2
(0.77”)
19.5
(0.20”) PG11
72 (2.83”) 40.5
(0.53”)
13.5
84 (3.31”) (1.59”)
72 (2.83”) 48.5
103.6 (4.08”) (1.91”)
84.5 (3.33”)
100.1 (3.94”)
ROPE-PULL SAFETY LIMIT SWITCHES, ISO 13850 COMPLIANT

Safety switches
RS13 13 10 TL13 13 10 PLN13 13 11
16 20.5
15 (0.63") (0.81”)
(0.59")
Ø27
46.5 (1.83")
Ø20 (1.06”)
49 (1.93")
Ø20 (0.78")
(1.75”)
Ø14.5
(0.79") (0.57”) 44.5
5.3x7,3
Ø4.3 (0.20x0.28")
30 31
60 (2.36")
30
(1.40”)
(0.16") 22 (1.22") (1.81”)

35.5
(1.18")
55 (2.16")
46
(0.86") (1.18")
20
(0.78")
Ø5.2
(0.20”)
Ø5.3
30.5 35 40 43 72 (2.83”) PG11 40.5
(0.53”)
(0.20")
13.5
(1.20") PG11 (1.37") (1.57") PG13.5 (1.69") (1.59”)

84 (3.31”)
103.6 (4.08”)
P2L 13... - P2L 15...

20.5
(0.81”)
Ø27
(1.06”)
(2.62”)
66.5
Ø14.5
(0.57”)
(1.42”)
36
(3.19”)
81
Ø5.2
(0.20”)
(0.77”)
19.5
PG11
72 (2.83”) 48.5
(1.91”)
84.5 (3.33”)
100.1 (3.94”)
9-32
MICRO SWITCHES, K SERIES

KS A1... KS A2... KS A3...
23.3 12.3 (0.40")

Ø2.3 (0.09") 23.4 Ø5.2 (0.2") 23.3 10 (0.39")
(0.51”)
(0.92") Ø4 (0.16")
(0.92") (0.92")
(0.51”)
Ø7.15 (0.28")
(0.51”)
(0.65")
13
16.4
(1.83")
(0.87")
13
27.8
13
(1.83")
22
27.5
(1.83")
(1.83")
27.5
27.5
Ø4.4
25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 Ø4.4 Ø4.4
49.2 (1.94") (0.69") 25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5
49.2 (1.94") (0.69") 49.2 (1.94") (0.69")
KS A4... KS A9...
23.3 M12x1
(0.92") Ø8.3 (0.33")
(0.51”)
(1.52")
(0.51”)
38.6
13
13
(0.79")
(1.83")
20.2
27.5
(1.3")
33
Ø4.4
25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 Ø4.4
49.2 (1.94") (0.69") 25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5
49.2 (1.94") (0.69")
KS B1... KS B2...
23.3 23.3
(0.92")
M12x1
Ø12.5x3.8
(0.92") M12x1
Ø12.5x3.8
9
(0.49"x0.15")
(0.51”)
(0.49"x0.15")
(1.98")
(0.51”)
(1.98")
50.2
50.2
13
13
(1.83")
(1.83")
27.5
27.5
Ø4.4 Ø4.4
25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5
49.2 (1.94") (0.69") 49.2 (1.94") (0.69")
KS C1... KS C2... KS C3... KS C9...

.5 26.2
R481.91") Ø9.5x4 .5")
26.2
Ø9.5x4 26.2
(R 26.2 (R1 Ø9.5x4 (1.03") Ø9.5x4
(1.03")
(0.37"x0.16) (1.03") (0.37"x0.16)
(1.03") R38 (0.37"x0.16) R31.9 (0.37"x0.16)
R26.1 (R1.2")
(0.51”)
(0.51”)
(R1.05")
(0.51”)
(1.73")
(0.51”)
(1.47")
(1.47")
37.3
37.3
44
(1.33")
(0.79")
13
(0.79")
13
33.7
20.2
20.2
13
(0.79")
13
(0.79")
(1.3")
20.2
20.2
(1.3")
(1.3")
33
(1.3")
33
33
33
Ø4.4 Ø4.4
Ø4.4 25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 25.4 (1") (0.17") Ø4.4
25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 25.4 (1") 17.5
17.5 49.2 (1.94") (0.69") (0.17")
49.2 (1.94") (0.69") (0.69")
49.2 (1.94") (0.69") 49.2 (1.94")
KS L1... KS L2... KS L3...

17 (0.67")
.5") ")
.5 (R2 2 .13
4 (R 168.3 (6.63")
26.2 R63 26.2 R5 26.2
(1.03") (1.03") (1.03")
(0.51”)
(0.51”)
(0.51”)
4.9 (0.19") 4.9 (0.19") 0.96

(1.14")
(1.14")
(1.3")
33
29
13
29
(0.79")
(0.79")
(0.79")
13
13
20.2
20.2
20.2
(1.3")
(1.3")
33
33
(0.63")
Ø4.4 Ø4.4
16
25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 25.4 (1") 17.5
49.2 (1.94") (0.69") 49.2 (1.94") (0.69") 49.2 (1.94") (0.69")
ACCESSORIES
KSS C01 terminal shroud KSS CB2 terminal shroud with conduit
(0.20")
54 (2.12")
(1.06")
5
27
(1.54")
4.3 (0.17") 21
39.2
(0.83")
25
(0.98")
53 (2.09") 22
(0.79")
20
26 8 68 (2.68") (0.87")
(1.02") (0.31")
9-33
FOOT SWITCHES, K SERIES

KG1
264 (10.40") 150 (5.90")
M20
(3.38")
86
(1.34")
34
KG2
286.6 (11.28") 150 (5.90")
164 (6.46")
M20
(3.38")
86
(1.34")
9
34
KR1
238.7 (9.40") 140 (5.51")
M20
(2.24")
57
(0.98")
25
KR2
250 (9.84") 140 (5.51")
120 (4.72")
M20
(2.95")
75
(0.98")
25
KGD
516.5 (20.33")
286.6 (11.28") 301.2 (11.86")

516.5 (20.33")
166.5 (6.55")
M20
(3.48")
88.5
(1.44")
36.5
286.6 (11.28") 301.2 (11.86")
9-34
Wiring diagrams
LIMIT SWITCHES, KB - KM - KC - KN TYPE

K...S11 K...L11 K...L02 K...S02 K...L20 K...A11 K...L03 K...L12 K...L21
K...D02
Snap action Slow action Slow action Snap action Slow action Slow action Slow action Slow action Slow action
21 13 21 13 11 21 11 21 13 23 17 25 11 21 31 13 21 31 13 23 31
22 14 22 14 12 22 12 22 14 24 18 26 12 22 32 14 22 32 14 24 32
1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 2NC 2NC 2NO 1NO + 1NC 3NC 1NO + 2NC 2NO + 1NC
make before break
LIMIT SWITCHES, KP TYPE LIMIT SWITCHES, T TYPE LIMIT SWITCHES, PL TYPE
KP...S11 KP...L11 TS... TL... PLN A1... PLN A2... PLN C1... PLN C2.... PLN U1...
Snap action Slow action Snap action Slow action PLN 978
21 13 21 13 13 21 21 13 11 11 21 13 13 23 21 13
yellow/green
yellow/green
black
black
brown
brown
black
black
blue
blue
14 22 22 14 12 12 22 14 14 24 22 14
22 14 22 14
1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 1NC 2NC 1NO 2NO 1NO + 1NC
1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC
LIMIT SWITCHES FOR NORMAL STOPPING

9
RS1... RS2... RS3... PLN U1AT... PLN U1... P2L10...
TS1... TL1... P2L8...
Snap action Slow action Slow action
13 21 13 21 13 23 21 13 21 13 13 23 31 41
14 22 14 22 14 24 22 14 22 14 14 24 32 42
1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 2NO + 2NC
LIMIT SWITCHES FOR EMERGENCY STOPPING

RS13... PLN13... P2L13... P2L15...
TL13...
13 14 11 12 31 32 13 23 31 41
21 22 21 22 41 42 14 24 32 42
MICRO SWITCHES, KS TYPE

KS...
NC NO
2 3
1
COM
9-35
Page 10-2 Page 10-10
GX SERIES GN SERIES
• IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith • IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith
16A to 40A ratings 16A to 125A ratings
• Square-shaped contact body • Round-shaped contact body
• IEC IP20 degree of protection of contacts • IEC IP00 degree of protection of contacts
• IEC IP65 degree of protection on front, • IEC IP40 degree of protection on front,
standard supplied. standard supplied.
ROTARY CAM SWITCHES 10
Suitable for circuit connection,

changeover, switching on and off as
well as motor starting
Possible special circuit schemes
IEC IP40 or IP65 front degree of
protection
2-screw fixing
Wide range of features.
SEC. - PAGE PAGE

TYPE GX GN
Front mount versions
On/Off switches. U version, front mount .................................................................................................................. 10 - 2 10
Changeover switches with or without O (OFF). U version, front mount ..................................................................... 10 - 3 11
Motor switches. U version, front mount .................................................................................................................. 10 - 4 12
Voltemeter switches. Ammeter switches. U version, front mount ............................................................................. 10 - 4 13
On/Off switches. U11 version, front ring mount with handle operation for Ø22mm/Ø0.88” fixing .............................. 10 - 5 14
On/Off switches. U12 version, front ring mount with key operation for Ø22mm/Ø0.88” fixing ................................... 10 - 5 14
On/Off safety switches. U25-U65 version, front mount with red/yellow padlockable handle ...................................... 10 - 5 14
Rear mount versions
On/Off switches. O88-O98-O99 version, door coupling with red/yellow padlock system ........................................... 10 - 6 15
On/Off switches. O68-O78-O79 version, door coupling system ................................................................................ 10 - 6 15
On/Off switches. Changeover switches. Voltmeter switches.
Ammeter switches. O48 version, modular DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) mount ................................................................ 10 - 7 ––
Versions in enclosure
On/Off switches. Changeover switches. P version ................................................................................................... 10 - 8 16
Motor switches. P version with rotating handle ....................................................................................................... 10 - 8 16
On/Off switches. P25 version with padlockable handle ............................................................................................. 10 - 8 16
Accessories ........................................................................................................................................................... 10 - 9 17
Special circuit scheme form .............................................................................................................................. 10 - 18 18
Dimensions .......................................................................................................... 10 - 20 21
Wiring diagrams .................................................................................................... 10 - 22 22
Technical characteristics .......................................................................................... 10 - 24 24
S IGNALLING
AND
C ONTROL
Rotary cam switches
GX series
U version Order IEC Front Qty Weight General characteristics

front mount. code current plate per – IEC 16 to 40A conventional free air thermal current Ith
AC1 size pkg ratings
ON/OFF switches [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Extended mechanical and electrical life
– Rotation angles: 30°, 45°, 60° and 90°
ON/OFF SWITCHES. – Silver-alloy dual-breaking contacts
One-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 90. – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
GX16 90 U 16 n 48 1 0.096 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
0
GX20 90 U 1
20 n 48 1 0.096 – IEC IP65 front degree of protection; IEC IP20
protection of contacts
GX32 90 U 32 n 65 1 0.192 – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
GX40 90 U 40 n 65 1 0.194 the order code table; any other on request.
Two-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 91.
Selection guide
GX16 91 U 16 n 48 1 0.100 See page 10-24.
0
1
GX20 91 U 20 n 48 1 0.100
GX32 91 U 32 n 65 1 0.204 Optional
Enlarged front plate for GX16-GX20 (65x65mm instead of
GX40 91 U 40 n 65 1 0.206 standard 48x48):
Three-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 10. Add “H” after the switch rating in the order code
GX16 10 U 16 n 48 1 0.115 E.g. GX16H 10 U.
0
1
GX20 10 U 20 n 48 1 0.115 Enlarged front plate for GX32-GX40 (90x90mm instead of
GX32 10 U 32 n 65 1 0.242 standard 65x65):
GX40 10 U 40 n 65 1 0.244 Add “H” after the switch rating in the order code
E.g. GX32H 10 U.
Four-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 92.
GX16 92 U 16 n 48 1 0.118 Special versions
0
GX20 92 U 1
20 n 48 1 0.122 In addition to standard types, particular versions are
available with special operating circuit schemes.
GX32 92 U 32 n 65 1 0.252 See page 10.18.
10 GX40 92 U 40 n 65 1 0.254
Example of U version switch mounting
Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9”
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6”
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.
Type UL/CSA UL/CSA horsepower ratings Max IEC AC23

general 1 phase 3 phases power [kW]
use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GX16 12 3
/4 1 11/2 3 5 5 6.5
GX20 15 3
/4 11/2 11/2 3 5 5 7.5
GX32 32 11/2 3 3 71/2 15 15 15
GX40 40 2 5 5 10 15 15 18.5

Canada (File E155982) as Manual Motor Controllers.
IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61058-1,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

Rotary cam switches
GX series
U version Order IEC Front Qty Weight General characteristics

front mount. code current plate per – IEC 16 to 40A conventional free air thermal current Ith
Changeover switches [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Extended mechanical and electrical life
with 0 position. CHANGEOVER SWITCHES WITH 0.
– Silver-alloy dual-breaking contacts
Changeover switches One-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 51. – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
without 0 position GX16 51 U
0
16 n 48 1 0.098 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
GX20 51 U
1 2
20 n 48 1 0.098 – IEC IP65 front degree of protection; IEC IP20
protection of contacts
GX32 51 U 32 n 65 1 0.210 – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
GX40 51 U 40 n 65 1 0.212 the order code table; any other on request.
Two-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 52.
Selection guide
GX16 52 U 16 n 48 1 0.120 See page 10-24.
1 0
2
GX20 52 U 20 n 48 1 0.120
GX32 52 U 32 n 65 1 0.270 Optional
GX40 52 U 40 n 65 1 0.272 standard 48x48):
Three-pole – 3 wafers – scheme 53. Add “H” after the switch rating in the order code
GX16 53 U 16 n 48 1 0.148 E.g. GX16H 52 U.
1 0
2
GX20 53 U 20 n 48 1 0.148 Enlarged front plate for GX32-GX40 (90x90mm instead of
GX32 53 U 32 n 65 1 0.327 standard 65x65):
GX40 53 U 40 n 65 1 0.326 Add “H” after the switch rating in the order code
E.g. GX32H 52 U.
GX16 75 U 16 n 48 1 0.164 Special versions
0
GX20 75 U
1 2
20 n 48 1 0.172 In addition to standard types, particular versions are
GX32 75 U 32 n 65 1 0.378 See page 10-18.
GX40 75 U 40 n 65 1 0.380
10
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES WITHOUT 0.
One-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 54.
GX16 54 U 2 16 n 48 1 0.098
GX20 54 U 1 20 n 48 1 0.098
GX32 54 U 32 n 65 1 0.212
GX16 55 U 2 16 n 48 1 0.124
GX20 55 U 1 20 n 48 1 0.124
GX32 55 U 32 n 65 1 0.266
Three-pole – 3 wafers – scheme 56.
GX16 56 U 2 16 n 48 1 0.148
GX20 56 U 1 20 n 48 1 0.148
GX32 56 U 32 n 65 1 0.318
Four-pole – 4 wafers – scheme 69. Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
GX16 69 U 2 16 n 48 1 0.164 Canada (File E155982) as Manual Motor Controllers.
GX20 69 U 1 20 n 48 1 0.172
GX32 69 U 32 n 65 1 0.380 UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9”
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6”
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.

use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GX16 12 3
/4 1 11/2 3 5 5 6.5
GX20 15 3
/4 11/2 11/2 3 5 5 7.5
GX32 32 11/2 3 3 71/2 15 15 15
GX40 40 2 5 5 10 15 15 18.5

page 10-9 page 10-20 page 10-22 pages 10-24 and 25 10-3
Rotary cam switches
GX series
U version Order Ith IEC Front Qty Wt. General characteristics

front mount. code AC1 power plate per – IEC 16 to 40A conventional free air thermal current Ith
IEC AC23A size pkg ratings
Motor switches [A] [kW] [mm] n° [kg] – Extended mechanical and electrical life
MOTOR SWITCHES. – Silver-alloy dual-breaking contacts
Reversing switches. Three-pole – 3 wafers – scheme 11. – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
GX16 11 U 16 5 n 48 1 0.138 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
0
GX20 11 U
1 2
20 7.5 n 48 1 0.140 – IEC IP65 front degree of protection; IEC IP20 degree
of protection of contacts
GX32 11 U 32 15 n 65 1 0.316 – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
GX40 11 U n 65 1 40 15 0.318 the order code table; any other on request.
Pole-changing switches. 4 wafers – scheme 13.
Selection
GX16 13 U 16 5 n 48 1 0.166 See page 10-24.
1 0
2
GX20 13 U 20 7.5 n 48 1 0.168
GX32 13 U 32 15 n 65 1 0.400 Optional
GX40 13 U 40 15 n 65 1 0.400 standard 48x48): Add “H” after the switch rating in the
Star-delta switches. 4 wafers – scheme 12. order code E.g. GX16H 11 U.
GX16 12 U 16 5 n 48 1 0.176
0 Y
D Enlarged front plate for GX32-GX40 (90x90mm instead of
GX20 12 U 20 7.5 n 48 1 0.176 standard 65x65): Add “H” after the switch rating in the
GX32 12 U 32 15 n 65 1 0.384 order code E.g. GX32H 11 U.
GX40 12 U 40 15 n 65 1 0.386
Special versions
3-pole motor reversing switches with spring return to 0. In addition to standard types, particular versions are
3 wafers – scheme 26. available with special operating circuit schemes.
GX16 26 U 1 0 2 16 5 n 48 1 0.148 See page 10-18.
GX20 26 U 20 7.5 n 48 1 0.148
GX32 26 U 32 15 n 65 1 0.320
10
U version Order IEC Front Qty Weight
front mount. code current plate per
AC1 size pkg
Voltmeter switches. [A] [mm] n° [kg]
Ammeter switches VOLTMETER SWITCHES.
Phase-Neutral L1-N/L2-N/L3-N – 2 wafers – scheme 68.
GX16 68 U 0
L1N 16 n 48 1 0.120
L2N
L3N
Phase-Phase L1-L2/L2-L3/L3-L1 – 2 wafers – scheme 67.

GX16 67 U 0
L1-L2 16 n 48 1 0.124 Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
L2-L3 Canada (File E155982) as Manual Motor Controllers.
L3-L1
For 3 phase to phase voltage and 3 phase voltage readings UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
3 wafers – scheme 66.
GX16 66 U L1-L2
0
L1-N 16 n 48 1 0.152 Valid for motor, voltmeter and ammeter switches:
L2-L3 L2-N Front plate size:
L3-L1 L3-N 48x48mm = 1.9x1.9”
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6”
For 1 phase voltage and 3 phase to phase voltage readings 90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.
3 wafers – scheme 60.
GX16 60 U L1N
0
L1-L2 16 n 48 1 0.143
L2-L3
L3-L1
AMMETER SWITCHES.
Direct L1-L2-L3 current readings – 5 wafers – scheme 97.
GX16 97 U 0 16 n 48 1 0.186
L3 L1
L2
For L1-L2-L3 readings via 3 CTs – 3 wafers – scheme 98.

GX16 98 U 0 16 n 48 1 0.144
L3 L1
L2

use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GX16 12 3
/4 1 11/2 3 5 5 6.5
GX20 15 3
/4 11/2 11/2 3 5 5 7.5
GX32 32 11/2 3 3 71/2 15 15 15
GX40 40 2 5 5 10 15 15 18.5

10-4 page 10-9 page 10-20 pages 10-22 and 23 pages 10-24 and 25
Rotary cam switches
GX series
U11 version Order IEC Front Qty Weight General characteristics

front ring mount code current plate per – IEC 16 to 40A conventional free air thermal current Ith
with handle operation, [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Extended mechanical and electrical life
for Ø22mm/Ø0.88” fixing. ON/OFF SWITCHES.
ON/OFF switches One-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 90. – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
GX16 90 U11 0
1
16 –– 1 0.100 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
– IEC IP65 front degree of protection for U25 amd U65,
IEC IP40 for U11 and U12; IEC IP20 protection of
contacts
Two-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 91. – Legend marking for U11 and U12 versions is only for
GX16 91 U11 0 16 –– 1 0.100 reference while for U25 and U65 types standard
1
supplied as illustrated in the order code table; any
other on request.
Three-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 10. Selection

See page 10-24.
GX16 10 U11 0
1
16 –– 1 0.120
Optional
standard 48x48):
Four-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 92. Add “H” after the switch rating in the order code
GX16 92 U11 0
1
16 –– 1 0.123 E.g. GX16H 10 U25.

standard 65x65):
Add “H” after the switch rating in the order code
U12 version Order IEC Front Qty Weight E.g. GX32H 10 U25.
front ring mount code current plate per
AC1 size pkg Special versions
with key operation, [A] [mm] n° [kg]
In addition to standard types, particular versions are
10
for Ø22mm/Ø0.88” fixing. ON/OFF SWITCHES. See page 10-18.
ON/OFF switches One-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 90.
GX16 90 U12 0 16 –– 1 0.122 Example of U25-U65 switch mounting
1
Two-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 91.

GX16 91 U12 0
1
16 –– 1 0.122

GX16 10 U12 0
1
16 –– 1 0.140

GX16 92 U12 0
1
16 –– 1 0.146 Certifications and compliance
U25-U65 versions Order IEC Front Qty Weight UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
front mount with red/yellow code current plate per
AC1 size pkg Valid for U25 - U65 versions:
padlockable handle. [A] [mm] n° [kg] Front plate size:
ON/OFF switches ON/OFF SWITCHES.
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9”
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6”
Three-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 10. 90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.
GX16 10 U25 16 n 48 1 0.125
0
1
GX20 10 U25 20 n 48 1 0.125
GX32 10 U25 32 n 65 1 0.254
GX40 10 U65 40 n 65 1 0.254
GX16 92 U25 16 n 48 1 0.130
0
1
GX20 92 U25 20 n 48 1 0.130
GX32 92 U25 32 n 65 1 0.266
GX40 92 U65 40 n 65 1 0.266

use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GX16 12 3
/4 1 11/2 3 5 5 6.5
GX20 15 3
/4 11/2 11/2 3 5 5 7.5
GX32 32 11/2 3 3 71/2 15 15 15
GX40 40 2 5 5 10 15 15 18.5

Rotary cam switches
GX series
O88 - 098 versions Order IEC Front Qty Weight General characteristics
rear mount code current plate per – IEC 16 to 40A conventional free air thermal current Ith
door coupling with [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Extended mechanical and electrical life
red/yellow padlock system. ON/OFF SWITCHES.
ON/OFF switches Three-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 10. – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
GX16 10 O88 16 n 48 1 0.178 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
0
GX20 10 O88 1
20 n 48 1 0.200 – IEC IP65 front degree of protection; IEC IP20 degree
of protection of contacts
GX32 10 O88 32 n 65 1 0.320 – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
GX40 10 O98 40 n 65 1 0.320 the order code table; any other on request.
Selection
GX16 92 O88 16 n 48 1 0.182 See page 10-24.
0
1
GX20 92 O88 20 n 48 1 0.182
GX32 92 O88 32 n 65 1 0.320 Optional
GX40 92 O98 40 n 65 1 0.330 standard 48x48):
Add “H” after the switch rating in the order code
E.g. GX16H 10 O88.

O68 - 078 versions Order IEC Front Qty Weight standard 65x65):
code current plate per Add “H” after the switch rating in the order code
rear mount AC1 size pkg E.g. GX32H 10 O88.
door coupling system. [A] [mm] n° [kg] Special versions
ON/OFF switches ON/OFF SWITCHES. In addition to standard types, particular versions are
Three-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 10. available with special operating circuit schemes.
GX16 10 O68 16 n 48 1 0.170 See page 10-18.
10 GX20 10 O68
0
1
20 n 48 1 0.170 Example of O version switch mounting
GX32 10 O68 32 n 65 1 0.295
GX40 10 O78 40 n 65 1 0.295
GX16 92 O68 16 n 48 1 0.180
0
1
GX20 92 O68 20 n 48 1 0.190
GX32 92 O68 32 n 65 1 0.316
GX40 92 O78 40 n 65 1 0.316

general power [kW] Certifications and compliance
1 phase 3 phases Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V Canada (File E155982) as Manual Motor Controllers.
GX16 12 3
/4 1 11/2 3 5 5 6.5 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
GX20 15 3
/4 11/2 11/2 3 5 5 7.5 UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
GX32 32 11/2 3 3 71/2 15 15 15
GX40 40 2 5 5 10 15 15 18.5 Valid for O88 - O98 - O68 - O78 versions:
Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9”
60x60mm = 2.6x2.6”
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.

Rotary cam switches
GX series
O48 version Order IEC Front Qty Weight General characteristics

modular service cover code current plate per – IEC 16A conventional free air thermal current Ith
35mm DIN rail mount. [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Extended mechanical and electrical life
ON/OFF switches. ON/OFF SWITCHES.
Changeover switches. One-pole – 3 wafers – scheme 90. – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
Voltmeter switches. GX16 90 O48 0
1
16 45x54 1 0.110 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
– IEC IP40 front degree of protection; IEC IP20 degree
Ammeter switches of protection of contacts
– Suitable for screw fixing or mounting on 35mm DIN
Two-pole – 3 wafers – scheme 91. rail (IEC/EN 60175)
GX16 91 O48 0 16 45x54 1 0.110 – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
1
the order code table; any other on request.
Selection guide
Three-pole – 3 wafers – scheme 10. See page 10-24.
GX16 10 O48 0
1
16 45x54 1 0.118
Special versions
Four-pole – 3 wafers – scheme 92. See page 10-18.
GX16 92 O48 0 16 45x54 1 0.125
1 Certifications and compliance
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES WITH 0. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
One-pole – 3 wafers – scheme 51. IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61058-1,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
GX16 51 O48 1 0
2 16 45x54 1 0.098
10
GX16 52 O48 1 0
2 16 45x54 1 0.122

GX16 53 O48 1 0
2 16 45x54 1 0.150

GX16 75 O48 1 0
2 16 45x54 1 0.170
VOLTMETER SWITCHES.
Phase-Neutral L1-N/L2-N/L3-N – 3 wafers – scheme 68.
GX16 68 O48 0
L1N 16 45x54 1 0.130
L2N
L3N
Phase-Phase L1-L2/L2-L3/L3-L1 – 3 wafers – scheme 67.

GX16 67 O48 0
L1-L2 16 45x54 1 0.130
L2-L3
L3-L1
For 3 phase to phase voltage and 3 phase voltage readings

3 wafers – scheme 66
GX16 66 O48 L1-L2
0
L1-N 16 45x54 1 0.156
L2-L3 L2-N
L3-L1 L3-N
AMMETER SWITCHES.
Direct L1-L2-L3 current readings – 5 wafers – scheme 97.
GX16 97 O48 0 16 45x54 1 0.196
L3 L1
L2
For L1-L2-L3 readings via 3 CTs – 4 wafers – scheme 98.

GX16 98 O48 0 16 45x54 1 0.150
L3 L1
L2
Front cover size:

45x54mm = 1.8x2.1”

use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GX16 12 3
/4 1 11/2 3 5 5 6.5

page 10-9 page 10-20 pages 10-22 and 23 pages 10-24 and 25 10-7
Rotary cam switches
GX series
P version in enclosure Orde code IEC Housing Qty Wt General characteristics

with rotating handle. current size per – IEC 16 to 40A conventional free air thermal current Ith
AC1 pkg ratings
ON/OFF switches. [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Extended mechanical and electrical life
Changeover switches ON/OFF SWITCHES.
Three poles - scheme 10. – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
GX16 10 P 16 90x90 1 0.330 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
0
GX20 10 P 1
20 90x90 1 0.330 – IP65 degree of protection
– Top and bottom entry: 4 PG16 threaded knockouts for
GX32 10 P 32 110x110 1 0.560 90x90mm types and 4 PG21 for 110x110mm
GX40 10 P 40 110x110 1 0.560 – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
ON/OFF SWITCHES. the order code table; any other on request.
Four poles - scheme 92.
Selection guide
GX16 92 P 16 90x90 1 0.340 See page 10-24.
0
1
GX20 92 P 20 90x90 1 0.340
GX32 92 P 32 110x110 1 0.575 Special versions
GX40 92 P 40 110x110 1 0.575 available with special operating circuit schemes.
CHANGEOVER SWICTHES. See page 10-18.
Three poles - scheme 53.
GX16 53 P 16 90x90 1 0.415 Certifications and compliance
1 0
2 Certifications obtained: EAC.
GX20 53 P 20 90x90 1 0.415 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
GX32 53 P 32 110x110 1 0.710 IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61058-1.
GX40 53 P 40 110x110 1 0.710
Valid for P - P25 versions:
Four poles - scheme 75. Housing size:
GX16 75 P 16 90x90 1 0.430 90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”
0
GX20 75 P
1 2
20 90x90 1 0.430 110x110mm = 4.3x4.3”.
10 GX32 75 P 32 110x110 1 0.760
GX40 75 P 40 110x110 1 0.760
P version in enclosure Order code Ith IEC Housing Qty Wt.

with rotating handle. AC1 power size per
IEC AC23A pkg
Motor switches [A] [A] [mm] n° [kg]
MOTOR SWITCHES.
Three-pole reversing switches - scheme 11.
GX16 11 P 16 5 90x90 1 0.405
1 0
2
GX20 11 P 20 7.5 90x90 1 0.425
GX32 11 P 32 15 110x110 1 0.695
GX40 11 P 40 15 110x110 1 0.700
P25 version in enclosure Orde code IEC Housing Qty Wt

with padlockable rotating current size per
AC1 pkg
handle. [A] [mm] n° [kg]
ON/OFF switches ON/OFF SWITCHES.
Three poles - scheme 10.
GX16 10 P25 0
1
16 90x90 1 0.340
GX20 10 P25 20 90x90 1 0.345
GX32 10 P25 32 110x110 1 0.586
GX16 92 P25 0
1
16 90x90 1 0.350
GX20 92 P25 20 90x90 1 0.350
GX32 92 P25 32 110x110 1 0.605
For indication and reference purposes only - No UL/CSA approval

use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GX16 12 3
/4 1 11/2 3 5 5 6.5
GX20 15 3
/4 11/2 11/2 3 5 5 7.5
GX32 32 11/2 3 3 71/2 15 15 15
GX40 40 2 5 5 10 15 15 18.5

Rotary cam switches
Accessories for GX series
Accessories for Order Description Q.ty Weight

GX switches code per
pkg
n. [kg]
Black operating handle∂.
7 AO14 For 48x48mm/1.9x19” 1 0.005
front plate n 6mm/0.24” for
GX16-GX20
7 A114 For 65x65mm/2.6x2.6” 1 0.010
GX32-GX40 and
GX16H-GX20H
7 AO14 - 7 AR114 - 7 A114 - 7 AR214 7 AR214 For 90x90mm/3.5x3.4” 1 0.015
front plate
n 7mm/0.28” for
GX32H-GX40H
Black operating lever∂.
7 A124 For 65x65mm/2.6x2.6” 1 0.020
GX32-GX40 and
GX16H-GX20H
7 AR224 For 90x90mm/3.5x3.4” 1 0.038
GX32H-GX40H
Adjustable door-coupling extension shaft. 70mm/2.8”
7 AR124 - 7 A124 - 7 AR224 long max∂.
7 APRBP For GX16 to GX40 1 0.027
IP40 face plate∂.
GX M1 48x48mm/1.9x1.9” blank 1 0.018
10
face plate
GX M2 65x65mm/2.6x2.6” blank 1 0.023
7 APRBP face plate
IP40 face plate with legend plate.
GX M5 48x60mm/1.9x2.6” blank 1 0.017
face plate with legend plate
GX M6 65x80mm/2.6x3.1” blank 1 0.033
face plate with legend plate
Padlockable handle∂.
GX A01 48x48mm/1.9x1.9” red/yellow 1 0.026
0-1 padlockable handle for
2-position GX16-GX20
GX A01H 65x65mm/2.6x2.6” red/yellow 1 0.047
GX M1 - GX M2 0-1 padlockable handle for
GX A11 65x65mm/2.6x2.6” red/yellow 1 0.047
0-1 padlockable handle for
∂ Also suitable for GN series.
GX M5 - GX M6
GX A01 - GX A01H - GX A11
10-9
Rotary cam switches
GN series
U version Order code IEC Front Qty Wt General characteristics

front mount. current plate per – IEC 16 to 125A conventional free air thermal current
AC1 size pkg Ith ratings
ON/OFF switches [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Extended mechanical and electrical life
ON/OFF SWITCHES. – Silver-alloy dual breaking contacts
One pole - 1 wafer - scheme 90. – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
7 GN12 90 U 16 n 48 1 0.075 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
7 GN20 90 U 20 n 48 1 0.077 – IEC IP40 front degree of protection (for IP65 see
0
1
Optional-front plate); IEC IP00 of contacts
7 GN25 90 U 25 n 48 1 0.087 – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
7 GN32 90 U 32 n 65 1 0.173 the order code table; any other on request.
7 GN40 90 U 40 n 65 1 0.173
Selection guide
7 GN63 90 U 63 n 65 1 0.200 See page 10-24.
2 poles - 1 wafer - scheme 91.
7 GN12 91 U 16 n 48 1 0.079 Optional
IEC IP65 front plate
7 GN20 91 U 20 n 48 1 0.082 Add “51” at the end of the order code.
0
1
7 GN25 91 U 25 n 48 1 0.094 E.g. 7 GN12 92 U 51.
7 GN32 91 U 32 n 65 1 0.186
Enlarged plate for GN12-20-25 (65x65mm instead of
7 GN40 91 U 40 n 65 1 0.186 48x48)
7 GN63 91 U 63 n 65 1 0.218 Add the letter “H” after the switch size of the order code.
3 poles - 2 wafers - scheme 10. E.g. 7 GN12H 10 U.
7 GN12 10 U 16 n 48 1 0.088 Enlarged plate for GN32-40-63 (90x90mm instead of
7 GN20 10 U 20 n 48 1 0.095 65x65)
7 GN25 10 U 0 25 n 48 1 0.116 Add the letter “H” after the switch size of the order code.
1
E.g. 7 GN32H 10 U.
7 GN32 10 U 32 n 65 1 0.228
10 7 GN40 10 U 40 n 65 1 0.240 Special versions
7 GN63 10 U 63 n 65 1 0.282
7 GN125 10 U 125 n 90 1 0.706 See page 10-18.
4 poles - 2 wafers - scheme 92.
7 GN12 92 U 16 n 48 1 0.088 Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC; CSA certified, for Canada
7 GN20 92 U 20 n 48 1 0.098 and USA (File 207767) and UL Listed, for USA
7 GN25 92 U 0
1
25 n 48 1 0.122 (File E155982), as Manual Motor Controllers.
7 GN32 92 U 32 n 65 1 0.232 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
7 GN40 92 U 40 n 65 1 0.251 CSA C22.2 n° 14.
7 GN63 92 U 63 n 65 1 0.302
7 GN125 92 U 125 n 90 1 0.782
Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9”
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6”
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.

use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GN12 15 3
/4 1 11/2 3 –– –– 5.5
GN20 20 3
/4 2 11/2 3 –– –– 7.5
GN25 30 11/2 3 3 5 10 15 11
GN32 40 2 5 5 10 15 15 15
GN40 50 2 5 5 10 20 20 18.5
GN63 60 5 10 71/2 15 25 25 30
GN125 130 71/2 15 15 25 50 40 45

10-10 page 10-17 page 10-20 page 10-22 page 10-24 e 25
Rotary cam switches
GN series
U version, front mount. Order code IEC Front Qty Wt General characteristics
Changeover switches with current plate per – IEC 16 to 125A conventional free air thermal current
or without 0 (OFF) [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Extended mechanical and electrical life
CHANGEOVER SWITCH WITH 0 (OFF). – Silver-alloy dual breaking contacts
One-pole - 1 wafer - scheme 51. – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
7 GN12 51 U 16 n 48 1 0.078 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
7 GN20 51 U 20 n 48 1 0.081 – IEC IP40 front degree of protection (for IP65 see
1 0
2 Optional-front plate); IEC IP00 of contacts
7 GN25 51 U 25 n 48 1 0.090 – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
7 GN32 51 U 32 n 65 1 0.183 the order code table; any other on request.
7 GN40 51 U 40 n 65 1 0.194
Selection guide
7 GN63 51 U 63 n 65 1 0.224 See page 10-24.
Two-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 52.
7 GN12 52 U 16 n 48 1 0.095 Optional
7 GN20 52 U 20 n 48 1 0.098 Add “51” at the end of the order code.
7 GN25 52 U 1 0
2 25 n 48 1 0.121 E.g. 7 GN12 52 U 51.
7 GN32 52 U 32 n 65 1 0.232
7 GN40 52 U 40 n 65 1 0.251 48x48)
7 GN125 52 U 125 n 90 1 0.788 E.g. 7 GN12H 51 U.
Three-pole - 3 wafers - scheme 53. Enlarged plate for GN32-40-63 (90x90mm instead of
7 GN12 53 U 16 n 48 1 0.107 65x65)
E.g. 7 GN32H 51 U.
7 GN25 53 U 1 0
2 25 n 48 1 0.152
7 GN32 53 U 32 n 65 1 0.285 Special versions
10
7 GN40 53 U 40 n 65 1 0.308
7 GN63 53 U 63 n 65 1 0.377 See page 10-18.
7 GN125 53 U 125 n 90 1 1.036
Four-pole - 4 wafers - scheme 75. Certifications and compliance
7 GN12 75 U 16 n 48 1 0.123 and USA (File 207767) and UL Listed, for USA
7 GN20 75 U 20 n 48 1 0.134 (File E155982), as Manual Motor Controllers.
7 GN25 75 U 0 25 n 48 1 0.180 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
1 2
IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
7 GN32 75 U 32 n 65 1 0.334 CSA C22.2 n° 14.
7 GN40 75 U 40 n 65 1 0.358
7 GN63 75 U 63 n 65 1 0.468
7 GN125 75 U 125 n 90 1 1.270
CHANGEOVER SWITCH WITHOUT 0 (OFF).
One-pole - 1 wafer - scheme 54.
7 GN12 54 U 2 16 n 48 1 0.079
7 GN20 54 U 1 20 n 48 1 0.082
7 GN25 54 U 25 n 48 1 0.096
Two-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 55.
7 GN12 55 U 2 16 n 48 1 0.093
7 GN20 55 U 1 20 n 48 1 0.100
7 GN25 55 U 25 n 48 1 0.122
Three-pole - 3 wafers - scheme 56.
7 GN12 56 U 2 16 n 48 1 0.108
7 GN20 56 U 1 20 n 48 1 0.115
7 GN25 56 U 25 n 48 1 0.145
Four-pole - 4 wafers - scheme 69.
7 GN12 69 U 2 16 n 48 1 0.124
7 GN20 69 U 1 20 n 48 1 0.134
7 GN25 69 U 25 n 48 1 0.174
Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9” - 60x60mm = 2.6x2.6” - 90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.

use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GN12 15 3
/4 1 11/2 3 –– –– 5.5
GN20 20 3
/4 2 11/2 3 –– –– 7.5
GN25 30 11/2 3 3 5 10 15 11
GN32 40 2 5 5 10 15 15 15
GN40 50 2 5 5 10 20 20 18.5
GN63 60 5 10 71/2 15 25 25 30
GN125 130 71/2 15 15 25 50 40 45

Rotary cam switches
GN series
U version Order code Ith IEC Front Qty Wt General characteristics

front mount. AC1 power plate per – IEC 16 to 125A conventional free air thermal current
IEC AC23A size pkg Ith ratings
Motor switches [A] [kW] [mm] n° [kg] – Extended mechanical and electrical life
MOTOR SWITCHES. – Silver-alloy dual breaking contacts
Three-pole reversing switches - 3 wafers - scheme 11. – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
7 GN12 11 U 16 6 n 48 1 0.105 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
7 GN20 11 U 20 7.5 n 48 1 0.111 – IEC IP40 front degree of protection (for IP65 see
Optional-front plate); IEC IP00 of contacts
7 GN25 11 U 1 0
2
25 11 n 48 1 0.145 – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
7 GN32 11 U 32 15 n 65 1 0.278 the order code table; any other on request.
7 GN40 11 U 40 18.5 n 65 1 0.294
Selection guide
7 GN63 11 U 63 30 n 65 1 0.366 See page 10-24.
7 GN125 11 U 125 45 n 90 1 0.976
Pole changing switches - 4 wafers - scheme 13. Optional
7 GN12 13 U 16 6 n 48 1 0.126 Add “51” at the end of the order code.
7 GN20 13 U 20 7.5 n 48 1 0.134 E.g. 7 GN12 13 U 51.
7 GN25 13 U 1 0
2
25 11 n 48 1 0.181
7 GN32 13 U 32 15 n 65 1 0.342 48x48)
7 GN40 13 U 40 18.5 n 65 1 0.366 Add the letter “H” after the switch size of the order code.
7 GN63 13 U 63 30 n 65 1 0.465 E.g. 7 GN12H 11 U.
7 GN125 13 U 125 45 n 90 1 1.301 Enlarged plate for GN32-40-63 (90x90mm instead of
Star-delta switches - 4 wafers - scheme 12. 65x65)
7 GN12 12 U 16 6 n 48 1 0.124 Add the letter “H” after the switch size of the order code.
E.g. 7 GN32H 11 U.
7 GN20 12 U 20 7.5 n 48 1 0.134
10 7 GN25 12 U 0 Y
D 25 11 n 48 1 0.175 Special versions
7 GN32 12 U 32 15 n 65 1 0.343 In addition to standard types, particular versions are
7 GN40 12 U 40 18.5 n 65 1 0.366 See page 10-18.
7 GN63 12 U 63 30 n 65 1 0.465
7 GN125 12 U 125 45 n 90 1 1.303 Certifications and compliance
Three-pole reversing switches with spring return to 0 - and USA (File 207767) and UL Listed, for USA
3 wafers - scheme 26. (File E155982), as Manual Motor Controllers.
7 GN12 26 U 1 0 2 16 6 n 48 1 0.106 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
7 GN20 26 U 20 7.5 n 48 1 0.111 IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
7 GN25 26 U 25 11 n 48 1 0.144
Pole changing switches with reversing (Dahlander) -
6 wafers - scheme 20.
7 GN12 20 U 1
0
1
16 6 n 48 1 0.161
7 GN20 20 U 2 2
20 7.5 n 48 1 0.165
7 GN25 20 U 25 11 n 48 1 0.246
Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9”
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6”
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.

use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GN12 15 3
/4 1 11/2 3 –– –– 5.5
GN20 20 3
/4 2 11/2 3 –– –– 7.5
GN25 30 11/2 3 3 5 10 15 11
GN32 40 2 5 5 10 15 15 15
GN40 50 2 5 5 10 20 20 18.5
GN63 60 5 10 71/2 15 25 25 30
GN125 130 71/2 15 15 25 50 40 45

10-12 page 10-17 page 10-21 pages 10-22 and 23 pages 10-24 and 25
Rotary cam switches
GN series
U version, front mount. Order code IEC Front Qty Wt General characteristics
Voltmeter switches. current plate per – IEC 16 to 125A conventional free air thermal current
Ammeter switches [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Extended mechanical and electrical life
VOLTMETER SWITCHES. – Silver-alloy dual breaking contacts
Phase-Neutral L1-N/L2-N/L3-N – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
2 wafers - scheme 68. according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
7 GN12 68 U 0
L1N 16 n 48 1 0.094 – IEC IP40 front degree of protection (for IP65 see
7 GN20 68 U L2N 20 n 48 1 0.099 Optional-front plate); IEC IP00 of contacts
L3N – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
the order code table; any other on request.
Phase-Phase L1-L2/L2-L3/L3-L1
2 wafers - scheme 67. Selection guide
7 GN12 67 U 0 16 n 48 1 0.094 See page 10-24.
L1-L2
7 GN20 67 U L2-L3 20 n 48 1 0.099 Optional

L3-L1
For 3 phase to phase voltages and 3 phase voltages Add “51” at the end of the order code.
3 wafers - scheme 66. E.g. 7 GN12 67 U 51.
7 GN12 66 U L1-L2 0 L1-N 16 n 48 1 0.116 Enlarged plate for GN12-20-25 (65x65mm instead of
7 GN20 66 U L2-L3 L2-N 20 n 48 1 0.116 48x48)
L3-L1 L3-N
Add the letter “H” after the switch size of the order code.
E.g. 7 GN12H 68 U.
For 1 phase voltage and 3 phase to phase voltages
3 wafers - scheme 60. Special versions
7 GN12 60 U L1N
0
L1-L2 16 n 48 1 0.105 In addition to standard types, particular versions are
7 GN20 60 U L2-L3 20 n 48 1 0.116 available with special operating circuit schemes.
L3-L1 See page 10-18.
AMMETER SWITCHES.
Direct L1-L2-L3 reading - 5 wafers - scheme 97.
10
7 GN12 97 U 0 16 n 48 1 0.132 and USA (File 207767) and UL Listed, for USA
(File E155982), as Manual Motor Controllers.
7 GN20 97 U L3 L1 20 n 48 1 0.148 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
L2 IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
L1-L2-L3 reading via 3 current transformers CSA C22.2 n° 14.
4 wafers - scheme 98.
7 GN12 98 U 0 16 n 48 1 0.115
7 GN20 98 U L3 L1 20 n 48 1 0.115
L2
Front plate size:

48x48mm = 1.9x1.9”
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6”.

use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GN12 15 3
/4 1 11/2 3 –– –– 5.5
GN20 20 3
/4 2 11/2 3 –– –– 7.5

page 10-17 page 10-21 pages 10-23 pages 10-24 and 25 10-13
Rotary cam switches
GN Series
U11 version Order code IEC Front Qty Wt General characteristics

front ring mount current plate per – IEC 16 to 125A conventional free air thermal current
with handle operation [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Extended mechanical and electrical life
for Ø22mm/Ø0.88” fixing. ON/OFF SWITCHES. One-pole - 1 wafer - scheme 90.
– Silver-alloy dual breaking contacts
ON/OFF switches 7 GN12 90 U11 0 16 –– 1 0.078 – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
1
7 GN20 90 U11 20 –– 1 0.082 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
– IEC IP40 front degree of protection (for IP65 see
Optional-front plate); IEC IP00 of contacts for U11 and
Two-pole - 1 wafer - scheme 91. U12 and IEC IP20 of incoming contacts for U25 and
7 GN12 91 U11 0 16 –– 1 0.080 U65 only
1
– Legend marking for U11 and U12 versions is only for
7 GN20 91 U11 20 –– 1 0.084 reference while for U25 and U65 types standard
supplied as illustrated in the order code table; any
Three-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 10. other on request.
7 GN12 10 U11 0
1
16 –– 1 0.092 Selection guide
7 GN20 10 U11 20 –– 1 0.095 See page 10-24.
Optional
Four-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 92. IEC IP65 front plate
7 GN12 92 U11 0
1
16 –– 1 0.094 Add “51” at the end of the order code.
7 GN20 92 U11 20 –– 1 0.100 E.g. 7 GN12 92 U25 51.

65x65)
U12 version Order code IEC Front Qty Wt E.g. 7 GN32H 10 U25.
front ring mount current plate per
AC1 size pkg Special versions
with key operation
10 for Ø22mm/Ø0.88” fixing.
[A] [mm] n° [kg] In addition to standard types, particular versions are
ON/OFF SWITCHES. One-pole - 1 wafer - scheme 90.
ON/OFF switches 7 GN12 90 U12 0 16 –– 1 0.100
See page 10-18.
1
7 GN20 90 U12 20 –– 1 0.104 Certifications and compliance
and USA (File 207767) and UL Listed, for USA
Two-pole - 1 wafer scheme 91. (File E155982), as Manual Motor Controllers.
7 GN12 91 U12 0
1
16 –– 1 0.108 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
7 GN20 91 U12 20 –– 1 0.112 IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Three-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 10. Valid for U25 - U65 versions:

7 GN12 10 U12 0 16 –– 1 0.129 Front plate size:
1
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6”
7 GN20 10 U12 20 –– 1 0.135 90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.
For UL/CSA ratings, see page 10-15.
7 GN12 92 U12 0
1
16 –– 1 0.132
7 GN20 92 U12 20 –– 1 0.139
U25-U65 version Order code IEC Front Qty Wt

front ring mount with current plate per
AC1 size pkg
red/yellow padlockable [A] [mm] n° [kg]
handle. ON/OFF SWITCHES. Three-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 10.
ON/OFF switches 7 GN12 10 U25 16 n 65 1 0.161
7 GN20 10 U25 20 n 65 1 0.165
7 GN25 10 U25 0
1
25 n 65 1 0.187
7 GN32 10 U25 32 n 65 1 0.277
7 GN40 10 U65 40 n 65 1 0.294
7 GN63 10 U65 63 n 65 1 0.366
7 GN125 10 U65 125 n 90 1 0.976
7 GN12 92 U25 16 n 65 1 0.164
7 GN20 92 U25 20 n 65 1 0.169
7 GN25 92 U25 0
1
25 n 65 1 0.196
7 GN32 92 U25 32 n 65 1 0.285
7 GN40 92 U65 40 n 65 1 0.298
7 GN63 92 U65 63 n 65 1 0.370
7 GN125 92 U65 125 n 90 1 0.984

10-14 page 10-17 page 10-21 pages 10-22 pages 10-24 and 25
Rotary cam switches
GN Series
O88-O98-O99 version Order code IEC Front Qty Wt General characteristics

rear mount current plate per – IEC 16 to 125A conventional free air thermal current
door coupling with [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Extended mechanical and electrical life
red/yellow padlock system. ON/OFF SWITCHES.
ON/OFF switches Three-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 10. – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
7 GN12 10 O88 16 n 65 1 0.223 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
7 GN20 10 O88 20 n 65 1 0.223 – IEC IP40 front degree of protection (for IP65 see
Optional-front plate); IEC IP20 of incoming contacts
7 GN25 10 O88 0
1
25 n 65 1 0.252 only
7 GN32 10 O88 32 n 65 1 0.326 – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
7 GN40 10 O98 40 n 65 1 0.329 the order code table; any other on request.
7 GN63 10 O98 63 n 65 1 0.374 Selection guide
7 GN125 10 O99 125 n 90 1 0.909 See page 10-24.
Optional
7 GN12 92 O88 16 n 65 1 0.223 IEC IP65 front plate
7 GN20 92 O88 20 n 65 1 0.233 Add “51” at the end of the order code.
7 GN25 92 O88 0 25 n 65 1 0.259 E.g. 7 GN12 92 088 51.
1
7 GN32 92 O88 32 n 65 1 0.327 Fixing plate for DIN 35mm rail (IEC/EN 60715)
7 GN40 92 O98 40 n 65 1 0.341 Add “18” at the end of the order code.
7 GN63 92 O98 63 n 65 1 0.391 E.g. 7 GN25 10 O 18.
7 GN125 92 O99 125 n 90 1 0.985 Enlarged plate for GN12-20-25 (65x65mm instead of
48x48)
O68-O78-O79 version Order code IEC Front Qty Wt E.g. 7 GN12H 10 068.
rear mount current plate per
AC1 size pkg
door coupling system. [A] [mm] n° [kg]
65x65)
10
ON/OFF switches ON/OFF SWITCHES. Add the letter “H” after the switch size of the order code.
Three-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 10. E.g. 7 GN32H 10 068.
7 GN12 10 O68 16 n 48 1 0.170 Special versions
7 GN20 10 O68 20 n 48 1 0.176 In addition to standard types, particular versions are
7 GN25 10 O68 0 25 n 48 1 0.199 available with special operating circuit schemes.
1
See page 10-18.
7 GN32 10 O68 32 n 65 1 0.330
7 GN40 10 O78 40 n 65 1 0.310 Certifications and compliance
7 GN63 10 O78 63 n 65 1 0.359 Certifications obtained: EAC; CSA certified, for Canada
and USA (File 207767) and UL Listed, for USA
7 GN125 10 O79 125 n 90 1 0.985 (File E155982), as Manual Motor Controllers.
Four-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 92. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
7 GN12 92 O68 16 n 48 1 0.170 IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
7 GN20 92 O68 20 n 48 1 0.178
7 GN25 92 O68 0
1
25 n 48 1 0.240 Valid for O88 - O98 - O99 - O68 - O78 - O79 versions:
7 GN32 92 O68 32 n 65 1 0.341 Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9”
7 GN40 92 O78 40 n 65 1 0.342 65x65mm = 2.6x2.6”
7 GN63 92 O78 63 n 65 1 0.378 90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.
7 GN125 92 O79 125 n 90 1 0.950

use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GN12 15 3
/4 1 11/2 3 –– –– 5.5
GN20 20 3
/4 2 11/2 3 –– –– 7.5
GN25 30 11/2 3 3 5 10 15 11
GN32 40 2 5 5 10 15 15 15
GN40 50 2 5 5 10 20 20 18.5
GN63 60 5 10 71/2 15 25 25 30
GN125 130 71/2 15 15 25 50 40 45

Rotary cam switches
GN Series
P version in enclosure Order code IEC Housing Qty Wt General characteristics

with rotating handle. current size per – IEC 16 to 63A conventional free air thermal current Ith
AC1 pkg ratings
ON/OFF switches. [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Extended mechanical and electrical life
Changeover switches ON/OFF SWITCHES.
Three-pole - scheme 10. – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
7 GN12 10 P 16 75x75 1 0.168 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
7 GN20 10 P 20 75x75 1 0.227 – IP65 degree of protection
0
1
– Top and bottom entry:
7 GN25 10 P 25 75x75 1 0.258 • 4 PG13.5 threaded knockouts for 75x75mm types
7 GN32 10 P 32 90x90 1 0.392 • 4 PG16 threaded knockouts for 90x90mm types
7 GN40 10 P 40 110x110 1 0.453 • 4 PG21 threaded knockouts for 110x110mm types
– Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
7 GN63 10 P 63 110x110 1 0.766 the order code table; any other on request.
Four-pole - scheme 92.
7 GN12 92 P 16 75x75 1 0.174 Selection guide
See page 10-24.
7 GN20 92 P 20 75x75 1 0.222
0
1
7 GN25 92 P 25 75x75 1 0.278 Special versions
7 GN32 92 P 32 90x90 1 0.411 In addition to standard types, particular versions are
7 GN40 92 P 40 110x110 1 0.411 See page 10-18.
7 GN63 92 P 63 110x110 1 0.625
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES. Certifications and compliance
Three-pole - scheme 53. Certifications obtained: EAC.
7 GN12 53 P 16 75x75 1 0.219 IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
7 GN20 53 P 20 75x75 1 0.273
0
7 GN25 53 P
1 2
25 75x75 1 0.307 Valid for P - P25 versions:
Housing size:
7 GN32 53 P 32 90x90 1 0.500
10 7 GN40 53 P 40 110x110 1 0.727
75x75mm = 3x3”
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”
7 GN63 53 P 63 110x110 1 0.785 110x110 = 4.3x4.3”.
Four-pole - scheme 75. For indication and reference purposes only
7 GN12 75 P 16 75x75 1 0.226 No UL/CSA approval
7 GN20 75 P 20 75x75 1 0.289 Type UL/CSA Max IEC
1 0
2
7 GN25 75 P 25 90x90 1 0.418 general AC23 power
7 GN32 75 P 32 90x90 1 0.540 use [A] [kW] at 400V
7 GN40 75 P 40 110x110 1 0.753 GN12 15 5.5
7 GN63 75 P 63 110x110 1 0.840 GN20 20 7.5
GN25 30 11
GN32 40 15
P version in enclosure Order code Ith IEC Housing Qty Wt
AC1 power size per GN40 50 18.5
with rotating handle. IEC AC23A pkg GN63 60 30
Motor switches [A] [kW] [mm] n° [kg]
MOTOR SWITCHES.
Three-pole reversing switches - scheme 11. Type UL/CSA horsepower ratings
7 GN12 11 P 16 5.5 75x75 1 0.216 1 phase 3 phases
7 GN20 11 P 20 7.5 75x75 1 0.271 120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
1 0
2
7 GN25 11 P 25 11 75x75 1 0.299 GN12 3
/4 1 11/2 3 –– ––
7 GN32 11 P 32 15 90x90 1 0.482 GN20 3
/4 2 11/2 3 –– ––
7 GN40 11 P 40 18.5 110x110 1 0.508 GN25 1 /21
3 3 5 10 15
7 GN63 11 P 63 30 110x110 1 0.750 GN32 2 5 5 10 15 15
GN40 2 5 5 10 20 20
GN63 5 10 71/2 15 25 25
P25 version in enclosure with Order code IEC Housing Qty Wt

padlockable rotating handle. current size per
AC1 pkg
ON/OFF switches [A] [mm] n° [kg]
ON/OFF SWITHCES.
Three-pole - scheme 10.
7 GN20 10 P25 0
1
20 90x90 1 0.313
7 GN25 10 P25 25 90x90 1 0.327
7 GN32 10 P25 32 90x90 1 0.400
7 GN20 92 P25 0
1
20 90x90 1 0.314
7 GN25 92 P25 25 90x90 1 0.339
7 GN32 92 P25 32 90x90 1 0.425

Rotary cam switches
Accessories for GN series
Accessories for Order code Description Qty Wt

GN switches per
pkg
n° [kg]
IEC IP20 finger protection shroud for supply terminals.
For 2 wafers complete with screws and bracket.
7 A0191 For GN12-GN20 1 0.017
7 A0192 For GN25 1 0.021
7 A119U For GN32 U version 1 0.033
7 A119O For GN32 O version 1 0.101
2-piece kit, snap-on fixing for 1 wafer.
7 A1691 For GN40 1 0.005
7 A019... - 7 A169...
7 A119... 7 A1692 For GN63 1 0.006
7 A1693 For GN125 1 0.020
7 A1694 For GN12 - GN20 1 0.005
7 A1695 For GN25 1 0.005
Black operating handle∂.
7 AO14∏ For 48x48mm front plate 1 0.005
n 6mm/0.24” for
GN12-GN20-GN25
7 AR114 For 65x65mm front plate 1 0.010
n 6mm/0.24” for
7 AO14 - 7 AR124 - GN12H-GN20H-GN25H
7 AR114 - 7 A124 -
7 A114 - 7 AR224 7 A114∏ For 65x65mm front plate 1 0.010
7 AR214 n 6mm/0.24” for
GN32-GN40-GN63
7 AR214∏ For 90x90mm front plate 1 0.013 10
n 7mm/0.28” for GN125 and
GN32H-GN40H-GN63H
Black operating lever∂.
7 AR214∏ For 65x65mm front plate 1 0.019
n 6mm/0.24” for
GN12H-GN20H-GN25H
7 A180 - 7 A181 7 A124 For 65x65mm front plate 1 0.020
n 7mm/0.28” for
GN32-GN40-GN63
7 AR224∏ For 90x90mm front plate 1 0.038
n 8mm/0.31” for GN125 and
GN32H-GN40H-GN63H
7 APRBP 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) base mounting piece for
U version.
7 A180 For GN12 to GN25 1 0.011
7 A181 For GN32 to GN63 1 0.018
Adjustable door-coupling extension shaft, 70mm/2.8” long
max∂.
7 APRBP For GN12 to GN63 1 0.027
Flexible rubber shroud∑.
7 A441 - 7 A442 - 7 A443
7 A441 Ø 58mm/2.3”, 70mm/2.8” 1 0.045
long for GN12 to GN25
with 2 elements
7 A442 Ø 58mm/2.3”, 92mm/3.6” 1 0.065
with 4 elements
7 A443 Ø 58mm/2.3”, 125mm/4,9” 1 0.063
with 6 elements
IP40 face plate∂.
GX M1 - GX M2 GX M1 48x48mm blank face plate 1 0.018
GX M2 65x65mm blank face plate 1 0.023
Padlockable handle∂.
GX A01 48x48mm red/yellow 0-1 1 0.026
padlockable handle for
2-position GN12-GN20-GN25
GX A01H 65x65mm red/yellow 0-1 1 0.047
padlockable handle for
2-position GN12-GN20-GN25
Front plate size:
GX A11 65x65mm red/yellow 0-1 1 0.047 48x48mm = 1.9x1.9”
GX A01 - GX A01H - GX A11 padlockable handle for 65x65mm = 2.6x2.6”
2-position GN32-GN40-GN63 90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.
∂ Suitable for GN... types with IEC IP40 (standard supply). For GN...51
types, consult Customer Service for information; see contact details
∑ Raises contact degree of protection from IEC IP00 to IP20.
∏ Also suitable for GX series.
10-17
Rotary cam switches
Special circuit scheme form.
Order code structure
X U
GG X H • •
• • • • • • •
N O
ENLARGED
TYPE RATING FRONT SCHEME VERSION OPTIONALS
PLATE
GX
IEC Protection: GX GN e.g. U = Front mount
Front = IP65 16A 16A 90 O = Rear mount
Contacts = IP20 20A 20A 91
32A 25A 10 P = In enclosure
GN
IEC Protection : 40A 32A 92
Front = IP40 40A 99
Contacts = IP00 63A 100
125A
11 Front mount, with handle operation, for Ø22mm fixing

12 Front mount, with key operation, for Ø22mm fixing
10 Insert H when an enlarged front plate is required 18 35mm DIN rail mounting (IEC/EN 60715)
GX16 - GX20
GN12 - GN20 - GN25 25 Red-yellow padlockable handle
from 48x48mm to 65x65mm
48 Modular service cover, 35mm DIN rail mounting
GX32 - GX40
GN32 - GN40 - GN63 4V Front mount, with 4-screw fixing
from 65x65mm to 90x90mm
51 IP65 front protection, for GN only
Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9in 65 Red-yellow padlockable handle
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6in
68 Door coupling (up to GN32)
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5in.
78 Door coupling (GN125 excluded)
79 Door coupling
88 Door coupling, with red-yellow padlockable handle
(up to GN32)
(GN125 excluded)
Consult technical instructions I230 on our website for additional information (contact configurations, schemes, plate indications,etc).
Custom-built schemes are available on request; fill out the form on page 10-19.
Example for ordering:

GX16 53 P = Changeover switch, 16A, 3 poles, 3 positions, 3 wafers in 90x90mm, IEC IP65 enclosure.
GN25 H 90 U 51 = On-Off switch, 25A, 1 pole, 2 positions, 1 wafer, with enlarged 65x65mm front plate and IEC IP65 protection, 2-screw fixing.
10-18
Rotary cam switches
Special circuit scheme form
12
11 1
1 4 5 8 9 12 13 16 17 20 21 24 25 28 29 32 33 36 37 40 41 44 45 48
10 2
D A
9 3
C B
8 4
7 5
6
2 3 6 7 10 11 14 15 18 19 22 23 26 27 30 31 34 35 38 39 42 43 46 47
Plate
Pos.
indication
7
C
8
10
10
D
11
12
1
A
2
4
B
5
6
Front plate 1 X X X
X
2 X X X
Overlapping Closed contact Open/ Closed Spring
contacts in 2 or more passing contact return
positions contact
BODY SHAPE: n Square - GX ∂ n Round - GN Amp rating ..........................
VERSION: n Front mount n Rear mount n Enclosed n Other ....................................
FINISH: n Standard ∑ n Red/yellow padlockable n Special ...............................
FIXING: n 2 screw n 4 screw
Q.ty:.................. Company name and contact details: ........................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................................
∂ Maximum 40A ratings for GX series.
∑ Standard suppliled finish is grey front plate while 0-12 indication and the handle are black; any other is considered special.
Also consult technical instructions I230 on the website.
10-19
Rotary cam switches
GX SERIES
MONTAGGIO
Front mountMONTAGGIO
FRONTALE
MONTAGGIO
FRONTALE
MONTAGGIO
GX...
FRONTALE
GX...
FRONTALE
GX... GX...
1...5 1...5 1...5 1...5
E E E E
A (0.2”)
(0.2”)
(0.2”)
(0.2”)
28 (1.1”) 28 (1.1”) 28 (1.1”) 28 (1.1”)
D
A
A
C
C
T T T T
Ø5
Ø5
Ø5
Ø5
I
I
L fixing
Drilling for 2-screw GL GL GL G Rear view
F F F F
Type Dimensions L [mm (in)]
A C D E F G I T 1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 5 wafers 6 wafers
GX16 U 48 39.5 45 48 26.5 23.5 6 12 42.5 51 59.5 68 76.5 85
(1.89”) 1.55”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.04”) (0.92”) (0.24”) (0.47”) (1.67”) (2.00”) (2.34”) (2.67”) (3.01”) (3.35”)
GX16 U25 48 31∂ 45 48 34 23.5 26 12 39.5 48 56.5 65 73.5 82
(1.89”) (1.22”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.33”) (0.92”) (0.24”) (0.47”) (1.55”) (1.89”) (2.22”) (2.55”) (2.89”) (3.22”)
GX20 U 48 39.5 45 48 26.5 23.5 6 12 42.5 51 59.5 68 76.5 85
(1.89”) (1.55”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.04”) (0.92”) (0.24”) (0.47”) (1.67”) (2.00”) (2.34”) (2.67”) (3.01”) (3.35”)
GX20 U25 48 31∂ 45 48 34 23.5 6 12 39.5 48 56.5 65 73.5 82
(1.89”) (1.22”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.33”) (0.92”) (0.24”) (0.47”) (1.55”) (1.89”) (2.22”) (2.55”) (2.89”) (3.22”)
GX32 U 65 53 58 66 34.5 26 7 14 47.5 59.5 71.5 83.5 95.5 107.5
(2.56”) (2.09”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (0.27”) (0.55”) (1.87”) (2.34”) (2.81”) (3.29”) (3.75”) (4.23”)
GX32 U25 65 45∂ 58 66 38 26 7 14 48 60 72 84 96 108
(2.56”) (1.77”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.50”) (1.02”) (0.27”) (0.55”) (1.89”) (2.36”) (2.83”) (3.30”) (3.77”) (4.25”)
GX40 U 65 53 58 66 34.5 26 7 14 47.5 59.5 71.5 83.5 95.5 107.5
(2.56”) (2.09”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (0.27”) (0.55”) (1.87”) (2.34”) (2.81”) (3.29”) (3.75”) (4.23”)
GX40 U25 65 45∂ 58 66 38 26 7 14 48 60 72 84 96 108
(2.56”) (1.77”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.50”) (1.02”) (0.27”) (0.55”) (1.89”) (2.36”) (2.83”) (3.30”) (3.77”) (4.25”)
∂ Padlockable handle.
DoorMONTAGGIO MONTAGGIO
BLOCCO-PORTA
coupling O version BLOCCO-PORTA
MONTAGGIO
Coupling GX...MONTAGGIO
and front MONTAGGIO
BLOCCO-PORTA
GX... BLOCCO-PORTA
plate BLOCCO-PORTA
Drilling for GX...
4-screwGX... GX...
(4V) front plate
fixing on the door fixing
E E E E E
K K S K KS
1...5 K 1...5 S S 1...5 S 1...5 1...5
(0.04...0.20”) (0.04...0.20”) (0.04...0.20”) (0.04...0.20”)(0.04...0.20”)
(0.2”)
(0.2”)
(0.2”)
(0.2”)
Ø5 P (0.2”)
M M M M M
IEC/EN 60715
IEC/EN 60715
60715
IEC/EN 60715
IEC/EN 60715
(0.2”)
(0.2”)
(0.2”)
(0.2”)
(0.2”)
10
Ø5
Ø5
Ø5
Ø5
IEC/ENØ5
DIN35
DIN35
DIN35
DIN35
DIN35
D
CD
OD
D
A
CA
PA
O
P
P
C
T TT T T T T T T T
Ø5
Ø5
Ø5
Ø5
N
G G G G G
F F Ø5.5 Ø5.5
F F F Ø5.5 Ø5.5 Ø5.5
L L L L (0.22”) L (0.22”) (0.22”) Rear(0.22”)
view (0.22”)
Type Dimensions L [mm (in)]

A C D E F G K M N O P S T 1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 5 wafers 6 wafers
GX16 O68 48 39.5 45 48 26.5 23.5 –– 28 6 52 66.5 48-58 12 40 48.5 57 65.5 74 82.5
(1.89”) (1.55”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.04”) (0.92”) (1.1”) (0.24”) (2.04”) (2.61”) (1.89”-2.28”) (0.47”) (1.57”) (1.90”) (2.24”) (2.57”) (2.91”) (3.24”)
GX16 O88 48 31∂ 45 48 34 23.5 36 –– 6 52 66.5 45-55 12 40 48.5 57 65.5 74 82.5
(1.89”) (1.22”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.33”) (0.92”) (1.42”) (0.24”) (2.04”) (2.61”) (1.77”-2.16”) (0.47”) (1.57”) (1.90”) (2.24”) (2.57”) (2.91”) (3.24”)
GX20 O68 48 39.5 45 48 26.5 23.5 –– 28 6 52 66.5 48-58 12 40 48.5 57 65.5 74 82.5
(1.89”) (1.55”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.04”) (0.92”) (1.1”) (0.24”) (2.04”) (2.61”) (1.89”-2.28”) (0.47”) (1.57”) (1.90”) (2.24”) (2.57”) (2.91”) (3.24”)
GX20 O88 48 31∂ 45 48 34 23.5 36 –– 6 52 66.5 45-55 12 40 48.5 57 65.5 74 82.5
(1.89”) (1.22”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.33”) (0.92”) (1.42”) (0.24”) (2.04”) (2.61”) (1.77”-2.16”) (0.47”) (1.57”) (1.90”) (2.24”) (2.57”) (2.91”) (3.24”)
GX32 O68 65 53 58 66 34.5 26 –– 28 7 68 78 48-58 14 48.7 60.7 72.7 84.7 96.7 108.7
(2.56”) (2.09”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (1.1”) (0.27”) (2.68”) (3.07”) (1.89”-2.28”) (0.55”) (1.91”) (2.38”) (2.86”) (3.33”) (3.80”) (4.27”)
GX32 O88 65 45∂ 58 66 38 26 48 –– 7 68 78 45-55 14 48.7 60.7 72.7 84.7 96.7 108.7
(2.56”) (1.77”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.49”) (1.02”) (1.89”) (0.27”) (2.68”) (3.07”) (1.77”-2.16”) (0.55”) (1.91”) (2.38”) (2.86”) (3.33”) (3.80”) (4.27”)
GX40 O78 65 53 58 66 34.5 26 –– 28 7 68 78 48-58 14 48.7 60.7 72.7 84.7 96.7 108.7
(2.56”) (2.09”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (1.1”) (0.27”) (2.68”) (3.07”) (1.89”-2.28”) (0.55”) (1.91”) (2.38”) (2.86”) (3.33”) (3.80”) (4.27”)
GX40 O98 65 45∂ 58 66 38 26 48 –– 7 68 78 45-55 14 48.7 60.7 72.7 84.7 96.7 108.7
(2.56”) (1.77”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.49”) (1.02”) (1.89”) (0.27”) (2.68”) (3.07”) (1.77”-2.16”) (0.55”) (1.91”) (2.38”) (2.86”) (3.33”) (3.80”) (4.27”)
∂ Padlockable handle.
Front ring mount on Ø22mm drilling, 2-screw fixing Front ring mount on Ø22mm drilling, 2-screw fixing Modular mount
MONTAGGIO FRONTALE 22mm GX... MONTAGGIO FRONTALE 22mm GX... MONTAGGIO

MONTAGGIO MODULARE
MODULARE GX...
GX...
45 (1.77”) 45 (1.77”) 1...5 54 (2.12”)
54 (2.12”)
54 (2.12”) LL L 39 (1.53”)
39 (1.53”)
39 (1.53”) 48 (1.89”)
48 (1.89”)
48 (1.89”)
1...5
(0.04...0.20”) (0.04...0.20”)
45 (1.77”)
45 (1.77”)
(1.10”)
MONTAGGIO IN CASSETTA GX...

(1.10”)
(2.62”)
(2.62”)
(2.05”)
(2.05”)
52 (1.73”)
44 (1.73”)
66.5 (2.62”)
(2.05”)
52 (2.05”)
52 (2.05”)
(1.73”)
(1.38”)
(1.38”)
52 (2.05”)
35 (1.38”)
60715
IEC/EN 60715
28
60715
28
DIN35
DIN35
DIN35
IEC/EN
IEC/EN
66.5
35
44
66.5
35
52
44
52
22.5 L 18.5 30 22.5 L 18.5 23 A C

(0.88”) (0.73”) (1.18”) (0.88”) (0.73”) (0.90”)
Type L [mm (in)] Type L [mm (in)] Type L [mm (in)]

1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 5 wafers
A1
C1
GX16 35 43.5 52 60.5 GX16 35 43.5 52 60.5 GX16 50 58.5 67

(1.37”) (1.71”) (2.04”) (2.38”) (1.37”) (1.71”) (2.04”) (2.38”) (1.37”) (2.30”) (2.64”)
MONTAGGIO
MONTAGGIO
IN
MONTAGGIO
CASSETTA
MONTAGGIO
IN CASSETTA
IN
GX...
CASSETTA
INGX...
CASSETTA
GX... GX... D
Mounting in enclosure Drilling for enclosure fixing
N
A A A AC C C L C L F L F L F L1 F L1 F L1 L1
F F F
M
R
A1
A1
A1
A1
C1
C1
C1
C1
D D D D
N N N N
Type Enclosure N° of wafers Protection Cable glands
size L L1 A A1 C C1 D F M N L L1 degree R
GX16 90x90 1-2 3-5 90 90 79 63 4.5 25∂ 19 30 71.3 98.3
IP65 4 PG 16
GX20 (3.54”x3.54”) 1-2 3-5 (3.54”) (3.54”) (3.11”) (2.48”) (0.17”) (0.98”) (0.74”) (1.18”) (2.80”) (3.87”)
M
GX32 110x110 1-2 3-4 110 110 98.4 83 4.5 32∑ 21 39.5 85.5 119.5 ∂ 28 (1.1”) for ...P25 type.
R R IP65 4 PG 21
GX40 (4.33”x4.33”) 1-2 3-4 (4.33”) (4.33”) R (3.87”) R(3.26”) (0.17”) (1.25”) (0.82”) (1.55”) (3.36”) (4.70”) ∑ 38.5 (1.52”) for ...P25 type.
10-20
Rotary cam switches
GN SERIES
MONTAGGIO
MONTAGGIO
MONTAGGIO
FRONTALE
FRONTALE
FRONTALE
GN...
GN...
GN... Type Dimensions L
Front mount A C D1 D3 E F G J M N 1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 5 wafers 6 wafers
GN12 48 39.5 12 1...5 1...5
4.3 1...5 26.5 23.5 39 36 48 6 36.1 45.8 55.5 65.2 74.9 84.6
Wafer and front plate fixing on the door (1.89”) (1.55”) (0.47”) (0.17”)
(0.04...0.20”)
(0.04...0.20”) (1.04”)
(0.04...0.20”) (0.92”) (1.53”) (1.42”) (1.89”) (0.24”) (1.42”) (1.80”) (2.18”) (2.57”) (2.95”) (3.33”)
J J J J J
GN12 J
ª 65 53 14 4.3 34.5 26 58 48 65 7 36.6 46.3 56 65.7 75.4 85.1
(2.56”) (2.09”) (0.55”) (0.17”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (2.28”) (1.89”) (2.56”) (0.27”) (1.44”) (1.82”) (2.20”) (2.59”) (2.97”) (3.35”)
Ø6 Ø6 (0.24”)
Ø6 (0.24”)(0.24”) GN20 48 39.5 12 4.3 26.5 23.5 39 36 48 6 36.1 45.8 55.5 65.2 74.9 84.6
G
A
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
M
M
(1.89”) (1.55”) (0.47”) (0.17”) (1.04”) (0.92”) (1.53”) (1.42”) (1.89”) (0.24”) (1.42”) (1.80”) (2.18”) (2.57”) (2.95”) (3.33”)
C
GN20ª 65 53 14 4.3 34.5 26 58 48 65 7 36.6 46.3 56 65.7 75.4 85.1
N
Ø5 Ø5 (0.2”)
Ø5 (0.2”) (0.2”) (2.56”) (2.09”) (0.55”) (0.17”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (2.28”) (1.89”) (2.56”) (0.27”) (1.44”) (1.82”) (2.20”) (2.59”) (2.97”) (3.35”)
2-screw drilling D3GN125
4-screw drilling for D3 D3 GN25 48 L 39.5L L12F F 4.3F 26.5 23.5 39 36 48 6 40.5 54.1 67.7 81.3 94.9 108.5
E E E
LE
NTALE
GN...GN... for types up to GN63 and “4V” suffix types only (1.89”) (1.55”) (0.47”) (0.17”) (1.04”) (0.92”) (1.53”) (1.42”) (1.89”) (0.24”) (1.59”) (2.13”) (2.66”) (3.20”) (3.74”) (4.27”)
GN25ª 65 53 14 4.3 34.5 26 58.5 48 65 7 41 54.6 68.2 81.8 95.4 109
(2.56”) (2.09”) (0.55”) (0.17”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (2.30”) (1.89”) (2.56”) (0.27”) (1.61”) (2.15”) (2.68”) (3.22”) (3.75”) (4.29”)
1...5 1...5
(0.04...0.20”)
(0.04...0.20”) GN32 65 53 14 4.3 34.5 26 58.5 48 65 7 46.5 61.6 76.7 91.8 106.9 122
J J J J (2.56”) (2.09”) (0.55”) (0.17”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (2.30”) (1.89”) (2.56”) (0.27”) (1.83”) (2,442”) (3.02”) (3.61”) (4.21”) (4.80”)
GN40 65 53 14 4.3 34.5 26 58.5 48 65 7 46.5 61.6 76.7 91.8 106.9 122
Ø6 Ø6(0.24”) (0.24”) (2.56”) (2.09”) (0.55”) (0.17”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (2.30”) (1.89”) (2.56”) (0.27”) (1.83”) (2,442”) (3.02”) (3.61”) (4.21”) (4.80”)
M
G
D1
D1
M
GN63 65 53 14 4.3 34.5 26 62 48 65 7 50.3 68.4 86.5 104.6 122.7 140.8

(2.56”) (2.09”) (0.55”) (0.17”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (2.44”) (1.89”) (2.56”) (0.27”) (1.98”) (2.69”) (3.40”) (4.12”) (4.83”) (5.54”)
N
(0.2”) GN125 90 70.5 16 5.3 41.5 28 84 68 90 9 67.3 96.4 125.5 154.6 183.7 212.8
D3 D3 L L F F (3.54”) (2.77”) (0.63”) (0.21”) (1.63”) (1.10”) (3.31”) (2.68”) (3.54”) (0.35”) (2.65”) (3.79”) (4.94”) (6.09”) (7.23”) (8.38”)
Front wafer E E
ª Dimensions for U06 and U25 versions
MONTAGGIO
MONTAGGIO
BLOCCO-PORTA
MONTAGGIO
MONTAGGIO
BLOCCO-PORTA
MONTAGGIO
BLOCCO-PORTA
GN...
BLOCCO-PORTA
GN...
BLOCCO-PORTA
GN... GN... GN...
Door coupling Drillings for wafer and handle fixing
S S 1...5 S 1...5 S 1...5 S 1...5 1...5
¤K ¤K ¤K ¤K¤K ¤K ¤K ¤K ¤K ¤K
D2 D2 D2 D2D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2
CD1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
¤A
¤A
¤A
¤A
¤A
K
C
D2 D2 D2 D2 D2
4-screw drilling for wafer 2-screw drilling for handle 4-screw drilling for GN125 E E E E E
fixing on rear plate of types up to GN63 L handleLand “4V” types L only L L
Type Dimensions L
A C D1 D2 E K S 1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers
GN12-O88 65 (2.56”) 53 (2.09”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 38.5 (1.52”)∫ 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 37.58 (1.48”) 47.1 (1.85”) 56.7 (2.23”) 66.3 (2.61”) 10
GN20-O88 65 (2.56”) 53 (2.09”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 38.5 (1.52”)∫ 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 38.1 (1.50”) 47.8 (1.88”) 57.5 (2.26”) 67.2 (2.64”)
GN25-O88 65 (2.56”) 53 (2.09”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 38.5 (1.52”)∫ 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 42.5 (1.67”) 56.1 (2.21”) 65.7 (2.59”) 83.2 (3.27”)
GN12-O68 48 (1.89”) 39.5 (1.56”) 12 (0.47”) 5 (0.20”) 26.5 (1.04”) 36 (1.42”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 37.5 (1.48”) 47.1 (1.85”) 56.7 (2.23”) 66.3 (2.61”)
GN20-O68 48 (1.89”) 39.5 (1.56”) 12 (0.47”) 5 (0.20”) 26.5 (1.04”) 36 (1.42”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 38.1 (1.50”) 47.8 (1.88”) 57.5 (2.26”) 67.2 (2.64”)
GN25-O68 48 (1.89”) 39.5 (1.56”) 12 (0.47”) 5 (0.20”) 26.5 (1.04”) 36 (1.42”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 42.5 (1.67”) 56.1 (2.21”) 65.7 (2.59”) 83.2 (3.27”)
GN32 O... 65 (2.56”) 53∂ (2.09”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 34.5 (1.36”)∏ 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 49.2 (1.94”) 62.8 (2.47”) 76.4 (3.00”) 90 (3.54”) ∂ 45 (1.77”) for O88 and O98 types ∫.
GN40 O... 65 (2.56”) 53∂ (2.09”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 34.5 (1.36”)∏ 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 45.9 (1.81”) 59.5 (2.34”) 73.1 (2.88”) 86.7 (3.41”) ∑ 65 (2.56”) for O99 types ∫.
∏ 38.5 (1.52”) for O88 and O98 types ∫.
GN63 O... 65 (2.56”) 53∂ (2.09”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 34.5 (1.36”)∏ 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 54.3 (2.14”) 72.4 (2.85”) 90.5 (3.56”) 108.6 (4.27”)
π 49 (1.93”) for O99 types ∫.
GN125 O... 90 (3.54”) 70.5∑ (2.78”) 16 (0.63”) 6 (0.24”) 41.5 (1.63”)π 68 (2.68”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 74.8 (2.94”) 103.9 (4.09”) 133 (5.23”) 162.1 (6.38”) ∫ Padlockable handle.
Front ring mount on Ø22mm drilling, 2-screw fixing Front ring mount on Ø22mm drilling, 2-screw fixing
”)
”)
(0 1.6
(0 1.6
.06
.06
R
1...5 1...5
(0.04...0.20”) (0.04...0.20”)
38 (1.50”)
38 (1.50”)
MONTAGGIO IN CASSETTA GX
28 L 30
(1.10”) 22.5 (1.18”) 28 22.5 L 23
(0.88”) (1.10”) (0.88”) (0.90”) A C
Type L [mm] Type L [mm]
1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers
GN12 41.5 (1.63”) 51.1 (2.01”) 60.7 (2.39”) 70.3 (2.77”) GN12 41.5 (1.63”) 51.1 (2.01”) 60.7 (2.39”) 70.3 (2.77”)
A1
C1
GN20 42.1 (1.66”) 51.8 (2.04”) 61.5 (2.42”) 71.2 (2.80”) GN20 42.1 (1.66”) 51.8 (2.04”) 61.5 (2.42”) 71.2 (2.80”)
GN25 46.5 (1.83”) 60.1 (2.37”) 73.7 (2.90”) 87.3 (3.44”) GN25 46.5 (1.83”) 60.1 (2.37”) 73.7 (2.90”) 87.3 (3.44”)
MONTAGGIO
MONTAGGIO
IN
MONTAGGIO
CASSETTA
MONTAGGIO
IN CASSETTA
IN
GX...
CASSETTA
INGX...
CASSETTA
GX... GX... D
Mounting in enclosure Drilling for enclosure fixing N

A A A AC C C L C L F L F L F L1 F L1 F L1 L1
F F F
M
R
A1
A1
A1
A1
C1
C1
C1
C1
D D D D
N N N N
Type Enclosure N° of wafers Protection Conduits

size L L1 A A1 C C1 D F M N L L1 degree R
M
GN12 1-2 3-4

75x75 75 75 64 50 4.5 19∂ 14 28 57.5 79.8
GN20 1-2 3-4 IP65 4 PG 13.5
(2.95x2.95”) R (2.95”)R (2.95”) R(2.51”) (1.96”)
R (0.17”) (0.74”) (0.55”) (1.10”) (2.26”) (3.14”)
GN25 1 2-3
GN20 1-3 4-6
GN25 90x90 1-2 3-4 90 90 63 79 4.5 25∂ 19 30 71.3 98.3
IP65 4 PG 16
GN32 (3.54x3.54”) 1-2 3-4 (3.54”) (3.54”) (2.48”) (3.11”) (0.17”) (0.98”) (0.74”) (1.18”) (2.80”) (3.87”)
GN40 1 2-3
GN32 1-3 4-5
GN40 110x110 1-2 3-4 110 110 98.4 83 4.5 32∑ 21 39.5 85.5 119.5
IP65 4 PG 21 ∂ 28 (1.1”) for P25 type with padlockable handle.
GN63 (4.33x4.33”) 1-2 3-4 (4.33”) (4.33”) (3.87”) (3.27”) (0.18”) (1.25”) (0.82”) (1.55”) (3.37”) (4.70”)
GN125 1 2 ∑ 38.5 (1.52”) for P25 type with padlockable handle.
10-21
Rotary cam switches
Wiring diagrams
90 - One-pole ON/OFF switch 91 - Two-pole ON/OFF switch 10 - Three-pole ON/OFF switch 92 - Four-pole ON/OFF switch
0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
Number of wafers: 1 Number of wafers: 1 Number of wafers: 2 Number of wafers: 2

Switching angle: 60° Switching angle: 60° Switching angle: 60° Switching angle: 60°
51 - 1-pole changeover / 52 - 2-pole changeover / 53 - 3-pole changeover / 75 - 4-pole changeover /

double throw switch with 0 double throw switch with 0 double throw switch with 0 double throw switch with 0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
2 2 2 2

Switching angle: 60° Switching angle: 60° Switching angle: 60° Switching angle: 60°
54 - 1-pole changeover / 55 - 2-pole changeover / 56 - 3-pole changeover / 69 - 4-pole changeover /

double throw without 0 double throw without 0 double throw without 0 double throw without 0
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1

10 Switching angle: 90° Switching angle: 90° Switching angle: 90° Switching angle: 90°
11 - 3-pole reversing switch 13 - Pole-changing switch with 0 (Dahlander)
1 0 1 0
2 2
Number of wafers: 3 Number of wafers: 4

Switching angle: 60° Switching angle: 60°
12 - Star-delta switch 26 - Reversing switch, spring return to 0
0 Y 1 0 2
D

10-22
Rotary cam switches
Wiring diagrams
20 - Pole-changing switch with reversing (Dahlander)
0
1 1
2 2
Number of wafers: 6
Switching angle: 60°
68 - Phase-neutral voltmeter switch 67 - Phase-phase voltmeter switch 66 - Phase-phase phase-neutral 60 - Changeover / double throw switch
voltmeter changeover / double throw 1 phase phase-neutral, 3 phase-phase voltages
0 0
L1N L1-L2
0 0
L2N L2-L3 L1-L2 L1-N L1N L1-L2
L3N L3-L1 L2-L3 L2-N L2-L3
L3-L1 L3-N L3-L1

Switching angle: 30° Switching angle: 30° Number of wafers: 3 Number of wafers: 3
97 - Ammeter switch direct reading or via current transformer 98 - L1-L2-L3 current changeover / double throw switch
0
0
L3 L1
L3 L1
L2
L2
Number of wafers: 5
Switching angle: 90° Number of wafers: 4 10
Switching angle: 90°
10-23
Rotary cam switches
SELECTION GUIDE UTILISATION

The choice of a rotary cam switch and the relative type are based on the functional diagram MAIN SUPPLY DISCONNECTING SWITCH WITH
and the type of application as well. EMERGENCY-STOP OPERATION:
– Red operating handle with yellow background
IEC standards provide a comprehensible and quick classification of the most frequent – Lockable in open position (OFF).
utilisation categories:
AC1: Connection and disconnection of non-inductive or slightly inductive loads EMERGENCY-STOP SWITCH
(cosϕ ≥0.95) – Red operating handle with yellow background
AC21: Resistance furnaces – Independent operation and the breaking of the load circuit of switching devices before
AC3: Starting and switching off motors during running the opening of its main contacts
AC23A: Switching of motor loads or other highly inductive loads – Rated capacity is to sufficient in order to break the sum of the rated operating currents
AC15: Control of electromagnetic loads of all the connected equipment
– Breaking capacity equal to the current of the largest motor when stalled (locked rotor)
For DC applications. the rotary cam switches are used for the switching of minor loads or together with the total of the normal running currents of the other motors or loads.
in control circuits. such as:
DC13: Control of electromagnets MAIN SUPPLY DISCONNECTING SWITCH
DC21A: Switching of resistive loads – Used to disconnect all live electrical equipment from the power supply circuit
DC23: Switching of highly inductive loads – Contact clearance distance is to comply with
IEC/EN 60947-3 standards
Other prescriptions and recommendations concerning the use of cam switches as auxiliary – Provided with a means in order to be locked in the OFF position
equipment of electrical machines are given in IEC/EN 60204-1 standards and specifically as – Selection of current breaking according to IEC AC1 and AC21 utilisation categories.
given under utilisation.
TYPE GX16 GX20 GX32 GX40 GN12 GN20 GN25 GN32 GN40 GN63 GN125
Rated insulation voltage∂
10 Ui IEC/EN V 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
UL/CSA V 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
Rated impulse withstand voltage ∂
Uimp IEC/EN 60947-3 kV 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 8
Conventional free air thermal
current Ith IEC/EN A 16 20 32 40 16 20 25 32 40 63 125
UL/CSA (general purpose use)
A 12 15 32 40 15 20 30 40 50 60 130
Rated operating
voltage (switch disconnect) ∂ V 440 440 440 440 480 480 480 480 480 480 690
Operatioanl impulse
voltage (switch disconnect) kV 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6
Maximum fuse size for 10kA A 20 20 40 40 16 20 25 32 40 63 125
short-circuit protection 25kA A 16 16 35 35 10 16 25 32 40 63 100
In (gG)
50kA A – – 32 35 – – – 32 40 63 100
63kA A – – – 35 – – – – 40 63 100
Short-time
withstand current
Icw 1sec A 250 250 800 800 200 250 400 800 1000 1600 2100
Rated operational current
Ie AC1/AC21A (IEC/EN) A 16 20 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 63 125
110V A 10 10 25 25 10 10 16 25 25 32 40
AC15 (IEC/EN) 220-230V A 8 8 20 22 8 8 12 20 22 25 28
380-400V A 4 6 10 12 4 6 8 10 12 15 15
660-690V A 3 3.7 5.5 7.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 4 5
Motor power for switches
in AC utilisation categories
AC3 (IEC/EN) 220-230V kW 3.5 3.7 7.5 7.5 2.5 3 5.5 7.5 8 11 18.5
3 phases 380-440V kW 4.5 5.5 11 15 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 37
500-690V kW 5.5 5.5 11 15 5.5 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 33
1 phase (2 poles) 110V kW 0.55 0.75 1.8 2.2 0.8 0.8 1.5 2.2 3 3.7 5
220-230V kW 1.5 1.8 3.5 4.4 1.5 2.2 3 4 6.5 6.5 11
380-440V kW 2.2 3 5.5 7 2.2 3 5.5 6.5 8 11.5 15
AC23A (IEC/EN) 220-230V kW 3.7 4 8 9 3 5 6.5 8 8 12.5 30
3 phases 380-440V kW 6.5 7.5 15 18.5 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 30 45
500-690V kW 7.5 7.5 15 15 7.5 7.5 11 18.5 22 30 37
1 phase (2 poles) 110V kW 0.75 0.75 2.2 3 0.8 0.8 1.5 2.2 3 3.7 5
220-230V kW 1.8 2.2 3.5 5.2 1.7 2.5 3.7 4 6 7.5 11
380-440V kW 3 3.5 6 7.5 3 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 12.5 15
∂ Valid for systems with earthed neutral, overvoltage category III, pollution degree 3.
10-24
Rotary cam switches
TYPE GX16 GX20 GX32 GX40 GN12 GN20 GN25 GN32 GN40 GN63 GN125
Motor power for
direct-on-line control 120V HP 1.5 1.5 3 5 1.5 1.5 3 5 5 7.5 15
(UL/CSA-DOL) 230V HP 3 3 7.5 10 3 3 5 10 10 15 25
3 phases
480V HP 5 5 15 15 – – 10 15 20 25 50
600V HP 5 5 15 15 – – 15 15 20 25 40
1 phase (2 poles) 120V HP 0.75 0.75 1.5 2 0.75 0.75 1.5 2 2 5 7.5
230V HP 1 1.5 3 5 1 2 3 5 5 10 15
Motor power for switches in DC
utilisation categories
1 contact 48V A 16 20 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 63 125
DC21A 60V A 16 20 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 50 80
Ie 110V A 4 4 5 6 4 4 4 6 6 8 10
220V A 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.9 0.9 1 1.2
440V A 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 - - - - -
DC23A 24V A 16(1) 20(1) 32(1) 40(1) 10(1) 20(1) 25(1) 32(1) 40(1) 50(1) 125(1)
48V A 16(2) 20(2) 32(2) 40(1) 10(2) 20(2) 25(2) 32(2) 40(2) 50(2) 125(2)
Ie 60V A 16(3) 20(3) 32(3) 40(3) 10(3) 20(3) 25(3) 32(3) 40(3) 50(3) 125(3)
No. of contacts connected in 110V A 10(3) 10(3) 15(3) 20(3) 5(3) 10(3) 12(3) 15(3) 20(3) 25(3) 50(3)
series are indicated in brackets 220V A 7(4) 8(4) 12(4) 12(4) 5(4) 8(4) 10(4) 12(4) 12(4) 15(4) 20(4)
24V A 16 20 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 63 125
DC13 48V A 14 16 25 32 10 16 20 25 32 40 100
60V A 12 12 16 16 8 12 16 16 16 28 50
Ie 110V A 0.8 1 3 3 1 1 1.5 3 3 3.3 4
220V A 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 - - - 10
440V A 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 - - - - -
Mechanical life cycles 5x106 5x106 5x106 5x106 3x106 5x106 5x106 5x106 5x106 5x106 1x106
Terminal screw M 3 3 4 4 3 3 3.5 4 4 5 2x5
Tightening torque max Nm 0.5 0.8 1.2 1.2 0.5 0.5 0.8 1.2 1.2 2 2
Conductor cross section max. r/f 2 mm2 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 10/6 10/6 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 4/4 6/4 10/6 16/10 50/50
2 AWG 14/14 14/14 8/10 8/10 14/16 12/14 10/12 8/10 8/10 6/8 1/0 / 1/0
r: rigid/solid min. r/f 2 mm2 0.5/0.5 0.5/0.5 1.5/1.5 1.5/1.5 0.5/0.5 0.5/0.5 0.5/0.5 1.5/1.5 1.5/1.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5
f: flexible/stranded
2 AWG 20/20 20/20 16/16 16/16 20/20 20/20 20/20 16/16 16/16 14/14 14/14
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
10-25
Page 11-4 Page 11-16 Page 11-24
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS 16A TO 125A SWITCH DISCONNECTORS 50A TO 1600A FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS
(AC21A) (AC21A) UP TO 850A 1000VDC (DC21B)
• Switch disconnectors with direct operating • Three and four-pole switch disconnectors • Three and four-pole switch disconnectors
handle and door coupling version • Three and four-pole switch disconnectors • Direct operating and door coupling
• Switch disconnectors with front door mount with NFC, NH and BS type fuse holders versions
• Switch disconnectors in non-metallic • Three and four-pole changeover switches; • Serial connection of 2, 3, 4, 6 and 8 poles.
enclosure add-on motorised control unit available.
• Changeover switches in non-metallic
enclosure.
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS 11
16A to 1600A ratings

Versions: direct operating handle,
door coupling and in housing
Wide range of accessories
Types for photovoltaic applications
up to 850A 1000VDC in DC21B
duty
Changeover switches in
polycarbonate enclosure.
SEC. - PAGE
GA series 16A to 125A
Three-pole switch disconnectors ............................................................................................................................................ 11 - 4
Fourth pole add on..................................................................................................................................................................... 11 - 5
Add-on blocks and accessories ............................................................................................................................................... 11 - 7
Empty non-metallic enclosures .............................................................................................................................................. 11 - 11
Enclosed switch disconnectors .............................................................................................................................................. 11 - 12
Enclosed changeover switches ............................................................................................................................................... 11 - 14
GE series 50A to 1600A

Three-pole switch disconnectors ............................................................................................................................................ 11 - 16
Three-pole switch disconnectors with fuse holder ................................................................................................................ 11 - 16
Four-pole switch disconnectors ............................................................................................................................................. 11 - 17
Four-pole switch disconnectors with fuse holder .................................................................................................................. 11 - 17
Three-pole changeover switches ............................................................................................................................................ 11 - 18
Four-pole changeover switches ............................................................................................................................................... 11 - 18
Add-on blocks and accessories .............................................................................................................................................. 11 - 19
Combinations ........................................................................................................................................................................... 11 - 21
For photovoltaic applications ....................................................................................................................................... 11 - 24
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 11 - 26 I SOLATION

Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 11 - 50
AND
C IRCUIT P ROTECTION
Switch disconnectors
Overview
GA series
16A to 125A
DIRECT OPERATING HANDLE AND DOOR MOUNT VERSION

DOOR COUPLING VERSION
36mm / 1.42” width 70mm / 2.75” width 36mm / 1.42” width 70mm / 2.75” width
IEC AC21A 16A 25A 32A 40A 63A 63A 80A 100A 125A 16A 25A 32A 40A 63A 80A 100A 125A
Three pole
4th pole - simultaneous closing
4th pole - early-make closing
Three-pole for photovoltaic

applications
Fuse holder
Mechanical 6-8 pole coupling system
Mechanical interlock for line

switching
11
ENCLOSED VERSION - IEC/EN TYPE IP65 ENCLOSED VERSION - UL/CSA TYPE 4/4X
WITH RED/ YELLOW OR BLACK HANDLE WITH RED/ YELLOW OR BLACK HANDLE
IEC AC21A 16A 25A 32A 40A 63A 63A 80A 100A 125A 16A 25A 32A 40A 63A 63A 80A 100A 125A
UL/CSA general use 600VAC 16A 25A 32A 40A 60A 60A 100A 100A 100A
Enclosure width Enclosure width
100mm / 3.94” 175mm / 6.89” 220mm 100mm / 3.94” 175mm / 220mm / 8.66”
8.66” 6.89”
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS
Three pole
Four pole
Enclosure width
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES 175mm / 6.89” 220mm / 8.66”
Three pole
Four pole
GE series Switch disconnectors Changeover switches

50A to 1600A
DIRECT OPERATING AND DOOR COUPLING VERSION

IEC AC21A 50A 125A 160A 200A 250A 315A 400A 500A 630A 800A 1000A 1250A 1600A
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS 50A TO 1600A
Three and four pole
Three and four pole with NFC

fuse holder
Three and four pole with NH

fuse holder
Three and four pole with BS

fuse holder
Four-pole for photovoltaic

applications
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES 160A TO 1600A
Three and four pole
Motorised control unit
11-2
Overview
VERSATILITY!
VERSION FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC
APPLICATIONS
The GA...D type switch disconnectors are
COMPACT SIZE suitable for both small domestic installations
The three-pole 16A to 63A switch as well as those with a large number of solar
disconnectors, are made up of a single cells. Use up to 1000V in DC21B category.
unit body, merely 36mm/1.4” wide, while
the 63A to 125A ratings, of another body
size of only 70mm/2.8” wide.
CERTIFICATIONS
ACCESSORY FLEXIBILITY All GA series switch disconnectors are
Mounting and removal of the fourth pole certified by EAC, cCSAus and UL Listed
and add-on blocks are simple and quick for Canada and USA. The 16A to 63A
operations with no need of tools. types are certified according to
UL508/CSA 22.2 n° 14 while the 63A to
125A types to UL98/CSA 22.2 n° 4
standards.
11
SIDE MOUNT ADD-ON 6 AND 8 POLE VERSION IP65 PADLOCKABLE HANDLES SWITCH STATUS INDICATION
FOURTH POLE A mechanical coupling system is Wide range of selector or pistol grip The switch open or closed state is
Simultaneous or early-make contact available for the 16A to 125A switch handles, with screw or ring fixing. clearly and unequivocally seen at a
operation of the fourth pole with disconnectors with direct operating All handles are equipped with built- distance thanks to the simple and
respect to the switch disconnector handle to provide 6/8 pole in padlockable mechanism. modern design of the handle.
poles. disconnectors along with a The selector handle GAX63... snaps
mechanical interlock mechanism for onto the door-mount switch
the line changeover function disconnectors in16A to 40A ratings, DIN RAIL FIXING
(I - 0 - II). with no need of tools. Switch disconnector mounting on
Enclosed changeover switches are and removal from the 35mm
available in a variety of ratings and (IEC/EN 60715) DIN rail are done by
cCSAus certified. simply pressing it downwards with
no need of tools.
PAD INSERT FOR NO SLIDING
ADD-ON AUXILIARY CONTACTS

One only add-on block suitable for
all the 8 ratings of switch
disconnectors, having HANDLE ADAPABILITY
simultaneuous operation with the The extensive number of fixing
switch poles. There are versions holes in the front handle plate can
with an early-break NO contact. FUSE HOLDERS replace switch disconnectors,
normally found out in the field,
MAXIMUM COMBINATIONS without having to drill others. A rubber pad insert prevents the
Mounting up to 4 auxiliary contacts sliding of switch disconnectors
or 1 fourth pole and 3 auxiliary on the DIN rail even when out of
contacts (2 blocks always on the tolerance or mounted vertically.
right and 2 on the left side) of each
switch disconnector. The earth and
neutral terminals and fuse holder TERMINAL ADAPTABILITY
also can be added. A three-pole fuse holder can be Terminals are suitable to accept any
added to 16A to 32A switch type of cable: flexible, rigid, AWG
disconnectors, with direct operating wire.
handle, to provide a single compact DEFEATABLE UL508A HANDLE The terminals can withstand high
unit. Access to the fuse can be VERSION tightening torques.
made only when the disconnector is In compliance with UL508A
in OFF position. UL Listed type up standards, which require internal
to 25A class CC fuses. panel inspection by authorised HIGH IEC CAPABILITY IN AC23
personnel with power applied, The rated currents Ie in AC23 at
REDUCED HANDLE THICKNESS selector and lever handles are 690VAC are the highest of the
GAX61 and GAX 61 B handles are available with defeatable feature of category.
9mm/0.35” only 23mm/0.9” thick. the door coupling when the switch
disconnector is closed, i.e. in ON
position.
MODULARITY
The switch disconnectors can be
mounted in modular panels.
23mm/0.9”
11-3
Three-pole switch Order code IEC conven- IEC rated Qty Wt General characteristics
disconnectors tional free air operational per – IEC 16A to 125A ratings
thermal current Ie pkg – Available versions:
current Ith • Direct operating
AC21A AC22A (690V) • Door mount
(690V) AC23A (415V) • Door coupling version. Use switch disconnector
[A] [A] n° [kg] with direct operating handle and separately purchase
the handle and shaft extension for this version.
Direct operating version, complete with black handle. See pages 11-9 and 11-10
For door-coupling version, separately purchase the handle – Compact and modular size
and shaft extension; refer to pages 11-9 and 11-10. – Screw or 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail fixing
GA016 A 16 16 1 0.146 – Padlockable in 0 position with no extra accessory.
GA025 A 25 25 1 0.146
GA032 A 32 32 1 0.146 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 1000V
GA016 A... GA063 A... GA040 A 40 40 1 0.146 – IEC rated impulse withstand Uimp: 8kV
GA040 A GA125 A GA063 SA 63 45 1 0.148 – Electrical life in IEC AC21A:
GA063 SA • 100,000 cycles for GA016-GA040
GA063 A 63 63 1 0.388 • 15,000 cycles for GA063 SA
GA080 A 80 80 1 0.388 • 30,000 cycles for GA063-GA125
GA100 A 100 100 1 0.388 – Mechanical life:
• 100,000 cycles for GA016-GA040-GA063 SA
GA125 A 125 125 1 0.388 • 30,000 cycles for GA063-GA125.
Door-mount version, complete with shaft;
separately purchase the handle, refer to pages 11-9. Certifications and compliance
GA016 C 16 16 1 0.170 Certifications obtained:
GA025 C 25 25 1 0.170
UL Listed (File E328470)

cULus per UL508 /
cULus per UL98 /

GA032 C 32 32 1 0.170
CSA C22.2 n°14
CSA C22.2 n°4

GA040 C 40 40 1 0.170
KEMA
EAC
GA016 C... GA063 C... GA063 C 63 63 1 0.404
11 GA040 C GA125 C GA080 C 80 80 1 0.404
GA100 C 100 100 1 0.404
GA125 C 125 125 1 0.404 Type
GA016 A...GA040 A ––
Strokes of GA switch poles GA063 SA –– ––
Travel 0→1 0° 30° 60° 90° GA016 C...GA040 C ––
60°
GA016 A...GA040 A - GA063SA GA063 A...GA125 A –– ––
60° GA063 C...GA125 C –– ––
GA016 C...GA040 C
GA063 A...GA125 A
55° Certification obtained.
55° Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3,
GA063 C...GA125 C
OFF ON UL508, UL98, CSA C22.2.
UL/CSA ratings
Type 1 phase 3 phase General Short- Fuse class -

[HP] [HP] use at circuit max rating
600VAC rating at at 600V
600VAC
120V 240V 200- 240V 480V 600V [A] [kA] Type - [A]
208V
GA016... 1 2 5 5 10 10 16 5 RK5 - 20A
GA025... 11/2 3 71/2 71/2 15 20 25 5 RK5 - 30A
GA032... 2 5 10 10 20 20 32 5 RK5 - 35A
GA040... 2 5 10 15 20 25 40 5 RK5 - 45A
GA063 SA 2 71/2 10 15 30 30 60 5 RK5 - 45A
NOTE: Above ratings are valid for GA…A, GA…C and GA…D (on page 11-24) types, according to UL508 and CSA 22.2 n°14.
UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93602), as Manual Motor Controllers while UL designation is “GENERAL PURPOSE
SWITCH. INTERRUPTEUR USAGE GENERAL” and “SUITABLE AS MOTOR DISCONNECT”.
Type 1 phase 3 phase General Short- Max fuse

[HP] [HP] use at circuit rating
600VAC
120V 240V 200- 240V 480V 600V [A] [kA] [A]
208V
GA063... 3 71/2 20 20 40 40 60 10 100
GA080... 3 10 25 25 40 40 100 10 100
GA100... 5 10 30 30 50 50 100 10 100
GA125... 71/2 10 30 30 60 60 100 10 100
NOTE: Above ratings are valid for GA…A, GA…C and GA…D (on page 11-24) types, according to UL98 and CSA C22.2 N°4.
UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E328470), as Open Type Switches – Open type unfused switch while UL designation is
“GENERAL PURPOSE SWITCH. INTERRUPTEUR USAGE GENERAL”.
Lower ratings in this same UL/CSA category are available on specific request for volume orders.
For information, consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
Voltage value not considered in UL98 / CSA 22.2 n°4 standards so not indicated in UL product marking.

11-4 pages 11-6 to 10 pages 11-26 to 28 page 11-50 page 11-53
Fourth pole Order code IEC conven- IEC rated Qty Wt General characteristics
add on tional free air operational per – IEC 16A to 125A ratings
thermal current Ie pkg – Available version for:
current Ith • Direct operating
AC21A AC22A (690V) • Door mount
(690V) AC23A (415V) • Simultaneous closing with switch poles
[A] [A] n° [kg] • Early-make closing respect with switch poles
– Compact and modular size.
Simultaneous closing operation as switch poles.
For GA...A version. Operational characteristics
GAX42 040A 40 40 1 0.045 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 1000V
GAX42 063SA 63 45 1 0.045 – IEC rated impulse withstand Uimp: 8kV
– Electrical life in IEC AC21A:
GAX42 063A 63 63 1 0.126 • 100,000 cycles for GAX42 040A/C and
GAX42...A
GAX41...A GAX42 080A 80 80 1 0.126 GAX41 040A/C
GAX42 063SA GAX42 100A 100 100 1 0.126 • 15,000 cycles for GAX42 063SA and GAX41 063SA
GAX41 063SA • 30,000 cycles for GAX42 063A/C and GAX41 125A/C
GAX42 125A 125 125 1 0.126 – Mechanical life:
For GA...C version. • 100,000 cycles for GAX42 040A/C and
GAX42 040C 40 40 1 0.045 GAX41 040A/C, GAX42 063SA and GAX41 063SA
• 30,000 cycles for GAX42 063A/C - GAX42 125A/C
GAX42 063C 63 63 1 0.128 and GAX41 125A/C.
GAX42 080C 80 80 1 0.128
GAX42 100C 100 100 1 0.128 Certifications and compliance
GAX42 125C 125 125 1 0.128
Early-make closing operation with respect to switch poles.

For GA...A version.
cULus per UL508 /
cULus per UL98 /

CSA C22.2 n°14
CSA C22.2 n°4

GAX41 040A 40 40 1 0.046
EAC
GAX42 040C GAX41 063SA 63 45 1 0.046
GAX41 040C GAX41 125A 125 125 1 0.116
For GA...C version. 11
GAX41 040C 40 40 1 0.046 Type
GAX41 125C 125 125 1 0.128 GAX41 040A-GAX42 040A ––
For GA016 A-GA040 A only. GAX41 063SA-GAX42 063SA ––
For GA063 SA only.
For GA016 C-GA040 C only. GAX41 040C-GAX42 040C ––
For GA063 A-GA125 A only.
For GA063 C-GA125 C only. GAX41 125A-GAX42 125C ––
See page 11-4 for UL/CSA ratings which are the same as the GAX42 063A...GAX42 125A ––
corresponding switch types.
GAX42 063C...GAX42 125C ––
Strokes of GA poles (switch and add-on pole) Certification obtained.
Travel 0→1 0° 30° 60° 90°
GA016A/C…GA040A/C - GA063SA 60° Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3,
Main poles UL508, UL98, CSA C22.2.
GAX42040A/C - GAX42063SA 60°
Simultaneous fourth-pole add on
GAX41040A/C-GAX41063SA 55°
Early-make fourth-pole add on
GA063A/C…GA125A/C 55°
Main poles
GAX42063A/C…GAX42125A/C 55°
GAX41125A/C 48°
Early-make fourth-pole add on
OFF ON

pages 11-6 to 10 pages 11-26 to 28 page 11-50 page 11-53 11-5
Maximum combination GA016 A...GA040 A Sequence and maximum combination of add-on blocks on direct operating switch disconnectors
GA040 D
GAX31 A GAX33 A GAX10 11A GAX11 10EA GAX41 040A GAX41 040A GAX11 10EA GAX10 11A GAX33 A GAX31 A
GAX42 040A GAX42 040A
GAX42 040D GAX42 040D
1 1 1 –– 1 –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 –– 1 GA016 A –– 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– GA025 A 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– GA032 A –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– GA040 A –– 1 1 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– GA040 D 1 –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– 1 –– –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– –– –– –– 1 1
GAX42 040D can be used with GA040 D switch only.
GA063 SA
GAX31 A GAX33 A GAX10 11A GAX11 10EA GAX41 063SA GAX41 063SA GAX11 10EA GAX10 11A GAX33 A GAX31 A
GAX42 063SA GAX42 063SA
1 1 1 –– 1 –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 –– 1 –– 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– GA063 SA –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– –– 1 1 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– –– –– 2 1 1
11 1 1 –– –– –– 1 –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– 1 –– –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– –– –– –– 1 1
GA063 A...GA125 A
GA080 D, GA125 D
GAX42...A GAX42...A
GA042 080D GA042 080D
GA042 125D GA042 125D
–– –– 1 –– 1 –– –– 2 –– ––
–– –– 2 –– –– GA063 A 1 –– 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 –– 1 GA080 A –– 1 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 1 –– GA100 A 1 –– 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 1 –– GA125 A –– –– 2 –– ––
–– –– 2 –– –– –– 1 1 –– ––
–– –– 2 –– –– GA080 D –– –– 2 –– ––
1 1 –– –– –– GA125 D 1 –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– 1 –– –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– –– –– –– 1 1
GA016 C...GA040 C Sequence and maximum combination of add-on blocks on door mount switch disconnectors
GAX31 C GAX33 C GAX10 11C GAX41 040C GAX41 040C GAX10 11C GAX33 C GAX31 C
GAX42 040C GAX42 040C
1 1 1 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 –– GA016 C 1 1 1 1
1 1 –– 1 GA025 C –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 –– GA032 C 1 –– 1 1
1 1 1 –– GA040 C –– 1 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– –– 1 1
GA063 C...GA125 C
GAX32 C GAX34 C GAX10 11C GAX41 125C GAX41 125C GAX10 11C GAX34 C GAX32 C
GAX42 125C GAX42 125C
–– –– 1 1 –– 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 –– GA063 C 1 1 –– ––
1 1 –– 1 GA080 C –– 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 –– GA100 C 1 –– 1 1
–– –– 1 –– GA125 C –– 1 –– ––
1 1 –– –– –– –– 1 1

11-6 pages 11-6 to 10 pages 11-26 to 28 page 11-50 pages 11-53
GA016 A...GA040 A Sequence and maximum combination for mechanical coupling and mechanical interlock for line changeover
GA040 D
+ GAX50 00 -
GAX60 00
GAX42 040A GAX42 040A
GAX42 040D GAX42 040D
GAX50 00 - GAX60 00
1 1 1 –– 1 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 –– 1 GA016 A + –– –– 2 1 1
GA016 A +
1 1 2 –– –– 1 –– 1 1 1
GA025 A +
1 1 1 –– 1 GA025 A + –– 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– GA032 A + 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– GA032 A + –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– GA040 A + –– 1 1 1 1
GA040 A +
1 1 2 –– –– GA040 D + –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 –– –– 1 GA040 D 1 –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– –– –– –– 1 1
GA063 SA
+ GAX50 00 -
GAX60 00
GAX31 A GAX33 A GAX10 11A GAX11 10EA GAX41 063SA GAX41 063SA GAX11 10EA GAX10 11A GAX33 A GAX31 A
GAX42 063SA GAX42 063SA
GAX50 00 - GAX60 00
1 1 1 –– 1 1 –– 1 1 1 11
1 1 1 –– 1 –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 –– 1 –– 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– GA063SA + 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– GA063SA –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– –– 1 1 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 –– –– 1 1 –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– –– –– –– 1 1
GA063 A...GA125 A
GA080 D, GA125 D
+ GAX50 01 -
GAX60 01
GAX42...A GAX42...A
GA042 080D GA042 080D
GA042 125D GA042 125D
GAX50 01 - GAX60 01
–– –– 1 –– 1 GA063 A + 1 –– 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 –– 1 GA063 A + –– –– 2 –– ––
GA080 A +
–– –– 2 –– –– 1 –– 1 –– ––
GA080 A +
–– –– 1 –– 1 GA100 A + –– 1 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 1 –– GA100 A + 1 –– 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 1 –– GA125 A + –– –– 2 –– ––
GA125 A +
–– –– 2 –– –– –– 1 1 –– ––
GA080 D +
–– –– 2 –– –– GA080 D –– –– 2 –– ––
1 1 –– –– 1 GA125 D + 1 –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– GA125 D –– –– –– 1 1

pages 11-6 to 10 pages 11-26 to 28 page 11-50 pages 11-53 11-7
Accessories
Add-on blocks Order code Characteristics Qty Wt Operational characteristics of auxiliary contacts
per – IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith: 10A
pkg – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
n° [kg] A600-Q600
– Tightening torque: 0.8Nm/7.1lbin.
Auxiliary contacts, simultaneous operation as switch poles.
GAX10 11A 1NO+1NC for GA...A, 1 0.030 Operational characteristics for other devices
GA063 SA and GA...D – Tightening torque:
GAX10 11C 1NO+1NC for GA...C 1 0.030 • GAX31A/C-GAX33A/C terminals: 1.8-2Nm/16-18lbin
• GAX32A/C-GAX34A/C terminals: 5-6Nm/45-54lbin
Auxiliary contacts, early-break operation with respect to • GAX5000/5001-GAX6000/6001 fixing:
switch poles. 0.5Nm/4.4lbin; extension with handle:
GAX10 11A GAX10 11C GAX11 10EA 1EB (NO) for GA016 A-GA040 A, 1 0.035 0.8Nm/7.1lbin.
GA063 SA and GA040 D
GAX12 10EA 1EB (NO) for GA063 A-GA125 A, 1 0.035 Transformation of direct operating version into door
GA080 D and GA125 D coupling type
GA063 A-GA125 A + GA016 A-GA040 A +
Neutral terminal. GA063 A-GA124 A / GA016 A-GA040A /
GA080 D + GA080 D / GA063 SA + GA063 SA /
GA125 D + GA125 D GA040 D + GA040 D
GAX31 A For GA016 A-GA040 A, 1 0.040 with GAX50 01 with GAX50 00
0
GA063 SA and GA040D for line changeover for line changeover
GAX32 A For GA063 A-GA125 A and 1 0.110

GA080 D - GA125 D
GAX11 10EA GAX31 C For GA016 C-GA040 C 1 0.040
GAX12 10EA GAX32 C For GA063 C-GA125 C 1 0.110
GAX7... ( 5mm/02in)
Earth/Ground terminal.
GAX67 B
GAX33 A For GA016 A-GA040 A, 1 0.040
GA063 SA and GA...D 0
II
GAX34 A For GA063 A-GA125 A and 1 0.110 I
GA080 D - GA125 D
GAX33 C For GA016 C-GA040 C 1 0.040
11 GAX34 C For GA063 C-GA125 C 1 0.110
Mechanical interlock for line changeover (I-0-II).

GAX3...A GAX3...C

cULus per UL508 /
GAX50 00 For GA016 A-GA040 A, 1 0.050
cULus per UL98 /

CSA C22.2 n°14
CSA C22.2 n°4

GA063 SA, GA...D and GAX67 B;
5mm/0.2”
EAC
GAX50 01 For GA063 A-GA125 A, GA080 D 1 0.075
GA125 D and GAX67 B;
5mm/0.2”
Mechanical coupling system for 6-8 pole switch disconnectors. Type
GAX50... GAX60 00 For GA016 A-GA040 A, 1 0.050 GAX10 11A - GAX10 11C ––
GAX60... GA063 SA and GA...D;
GAX11 10EA ––
5mm/0.2”
GAX12 10EA ––
GAX60 01 For GA063 A-GA125 A, GA080 D, 1 0.075
GA125 D; 7mm/0.3” GAX31 A – GAX31 C ––
Use GAX7… shaft extensions. GAX32 A – GAX32 C ––
Use GAX66.. handles and GAX7…A extensions for a door-coupling
GAX33 A – GAX33 C ––
version.
GAX34 A – GAX34 C ––
GAX50 00 – GAX60 00 ––
GAX50 01 – GAX60 01 ––
GAX61-GAX61 B
GAX62-GAX62 B
GAX63-GAX63 B
GAX63 1B –– ––
GAX63 2-GAX63 2B
GAX64-GAX64 B
Strokes of GA poles (switch with auxiliary contact blocks) Strokes of GA…D types (switch and add-on blocks)
GAX66-GAX66 B ––
Travel 0→1 0° 30° 60° 90° Travel 0→1 0° 30° 60° 90°
GA016A/C…GA040A/C - GA063SA 60° GA040 D 60° GAX67 B
Main poles Main poles
GAX60 B ––
GAX10 11A – GAX10 11C 60° GA042 040D 60°
Auxiliary contacts (1NO+1NC) NO Simultaneous fourth-pole add on Certification obtained.
NC GAX10 11A 60° UL Listed - cULus File E93601.
40° Auxiliary contacts (1NO+1NC) NO
GAX11 10EA Travel 0→1 60° NC
Auxiliary contact 40° NOTE: GAX61/61B and GAX66/66B are UL/CSA Type 1, 4, 4X
(1EB – NO early break) Travel 1→0 70° GAX11 10EA Travel 0→1 60° outdoor use with all GA switch types.
Auxiliary contact GAX62/62B, GAX63/63B, GAX632/2B, GAX64/64B and
(1EB – NO early break) Travel 1→0 70°
GA063A/C…GA125A/C 55° GAX67B are UL/CSA Type 1, 4, 4X outdoor use with
Main poles GA016A/C-GA040A/C and GA063SA types, otherwise Type 1
GAX10 11A – GAX10 11C 45° GA080 D - GA125 D 55° only.
Auxiliary contacts (1NO+1NC) NO Main poles
NC GAX42 080D - GAX42 125D 55°
25° Simultaneous fourth-pole add on Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3,
GAX12 10EA Travel 0→1 55° GAX10 11A – GAX10 11C 45° IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, UL98, CSA C22.2.
Auxiliary contact Auxiliary contacts (1NO+1NC) NO
(1EB – NO early break) Travel 1→0 65° NC
25°
OFF ON GAX12 10EA Travel 0→1 55°
Auxiliary contact
(1EB – NO early break) Travel 1→0 65°
OFF ON
Add-on blocks/Accessories Dimensions Wiring diagrams

Accessories
Rotary handles Order code Characteristics Qty Wt Operational characteristics

per – Choice of handle fixing: ring or screw
pkg – Fixing handle interaxis: 36x36mm/1.4x1.4” or
n° [kg] 48x48mm/1.9x1.9” for GAX61/61B-GAX62/62B-
GAX67B; 36x36mm/1.4x1.4” for GAX66/66B
DOOR COUPLING HANDLES, PADLOCKABLE. Compatible with pre-existing drillings of most
Red/yellow, rotating. common types on marketplace
GAX61 For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA...C and 1 0.073 – 1 to 3 padlocks (Ø4-8mm/Ø0.2-0.3”) for all handles
GA...D. Screw fixing. Recessed – Tightening torque:
selector. 5mm/0.2” . • Fixing ring types: 2.3Nm/20.4lbin
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X • GAX60B: 0.8Nm/7lbin
GAX61 • GAX66/66B: 1.5Nm/13.3lbin
GAX62 For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA...C and 1 0.072
GA...D. Screw fixing. Protruding • All others: 1Nm/9lbin
selector. 5mm/0.2” . – Degree of protection: IEC/EN IP65 for all except
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X GAX66/66B with IP66; for UL/CSA ratings, see note
details on page 11-8.
GAX63 For GA...A, GA063 SA, 1 0.068
GA016 C - GA040 C and GA...D. Transformation of direct operating version into door
Ring fixing. Protruding selector. coupling type
5mm/0.2” .
GA...A - GA063 SA
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X GA...D
GAX63 2 For GA...A, GA063 SA, 1 0.057

GAX62 and GA...D. Low-profile ring
GAX7... ( 5mm/0.2in)
fixing. Protruding selector.
5mm/0.2” . (GAX64/64B)
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X GAX63/63B
GAX63 1B
GAX64 For GA...A, GA063 SA, and 1 0.064 GAX63 2/2B
(GAX63/63B)
GA...D. Ring fixing. Protruding (GAX63 1B)
GAX64/64B
selector with release, defeatable
per UL508A; 5mm/0.2” .
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X
GAX66 For GA063 A-GA125 A,
GA080 D, GA125 D and
1 0.140
GAX62/62B
11
GAX66 GAX60 01. Screw fixing. Pistol
grip with release, defeatable
per UL508A; 7mm/0.3” .
IEC IP66/UL Type 4X
Black, rotating.
GAX61 B For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA...C and 1 0.073 GAX61/61B
GA...D. Screw fixing. Recessed
selector. 5mm/0.2” .
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X
GAX62 B For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA...C and 1 0.072
GA...D, Screw fixing. Protruding
GA080 D + GA080 D /
selector. 5mm/0.2” . GA125 D + GA125 D
with GAX60 01
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X for 6 and 8 poles
GAX63 B For GA...A, GA063 SA, 1 0.068
GAX63 B GA016 C - GA040 C and GA...D.
Ring fixing. Protruding selector.
5mm/0.2” .
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X GA080 D GAX7150A
GAX60 B
GA125 D GAX7200A GAX66
GAX63 1B For GA…A, GA063 SA, 1 0.074 GAX7300A GAX66 B
GA016 C-GA040 C and GA…D. ( 7mm/0.3”)
Ring fixing. Protruding selector,

padlockable at ON (per UNI 9490
and UNI EN 12845 - firefighting Door-mount version
systems); 5mm/0.2” .
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X GA016 C - GA040 C
GAX63 2B
Low profile GAX63 2B For GA...A, GA063 SA and GA...D. 1 0.057
Low-profile ring fixing. Protruding
selector. 5mm/0.2” . GAX63/63B
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X GA016 C - GA040 C GAX63 1B
GAX64 B For GA...A, GA063 SA and GA...D 1 0.064

Ring fixing. Protruding selector
with release, defeatable per
UL508A. 5mm/0.2” . GA063 C - GA125 C
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X
GAX66 B For GA063 A-GA125 A and 1 0.140
GA080 D-GA125 D and
GAX67 B GAX60 01. Screw fixing. Pistol
grip with release, defeatable per GAX61/61B
UL508A; 7mm/0.3” .
IEC IP66/UL Type 4X
GAX67 B For GAX50... mechanical 1 0.078
interlock mechanism (I-O-II).
5mm/0.2” .
GAX62/62B
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X
For GA...A and GA...D switch disconnectors,
separately purchase GAX7... shaft extensions. ACCESSORIES FOR DOOR COUPLING CONTROL.
Snap-on fixing of GA016-GA040C switch For GAX66 and GAX66 B handles.
disconnectors with the handle.
Separately purchase GAX7…A shaft extension GAX60 B Adapter 7mm/0.3” for 1 0.010
and GAX60 B handle having a 7mm/0.3” GA063 A-GA125 A, Certifications and compliance
square section, nor required for GAX60 01. GA080 D and GA125 D See the table on page 11-8 for details.
Dimensions
pages 11-26 to 28 11-9
Accessories
Shaft extensions Order code Characteristics Qty Wt Operational characteristics of fuse holder
Terminal covers per – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 1000V
pkg – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp: 8kV
Fuse holders/blocks n° [kg] – The fuse holder/block connects directly to the switch
disconnectors.
Shaft extension for door-coupling handles GAX61-GAX64, – Access to fuses only when the switch disconnectors
GAX61 B-GAX64 B, GAX67 B and mechanical interlock type are in OFF position.
GAX50 00, GAX50 01 and coupling system GAX60 00.
GAX7 055 55mm long; 5mm/0.2” 1 0,012 Terminal covers
GAX7 070 70mm long; 5mm/0.2” 1 0.014 For switch disconnectors
GAX7 090 90mm long; 5mm/0.2” 1 0.018
GAX7 150 150mm long; 5mm/0.2” 1 0.032
GA...A
GAX7 200 200mm long; 5mm/0.2” 1 0.040 GA063 SA
GAX7...
GAX7 300 300mm long; 5mm/0.2” 1 0.068 GA...D
GAX83
GAX7 400 400mm long; 5mm/0.2” 1 0.072 GAX84
GAX7 500 500mm long; 5mm/0.2” 1 0.090 GAX83
Shaft extension for door-coupling handles GAX66, GAX66 B GAX84
and mechanical coupling system GAX60 01.
GAX7 150A 150mm long; 7mm/0.3” 1 0.090 GA...C
GAX7 200A 200mm long; 7mm/0.3” 1 0.112

GAX7... A GAX7 300A 300mm long; 7mm/0.3” 1 0.160
For fourth pole
Set of 2 one-pole terminal covers for fourth pole.
GAX81 For GAX42 040A, GAX42 040C 1 0.009 GAX41...A
GAX42 040D, GAX41 040A, GAX41 063SA
GAX42...A
GAX41 040C, GAX41 063SA, GAX42 063SA
GAX42 063SA GAX42...D GAX81
GAX82 For GAX42 063A-GAX42 125A, 1 0.012 GAX82
11 GAX42 063C-GAX42 125C,

GAX42 080D, GAX42 125D,
GAX81
GAX82
GAX41 125A, GAX41 125C
GAX41...C
GAX8... Set of 2 three-pole terminal covers. GAX42...C
GAX83 For GA016 A-GA040 A, 1 0.018
GA063 SA, GA016 C-GA040 C,
GA040 D Certifications and compliance
GAX84 For GA063 A-GA125 A, 1 0.030 Certifications obtained:
GA063 C-GA125 C, GA080 D,

GA125 D
cULus per UL508 /
cULus per UL98 /

CSA C22.2 n°14
Fuse holder/block for switch disconnectors.
CSA C22.2 n°4

GAX39 1 For GA016 A-GA032 A 1 0.132
EAC
Suitable for 10.3x38 fuse size
GAX39 1UL For GA016 A-GA025 A 1 0.135
Suitable for Class CC fuses
GAX39 1 Type
GAX7 055…GAX7 500
GAX7 150A … GAX7 300A ––
GAX81-GAX83 ––
GAX82-GAX84 ––
GAX39 1 –– ––
GAX39 1UL –– ––
Certification obtained.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3,

UL508, UL98, CSA C22.2.

11-10 pages 11-26 to 28 page 11-50
IEC/EN type IP65 Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

per – Enclosure material: ABS
pkg – Padlockable handle
n° [kg] – Sealable cover
– For GAZ3/3B if any earth/ground and/or neutral
For switch disconnectors. terminal required, separately purchase types GAX3…
With rotating red/yellow handle. Complete with shaft given on page 11-8
extension. – Tightening torque for cover screws:
GAZ1 For GA016 A-GA040 A and 1 0.320 • GAZ1/1B: 1.3Nm/16lbin
GA040 D • Other types: 1.5Nm/13lbin
GAZ1 – IEC/EN degree of protection: IP65
GAZ2 For GA063 SA, 1 0.780
GA063 A-GA100 A and GA080 D – Cable entry:
• GAZ1/1B: PG16/M25 and PG13.5/M20 knockouts
GAZ3 For GA125 A and GA125 D 1 1.900 • GAX2/2B: PG29/M32 and PG16/M25 knockouts
With rotating black handle. Complete with shaft extension. • GAZ3/3B: Smooth surfaces; can be drilled by
GAZ1 B For GA016 A-GA040 A and 1 0.320 customer.
GA040 D
GAZ2 B For GA063 SA, 1 0.780 Certifications obtained: EAC.
GA063 A-GA100 A and GA080 D Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
GAZ3 B For GA125 A and GA125 D 1 1.900 IEC/EN 60947-3.
GAZ2 The empty enclosures are supplied with the following

accessories:
Enclosure GAZ1 GAZ2 GAZ3
GAZ1B GAZ2B GAZ3B
Red/yellow handle GAX61 GAX61 GAX61
Black handle GAX61B GAX61B GAX61B
Extension 1 1 1
Neutral plate terminal 1 1 -
Earth/Ground plate 1 1 - 11
terminal
GAZ3
UL/CSA Type 4/4X Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

per – Enclosure material: Polycarbonate
pkg – Padlockable handle
– Sealable cover
n° [kg] – Tightening torque for enclosure screws:
For switch disconnectors. • GAZ1/1B UL: 1.3Nm/16lbin for cover; 1.2Nm/11lbin
With rotating red/yellow handle. Complete with shaft for plate terminals
extension. • Other types: 1.5Nm/13lbin for cover; 1.2Nm/11lbin
GAZ1 UL For GA016 A-GA040 A 1 0.320 for plate terminals
and GA040D – UL/CSA degree of protection: Type 1, 4 and 4X indoor
use only for GAZ1 UL; not available for others / testing
GAZ1 UL GAZ2 UL For GA063 SA and GA063 A 1 0.730 pending completion at time of catalogue printing
GAZ3 UL For GA80 A-GA125 A, 1 1.900 – Cable entry:
GA080 D and GA125 D • GAZ1/1B UL: PG16/M25 and PG13.5/M20
With rotating black handle. Complete with shaft extension. knockouts
• GAX2/2B UL: PG29/M32 and PG16/M25 knockouts
GAZ1 B UL For GA016 A-GA040 A 1 0.320 • GAZ3/3B UL: Smooth surfaces; can be drilled by
and GA040D customer.
GAZ2 B UL For GA063 SA and GA063 A 1 0.730
GAZ3 B UL For GA80 A-GA125 A, 1 1.900 Certifications and compliance
GA080 D and GA125 D Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed for USA and
Canada (cULus – file E93602) as Polymeric Enclosures
for Manual Motor Controllers; cCSAus pending for
GAZ2 UL GAZ2/2B UL and GAZ3/3B UL at time of catalogue
The empty enclosures are supplied with the following printing.
accessories: Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
Enclosure GAZ1UL GAZ2UL GAZ3UL IEC/EN 60947-3, UL508, CSA C22.2 n°14, UL98,
GAZ1BUL GAZ2BUL GAX3BUL CSA C22.2 n°4.
Red/yellow handle GAX61 GAX61 GAX61
Black handle GAX61B GAX61B GAX61B
Extension 1 1 1
Neutral plate terminal 1 1 1
Earth/Ground plate 1 1 1
terminal
GAZ3 UL

page 11-28 page 11-50 11-11
Enclosed switch disconnectors
IEC/EN type IP65 Order code IEC conventional free air thermal Qty Wt Components
non-metallic enclosure current Ith per Enclosure Switch Handle
AC21A (690V) pkg disconnector
[A] n° [kg]
THREE POLE.
With rotating red/yellow handle.
GAZ016 16 1 0.450 GAZ1 GA016 A GAX61
GAZ025 25 1 0.450 GAZ1 GA025 A GAX61
GAZ032 32 1 0.450 GAZ1 GA032 A GAX61
GAZ040 40 1 0.450 GAZ1 GA040 A GAX61
GAZ016...GAZ040... GAZ063 SA 63 1 0.870 GAZ2 GA063 SA GAX61
GAZ063 C 63 1 1.220 GAZ2 GA063 A GAX61
GAZ080 C 80 1 1.220 GAZ2 GA080 A GAX61
GAZ100 C 100 1 1.220 GAZ2 GA100 A GAX61
GAZ125 125 1 2.220 GAZ3 GA125 A GAX61
With rotating black handle.
GAZ016 B 16 1 0.450 GAZ1 B GA016 A GAX61 B
GAZ063 SAB 63 1 0.870 GAZ2 B GA063 SA GAX61 B
GAZ063 CB 63 1 1.220 GAZ2 B GA063 A GAX61 B
GAZ063...100 C
11 FOUR POLE. Enclosure Switch Fourth Handle
With rotating red/yellow handle. disconnector pole
GAZ016 T4 16 1 0.550 GAZ1 GA016 A GAX42040A GAX61
GAZ063 CT4 63 1 1.250 GAZ2 GA063 A GAX42063A GAX61
GAZ100 CT4 100 1 1.250 GAZ2 GA100 A GAX42100A GAX61
GAZ016 T4B 16 1 0.550 GAZ1 B GA016 A GAX42040A GAX61 B
GAZ032 T4B 32 1 0.550 GAZ1 B GA032 A GAX42040A GAX61 B
GAZ063 CT4B 63 1 1.250 GAZ2 B GA063 A GAX42063A GAX61 B
GAZ100 CT4B 100 1 1.250 GAZ2 B GA100 A GAX42100A GAX61 B
GAZ125... GAZ125 T4B 125 1 2.500 GAZ3 B GA125 A GAX42125A GAX61 B
– Enclosure material: ABS
– For four-pole types not indicated, separately purchase
corresponding fourth pole GAX42…A and install on
enclosed 3-pole version
– Possible accessories to mount afterwards, if any
required:
• GAZ016-GAZ040 types: 1 contact block both on the
right and left disconnector side unless 4th pole is
installed
• All other types: 2 contact blocks both on the right
and left disconnector side unless 4th pole is
installed
• For GAZ125 types: if any earth/ground and/or
neutral terminal required, separately purchase types
GAX3… given on page 11-8
– Padlockable handle
– Sealable cover
– Tightening torque for cover screws:
• GAZ016-GAZ040 types: 1.3Nm/16lbin
• All other types: 1.5Nm/13lbin
– IEC/EN degree of protection: IP65
– Cable entry:
• GAZ016-GAZ040 types: PG16/M25 and PG13.5/M20
knockouts
• GAZ063SA-GAZ100 types: PG29/M32 and
PG16/M25 knockouts
• GAZ125 types: Smooth surfaces; can be drilled by
customer.

Compliant with standards: IEC7EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-3.

11-12 page 11-28 page 11-50 page 11-53
Enclosed switch disconnectors
UL/CSA Type 4/4X Order code Description Qty Wt Components

non-metallic enclosure per Enclosure Switch Handle
pkg disconnector
n° [kg]
THREE POLE.
With rotating red/yellow handle.
GAZ016 UL 16 1 0.450 GAZ1 UL GA016 A GAX61
GAZ063 SA UL 63 1 0.870 GAZ2 UL GA063 SA GAX61
GAZ016...GAZ040...UL
GAZ063 CUL 63 1 1.220 GAZ2 UL GA063 A GAX61
GAZ016 BUL 16 1 0.450 GAZ1 B UL GA016 A GAX61 B
GAZ063 SAB UL 63 1 0.870 GAZ2 B UL GA063 SA GAX61 B
GAZ063 CB UL 63 1 1.220 GAZ2 B UL GA063 A GAX61 B
GAZ080 B UL 80 1 2.220 GAZ3 B UL GA080 A GAX61 B
GAZ100 B UL 100 1 2.220 GAZ3 B UL GA100 A GAX61 B
GAZ063 SAB UL
GAZ063 CB UL GAZ125 B UL 125 1 2.220 GAZ3 B UL GA125 A GAX61 B
FOUR POLE. Enclosure Switch Fourth Handle 11
With rotating red/yellow handle. disconnector pole
GAZ016 T4 UL 16 1 0.550 GAZ1 UL GA016 A GAX42040A GAX61
GAZ063 CT4 UL 63 1 1.150 GAZ2 UL GA063 A GAX42063A GAX61
GAZ016 T4B UL 16 1 0.550 GAZ1 B UL GA016 A GAX42040A GAX61 B
GAZ063 CT4B UL 63 1 1.150 GAZ2 B UL GA063 A GAX42063A GAX61 B
GAZ100 UL - GAZ125 UL GAZ125 T4B UL 125 1 2.500 GAZ3 B UL GA125 A GAX42125A GAX61 B
UL/CSA ratings General characteristics

– Enclosure material: Polycarbonate
Type 1 phase 3 phase General Short- Fuse class - – For four-pole types not indicated, separately purchase
[HP] [HP] use at circuit max rating corresponding fourth pole GAX42…A and install on
enclosed 3-pole UL-suffix version
600VAC
required:
120V 240V 200- 240V 480V 600V [A] [kA] Type - [A] • GAZ016-040…UL types: 1 contact block on both the
208V right and left disconnector side unless 4th pole is
GAZ016... 1 2 5 5 10 10 16 5 RK5 - 20A installed
• All other types: 2 contact blocks both on the right
GAZ025... 11/2 3 71/2 71/2 15 20 25 5 RK5 - 30A and left disconnector side unless 4th pole is installed
GAZ032... 2 5 10 10 20 20 32 5 RK5 - 35A – Padlockable handle
GAZ040... 2 5 10 15 20 25 40 5 RK5 - 45A – Sealable cover
– Tightening torque for enclosure screws:
GAZ063S... 2 71/2 10 15 30 30 60 5 RK5 - 45A • GAZ016-040…UL: 1.3Nm/16lbin for cover;
NOTE: Above ratings are valid for GAZ016 - GAZ063S...UL types, according to UL508 and CSA 22.2 n°14. 1.2Nm/11lbin for plate terminals
UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93602), as Manual Motor Controllers while UL designation is “GENERAL PURPOSE • Other types: 1.5Nm/13lbin for cover; 1.2Nm/11lbin
SWITCH. INTERRUPTEUR USAGE GENERAL” and “SUITABLE AS MOTOR DISCONNECT”; GAZ063S... pending. for plate terminals
– UL/CSA degree of protection: Type 1, 4 and 4X indoor
Type 1 phase 3 phase General Short- Max fuse use only for GAZ016-040…UL types; not available for
[HP] [HP] use at circuit rating others / testing pending completion at time of
600VAC rating at at 600V catalogue printing
600VAC – Cable entry:
120V 240V 200- 240V 480V 600V [A] [kA] [A] • GAZ016-040…UL: PG16/M25 and PG13.5/M20
208V knockouts
• GAX063…UL: PG29/M32 and PG16/M25 knockouts
GAZ063C... 3 71/2 20 20 40 40 60 10 100 • GAZ0100-125…UL: Smooth surfaces; can be drilled
GAZ080... 3 10 25 25 40 40 100 10 100 by customer.
GAZ100... 5 10 30 30 50 50 100 10 100 Certifications and compliance
GAZ125... 71/2 10 30 30 60 60 100 10 100 Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed for USA and
NOTE: Above ratings are valid for GAZ063C - GAZ125... types, according to UL98 and CSA C22.2 n°4.
Canada (cULus – file E93602), as Manual Motor
For indication and reference purposes only while cCSAus is pending. Controllers – Enclosed for GAZ016-040…UL types;
Lower ratings in this same UL/CSA category are available on specific request for volume orders. cCSAus pending for all others at time of catalogue printing.
For information, consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
Voltage value not considered in UL98 / CSA 22.2 n°4 standards. IEC/EN 60947-3; UL508 and CSA C22.2 n°14 up to
GAZ063S…; UL98 and CSA C22.2 n°4 for all others.

page 11-28 page 11-50 page 11-53 11-13
Enclosed changeover switches
UL/CSA Type 4/4X Order code IEC conven- IEC rated Qty Wt Components
non-metallic enclosure tional free air operational per Enclosure 3-pole switch Interlock Handle
thermal current Ie pkg disconnector
current Ith
AC21A AC22A AC23B
(690V) (400V) (500V)
[A] [A] [A] n° [kg]
Three-pole line changeover switches I-0-II.
GAZ025 ET6 25 25 25 1 1.060 GAZ UL 2x GA025A GAX5000 GAX67 B
GAZ040 ET6 40 40 25 1 1.060 GAZ UL 2x GA040A GAX5000 GAX67 B
GAZ063SA ET6 63 45 25 1 1.070 GAZ UL 2x GA063SA GAX5000 GAX67 B
GAZ080 ET6 80 80 63 1 2.950 GAZ3UL 2x GA080A GAX5001 GAX67 B
GAZ125 ET6 125 125 100 1 2.950 GAZ3UL 2x GA125A GAX5001 GAX67 B
Enclosure Switch Interlock Handle
disconnector +
GAZ 025 E...GAZ 063SA E... Four-pole line changeover switches I-0-II. 4th pole
GAZ025 ET8 25 25 25 1 1.060 GAZ UL 2x GA025A + GAX5000 GAX67 B
2x GAX42040A
GAZ040 ET8 40 40 25 1 1.060 GAZ UL 2x GA040A+ GAX5000 GAX67 B
2x GAX42040A
GAZ063SA ET8 63 45 25 1 1.070 GAZ UL 2x GA063SA+ GAX5000 GAX67 B
2x GAX42063SA
GAZ080 ET8 80 80 63 1 2.950 GAZ3UL 2x GA080A+ GAX5001 GAX67 B
2x GAX42080A
GAZ125 ET8 125 125 100 1 2.950 GAZ3UL 2x GA125A+ GAX5001 GAX67 B
2x GAX42125A
For major details, consult Customer Service; see contact details on
11 GAZ 080 E...

GAZ 125 E...
inside front cover.
– Enclosure material: Polycarbonate
required:
• 2 contact blocks both on the right and left side for
UL/CSA ratings GAZ…ET6 types
• 1 contact block both on the right and left side for
Type 1 phase 3 phase General Short- Fuse class - GAZ…ET8 types
[HP] [HP] use at circuit max rating – Complete with neutral and earth/ground plate
600VAC rating at at 600V terminals
600VAC – Sealable cover
120V 240V 200- 240V 480V 600V [A] [kA] Type - [A] – Padlockable handle, complete with shaft extension
208V – Tightening torque for enclosure screws:
GAZ025... 11/2 3 71/2 71/2 15 20 25 5 RK5 - 30A • 1.5Nm/13lbin for cover
• 1.2Nm/11lbin for plate terminals
GAZ040... 2 5 10 15 20 25 40 5 RK5 - 45A – Degree of protection: IEC/EN IP65; UL/CSA Type 1, 4
GAZ063S... 2 71/2 10 15 30 30 60 5 RK5 - 45A and 4X indoor use only
NOTE: Above ratings are valid for GAZ025-GAZ040ET... types, according to UL508 and CSA 22.2 n°14. – Cable entry:
For indication and references purposes only while cCSAus is pending. • GAZ025-063…ET6/8: PG29/M32 and PG16/M25
knockouts
• GAZ080-125 ET6/8: Smooth surfaces; can be drilled
Type 1 phase 3 phase General Short- Max fuse by customer.
[HP] [HP] use at circuit rating
600VAC rating at at 600V Certifications and compliance
600VAC Certifications pending: EAC, cCSAus.
120V 240V 200- 240V 480V 600V [A] [kA] [A] Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
208V IEC/EN 60947-3; CSA C22.2 n°14 and UL508 up to
GAZ063…ET6/8; CSA C22.2 n°4 and UL98 for
GA080... 3 10 25 25 40 40 100 10 100 GAZ100-125 ET6/8
GA125... 71/2 10 30 30 60 60 100 10 100
NOTE: Above ratings are valid for GAZ080-GAZ125ET... types, according to UL98 and CSA C22.2 N°4.
For indication and references purposes only while cCSAus is pending.
Voltage value not considered in UL98 / CSA 22.2 n°4 standards so not indicated in UL product marking.

11-14 page 11-29 page 11-50 pages 11-53
Maximum combination
Enclosures
GAX10 11A GAX10 11A
GAX81 GAX42 040A GAX81

GAX42 063SA
GAX41 063SA GAX41 040A
or GAX42 040D or
GAX11 10EA GAX11 10EA
GAX83
GAX83
GAZ016...GAZ040
GAZ016 B...GAZ040 B
GAZ1
GAZ1 B
GAZ063 SA One auxiliary contact block can be fitted on the right and left sides of the
GAZ063 SAB disconnector unless the fourth pole is installed.
GAZ2 The earth and neutral plate terminals are standard supplied on the
GAZ2 B enclosure base.
Two auxiliary contacts blocks can be fitted both on the right and left sides of Sealing eyelet
the disconnector unless the fourth pole is installed.
Earth/ground and neutral plate terminals are standard supplied on the
enclosure base. 11
GAX12 10EA
or
GAX12 10EA
or
GAX34A
GAX34A
GAX32A
GAX10 11A
GAX32A
GAX10 11A
GAX41 125A GAX83

GAX42 063A...
GAX42 125A GAX83
GAX42 080D GAX41 125A
GAX42 125D GAX42 125A
GAX42 125D
GAX84
GAX84
GAZ063...GAZ100C
GAZ063...GAZ100CB
GAZ2
GAZ2 B
GAZ125
GAZ125 B
GAZ3
GAZ3 B
Two auxiliary contact blocks can be fitted both on the right and left sides of the disconnector unless the fourth pole is installed.
Earth/ground and neutral terminals, GAX... type, if any required, are to be purchased separately for the enclosure except for
GAZ...UL types which have plate terminals standard supplied.

page 11-28 page 11-50 pages 11-53 11-15
Three-pole switch Order code IEC conven- IEC rated Qty Wt Selection of handle and accessories
disconnectors tional free air operational per Types of handle to use per type are given below. Also
thermal current Ie pkg refer to pages 11-19 and 11-22 for other accessories.
current Ith
AC21A AC23A AC23A
(500V) (400V) (500V) Direct operating Door coupling
[A] [A] [A] n° [kg] Black Black Red/yellow
Separately purchase the handle and shaft extension .
GE0160 P 160 160 125 1 0.850 GEX65D GAX66B GAX66
GE0160 160 160 125 1 0.850
GE0200 200 160 125 1 0.900
GE0250 250 160 125 1 0.900
GE...
GE0251 250 250 200 1 1.700 GEX66ND GEX66NB GEX66N
GE0315 315 315 250 1 1.700
GE0400 400 400 315 1 1.900
GE0630 630 630 500 1 4.200
GE0800 800 800 500 1 4.200
GE1250 1250 800 800 1 7.600
GE1600 1600 1000 900 1 20.800
Three-pole switch With NFC fuse holder . Direct operating Door coupling
Separately purchase the handle and shaft extension . Black Black Red/yellow
disconnectors with GE0050 F 50 50 50 1 1.250 GEX61D GEX61NB GEX61N
fuse holder
11 GE0125 F 125 125 125 1 1.700
With NH fuse holder . Direct operating Door coupling
Separately purchase the handle and shaft extension. Black Black Red/yellow
GE0160 N 160 160 125 1 1.700 GEX61D GEX61NB GEX61N
GE0400 N 400 400 400 1 6.600
GE0800 N 800 630 630 1 13.000
With BS fuse holder . Direct operating Door coupling
GE... F - GE...N - GE...B GE0160 B 160 160 160 1 3.500 GEX62D GEX66NB GEX66N
GE0200 B 200 200 200 1 3.500
GE0250 B 250 250 250 1 6.600
GE0315 B 315 315 315 1 6.600 GEX63D GEX67NB GEX67N
GE0400 B 400 400 400 1 6.600
GE0630 B 630 630 630 1 13.000 GEX64D GEX68NB GEX68N
GE0800 B 800 630 630 1 13.000
Refer to the side table for the selection of the handle. A shaft insert is General characteristics
standard-supplied with all direct operating handles so no other shaft – IEC 50A to 1600A ratings
extension is required in this case. – Available versions: direct operating and door coupling
See table on page 11-22 also for the types of fuses. – Screw fixing: 35mm DIN rail mount adapter kit for
The switch disconnector is standard-supplied with fuse protection shield. GE0160 P on p. 11-19
Standard supplied with IEC IP20 terminal protection.
IEC 250A Ith; IEC 200A AC21A 500V. – Padlockable at 0 position with no extra accessory.
• 1000V for GE0160 P, GE0160-GE1600,
GE0250 N/B-GE0800 N/B
• 800V for GE0050 F, GE0125 F, GE0160 N/B,
GE0161 N, and GE0200 B
– Mechanical life:
• 30,000 cycles for GE0160 P, GE0160-GE0250,
• 20,000 cycles for GE0251-GE0400
• 10,000 cycles for GE0500-GE1600, GE0050 F,
GE0125 F, GE0160 N/B-GE0400 N/B
• 5,000 cycles for GE0630 N/B-GE0800 N/B.

Certificatons obtained: EAC.
IEC/EN 60947-3.

11-16 pages 11-19 to 22 pages 11-30 to 42 page 11-51 pages 11-54 and 56
Four-pole Order code IEC conven- IEC rated Qty Wt Selection of handles and accessories
switch disconnectors tional free air operational per Types of handle to use per type are given below. Also
thermal current Ie pkg refer to pages 11-19 and 11-23 for other accessories.
current Ith
AC21A AC23A AC23A
(500V) (400V) (500V) Direct operating Door coupling
[A] [A] [A] n° [kg] Black Black Red/yellow
Separately purchase the handle and shaft extension .
GE0160 T4P 160 160 125 1 1.000 GEX65D GAX66B GAX66
GE0160 T4 160 160 125 1 1.000
GE0200 T4 200 160 125 1 1.000
GE0250 T4 250 160 125 1 1.000
GE0251 T4 250 250 200 1 1.900 GEX66ND GEX66NB GEX66N
GE...T4... GE0315 T4 315 315 250 1 1.900
GE0400 T4 400 400 315 1 2.100
GE0630 T4 630 630 500 1 4.500
GE0800 T4 800 800 500 1 4.500
GE1250 T4 1250 800 800 1 7.600
GE1600 T4 1600 1000 900 1 20.800
With NFC fuse holder . Direct actuator Door coupling

Four-pole switch
disconnectors with GE0050 FT4 50 50 50 1 1.250 GEX61D GEX61NB GEX61N
fuse holder GE0125 FT4 125 125 125 1 1.700
With NH fuse holder . Direct actuator Door coupling 11
GE0160 NT4 160 160 125 1 2.200 GEX61D GEX61NB GEX61N
GE0400 NT4 400 400 400 1 8.000
GE0800 NT4 800 630 630 1 15.000
With BS fuse holder . Direct actuator Door coupling
GE0160 BT4 160 160 160 1 4.000 GEX62D GEX66NB GEX66N
GE... FT4 - GE...NT4-GE...BT4
GE0200 BT4 200 200 200 1 4.000
GE0250 BT4 250 250 250 1 4.000
GE0400 BT4 400 400 400 1 8.000
GE0800 BT4 800 630 630 1 15.000
Refer to the side table for the selection of the handle. A shaft insert is General characteristics
standard-supplied with all direct operating handles so no other shaft – IEC 50A to 1600A ratings
extension is required in this case. – 4-pole types (3P+N) with early-make late-break neutral
See table on page 11-23 also for the types of fuses.
pole
The switch disconnector is standard-supplied with fuse protection shield.
Standard supplied with IEC IP20 terminal protection. – Available versions: direct operating and door coupling
IEC 250A Ith; IEC 200A AC21A 500V. – Screw fixing: 35mm DIN rail mount adapter kit for
GE0160 T4P on p. 11-19
– Padlockable at 0 position with no extra accessory.
• 1000V for GE1600 T4P, GE0160 T4-GE1600 T4,
GE0250 NT4/BT4-GE0800 NT4/BT4
• 800V for GE0050 FT4, GE0125 FT4,
GE0160 NT4/BT4, GE0161 NT, GE0200 BT4
• 30,000 cycles for GE1600 T4P, GE0160 T4-
GE0250 T4
• 20,000 cycles for GE0251 T4-GE0400 T4
• 10,000 cycles for GE0500 T4-GE1600 T4,
GE0050 FT4, GE0125 FT4,
GE0160 NT4/BT4-GE0400 NT4/BT4
• 5,000 cycles for GE0630 NT4/BT4,
GE0800 NT4/BT4.

Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3.

pages 11-19 to 23 pages 11-30 to 42 page 11-51 pages 11-54 and 56 11-17
Changeover switches
Three-pole changeover Order code IEC conven- IEC rated Qty Wt Selection of handles and accessories
switches tional free air operational per Types of handle to use per type are given below.
thermal current Ie pkg Also refer to pages 11-19 and 11-21 for other
current Ith accessories.
AC21A AC23B AC23B
(500V) (400V) (500V) Direct actuator Door coupling
[A] [A] [A] n° [kg] Black Black
Separately purchase the handle and shaft extension.
GE0160 E 160 160 125 1 1.800 GEX61E GEX61NC
GE0200 E 200 160 125 1 1.900
GE0201 E 200 160 125 1 4.800 GEX62NE GEX62NC
GE0250 E 250 180 150 1 4.800
GE0315 E 315 200 160 1 5.000
GE...E GE0400 E 400 250 200 1 5.000
GE0500 E 500 400 250 1 11.500 GEX63NE GEX63NC
GE0630 E 630 500 315 1 11.500
GE0800 E 800 630 400 1 11.900
GE1000 E 1000 1000 800 1 21.800 GEX64NE GEX64NC
GE1250 E 1250 1000 900 1 23.600
GE1600 E 1600 1000 900 1 50.000
Four-pole Order code IEC conven- IEC rated Qty Wt Selection of handles and accessories
changeover switches tional free air operational per Types of handle to use per type are given below.
thermal current Ie pkg Also refer to pages 11-19 and 11-21 for other
current Ith accessories.
AC21A AC23B AC23B
11 (500V) (400V) (500V) Direct actuator Door coupling
[A] [A] [A] n° [kg] Black Black
Separately purchase the handle and shaft extension.
GE0160 ET4 160 160 125 1 2.100 GEX61E GEX61NC
GE0200 ET4 200 160 125 1 2.200
GE0201 ET4 200 160 125 1 5.300 GEX62NE GEX62NC
GE0250 ET4 250 180 150 1 5.300
GE0315 ET4 315 200 160 1 5,500
GE0400 ET4 400 250 200 1 5.500
GE...ET4 GE0500 ET4 500 400 250 1 12.600 GEX63NE GEX63NC
GE0630 ET4 630 500 315 1 12.600
GE0800 ET4 800 630 400 1 13.200
GE1000 ET4 1000 1000 800 1 24.300 GEX64NE GEX64NC
GE1250 ET4 1250 1000 900 1 26.700
GE1600 ET4 1600 1000 900 1 55.000
Refer to the side table for the selection of the handle. A shaft insert is
standard-supplied with all direct operating handles so no other shaft General characteristics
extension is required in this case. – IEC 160A to 1600A ratings
– 4-pole types (3P+N) with early-make late-break neutral
pole
– Available versions: direct operating and door coupling
– Screw fixing
– Mechanical life: 30,000 cycles for GE0160 E/ET4 and
GE0200 E/ET4 only; 10,000 cycles for other types.

IEC/EN 60947-3.

11-18 pages 11-19 to 21 pages 11-43 to 47 page 11-51 page 11-54 and 57
Auxiliary contacts Order code Characteristics Qty Wt Selection of add-on contacts and accessories
Terminal covers per Refer to the combinations given on pages 11-21 to 11-25
pkg for a correct choice based on the switch disconnector
Motorised unit n° [kg] type used.
Auxiliary contacts. General characteristics for auxiliary contacts
GEX10 11 1NO/1NC changeover/SPDT 1 0.032 IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith: 16A.
Auxiliary contacts for switch disconnector types GE0050 F,
GE0050 FT4, GE0125 F, GE0125 FT4, GE0160 N and GE0160 NT4. General characteristics for motorised control unit
– IEC rated auxiliary supply voltage: 230VAC/DC
GEX10 11N 1NO/1NC changeover/SPDT 1 0.024 – 4 static outputs, 24VDC 120mA total
GEX10...
Auxiliary contacts for switch disconnector types GE0160 E, – 4 inputs, contacts powered at 24VDC or 5VDC
GE0200 E, GE0160 ET4, GE0200 ET4, GE1600 E and (500mA) for changeover control (pulsed or
GE1600 ET4. continuous)
GEX10 11M 1NO/1NC changeover/SPDT 1 0.016 – RS485 Modbus serial port for control, monitoring,
programming
Adapter kit for 35mm DIN fixing. – Padlockable at 0 position
GEX89 00 For GE...P types only 1 0.040 – Programming by position inputs
Set of terminal covers consisting of pieces given below. – 4-digit display for status-error indications.
See tables on pages 11-21 to 11-25 for the selection based
GEX89 00 on the switch disconnector type. Screw fixing. Certifications and compliance
GEX81 01 1-piece set, transparent sheet 1 0.048 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
covering four poles IEC/EN 60947-3.
GEX81 11 2-piece set, each covers two poles 1 0.080
Snap-on fixing.
GEX82 01 3-piece set, each covers one pole 1 0.090
GEX82 03 4-piece set, each covers one pole 1 0.120 11
GEX8... GEX82 11 3-piece set, each covers one pole 1 0.120
Motorised control unit for changeover switches.
Rated auxiliary supply voltage 230VAC/DC.
Complete with control handle, shaft extension and fixing
elements.
GEX69... GEX69 1 For GE0201 E-GE0400 E and 1 3.840
GE0201 ET4-GE0400 ET4
GEX69 2 For GE0500 E-GE0800 E and 1 5.340
GE0500 ET4-GE0800 ET4
GEX69 3 For GE1000 E-GE1600 E and 1 5.753
For the correct choice of
GE1000 ET4-GE1600 ET4
auxiliary contacts, terminals covers
Suitable for all types except switch disconnectors GE0050 F,
and motorised unit for the switch GE0050 FT4, GE0125 F, GE0125 FT4, GE0160 N, GE0160 NT4, GE0160 E,
disconnector, refer to tables on GE0200 E, GE0160 ET4, GE0200 ET4, GE1600 E and GE1600 ET4.
Changeover contact/SPDT.
pages 11-21 to 11-25.

pages 11-43 to 49 page 11-51 11-19
Accessories
Order code Characteristics Qty Wt Certifications and compliance

per Certifications obtained: EAC for all types; cULus to UL98 /
pkg CSA C22.2 n°4 for GAX66… and GAX7...A types (see
n° [kg] pages 11-8 and 11-10 for cULus details).
DIRECT OPERATING LEVER HANDLE, PADLOCKABLE . Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
Rotating type with screw fixing on switch disconnector. IEC/EN 60947-3.
Complete with shaft insert.
GEX6 1D 95mm/3.7” black 1 0.340 Handle shape Type of handle
and length
GEX6 1E 50mm/2” black 1 0.052
GEX...D-GEX...E GEX61E-GEX65D
GEX6 2D 105mm/4.1” black 1 0.268
50mm (2”)
GEX6 2NE 143mm/5.6” black 1 0.266
GAX66-GAX66B
GEX6 3D 145mm/5.7” black 1 0.536
65mm (2.6”)
GEX6 3NE 360mm/14.2” black 1 0.424
GEX61N-GEX61NB
GEX6 4D 360mm/14.2” black 1 0.612 GEX61NC
94mm (3.7”)
GEX6 4NE 396mm/15.6” black 1 0.612
GEX6 2NE GEX61D
GEX6 5D 50mm/2” black 1 0.054
95mm (3.74”)
GEX6 6ND 115mm/4.5” black 1 0.216
GEX62D
GEX6 7ND 143mm/5.6” black 1 0.322
105mm (4.1”)
GEX6 8ND 396mm/15.6” black 1 0.328
GEX66ND-GEX66NB
DOOR COUPLING LEVER HANDLE, PADLOCKABLE . GEX66N
Red/yellow rotating type with screw fixing on door. 115mm (4.5”)
Shaft extension to order separately. GEX62NC-GEX62NE
GAX66 Pistrol grip, 65mm/2.6” 1 0.140 143mm (5.6”) GEX67N-GEX67NB
GAX66 7mm/0.3”. IEC IP66 GEX67ND
GEX6 1N 94mm/3.7” 7mm/0.3”. 1 0.326 GEX63NC-GEX63NE
GEX6 6N 115mm/4.5” 10mm/0.4”. 1 0.248 176mm (6.9”)
11 IEC IP65 2-hand
GEX6 7N 143mm/5.6” 14mm/0.6”. 1 0.302 245mm (9.6”) GEX63D
IEC IP65 2-hand
GEX6 8N 396mm/15.6” 1 4mm/0.6”. 1 0.312 360mm (14.2”) GEX64D
IEC IP65
GEX6 6N 2-hand
DOOR COUPLING LEVER HANDLE, PADLOCKABLE . GEX64NC-GEX64NE
Black rotating type with screw fixing on door. 396mm (15.6”)
GEX68N-GEX68NB
Shaft extension to order separately. GEX68ND
GAX66 B Pistrol grip, 65mm/2.6” 1 0.075
7mm/0.3”. IEC IP66
GEX6 1NB 94mm/3.7” 7mm/0.3”. 1 0.334
IEC IP65
GEX6 1NC 94mm/3.7” 7mm/0.3”. 1 0.074
GEX6 8N IEC IP65
GEX6 2NC 143mm/5.6” 10mm/0.4”. 1 0.252
IEC IP65
GEX6 3NC 176mm/6.9” 14mm/0.6”. 1 0.302
IEC IP65
GEX6 4NC 396mm/15.6” 14mm/0.6”. 1 0.488
IEC IP65
GEX6 6NB 115mm/4.5” 10mm/0.4”. 1 0.246
IEC IP65
GEX6 7NB GEX6 7NB 143mm/5.6” 14mm/0.6”. 1 0.298
IEC IP65
GEX6 8NB 396mm/15.6” 14mm/0.6”. 1 0.310
IEC IP65
SHAFT EXTENSION
for door coupling lever handles.
GAX7 150A 150mm/5.9in; 7mm/0.3” 1 0.090
GAX7...A
GAX7 200A 200mm/7.9in; 7mm/0.3” 1 0.112
GAX7 300A 300mm/11.8in; 7mm/0.3” 1 0.160
GEX7 162N 177mm/6.97”; 7mm/0.3” 1 0.056
GEX7 195N 195mm/7.7"; 14mm/0.6” 1 0.248
GEX7...
GEX7 227N 227mm/8.9”; 10mm/0.4” 1 0.154
GEX7 239N 239mm/9.4”; 14mm/0.6” 1 0.310
GEX7 250N 250mm/9.8”; 7mm/0.3” 1 0.084
GEX7 345N 345mm/13.6”; 14mm/0.6” 1 0.480
GEX7 375N 375mm/14.7”; 10mm/0.4” 1 0.274
For the correct choice of GEX7 387N 387mm/15.2”; 7mm/0.3” 1 0.142
handle and shaft extension for the
GEX7 536N 536mm/21.1”; 10mm/0.4” 1 0.408
switch disconnector, refer to
GEX7 535N 535mm/21.06”; 14mm/0.6” 1 0.784
tables on pages 11-21 to 11-25.
GEX7 485N 485mm/19.1”; 14mm/0.6” 1 0.930
See tables on pages 11-21 to 11-25 for the correct choice based on the
switch disconnector type used.
Use with GAX7...A extension types only.
Dimensions
11-20 pages 11-30 to 49
Summary table of combinations - Three and four-pole changeover switches

Type IEC IEC rated Direct Door-coupling Shaft extension for Auxiliary Motorised Terminal covers
Conventional operational operating handles door-coupling handles contacts control unit for:
free air current Ie handle (the last 3 digits of GEX code indicate 1NO/1NC
thermal length in mm/in)
current Ith
AC21A AC23B AC23B Black Black Red/Yellow Shaft Max panel Line 1 Line 2 Load
(500V) (400V) (500V) section depth
Order [A] [A] [A] Order Order Order Order [mm/in] Order Order Order Order Order
code code code code code [mm/in] code code code code code
Changeover switches. Three poles.
GE0160 E 160 160 125 GEX61E GEX61NC –– GEX7162N 7mm/ 269/10.59” GEX1011M –– GEX8101 GEX8101
GE0200 E 200 160 125 GEX7250N 0.3” 342/13.36”
GEX7387N 479/18.86”
GE0201 E 200 160 125 GEX62NE GEX62NC –– GEX7227N 10mm/ 279/10.98” GEX1011 GEX691 GEX8212 GEX8211 GEX8311
GE0250 E 250 180 150 GEX7375N 0.4” 427/16.81”
GE0315 E 315 200 160 GEX7536N 588/23.15”
GE0400 E 400 250 200
GE0500 E 500 400 250 GEX63NE GEX63NC –– GEX7195N 14mm/ 257/10.12” GEX692 GEX8222 GEX8221 GEX8321
GE0630 E 630 500 315 GEX7345N 0.6” 407/16.02”
GE0800 E 800 630 400 GEX7535N 597/23.50”
GE1000 E 1000 1000 800 GEX64NE GEX64NC –– 280/11.02” GEX693 GEX8232 GEX8231 GEX8331
GE1250 E 1250 1000 900 430/16.93”
620/24.41”
GE1600 E 1600 1000 900 –– GEX7239N 14mm/ 579/22.79” GEX1011M GEX8141 –– GEX8141 11
GEX7485N 0.6” 825/32.48”
Changeover switches. Four poles.

GE0160 ET4 160 160 125 GEX61E GEX61NC –– GEX7162N 7mm/ 269/10.59” GEX1011M –– GEX8101 GEX8101
GE0200 ET4 200 160 125 GEX7250N 0.3” 342/13.36”
GEX7387N 479/18.86”
GE0201 ET4 200 200 160 GEX62NE GEX62NC –– GEX7227N 10mm/ 279/10.98” GEX1011 GEX691 GEX8213 GEX8213 GEX8312
GE0250 ET4 250 200 160 GEX7375N 0.4” 427/16.81”
GE0315 ET4 315 250 200 GEX7536N 588/23.15”
GE0400 ET4 400 250 200
GE0500 ET4 500 400 315 GEX63NE GEX63NC –– GEX7195N 14mm/ 257/10.12” GEX692 GEX8223 GEX8223 GEX8322
GE0630 ET4 630 400 315 GEX7345N 0.6” 407/16.02”
GE0800 ET4 800 630 400 GEX7535N 597/23.50”
GE1000 ET4 1000 1000 800 GEX64NE GEX64NC –– 280/11.02” GEX693 GEX8233 GEX8233 GEX8332
GE1250 ET4 1250 1000 900 430/16.93”
620/24.41”
GE1600 ET4 1600 1000 900 –– GEX7239N 14mm/ 579/22.79” GEX1011M GEX8141 –– GEX8141
GEX7485N 0.6” 825/32.48”
GEX81 01 terminal cover protects the input of both Line 1 and Line 2.

pages 11-43 to 45 page 11-51 page 11-55 11-21
Summary table of combinations - Three-pole switch disconnectors

Three-pole IEC IEC rated Direct Door-coupling Shaft extensions for Auxiliary Type of Terminal covers
type Conventional operational operating handles door-coupling handles contacts fuse for:
thermal length in mm/in) (SPDT)
AC21A AC23A AC23A Black Black Red/Yellow Shaft Max panel Line Load
Order [A] [A] [A] Order Order Order Order [mm/in] Order Order Order
code code code code code [mm/in] code code code
Switch disconnectors.
GE0160 P 160 160 125 GEX65D GAX66B GAX66 GAX7150A 7mm/ 214/8.42” GEX1011 ––
GE0160 160 160 125 GAX7200A 0.3” 264/10.39” GEX8101 GEX8101
GE0200 200 160 125 GAX7300A 364/14.33”
GE0250 250 160 125
GE0251 250 250 200 GEX66ND GEX66NB GEX66N GEX7227N 10mm/ 267/10.51” GEX8111 GEX8111
GE0315 315 315 250 GEX7375N 0.4” 415/16.34”
GE0400 400 400 315 GEX7536N 576/22.68”
GE0500 500 500 400 GEX67ND GEX67NB GEX67N GEX7195N 14mm/ 251/9.88” GEX8121 GEX8121
GE0630 630 630 500 GEX7345N 0.6” 401/15.79”
GE0800 800 630 500 GEX7535N 591/23.27”
GE1000 1000 800 800 GEX68ND GEX68NB GEX68N 267/10.51” GEX8131 GEX8131
GE1250 1250 800 800 417/16.42”
607/23.90”
11 GE1600 1600 1000 900 GEX7239N 14mm/ 399/15.71” GEX8141 GEX8141
GEX7485N 0.6” 645/25.39”
Switch disconnectors with NFC fuse holder.
GE0050 F 50 50 50 GEX61D GEX61NB GEX61N GEX7162N 7mm/ 192/7.56” GEX1011N 14x51
GE0125 F 125 125 125 GEX7250N 0.3” 265/10.43” 22x58
GEX7387N 402/15.83”
Switch disconnectors with NH fuse holder.
GE0160 N 160 160 125 GEX61D GEX61NB GEX61N GEX7162N 7mm/ 192/7.56” GEX1011N 00 GEX8201 GEX8201
GEX7250N 0.3” 265/10.43”
GEX7387N 402/15.83”
GE0161 N 160 160 160 GEX62D GEX66NB GEX66N GEX7227N 10mm/ 302/11.89” GEX1011 0 GEX8211 GEX8212
GEX7375N 0.4” 450/17.72”
GEX7536N 611/24.05”
GE0250 N 250 250 250 GEX63D GEX67NB GEX67N GEX7195N 14mm/ 271/10.67” 1 GEX8221 GEX8222
GE0400 N 400 400 400 GEX7345N 0.6” 421/16.57” 2
GEX7535N 611/24.05”
GE0630 N 630 630 630 GEX64D GEX68NB GEX68N 285/11.22” 3 GEX8231 GEX8232
GE0800 N 800 630 630 435/17.12”
625/24.61”
Switch disconnectors with BS fuse holder.
GE0160 B 160 160 160 GEX62D GEX66NB GEX66N GEX7227N 10mm/ 302/11.89” GEX1011 A4 GEX8211 GEX8212
GE0200 B 200 200 200 GEX7375N 0.4” 450/17.72” B1-B2
GE0250 B 250 250 250 GEX7536N 611/24.05”
GE0315 B 315 315 315 GEX63D GEX67NB GEX67N GEX7195N 14mm/ 271/10.67” B1-B2-B3 GEX8221 GEX8222
GE0400 B 400 400 400 GEX7345N 0.6” 421/16.57” B1-B2-B3-B4
GEX7535N 611/24.05”
GE0630 B 630 630 630 GEX64D GEX68NB GEX68N 285/11.22” C1-C2 GEX8231 GEX8232
GE0800 B 800 630 630 435/17.12” C1-C2-C3
625/24.61”
The motorised control unit cannot be installed.
Standard supplied with IP20 terminal protection warranted by wired equipment with only maximum conductor section of 95mm2. Suitable for mounting on 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail, adapters kit is available on page 11-19.
IEC 250A Ith; IEC 200A AC21A 500V.
Standard supplied with IEC IP20 terminal protection warranted by wired equipment with only maximum conductor section of 35mm2 for GE0050 F and of 95mm2 for GE0125 F.

11-22 pages 11-30 to 42 page 11-51 pages 11-54 and 56
Summary table of combinations - Four-pole switch disconnectors

Four-pole IEC IEC rated Direct Door-coupling Shaft extensions for Auxiliary Type of Terminal covers
type conventional operational operating handles door-coupling handles contacts fuse for:
thermal length in mm/in) (SPDT)
AC21A AC23A AC23A Black Black Red/Yellow Shaft Max panel Line Load
Order [A] [A] [A] Order Order Order Order [mm/in] Order Order Order
Switch disconnectors.
GE0160 T4P 160 160 125 GEX65D GAX66B GAX66 GAX7150A 7mm/ 214/8.42” GEX1011 ––
GE0160 T4 160 160 125 GAX7200A 0.3” 264/10.39” GEX8101 GEX8101
GE0200 T4 200 160 125 GAX7300A 364/14.33”
GE0250 T4 250 160 125
GE0251 T4 250 250 200 GEX66ND GEX66NB GEX66N GEX7227N 10mm/ 267/10.51” GEX8111 GEX8111
GE0315 T4 315 315 250 GEX7375N 0.4” 415/16.34”
GE0400 T4 400 400 315 GEX7536N 576/22.68”
GE0500 T4 500 500 400 GEX67ND GEX67NB GEX67N GEX7195N 14mm/ 251/9.88” GEX8121 GEX8121
GE0630 T4 630 630 500 GEX7345N 0.6” 401/15.79”
GE0800 T4 800 630 500 GEX7535N 591/23.27”
GE1000 T4 1000 800 800 GEX68ND GEX68NB GEX68N 267/10.51” GEX8131 GEX8131
GE1250 T4 1250 800 800 417/16.42”
607/23.90”
GE1600 T4 1600 1000 900 GEX7239N 14mm/ 399/15.71” GEX8141 GEX8141 11
GEX7485N 0.6” 645/25.39”
Switch disconnectors with NFC fuse holder.
GE0050 FT4 50 50 50 GEX61D GEX61NB GEX61N GEX7162N 7mm/ 192/7.56” GEX1011N 14x51
GE0125 FT4 125 125 125 GEX7250N 0.3” 265/10.43” 22x58
GEX7387N 402/15.83”
Switch disconnectors with NH fuse holder.
GE0160 NT4 160 160 125 GEX61D GEX61NB GEX61N GEX7162N 7mm/ 192/7.56” GEX1011N 00 GEX8203 GEX8203
GEX7250N 0.3” 265/10.43”
GEX7387N 402/15.83”
GE0161 NT4 160 160 160 GEX62D GEX66NB GEX66N GEX7227N 10mm/ 302/11.89” GEX1011 0 GEX8213 GEX8213
GEX7375N 0.4” 450/17.72”
GEX7536N 611/24.05”
GE0250 NT4 250 250 250 GEX63D GEX67NB GEX67N GEX7195N 14mm/ 271/10.67” 1 GEX8223 GEX8223
GE0400 NT4 400 400 400 GEX7345N 0.6” 421/16.57” 2
GEX7535N 611/24.05”
GE0630 NT4 630 630 630 GEX64D GEX68NB GEX68N 285/11.22” 3 GEX8233 GEX8233
GE0800 NT4 800 630 630 435/17.12”
625/24.61”
Switch disconnectors with BS fuse holder.
GE0160 BT4 160 160 160 GEX62D GEX66NB GEX66N GEX7227N 10mm/ 302/11.89” GEX1011 A4 GEX8213 GEX8213
GE0200 BT4 200 200 200 GEX7375N 0.4” 450/17.72” B1-B2
GE0250 BT4 250 250 250 GEX7536N 611/24.05”
GE0315 BT4 315 315 315 GEX63D GEX67NB GEX67N GEX7195N 14mm/ 271/10.67” B1-B2-B3 GEX8223 GEX8223
GE0400 BT4 400 400 400 GEX7345N 0.6” 421/16.57” B1-B2-B3-B4
GEX7535N 611/24.05”
GE0630 BT4 630 630 630 GEX64D GEX68NB GEX68N 285/11.22” C1-C2 GEX8233 GEX8233
GE0800 BT4 800 630 630 435/17.12” C1-C2-C3
625/24.61”
Standard supplied with IP20 terminal protection warranted by wired equipment with only maximum conductor section of 95mm2. Suitable for mounting on 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail, adapter kit is available on page 11-19.
IEC 250A Ith; IEC 200A AC21A 500V.
Standard supplied with IEC IP20 terminal protection warranted by wired equipment with only maximum conductor section of 35mm2 for GE0050 FT4 and of 95mm2 for GE0125 FT4.

pages 11-42 to 30 page 11-51 pages 11-54 and 56 11-23
For photovoltaic applications
GA series
Three-pole switch Order code IEC IEC rated Qty Wt General characteristics
disconnectors conventional operational per – IEC 40A to 125A ratings
free air current Ie pkg – Available versions:
thermal DC21B • Direct operating
current Ith • Door coupling version. Use switch disconnector
Poles in series with direct actuator and separately purchase the
800V 1000V handle and shaft extension for this version.
4p 6p 8p See pages 11-9 and 11-10.
[A] [A] [A] [A] n° [kg] – Screw or 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail fixing
– Padlockable in 0 position with no extra accessory.
Direct operating version, complete with black handle.
For door-coupling version, separately purchase the handle Operational characteristics
GA040 D GA080 D and shaft extension; refer to pages 11-9 and 11-10. – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 1000V
GA125 D GA040 D 40 15 10 25 1 0.135 – IEC rated impulse withstand Uimp: 8kV
GA080 D 80 18 20 32 1 0.355 – Mechanical life:
• 100,000 cycles for GA040 D and GAX42 040 D
GA125 D 125 20 25 40 1 0.355 • 30,000 cycles for GA080 D, GAX42 080 D, GA125D
For other operational voltages, refer to technical characteristics on page and GAX42 125D.
11-52 or 11-58.
NOTE: See UL/CSA ratings on page 11-58 and/or on the bottom of page 11-4.
Transformation of direct operating version into door
coupling type
Fourth pole add-on Fourth pole add-on with simultaneous closing operation as GA040 D + GA040 D
corresponding GA...D switch poles. with GAX60 00
for 6 and 8 poles
GAX42 040D 40 –– –– –– 1 0.040
GA040 D
GAX42 080D 80 –– –– –– 1 0.110 GA080 D
GA125 D
GAX42 125D 125 –– –– –– 1 0.110 (GAX64/64B)
( 5mm/0.2”)
GAX42...D GAX7...
(GAX63... only)
UTILISATION IN DC21B CATEGORY
11 IEC operational voltage Ue 600V

Maximum Assembly Products to purchase and
4-pole assembly Current [A] connect together GAX63/63B
GAX63 2/2B
GAX64/64B
20 GA040D - 4 poles GA040D + GAX42040D
GAX62/62B
35 GA040D - 6 poles GA040D + GA040D + GAX6000
GA040 D GA080 D /
GAX42 040D
GA125 D 45 GA080D - 6 poles GA080D + GA080D + GAX6001 GAX61/61B
GAX42 080D /
GAX42 125D 50 GA125D - 6 poles GA125D + GA125D + GAX6001
IEC operational voltage Ue 800V

Maximum Assembly Products to purchase and
Current [A] connect together GA080 D + GA080 D /
6-pole assembly 15 GA040D - 4 poles GA040D + GAX42040D
GA125 D + GA125 D
with GAX60 01
for 6 and 8 poles
GA080 D /
GA125 D
GA040 D
GAX60 00 GA080 D GAX7150A
+ GAX42040D + GAX42040D GA125 D
GAX60 B
GAX7200A GAX66
GAX7300A GAX66 B
40 GA125D - 6 poles GA125D + GA125D + GAX6001 ( 7mm/0.3”)
GA040 D GA080 D /
GA125 D GAX60 01 50 GA080D - 8 poles GA080D + GA080D + GAX6001
+ GAX42080D + GAX42080D
60 GA125D - 8 poles GA125D + GA125D + GAX6001 Certifications and compliance
+ GAX42125D + GAX42125D Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93602) as Manual Motor
IEC operational voltage Ue 1000V Controllers, to UL508/CSA C22.2 n° 14 for GA040 D and
GAX42 040D; (cULus - File E328470) as Open Type
8-pole assembly Maximum Assembly Products to purchase and Switches to UL98/CSA C22.2 n° 4 for GA080 D, GA125 D,
Current [A] connect together GAX42 080D and GAX42 125D.
GA040 D
10 GA040D - 6 poles GA040D + GA040D + GAX6000 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3,
20 GA080D - 6 poles GA080D + GA080D + GAX6001 UL508, UL98, CSA C22.2.
GA040 D GAX42 040D

+ GAX42040D + GAX42040D Strokes of GA…D types (switch and add-on pole)
GAX60 00 Travel 0→1 0° 30° 60° 90°
+ GAX42080D + GAX42080D GA040 D 60°
GAX42 040D
Main poles
GAX42 080D /
GAX42 125D 40 GA125D - 8 poles GA125D + GA125D + GAX6001 GAX420 40D 60°
GA080 D / Simultaneous fourth-pole add on
GA125 D + GAX42125D + GAX42125D
GA080 D / For other operational voltages, refer to technical characteristics on page GA080 D - GA125 D 55°
GA125 D 11-52 or 11-58. Main poles
GAX42 080D - GAX42 125D 55°
OFF ON
GAX60 01
GAX42 080D / GAX42 125D

11-24 pages 11-6 to 10 pages 11-30 to 33 page 11-52 page 11-54 and 59
For photovoltaic applications
Four-pole switch Order code IEC IEC rated Qty Wt Selection of handles and accessories
disconnectors free air operational current Ie per Types of handle to use per type are given below.
thermal DC21B pkg Also refer to pages 11-19 or 20 and at page bottom for
other accessories.
220V 800V 1000V
[A] [A] [A] [A] n° [kg]
Version for photovoltaic applications. Direct operating Door coupling
GE0160 DT4 160 160 70 30 1 1.000 GEX65D GAX66B GAX66
GE0160 DT4P 160 160 70 30 1 1.000
GE0125 DT4 125 125 125 100 1 1.900 GEX66ND GEX66NB GEX66N
GE0250 DT4 250 250 250 200 1 2.000
GE0315 DT4 315 315 280 250 1 4.000
GE...DT4 - GE...DT4P GE0630 DT4 630 630 600 500 1 4.500 GEX67ND GEX67NB GEX67N
GE0800 DT4 800 800 630 630 1 4.500
GE1250 DT4 1250 1250 1000 850 1 8.900 GEX68ND GEX68NB GEX68N
Refer to the side table for the selection of the handle. A shaft insert is
standard-supplied with all direct operating handles so no other shaft General characteristics
extension is required in this case. – IEC 160A to 1250A ratings
Connection of four poles in series. – Available versions:
For other operational voltages, refer to technical characteristics on page • Direct operating
11-59.
• Door coupling. Use switch disconnector with direct
Standard supplied with IEC IP20 terminal protection.
operation and separately purchase the handle and
shaft extension. See page 11-20 and at page bottom.
– Screw fixing: 35mm DIN rail mount adapter kit for
GE0160 DT4P on p. 11-19
– IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 1000V 11
• 30,000 cycles for GE0160 DT4, GE0160 DT4P
• 20,000 cycles for GE0125 DT4, GE0250 DT4,
GE0315 DT4
• 10,000 cycles for GE0630 DT4, GE0800 DT4,
GE1250 DT4.

Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3.
Summary table of combinations

Four-pole Conventional Rated Direct Door-coupling Shaft extension for Auxiliary Terminal covers
type free air operational operating handles door-coupling handles contacts for:
thermal current Ie handle (the last 3 digits of GEX code indicate 1NO/1NC
current Ith DC21B length in mm/in) (SPDT)
Black Black Red/Yellow Shaft Max panel Line Load

600V 800V 1000V section depth
Order [A] [A] [A] [A] Order Order Order Order [mm/in] Order Order Order
GE0160 DT4 160 160 70 30 GEX65D GAX66B GAX66 GAX7150A 7mm/ 214/8.42” GEX1011 GEX8101 GEX8101
GE0160 DT4P
160 160 70 30 GAX7200A 0.3” 236/9.29”

GAX7300A 336/13.22”
GE0125 DT4 125 125 125 100 GEX66ND GEX66NB GEX66N GEX7227N 10mm/ 267/10.51” GEX8111 GEX8111
GE0250 DT4 250 250 250 200 GEX7375N 0.4” 415/16.34”
GE0315 DT4 315 315 280 250 GEX7536N 576/22.68”
GE0630 DT4 630 630 600 500 GEX67ND GEX67NB GEX67N GEX7195N 14mm/ 251/9.88” GEX8121 GEX8121
GE0800 DT4 800 800 630 630 GEX7345N 0.8” 401/15.79”
GEX7535N 591/23.27”
GE1250 DT4 1250 1250 1000 850 GEX68ND GEX68NB GEX68N 267/10.51” GEX8131 GEX8131
417/16.42”
607/23.90”
Connection of four poles in series.
Standard supplied with IEC IP20 terminal protection warranted by wired equipment with only maximum conductor section of 95mm2. Suitable for mounting on 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail, adapter kit is available on page 11-19.

pages 11-19 to 20 pages 11-30 to 33 page 11-52 page 11-54 and 59 11-25
GA SERIES - 16A TO 125A SWITCH DISCONNECTORS

Direct operating version
GA016 A - GA040 A
GA063 SA GA063 A - GA125 A
GA040 D GA080 D - GA125 D
36 5 70 (2.75”) 5 70 (2.75”)
(1.42”) (0.20”) 43.9 (1.73”) 70 (2.75”) (0.20”) 43.9 (1.73”)
78 (3.07”)
74 (2.91”)
45 (1.77”)
(1.28”)
32.5
100 (3.94”)
94 (3.70”)
(1.77”)
(1.65”)
45
41.9
22 14.2 (0.56”)
(0.87”)
38.2 14.4 (0.57”)

(1.50”)
Door mount version

GA016 C - GA040 C GA063 C - GA125 C
36 19.9
(1.42”) 52.7 (2.07”) 70 (2.75”) 48.6 (1.91”) 20.8
(0.78”)
(0.82”)
55.5 (2.18”)
44.8 (1.76”)
78 (3.07”)
100 (3.94”)
65 (2.56”)
ADD-ON BLOCKS AND ACCESSORIES

11 For GA016 A-GA040 A, GA063 SA, GA040 D For GA063 A-GA125 A, GA080 D, GA125 D
Auxiliary contacts Fourth pole Auxiliary contacts Fourth pole
GAX10 11A GAX41 040A - GAX42 040A GAX10 11A GAX41 125A
GAX11 10EA GAX41 063SA - GAX42 063SA GAX12 10EA GAX42 063A...GAX42 125A
GAX42 040D GAX42 080D...GAX42 125D
Neutral GAX31 A - Neutral GAX32 A -
earth/ground GAX33 A terminals earth/ground GAX34 A terminals
12 46.2 (1.82”) 12 70 (2.75”) 12 48.6 (1.91”) 23 70 (2.75”)
9 (0.47”) 43.6 (1.72”) (0.47”) 5 43.6 (1.72”) 9 (0.47”) 42.6 (1.68”) (0.90”) 5 43.9 (1.73”)
(0.35”) (0.20”) (0.35”) (0.20”)
72.6 (2.86”)
78 (3.07”)
78 (3.07”)
(1.64”)
(1.28”)
41.6
72.6 (2.86”)
32.5
100 (3.94”)
78 (3.07”)
(1.64”)
41.6
GAX11 10EA GAX41 040A, GAX42 040A...

GAX41 063SA, GAX42 063SA,
GAX10 11A GAX42 040D, GAX31 A, GAX33 A
GAX41 125A, GAX42 063A... GAX42 125A,
GAX12 10EA GAX42 080D, GAX42 125D,
GAX32 A, GAX34 A
GAX10 11A
Mechanical interlock GAX50 00 and Mechanical interlock GAX50 01 and

mechanical coupling system GAX60 00 mechanical coupling system GAX60 01
72 (2.83”) 89 (3.50”) 140 (5.51”) 89 (3.50”)
27
(1.06”) 27
(1.06”)
78 (3.07”)
(1.77”)
100 (3.94”)
45
(1.77”)
45
GAX50 00 - GAX60 00
GAX50 01 - GAX60 01
For GA016 C - GA040 C For GA063 C - GA125 C

Auxiliary contacts GAX10 11C Fourth pole GAX41 040C - Auxiliary contacts GAX10 11C Fourth pole GAX41 125C -
GAX42 040C - GAX42 063C...GAX42 125C
Neutral GAX31 C - Neutral GAX32 C -
earth/ground GAX33 C terminals earth/ground GAX34 C terminals
8.5 46.2 (1.82”) 12 43 (1.69”) 8.5 46.2 (1.82”) 23
0.47”) (0.33”) (0.90”) 48.6 (1.91”)
0.33”)
72.6 (2.86”)
78 (3.07”)
78 (3.07”)
(1.64”)
72.6 (2.86”)
41.6
100 (3.94”)
100 (3.94”)
(1.64”)
41.6
GAX10 11C GAX41 040C - GAX42 040C

GAX31 C - GAX33 C
GAX10 11C
GAX41 125C, GAX42 063C, GAX42 125C,
GAX32 C, GAX34 C
11-26
Rotary handles
GAX61/61B GAX62/62B
36 (1.42”) 1...4 48 (1.89”)
1...4 (0.04”...0.16”)
(0.04”...0.16”) 28...32 36 (1.42”)
(1.10”...1.26”) 22 35
22 23 65 (2.56”) (0.87”) (1.38”)
65 (2.56”) (0.87”) (0.90”)
Ø16 (0.63”)
65 (2.56”)
36 (1.42”)
48 (1.89”)
(1.10”...1.26”)
61.8 (2.43”)
Ø16 (0.63”)
65 (2.56”)
36 (1.42”)
28...32
Ø3 (0.12”)
Ø3 (0.12”)
GAX63/63B GAX63 1B
34.3 35 34.3 35
(1.35”) (1.38”) 3.3 (0.13”) (1.35”) (1.38”) 3.3 (0.13”)
1...4 1...4
65 (2.56”) (0.04”...0.16”) 65 (2.56”) (0.04”...0.16”)
65 (2.56”)
65 (2.56”)
(1.46”)
(1.46”)
(1.29”)
(0.96”)
(1.29”)
(0.96”)
2.5 ) 2.5 )
Ø32.9
Ø32.9
24.3
24.3
37
37
Ø2 .88” Ø2 .88”
(0 (0
Padlockable at ON (≤3 padlocks)

per UNI 9490, UNI/EN 12485
GAX63 2/2B GAX64/64B
35.5 1...4
5 1...4 3.3 (0.13”) (1.40”) (0.04”...0.16”) 3.3 (0.13”)
(0.20”) (0.04”...0.16”) 35
65 (2.56”) 35 65 (2.56”) (1.38”)
(1.38”)
(0.79”)
Ø20
65 (2.56”)
65 (2.56”)
(0.96”)
(0.96”)
2.5 ) 2.5 )
24.3
24.3
Ø2 .88” Ø2 .88”
(0 (0
(0.87”)
Ø22
GAX66/66B
1...4
GAX67 B
1...4 48 (1.89”)
11
(0.04”...0.16”) (0.04”...0.16”) 36 (1.42”)
22 35
46 36 (1.42”) 65 (2.56”) (0.87”) (1.38”)
98 (3.86”)
60 (2.36”) (1.81”)
Ø16 (0.63”)
36 (1.42”)
65 (2.56”)
48 (1.89”)
Ø66 (2.60”)
Ø48 (1.89”)
36 (1.42”)
75 (2.95”)
2
Ø3 26”)
(1.
Ø3 (0.12”)
Ø4.2 (0.16”)
Shaft extensions for door coupling handles A [mm (in)] maximum

Extension Length
GAX7... 5 (0.20”) 5 (0.20”) [mm (in)]
Type of handle
65 (2.56”) A GAX61... GAX62... GAX63... GAX64... GAX67 B
65 (2.56”) A
GAX7055 55 99 97 102 116 97
(2.16”) (3.90”) (3.82”) (4.01”) (4.57”) (3.82”)
GAX7070 70 114 112 117 131 112
65 (2.56”)
(2.75”) (4.49”) (4.41”) ((4.61”) (5.16”) 4.41”)

GAX7090 90 134 132 137 151 132
65 (2.56”)
(3.54”) (5.27”) (5.20”) (5.39”) (5.94”) (5.20”)

GAX7150 150 194 192 197 211 192
(5.90”) (7.64”) (7.56”) (7.75”) (8.31”) (7.56”)
GAX7200 200 244 242 247 261 242
GA016 A...GA040 A GAX7... GAX6... (7.87”) (9.61”) (9.53”) (9.72”) (10.27”) (9.53”)
GA063 SA - GA040 D GAX7300 300 344 342 347 361 342
GAX7... GAX6...
(11.81”) (13.54”) (13.46”) (13.66”) (14.21”) (13.46”)
GA063 A...GA125 A GAX7400 400 444 442 447 461 442
GA080 D - GA125 D (15.75”) (17.48”) (17.40”) (17.60”) (18.15”) (17.40”)
GAX7500 500 544 542 547 561 542
(19.68”) (21.42”) (21.34”) (21.53”) (22.09”) (21.34”)
GAX7... used with GAX50 00, GAX50 01 and GAX60 00 A1

A1
A1 [mm (in)] maximum
GAX50 00 Used with Used with
GAX60 00 GAX50 01 Extension Length GAX60 00 GAX50 00/GAX50 01
[mm(in)] Type of handle
GAX61... GAX62... GAX63... GAX64... GAX67 B
100 (3.94”)
65 (2.56”)
78 (3.07”)
65 (2.56”)
GAX7055 55 (2.16”) 116 (4.57”) 114 (4.49”) 119 (4.68”) 133 (5.24”) 114 (4.49”)
GAX7070 70 (2.75”) 131 (5.16”) 129 (5.08”) 134 (5.27”) 148 (5.83”) 129 (5.08”)
GAX7090 90 (3.54”) 151 (5.94”) 149 (5.87”) 154 (6.06”) 168 (6.61”) 149 (5.87”)
23 20
GAX7150 150 (5.90”) 211 (8.31”) 209 (8.23”) 214 (8.42”) 228 (8.98”) 209 (8.23”)
(0.90”) (0.90”) GAX7200 200 (7.87”) 261 (10.27”) 259 (10.20”) 264 (10.39”) 278 (10.94”) 259 (10.20”)
GA016 A...GA040 A GAX7... GAX6... GAX7... GAX67 B GAX7300 300 (11.81”) 361 (14.21”) 359 (14.13”) 364 (14.33) 378 (14.88”) 359 (14.13”)
GA063 SA - GA040 D
GA063 A...GA125 A GAX7400 400 (15.75”) 461 (18.15”) 459 (18.07”) 464 (18.27”) 468 (18.42”) 459 (18.07”)
GA080 D - GA125 D GAX7500 500 (19.68”) 561(22.09”) 559 (22.01”) 564 (22.20”) 578 (22.75”) 559 (22.01”)
GAX7...A used with GAX60 B and GAX66/66B GAX7...A used with GAX60 01 and GAX66/66B handle
88 (3.46”)
46 (1.81”) 46 (1.81”)
73 (2.87”)
98 (3.86”) 20 ±1 20 ±1
5 (0.20”) (0.79”
60 (2.36”) B (0.79” B1
±0.04”) ±0.04”)
GAX6001
min. 10 min. 10
(0.39”) (0.39”) B B1
Extension Length
(2.60”)
GAX60B
Ø66
with GAX66/66B handle

75 (2.95”)
100 (3.94”)
75 (2.95”)
[mm(in)] [mm(in)] [mm(in)]

GAX7150A 176 118...229 119...205
(6.93”) (4.64”...9.01”) (4.68”...8.07”)
GAX7200A 226 118...279 119...255
19 (8.90”) (4.64”...10.99”) (4.68”...10.03”)
(0.75”)
GAX7300A 326 118...379 119...355
GAX7...A GAX66... GAX7...A GAX66... (12.83”) (4.64”...14.92”) (4.68”...13.98”)
GA063 A...GA125 A 40 GA063A...GA125A 1...4
GA080 D - GA125 D (1.57”) GA080D - GA125D 19 (0.04”...0.16”)
(0.75”)
49 (1.93”) 1...4
19 (0.04”...0.16”)
(0.75”)
11-27
Terminal covers
GAX81 - GAX83 GAX82 - GAX84
GAX81 GAX83 3.6 46 (1.81”) GAX81 GAX83 GAX82 GAX84 GAX82 GAX84
(0.39”)
(0.39”)
(0.14”) 12.7 (0.50”) 8.6 (0.34”)
10
36 36 23
10
12 12 70 (2.75”) 20.7 23 70 (2.75”)
(1.42”) (1.42”) 46 (1.81”) (0.90”) (0.81”) 46 (1.81”) 46 (1.81”)
(0.47”) (0.47”) (0.90”)
(1.04”)
(1.04”)
37 (1.46”)
26.4
26.4
(1.47”)
37.3
9.9 (0.39”)
10 (0.39”)
Fuse holder
GAX39 1 - GAX39 1UL
80.1 (3.15”)
52.5 (2.07”) 75.2 (2.96”)
ENCLOSED SWITCH DISCONNECTORS AND EMPTY ENCLOSURES

GAZ016... - GAZ040... / GAZ016...UL - GAZ040...UL GAZ063 S... - GAZ100 C... / GAZ065S...UL - GAZ063C...UL
GAZ1... - GAZ1...UL GAZ2... - GAZ2...UL 121.5 (4.78”)
120 (4.72”) 175 (6.89”) 98.5 (3.88”)
100 (3.94”) 97 (3.82”)
Ø4.5 (0.18”)
11
167.7 (6.60”)
159 (6.26”)
210 (8.27”)
54 (2.12”)
(0.92”)
23.3
Drilling for surface fixing

Ø 4.5 (0.18”)
52 (2.05”) 153.5 (6.04”)
PG13.5 / M20
(1.10”)
PG16 / M25
120 (4.72”)
28
knockouts on top
and bottom
PG16 / M25
PG29 / M32
knockouts on top
and bottom
184 (7.24”)
GAZ125... - GAZ080...UL - GAZ125...UL

GAZ3... - GAZ3...UL
193 (7.60”)
13 220 (8.66”) 170 (6.69”) Drilling for surface fixing
(0.51”)
Ø 6.2 (0.24”)
178 (7.01”)
238 (9.37”)
280 (11.02”)
11-28
ENCLOSED CHANGEOVER SWITCHES Drilling for surface fixing

GAZ025 ET6...GAZ063 SAET6
GAZ025 ET8...GAZ063 SAET8
175 (6.89”) 184.5 (7.26”)
Ø 4.5 (0.18”)
153.5 (6.04”)
210 (8.27”)
184 (7.24”)
52 (2.05”)
(1.10”)
28
PG16 / M25
PG29 / M32
knockouts on top
148.5 5.85”)
and bottom
11
GAZ080 ET6 - GAZ125 ET6

GAZ080 ET8 - GAZ125 ET8
208 (8.19”)
280 ((11.02”) 172 (6.77”)
220 (8.66”)
(0.51”)
13
Drilling for surface fixing

Ø 6.2 (0.24”)
238 (9.37”)
178 (7.01”)
11-29
GE SERIES - 160A TO 1600A SWITCH DISCONNECTORS

GE0160 GE0160 T4 - GE0160 DT4 Door coupling version with handle GAX66 - GAX66 B
max. 364 (14.33”)
131 (5.16”) 142 (5.59”) 77 (3.03”) 29 (1.14”)
66 (2.60”)
53 (2.09”) 78.2 (3.08”) 64 (2.52”) 78.2 (3.08”)
22.4 3
14 (0.55”) 18 (0.71”) 14 (0.55”) (0.88”) (0.12”) GAX7 150A 46 (1.81”)
Drilling
GAX7 200A
GAX7 300A 36
7 (0.3”) (1.42”)
(2.60”)
Ø66
84.4 (3.32”)
84.4 (3.32”)
110 (4.33”)
110 (4.33”)
128 (5.04”)
128 (5.04”)
75 (2.95”)
85 (3.35”)
N
(1.42”)
)
6”
1.2
36
2(
)
)
8”
8”
Ø3
0.1
0.1
(
(
.5
.5
Ø4
Ø4
Ø4.2 (0.16”)
GAX66...
M8 M8
1...4
34 34 34 34 34 20 (0.04...0.16”)
(1.34”) (1.34”) (1.34”) (1.34”) (1.34”) (0.79”)
Not indicated on GE0160 DT4 type.
Direct operating version with handle With terminal cover and auxiliary contact
GEX6 5D
184 (7.24”) 2
68 (2.68”)
(0.08”)
GEX81 01
(line)
3
87 (3.42”)
(0.12”)
22.4
102 (4.01”)
(0.88”)
GEX6 5D
11
85 (3.35”)
254 (10”)
50 (1.97”) N
GEX10 11
GEX81 01
(load)
GE0160 P GE0160 T4P - GE0160 DT4P Door coupling version with handle GAX66 - GAX66 B
max. 364 (14.33”)
129 (5.08”) 140 (5.51”)
77 (3.03”) 29 (1.14”)
53 (2.09”) 76 (2.99”) 64 (2.52”) 76 (2.99”) 66 (2.60”) Drilling
18 (0.71”) 9.5 (0.37”) 18 (0.71”) 9.5 (0.37”) GAX7 150A
GAX7 200A 46 (1.81”)
GAX7 300A 36
7 (0.3”) (1.42”)
(2.60”)
Ø66
122 (4.80”)
122 (4.80”)
74 (2.91”)
74 (2.91”)
75 (2.95”)
N
85 (3.35”)
(1.42”)
)
6”
1.2
36
2(
Ø3
(0. 4.5
(0. 4.5
”)
”)
18
18
Ø
Ø
Ø4.2 (0.16”)
M8 M8 GAX66...
34 34 34 34 34 1...4
(1.34”) (1.34”) (1.34”) (1.34”) (1.34”) 19 (0.04...0.16”)
(0.75”)
Not indicated on GE0160 DTP4 type.
Direct operating version with handle
GEX6 5D With auxiliary contact
68 (2.68”)
102 (4.01”)
N
GEX6 5D
50 (1.97”)
GEX10 11
11-30
GE0200 - GE0250 GE0200 T4 - GE0250 T4 Door coupling version Drilling

with handle GAX66 - GAX66 B
max. 364 (14.33”)
131 (5.16”) 11.8 142 (5.59”) 77 (3.03”) 29 (1.14”)
78.2 (3.08”) (0.46”) 78.2 (3.08”) 66 (2.60”)
53 (2.09”) 26 64 (2.52”) 26 3
(1.02”) (1.02”) 22.4 (0.12”)
(0.88”)
GAX7 150A
GAX7 200A 46 (1.81”)
GAX7 300A
7 (0.3”) 36
(1.42”)
(2.60”)
Ø66
84.4 (3.32”)
84.4 (3.32”)
154 (6.06”)
130 (5.12”)
154 (6.06”)
130 (5.12”)
75 (2.95”)
85 (3.35”)
N
(1.42”)
)
6”
1.2
36
) ) 2(
8” 8” Ø3
.1 .1
(0 (0
. 5 .5
Ø4 Ø4
Ø4.2 (0.16”)
GAX66...
M10 M10 1...4
19 (0.04”....0.16”)
42 (1.65”) 42 (1.65”) 42 (1.65”) 42 (1.65”) 42 (1.65”) (0.75”)
Direct operating version with handle GEX6 5D With terminal cover and auxiliary contact
184 (7.24”) 2
68 (2.68”) (0.08”)
GEX81 01
(line)
3
87 (3.42”)
22.4 (0.12”)
(0.88”)
102 (4.01”)
GEX6 5D
85 (3.35”)
254 (10”)
50 (1.97”) N 11
GEX10 11
GEX81 01
(load)
GE0251 - GE0315 - GE0400 GE0125 DT4 - GE0250 DT4 - GE0315 DT4 Door coupling version with handle
GE0251 T4 - GE0315 T4 - GE0400 T4 GEX66N - GEX66NB
217 (8.54”) 217 (8.54”)
100 (3.94”) 117 (4.61”) 100 (3.94”) 117 (4.61”) 90 (3.54”) max. 486 (19.13”)
100 (3.94”) 25 25 100 (3.94”) 4
(0.98”) 20.2
(0.98”) (0.79”) (0.16”)
GEX66N
GEX66NB
143 (5.63”)
143 (5.63”)
167 (6.57”)
167 (6.57”)
106 (4.17”)
106 (4.17”)
114 (4.49”)
0
N 0
”)
”)
22
22
(0.
(0.
.5
.5
Ø5
Ø5
1...4 27
GEX7277N (0.04”....0.16”) (1.06”)
GEX7375N
M1 M1 GEX7536N 45 (1.77”)
0 19 0
19 10 (0.4”)
(0.75”) 50 (1.97”) 50 (1.97”) (0.75”)
50 (1.97”) 50 (1.97”) 50 (1.97”)
Not indicated on GE... DT4 type.
20mm (0.79”) and M8 for GE0125 DT4 type.
Direct operating version with handle With terminal covers and auxiliary contact Drilling
GEX66ND
200 (7.87”)
GEX81 11
60 (2.36”)
(line)
Ø5.5
28 (1.10”) (0.22”)
60 (2.36”)
GEX10 11
226 (8.90”)
106 (4.17”)
N
40 (1.57”)
115 (4.53”)
34 (1.34”)
GEX81 11
(load)
11-31
GE0500 - GE0630 - GE0800 GE0500 T4 - GE0630 T4 - GE0800 T4

GE0630 DT4 - GE0800 DT4
275 (10.83”) 275 (10.83”)
130 (5.12”) 145 (5.71”) 130 (5.12”) 145 (5.71”)
140 (5.51”) C C 140 (5.51”) Type A B C
GE0500 190 220 25

(7.48”) (8.66”) (0.98”)
GE0630 205 235 30
0 0 (8.07”) (9.25”) (1.18”)
GE0800 205 235 30
160 (6.30”)
(8.07”) (9.25”) (1.18”)
160 (6.30”)
N
B
GE0500 T4 190 220 25
B
A
A
(7.48”) (8.66”) (0.98”)
GE0630 DT4 205 235 30
)
)
5”
5”
.2
.2
(8.07”) (9.25”) (1.18”)
(0
(0
.5
.5
Ø6
Ø6
GE0630 T4 205 235 30
(8.07”) (9.25”) (1.18”)
GE0800 DT4 205 235 30
(8.07”) (9.25”) (1.18”)
M1 M1
25 0 0
25 GE0800 T4 205 235 30
(0.98”) (0.98”)
65 (2.56”) 65 (2.56”)
(8.07”) (9.25”) (1.18”)
65 (2.56”) 65 (2.56”) 65 (2.56”)
For GE0500 - GE0630 - GE0800 - GE0500 T4 - GE0630 DT4 - GE0630 T4 - GE0800 DT4 - GE0800 T4
Direct operating version with handle GEX67ND Door coupling version with handle GEX67N - GEX67NB
121 (4.76”) max 470 (18.50”)
30 5
(1.18”) (0.20”)
Drilling
Ø5.5
60 (2.36”) 28 (1.10”) (0.22”)
11
40 (1.57”)
190 (7.48”)
42 (1.65”) 34 (1.34”)
143 (5.63”)
GEX7195N
GEX7345N 1...4
GEX7535N (0.04”....0.16”)
14 (0.6”)
With terminal covers and auxiliary contact

200 (7.87”)
GEX8121
(2 pcs/set)
65 (2.56”)
(line)
0
GEX10 11
290 (11.42”)
GEX8121
(2 pcs/set)
(load)
11-32
GE1000 - GE1250 GE1000 T4 - GE1250 T4

GE1250 DT4
325 (12.79”) 325 (12.79”)
150 (5.90”) 175 (6.89”) 150 (5.90”) 175 (6.89”)
40 40 140 (5.51”)
140 (5.51”) (1.57”)
(1.57”)
0 0
290 (11.42”)
290 (11.42”)
250 (9.84”)
190 (7.48”)
250 (9.84”)
190 (7.48”)
)
5”
)
5”
.2
.2
(0
(0
.5
.5
Ø6
Ø6
M1 M1
4 30 4
30
(1.18”) (1.18”)
75 (2.95”) 75 (2.95”) 75 (2.95”) 75 (2.95”) 75 (2.95”)
For GE1000 - GE1250 - GE1000 T4 - GE1250 DT4 - GE1250 T4

Direct operating version with handle GEX68ND
11
396 (15.59”)
Door coupling version with handle GEX68N - GEX68NB

137 (5.39”) max 470 (18.50”)
30 8
(1.18”) (0.31”)
42 (1.65”)
Drilling
Ø5.5
28 (1.10”) (0.22”)
190 (7.48”)
40 (1.57”)
34 (1.34”)
60 (2.36”)
GEX7 195
GEX7 345
GEX7 535 1...4
14 (0.6”) (0.04”....0.16”)
With terminal covers and auxiliary contact

300 (11.81”)
GEX8131
(2 pcs/kit)
75 (2,95”)
(line)
0
GEX10 11
340 (13.38”)
GEX8131
(2 pcs/kit)
(load)
11-33
GE1600 GE1600 T4
441 (17.36”) 441 (17.36”)
209 (8.23”) 232 (9.13”) 209 (8.23”) 232 (9.13”)
(0. 14.1
(0. 14.1
)
)
55”
55”
60 60 60
Ø
(2.36”) (2.36”) (2.36”)
(0. 16.2
)
64”
Ø
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
40
40
.43”)
.43”)
Ø11 (0
Ø11 (0
O O
255 (10.04”)
255 (10.04”)
330 (12.99”)
330 (12.99”)
441 (17.36”)
381 (15”)
N
36 36
(1.42”) (1.42”)
100 (3.94”) 100 (3.94”) 100 (3.94”) 100 (3.94”)
Direct operating version with handle Door coupling version with handle
11 GEX68ND
200 (7.87”)
GEX68N - GEX68NB
162 (6.38”) max 483 (19.01”)
50 10
(1.97”) (0.39”)
Drilling
Ø5.5
42 28 (1.10”) (0.22”)
(1.65”)
(2.36”)
60
240 (9.45”)
40 (1.57”)
396 (15.59”)
60
(2.36”)
34 (1.34”)
GEX7 239N
GEX7 485N
14 (0.6”)
With terminal covers and auxiliary contact 1...4

(0.04”...0.16”)
410 (16.14”)
GEX81 31
(2 pcs/kit)
(line)
104 (4.09”)
O GEX10 11
255 (10.04”)
472 (18.58”)
GEX81 31
(2 pcs/kit)
(load)
11-34
GE SERIES - 50A TO 800A SWITCH DISCONNECTORS WITH FUSE HOLDER

GE0050 F with auxiliary contact GE0050 FT4 with auxiliary contact
5.4 (0.21”) GEX10 11N 5.4 (0.21”) GEX10 11N
GEX10 11N
76 (2.99”)
130 (5.12”)
124 (4.88”)
104 (4.09”)
124 (4.88”)
104 (4.09”)
N
28 6
31 (1.22”) 31 (1.22”) 52 (2.05”) 31 (1.22”) 31 (1.22”) 31 (1.22”) 52 (2.05”) (1.10”) (0.24”)
121 (4.76”)
114 (4.49”) 145 (5.71”)
GE0125 F with auxiliary contact GE0125 FT4 with auxiliary contact
132 (5.20”) 169 (6.65”)

5.4 (0.21”) GEX10 11N GEX10 11N
5.4 (0.21”)
GEX10 11N
76 (2.99”)
104 (4.09”)
145 (5.71”)
104 (4.09”)
150 (5.90”)
145 (5.71”)
N
11
37 37 37 37 37
(1.46”) (1.46”) (1.46”) 58 (2.28”) 28 6
(1.46”) (1.46”) 58 (2.28”) (1.10”) (0.24”)
131 (5.16”)
For GE0050 F - GE0050 FT4 - GE125 F - GE125 FT4

Direct operating version with handle GEX61D
49 (1.93”)
184 (7.24”)
GEX6 1D
95 (3.74”)
34
(1.34”)
For GE0050 F - GE0050 FT4 - GE125 F - GE125 FT4

Door coupling version with handle GEX61N - GEX61NB
max 402 (15.83”)
Drilling GEX7162N
GEX7250N
49 (1.93”)
45 13 GEX7387N
26.5 22.5 Ø5.5 (1.77”) (0.51”) 7 (0.3”)
(1.04”) (0.88”) 28 (1.10”) (0.22”)
GEX61N
GEX61NB
56 (2.20”)
34 (1.34”)
max 281
27 (11.06”)
(1.06”) 34
84.5 (3.33”) 95 (3.74”) (1.34”)
GEX61N
GEX61NB
11-35
GE0160 N with auxiliary contact GE0160 NT4 with auxiliary contact

152 (5.98”) 169 (6.65”)
5.4 (0.21”) 5.4 (0.21”)
GEX10 11N GEX10 11N
GEX10 11N
76 (2.99”)
170 (6.69”)
170 (6.69”)
147 (5.79”)
104 (4.09”)
170 (6.69”)
147 (5.79”)
104 (4.09”)
N
34
37 37 37 37 37 (1.34”)
(1.46”) (1.46”) 58 (2.28”) (1.46”) (1.46”) (1.46”) 58 (2.28”) 131 (5.16”)
For GE0160 N - GE0160 NT4

Direct operating version with handle GEX61D
184 (7.24”)
GEX10 11N
49 (1.93”) GEX10 11N
76 (2.99”)
GEX6 1D
170 (6.69”)
11
95 (3.74”)
34
(1.34”)

Door coupling version with handle GEX6 1 - GEX6 1B max 402 (15.83”)
GEX7162N
GEX7250N
49 (1.93”) Drilling GEX7387N
7 (0.3”)
26.5 22.5 Ø5.5
28 (1.10”) (0.22”) 45
(1.04”) (0.88”)
(1.77”)
GEX61N
GEX61NB GEX61N
GEX61NB
56 (2.20”)
34 (1.34”)
max. 271
27 (10.67”)
(1.06”)
84.5 (3.33”) 95 (3.74”) 34

(1.34”)
Terminal covers GEX82 01 for GE0160 N Terminal covers GEX82 03 for GE0160 NT4
35 35
(1.38”) 55 (1.38”)
(1.38”)
GEX82 01 GEX82 03
GEX82 01
(line) (line) GEX82 03
(line)
299 (11.77”)
GEX82 01
GEX82 01 GEX82 03 GEX82 03
(load) (load) (load)
11-36
GE0161 N GE0161 NT4

with terminal covers and auxiliary contact with terminal covers and auxiliary contact
200 (7.87”) 239 (9.41”)
82.5 (3.25”) 117.5 (4.62”) 121.5 (4.78”) 117.5 (4.62”)
GEX10 11 GEX10 11
C 25
C 25
(0.98”) (0.98”)
2”)
(0.2 .5
2”)
(0.2 .5
Ø5
Ø5
(0.87”)
(0.87”)
N
131 (5.16”)
150 (5.90”)
168 (6.61”)
192 (7.56”)
22
131 (5.16”)
150 (5.90”)
168 (6.61”)
192 (7.56”)
22
M8 18 M8 18
(0.71”)
D D (0.71”)
88 (3.46”) 45 (1.77”) 45 88 (3.46”) 45 (1.77”)

42
(1.65”)
42 (1.65”) (1.77”)
11
Direct operating version with handle GEX62D Door coupling version with handle GEX66N - GEX66NB
and terminal covers
133 (4.13”) 39
(1.53”) 3 (0.12”)
C
157 (6.18”)
Drilling
45 (1.77”) Ø5.5
28 (1.10”) (0.22”)
40 (1.57”)
335 (13.19”)
142 (5.59”)
GEX66N
81 (3.19”)
GEX66NB
27 34 (1.34”)
(1.06”)
GEX7227N
GEX7375N
105 (4.13”) GEX7536N
10 (0.4”)
165 (6.50”) max. 446

(17.56”)
60 (2.36”)
TYPE C (line) D (load)

(N° of pcs/set) (N° of pcs/set)
GE0161 N GEX82 11 (3) GEX82 12 (3)
GE0161 NT4 GEX82 13 (4) GEX82 13 (4)
11-37
GE0250 N - GE0400 N - GE0315 B - GE0400 B GE0250 NT4 - GE0400 NT4 - GE0315 BT4 - GE0400 BT4
with terminal covers and auxiliary contact with terminal covers and auxiliary contacts
274 (10.79”) 329 (12.95”)
111 (4.37”) 163 (6.42”) 166 (6.53”) 163 (6.42”)
C GEX10 11
C GEX10 11
30 30
(1.18”) (1.18”)
7”)
7”)
(0.2 7
(0.2 7
Ø
Ø
(1.22”)
(1.22”)
31
31
242 (9.53”)
161 (6.34”)
200 (7.87”)
212 (8.34”)
242 (9.53”)
161 (6.34”)
200 (7.87”)
212 (8.34”)
10 22 10 22
M M
(0.87”) (0.87”)
D D
115 (4.53”) 65 (2.56”) 65 115 (4.53”) 65 (2.56”)

59 (2.32”) 59 (2.32”) (2.56”)
11
For GE0250 N - GE0400 N - GE0250 NT4 - GE0400 NT4
and terminal covers
180 (7.09”) 51 (2.01”)
4 (0.16”)
Drilling
194 (7.64”)
Ø5.5
60 28 (1.10”) (0.22”)
(2.36”)
42
(1.65”)
40 (1.57”)
410 (16.14”)
175 (6.89”)
81 (3.19”)
GEX67N
GEX67NB
34 (1.34”)
1...4
245 (9.64”) (0.04”... 0.16”)
GEX7195N
GEX7345N
GEX7535N
14 (0.6”)
203 (7.99”) max. 408

85 (3.35”) (16.06”)
TYPE C (line) D (load)

GE0250 N GEX82 21 (3) GEX82 22 (3)
GE0250 NT4 GEX82 23 (4) GEX82 23 (4)
GE0400 N GEX82 21 (3) GEX82 22 (3)
GE0400 NT4 GEX82 23 (4) GEX82 23 (4)
11-38
GE0630 N GE0630 NT4

381 (15”) 426 (16.77”)
166 (6.53”) 215 (8.46”) 211 (8.31”) 215 (8.46”)
GEX10 11 GEX10 11
”)
”)
35
35
C C
(0.
(0.
Ø9
Ø9
40 40
(1.57”) (1.57”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
227 (10.90”)
317 (12.48”)
212 (8.34”)
222 (8.74”)
227 (10.90”)
317 (12.48”)
212 (8.34”)
222 (8.74”)
40
40
N
2
2
30 30
M1
M1
D (1.18”) D (1.18”)
163 (6.42”) 85 (3.35”) 85 163 (6.42”) 85 (3.35”)

73 73 (3.35”)
(2.87”) (2.87”)
GE0800 N GE0800 NT4

381 (15”) 426 (16.77”)
166 (6.53”) 215 (8.46”) 211 (8.31”) 215 (8.46”)
11
10 (0.39”)
10 (0.39”)
GEX10 11 GEX10 11
30 (1.18”)
30 (1.18”)
30 30
(1.18”) (1.18”)
C 10 10 50
(0.39”) (1.97”)
C 10 10 50
(0.39”) (1.97”)
(0.39”) (0.39”)
(0.35”)
(0.35”)
Ø9
Ø9
(1.57”)
342 (13.46”)
342 (13.46”)
322 (12.68”)
322 (12.68”)
212 (8.34”)
222 (8.74”)
212 (8.34”)
222 (8.74”)
277 (10.90”)
317(12.48”)
40
N
40 (1.57”)
(0.39”)
(0.39”)
10
10
(1.18”)
(1.18”)
D D
M8
M8
30
30
30 30
(1.18”) (1.18”)
163 (6.42”) 85 (3.35”) 85 163 (6.42”) 85 (3.35”)

73 73 (3.35”)
(2.87”) (2.87”)
For GE0630 N - GE0630 NT4 - GE0800 N - GE0800 NT4

Direct operating version with handle GEX64D Door coupling handle GEX68N - GEX68NB
and terminal covers
248 (9.76”) 56
(2.20”)
6
(0.24”)
C
Drilling
214 (8.42”)
Ø5.5
60 28 (1.10”) (0.22”)
(2.36”)
42
(1.65”)
40 (1.57”)
(3.19”)
512 (20.16”)
232 (9.13”)
81
GEX68N
GEX68NB
360 (14.17”)
1...4 34 (1.34”)
(0.04”... 0.16”)
TYPE C (line) D (load) GEX7195N

GEX7345N
(N° of pcs/set) (N° of pcs/set) GEX7535N
GE0630 N - GE0630 B GEX82 31 (3) GEX82 32 (3) 14 (0.6”)
D
GE0630 NT4 - GE0630 BT4 GEX82 33 (4) GEX82 33 (4)
GE0800 N - GE0800 B GEX82 31 (3) GEX82 32 (3)
GE0800 NT4 - GE0800 BT4 GEX82 33 (4) GEX82 33 (4)
222 (8.74”) max 403
90 (3.54”) (15.89”)
11-39
GE0160 B - GE0200 B - GE0250 B GE0160 BT4 - GE0200 BT4 - GE0250 BT4

with terminal covers and auxiliary contacts with terminal covers and auxiliary contacts
A A
B 117.5 (4.62”) B 117.5 (4.62”)
GEX10 11 GEX10 11
C C
”)
”)
25 25
(0.22
(0.98”) (0.22 (0.98”)
Ø5.5
Ø5.5
(0.87”)
(0.87”)
131 (5.16”)
150 (5.90”)
168 (6.61”)
22
192 (7.56”)
22
131 (5.16”)
150 (5.90”)
168 (6.61”)
192 (7.56”)
,5 18 M8
M8 (0.71”)
18
D D (0.71”)
42
(1.65”)
88 (3.46”) 45 45 88 (3.46”) 45
11 42
(1.65”)
(1.77”)
42 (1.77”) (1.77”)
For GE0160 B - GE0200 B - GE0250 B - GE0160 BT4 - GE0200 BT4 - GE0350 BT4
and terminal covers
133 (5.24”) 39
(1.53”) 3 (0.12”)
C
157 (6.18”)
Drilling
Ø5.5
28 (1.10”) (0.22”)
40 (1.57”)
335 (13.19”)
142 (5.59”)
81 (3.19”)
27 34 (1.34”)
(1.06”)
45 (1.77”)
GEX7277N
105 (4.13”) GEX7375N
GEX7536N
10 (0.4”)
166 (6.63”) max. 445

(17.52”)
60 (2.36”)
TYPE A B C (line) D (load)

GE0160 B - GE0200 B 200 82.5 GEX82 11 (3) GEX82 12 (3)
(7.87”) (3.25”)
GE0160 BT4 - GE0200 BT4 239 121.5 GEX82 13 (4) GEX82 13 (4)
(9.41”) (4.78”)
GE0250 B 200 82.5 GEX82 11 (3) GEX82 12 (3)
(7.87”) (3.25”)
GE0250 BT4 239 121.5 GEX82 13 (4) GEX82 13 (4)
(9.41”) (4.78”)
11-40
GE0315 B - GE0400 B GE0315 BT4 - GE0400 BT4

A A
B 163 (6.42”) B 163 (6.42”)
C GEX10 11
C GEX10 11
)
30
)
30
.27”
.27”
(1.18”) (1.18”)
Ø7 (0
Ø7 (0
(1.22”)
(1.22”)
31
200 (7.87”)
161 (6.34”)
31
200 (7.87”)
161 (6.34”)
E
F
E
F
10 22 22
M
(0.87”) (0.87”)
D D
115 (4.53”) 65 (2.56”) 65 115 (4.53”) 65 (2.56”)

59 (2.32”) 59 (2.32”) (2.56”)
11
For GE0315 B - GE0400 B - GE0315 BT4 - GE0400 BT4
and terminal covers
180 (7.09”) 51
(2.01”) G
Drilling
194 (7.64”)
Ø5.5
60 (2.36”) 28 (1.10”) (0.22”)
42
(1.65”)
40 (1.57”)
410 (16.14”)
175 (6.89”)
GEX67N
81 (3.19”)
GEX67NB
1...4
(0.04”...0.16”) 34 (1.34”)
245 (9.64”)
GEX7195N
GEX7345N
GEX7535N
14 (0.6”)
202 (7.95”) max. 409

85 (3.35”) (16.1”)
TYPE A B C (line) D (load) E F G

GE0315 B 274 111 GEX82 21 (3) GEX82 22 (3) 212 242 4
(10.79”) (4.37”) (8.35”) (9.53”) (0.16”)
GE0315 BT4 329 166 GEX82 23 (4) GEX82 23 (4) 212 242 4
(12.95”) (6.53”) (8.35”) (9.53”) (0.16”)
GE0400 B 274 111 GEX82 21 (3) GEX82 22 (3) 216 246 5
(10.79”) (4.37”) (8.50”) (9.68”) (0.20”)
GE0400 BT4 329 166 GEX82 23 (4) GEX82 23 (4) 216 246 5
(12.95”) (6.53”) (8.50”) (9.68”) (0.20”)
11-41
GE0630 B GE0630 BT4

381 (15”) 426 (16.77”)
166 (6.53”) 215 (8.64”) 211 (8.31”) 215 (8.64”)
GEX10 11 GEX10 11
5 ”)
5 ”)
(0.3
(0.3
C C
Ø9
Ø9
40 40
(1.57”) (1.57”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
317 (12.48”)
277 (10.90”)
222 (8.74”)
212 (8.35”)
317 (12.48”)
277 (10.90”)
222 (8.74”)
212 (8.35”)
40
40
2
2
30 30
M1
M1
D (1.18”) D (1.18”)
163 (6.42”) 85 (3.35”) 85 163 (6.42”) 85 (3.35”)

73 73 (3.35”)
(2.87”) (2.87”)
GE0800 B GE0800 BT4

381 (15”) 426 (16.77”)
11 166 (6.53”)
GEX10 11
215 (8.64”) 211 (8.31”)
GEX10 11
215 (8.64”)
10 (0.39”)
10 (0.39”)
30 30
30 (1.18”)
30 (1.18”)
(1.18”) (1.18”)
C 10
(0.39”)
10 50
(0.39”) (1.97”)
C 10
(0.39”)
10 50
(0.39”) (1.97”)
5”)
5”)
(0.3 9
(0.3 9
Ø
Ø
342 (13.46”)
322 (12.68”)
342 (13.46”)
222 (8.74”)
322 (12.68”)
212 (8.35”)
222 (8.74”)
212 (8.35”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
40
40
30 (1.18”)
30 (1.18”)
10 (0.39”)
10 (0.39”)
D D
M8
M8
30 30
(1.18”) (1.18”)
163 (6.42”) 85 (3.35”) 85 163 (6.42”) 85 (3.35”)

73 73 (3.35”)
(2.87”) (2.87”)
For GE0630 B - GE0630 BT4 - GE0800 B - GE0800 BT4

Direct operating version with handle GEX64D Door coupling handle GEX68N - GEX68NB
and terminal covers
56
248 (9.76”) (2.20”)
6 (0.24”)
C
Drilling
214 (8.42”)
42
(1.65”) GEX68N 28 Ø5.5
GEX68NB (1.10”) (0.22”)
(1.57”)
40
512 (20.16”)
232 (9.13”)
(3.19”)
81
60 34
(2.36”) (1.34”)
360 (14.17”)
1...4
(0.04”... 0.16”)
TYPE C (line) D (load) GEX7195N

GEX7345N
(N° of pcs/set) (N° of pcs/set) GEX7535N
14 (0.6”)
GE0630 B - GE0800 B GEX82 31 (3) GEX82 32 (3) D
GE0630 BT4 - GE0800 BT4 GEX82 33 (4) GEX82 33 (4)
222 (8.74”) max. 403

90 (3.54”) (15.89”)
11-42
GE SERIES - 160A TO 1600A CHANGEOVER SWITCHES

GE0160 E GE0160 ET4
181 (7.12”) 192 (7.56”)

53 (2.09”) 91 (3.58”) 18 64 (2.52”) 91 (3.58”)
18 14 (0.55”) (0.71”) 14 (0.55”)
M8
M8
(0.71”)
84.4 (3.32”)
84.4 (3.32”)
128 (5.04”)
110 (4.33”)
128 (5.04”)
110 (4.33”)
N
Ø4 Ø4
.5 .5
(0 (0
.1 .1
34 34 8” 34 34 34 8”
) )
(1.34”) (1.34”) (1.34”) (1.34”) (1.34”)
Direct operating version with handle GEX61E and auxiliary contacts

83 (3.27”)
GEX10 11M
171 (6.73”)
11
Door coupling version with handle GEX61NC

145.6 (5.73”) max. 333
135 (5.31”) (13.11”)
43.6 (1.72”) 3 1...4
(0.12”) 60 (2.36”)
(0.04”...0.16”) Drilling
42 Ø5.5
(1.65”) 28 (1.10”) (0.22”)
94 (3.70”)
40 (1.57”)
34 (1.34”)
GEX7162N GEX61NC
44.8 (1.76”) 3 GEX7250N
(0.12”) GEX7387N
7 (0.3”)
Terminal covers
184 (7.24”) 3
(0.12”)
GEX81 01
(line 1 and line 2)
249 (9.80”)
GEX81 01
(load)
11-43
GE0200 E GE0200 ET4
181 (7.12”) 193 (7.60”)

53 (2.09”) 91 (3.58”) 11.8 65 (2.56”) 91 (3.58”)
26 14 (0.46”) 26 14
(1.02”) (0.55”) (1.02”) (0.55”)
84.4 (3.32”)
84.4 (3.32”)
154 (1.65”)
130 (5.12”)
154 (1.65”)
130 (5.12”)
N
Ø4 Ø4
.5 .5
(0 (0
.1 .1
8” 8”)
)
M M
42 42 10 42 42 42 10
(1.65”) (1.65”) (1.65”) (1.65”) (1.65”)
Direct operating version with handle GEX61E and auxiliary contacts

83 (3.27”)
GEX10 11M
171 (6.73”)
11
Door coupling version with handle GEX61NC

145.6 (5.73”)
135 (5.31”) max. 333
43.6 (1.72”) 3 (13.11”)
(0.12”)
1...4 60 (2.36”) Drilling

(0.04”...0.16”)
42 Ø5.5
(1.65”) 28 (1.10”) (0.22”)
40 (1.57”)
94 (3.70”)
34 (1.34”)
GEX7162N GEX61NC
GEX7250N
GEX7387N
44.8 (1.76”) 3 7 (0.3”)
(0.12”)
Terminal covers
184 (7.24”) 3
(0.12”)
GEX81 01
(line 1 and line 2)
249 (9.80”)
GEX81 01
(load)
11-44
GE0201 E - GE0250 E - GE0315 E - GE0400 E - GE0201 ET4 - GE0250 ET4 - GE0315 ET4 - GE0400 ET4 -
GE0500 E - GE0630 E - GE0800 E GE0500 ET4 - GE0630 ET4 - GE0800 ET4
A A
B C B C
GEX10 11 GEX10 11
Y/Z Y/Z
D D
ØE
ØE
II
N II
G
H
G
H
F
F
I I
ØT
ØT
X GEX10 11 X GEX10 11
K J J K J
For GE0201 E - GE0250 E - GE0315 E - GE0400 E - GE0201 ET4 - GE0250 ET4 - GE0315 ET4 - GE0400 ET4
GE0500 E - GE0630 E - GE0800 E - GE0500 ET4 - GE0630 ET4 - GE0800 ET4
11
Direct operating version with handle Door coupling version with handle
U N P
O O
Y Z W
V
42 Drilling
(1.65”)
GEX62NC for GE0201 E...GE0400 E...
GEX63NC for GE0500 E...GE0800 E... 28 Ø5.5
(1.10”) (0.22”)
(2.36”)
40 (1.57”)
60
M
L
34 (1.34”)
60 (2.36”)
1...4
(0.04”...0.16”)
Q R
Shaft Terminal covers

TYPE A B C D ØE F G H J K L M N O P Q R S ØT U V extension (N° of pcs/set)
Max W X (line 1) Y (line 2) Z (load)
GE0201 E
GE0250 E
GEX82 12 (3) GEX82 11 (3) GEX83 12 (3)
GE0315 E GEX7227N
GE0400 E 235 119.5 115.5 25 5.5 157 192 216 45 88 357 170 42 3 67 151 437 143 M10 133 142 GEX7375N
GE0201 ET4 (9.25”) (4.70”) (4.55”) (0.98”) (0.22”) (6.18”) (7.56”) (8.50”) (1.77”) (3.46”) (14.05”) (6.69”) (1.65”) (0.12) (2.64”) (5.94”) (17.2”) (5.63”) (5.24”) (5.59”) GEX7536N
GE0250 ET4 10 (0.6”)
GEX82 13 (4) GEX82 13 (4) GEX83 12 (4)
GE0315 ET4
GE0400 ET4
GE0500 E
GE0630 E GEX7195N GEX82 22 (3) GEX82 21 (3) GEX83 21 (3)
GE0800 E 321 162 159 40 7 232 282 312 65 121 482 247 46 5 87 180 417 176 M12 186 171 GEX7345N
GE0500 ET4 (12.63”) (6.38”) (6.26”) (1.57”) (0.27”) (9.13”) (11.10”) (12.28”) (2.56”) (4.73”) (18.98”) (9.72”) (1.81”) (0.20”) (3.42”) (7.09”) (16.42”) (6.93”) M12 (7.32”) (6.73”) GEX7535N
GE0630 ET4 10 (0.6”) GEX82 23 (4) GEX82 23 (4) GEX83 22 (4)
GE0800 ET4
11-45
GE1000 E - GE1250 E GE1000 ET4 - GE1250 ET4

A A
B C B C
GEX10 11 GEX10 11
Y/Z Y/Z
D D
ØE
ØE
II
N II
G
H
G
H
F
F
I I
ØT
ØT
X GEX10 11 X GEX10 11
K J J K J
11 For GE1000 E - GE1250 E - GE1000 ET4 - GE1250 ET4

Direct operating version with handle GEX64NE Direct operating version with handle GEX64NC
U N P
O O
Y Z W
V
42
(1.65”) Drilling
28 Ø5.5
(1.10”) (0.22”)
(2.36”)
60
40 (1.57”)
M
L
396 (15,59”)
34 (1.34”)
60 (2.36”)
1...4
(0.04”...0.16”)
Q R
Shaft Terminal covers

TYPE A B C D ØE F G H J K L M N O P Q R T ØT U V extension (N° of pcs/set)
Max W X (line 1) Y (line 2) Z (load)
GE1000 E GEX7195N
GEX82 32 (3) GEX82 31 (3) GEX83 31 (3)
GE1250 E 424 210 214 50 9 295 375 419 85 163 595 315 57 6 88 208 412 360 M14 248 199 GEX7345N
GE1000 ET4 (12.69”) (2.68”) (8.43”) (1.97”) (0.35”) (11.61”) (14.63”) (16.5”) (3.35”) (6.42”) (23.43”) (12.4”) (2.24”) (0.24”) (3.46”) (8.19”) (16.22”) (14.17”) (9.76”) (7.83”) GEX7535N
GEX82 33 (4) GEX82 33 (4) GEX83 32 (4)
GE1250 ET4 14 (0.6”)
11-46
GE1600 E GE1600 ET4

209 (8.23”) 250 (9.84”) 209 (8.23”) 250 (9.84”)
200 (7.87”) 60 200 (7.87”)
(0. 14.1
(0. 14.1
”)
(2.36”)
”)
60
55
60
55
Ø
Ø
(2.36”) (2.36”)
(0. 16.2
”)
64
(2.75”)
(2.75”)
40
40
330 (12.99”)
441 (17.36”)
330 (12.99”)
441 (17.36”)
330 (12.99”)
255 (10.04”)
381 (15”)
N
(0. Ø13
”)
(0. Ø13
”)
51
51
36 36
(1.42”) (1.42”)
100 (3.94”) 100 (3.94”) 100 (3.94”) 100 (3.94”) 100 (3.94”)
551 (21.69”) 551 (21.69”)
Direct operating version with handle GEX64NE Door coupling version with handle GEX64NC
200 (7.87”)
100 (3.94”) 10
(0.39”)
max. 484
(19.05”)
Drilling
42
28 Ø5.5
11
(1.65”) (0.22”)
(1.10”)
40 (1.57”)
350 (13.78”)
310 (12.20”)
34 (1.34”)
60
(2.36”)
396 (15.59”) 1...4
(0.04”...0.16”)
GEX7239N
120 (4.72”) 10 (0.39”) GEX7485N
342 (13.46”) 14 (0.6”)
Auxiliary contacts
GEX10 11M
Terminal covers GEX81 41

(line 1 - 2 pcs/set)
472 (18.58”)
GEX81 41
(load - 2 pcs/set)
11-47
GE SERIES - ADD-ON BLOCKS AND ACCESSORIES

Auxiliary contacts
GEX10 11 - GEX10 11M GEX10 11N
(0.94”)
21.7 (0.85”)
24
(0.63”)
39.7 (1.56”)
16
10.3
(0.40”) 48.5 (1.91”) 25.2
16 (0.99”)
(0.63”)
21.7 (0.85”)
35mm DIN rail adapter kit GEX89 00

For GE0160 P For GE0160 T4P - GE0160 DT4P
86.5 (3.40”)
93.9 (3.70”)
12.5
(0.49”)
Motorised control unit

GEX69 1 - GEX69 2 - GEX69 3 112 (4.41”)
H
98 (3.86”)
11 B
(0.39”)
16 (0.63”)
10
)
2”
.2
(0
.5
Ø5
57.5 (2.26”)
A
®
A
G
F
C
E
D
Type A B C D E F G H
GEX69 1 52.5 (2.07”) 133 (5.24”) 117 (4.61”) 150 (5.90”) 150 (5.90”) 237 (9.33”) 380 (14.96”) 245 (9.64”)
GEX69 2 88.5 (3.48”) 167 (6.57”) 153 (6.02”) 184 (7.24”) 172 (6.77”) 312 (12.28”) 455 (17.91”) 360 (14.17”)
GEX69 3 88.5 (3.48”) 167 (6.57”) 153 (6.02”) 184 (7.24”) 172 (6.77”) 312 (12.28”) 455 (17.91”) 360 (14.17”)
11-48
GEX69 1 for GE0201 E - GE0201 ET4 - GE0250 E - GE0250 ET4 - GE0315 E - GE0315 ET4 - GE0400 E - GE0400 ET4
GEX69 2 for GE0500 E - GE0500 ET4 - GE0630 E - GE0630 ET4 - GE0800 E - GE0800 ET4
GEX69 3 for GE1000 E - GE1000 ET4 - GE1250 E - GE1250 ET4
I
H
J L
Type H I J K L
GEX69 1 245 (9.64”) 310 (12.20”) 235 (9.25”) 383 (15.08”) 254 (10”)
GEX69 2 360 (14.17”) 339 (13.35”) 321 (12.64”) 468 (18.42”) 283 (11.14”)
GEX69 3 360 (14.17”) 367 (14.45”) 424 (16.69”) 522 (20.55”) 311 (12.24”)
GEX69 3 mounted on GE1600 E - GE1600 ET4
11
532 (20.94”)
459 (18.07”) 447 (17.60”)
552 (21.73”)
503 (19.80”)
360 (14.17”)
11-49
Wiring diagrams
GA SERIES - 16A TO 125A SWITCH DISCONNECTORS

Three-pole disconnectors Fourth pole add on Four-pole disconnectors
GA016... - GA125A/C GAX42... GAX41... GAZ160 T4... - GAZ125 T4
GAZ016... - GAZ125/B GAZ016 T4UL... - GAZ125 T4UL
GAZ016UL... - GAZ125UL
LINE Line Line LINE
L1 L2 L3 7 L4 7 L4 L4 (N) L1 L2 L3
8 T4 8 T4
T1 T2 T3 T4(N) T1 T2 T3
7 L4
LOAD 7 L4
LOAD
8 T4 8 T4
Load Load

Auxiliary contacts Neutral terminal Earth terminal Fuse holder
GAX10... GAX11... - GAX12... GAX31... - GAX32... GAX33... - GAX34... GAX39 1
57 L1 L2 L3
68 N PE
13 21
67
14 22 N PE
58 T1 T2 T3
11
ENCLOSED CHANGEOVER SWITCHES
Three-pole GAZ...ET6 Four-pole GAZ...ET8
LINE 1 LINE 2 LINE 1 LINE 2
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L4
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T4 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T4
LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD
11-50
Wiring diagrams
GE SERIES - 50A TO 1600A SWITCH DISCONNECTORS

Three-pole disconnectors Three-pole disconnectors with fuse holders Four-pole disconnectors Four-pole disconnectors with fuse holders
GE0160 - GE1600 GE0050 F - GE0125 F GE0160 T4 - GE1600 T4 GE0050 FT4 - GE0125 FT4
GE0160 P GE0160 N - GE0800 N GE0160 T4P GE0160 NT4 - GE0800 NT4
GE0160 B - GE0800 B GE0160 BT4 - GE0800 BT4
LINE LINE LINE LINE
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L4 (N) L1 L2 L3 L4 (N) L1 L2 L3
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T4(N) T1 T2 T3 T4(N) T1 T2 T3
LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD
160A TO 1600A CHANGEOVER SWITCHES

Three-pole switches Four-pole switches
GE0160 E - GE0200 E GE0201 E - GE1600 E GE0160 ET4 - GE0200 ET4 GE0201 ET4 - GE1600 ET4
LINE 1 LINE 2 LINE 1 LINE 1 LINE 2 LINE 1
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 LOAD L4 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L4 L4 (N) L1 L2 L3 LOAD
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T4 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T4
LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD
T1 T2 T3 T4(N) T1 T2 T3
LINE 2 LINE 2
11
Auxiliary contacts Motorised control unit
GEX10 11 - GEX10 11M - GEX10 11N GEX69 1 - GEX69 2 - GEX69 3
L
230VAC/DC
N
3 2
1 2
Closing pes. II
Open all poles

Closing pes. I
RS485
Signals
+24VDC
+5VDC
1
Error
B A
0
1
2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
IN OUT
11-51
Wiring diagrams
FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS

GA SERIES - with GA...D types
One-line control
2 poles in series 3 poles in series 4 poles in series
LINE LINE LINE
+ – + – + –
L1 L2 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L4
The positive pole of the load is connected to the fourth pole of the
switch disconnector on the right.
If it is to be connected on the left, wiring needs to change accordingly.
T1 T2 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T4
+ LOAD – – LOAD +
– LOAD +
6 poles in series 8 poles in series

LINE
+ – + LINE –
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L4
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T4 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T4
+ LOAD – + LOAD –
Two-line control
2+2 poles in series
LINE LINE
+ – – +
11 L1 L2 L3 L4
T1 T2 T3 T4
+ LOAD – – LOAD +
The positive pole of the load is connected to the fourth pole of the
switch disconnector on the right.
If it is to be connected on the left, wiring needs to change accordingly.
GE SERIES - with GE...DT4 and GE0160 DT4P types

One-line control
4 poles in series 4 (2+2) poles in series
LINE LINE
+ – + –
L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L3 L4
T1 T2 T3 T4 T1 T2 T3 T4
+ LOAD – + LOAD –
11-52
TYPE 3-pole GA016... GA025... GA032... GA040... GA063 SA GA063... GA080... GA100... GA125...
4th-pole GAX42 040... GAX42 040... GAX42 040... GAX42 040... GAX42 063SA GAX42 063... GAX42 080... GAX42 100... GAX42 125...
CONTACT CHARACTERISTICS
IEC conventional free air thernal A 16 25 32 40 63 63 80 100 125
current Ith (40°C)
IEC rated impulse withstand kV 8
voltage Uimp
IEC rated operational current Ie
AC21A 400V A 16 25 32 40 63 63 80 100 125
500V A 16 25 32 40 63 63 80 100 125
690V A 16 25 32 40 63 63 80 100 125
AC22A 400V A 16 25 32 40 45 63 80 100 125
500V A 16 25 32 40 45 63 80 100 125
690V A 16 25 32 40 45 63 80 100 125
AC23A 400V A 16 25 32 40 45 63 80 100 125
500V A 16 25 25 25 25 63 63 80 100
690V A 16 25 25 25 25 47 47 47 47
IEC rated operational power
AC23A 400V kW 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 45 55 55
690V kW 11 22 22 22 22 45 45 45 45
IEC reactive power for kvar 7.5 10 12.5 15 15 25 30 40 50
capacitor control 400V
IEC protection against short-circuit
Rated short-time A rms 800 2500
withstand current (1s) Icw 11
Rated conditional kA rms 50
short-circuit current
With fuse class gG A 16 25 32 40 63 63 80 100 125
IEC making capacity (AC23A 400V) A 400 450 1250
IEC breaking capacity (AC23A 400V) A 320 360 1000
Mechanical life cycles 100,000 100,000 30,000
Electrical life (IEC AC21A) cycles 100,000 15,000 30,000
UL/CSA general use at 600V A 16 25 32 40 50 60 100 100 100
UL/CSA short-circuit rating kA 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 10
at 600V
UL/CSA fuse class/max rating Type/A RK5/20 RK5/30 RK5/35 RK5/45 RK5/45 –/100 –/100 –/100 –/100
at 600V
UL/CSA HP ratings 120V HP 1 11/2 2 2 3 3 3 5 71/2
Single phase 240V HP 2 3 5 5 71/2 71/2 10 10 10
Three phase 200-208V HP 5 71/2 10 10 10 20 25 30 25
240V HP 5 71/2 10 15 15 20 30 30 30
480V HP 10 15 20 20 30 40 40 50 50
600V HP 10 20 20 25 30 40 40 60 40
A mm 5.6 (0.22”) 12.4 (0.49”)
B
B mm 6.5 (0.26”) 10.4 (0.41”)

Screw M4 M8
A
Tool Phillips 2 Metric Allen key 4

Tightening torque Nm 1.8...2 5...6
min...max lbin 16...18 45...54
Conductor section min...max mm2 0.75...16 4...50
(flexible/stranded) AWG 18...6 12...1
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Temperature Operating °C -25…+55
Storage °C -40…+70
Mounting position Normal Vertical
Admissible Any
Fixing By screw or on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
11-53
MOUNTING POSITION
The performances, given in this catalogue, have been established with GE series switch disconnectors mounted on a vertical place with line terminals facing upwards and load
terminals facing downwards.
All GE series switch disconnectors can be mounted as illustrated in the following figures without any derating except for position A.
It is not recommended to mount switch disconnectors with the neutral pole facing downwards.
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS
N
0 0
0
N N
N
Pos. A
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES
11 II
II
I
N II
N II
I I
N
N
Pos. A
MOTORISED CHANGEOVER SWITCHES
Pos. A
Pos. A
Special assembly, consult Customer Service for details; contact details on inside front cover.
11-54
GE series 160A to 1600A - Three and four-pole switch disconnectors
TYPE 3-pole GE0160P

GE0160 GE0200 GE0250 GE0251 GE0315 GE0400 GE0500 GE0630 GE0800 GE1000 GE1250 GE1600
4-pole GE0160 T4P
GE0160 T4 GE0200 T4 GE0250 T4 GE0251 T4 GE0315 T4 GE0400 T4 GE0500 T4 GE0630 T4 GE0800 T4 GE1000 T4 GE1250 T4 GE1600 T4
IEC conventional free A 160 200 250 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
air current Ith (40°C)
IEC rated impulse withstand kV 8 12
voltage Uimp
AC21A 400V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
500V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
690V A 160 180 180 200 250 250 500 630 800 1000 1000 1600
AC22A 400V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
500V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1000 1250
690V A 125 160 160 160 200 200 400 500 500 630 630 1000
AC23A 400V A 160 160 160 250 315 400 500 630 800 800 800 1000
500V A 125 125 125 200 250 315 400 500 500 800 800 900
690V A 80 80 80 160 160 160 250 315 315 500 500 630
IEC reactive power for capacitor kvar 72 72 72 112 142 180 225 284 284 360 360 450
control 400V sine = 0.65
AC23A 400V kW 90 90 90 138 174 220 220 349 443 443 443 554
690V kW 75 75 75 153 153 153 239 300 300 478 478 600
Protection against short-circuit
11
IEC rated short-time kA rms 7 12 16 25 35
withstand current (1s) Icw
IEC rated conditional kA rms 100 72 72
With fuse class gG A 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 2x800
IEC making capacity (AC23A 400V) A 1600 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 10000
IEC breaking capacity (AC23A 400V) A 1280 2000 2520 3200 4000 5000 6400 8000
Electrical life (AC23A 400V) cycles 1,000 500
Terminals Type Terminal for lugs or bars
B
A mm 18 26 25 25 30 40 60
B mm 3 4 5 8 10
A
Tightening torque Nm 13 18 24 45 55
lbft 10 13 18 33 40
Maximum conductor section mm2 95 120 185 240 2x185 2x240 2x300 ––
Maximum bar size mm 5-25 5-30 7-25 6-40 2x 5-40 2x 10-50 2x 7-80
(thickness-width)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Mounting Normal Vertical
position Admissible Any
Fixing Screw
With protection fuse to limit current peak and let-through energy.
Not suitable with GE0160 P and GE0160 T4P.
GE...P types have IP20 lug clamp/pillar terminals.
4Nm/3lbft only GE...P types.
The four-pole type (3P+N) has early-make late-break neutral pole.
11-55
GE series 50A to 800A - Three and four switch disconnectors with fuse holder
TYPE NFC 3-pole GE0050 F GE0125 F - - - - - - - -

4-pole GE0050 FT4 GE0125 FT4 - - - - - - - -
BS 3-pole - - GE0160 B - GE0200 B GE0250 B GE0315 B GE0400 B GE0630 B GE0800 B
4-pole - - GE0160 BT4 - GE0200 BT4 GE0250 BT4 GE0315 BT4 GE0400 BT4 GE0630 BT4 GE0800 BT4
NH 3-pole - - GE0160 N GE0161 N - GE0250 N - GE0400 N GE0630 N GE0800 N
4-pole - - GE0160 NT4 GE0161 NT4 - GE0250 NT4 - GE0400 NT4 GE0630 NT4 GE0800 NT4
IEC conventional free air A 50 125 160 160 200 250 315 400 630 800
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui V 800 800 800 1000
IEC rated impulse withstand kV 8 8 8 12
voltage Uimp
AC21A 400V A 50 125 160 160 200 250 315 400 630 800
500V A 50 125 160 160 200 250 315 400 630 800
690V A 50 125 160 160 200 250 315 400 630 630
AC22A 400V A 50 125 160 160 200 250 315 400 630 800
500V A 50 125 160 160 200 250 315 400 630 800
690V A 50 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 630 630
AC23A 400V A 50 125 160 160 200 250 315 400 630 630
500V A 50 125 125 160 200 250 315 400 630 630
690V A 50 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 400
IEC reactive power 400V kvar 18 52 60 60 75 115 150 200 250 325
for capacitor control
11 AC23A 400V kW 25 65 90 90 110 132 185 220 355 355
690V kW 42 80 90 110 160 250 315 400 630 800
Let-through energy I2t kA2s 0.076 0.19 0.19 0.478 0.478 1.6 1.6 1.6 4.6 4.6
IEC rated conditional kA rms 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
IEC making capacity A 500 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 6300
(AC23A 400V)
IEC breaking capacity A 400 1000 1280 1600 2000 2600 3200 5100
(AC23A 400V)
Mechanical life cycles 10,000 10,000 10,000 5,000
Electrical life (AC23A 400V) cycles 1,500 1,500 1,000 1,000 500
B
A mm – – 20 25 30 35 40 50
B mm – – 3 4 5 6
A
Screw M6 M6 M8 M10 M12 4x M8
Tightening torque Nm 3 4 13 24 45 13
lbft 2.2 3 10 18 33 10
Maximum conductor section mm2 35 95 95 120 240 2x185 2x240
Maximum bar size mm – 3-25 3-25 5-25 6-40 2x 7-50 2x 7-50
(thickness-width)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Mounting position
Normal Vertical
Admissible Any
Fixing Screw
50kA rms for GE0160 N and GE0160 NT4.
GE...F types have IP20 lug clamp/pillar terminals.
11-56
GE series 160A to 1600A - Three and four-pole changeover switches
TYPE 3-pole GE0160 E GE0200 E GE0201 E GE0250 E GE0315 E GE0400 E GE0500 E GE0630 E GE0800 E GE1000 E GE1250 E GE1600 E
4-pole GE0160 ET4 GE0200 ET4 GE0201 ET4 GE0250 ET4 GE0315 ET4 GE0400 ET4 GE0500 ET4 GE0630 ET4 GE0800 ET4 GE1000 ET4 GE1250 ET4 GE1600 ET4
IEC conventional free A 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
air current Ith (40°C)
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui V 1000 1000
IEC rated impulse withstand kV 8 12
voltage Uimp
AC21A 400V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
500V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
690V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
AC22A 400V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
500V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1250
690V A 125 160 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1000
AC23B 400V A 160 160 160 180 200 250 400 500 630 1000 1000 1000
500V A 125 125 125 150 160 200 250 315 400 800 800 900
690V A 80 80 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 630 630 630
IEC reactive power 400V kvar 72 72 83 104 131 166 208 262 333 415 415 450
for capacitor control
AC23A 400V kW 89 89 100 100 125 125 200 200 315 500 525 550
690V kW 76 76 69 86 108 138 173 216 272 544 575 600
IEC rated short-time kA rms 7 7 8 13 25 35
withstand current (1s) Icw
11
IEC rated conditional kA rms 100 100 72
With fuse class gG A 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 2x800
IEC making capacity (AC23A 400V) A 1600 1600 3150 4000 6300 8000 10000 10000 10000
IEC breaking capacity (AC23A 400V) A 1280 1280 2520 3200 5040 6400 8000 8000 8000
Electrical life (AC22A 400V) cycles 1,000 1,000 1,000 500
B
A mm 18 26 25 35 40 50 60
B mm 3 3 5 6 10
A
Tightening torque Nm 13 24 45 55
lbft 10 18 33 40
Maximum conductor section mm2 95 120 240 2x240 – – –
Maximum bar size mm 4-13 13-18 2x 5-30 2x 6-45 2x 10-60 2x 7-80
(thickness-width)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Admissible Any
Fixing Screw
With protection fuse to limit current peak and let-through energy.
Values in IEC DC22B duty.
11-57
GA series for photovoltaic applications
TYPE Three-pole GA040 D GA080 D GA125 D

4th-pole GAX42 040 D GAX42 080 D GAX42 125 D
IEC conventional free air A 40 80 125
IEC rated impulse withstand kV 8
voltage Uimp
DC21B
2 poles in series 300V A 16 20 25
110V A 35 70 120
220V A 32 40 95
500V A 12 15 20
440V A 32 40 64
500V A 32 40 56
600V A 20 30 40
700V A 15 18 20
750V A 15 18 20
800V A 15 18 20
1000V A –– 12 15
700V A 30 35 40
11 750V A 25 35 40
800V A 25 35 40
1000V A 10 20 25
750V A 35 50 60
800V A 35 50 60
1000V A 25 32 40
UL/CSA general use at 600V A 40 100 100
UL/CSA short-circuit rating kA 5 10 10
at 600V
UL/CSA fuse class / max rating Type/A RK5 / 45 – / 100 – / 100
at 600V
UL/CSA HP ratings 120V HP 2 3 71/2
Single phase 240V HP 5 10 10
Three phase 200-208V HP 10 25 25
240V HP 15 30 30
480V HP 20 40 50
600V HP 25 40 40
Mechanical life cycles 100,000 30,000
A mm 5.6 (0.22”) 12.4 (0.49”)
B
B mm 6.5 (0.26”) 10.4 (0.41”)

A
Screw M4 M8
Tool Phillips 2 Metric Allen key 4
Tightening torque Nm 1.8...2 5...6
min...max lbin 16...18 45...54
Conductor section min...max mm2 0.75...16 4...50
(flexible/rigid) AWG 18...6 12...1
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Admissible Any
Fixing By screw or on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
Using two pieces of 3-pole switch disconnectors mechanically coupled together by GAX60 00 / GAX60 01.
Using two pieces of 3-pole switch disconnectors, each with the fourth-pole add-on, mechanically coupled together by GAX60 00 / GAX60 01.
Voltage value is not considered in standards UL98/CSA C22.2 n° 4 so not indicated in UL product marking.
11-58
GE series for photovoltaic applications
TYPE 4-pole GE0160 DT4P

GE0160 DT4 GE0125 DT4 GE0250 DT4 GE0315 DT4 GE0630 DT4 GE0800 DT4 GE1250 DT4
Conventional free A 160 125 250 315 630 800 1250
air thermal current Ith (40°C)
Rated impulse withstand kV 8 12
voltage Uimp
Rated operational current Ie
DC21B 48V A 160 125 250 315 630 800 1250
4 poles in series 110V A 160 125 250 315 630 800 1250
220V A 160 125 250 315 630 800 1250
400V A 160 125 250 315 630 800 1250
440V A 150 125 250 315 630 750 1250
500V A 150 125 250 315 630 700 1250
600V A 150 125 250 315 630 700 1250
750V A 80 125 250 290 630 650 1050
800V A 70 125 250 280 600 630 1000
850V A 45 125 240 270 600 630 940
900V A 40 125 220 260 600 630 870
1000V A 30 100 200 250 600 630 850
B
A mm 18 20 25 30 40
B mm 3 4 4 5 8
A
Screw M8 M8 M10 M14 11
Tightening torque Nm 13 13 18 24 45
lbft 10 10 13 18 33
Maximum bar size mm 5-25 7-25 2x 5-40 2x 10-50
(thickness-width)
Maximum conductor section mm2 95 185 2x240 2x300
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Mounting Normal Vertical
position Admissible Any
Fissaggio Screw
4Nm/3lbft only for GE0160 DT4P.
GE0160 DT4P type has lug clamp/pillar terminals, IP20.
Not suitable with GE0160 DT4P.
11-59
Page 12-2 Page 12-2
AC FUSE HOLDERS AC FUSE HOLDERS CLASS CC FOR

• Version without indicator: NORTH AMERICAN MARKET
1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N • Version without indicator: 1P, 2P, 3P
• Version with indicator: 1P • Version with indicator: 1P
• For fuses 10x38, 14x51 and 22x58mm • For 10x38mm UL/CSA class CC fuses
IEC class gG or aM. • IEC rated current: 30A
• IEC rated current: 32A, 50A, 125A • IEC rated voltage: 600VAC.
• IEC rated voltage: 690VAC.
Page 12-3 Page 12-3
DC FUSE HOLDERS FOR DC FUSES FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC

PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS APPLICATIONS
• Version without indicator: 1P, 2P • 10x38mm, IEC class gPV
• Version with indicator: 1P, 2P • Rated current: 20A
• For 10x38mm IEC class gPV fuses • Rated voltage: 1000VDC.
• IEC rated current: 32A
• IEC rated voltage: 1000VDC
• IEC utilisation category: DC20B.
FUSE HOLDERS 12
Modular size for 10x38, 14x51

and 22x58mm fuses
Finger safe - IEC IP20 degree of
protection against accidental
contact with live parts and with
sealable cover for operators’ safety
Version with status indicator to
quickly determine if the fuse is still
operative or needs to be replaced
UL and CSA certified versions.
SEC. - PAGE
Fuse holders
AC fuse holders................................................................................................................................................................. 12 - 2
DC fuse holders for photovoltaic applications .................................................................................................................. 12 - 3
Fuses for photovoltaic applications .................................................................................... 12 - 3
Accessories ................................................................................................................. 12 - 3
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 12 - 4
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 12 - 4
I SOLATION
AND
Fuse holders
AC fuse holders
Fuse holders UL Order Pole Status DIN Qty Wt Operational characteristics

Recognized and CSA code arrange- indicator size per – IEC rated voltage Ue:
ment pkg • 690VAC (FB01 A 1M excluded)
certified n° n° [kg] • 400VAC (FB01 A 1M only)
– IEC rated current Ie:
For 10x38mm fuses. • FB01 A 1M: 32A
IEC 32A rated current at 690VAC. • FB01 F: 32A
FB01 F 1P 1P — 1 12 0.066 • FB02 A: 50A
FB01 F 1PL 1P YES 1 12 0.065 • FB03 A: 125A
– IEC utilisation category:
FB01 A 1M 1P+N — 1 12 0.062 • FB01 A 1M: AC22B 400V
FB01 F 1N 1P+N — 2 6 0.134 • FB01 F: AC22B 500V, AC21B 690V
FB01 F 2P 2P — 2 6 0.132 • FB02 A: AC22B 500V, AC21B 690V
FB01 F 1PL • FB03 A: AC21B 690V
FB01 F... FB01 F 3P 3P — 3 4 0.188 – Suitable for IEC fuse class: gG and aM
FB01 F 3N 3P+N — 4 3 0.260 – IEC degree of protection: IP20.
For 14x51mm fuses.
IEC 50A rated current at 690VAC. Certifications and compliance
FB02 A 1P 1P — 1 12 0.113
(cULus - File E343395)

FB02 A 1PL 1P YES 1 12 0.114
UL Recognized for
USA and Canada
CSA certified
(File 252040
class 6255)
FB02 A 1N 1P+N — 2 6 0.237
FB02 A 2P 2P — 2 6 0.224
FB02 A 3P 3P — 3 4 0.335
FB02 A 3N 3P+N — 4 3 0.460
For 22x58mm fuses. Type
FB02 A 1PL IEC 125A rated current at 690VAC∂. FB01 F... l l
FB02 A...
FB03 A 1P 1P — 1 12 0.167 FB02 A... –– l
FB03 A 1PL 1P YES 1 12 0.167 FB03 A... –– l
FB03 A 1N 1P+N — 2 6 0.354 l Certification obtained.
FB03 A 2P 2P — 2 6 0.334
“UL Recognized”: Products having this type of marking
FB03 A 3P 3P — 3 4 0.500
12 FB03 A 3N 3P+N — 4 3 0.720
are intended for use as components of complete
∂ Use with gG/aM class 125A fuses, not dissipating more than 12W power.
NOTE: IEC/EN 60269-2, IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3,
For FB01 F type: UL Recognized as “Fuseholders - Component”. UL 4248-1, UL 4248-4, CSA C22.2 n°4248.1,
Current rating: 30A. Voltage rating: 750V max. CSA certified as
“Fuseholder Assemblies”. Current rating: 30A. Voltage rating: 600V max.
CSA C22.2 n°4248.4.
For FB02 A type: UL Recognized as “Fuseholders - Component”.
Current rating: 50A. Voltage rating: 750V max.
FB03 A 1PL For FB03 A type: UL Recognized as “Fuseholders - Component”.
FB03 A... Current rating: 100A. Voltage rating: 750V max.
Fuse holders Order Pole Status DIN Qty Wt Operational characteristics

code arrange- indicator size per – IEC rated voltage Ue: 690VAC
ment pkg – IEC rated current Ie: 32A
– IEC utilisation category: AC22B 500V, AC21B 690V
n° n° [kg] – Suitable for IEC fuse class: gG and aM
For 10x38mm fuses. – IEC degree of protection IP20.
IEC 32A rated current at 690VAC.
FB01 B 1P 1P — 1 12 0.062 Reference standards
FB01 B 1PL 1P YES 1 12 0.064 IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60269-1, IEC/EN 60269-2.
FB01 B 1N 1P+N — 2 6 0.127
FB01 B... FB01 B 1PL FB01 B 2P 2P — 2 6 0.128
FB01 B 3P 3P — 3 4 0.185
FB01 B 3N 3P+N — 4 3 0.247
Fuse holders Order Pole Status DIN Qty Wt Operational characteristics

code arrange- indicator size per – IEC rated voltage Ue: 600VAC
UL Listed and CSA certified ment pkg – IEC rated current Ie: 30A
for class CC fuses for North n° n° [kg]
– IEC utilisation category: AC22B 500V, AC21B 690V
– Suitable for UL/CSA fuse class: CC
American market For 10x38mm fuses. – IEC degree of protection IP20.
IEC 30A rated current at 600VAC.
FB01 G 1P 1P — 1 12 0.070 Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA (UL - File
FB01 G 1PL 1P YES 1 12 0.072 E343395) and CSA certified for Canada only (File 252040
FB01 G 2P 2P — 2 6 0.140 class 6225).
FB01 G 3P 3P — 3 4 0.210 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60269-1,
IEC/EN 60269-2, IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3,
NOTE: UL Listed and CSA certified as “Fuseholders, Cartridge Fuse” for UL 4248-1, UL 4248-4, CSA C22.2 n°4248.1,
use with Class CC fuses. Interrupting rating 200,000 Amps rms
symmetrical. Voltage rating 600V. Current rating 30A.
CSA C22.2 n°4248.4.
FB01 G 1PL
FB01 G...

12-2 page 12-3 page 12-4 page 12-4 page 12-5
Fuse holders
DC fuse holders for photovoltaic applications.
Accessories
Fuse holders for photovolatic Order Pole Status DIN Qty Wt Operational characteristics
applications code arrange- indicator size per – IEC rated voltage Ue: 1000VDC
ment pkg – IEC rated current Ie: 32A
UL Listed / CSA certified n° n° [kg] – IEC utilisation category: DC20B 1000VDC
– Suitable for IEC fuse class: gPV
For 10x38mm fuses. – IEC degree of protection: IP20.
IEC 32A rated current at 1000VDC.
FB01 D 1P 1P — 1 12 0.064 Certifications and compliance
FB01 D 1PL 1P YES 1 12 0.065 Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA (UL - File
E366062) and CSA certified for Canada (file ref. not
FB01 D 2P 2P — 2 6 0.127 available at time of catalogue printing).
FB01 D 2PL 2P YES 2 6 0.130 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60269-1,
NOTE: UL Listed and CSA certified as “Photovoltaic fuseholders” for use IEC/EN 60269-2, IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3,
FB01 D... FB01 D 1PL with Photovoltaic Fuses. Interrupting rating 30,000 DC Amps. Voltage UL 4248-1, UL4248-18, CSA C22.2 n° 4248-1,
rating 1000V. Current rating 30A. CSA C22.2 n° 4248-18.
Fuses for photovoltaic Order Rated current Qty Wt – IEC rated voltage Ue: 1000VDC
applications code In per – IEC rated current Ie: 2-20A
pkg – IEC fuse class: gPV.
[A] n° [kg]
For 10x38mm fuses. Reference standards
IEC 30kA breaking capacity at 1000VDC. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60269-6.
FE01 D... FE01 D 00200 2 10 0.008
FE01 D 00400 4 10 0.008
FE01 D 00600 6 10 0.008
FE01 D 00800 8 10 0.008
FE01 D 01000 10 10 0.008
FE01 D 01200 12 10 0.008
FE01 D 01600 16 10 0.008
FE01 D 02000 20 10 0.008
Accessories Order Description Qty Wt General and operational characteristics

SUPPLY CONNECTION BUSBARS
12
code per
pkg – Central point of power supply: 100A max∂
– Side point of power supply: 63A max∂
[A] n° [kg] – Pitch: 18mm/0.7”
FBX 00 Coupling clip for 10x38, 100 0.003 – Busbar section: 10mm2
FBX 00 FBX 01 FBX 02 14x51 and 22x58mm – For paralleling connection
FBX 03 sizes – Length can be cut in shorter sections.
FBX 01 Coupling pin for 100 0.005 ∂ See technical characteristics under derating factor of FB01 type for
operating conditions.
10x38mm size type
FB01 A1M, FB01 B1P and Fuse holder combinations
FB01 B1PL only FB01...
FBX 02 Coupling pin for 14x51 100 0.008
and 22x58mm sizes FBX 00
P1X 90 33
FBX 03 Coupling pin for 10x38mm 1 0.005
size types FB01 F, FB01 G,
FB01 D only
For FB01 F, FB01 A1M, FB01 B and FB01 G types, AC duty.
P1X 90 31 1-phase connection 10 0.240 FBX 03
busbar for 57 modules in FBX 01
P1X 92 01 P1X 92 02
total, 996mm/39.2” long
P1X 90 33 3-phase connection 10 0.474 FB01... FB02...
busbar for 60 modules in
total, 1060mm/41.7” long
P1X 91 30 Kit of 5 isolating covers 10 0.030 FBX 00
for unused busbar
terminals
P1X 91 33 P1X 91 31 End cap for 1-phase 50 0.001
P1X9031 busbar
P1X 91 33 End cap for 3-phase 50 0.001
P1X9033 busbar FBX 02
P1X 92 01 1-pole terminal for busbar 25 0.011
supply, 25mm²max FB02...
conductor
FB03...
supply, 50mm²max
conductor
FBX 00
FBX 02
FB03...

page 12-4 page 12-4 page 12-5 12-3
Fuse holders
FB01 F… FB01 G… FB01 D… FB01 A1M FB01 B…

70 (2.75”)
52.5 (2.07”) 79.5 (3.13”) 70 (2.75”)
35 61 (2.40”) 52.5 (2.07”) 79.5 (3.13”)
(1.38”) 56 (2.20”) 35
58 (2.28”) 17.5 61 (2.40”)
17.5 10 (1.38”)
(0.69”) 40 (1.57”) (0.69”) 56 (2.20”)
(0.39”) 17.5 10
(0.69”) (0.39”)
78 (3.07”)
88.8 (3.50”)
84 (3.31”)
(1.77”)
78 (3.07”)
45
45
45
(0.79”)
16.5 (0.65”)
6
(0.24”) 20 3.2 (0.12”) 16.5 (0.65”)
2.5 3.2 (0.12”)
40 (1.57”) (0.10”) 2.5
74.8 (2.94”) (0.10”)
FB02 A…
106 (4.17”)
79.5 (3.13”)
53 (2.09”)
26.5 100.7 (3.96”)
(1.04”) 76 (2.99”)
110 (4.33”)
45
35.3 (1.39”)
49.5 (1.95”)
FB03 A…
143 (5.63”)
12 107.5 (4.23”)
71.5 (2.81)
102.5 (4.03”)
35.5
(1.40”) 76.5 (3.01”)
126.5 (4.98”)
45
47 (1.85”)
49.5 (1.95”)
FUSES
FE01 D 0...
(0.40”)
10.3
38 (1.50”)
10
(0.39”)
Wiring diagrams
1P 1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N
12-4
Fuse holders
TYPE FB01 A... FB01 B... FB02 A... FB03 A... FB01 C... FB01 D...
Range AC Class CC (AC) DC
IEC maximum rated current In 32A 50A 125A ∑ 30A 32A
IEC maximum rated voltage Un 690VAC; 690VAC 600VAC 1000VDC
400VAC ∂
IEC utilisation category AC22B 500V; AC21B 690V; AC21B 690V AC22B 500V; DC20B 1000VDC
AC22B 400V ∂ AC21B 690V
Maximum power dissipation 3W 5W 9.5W 3W 4W
Derating factor of current In 20°C 1
for different ambient temperatures 30°C 0.95
40°C 0.9
50°C 0.8
60°C 0.7
70°C 0.5
Derating factor of current In 1-4 1
for side-by-side fuse holders - 5-6 0.8
number of poles
7-9 0.7
≥10 0.6
Voltage for status indicator 120...690VAC 230...690VAC 120...600VAC 350...1000VDC
CONNECTIONS
Maximum tightening torque 2.5Nm; 2Nm ∂ / 22lbin 3Nm / 26lbin 4Nm / 35lbin 2.5Nm / 22lbin
Maximum conductor flexible/stranded 1x16mm2; 1-16mm2 ∂ / 8AWG 1x25mm2 / 6AWG 1x35mm2 / 2AWG 1x16mm2 / 8AWG 1x16mm2 / 6AWG
cross section rigid/solid 1x25mm ; 1-10mm ∂ / 8AWG
2 2 2
1x35mm / 8AWG 2
1x50mm / 1AWG 2
1x25mm / 10AWG 1x25mm2 / 4AWG
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -20...+70°C
Storage temperature -40...+80°C
Maximum altitude 3,000m
Operation position Any 12
Fixing On 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
∂ Values valid only for FB01 A 1M type. ∑ Use with gG/aM class 125A fuses, not dissipating more than 12W power.
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS FOR FE01 D... FUSES

TYPE Rated current Power consumption at 0.7 In Power consumption at In Prearcing I2t Total I2t at 1000VDC
[A] [W] [W] [A2s] [A2s]
FE01 D 00200 2 0.78 1.45 0.62 1
FE01 D 00400 4 0.64 1.57 6.9 11
FE01 D 00600 6 0.76 1.84 24 38
FE01 D 00800 8 0.8 1.92 62 99
FE01 D 01000 10 0.94 2.2 10 48
FE01 D 01200 12 0.98 2.4 18 94
FE01 D 01600 16 1.1 2.7 46 110
FE01 D 02000 20 1.2 2.9 118 282
TIME-CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS FOR FE01 D... FUSES

16A
20A
10A
12A
2A
4A
6A
8A
10000
1000
100
PREARCING TIME [s]
10
0.1
0.01
0.001
1 10 100 1000
PROSPECTIVE CURRENT [A rms]
12-5
Page 13-2 Page 13-6
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS UP TO 63A MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 80-125A

• 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P and 4P versions • 1P, 2P 3P and 4P versions
• IEC rated current In: 1-63A • IEC rated current In: 80-125A
• IEC short-circuit capacity Icn: 10kA • IEC short-circuit capacity Icn: 10kA
(6kA for 1P+N) • Trip characteristic curve: Type C, D.
• Trip characteristic curve: Type B, C, D.
Page 13-7

FOR MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
• Auxiliary and indicator contacts
• Shunt trip releases
• Connection elements.
Page 13-8 Page 13-9
RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED CIRCUIT RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED CIRCUIT

BREAKERS 25-63A BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT
• 2P and 4P versions PROTECTION UP TO 40A
• IEC rated current In: 25A, 40A and 63A • 1P+N version
• IEC rated residual operating current IΔn: • IEC rated current In: 6-40A
30mA and 300mA • IEC rated short-circuit capacity Icn: 10kA
• Residual current operating characteristic: 30mA
Type A and AC. • Trip characteristic curve: Type C
• Residual current operating characteristic:
Type A and AC.
MINIATURE AND RESIDUAL CIRCUIT BREAKERS 13
High breaking capacity

Various trip characteristic curves:
Type B, C and D
Wide 1 to 125A current range
Accessories available
UL approved versions.
SEC. - PAGE
Miniature circuit breakers 1-63A
1P – 10kA, 1 module, curve type B, C and D / Supplementary Protectors per UL1077 ................................................... 13 - 2
1P+N – 6kA, 1 module, curve type C ............................................................................................................................... 13 - 2
1P+N – 6kA, 2 module, curve type C ............................................................................................................................... 13 - 3
Miniature circuit breakers 80-125A
1P, 2P, 3P and 4P – 10kA, curve type C / Supplementary Protectors per UL1077 .......................................................... 13 - 6
3P and 4P – 10kA, curve type D / Supplementary Protectors per UL1077 ..................................................................... 13 - 6
Add-on blocks and accessories ................................................................................................................................... 13 - 7
Residual current operated circuit breakers .............................................................................................................. 13 - 8
Residual current operated circuit breakers with overcurrent protection ............................................................ 13 - 9
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 13 - 10
Wiring diagrams ............................................................................................................ 13 - 10
I SOLATION
AND
Miniature and residual circuit breakers
Miniature circuit breakers 1 to 63A
1P - 10kA Order code Curve IEC IEC N° of Qty Wt General characteristics

1 module In Icn DIN per These devices are used to protect against short circuits
modules pkg and overloads of wiring installations and loads in panel
Type [A] [kA] n° [kg] boards, office buildings, stores, and similar applications.
Their purpose is circuit protection, circuit isolation and
Single pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, B-type load operation controls. They have instantaneous trip
characteristic. characteristics defined as follows:
P1 MB 1P B01 B 1 10 1 12 0.115 – B-type: Instantaneous trip 3-5 times In
P1 MB 1P B02 B 2 10 1 12 0.115 For non-inductive or low inductive loads (heating
resistors, generators, very long wire lines)
P1 MB 1P B04 B 4 10 1 12 0.115 – C-type: Instantaneous trip 5-10 times In
P1 MB 1P B06 B 6 10 1 12 0.115 For inductive loads (mixed loads, resistive and
P1 MB 1P B10 B 10 10 1 12 0.115 inductive with low inrush current)
– D-type: Instantaneous trip 10-14 times In
P1 MB 1P B16 B 16 10 1 12 0.115 For highly inductive loads (loads with high inrush and
P1 MB 1P B20 B 20 10 1 12 0.115 current such as motors).
P1 MB 1P B25 B 25 10 1 12 0.115 Main features include:
– IEC rated current In: 1-63A
P1 MB 1P... P1 MB 1P B32 B 32 10 1 12 0.115 – Pole width: 17.5mm / 0.69”
P1 MB 1P B40 B 40 10 1 12 0.115 – Contact status with flag indicator
P1 MB 1P B50 B 50 10 1 12 0.115 – Trip characteristic: Curve type B, C and D
– Auxiliary contacts and trip releases mounted on MCB
P1 MB 1P B63 B 63 10 1 12 0.115 left side
Single pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-type – Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715).
characteristic.
P1 MB 1P C01 C 1 10 1 12 0.115 Operational characteristics
– Dissipation per pole: 3-13W
P1 MB 1P C02 C 2 10 1 12 0.115 – IEC rated insulation voltage: 440V
P1 MB 1P C04 C 4 10 1 12 0.115 – IEC rated impulse voltage: 4kV
P1 MB 1P C06 C 6 10 1 12 0.115 – IEC rated operational voltage Ue: 230/440VAC.
P1 MB 1P C10 C 10 10 1 12 0.115 Certifications and compliance
P1 MB 1P C16 C 16 10 1 12 0.115 Certifications obtained: TÜV – Rheinland; UL Recognized
P1 MB 1P C20 C 20 10 1 12 0.115 for USA and Canada (cURus – File E359585) as
“Supplementary Protectors”, designated as Overcurrent
P1 MB 1P C25 C 25 10 1 12 0.115 type, for general industrial use, suitable for factory wiring
P1 MB 1P C32 C 32 10 1 12 0.115 only with 125-135% tripping current of amp rating.
P1 MB 1P C40 C 40 10 1 12 0.115 Products having this type of marking are intended for use
13 P1 MB 1P C50 C 50 10 1 12 0.115
as components of complete workshop- assembled
equipment.
P1 MB 1P C63 C 63 10 1 12 0.115 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60898-1,
Single pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-type IEC/EN 60947-2, UL 1077, CSA C22.2 n°235.
characteristic.
P1 MB 1P D01 D 1 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D02 D 2 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D04 D 4 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D06 D 6 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D10 D 10 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D16 D 16 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D20 D 20 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D25 D 25 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D32 D 32 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D40 D 40 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D50 D 50 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D63 D 63 10 1 12 0.115
NOTE: Supplementary Protectors per UL1077 / CSA C22-2 n°235.
1P+N - 6kA Order code Curve IEC IEC N° of Qty Wt General characteristics
1 module In Icn DIN per – IEC rated current In: 2-40A
modules pkg – Pole width: 9mm / 0.35”
Type [A] [kA] n° [kg] – Contact status with flag indicator
– Trip characteristic: Curve type C
Single pole + neutral, thermal and magnetic trip type, – Auxiliary contacts and trip releases mounted on MCB
C-type characteristic. left side
P1 MB 1M C02 C 2 6 1 12 0.115 – Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715).
P1 MB 1M C04 C 4 6 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1M C06 C 6 6 1 12 0.115 – Dissipation per pole: 3-7.5W
P1 MB 1M C10 C 10 6 1 12 0.115 – IEC rated insulation voltage: 440V
P1 MB 1M C16 C 16 6 1 12 0.115 – IEC rated impulse voltage: 4kV
– IEC rated operational voltage Ue: 230VAC.
P1 MB 1M C20 C 20 6 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1M C25 C 25 6 1 12 0.115 Certifications and compliance
P1 MB 1M C32 C 32 6 1 12 0.115 Certifications obtained: TÜV – Rheinland.
P1 MB 1M C40 C 40 6 1 12 0.115 IEC/EN 60947-2.
P1 MB 1M...

13-2 page 13-7 page 13-10 page 13-11
1P+N - 6kA Order code Curve IEC IEC N° of Qty Wt General characteristics
modules pkg – Pole width: 17.5mm / 0.69”
– Trip characteristic: Curve type C
Single pole + neutral, thermal and magnetic trip type, – Auxiliary contacts and trip releases mounted on MCB
C-type characteristic. left side
P1 MB 1N C01 C 1 6 2 6 0.190 – Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715).
P1 MB 1N C02 C 2 6 2 6 0.190
P1 MB 1N C04 C 4 6 2 6 0.190 – Dissipation per pole: 3-13W
P1 MB 1N C06 C 6 6 2 6 0.190 – IEC rated insulation voltage: 440V
P1 MB 1N C10 C 10 6 2 6 0.190 – IEC rated impulse voltage: 4kV
– IEC rated operational voltage Ue: 230/440VAC.
P1 MB 1N C16 C 16 6 2 6 0.190
P1 MB 1N C20 C 20 6 2 6 0.190 Certifications and compliance
P1 MB 1N C25 C 25 6 2 6 0.190 Certifications obtained: TÜV – Rheinland.
P1 MB 1N C32 C 32 6 2 6 0.190 IEC/EN 60947-2.
P1 MB 1N...
P1 MB 1N C40 C 40 6 2 6 0.190
P1 MB 1N C50 C 50 6 2 6 0.190
P1 MB 1N C63 C 63 6 2 6 0.190

– Trip characteristic: Curve type B, C and D
Two pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, B-type – Auxiliary contacts and trip releases mounted on MCB
characteristic. left side
P1 MB 2P B01 B 1 10 2 6 0.230 – Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715).
P1 MB 2P B02 B 2 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P B04 B 4 10 2 6 0.230 – Dissipation per pole: 3-13W
P1 MB 2P B06 B 6 10 2 6 0.230 – IEC rated insulation voltage: 440V
P1 MB 2P B10 B 10 10 2 6 0.230 – IEC rated impulse voltage: 4kV
P1 MB 2P B16 B 16 10 2 6 0.230
– IEC rated operational voltage Ue: 230/440VAC. 13
P1 MB 2P B20 B 20 10 2 6 0.230 Certifications and compliance
P1 MB 2P B25 B 25 10 2 6 0.230 Certifications obtained: TÜV – Rheinland; UL Recognized
for USA and Canada (cURus – File E359585) as
P1 MB 2P B32 B 32 10 2 6 0.230 “Supplementary Protectors”, designated as Overcurrent
P1 MB 2P...
P1 MB 2P B40 B 40 10 2 6 0.230 type, for general industrial use, suitable for factory wiring
P1 MB 2P B50 B 50 10 2 6 0.230 only with 125-135% tripping current of amp rating.
Products having this type of marking are intended for use
P1 MB 2P B63 B 63 10 2 6 0.230 as components of complete workshop- assembled
Two pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-type equipment.
characteristic. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60898-1,
P1 MB 2P C01 C 1 10 2 6 0.230 IEC/EN 60947-2, UL 1077, CSA C22.2 n°235.
P1 MB 2P C02 C 2 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P C04 C 4 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P C06 C 6 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P C10 C 10 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P C16 C 16 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P C20 C 20 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P C25 C 25 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P C32 C 32 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P C40 C 40 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P C50 C 50 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P C63 C 63 10 2 6 0.230
Two pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-type
characteristic.
P1 MB 2P D01 D 1 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D02 D 2 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D04 D 4 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D06 D 6 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D10 D 10 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D16 D 16 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D20 D 20 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D25 D 25 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D32 D 32 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D40 D 40 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D50 D 50 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D63 D 63 10 2 6 0.230

page 13-7 page 13-10 page 13-11 13-3

Three pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, B-type – Auxiliary contacts and trip releases mounted on MCB
P1 MB 3P B02 B 2 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P B16 B 16 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P...
Three pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-type equipment.
P1 MB 3P C02 C 2 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P C04 C 4 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P C06 C 6 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P C10 C 10 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P C16 C 16 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P C20 C 20 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P C25 C 25 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P C32 C 32 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P C40 C 40 10 3 4 0.345
13 P1 MB 3P C50 C 50 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P C63 C 63 10 3 4 0.345
Three pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-type
characteristic.
P1 MB 3P D01 D 1 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D02 D 2 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D04 D 4 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D06 D 6 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D10 D 10 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D16 D 16 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D20 D 20 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D25 D 25 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D32 D 32 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D40 D 40 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D50 D 50 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D63 D 63 10 3 4 0.345

13-4 page 13-7 page 13-10 page 13-11

Four pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, B-type – Auxiliary contacts and trip releases mounted on MCB
P1 MB 4P B02 B 2 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P B16 B 16 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P...
Four pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-type equipment.
P1 MB 4P C02 C 2 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P C04 C 4 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P C06 C 6 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P C10 C 10 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P C16 C 16 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P C20 C 20 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P C25 C 25 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P C32 C 32 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P C40 C 40 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P C50 C 50 10 4 3 0.460 13
P1 MB 4P C63 C 63 10 4 3 0.460
Four pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-type
characteristic.
P1 MB 4P D01 D 1 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D02 D 2 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D04 D 4 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D06 D 6 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D10 D 10 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D16 D 16 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D20 D 20 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D25 D 25 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D32 D 32 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D40 D 40 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D50 D 50 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D63 D 63 10 4 3 0.460

page 13-7 page 13-10 page 13-11 13-5
1, 2, 3, 4P - 10kA Order code Curve IEC IEC N° of Qty Wt General characteristics

In Icn DIN per These types are always used to protect against short
modules pkg circuits and overloads of wiring installations and loads in
Type [A] [kA] n° [kg] industrial applications.
Their purpose is always circuit protection, circuit
One pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-type isolation and load operation controls. They have
characteristic. instantaneous trip characteristics defined as follows:
P2 MB 1P C080 C 80 10∂ 1.5 8 0.166 – C-type: Instantaneous trip 5-10 times In
P2 MB 1P C100 C 100 10∂ 1.5 8 0.166 For inductive loads (mixed loads, resistive and
inductive with low inrush current)
P2 MB 1P C125 C 125 10∂ 1.5 8 0.166 – D-type: Instantaneous trip 10-14 times In
Two pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-type For highly inductive loads (loads with high inrush and
characteristic. current such as motors).
P2 MB 2P C080 C 80 10 3 4 0.340 Main features include:
– IEC rated current In: 80-125A
P2 MB 2P C100 C 100 10 3 4 0.340 – Pole width: 17.5mm / 0.69”
P2 MB 1P... P2 MB 2P C125 C 125 10 3 4 0.340 – Contact status with flag indicator
Three pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-type – Trip characteristic: Curve type C and D
characteristic. – Auxiliary contacts and trip releases mounted on MCB
left side
P2 MB 3P C080 C 80 10 4.5 3 0.510 – Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715).
P2 MB 3P C100 C 100 10 4.5 3 0.510
P2 MB 3P C125 C 125 10 4.5 3 0.510 Operational characteristics
– Dissipation per pole: 15-20W
Four pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-type – IEC rated insulation voltage: 440V
characteristic. – IEC rated impulse voltage: 4kV
P2 MB 4P C080 C 80 10 6 2 0.680 – IEC rated operational voltage Ue: 230/440VAC∂.
P2 MB 4P C100 C 100 10 6 2 0.680
P2 MB 4P C125 C 125 10 6 2 0.680 Certifications obtained: TÜV – Rheinland; UL Recognized
P2 MB 2P... Three pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-type for USA and Canada (cURus – File E359585) as
characteristic. “Supplementary Protectors”, designated as Overcurrent
P2 MB 3P D080 D 80 10 4.5 10 0.510 type, for general industrial use, suitable for factory wiring
only with more than135% tripping current of amp rating.
P2 MB 3P D100 D 100 10 4.5 10 0.510 Products having this type of marking are intended for use
P2 MB 3P D125 D 125 10 4.5 10 0.510 as components of complete workshop- assembled
Four pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-type equipment.
13 P2 MB 4P D080 D 80 10 6 10 0.510
IEC/EN 60947-2, UL 1077, CSA C22.2 n°235.
P2 MB 4P D100 D 100 10 6 10 0.510

P2 MB 4P D125 D 125 10 6 10 0.510
∂ IEC current Icn at 230V.
P2 MB 3P...
P2 MB 4P...

13-6 page 13-7 page 13-10 page 13-11
Add-on blocks for P1MB Order code Characteristics Qty Qty Wt General characteristics
miniature circuit breakers per per – Auxiliary and indicator contact width: 9mm / 0.35”
MCB pkg (0.5 module)
1-63A n° n° [kg] – Undervoltage and shunt trip release width:
17.5mm / 0.69”
Auxiliary contact. – Maximum combination: 3 add-on blocks on MCB left
P1X 1011 One changeover 1 10 0.040 side only of which 1 undervoltage or shunt release
(SPDT), side directly on MCB side and then 2 contacts of which
mount 1 auxiliary and 1 indicator.
Indicator contact for thermal-magnetic trip.
P1X 1311 One changeover 1 10 0.040 – IEC rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kA
(SPDT), side – IEC rated operational current in AC: 6A 230V for
mount releases; 3A 400V for auxiliary contacts.
Undervoltage trip release.
P1X 14230 230V 50/60Hz, 1 8 0.070 Certifications and compliance
side mount Certifications obtained: UL Recognized for USA and
Canada (cURus – File E359585) as Accessories for
P1X 1011 P1X 16230 Shunt trip release. supplementary protectors.
P1X 16230 110-415V 1 8 0.070 Products having this type of marking are intended for use
50/60Hz, as components of complete workshop- assembled
side mount equipment.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
Add-on blocks for P2MB Order code Characteristics Qty Qty Wt General characteristics
per per – Auxiliary and indicator contact width: 9mm / 0.35”
miniature circuit breakers MCB pkg (0.5 module)
80-125A n° n° [kg]
– Undervoltage and shunt trip release width:
17.5mm / 0.69”
Auxiliary contact. – Maximum combination: 3 add-on blocks on MCB
P2X 1011 One changeover 1 10 0.040 sides of which 1 undervoltage or shunt release on
(SPDT), side MCB right side and 2 contacts on the left of which
mount 1 auxiliary and 1 indicator.
Indicator contact for thermal-magnetic trip.
P2X 1311 One changeover 1 10 0.040
– IEC rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kA
13
(SPDT), side – IEC rated operational current in AC: 6A 230V for
mount releases; 3A 400V for auxiliary contacts.
Undervoltage trip release.
Reference standards
P2X 14230 230V 50/60Hz, 1 8 0.070 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
side mount
P2X 1311 P2X 1311
Accessories for P1MB types Order code Description Qty Wt General and operational characteristics
per SINGLE-PHASE SUPPLY BUSBAR
pkg – Central point of power supply: 100A max
– Side point of power supply: 63A max
n° [kg] – Pitch: 17.5mm / 0.69”
P1X 90 33 P1X 90 31 1-phase connection 10 0.240 – Busbar section: 10mm²
busbar for 55 1P modules – Number of modules/poles: 55
(55 1P MCBs in total), – For paralleling connection
966mm/39.2” long – Standard-supplied length: 966mm/39.2” which can be
P1X 90 33 3-phase connection 10 0.474 cut in shorter sections.
busbar for 60 modules
P1X 91 33 (20 3P MCBs in total), THREE-PHASE SUPPLY BUSBAR
1060mm/41.7” long – Central point of power supply: 100A max
– Side point of power supply: 63A max
P1X 91 30 Kit of 5 isolating covers 10 0.030 – Pitch: 17.5mm / 0.69”
for unused busbar terminals – Busbar section: 10mm²
P1X 91 31 End cap for 1-phase 50 0.001 – Number of modules/poles: 60 (20pcs 3P MCBs)
P1X9031 busbar – For paralleling connection
P1X 92 01 P1X 92 02 – Standard-supplied length: 1060mm/41.7” which can
P1X 91 33 End cap for 3-phase 50 0.001
P1X9033 busbar be cut in shorter sections.
supply, 25mm² max conductor
supply, 50mm² max conductor

page 13-10 page 13-10 13-7
Residual current operated circuit breakers
2P and 4P Order code Trip IEC IEC N° of Qty Wt General characteristics

2 and 4 module In IΔn DIN per These RCCBs are intended for the protection of people
modules pkg against indirect contact (electric shock) and of
Type [A] [mA] n° n° [kg] installations against fire hazards due to a persistent
earth/ground fault current.
Two pole RCCB type AC. Specifically to prevent electric shock, RCCBs must be
P1 RC 2P 25 AC030 AC 25 30 2 6 0.185 rated with a rated residual current (IΔn) not exceeding
P1 RC 2P 25 AC300 AC 25 300 2 6 0.185 30mA so that these devices trip in the case of
earth/ground fault only.
P1 RC 2P 40 AC030 AC 40 30 2 6 0.185 They usually are connected in series with MCBs which
P1 RC 2P 40 AC300 AC 40 300 2 6 0.185 assure short circuit and overcurrent protection too.
P1 RC 2P 63 AC030 AC 63 30 2 6 0.185 P1RC types have a IΔn of either 30mA or 300mA and are
available with two different versions of residual current
P1 RC 2P 63 AC300 AC 63 300 2 6 0.185 tripping, as follows:
Two pole RCCB type A.
P1 RC 2P 25 A030 A 25 30 2 6 0.185 Type AC – Tripping for earth/ground fault is ensured “for
P1 RC 2P... residual sinusoidal alternating currents, suddenly applied
P1 RC 2P 25 A300 A 25 300 2 6 0.185 or slowly rising”. It is identified by the symbol:
P1 RC 2P 40 A030 A 40 30 2 6 0.185
P1 RC 2P 40 A300 A 40 300 2 6 0.185
P1 RC 2P 63 A030 A 63 30 2 6 0.185 Type A – Tripping for earth/ground fault is ensured “for
P1 RC 2P 63 A300 A 63 300 2 6 0.185 residual sinusoidal alternating currents and pulsating
Four pole RCCB type AC. direct currents, suddenly applied or slowly rising”. In
addition to the protection given by Type AC, this version
P1 RC 4P 25 AC030 AC 25 30 4 3 0.326 protects against residual current with pulsating
P1 RC 4P 25 AC300 AC 25 300 4 3 0.326 waveform. This can be caused by circuits connected with
P1 RC 4P 40 AC030 AC 40 30 4 3 0.326 electronic equipment. The symbol identifying Type A is
the following:
P1 RC 4P 40 AC300 AC 40 300 4 3 0.326
P1 RC 4P 63 AC030 AC 63 30 4 3 0.326
P1 RC 4P... P1 RC 4P 63 AC300 AC 63 300 4 3 0.326
Main features include:
Four pole RCCB type A. – IEC rated current In: 24A, 40A and 63A
P1 RC 4P 25 A030 A 25 30 4 3 0.326 – Versions: 2 and 4 pole
P1 RC 4P 25 A300 A 25 300 4 3 0.326 – Type of operation: AC or A
– Pole width: 17.5mm / 0.69”
P1 RC 4P 40 A030 A 40 30 4 3 0.326 – Contact status with flag indicator
13 P1 RC 4P 40 A300 A 40 300 4 3 0.326 – Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715).
P1 RC 4P 63 A030 A 63 30 4 3 0.326
P1 RC 4P 63 A300 A 63 300 4 3 0.326 – Dissipation per pole:
• 1.1W for P1RC2/4 P25… type AC or A
– IEC rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kV
– IEC rated operating voltage Uc: 230VAC for 2P;
230/400VAC for 4P
– IEC rated residual operating voltage IΔn:
30mA or 300mA
– IEC rated short-circuit capacity Icn: 10kA.

Certifications obtained: TÜV – SÜD.

13-8 page 13-10 page 13-11
Residual current operated circuit breakers with overcurrent protection
1P+N - 10kA Order code Trip IEC IEC IEC DIN Qty Wt General characteristics
2 module curve In Inc IΔn per These RCBOs perform both to protect in cases detect and
pkg trip the event of residual current and to protect circuits in
Type [A] [kA] [mA] n° n° [kg] case of short circuits and overcurrent. From a practical
point of view, RCBOs integrate both functions of MCB
Single pole + neutral RCBO type AC. and of RCCB.
P1 RB 1N C06 AC030 C 6 10 30 2 6 0.205 They have a C-type trip characteristic (instantaneous trip
P1 RB 1N C06 AC300 C 6 10 300 2 6 0.205 5-10 times In) and are used for inductive loads (mixed
loads, resistive and inductive with low inrush current).
P1 RB 1N C10 AC030 C 10 10 30 2 6 0.205 In addition, they have a rated residual current (IΔn) of
P1 RB 1N C10 AC300 C 10 10 300 2 6 0.205 either 30mA or 300mA and are available with two
P1 RB 1N C16 AC030 C 16 10 30 2 6 0.205 different versions of residual current tripping type AC or
A as described on page 13-8.
P1 RB 1N C16 AC300 C 16 10 300 2 6 0.205 Main features include:
P1 RB 1N C20 AC030 C 20 10 30 2 6 0.205 – IEC rated current In: 6-40A
P1 RB 1N C20 AC300 C 20 10 300 2 6 0.205 – Version: single pole + neutral
P1 RB 1N... – Contact status with flag indicator
P1 RB 1N C25 AC030 C 25 10 30 2 6 0.205 – Trip characteristic: Curve type C
P1 RB 1N C25 AC300 C 25 10 300 2 6 0.205 – Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715).
P1 RB 1N C32 AC030 C 32 10 30 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C32 AC300 C 32 10 300 2 6 0.205 – Dissipation per pole: 3-13W
P1 RB 1N C40 AC030 C 40 10 30 2 6 0.205 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 400V
P1 RB 1N C40 AC300 C 40 10 300 2 6 0.205 – IEC rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kV
– Normal operating voltage Uc: 230VAC
Single pole + neutral RCBO type A. – IEC rated residual operating voltage IΔn:
P1 RB 1N C06 A030 C 6 10 30 2 6 0.205 30mA or 300mA
P1 RB 1N C06 A300 C 6 10 300 2 6 0.205 – IEC rated short-circuit capacity Icn: 10kA.
P1 RB 1N C10 A030 C 10 10 30 2 6 0.205 Certifications and compliance
P1 RB 1N C10 A300 C 10 10 300 2 6 0.205 Certifications obtained: TÜV – Rheinland.
P1 RB 1N C16 A030 C 16 10 30 2 6 0.205 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61009-1.
P1 RB 1N C16 A300 C 16 10 300 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C20 A030 C 20 10 30 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C20 A300 C 20 10 300 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C25 A030 C 25 10 30 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C25 A300 C 25 10 300 2 6 0.205 13
P1 RB 1N C32 A030 C 32 10 30 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C32 A300 C 32 10 300 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C40 A030 C 40 10 30 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C40 A300 C 40 10 300 2 6 0.205

page 13-10 page 13-11 13-9
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS ACCESSORIES

P1 MB... Add-on contacts Undervoltage and shunt releases
P1X 1011 P1X 14230
P1X 1311 P1X 16230
18 max 36 max 54 max 72 max 9 max 18 max
(1.42” max) (0.35” max) 66 (2.60”)
(0.71” max) (2.12” max) (2.83” max) 60 (2.36”) (0.71” max) 66 (2.60”)
60 (2.36”)
45 (1.77”) 60 (2.36”)
86 (3.38”)
45 (1.77”)
(1.77” max)
81 (3.19”)
83 (3.27”)
(3.40” max)
45 (1.77”)
81 (3.19”)
86.5 max
45 max
(1.38”)
35
5.5 (0.22”) 5.5 (0.22”)
5.52 (0.22”)
74 max
(2.91” max)
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS ACCESSORIES

P2 MB... Add-on contacts Undervoltage and shunt releases
P2X 1011 P2X 14230
P2X 1311
74 (2.91”) 74 (2.91”)
67 max
(2.64” max) 43 (1.69”) 43 (1.69”)
27 max 54 max 81 max 108 max
(1.06” max) 49.5 max 32 32
(2.12” max) (3.19” max) (4.25” max) (1.26”)
(1.95” max) (1.26”)
5.5 (0.22”) 9 max 5.4 18 max 5.4
(0.35” max) (0.21”) (0.71” max) (0.21”)
85 max (3.35” max)
45 (1.77”)
80 (3.15”)
79 (3.11”)
45 (1.77”)
79 (3.11”)
44 (1.73”)
60 (2.36”)
74.5 (2.93”)
RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKERS RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
P1 RC... P1 RB...
13 36 max
(1.42” max)
72 max
(2.83” max)
5.5
(0.22”)
60 (2.36”)
36 max
(1.42” max)
5.4
(0.21”)
60 (2.36”)
82 max (3.23”)
80 (3.15”)
45 (1.77”)
45 (1.77”)
50 (1.97”) 44 (1.73”)
Wiring diagrams
P1X 1011 P1X 1311 P1X 14230 P1X 16230

P2X 1011 P2X 1311 P2X 16230
13-10
TYPE P1 MB P2 MB P1 RC P1 RB
Standards IEC/EN 60898, IEC/EN 60947-2 IEC/EN 60947-2 IEC/EN 61008-1 IEC/EN 61009-1
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 4 4 4 4
IEC rated operational voltage Ue in AC V 230 (1P, 1P+N) / 230 (1P) / 230 (2P) / 230
230/400 (2P, 3P, 4P) 230/400 (2P, 3P, 4P) 230/400(4P)
in DC V 60 (1P) / 80 (2P) 60 –– ––
Rated frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
Maximum rated current A 63 125 63 40
Available rated current for types A 1, 2, 4, 6, 10, 16, 80, 100, 125 25, 40, 63 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40
20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63
Versions 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 4P 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P 2P, 4P 1P+N
IEC instantaneous tripping Curve B: 3-5In Curve C: 5-10In — Curve C: 5-10In
(tripping characteristic) Curve C: 5-10In Curve D: 10-14In
Curve D: 10-14In
IEC residual current operating — — AC, A AC, A
characteristic
IEC rated residual operating current IΔn mA — — 30, 300 30, 300
Short circuit capacity kA 10 (6kA 1P+N) 10 — 10
Maximum tightening torque of terminals Nm 2 3 2 2
lbin 15 26 15 15
Tool Pz2 Pz2 Pz2 Pz2
Conductor section min-max mm2 1-16 2.5-50 1-35 1-25
AWG 14-6 14-1/0 16-2 16-3
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Temperature Operating °C -35...+70 -35...+75 -25...+55 -25...+40
Storage °C -40...+80 -40...+80 -35...+60 -35...+60
Maximum altitude m 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000
Pollution degree 2 3 2 2
Mounting 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) 13
TRIP CHARACTERISTICS (Thermal - magnetic overcurrent type)

Curve B Curve C Curve D
Tripping time [s] Tripping time [s] Tripping time [s]
10000 10000 10000
1000 1000 1000
100 100 100
10 10 10
1 1 1
0,1 0,1 0,1
0,01 0,01 0,01

1 1,45 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 100 1 1,45 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 100 1 1,45 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 100
1,13 2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 1,13 2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 1,13 2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70
Tripping current In [A] Tripping current In [A] Tripping current In [A]
13-11
Page 14-4 Page 14-4
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES TYPE 1 AND 2 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES TYPE 1 AND 2
• Monoblock versions: • Versions with plug-in cartridge:
1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P
• IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350μs): 25kA • IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350μs): 12.5kA
• IEC maximum discharge current Imax • IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20μs):
(8/20μs): 100kA 60kA
• SPD status indicator • IEC combined surge Uoc/Isc (1.2/50, 8/20μs):
• Version with output for remote status 10kV/5kA
indication. • Single module status indicator
• Version with output for remote status
indication.
Page 14-4
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES TYPE 2

• Versions with plug-in cartridge:
1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P
• IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20μs):
40kA
• IEC rated discharge current In (8/20μs): 20kA
• Single module status indicator
• Versions with and without output for remote
status indication.
Page 14-5 Page 14-5
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES TYPE 2 SPARE PLUG-IN CARTRIDGES

FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS • Versions suitable for SPDs:
• Versions with plug-in cartridge: +, -, PE - Type 1 and 2
• IEC maximum operational voltage: 1200VDC - Type 2
• IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20μs): - Type 2 for photovoltaic applications
40kA • Status indicator for single modules.
• IEC rated discharge current In (8/20μs): 20kA
• Single module status indicator
• Versions with or without output for remote status
indication
• Tested according to EN 50539-11
• UL Recognized versions.
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 14
Protection against overvoltage and

high surge conditions caused by
direct or indirect lightning strikes
Types with plug-in cartridge
provide fast servicing capability
Mechanical indicator for visual
failure status signalling of single
modules
Versions with or without output for
remote SPD status indication
Versions for photovoltaic
applications.
SEC. - PAGE
Surge protection devices (SPD)
Type 1 and 2 monoblock .................................................................................................................................................. 14 - 4
Type 1 and 2 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 14 - 4
Type 2 ............................................................................................................................................................................... 14 - 4
Type 2 for photovoltaic applications ................................................................................................................................ 14 - 5
Accessories ...................................................................................................................................................................... 14 - 5
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 14 - 6
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 14 - 7
I SOLATION
AND
Surge protection devices
SAFE INSTALLATIONS! Type 1, 2

2
Type
Type 1, 2, 3
LPZ
protection
zones OA OB 1 2 3
Installation IV III II I
category
Impulse 6kV 4kV 2,5kV 1,5kV

withstand voltage
of equipment
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES

The surge arresters commonly defined as SPDs (Surge Protection Devices), are devices designed to protect electric systems and equipment against transient and impulse
overvoltages such as those caused by lightning and by electric switching.
Their function is to divert the discharge or impulse current generated by an overvoltage to earth/ground, thereby protecting the equipment downstream.
SPDs are installed in parallel with the electric line to be protected. At the mains rated voltage, they are comparable to an open circuit and have a high impedance at their ends.
In the presence of an overvoltage, this impedance falls to very low values, closing the circuit to earth/ground.
Once the overvoltage has ended, their impedance rises again rapidly to the initial value (very high), returning to open loop conditions.
The SA1 (monoblock) type protects against direct and indirect lightning strikes as well as induced overvoltage conditions. It can be installed in areas with a high risk of direct
14 lightning strikes, inside main distribution boards or nearby sub-distribution boards. With the SA0 plug-in cartridge type, the same features are available with the advantage of
only having to replace the protection cartridge once the SPD blows.
PROTECTION ZONES INSTALLATION CATEGORY

Standards define the LPZs (Lightning Protection Zones), which indicate the For the correct choice of the SPD, the dielectric strength of the equipment to
different zones at risk. These are distinguished among: protect needs to be considered. This level is established by IEC 60664-1
standard.
LPZ 0A: Area outside a building not protected by LPS (e.g. lightning rods) For a 230/400V installation, it specifies:
where a direct lightning strike is possible. In this zone, there is total exposure to
induced electromagnetic fields. Installation category IV: 6kV for devices installed upstream of the distribution
board (for example, delivery point with the distribution system).
LPZ 0B: Area outside a building protected by LPS; therefore, a direct lighting
strike is not possible. In this zone, there is total exposure to induced Installation category III: 4kV for devices being part of the fixed system (for
electromagnetic fields. example, distribution boards, switching devices, isolators, ducting and their
accessories)
LPZ 1: Area inside a building so protected against direct lightning strikes.
In this zone, there is the possibility of very high overvoltages and of induced Installation category II: 2.5kV for non electronic devices (for example,
electromagnetic fields which may be attenuated depending on the degree of household appliances or electric tools)
screening. This zone must be protected by an SPD type 1 at the boundary with
zone LPZ 0A or 0B. Installation category I: 1.5kV for equipment containing “particularly sensitive”
electronic circuits (for example, electronic devices like PCs or TVs)
LPZ 2: Area inside a building (e.g. in a room), in which there is the possibility of
low overvoltages since they are limited by SPDs installed upstream. This zone RECOMMENDATIONS FOR INSTALLATION
must be protected by an SPD type 2 at the boundary with zone LPZ 1.
For correct installation, it is advisable to make connections between the line and
LPZ 3: Area inside a building (e.g. the system connected to a socket in a room) the SPD input (phase or neutral terminals) as well as between the SPD output
characterised by very sensitive equipment, in which there is the possibility of (earth/ground terminal) and the equipotential bonding connection with a
very low overvoltages as they are limited by SPDs installed upstream. maximum 0.5m/20” length of the leads. To reduce the distance, use of the
This zone must be protected by an SPD type 3 at the boundary with zone LPZ 2. so-called “V connection” is admissible.
Fuse Fuse
S S
P a+b <
_ 0.5m/20” P b<
_ 0.5m/20”
D D
b b
EBB EBB
For more details, IEC/EN 62305 standards can be consulted.
14-2
Type 2 DC
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES
FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS
Industrial In photovoltaic applications of a
buildings domestic environment or industrial
facility or other similar circumstances,
equipped with lightning rod systems
Housing having a safety distance (S), SPD type 2,
suitable for DC duty, can be used to
DC protect the installation. It is advisable to
install these devices as close as possible
to the photovoltaic panels, consequently
AC in the so-called string boards. If the
AC/DC inverter is far away from the
string boards (indicatively more than
10m/33’ apart), another SPD type 2 DC
needs to be installed next to the inverter
on the DC side. Installation of SPD type
DC 2 suitable of AC duty is also required
downstream of the inverter on the AC
side. For more details, consult specific
AC national standards and/or application
guides issued by local authorities for
solar systems concerning protection
against lightning. The SA2DG… and
SA2DF… types with plug-in cartridges
are suitable for connection in the DC side
of a solar installation and offer protection
against induced overvoltage conditions.
The SA2 type is suitable for installation
downstream of the inverter on the AC
side and in intermediate panels.
BACK-UP PROTECTION Impulse current Imp:

Protection against short circuits of SPDs is provided by overcurrent devices Crest value of the current that circulates in the SPD with a 10/350μs waveform
(gL/gG fuses), which should be chosen according to the SPD manufacturer’s (activation must be guaranteed for 20 times without damage). It is used to classify
recommendations. SPDs in test class I.
Iimp
F1 10/350μs
L1 100%
L2
L3
N 14
PE 50%
F2
10%
SA2 3N
10 350 t (μs)
Rated discharge current In:

Crest value of the current that circulates in the SPD with an (/20μs waveform
(activation must be guaranteed for 20 times without damage). It is used to classify
F1 > 125A gL/gG → F2 =125A gL/gG
SPDs in test class II.
F1 ≤ 125A gL/gG → F2 = not required.
ln
8/20μs
SPD COORDINATION 100%
In order to obtain an effective protection against overvoltage, it is advisable to
install several SPDs coordinated with one another in cascade connection.
For instance, it is advisable to have a Type 1 SPD in the main distribution board, 50%
a Type 2 SPD in the sub-distribution board and a Type 3 SPD near the terminal
equipment to be protected.
In this way, the energy originating from an overvoltage gradually decreases as it
10%
reaches the equipment to protect.
8 20 t (μs)
DEFINITIONS AND RATINGS
Maximum continuous voltage Uc:
Maximum value of AC or DC voltage that the SPD is capable of permanently Open circuit discharge voltage Uoc:
withstanding without activating or getting damaged; this is its rated voltage. Crest value of the no-load discharge voltage delivered by the test generation with a
1.2/50μs waveform simultaneously with a short-circuit current of an 8/20μs
Protection level voltage Up: waveform, applied at the SPD terminals. It is used to classify SPDs in test class III.
Maximum value of the voltage between the terminals of the SPD in presence of Uoc
an impulsive overvoltage. It is a fundamental parameter to correctly choose the 1.2/50μs
SPD; it must be taken into account with regards to the impulse voltage of the 100%
equipment to protect.
50%
10%
1.2 50 t (μs)
14-3
Surge protection devices Order code Pole Relay Number Qty Wt Main characteristics
Type 1 and 2 arrange- output of DIN per The surge protection device type SA1 combines the
ment modules pkg performance of SPD type 1 and 2 into a single product.
monoblock (SPDT) n° [kg] It protects against direct and indirect lightning strikes as
well as induced overvoltage conditions.
MONOBLOCK VERSION. It can be installed in areas with a high risk of direct
IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350μs) 25kA per pole. lightning strikes, inside main distribution boards or
SA1 1P A320R 1P YES 2 1 0.275 nearby sub-distribution boards.
SA1 1N A320R 1P+N YES 3 1 0.390
Operational characterstics
SA1 2P A320R 2P YES 2 1 0.395 – IEC maximum continuous operating voltage Uc:
SA1 3P A320R 3P YES 3 1 0.595 320VAC/420VDC
SA1 3N A320R 3P+N YES 5 1 0.760 – IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20μs):
100kA per pole
SA1 1P A320R SA1 4P A320R 4P YES 4 1 0.780 – IEC rated discharge current In (8/20μs):
25kA per pole
Characteristics – Version with relay output having changeover contact
Type IEC rated IEC voltage pro- Power for remote status indication
voltage Un tection level Up installation – IEC degree of protection: IP20.
[V] [kV] L-N system
Reference standards
SA1 1P A320R 230 <1.3 TN-C, TN-S, TT Comply with standards: IEC 61643-1, EN 61643-11.
SA1 1N A320R 230 <1.4 TT, TN-S
SA1 2P A320R 230 <1.4 TN-S
SA1 3P A320R 230/400 <1.4 TN-C
SA1 3N A320R 230/400 <1.4 TT, TN-S
SA1 3N A320R
SA1 4P A320R 230/400 <1.4 TN-S
For L-PE only.
arrange- output of DIN per SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES TYPE SA0
Type 1 and 2 with ment modules pkg It has a plug-in cartridge and combines the performance
plug-in cartridge (SPDT) n° [kg]
of SPD type 1 and 2 into a single product. It is ideal in all
those systems of reduced extent to protect the load side
VERSION WITH PLUG-IN CARTRIDGE. downstream of main circuit breaker to terminal
IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350μs) 12.5kA per pole. equipment.
SA0 1P A320R 1P YES 1 1 0.195 It protects against direct and indirect lightning strikes as
well as induced overvoltage conditions. It can be installed
SA0 1N A320R 1P+N YES 2 1 0.365 inside main distribution boards and nearby terminal
14 SA0 2P A320R 2P YES 2 1 0.370 equipment.
SA0 3P A320R 3P YES 3 1 0.540 The protection cartridges are plug-in and can be easily
replaced for quick servicing.
SA0 3N A320R 3P+N YES 4 1 0.670
SA0 4P A320R 4P YES 4 1 0.670 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE SA2
SA0 1P A320R SA0 2P A320R
It is suitable for installation in sub-distribution boards
and nearby terminal equipment.
It protects against indirect overvoltages.
Surge protection devices Order code Pole Relay Number Qty Wt The protection cartridges are plug-in and can be easily
Type 2 with arrange- output of DIN per replaced for quick servicing.
ment modules pkg
plug-in cartridge (SPDT) n° [kg] Opwerational characteristics
VERSION WITH PLUG-IN CARTRIDGE. – IEC maximum continuous operating voltage Uc:
IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20μs) 40kA per pole. 320VAC/420VDC
– IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20μs) per
SA2 1P A320 1P NO 1 1 0.140 pole: 60kA (SA0...); 40kA (SA2...)
SA2 1P A320R 1P YES 1 1 0.145 – IEC rated discharge current In (8/20μs) per pole:
SA2 1N A320 1P+N NO 2 1 0.240 25kA (SA0...); 20kA (SA2...)
– Versions with or without relay output having
SA2 1N A320R 1P+N YES 2 1 0.245 changeover contact for remote status indication
SA2 2P A320 2P NO 2 1 0.260 – IEC degree of protection: IP20.
SA2 2P A320R 2P YES 2 1 0.265
SA2 2P A320R SA2 3N A320R Reference standards
SA2 3P A320 3P NO 3 1 0.370 Comply with standards: IEC/EN 61643-11.
SA2 3P A320R 3P YES 3 1 0.375
SA2 3N A320 3P+N NO 4 1 0.465 Characteristics
Type IEC rated IEC voltage Power
SA2 3N A320R 3P+N YES 4 1 0.470 voltage protection installation
SA2 4P A320 4P NO 4 1 0.480 Un level Up
SA2 4P A320R 4P YES 4 1 0.485 Un Up
[V] [kV] L-N
SA0/SA2 1P A... 230 <1.5 TN-C, TN-S, TT
SA0/SA2 1N A... 230 <1.5 TT, TN-S
SA0/SA2 2P A... 230 <1.5 TN-S
SA0/SA2 3P A... 230/400 <1.5 TN-C
SA0/SA2 3N A... 230/400 <1.5 TT, TN-S
SA0/SA2 4P A... 230/400 <1.5 TN-S
For L-PE only.

Type 2 for photovoltaic arrange- output of DIN per The surge protection device type SA2 D with plug-in
ment modules pkg cartridge for photovoltaic applications is suitable for
applications with (SPDT) n° [kg] installation on the direct-current end of a photovoltaic
plug-in cartridge VERSION WITH PLUG-IN CARTRIDGE.
installation and protects against induced overvoltage
conditions.
EN short-circuit current rating Iscpv 100A. The protection cartridges are plug-in and can be easily
SA2 DG 600M2 +, -, PE NO 2 1 0.320 replaced for quick servicing.
SA2 DG 600M2R +, -, PE YES 2 1 0.325
SA2 DG K00M3 +, -, PE NO 3 1 0.420 – EN maximum continuous voltage Ucpv:
SA2 DG K00M3R +, -, PE YES 3 1 0.425 600VDC, 1000VDC, 1200VDC
EN short-circuit current rating Iscpv 1000A. – Versions with or without relay output having
changeover contact for remote status indication
SA2 DF 600M2 +, -, PE NO 2 1 0.285 – EN degree of protection: IP20.
SA2 DF 600M3 +, -, PE NO 3 1 0.305
SA2 DG... Certifications and compliance
SA2 DF K00M2 +, -, PE NO 2 1 0.410
Certifications obtained: UL Recognized for USA and Canada
SA2 DF K00M3 +, -, PE NO 3 1 0.500 (cURus – File E352471), as Surge-protective Devices –
SA2 DF K20M3 +, -, PE NO 3 1 0.550 Component, Type 4 for use in SPD Type 2 photovoltaic
applications only; for SA2DF600M2, SA2DFK00M2 and
SA2DFK20M3 types.
as components of complete workshop-assembled
equipment.
Compliant with standards: EN 50539-11 for all; also
UL 1449 and CSA C22.2 n°8 for cURus certified types
SA2 DF... mentioned above.
Characteristics
Type EN EN EN voltage
Protection circuit for each module type SA2 DF… rated continuous protection
Self-protected surge protection devices voltage voltage level
Un Ucpv Up
In case of short but intense overvoltage conditions, both the [VDC] [kV] L-N [kV]
spark gap element (GDT- Gas Discharge Tube) and the
varistor (MOV – Metal Oxide Varistor) simultaneously trigger. SA2 DG 600M2 600 600 <1.9
Current
Limiter GDT In case of weak but prolonged overvoltage conditions, the SA2 DG K00M3 1000 1000 <3.6
current limiter considerably reduces the current flowing SA2 DF 600M2 600 600 <2.0
through the varistor. This technological solution guarantees a
longer varistor life. SA2 DF 600M3 600 600 <3
T/o relay
Ultimately, another particular mechanism of the surge
arrester quickly extinguishes the electric arc during the
SA2 DF K00M2 1000 1000 <4.0 14
SA2 DF K00M3 1000 1000 <4.0
MOV thermal overload tripping phase.
SA2 DF K20M3 1200 1200 <4.0
Accessories and spare parts Order code Description Qty Wt Reference standards
Plug-in cartridges per Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61643-11 for all;
pkg EN 50539-11 for types SAX02 DF... and SAX02 DG...;
n° [kg] UL 1449, CSA C22.2 n° 8 for SAX02 DF 600M2,
SAX02 DF K00M2, SAX02 DF K20M3.
SAX00 P A320 For SA0... types 1 0.100
SAX02 P A320 For SA2... types 1 0.100
SAX00 P A320 SAX02 DF 600M2 For SA2 DF 600M2 type 1 0.100
SAX02 DF 600M3 For SA2 DF 600M3 type 1 0.100
SAX02 DF K00M2 For SA2 DF K00M2 type 1 0.100
SAX02 P A320
SAX02 DG 600M2 For SA2 DG 600... types 1 0.100
SAX02 DG K00M3 For SA2 DG K00... types 1 0.100

page 14-6 page 14-7 page 14-8 14-5
Dimensioni [mm (in)]
SA1...A320R
72 (2.83")
101 (3.98")
90 (3.54")
36 (1.42") 54 (2.12") 72 (2.83") 90 (3.54")
SA0...A320R
72 (2.83")
103 (4.05")
90 (3.54")
18 36 (1.42") 54 (2.12") 72 (2.83")

(0.71")
SA2...A320
72 (2.83")
94 (3.70")
90 (3.54")
18 36 (1.42") 54 (2.12") 72 (2.83")

(0.71")
SA2...A320R
72 (2.83")
14
103 (4.05")
90 (3.54")
18 36 (1.42") 54 (2.12") 72 (2.83")

(0.71")
SA2 DG... SA2 DG...R 72 (2.83")

72 (2.83")
90 (3.54")
103 (4.05")
94 (3.70")
90 (3.54")
36 (1.42") 54 (2.12") 36 (1.42") 54 (2.12")
SA2 DF...
72 (2.83")
93 (3.66")
90 (3.54")
36 (1.42") 54 (2.12")
14-6
Wiring diagrams
SA1 1P A320R SA1 1N A320R SA1 2P A320R SA1 3P A320R SA1 3N A320R SA1 4P A320R
L N L N L N L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N
14
14 14
14 14 14
11
11 11
11 11 11
12
12 12
12 12 12
RC
RC RC
RC RC RC
PE PE PE PEN PE PE
SA0 1P A320R SA0 1N A320R SA0 2P A320R SA0 3P A320R SA0 3N A320R SA0 4P A320R
L/N L N L N L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N
14 14
14 14 14 14
11 11
11 11 11 11
12 12
12 12 12 12
RC RC
RC RC RC RC
PE PE PE PEN PE PE
SA2 1P A320 SA2 1N A320 SA2 2P A320 SA2 3P A320 SA2 3N A320 SA2 4P A320
PE PE PE PEN PE PE
SA2 1P A320R SA2 1N A320R SA2 2P A320R SA2 3P A320R SA2 3N A320R SA2 4P A320R 14
14 14 14 14 14 14
11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12
RC RC RC RC RC
RC
PE PE PE PEN PE PE
SA2 DG 600M2 SA2 DG 600M2R SA2 DG K00M3 SA2 DG K00M3R

+ - + - + PE - + PE -
14 14
11 11
12 12
RC RC
PE PE
SA2 DF 600M2 SA2 DF 600M3

SA2 DF K00M2 SA2 DF K00M3
SA2 DF K20M3
PE
T.C. T.C. T.C. T.C. T.C.
PE
14-7
TYPE with relay output SA1 1P A320R SA1 1N A320R SA1 2P A320R SA1 3P A320R SA1 3N A320R SA1 4P A320R
ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES
SPD per IEC/EN 61643-11 Type 1 and 2 (Test class I and II)
IEC rated voltage Un VAC 230 230 230 230 / 400 230 / 400 230 / 400
IEC maximum continuous voltageUc VAC / VDC 320 / 420
IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350) (L-N/N-PE) kA 25 25 / 50 25 per pole 25 per pole 25 / 100 25 per pole
IEC max impulse current Imax (8/20) (L-N/N-PE) kA 100 100 / 100 100 per pole 100 per pole 100 / 100 100 per pole
IEC rated discharge current In (8/20) (L-N/N-PE) kA 25 25 / 50 25 per pole 25 per pole 25 / 100 25 per pole
IEC voltage protection level Up (L-N/N-PE) kV < 1.3 < 1.4 / < 1.5 < 1.4 < 1.4 < 1.4 / < 1.75 < 1.4
Temporary overvoltage (TOV) Ut (L-N for 5s) VAC 335
IEC residual voltage Ures (L-N/N-PE) at 3kA (8/20) kV 0.9 0.9 / 0.2 0.9 0.9 0.9 / 0.2 0.9
IEC follow current If (N-PE) Arms — >100 — — >100 —
Tripping time ta (L-N/N-PE) ns < 25 < 25 / 100 < 25 < 25 < 25 / 100 < 25
Thermal isolation protection Yes
IEC backup protection fuse A 250
(supply > 250A) (L-N/N-PE) (gL/gG class)
IEC maximum short-circuit current kA 25 / 50 Hz
Status indicator - operating / failure Colour –– / Red
CONNECTIONS
Terminal tightening torque Nm 3
Maximum conductor section mm2 25 (flexible) / 35 (rigid)
RELAY OUTPUT FOR REMOTE STATUS INDICATION
Type of contact Changeover (NO/NC - SPDT)
Contact capacity A 0.5A 250VAC; 3A 125VAC; 0.1A 250VDC; 0.2A 125VDC
Contact terminal tightening torque Nm 0.25
Maximum contact conductor section mm2 1.5
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature °C -40….+80
Housing material Termoplastic, RAL 7035, UL 94 V-0
14
TYPE with relay output SA0 1P A320R SA0 1N A320R SA0 2P A320R SA0 3P A320R SA0 3N A320R SA0 4P A320R
SPD per IEC/EN 61643-11 Type 1, 2 and 3 (Test class I, II and II)
IEC Rated voltage Un VAC 230 230 230 230 / 400 230 / 400 230 / 400
IEC maximum continuous voltage Uc VAC / VDC 320 / 420
IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350) (L-N/N-PE) kA 12.5 12.5 / 50 12.5 per pole 12.5 per pole 12.5 / 50 12.5 per pole
IEC max discharge current Imax (8/20) (L-N/N-PE) kA 60 60 / 50 60 per pole 60 per pole 60 / 50 60 per pole
IEC rated discharge current In (8/20) (L-N/N-PE) kA 25 25 / 30 25 per pole 25 per pole 25 / 30 25 per pole
IEC combined surge Uoc/Isc (1.2/50, 8/20) kV/kA 10 / 5
IEC voltage level protection Up (L-N/N-PE) kV < 1.5 < 1.5 / < 1.7 < 1.5 < 1.5 < 1.5 / < 1.7 < 1.5
IEC temporary overvoltage (TOV) Ut (L-N for 5s) VAC 335
IEC backup fuse (supply >160A) (L-N/N-PE) A 160 (gL/gG class)
IEC maximum short-circuit current kA 25 / 50 Hz
Status indicator - operating / failure Colour –– / Red
CONNECTIONS
Contact capacity A 0.5A at 250VAC; 3A at 125VAC; 0.1A at 250VDC; 0.2A at 125VDC
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Housing material Thermoplastic, RAL 7035, UL 94 V-0
14-8
TYPE without relay output SA2 1P A320 SA2 1N A320 SA2 2P A320 SA2 3P A320 SA2 3N A320 SA2 4P A320
with relay output SA2 1P A320R SA2 1N A320R SA2 2P A320R SA2 3P A320R SA2 3N A320R SA2 4P A320R
SPD per IEC/EN 61643-11 Type 2 (Test Class II)
IEC rated voltage Un VAC 230 230 230 230 / 400 230 / 400 230 / 400
IEC maximum continuous voltage Uc VAC / VDC 320 / 420
IEC max discharge current Imax (8/20) (L-N/N-PE) kA 40 40 / 40 40 per pole 40 per pole 40 / 40 40 per pole
IEC rated impulse current In (8/20) (L-N/N-PE) kA 20 20 / 20 20 per pole 20 per pole 20 / 20 20 per pole
IEC voltage protection level Up (L-N/N-PE) kV < 1.5 < 1.5 / < 2 < 1.5 < 1.5 < 1.5 / <2 < 1.5
IEC temporary overvoltage (TOV) Ut (L-N for 5s) VAC 335
IEC backup protection fuse A 125
(supply > 125A) (L-N/N-PE) (gL/gG class)
IEC maximum short-circruit current 50Hz kA 25
Status indicator - operating / failure Green / Red
CONNECTIONS
Contact capacity A 0.5A at 250VAC; 3A at 125VAC; 0.1A at 250VDC; 0.2A at 125VDC
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
14
TYPE without relay output SA2 DF 600M2 SA2 DF 600M3 SA2 DF K00M2 SA2 DF K00M3 SA2 DF K20M3 SA2 DG 600M2 SA2 DG K00M3
with relay output –– –– –– –– –– SA2 DG 600M2R SA2 DG K00M3R
SPD per EN 50539-11 Type 2 (Test class II)
UL Recognized for USA and Canada Yes –– Yes –– Yes –– ––
Rated voltage Un (EN) / MCOV (UL) VDC 600 600 1000 1000 1200 600 1000
Maximum continuous voltage Ucpv (EN/UL) VDC 600 600 1000 1000 1200 600 1000
Maximum discharge current Imax (8/20) EN 40 30 30 40 40 30 30
kA/pole
UL 50 –– 20 –– 50 –– ––
Rated discharge current In (8/20) EN 20 20 20 20 20 15 15
kA/pole
UL 20 –– 10 –– 20 –– ––
Voltage protection level Up (EN) / VPR (UL) kV <2.0 <3.0 <4.0 <4.0 <4.0 <1.9 <3.6
EN residual voltage Ures at 5kA (8/20) kV 1
Tripping time ta ns < 25
EN maximum short-circuit current Iscpv A 1000 100
EN backup protection fuse (Isc > 100A) A –– 100A gPV
Status indication – operating / failure Colour – / Red Green / Red
CONNECTIONS
EN degree of protection IP20
Terminal tightening torque Nm 3 (26lbin) 3
Maximum conductor section mm2 1.5-25 (flexible / stranded) / AWG 16-3 - 1.5-35 (rigid / solid) AWG 16-2
Type of contact, if any Changeover (1NO/1NC – SPDT)
Contact capacity A 0.5A 250VAC; 3A 125VAC; 0.1A 250VDC; 0.2A 125VDC
Contact terminal tightening torque Nm / lbin 0.25 / 2.2
Maximum contact conductor section mm² / AWG 1.5 / 16
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -40….+80°C
14-9
Page 15-2 Page 15-2
TWO POLES THREE AND FOUR POLES

• IEC rated current Ith: 20A (AC1) • IEC rated current Ith:
• IEC operational power: 1.3kW (AC3 230V) 25A, 40A and 63A (AC1)
• Ideal for domestic applications. • IEC operational power:
4kW, 11kW and 15kW (AC3 400V)
• Ideal for civil or industrial installations,
such as office buildings, stores, hospitals,
hotels, etc.
MODULAR CONTACTORS 15
Two, three and four-pole versions,

20A to 63A
Very silent during operation or
control stage
Operation flag indicator
Add-on auxiliary contacts.
SEC. - PAGE
Modular contactors
Contactors ........................................................................................................................................................................ 15 - 2
Add-on blocks and accessories .......................................................................................................................................... 15 - 3
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 15 - 4
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 15 - 4
I SOLATION
PROTECTION AND
C IRCUIT
Modular contactors
CN contactors Order code Rated Configura- Qty Wt General characteristics

auxiliary tion and n° per – DC powered magnetic core system assuring silent
supply voltage of contacts pkg operation and noise damping during the control phase
[V]∂ NO NC n° [kg] – Overvoltage protection circuit and voltage peak limitation
of the magnetic core
One-pole or two-pole. – Equipped with 2 or 4 closing contacts of equal capacity
CN20 11 024∑º 24VAC/DC 1 1∏ 10 0.135 permitting use in power or auxiliary circuits
CN20 11 220∑º 220-230VACª 1 1∏ 10 0.135 – Operation flag indicator
– Fast mounting.
CN20 20 024∑º 24VAC/DC 2 –– 10 0.135
CN20 20 220∑º 220-230VACª 2 –– 10 0.135 Operational characteristics
Type IEC conventional IEC cperating Protection
free-air thermal power fuse
Order code Rated Configura- Q.ty Wt current Ith in AC3 gG (IEC)
CN20... auxiliary tion and n° per
supply voltage of contacts pkg in AC1 230V 400V
[V]∂ NO NC n° [kg] [A] [kW] [kW] [A]
Three-pole or four-pole. CN20... 20 1.3 –– 20
CN25 10 024∫ 24VAC/DC 4π –– 5 0.260 CN25... 25 2.2 4 35
CN25 10 220∫ 220-230VACª 4π –– 5 0.260 CN40... 40 5.5 11 63
CN25 01 024∫ 24VAC/DC 3 1π 5 0.260 CN63... 63 8.5 15 80
CN25 01 220∫ 220-230VACª 3 1π 5 0.260 – Noise level:
Three-pole or four-pole. • Closed contactor ≤20dB
CN40 10 024∫ 24VAC/DC 4π –– 5 0.425 • Making/breaking operation ≤50dB
– IEC degree of protection: IP20
CN40 10 220∫ 220-230VACª 4π –– 5 0.425 – Mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60175).
CN25... CN40 01 024∫ 24VAC/DC 3 1π 5 0.425
CN40 01 220∫ 220-230VACª 3 1π 5 0.425 When contactors are mounted side by side and operate in
continuous service (≥1 hour), spacing is needed between
Three-pole or four-pole. equipment to consent appropriate cooling.
CN63 10 024 24VAC/DC 4π –– 5 0.425 9mm spacing is required; there is an accessory, called
CN63 10 220 220-230VACª 4π –– 5 0.425 half-module spacer, order code CNX 80, for this specific
type of mounting. The following table indicates details of
CN63 01 024 24VAC/DC 3 1π 5 0.425 the space needed between each.
CN63 01 220 220-230VACª 3 1π 5 0.425
Maximum number of contactors to be mounted
∂ Other voltages on request. Consult Customer Service; see contact details on side-by-side without spacing; the CNX 80 spacer is
inside front cover.
∑ 2NC version supplied on request. required when the number of pieces is more than the
∏ The last (NC) pole has the same characteristics as the power pole. It can indicated below:
therefore be used indifferently as an auxiliary or as a NC power contact.
π The fourth NO or NC pole has the same characteristics as the power poles;
CN40... therefore it can be used indifferently as auxiliary or as power contact. CN20 CN25 CN40 CN63
15 ∫ On request CN25 and CN40 contactors in the following versions can be
supplied: 2NO + 2NC or 4NC power poles. Consult Customer Service; see
Ambient
temperature
3 3 3 3
contact details on inside front cover.
ª Can also operate at 220VDC. ≤40°C
º No auxiliary contacts can be mounted. Ambient 2 2 3 2
temperature
>40°...55°C
Operational characteristics of contactor-incorporated

auxiliary contacts
Type IEC insulation IEC rating (AC15 category)
voltage Ui 230V 400V
[V] [A] [A]
CN63... CN20... 440 6 6
CN25... 440 6 4
CN40... 500 6 4
CN63... 500 6 4

IEC/EN 60947-4-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61095.
Utilisation
– Lighting systems
– Electric home heating
– Heat pumps
– Conditioning
– Ventilation
– Civil installations.
Lighting circuit switching

See page 15-6.

15-2 page 15-3 page 15-4 page 15-4 page 15-5 to 7
Modular contactors
Add-on blocks and Order code Characteristics Max Qty Wt Operational characteristics for auxiliary contacts
qty per per – IEC rated insulation voltage: 440VAC
accessories contactor pkg – IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith: 6A
n° n° [kg] – Minimum switching capacity: 5mA 12V
– Conductor section: 1...2.5mm2
Auxiliary contacts∂. – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm.
CNH 11∂ 1NO + 1NC 1 1 0.044
CNH 20∂ 2NO 1 1 0.044 Certifications and compliance
Set for terminal protection (also sealable). Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
CNP 0 For CN20 2 1∑ 0.001 IEC/EN 60947-4-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61095.
CNP 1 For CN25 2 1∑ 0.002
CNP 2 For CN40 2 1∑ 0.003
and CN63
Spacer.
CNH...
CNX 80 1/2 module wide 1 10 0.013
∂ Not suitable for CN20 modular contactors.
∑ Set of 2 pieces.
Mounting
Fasten the CNH... auxiliary contact by slightly pressing it
in place.
CNP2
Removal
Release the catch using a screwdriver.
15

page 15-4 page 15-4 15-3
Modular contactors
Dimensions (mm [in])
CONTACTORS
CN20... CN25... CN40...
CN63...
60 60 60
(2.26”) (2.26”) (2.26”)
17.5
(0.69”) 43 35 43 53.5 43
(0.69”) (1.38”) (0.69”) (2.11”) (0.69”)
(1 77”)
”)
(3.31”)
(3.31”)
(3.31”)
(1.77”)
45
45
84
84
84
45
(1
5.5 5.5 5.5
(0.22”) (0.22”) (0.22”)
ADD-ON BLOCKS
Contact blocks Spacer
CNH... CNX80
60
(2.26”)
10
(0.39”) 43
(0.69”) 9
(0.35”) 67
(2.64”)
(1.77”)
(1.77”)
(3.31”)
45
45
84
5.5
(0.22”)
2
(0.08”)
Wiring diagrams
TWO-POLE MODULAR CONTACTORS THREE AND FOUR-POLE MODULAR CONTACTORS

CN20 11 CN20 20 CN25 01 CN25 10
CN40 01 CN40 10
CN63 01 CN63 10
A1 1 21 A1 1 3 A1 1 3 5 21 A1 1 3 5 13 (7)
15
A2 2 22 A2 2 4 A2 2 4 6 22 A2 2 4 6 14 (8)
∂ The NC contact has the same characteristics as the power pole contact. Therefore, it can be used
indifferently as an auxiliary or as a NC power pole contact.
∑ The fourth pole NO or NC has the same characteristics as the power poles. Therefore, it can be
used indifferently as auxiliary or as power pole contact.
ADD-ON AUXILIARY CONTACTS

CNH11 CNH20
63 63
51 53
52 54
64 64
15-4
Modular contactors
TYPE CN20... CN25... CN40... CN63...

IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith (≤40°C) A 20 25 40 63
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 4 4 4 4
Minimum switching capacity 17V, ≥50mA 17V, ≥50mA 17V, ≥50mA 17V, ≥50mA
Average coil consumption in-rush and holding W 2.5 3 5 5
Maximum tightening torque for Nm 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
coil terminals lbft 0.44 0.44 0.44 0.44
Tool PZ1 PZ1 PZ2 PZ2
Coil conductor section min. mm2 1
max. mm2 2,5
Maximum tightening torque Nm 1.2 1,2 2 2
for power terminals lbft 0.9 0.9 1.48 1.48
Tool PZ1 PZ1 PZ2 PZ2
Power conductor section min. mm2 2.5 2.5 1 1
max. mm2 6 6 25 25
AC/DC CONTROL CIRCUIT
Operating voltage pick-up % Us 85-110
limits drop-out % Us 20-25
OPERATING TIMES
Average time closing NO ms 15-45 15-45 15-20 15-20
opening NO ms 25-50 20-70 35-45 35-45
LIFE
Mechanical cycles 3,000,000 3,000,000 3,000,000 3,000,000
Electrical (in AC3 duty) cycles 300,000 500,000 150,000 150,000
Electrical (in AC1 duty) cycles 200,000 200,000 100,000 100,000
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
15
15-5
Modular contactors
LIGHTING CIRCUIT SWITCHING

Lamp features Lamp Retd Capacitor Maximum number [n] of lamps each contactor pole
power current power 230V 50Hz
[W] [A] [µF] CN20 CN25 CN40 CN63
INCANDESCENT AND TUNGSTEN 60 0.26 - 23 29 65 85
HALOGEN 100 0.43 - 14 16 40 50
200 0.87 - 7 8 20 25
500 2.17 - 3 3 8 10
1000 4.35 - 1 1 4 5
ENERGY SAVING 3 0,03 - 50 60 150 200
5 0.04 - 45 55 135 180
7 0.055 - 40 50 12 160
8 0.065 - 35 45 110 150
9 0.075 - 30 40 100 140
10 0.08 - 30 40 100 140
11 009 - 30 40 100 140
12 0.10 - 25 35 95 120
14 0.11 - 25 35 90 120
15 0.12 - 20 30 85 115
16 0.13 - 20 30 80 105
18 0.145 - 18 26 70 95
20 0.16 - 17 22 65 85
21 0.17 - 15 20 60 80
23 0.185 - 15 20 60 70
24 0.195 - 15 20 55 70
30 0.16 - 15 20 55 70
FLUORESCENT 18 0.37 - 22 24 90 140
not corrected and series correction 24 0.35 - 22 24 90 140
36 0.43 - 17 20 65 95
58 0.67 - 14 17 45 70
FLUORESCENT 18 0.11 - 30 40 100 150
DUO circuit (lead-lag) 24 0.14 - 24 31 78 118
36 0.22 - 17 24 65 95
58 0.35 - 10 14 40 60
15 FLUORESCENT 18 0.12 4.5 7 8 48 73
corrected 24 0.15 4.5 7 8 48 73
36 0.2 4.5 7 8 48 73
58 0.32 7 4 5 31 47
ELECTRONIC FLUORESCENT BALLAST 1 x 18 0.09 - 25 35 100 140
1 x 36 0.16 - 15 20 52 75
1 x 58 0.25 - 14 19 50 72
2 x 18 0.17 - 12 17 50 70
2 x 36 0.32 - 7 10 26 38
2 x 58 0.49 - 7 9 25 36
HIGH-PRESSURE MERCURY VAPOUR 50 0.61 - 14 18 38 55
not corrected 80 0.8 - 10 13 29 42
125 1.15 - 7 9 20 29
250 2.15 - 4 5 10 15
400 3.25 - 2 3 7 10
700 5.4 - 1 2 4 6
1000 7.5 - 1 1 3 4
HIGH-PRESSURE MERCURY VAPOUR 50 0.28 7 4 5 31 47
corrected 80 0.41 8 4 5 27 41
125 0.65 10 3 4 22 33
250 1.22 18 1 2 12 18
400 1.95 25 1 1 9 13
700 3.45 45 - - 5 7
1000 4.8 60 - - 4 5
15-6
Modular contactors
Lamp features Lamp Retd Capacitor Maximum number [n] of lamps each contactor pole
power current power 230V 50Hz
[W] [A] [µF] CN20 CN25 CN40 CN63
METAL HALIDE 35 0.53 - 18 22 43 60
not corrected 70 1 - 10 12 23 32
150 1.8 - 5 7 12 18
250 3 - 3 4 7 10
400 3.5 - 3 3 6 9
1000 9.5 - 1 1 2 3
2000 16.5 - - - 1 1
METAL HALIDE 35 0.25 6 5 6 36 50
corrected 70 0.45 12 2 3 18 25
150 0.75 20 1 1 11 15
250 1.5 33 - 1 6 9
400 2.5 35 - 1 6 8
1000 5.8 95 - - 2 3
2000 11.5 148 - - 1 2
HIGH-PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR 150 1.8 - 5 6 17 22
not corrected 250 3 - 3 4 10 13
400 4.7 - 2 2 6 8
1000 10.3 - - 1 3 3
HIGH-PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR 150 0.83 20 1 1 11 16
corrected 250 1.5 33 - 1 6 10
400 2.4 48 - - 4 6
1000 6.3 106 - - 2 3
LOW-PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR 18 0.35 - 22 27 71 90
not corrected 35 1.5 - 7 9 23 30
55 1.5 - 7 9 23 30
90 2.4 - 4 5 14 19
135 3.5 - 3 4 10 13
180 3.3 - 3 4 10 13
LOW-PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR 18 0.35 5 6 7 44 66
corrected 35 0.31 20 1 1 11 16
55 0.42 20 1 1 11 16 15
90 0.63 26 1 1 8 12
135 0.94 45 - - 4 7
180 1.16 40 - - 5 8
LED LIGHTING BALLAST∂ 10V, 12V, 24V,...; 350mA, 500mA, 750mA... N°=2400/In N°=3800/In N°=5600/In N°=11000/In
N° = Number of controlled ballasts
In = Ballast rated current in mA
∂ Example of calculation with 500mA ballast:

Considering type CN40, then N° = 5600 / 500 = 11.2.
Therefore, the maximum number of ballasts which each CN40 power pole can be connected to and control is 11.
15-7
FLUSH-MOUNT VERSION FLUSH-MOUNT VERSION FLUSH-MOUNT VERSION

R1D type R2D type R4D type
• 1 operation threshold • 2 operation thresholds • 2 operation thresholds
• External toroidal transformer • External toroidal transformer • External toroidal transformer
• Adjustable tripping IDn and delay time. • Configurable fail safe operation • Configurable fail safe operation
• Adjustable tripping IDn and delay time. • Fault current measurement
• Digital display
R3D type • Flag indicator
• 2 operation thresholds • Shunt tripping circuit
• External toroidal transformer • Adjustable tripping IDn and delay time.
• Configurable fail safe operation
• Flag indicator
• Adjustable tripping IDn and delay time.
MODULAR VERSION MODULAR VERSION COMPACT INTERNAL PANEL VERSION

RM1 type RMT type RC type
• 1 operation threshold • 1 operation threshold • 1 operation threshold
• External toroidal transformer • Incorporated toroidal transformer • Incorporated toroidal transformer
• Fixed tripping IDn and delay time. • Adjustable tripping IDn and delay time. • Adjustable tripping IDn and delay time.
RM type
• 1 operation threshold
• External toroidal transformer
• Adjustable tripping IDn and delay time.
Page 16-3 Page 16-3
TOROIDAL CURRENT TRANSFORMERS EXTERNAL MULTIPLIER

RT type RX10 type
• Solid core • 10-fold multiplier.
• 35mm to 210mm diameter.
RTA type
• Split core
• 110mm and 210mm diameter.
EARTH LEAKAGE RELAYS 16
Modular, flush and internal panel

mount version, with or without flag
indicator, configurable prealarm
indication and fail safe operation
Versions with automatic toroid
connection control
Choice of supply voltage ranges
Adjustable fault current IDn
Adjustment and choice of tripping
range for both fault current and
delay time.
SEC. - PAGE
With 1 operation threshold ................................................................................................................................................ 16 - 2
With 2 operation thresholds ............................................................................................................................................... 16 - 3
Toroidal current transformers ............................................................................................................................................ 16 - 3
External multiplier ............................................................................................................................................................. 16 - 3
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 16 - 4
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 16 - 5
I SOLATION
AND
Relays with Order code Rated auxiliary Output Qty Wt General characteristics
1 operation threshold supply voltage contacts per – Earth leakage relay type A
pkg – Green power LED indicator (ON)
[V] SPDT n° [kg] – Red relay tripped LED indicator (TRIP)
– Front TEST and RESET buttons
1 OPERATION THRESHOLD. – Configurable automatic or manual resetting
Flush mount. External CT. – Flush mount 96x96mm housing with transparent cover
R1D 48 24-48VAC/DC 1 1 0.280 – IEC degree of protection: IP20 terminals, IP40 on front
R1D 415 110-240-415V 1 1 0.280 with cover.
∂ ADJUSTMENTS FOR R1D
∂ Supply voltage: – Configurable tripping 0.025-0.25A
110-125VAC (50/60Hz)/DC set-point (IDn): 0.25-2.5A
220-240VAC (50/60Hz) 2.5-25A
380-415VAC (50/60Hz).
25-250A (with external
R1D... multiplier RX10)
– Configurable tripping 0.02-0.5s
delay time (t): 0.2-5s
Reference standards
Order code Rated auxiliary Output Qty Wt General characteristics

supply voltage contacts per – Earth leakage relay type A
pkg – Configurable fail safe operation for RMT type only
[V] SPDT n° [kg] – Green power LED indicator (ON)
– Red relay tripped LED indicator (TRIP)
1 OPERATION THRESHOLD. – Front TEST and RESET buttons
Modular, 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail mounting. – Configurable automatic or manual resetting
External CT. Fixed tripping set point and time. – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 2 module, with
RM1 48 24-48VAC/DC 1 1 0.175 transparent cover, suitable for fixing on 35mm DIN rail
RM1... RM1 415 110-240-415V 1 1 0.175 (IEC/EN 60715)
AC ∂ – IEC degree of protection: IP20 terminals, IP40 on front
with cover.
1 OPERATION THRESHOLD.
Modular, 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail mounting. SETTINGS FOR RM1
External CT. – Selectable tripping set-point (IDn): fixed 0.3A or 0.5A
31 RM 48 24-48VAC/DC 1 1 0.190 – Selectable tripping time (t): fixed 0.02s or 0.5s
31 RM 415 110-240-415V 1 1 0.190 ADJUSTMENTS FOR RM AND RMT
∂ – Configurable tripping 0.025-0.25A
1 OPERATION THRESHOLD. set-point (IDn): 0.25-2.5A
Modular, 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail mounting. 2.5-25A
Ø28mm/Ø1.1” incorporated CT. Configurable fail safe. 25-250A (with external
31 RM... multiplier RX10 for RM only)
31 RMT 48 24-48VAC/DC 2∑ 1 0.375 – Configurable tripping 0.02-0.5s
31 RMT 415 110-240-415V 2∑ 1 0.375 delay time (t): 0.2-5s
∂
Reference standards
16 ∂ Supply voltage:
110-125VAC (50/60Hz)/DC
220-240VAC (50/60Hz)
380-415VAC (50/60Hz).
∑ 2 relay outputs, each with 1 changeover contact (SPDT).
31 RMT...
Order code Rated auxiliary Output Qty Wt General characteristics

supply voltage contacts per – Earth leakage relay type A
pkg – Green power LED indicator (ON)
[V] SPDT n° [kg] – Red relay tripped LED indicator (TRIP)
– Front TEST and RESET buttons
1 OPERATION THRESHOLD. – Configurable automatic or manual resetting
Compact panel mount. CT incorporated. – Compact housing for fixing on panel mounting plate
31 RC∑ 48 24-48VAC/DC 1 1 0.485 – IEC degree of protection: IP20 terminals.
31 RC60... 31 RC∑ 415 110-240-415V 1 1 0.485 ADJUSTMENTS FOR RC
∂ – Configurable tripping 0.025-0.25A
∂ Supply voltage: set-point (IDn): 0.25-2.5A
110-125VAC (50/60Hz)/DC 2.5-25A
220-240VAC (50/60Hz) – Configurable tripping 0.02-0.5s
380-415VAC (50/60Hz).
∑ Replace with the digit of the required diameter (35-60-80-110mm/ delay time (t): 0.2-5s
1.38-2.36-3.15-4.33”).
Reference standards
31 RC110...

16-2 page 16-4 page 16-5 page 16-6 and 7
Relays with Ordering Rated auxiliary Output Qty Wt General characteristics

2 operation thresholds code supply voltage contacts per – Earth leakage relay type A
pkg – 2 output relays each with changeover contact,
[V] SPDT n° [kg] configurable 2 tripping or 1 tripping and 1 alarm
– Configurable fail safe prealarm and operation
2 OPERATION THRESHOLDS. – Automatic toroid connection control
Flush mount. External CT. Fail safe. – Green power LED indicator (ON)
R2D 48 24-48VAC/DC 2 1 0.395 – Red relay tripped LED indicator (TRIP)
R2D 415 110-240-415V∂ 2 1 0.395 – Red tripping prealarm LED indicator (ALARM)
– Front TEST button
2 OPERATION THRESHOLDS. – Manual resetting by front RESET button or remote
Flush mount. External CT. contact closing
Fail safe. Flag Indicator. – Automatic resetting by remote contact closing or rear
R3D 48 24-48VAC/DC 2 1 0.405 jumper connection
R3D 415 110-240-415V∂ 2 1 0.405 – Constant toroid-relay circuit control
R2D... – Flag indicator (TRIP MEMORY) (R3D-R4D only)
2 OPERATION THRESHOLDS. – Digital fault current measurement and display with
Flush mount. External CT. configurable tripping value memory (R4D only)
Fault current measurement. Digital display. – Shunt tripping circuit operating test (TCS) (R4D only)
Fail safe. Flag indicator. – Flush mount 96x96mm/3.78”x3.78” housing with
R4D 48 24-48VAC/DC 2 1 0.570 transparent cover
R4D 415 110-240-415V∂ 2 1 0.570 – IEC degree of protection: IP20 terminals, IP40 on front
with cover.
∂ Supply voltage:
110-125VAC (50/60Hz) ADJUSTMENTS FOR R2D and R3D
220-240VAC (50/60Hz) – Configurable tripping 0.025-0.25A
380-415VAC (50/60Hz).
set-point (IDn): 0.25-2.5A
2.5-25A
R3D...
multiplier RX10)
– Prealarm set-point: fixed 70%
ADJUSTMENTS FOR R4D
– Configurable tripping 0.03-0.3A
set-point (IDn): 0.3-3A
3-30A
multiplier RX10)
– Prealarm set-point: fixed 70%
R4D...
Reference standards
Toroidal current Order code Diameter Openable Qty Wt. Reference standards
transformers per Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-2. 16
pkg
[mm/in] n° [kg]
31 RT 35 35/1.38 No 1 0.200
31 RT 60 60/2.36 No 1 0.245
31 RT 80 80/3.15 No 1 0.410
31 RT 110 110/4.33 No 1 0.400
31 RT 210 210/8.27 No 1 1.200
31 RTA 110 110/4.33 Yes 1 0.540
31 RT... 31 RT...
31 RTA 210 210/8.27 Yes 1 1.820
External multiplier Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

per – Dimensions: refer to RT35 toroidal transformer on
pkg page 16-4.
– To connect between toroid and relay.
n° [kg]
31 RX 10 10-fold multiplier suitable 1 0.300 Reference standards
for R1D, RM, R2D, R3D Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-2.
and R4D types only

page 16-4 page 16-5 page 16-6 and 7 16-3
RELAYS
R1D - R2D - R3D R4D Cutout 91
(3.58”)
96 96 16
56 (0.63”) 85 19
(3.78”) 19 (3.78”) (3.35”)
(2.20”) (0.75”) (0.75”)
R3
(0.12”)
(3.78”)
(3.54”)
(3.58”)
(2.60”)
(3.78”)
(3.54”)
96
90
91
66
96
90
RM1 - RM RMT 67 RC
(2.64”)
67 6
(2.64”) 105 43 A H
(4.13”) (1.69”)
52 43
(2.05”) (1.69”)
(3.50”)
(1.77”)
89
45
(3.50”)
(1.77”)
89
45
B
D
27 5
(1.06”) (0.20”)
5
(0.20”)
E
Ø
(1 28.
.12 5
”) G
5 (0.20”)
F C
TYPE A B C D E F G H
RC35 100 (3.94”) 110 (4.33”) 70 (2.75”) 35 (1.38”) 47 (1.85”) 60 (2.36”) 60 (2.36”) 50 (1.97”)
RC60 100 (3.94”) 110 (4.33”) 70 (2.75”) 60 (2.36”) 47 (1.85”) 60 (2.36”) 60 (2.36”) 50 (1.97”)
RC80 150 (5.90”) 160 (6.30”) 70 (2.75”) 80 (3.15”) 70 (2.75”) 110 (4.33”) 60 (2.36”) 50 (1.97”)
RC110 150 (5.90”) 160 (6.30”) 70 (2.75”) 110 (4.33”) 70 (2.75”) 110 (4.33”) 60 (2.36”) 50 (1.97”)
TOROIDAL TRANSFORMERS AND MULTIPLIER

RT35 - RT60 - RT80 - RT110 - RX10 RT210 - RTA210
A H A
H
K
B
D
16
E
5 (0.20”) G
F C
A
G
B
RTA110
K H
E
5 (0.20”)
F C
D
B
∂ With screws, for RTA210 split-core type; fixed structure, without screws, for RT210 type.
E
5 (0.20”) G
F C
A
TYPE A B C D E F G H K
RT35 100 (3.94”) 110 (4.33”) 50 (1.97”) 35 (1.38”) 47 (1.85”) 60 (2.36”) 43 (1.69”) 30 (1.18”) —
RT60 100 (3.94”) 110 (4.33”) 50 (1.97”) 60 (2.36”) 47 (1.85”) 60 (2.36”) 43 (1.69”) 30 (1.18”) —
RT80 150 (5.90”) 160 (6.30”) 50 (1.97”) 80 (3.15”) 70 (2.75”) 110 (4.33”) 43 (1.69”) 30 (1.18”) —
RT110 150 (5.90”) 160 (6.30”) 50 (1.97”) 110 (4.33”) 70 (2.75”) 110 (4.33”) 43 (1.69”) 30 (1.18”) —
RT210 310 (12.20”) 290 (11.41”) 54 (2.12”) 210 (8.27”) 145 (5.71”) 240 (9.45”) 280 (11.02”) 36 (1.42”) 258 (10.16”)
RTA110 180 (7.09”) 150 (5.90”) 45 (1.77”) 110 (4.33”) 75 (2.95”) 110 (4.33”) 38 (1.50”) 25 (0.98”) 145 (5.71”)
RTA210 310 (12.20”) 290 (11.41”) 54 (2.12”) 210 (8.27”) 145 (5.71”) 240 (9.45”) 280 (11.02”) 36 (1.42”) 258 (10.16”)
RX10 100 (3.94”) 110 (4.33”) 50 (1.97”) — — 60 (2.36”) 43 (1.69”) 30 (1.18”) —
16-4
Wiring diagrams
RELAYS
R1D R2D
GRD Line GRD Line
N L1L2 L3 N L1L2 L3
Us Us
12 11 10 8 7 6 5 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
R2D
R1D
Trip Trip Alarm/Trip
1 1 5-6 - 24VAC/DC 1 11 1-2 - 24VAC/DC

2 2 5-7 - 48VAC/DC 2 12 1-3 - 48VAC/DC
3 3 13
5-6 - 110-125VAC/DC 4 14 1-2 - 110-125VAC
4
5-7 - 220-240VAC 15 2-3 - 220-240VAC
5-8 - 380-415VAC 16 1-3 - 380-415VAC
Remote
Load Load control
∂ The coil connection can vary depending on the connected type of device (contactor, breaker with shunt trip release or breaker with undervoltage trip release).
R3D
GRD Line
N L1L2 L3
Us
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
R3D
Trip Alarm/Trip
1 11 ** 1-2 - 24VAC/DC
2 12 1-3 - 48VAC/DC
3 13
4 14 1-2 - 110-125VAC
15 2-3 - 220-240VAC
16 1-3 - 380-415VAC
Flag indicator
Remote **
Load control
R4D RM - RM1
GRD Line GRD Line
N L1L2 L3 N L1L2 L3
16
Us Us
TCS control
19 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 12 10 7 5 3 1
18 RM
17 R4D
Type Us Us TCS
1-2 - 24VAC/DC 7-5 - 24VAC/DC
1-3 - 48VAC/DC
Wiring Wiring 1 16 7-3 - 48VAC/DC
2 17
Trip Alarm/Trip 24VAC/DC 1-2 17-18 18 Trip 7-1 - 380-415VAC
R4D 48
48VAC/DC 1-3 17-19 7-3 - 220-240VAC
7-5 - 110-125VAC/DC
1 11 ** 110-125VAC 1-2 17-18
2 12
3 13
R4D 415 220-240VAC 2-3 17-18 Load
22 2120
4 14 1-2 - 110-125VAC
TCS 380-415VAC 1-3 17-19
15 2-3 - 220-240VAC
16 1-3 - 380-415VAC
Flag indicator
Remote **
TCS: Shunt circuit test control
Load control
RMT RC
GRD Line GRD Line
5-4 - 24VAC/DC
N L1 L2 L3 5-3 - 48VAC/DC N L1L2 L3
5-1 - 380-415VAC
5-3 - 220-240VAC
5-4 - 110-125VAC/DC Us
Us
10 11 12 14 15 16 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RMT RC
0-1 - 24VAC/DC
0-2 - 48VAC/DC
0-1 - 110-125VAC/DC
0-2 - 220-240VAC
Trip Trip 0-3 - 380-415VAC
1 3 4 5
Load
Load
16-5
TYPE R1D∂ R2D∂ R3D∂ R4D∂∏

DESCRIPTION
Flush mount with Flush mount with transparent Flush mount with transparent Flush mount with display and cover,
transparent cover, cover, 2 operating thresholds cover, 2 operating thresholds 2 operating thresholds - constant
1 operating threshold constant toroid-relay circuit control constant toroid-relay circuit control toroid-relay circuit control
CONTROL CIRCUIT
Toroidal transformer External
(see types given
on page 16-3)
Adjustments
Tripping set-point (IDn) 0.025-0.25A (x0.1) 0.03-0,3A (x0.1)
0.25-2.5A (x1) 0.3-3A (x1)
2.5-25A (x10) 3-30A (x10)
25-250A (external multiplier) 30-300A (external multiplier)
Prealarm set-point –– 70% IDn (fixed) 70% IDn (fixed) 70% IDn (fixed)
Tripping delay time (t) 0.02-0.5s (tx1) 0.03-0,5s (tx1)
0.2-5s (tx10) 0.3-5s (tx10)
Selection of multiplier for IDn and t By dip switches
Resetting Configurable automatic Automatic by remote contact closing or rear jumper connection
or manual by Manual by button on front or remote contact closing
button on front∑
Shunt circuit control –– –– –– Yes
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Auxiliary voltage Us 24-48VAC/DC
(0.85 - 1.1 Us limit) 110-125VAC/DC 110-125/220-240/380-415VAC
220-240/380-415VAC
Rated frequency 50/60Hz
Power consumption (maximum) 5.5VA 4.5VA 4.5VA 5.5VA
RELAY OUTPUTS
State Normally de-energised Configurable normally Configurable normally Configurable normally
de-energised or de-energised or de-energised or
energised energised energised
Contact arrangement 1 changeover SPDT (trip) 2 changeover SPDT each (configurable: 2 trip or 1 trip and 1 alarm)
Rated contact capacity IEC Ith 5A - 250VAC
Electrical life 3 x 105 cycles
Mechanical life 50 x 106 cycles
INSULATION
Power frequency withstand 2.5kV
voltage
16 INDICATIONS
Auxiliaty voltage available (ON) Green LED
Relay tripping (TRIP) Red LED
Trip prealarm (ALARM) –– Red LED Red LED Red LED
Mechanical (TRIP MEMORY) –– –– Flag indicator Flag indicator
Shunt circuit tripping (TCS) –– –– –– Red LED
CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals Fixed Removable, plug-in
Tightening torque maximum 0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
Conductor section min-max 0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12AWG)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Relative humidity ≤90%
HOUSING
Material Self-extinguishing polycarbonate
∂ Type A, sensitive to residual sinusoidal AC and pulsating DC currents.
∑ Remote resetting by removing power for more than 1 second.
∏ Digital display of fault current measurement and tripping value memory.
16-6
RM1...∂ RM...∂ RMT...∂ RC...∂
Modular with transparent cover, Modular with transparent cover, Modular with transparent cover, Compact,
1 operating threshold 1 operating threshold 1 operating threshold 1 operating threshold
External External Incorporated Ø28mm/1.1” Incorporated

(see types given on page 16-3) (see types given on page 16-3) 35-60-80-110mm/
1.38-2.36-3.15-4.33”
standard diameter
0.3A or 0.5A only 0.025-0.25A (x0.1) 0.025-0.25A (x0.1) 0.025-0.25A (x0.1)

0.25-2.5A (x1) 0.25-2.5A (x1) 0.25-2.5A (x1)
2.5-25A (x10) 2.5-25A (x10) 2.5-25A (x10)
25-250A (external multiplier)
–– –– –– ––
0.02s or 0.5s only 0.02-0.5s (tx1) 0.02-0.5s (tx1) 0.02-0.5s (tx1)
0.2-5s (tx10) 0.2-5s (tx10) 0.2-5s (tx10)
By dip switches
Configurable A: Automatic or
M: Manual by button on front
––
24-48VAC/DC
110-125VAC/DC
220-240/380-415VAC
50/60Hz
3VA
Normally de-energised Normally de-energised Configurable normally Normally de-energised

de-energised or
energised
1 changeover SPDT (trip) 1 changeover SPDT (trip) 2 changeover SPDT each (both trip) 1 changeover SPDT (trip)
5A - 250VAC
3x105 cycles
50x106 cycles
2.5kV
16
Green LED
Red LED
––
––
––
Fixed
0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12AWG)
-10...+60°C
-20...+80°C
≤90%
Self-extinguishing polycarbonate
∂ Type A, sensitive to residual sinusoidal AC and pulsating DC currents.
16-7
Page 17-2 Page 17-5
MODULAR TIME RELAYS PLUG-IN AND FLUSH-MOUNT TIME

• Suitable for modular-slot switchboards RELAYS, 48X48MM
• Selectable time ranges on front: • Flush and internal panel mounting
0.1 second - 100 days • Time ranges: 0.05 seconds - 10 hours
• LED indication • LED indication
• Mounting on 35mm DIN rail • 8 and 11-pin sockets for panel mounting.
• Screw terminals.
TIME RELAYS 17
Modular version for modular-slot

switchboards, also suitable for rear
mounting plate fixing
Plug-in or flush-mount version
Vast range of functions and time
scales
Reliable time and repeat accuracy.
SEC. - PAGE
Modular version
On delay. Mutiscale. Multivoltage ....................................................................................................................................... 17 - 2
Multifunction. Multiscale. Multivoltage. 1 changeover contact ........................................................................................... 17 - 2
Multifunction. Multiscale. Multivoltage. 1 changeover contact and 1 normally open contact ................................................ 17 - 2
Recycle, independent timings. Multiscale. Multivoltage ...................................................................................................... 17 - 3
Off delay. Multiscale. Multivoltage ...................................................................................................................................... 17 - 3
For starting. Multiscale. Multivoltage ................................................................................................................................. 17 - 4
For staircase ..................................................................................................................................................................... 17 - 4
Plug-in and flush-mount version, 48x48mm/1.9x1.9”
On delay. Single scale. Single voltage ................................................................................................................................. 17 - 5
On delay. Multiscale. Multivoltage ...................................................................................................................................... 17 - 5
On delay. Multiscale. Single voltage ................................................................................................................................... 17 - 5
Multifunction. Multiscale. Multivoltage .............................................................................................................................. 17 - 5
Accessories ...................................................................................................................................................................... 17 - 5
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 17 - 6
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 17 - 7
C ONTROL
AND
A UTOMATION
Time relays
Modular version
On delay time relay. Order code Time of Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
scale auxiliary per – Electronic time relay, multiscale, multivoltage.
Multiscale. Multivoltage range supply voltage pkg On delay, delay on make, with start at relay energising
– 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
[V] n° [kg] – Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch: 10-100%
TM P 0.1-1s 24-48VDC 1 0.048 – Green LED indicator for power on
1-10s 24-240VAC – Red LED indicator for relay state; flashing for delay
6-60s and steady when relay energised
1-10min – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module
6min-1h – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
mounted in housing or electric board with IP40);
1-10h IP20 on terminals.
0.1-1 day
1-10 days Certifications and compliance
ON only Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices - Timers.
OFF only Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61812-1, UL508, CSA
C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
TM P See page 17-7.
Multifunction time relay. Order code Time of Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
– Electronic time relay, multifunction, multiscale, multivoltage
Multiscale. Multivoltage. scale auxiliary per
– Enabling input
range supply voltage pkg – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
1 relay output [V] n° [kg] – Selectable functions: (a) On delay; delay on make with
TM M1 0.1-1s 12-240V 1 0.086 start at relay energising. (b) Pulse on relay energising
with start when energised. (c) Flasher starting with OFF
1-10s AC/DC interval. Equal timing recycle. (d) Flasher starting with
6-60s ON interval. Equal timing recycle. (e) Off delay; relay
1-10min energising at external contact closing with start on
6min-1h break. (f) Pulse on relay energising with start on external
1-10h contact closing. (g) Pulse on relay energising with start
0.1-1 day on external contact opening. (h) On-off delay. Delay on
1-10 days make, with start at external contact closing, and delay at
ON only break, with start at external contact opening. (i) Internal
OFF only ON/OFF trigger with relay contact closing or operating at
each closing of an external contact. (j) Pulse generator,
unequal timing recycle; starting with OFF pulse time and
0.5s ON pulse.
– Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch: 10-100%
– Green LED indicator for power on
TM M1 – Red LED indicator for relay state; flashing for delay
and steady when relay energised
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module suitable for
fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
– IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
IP20 on terminals.
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
17 See page 17-7.
Multifunction time relay. Order code Time of Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
– Electronic time relay, multifunction, multiscale, multivoltage
Multiscale. Multivoltage. scale auxiliary per – Enabling input
range supply voltage pkg – 2 relay outputs, one with 1 delayed changeover
2 relay outputs. [V] n° [kg] (C/O-SPDT) contact and the other with 1 normally
open (N/O-SPST)) contact, programmable as
TM M2 0.1-1s 12-240V 1 0.094 instantaneous or delayed
1-10s AC/DC – Selectable functions: (a) On delay; delay on make with
6-60s start at relay energising. (b) Pulse on relay energising
1-10min with start when energised. (c) Flasher starting with OFF
6min-1h interval. Equal timing recycle. (d) Flasher starting with
ON interval. Equal timing recycle. (e) Off delay; relay
1-10h energising at external contact closing with start on break.
0.1-1 day (f) Pulse on relay energising with start on external
1-10 days contact closing. (g) Pulse on relay energising with start
ON only on external contact opening. (h) On-off delay. Delay on
OFF only make, with start at external contact closing, and delay at
break, with start at external contact opening. (i) Internal
ON/OFF trigger with relay contact closing or operating at
each closing of an external contact. (j) Pulse generator,
unequal timing recycle; starting with OFF pulse time and
0.5s ON pulse.
TM M2 – Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch: 10-100%
– Red LED indicator for relay state; flashing for delay
and steady when relay energised
IP20 on terminals.
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 17-8.

17-2 page 17-6 page 17-7 and 8 page 17-12
Time relays
Modular version
Recycle time relay, Order code Time of Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
scale auxiliary per – Programmable asymmetrical recycle time relay,
independent timings. range supply voltage pkg multiscale, multivoltage. Flasher with independent
Multiscale. [V] n° [kg] timing for ON and OFF intervals
– Enabling input of ON or OFF interval
Multivoltage TM PL 0.1-1s 12-240V 1 0.082 – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
1-10s AC/DC – Delay time for OFF (pause) interval, adjustable on
6-60s front by rotary switch: 10-100%
1-10min – Delay time for ON (work) interval, adjustable on front
6min-1h by rotary switch: 10-100%
1h-10h – Green LED indicator for power on
0.1-1 day – Red LED indicator for relay state; flashing for delay
1-10 days – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module; suitable for
3-30 days fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
10-100 days – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
IP20 on terminals.

TM PL Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 17-9.
Off delay time relay. Order code Time of Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
Multiscale. scale auxiliary per – Electronic time relay, multiscale, multivoltage. True off
range supply voltage pkg delay; delay on break with start at relay de-energising
Multivoltage [V] n° [kg] – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
– Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch:
TM D 0.06-0.6s 24-240V 1 0.080 10-100%
0.6-6s AC/DC – Green LED indicator for power on
6-60s – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module; suitable for
18-180s fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
IP20 on terminals.

CSA C22.2 n° 14.
TM D
Operational diagram
See page 17-9.
17

page 17-6 page 17-9 page 17-12 17-3
Time relays
Modular version
Time relay for starting. Order code Time of Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
Multiscale. scale auxiliary per – Electronic time relay, multiscale, multivoltage for
range supply voltage pkg starting (star-delta, impedance, autotransformer, etc)
Multivoltage [V] n° [kg] of induction motors (squirrel cage), 2 separate
timings
TM ST 0.1-1s 24-48VDC 1 0.090 – 1 relay output with 2 normally open (N/O-SPST)
1-10s 24-240VAC contacts with common pole
6-60s – Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch:
1-10min 10-100% for star connection
TM ST A440 0.1-1s 380-440VAC 1 0.090 – Starting and transition (20-300ms time scale - from
1-10s star to delta), time adjustable on front by rotary
6-60s switch
1-10min – Green LED indicator for power on
– Red LED indicator for relay state; flashing during
delay and steady at delay lapsing
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module; suitable for
TM ST IP20 on terminals.

CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 17-9.
Staircase time relay Order code Time of Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
scale auxiliary per – Electronic time relay single scale and voltage for
range supply voltage pkg staircase illumination
[V] n° [kg] – 1 relay output with 1 powered normally open
(N/O-SPST) contact
TM LS 0.5-20min 220-240VAC 1 0.080 – Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch
– Suitable for 3 or 4-wire systems
– 1 slide switch for timed or constant lighting operation
– Function for one hour lighting and fast switch off
– Connection with up to 50 light-up switches maximum;
≤ 1mA each
TM LS mounted in housing or electric board with IP40);
IP20 on terminals.
17 Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices - Timers.
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 17-9.

17-4 page 17-17 page 17-9 page 17-12
Time relays
Plug-in and flush mount version 48x48mm/1.9x1.9”
Accessories
Time relay Order code Time Rated Qty Wt General characteristics

scale auxiliary per TIME RELAY L48T
range supply pkg – Electronic time relay, single scale, single voltage.
voltage On delay, delay on make with start at relay energising
[V] n° [kg] – Delay time adjustable on front by rotary knob
Time relay on delay. – LED indicators for power on and relay state
Single scale and single voltage. – Plug-in housing with 8-pin socket, 31 S8 or 31 L48 P8
– Flush mount bracket 31 L48AP available
31 L48T 3S 24 0.1-3s 1 0.115 – IEC protection degree: IP40 on front and IP20 at terminals.
31 L48T 6S 24 0.1-6s 1 0.115
TIME RELAY L48TP
31 L48T 30S 24 0.5-30s 1 0.115 – Electronic time relay, multiscale, multivoltage.
31 L48T 60S 24 0.5-60s 1 0.115 On delay, delay on make with start at relay energising
31 L48T 3M 24 1s-3min 24VAC/DC 1 0.115 – Delay time adjustable on front by rotary knob
31 L48T... 31 L48T 6M 24 3s-6min 1 0.115 – Time range selected by dip switches:
L48TP S: 0.3-3s; 1.2-12s; 10-100s; 7.8-780s
31 L48T 30M 24 30s-30min 1 0.115 L48 TP M: 18s-3min; 72s-12min; 10-100min;
31 L48T 60M 24 30s-60min 1 0.115 78-780min
– LED indicators for power on and relay state
31 L48T 3H 24 3min-3h 1 0.115 – Plug-in housing with 8-pin socket, 31 S8 or 31 L48 P8
31 L48T 3S 240 0.1-3s 1 0.120 – Flush mount bracket 31 L48AP available
– IEC protection degree: IP40 on front and IP20 at terminals.
31 L48T 6S 240 0.1-6s 1 0.120
31 L48T 30S 240 0.5-30s 1 0.120 Time range setting
A B A B A B A B
31 L48T 60S 240 0.5-60s 1 0.120 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0
31 L48T 3M 240 1s-3min 220-240VAC 1 0.120
L48TP S 0.3-3s 1.2-12s 10-100s 7.8-780s
31 L48T 6M 240 3s-6min 1 0.120 L48TP M 18s-3min 72s-12min 10-100min 78-780min
31 L48T 30M 240 30s-30min 1 0.120
31 L48TP... TIME RELAY T48TPB
31 L48T 60M 240 30s-60min 1 0.120 – Electronic time relay, multiscale, single voltage,
31 L48T 3H 240 3min-3h 1 0.120 multifunction
– 2 relay outputs, each with 1 changeover contact (SPDT),
Time relay on delay. configurable either delay on make or instantaneous
Multiscale and multivoltage. – Delay time adjustable on front by rotary knob
31 L48TP S 240 0.3-780s 1 0.124 – Time range selected by dip switches: 0.05-1s;
24VAC/DC 0.1-10s; 0.6s-1min; 6s-10min
110VAC – LED indicators for power on and relay state
31 L48TP M 240 18s-780min 220-240VAC 1 0.124 – Plug-in housing with 8-pin socket, 31 S8 or 31 L48 P8
– Flush mount bracket 31 L48AP available
Time relay on delay. – IEC protection degree: IP40 on front and IP20 at terminals.
Multiscale and single voltage.
Time range setting
31 L48TPB M24 0.05s-10min 24VAC/DC 1 0.124 A B A B A B A B
1 1 1 1
31 L48TPB M240 220-240VAC 1 0.124 0 0 0 0
31 L48TPB...
Time relay, multifunction, multivoltage and multiscale. L48TPB 0.05-1s 0.1-10s 0.6s-1min 6s-10min
31 L48M M 240 0.05s-10min 24-240V 1 0.135
TIME RELAY L48M
31 L48M H 240 0.05min-10h AC/DC 1 0.135 – Electronic time relay, multiscale, multivoltage,
multifunction
– Selectable functions: On delay, delay on make with
start at relay energising. On delay, delay on break with
start at relay de-energising. Flasher, starting with OFF
interval. Flasher, starting with ON interval. Time relay
17
resetting is possible on closing of external contact (R)
connected to terminals 7-6. Possible time relay stopping
storing elapsed time on closing of external contact (M)
connected to terminals 7-5 and then restarting time
on its opening. See diagrams on page 17-11
– 2 relay outputs, each with 1 changeover contact; both
31 L48M... delayed (SPDT)
– Delay time adjustable on front by rotary knob
– Time range selected by dip switches:
L48M M: 0.05-1s; 0.1-10s; 0.6s-1min; 6s-10min
L48M H: 0.05-1min; 0.1-10min; 0.6min-1h; 1min-10h
Accessories for 48x48mm Order code Description Qty Wt – LED indicators for power on and relay state
time relay per – Plug-in housing with 11-pin socket, 31 S11 or
pkg 31 L48 P11
n° [kg] – Flush mount bracket 31 L48AP available
– IEC protection degree: IP40 on front and IP20 at terminals.
31 S8 8-pin socket for screw 10 0.061
fixing or on 35mm DIN Time range setting
rail (IEC/EN 60715).
A B A B A B A B
Screw terminals 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0
31 L48 P8 8-pin loose socket. 10 0.040
Screw terminals L48M M 0.05-1s 0.1-10s 0.6s-1min 6s-10min
31 S8 L48M H 0.05-1min 0.1-10min 0.6min-1h 1min-10h
fixing or on 35mm DIN Certifications and compliance
rail (IEC/EN 60715). Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Recognized, for USA
Screw terminals and Canada (cULus - File E172189) as Industrial
Switches - Timer modules.
31 L48 P11 11-pin loose socket. 10 0.048 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61812-1, UL508,
Screw terminals CSA C22.2 n° 14.
31 L48AP Flush mount bracket 10 0.012 Operational diagram
N.B. Max. conductor section for sockets: 2x2.5mm2/2x14AWG. See page 17-10 and 17-11.
31 S11 Tightening torque: 0.8Nm/7.1lbin.

page 17-6 page 17-10 and 11 page 17-13 17-5
Time relays
TIME RELAYS
TM...
17.5 5 58
(0.69”) (0.20”) (2.28”)
43.7
(1.72”)
(4.12”)
(1.77”)
(3.54”)
(3.87”)
104.7
98.3
45
90
59.9
Ø4.2 (2.36”)
(0.16”)
L48... Cutout
45
(1.77”)
48 76
(1.89”) 14 (2.99”)
(0.55”)
(1.38”)
(1.77”)
(1.89”)
35
45
48
3.5
(0.14”)
L48... with S8 - S11 sockets Cutout

27 45
48 (1.06”)
(1.89”) 76 (1.77”)
(2.99”)
(1.38”)
(2.56”)
(1.89”)
(1.77”)
35
65
48
45
3.5
38 (0.14”)
(1.50”)
Accessories - Plug-in sockets

S8 - S11 L48 P8 L48 P11
27
38 (1.06”) 43.5 20.5 47 20.5
(1.50”) (1.71”) (0.81”) (1.85”) (0.81”)
(1.71”)
(1.30”)
(1.85”)
(1.30”)
43.5
33
47
33
(2.56”)
65
17
17-6
Time relays
Wiring diagrams
TM P On delay. Delay on make, with A1

start at relay energising. A2
A1 15 ON
A2 16 18 18
15
16
t
TM M1 On delay. Delay on make, with A1 Pulse on relay energising with start A1

A2
A2
start at relay energising ON
at external contact closing ON
E F E F
D G D G
C H C H
C
B I
C A1
B I
J A J
A
18 S
A1 S 15 15
16 18
t 15
16
t t
A2 16 18
Pulse on relay energising with A1 Pulse on relay energising with start A1

A2 A2
start on energising ON at external contact opening ON
E F
D G E F
D G
C H
C H
B I
A J 18
B I C A1
S
A J
15
16 18
t 15
16
t t
A1 A1
Flasher, starting with OFF (pause) A2
On-Off delay. Delay on make, with A2
interval. Equal timing recycle. ON start at external contact closing, and ON
D
E F
G
delay at break, with start at external
C H contact opening.
C A1
B I
A J E F
18 D G S
15 C H
16 18
t t t t B I
15
(pause) (work) (pause) (work) A J
16
t t t t
Flasher, starting with ON (work) A1 Internal ON/OFF trigger. Relay A1

A2 A2
interval. Equal timing recycle. ON
contact either closes or opens at ON
D
E F
G
each external contact closing.
C H
E F
B I D G
A J
18 C H C A1
S
15 B I
16 A J 18
t t t t 15
(work) (pause) (work) (pause) 16
17
Off delay. Relay energising at A1 Pulse generator. Unequal timing A1
A2 A2
external contact closing with start ON recycle, starting with OFF pulse time ON
on break and 0.5sec ON time.
E F E F
D G D G
C H C A1
S
C H
B I B I
A J A J
18 18
15 15
16 16
t t t
0,5s 0,5s
17-7
Time relays
Wiring diagrams
TM M2
With instantaneous With delayed
C C
operation programmed operation programmed
A1 S 15 23 A1 S 15 27
23 27 23 27
INST DEL INST DEL
24 28 24 28
A2 16 18 24 A2 16 18 28
D
E F
G
On delay. Delay on make, D
E F
G Pulse on relay energising D
E F
G
On delay. Delay on make, D
E F
G Pulse on relay energising
C H with start at relay energising C H with start on energising C H with start at relay C H with start on energising
B I B I B I B I
A J A J A J energising A J
A1 A1 A1 A1
A2 A2 A2 A2
ON ON ON ON
18 18 18 18
15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16
t t t
23 23 27 27
24 24 28 28
t
D
E F
G Flasher, starting with OFF D
E F
G Flasher, starting with ON D
E F
G Flasher, starting with OFF D
E F
G Flasher, starting with ON
C H (pause) interval. C H (work) interval. C H (pause) interval. C H (work) interval.
B I B I B I B I
A J Equal timing recycle A J Equal timing recycle A J Equal timing recycle A J Equal timing recycle
A1 A1 A1 A1
A2 A2 A2 A2
ON ON ON ON
C
B
18 18 18 18
15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16
t t t t t t t t
23 (pause) (work) (pause) (work) 23
(work) (pause) (work) (pause)
27 27
24 24 28 28
t t t t t t t t
(pause) (work) (pause) (work) (work) (pause) (work) (pause)
D
E F
G Off delay. Relay energising D
E F
G
Pulse on relay energising D
E F
G Off delay. Relay energising D
E F
G
Pulse on relay energising
C
B
H
I
at external contact closing C H with start on external C
B
H
I
at external contact closing C H with start on external
B I B I
A J with start on break A J contact closing A J with start on break A J contact closing
A1 A1
A2 A1 A1
A2 A2 A2
ON ON
ON ON
C A1 C A1
S C A1
S S C A1
S
18 18
15 18 18
15 15 15
16 16
t 16 t 16
17 23
24 23
24
t t
27
28
27
28
t t
D
E F
G
E F
G On-off delay. Delay make, with D
E F
G
E F
G On-off delay. Delay make, with
C H with start on external C H start at external contact closing C H with start on external C H start at external contact closing
B I B I B I B I
A J contact opening A J and delay at break, with start at A J contact opening A J and delay at break, with start at
external contact opening external contact opening
A1 A1 A1 A1
A2 A2 A2 A2
ON ON ON ON
C A1
S C A1 C A1 C A1
S S S
18 18 18 18
15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16
t t t t t t t t t t t t
23 23 27 27
24 24 28 28
D
E F
G Internal trigger ON/OFF. D
E F
G Pulse generator. Unequal D
E F
G Internal trigger ON/OFF. D
E F
G Pulse generator. Unequal
C H Relay contact either closes C H
I
timing recycle, starting C H Relay contact either closes C H
I
timing recycle, starting
B I B B I B
A J or opens at each external A J with ON pulse time A J or opens at each external A J with ON pulse time
contact closing contact closing
A1 A1 A1 A1
A2 A2 A2 A2
ON ON ON ON
C A1
S
S C A1 S
S
18 18 18 18
15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16
t 0,5s t 0,5s t 0,5s t 0,5s
23 23 27 27
24 24 28 28
17-8
Time relays
Wiring diagrams
TM PL
Flasher, starting with ON interval. Flasher, starting with OFF interval.
Equal timing recycle, ON first Equal timing recycle, OFF first
A1 S 15 A1 A1
A2 A2
ON ON
A2 16 18 A1 A1
S S
18 18
15 15
16 16
W P W P P W P W
W = Work (ON) W = Work (ON)

P = Pause (OFF) P = Pause (OFF)
TM D
True off delay. Delay on break, starting at
relay de-energising
A1 15
A1
A2
ON
A2 16 18
18
15
16
t
TM ST
For starting
A1
A1 17 A2
ON
A2 18 28
18
17
start
28
17
transition
LINE
...V - ...Hz
L1 L2 L3
21
S1
22
13 53
S2 KM2
14 54
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
KM2 KM3 KM1

2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
13 13
17
1 3 5 KM2 KM1
14 14
FR1 17 17
2 4 6 KT1
(TM ST)
18 28
95 22 62
U2 U1
KM3 KM1
V2 M V1 95 21 61
W2 3~ W1
FR1 KT1 A1 A1 A1 A1
(TM ST) KM1 KM3 KM2
96 A2 A2 A2 A2
U2 U1
96
V2 M V1
W2 3~ W1
TM LS
Staircase lighting
4-wire connection 3-wire connection Timed lighting Constant lighting
L L
N 3 N 3 N N
ON ON
L/N
L 4 L 4 3 >3s >3s >3s

L L L L
N N
4 t t 1h 4
17-9
Time relays
Wiring diagrams
L48T...
On delay
24VAC/DC
220240VAC
2
2 8 ON
7
RELAY 6
8
7 5 6 5
t
L48TP...
110VAC
220240VAC On delay
24VAC/DC
1 2 4 8
1.2.4
ON
7
RELAY 6
8
7 5 6 5
t
L48TPB...
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
110VAC
On delay with both instantaneous c/o contacts 110VAC
On delay with one instantaneous c/o contact and
220240VAC 240VAC one late-break c/o contact
2 2
2 1 8 ON 2 1 8 ON
7 7
3 3
1 B 1 B
7 4 3 5 6 4 A
DIP-SWITCH 7 4 3 5 6 4 DIP-SWITCH
A
RELAY RELAY
6 6
8 8
5 5
t
17
17-10
Time relays
Wiring diagrams
L48M...
24240VAC/DC On delay Pulse on relay energising with start on energising

2 1 11 M ON 2 2
5 10 ON
R
10
6
M 5 5
7 7 M
10 4 3 8 9 7
6 F F
R 6
7 1 R
t t1 t2 7 1
T (preset time) = T1+T2 9 0 0
Contacts “M” and “R” are to be volt RELAY 9
11 RELAY 11
free (dry). 8
DIP SWITCH DIP SWITCH
8
t1 t2 t
3 3
1 1
4 4
Flasher starting with OFF Flasher starting with ON
ON 2 2
ON
10 10
5 5
M M
7 7
6
F
6 F
R 7 1 R
7
t t t 0 t t t 1
9 9 0
RELAY 11 DIP SWITCH RELAY 11
8 8 DIP SWITCH
t t t t t t t
3 3
1 1
4 4
17
17-11
Time relays
Modular version
TYPE TM P TM M1 TM M2 TM PL TM D TM ST TM LS
DESCRIPTION
On delay Programmable Programmable Asymmetrical True off For starting Staircase
multifunction multifunction timing recycle delay illumination
Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Single scale
Multivoltage Multivoltage Multivoltage Multivoltage Multivoltage Multivoltage Single voltage
CONTROL CIRCUIT
Rated auxiliary supply 24-48VDC 12-240VAC/DC 24-240VAC/DC 24-48VDC 220-240VAC
voltage Us 24-240VAC 24-240VAC
380-440VAC
Operating voltage range 0.85-1.1 Us
Power consumption (maximum) 1.2VA/0.8W max 0.6VA/0.3W max 1.1VA/0.8W max 0.6VA/0.3W max 0.1VA/0.1W 1.2VA/0.8W max De-energised
(24...48VAC/DC) (12...48VAC/DC) (12...48VAC/DC) (12...48VAC/DC) (24...48VAC/DC) (24...48VAC/DC) 5VA/0.5W max
16VA/0.9W max 1.6VA/1.2W max 1.8VA/1.2W max 1.6VA/1.2W max 1.1VA/0.8W 1.6VA/0.9W max Energised
(110...240VAC/DC) (110...240VAC/DC) (110...240VAC/DC) (110...240VAC/DC) (110...240VAC/DC) (110...240VAC) 12VA/0.8W max
TIMING CIRCUIT
Time setting range Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale
0.1-1s 0.1-1s 0.06-0.6s 0.1-1s 0.5-20min
1-10s 1-10s 0.6-6s 1-10s
6s-60s 6s-60s 6s-60s 6s-60s
1-10min 1-10min 18s-180s 1-10min
6min-1h 6min-1h
1-10h 1h-10h
0.1-1day 0.1-1day
1-10days 1-10days
ON only 3-30days
OFF only 10-100days
Setting accuracy < ±9%

Repeat accuracy < ±0.1% < ±0.5% < ±0.2% < ±0.5%
Influence of < ±0.01% < ±0.5%
voltage variation
Average variation of
set delays related at –20°C < ±0.2% < ±0.25%
to +20°C condition
Minimum power time –– –– –– –– ≥ 200ms –– ––
Minimum ON time — 25ms (no maximum limit) — — ≥60ms (no max lim.)
Resetting during timing ≥ 100ms — ≥ 100ms ≥ 100ms
time elapsed time ≥ 50ms — ≥ 50ms ––
Immunity time for microbreakings ≤ 50ms ≤ 25ms ≤ 15ms ≤ 25ms — ≤ 40ms ≤ 20ms
17 RELAY OUTPUTS
Contact arrangement 1 delayed 1 inst./delayed N/O 1 delayed 2 delayed N/O 1 delayed N/O
changeover + 1 delayed c/o changeover
Maximum switching voltage 250VAC
IEC conventional free air 8A 5A 8A 16A
thermal current (Ith)
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 B300 16A AC1
designation 240VAC
Electrical life (with rated load) 105 cycles
Mechanical life 30x106 cycles
Tightening torque maximum 0.8Nm (7lbin; 7-9lbin per UL)
Conductor section min-max 0.2-4mm2 (24-12 AWG; 12-18 AWG per UL)
INSULATION (input-output)
IEC rated insulation voltage 250V
IEC rated impulse withstand 4kV
voltage
IEC power frequency withstand 2kV
voltage
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature –20...+60°C
Storage temperature –30...+80°C
Housing material Self-extinguishing polyamide
Used at 24-48VDC or 24-240VAC; ≤30ms at 380-440VAC.
NOTE: N/O = normally open / SPST
c/o = changeover / SPDT; inst. = instantaneous.
17-12
Time relays
Plug-in and flush mount version 48x48mm/1.9x1.9”
TYPE L48T... L48TP... L48TPB... L48M...

DESCRIPTION
On delay On delay On delay Programmable
multifunction
Single scale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale
Single voltage Multivoltage Single voltage Multivoltage
CONTROL CIRCUIT
Rated supply 24VAC/DC 24VAC/DC 24VAC/DC 24-240VAC/DC
voltage Us 220-240VAC 110VAC 220-240VAC
220-240VAC
Rated frequency 50-60Hz
Power consumption (maximum) 6VA
Power dissipation (maximum)
TIMING CIRCUIT
Time setting range Single scale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale
0.1-3s 0.3-3s 0.05-1s 0.05-1s
0.1-6s 0.12-12s 0.10-10s 0.1-10s
0.5-30s 10-100s 0.6s-1min 0.6s-1min
0.5-60s 7.8-780s 6s-10min 6s-10min
1s-3min 18s-3min 0.05-1min
3s-6min 72s-12min 0.1-10min
30s-30min 10-100min 0.6min-1h
30s-60min 78-780min 1min-10h
3min-3h
Setting accuracy ±9% ±5%
Repeat accuracy ≤±0.5% ±0.5%
Influence of voltage variation ±0.3% ±0,.
Average variation of
set delays in related at –20°C +2% +2%
to 20°C condition at +60°C –3% –3%
Minimum ON time ––
Resetting during operation ≥ 0.1s ≥ 0.1s ≥ 0.1s ≥ 0.1s
time elasped time ≥ 65ms ≥ 65ms ≥ 65ms ≥ 65ms
Immunity time for microbreakings ≤ 40ms ≤ 40ms ≤ 40ms ≤ 40ms
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of relays 1 1 2 2
Contact arrangement 1 delayed c/o 1 delayed c/o 2 del. or 1 inst. + 1 del. c/o 2 delayed c/o
Maximum switching voltage 250V 17
IEC conventional free air thermal current 5A
(Ith)
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation B300
CONNECTIONS
Tightening torque maximum ––
Conductor section (min-max) ––
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui 250V
IEC power frequency withstand voltage ––
Uimp
IEC power frequency withstand voltage 2kV
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Housing material Self-extinguishing polyamide
Other voltages on request.
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.
NOTE:
del. = delayed inst. = instantaneous c/o = changeover/SPDT
17-13
Pages 18-4 to 8 Pages 18-8 and 9
VOLTAGE MONITORING RELAYS CURRENT MONITORING RELAYS

• For three-phase systems without neutral, • For single-phase systems
three-phase systems with or without • Maximum AC/DC current
neutral and single-phase systems • Minimum or maximum AC/DC current
• Minimum and maximum AC voltage • Minimum and maximum AC/DC current.
• Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence
• Asymmetry
• Minimum and maximum frequency.
Page 18-10 Page 18-11
PUMP PROTECTION RELAYS PHASE SHIFT MONITORING RELAYS

• For single and three-phase systems • For single and three-phase systems
• Minimum cos for dry running protection • Minimum cos
• Maximum AC current • Maximum cos.
• Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence.
Page 18-11 Page 18-12
FREQUENCY MONITORING RELAYS INTERFACE PROTECTION SYSTEM UNITS

• For single and three-phase systems • Compliant with Italian standard CEI 0-21,
• Minimum frequency 06-2012 edition, for low voltage
• Maximum frequency. • Compliant with Italian standard CEI 0-16,
12-2012 edition, for medium voltage.
PROTECTION RELAYS 18
Modular version for switchgear

panels, also suitable for rear
mounting plate fixing
Minimum and maximum voltage
monitoring relays for single and
three-phase systems, with or
without neutral
Voltage asymmetry, phase
sequence and phase loss control
relays
Minimum and maximum current
monitoring relays
Frequency monitoring relay
Interface protection system units
compliant with Italian standards
CEI 0-21 and CEI 0-16.
SEC. - PAGE
Modular voltage monitoring relays
For three-phase systems, without neutral ........................................................................................................................... 18 - 4
For three-phase systems, with or without neutral ............................................................................................................... 18 - 6
For single-phase systems .................................................................................................................................................. 18 - 8
Modular current monitoring relays
For single-phase systems .......................................................................................................................................................... 18 - 8
Modular pump protection relay .......................................................................................... 18 - 10
Modular phase shift monitoring relay .................................................................................. 18 - 11
Modular frequency monitoring relay .................................................................................... 18 - 11
Interface protection system units ....................................................................................... 18 - 12
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 18 - 16
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 18 - 17
C ONTROL
AND
A UTOMATION
Protection relays
Overview
Voltage monitoring relays

for three-phase systems
without neutral
PMV10 PMV20 PMV30 PMV40 PMV50 PMV60 PMV70

Modular version (1U) (2U) (2U) (2U) (2U) (2U) (2U)
Minimum AC voltage
Maximum AC voltage
Phase loss
Incorrect phase sequence
Asymmetry
Page 18-4 18-5 18-6

for three-phase systems
with or without neutral
PMV50N PMV70N PMV80N

Modular version (3U) (3U) (3U)
Minimmum AC voltage
Maximum AC voltage
Phase loss
Neutral loss
Asymmetry
Minimum frequency
Maximum frequency
Page 18-6 18-7
18 Voltage monitoring relay

for single-phase systems
PMV55
Modular version (2U)
Minimum AC voltage
Maximum AC voltage
Page 18-8
18-2
Protection relays
Overview
Current monitoring relays

for single-phase systems
PMA20 PMA30 PMA40

Modular version (2U) (2U) (3U)
Maximum AC/DC current
Minimum or maximum AC/DC current
Minimum and maximum AC/DC current
Page 18-8 18-9
Pump protection relay Phase shift monitoring relay

for single and three-phase for single and three-phase
systems systems
PMA50 PMA60
Modular version (3U) Modular version (3U)
Minimum cos for dry running Minimum cos

pump protection Maximum cos
Maximum AC current Page 18-11
Phase loss
Page 18-10
Frequency monitoring relay for Interface protection system compliant with

single and three-phase systems Italian standard CEI 0-16,
December 2012 edition,
for medium voltage
18
PMF20 PMVF30
Modular version (2U) Version Flush mount (96x96mm/3.78x3.78”)
Minimum frequency only Dual threshold voltage/frequency
Maximum frequency only Voltage release
Page 18-11 Page 18-14
Interface protection system compliant with

Italian standard CEI 0-21,
June 2012 edition,
for low voltage
PMVF20 PMVF50 PMVF51

Version Flush mount (96x96mm/3.78x3.78”) Modular (8U) Modular (6U)
Dual threshold min and max voltage
Dual threshold min and max frequency
Page 18-12 18-13
18-3
Protection relays
For three-phase systems, Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristicz
without neutral to control Ue per – Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for phase loss
(phase to phase) pkg and incorrect phase sequece
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – Phase loss detection if one of the voltages is <70%
rated value
Three-phase system, without neutral. – Phase loss tripping time: 60ms
Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence. Instantaneous trip. – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
PMV10 A440 208-480VAC 1 0.050 – Modular DIN 43880 housing: 1 module for PMV10;
2 module for PMV20
– IEC protection degree: IP40 on front (only when placed
PMV20 A240 100-240VAC 1 0.120 in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at terminals.
PMV20 A575 208-575VAC 1 0.120 Certifications and compliance
PMV20 A600 380-600VAC 1 0.120 Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
PMV10 A440 See page 18-17.
Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics

to control Ue per – Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for minimum
(phase to phase) pkg voltage, phase loss and incorrect phase sequence
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – Configurable rated voltage (Ue):
• PMV30 A240: 208-220-230-240VAC
Three-phase system, without neutral. • PMV30 A575: 380-400-415-440-460-480-525-575VAC
Minimum AC voltage. Delayed trip. – Excellent tripping accuracy
Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence. Instantaneous trip. – TRMS measurements (True Root Mean Square)
PMV30 A240 208-240VAC 1 0.130 – Control of phase-to-phase voltages
– Phase loss detection if one of the voltages is <70%
PMV30 A575 380-575VAC 1 0.130 rated value
PMV30 A600 600VAC 1 0.130 – Phase loss tripping time: 60ms
PMV20... – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 2 module
in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
“V min” Minimum voltage tripping threshold
80-95% Ue
“Delay” Tripping time 0.1-20s
“Reset delay” Resetting time 0.1-20s.
Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
PMV30...
Operational diagram
See page 18-17.
18 Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics

– Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for asymmetry,
to control Ue per
(phase-to-phase) pkg phase loss and incorrect phase sequence
– Excellent tripping accuracy
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg]
– TRMS measurements (True Root Mean Square)
Three-phase system, without neutral. – Control of phase-to-phase voltages
Asymmetry. Delayed trip. – Phase loss detection if one of the voltages is <70%
Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence. Instantaneous trip. rated value
PMV40 A240 208-240VAC 1 0.130 – Phase loss tripping time: 60ms
PMV40 A575 380-575VAC 1 0.130 – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 2 module
PMV40 A600 600VAC 1 0.130 – IEC protection degree: IP40 on front (only when placed
ADJUSTMENTS
“Asymmetry” High voltage asymmetry tripping
threshold 5-15% Ue
PMV40... “Delay” Tripping time 0.1-20s
“Reset delay” Resetting time 0.1-20s
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-17.

18-4 page 18-16 page 18-17 page 18-28
Protection relays
For three-phase systems, Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics
without neutral to control Ue per – Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for minimum
(phase-to-phase) pkg and maximum voltage, phase loss and incorrect phase
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] sequence
– Configurable rated voltage (Ue):
Three-phase system, without neutral. • PMV50 A240: 208-220-230-240VAC
Minimum and maximum AC voltage. Delayed trip. • PMV50 A575: 380-400-415-440-460-480-525-575VAC
Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence. Instantaneous trip. – High tripping accuracy
PMV50 A240 208-240VAC 1 0.130 – TRMS measurements (True Root Mean Square)
– Control of phase-to-phase voltages
PMV50 A575 380-575VAC 1 0.130
PMV50 A600 600VAC 1 0.130 rated value
– Phase loss tripping time: 60ms
in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 on terninals.
ADJUSTMENTS
PMV50... “V max” Maximum voltage tripping threshold
105-115% Ue
80-95% Ue
“Delay” for each Tripping time 0.1-20s

Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices.
Compliant to standards: IEC/EN 60255-5,
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-17.

(phase-to-phase) pkg voltage, phase loss and incorrect phase sequence
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – Configurable rated voltage (Ue):
• PMV60 A240: 208-220-230-240VAC
Three-phase system, without neutral. • PMV60 A575: 380-400-415-440-460-480-525-575VAC
Minimum AC voltage and asymmetry. Delayed trip. – Excellent tripping accuracy
PMV60 A575 380-575VAC 1 0.130
rated value
in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 on terminals.
PMV60... ADJUSTMENTS
80-95% Ue
18
threshold 5-15% Ue

Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed for USA and
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508, CSA
C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-17.
Dimensions Wiring Diagrams Technical characteristics

page 18-16 page 18-17 page 18-29 18-5
Protection relays
without neutral to control Ue per – Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for minimum
(phase to phase) pkg and maximum voltage, phase loss, incorrect phase
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] sequence and asymmetry
– Configurable rated voltage (Ue):
Three-phase system, without neutral. • PMV70 A240: 208-220-230-240VAC
Minimum and maximum AC voltage and asymmetry. • PMV70 A575: 380-400-415-440-460-480-525-575VAC
Delayed trip. – Excellent tripping accuracy
PMV70 A575 380-575VAC 1 0.130
rated value
ADJUSTMENTS
PMV70... “V max” Maximum voltage tripping threshold
105-115% Ue
80-95% Ue
“Delay” for each Tripping delay 0.1-20s
threshold 5-15% Ue.

IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-17.
For three-phase systems Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics
with or without neutral to control Ue per – Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for minimum
(phase to phase) pkg and maximum voltage, phase loss, neutral loss and
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] incorrect phase sequence
– 4 configurable rated voltage (Ue):
Three-phase system, with or without neutral. • PMV50N A240: 208-220-230-240VAC (phase-phase)
Minimum and maximum AC voltage. Delayed trip. 120-127-132-138VAC (phase-neutral)
Phase loss, neutral loss and incorrect phase sequence. • PMV50N A440: 380-400-415-440VAC (phase-phase)
Instantaneous trip. 220-230-240-254VAC (phase-neutral)
PMV50N A240 208-240VAC 1 0.150 • PMV50N A600: 480-525-575-600VAC (phase-phase)
PMV50N A440 380-440VAC 1 0.150 277-303-332-347VAC (phase-neutral)
– Excellent tripping accuracy
PMV50N A600 480-600VAC 1 0.150 – TRMS measurements (True Root Mean Square)
– Phase loss detection when one of the voltages is
<70% rated voltage
– Phase or neutral loss tripping time: 60ms
18 – 2 relay outputs, each with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
PMV50N... – IEC protection degree: IP40 on front (only when
placed in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
“V max” Maximum voltage tripping threshold
105-115% Ue
80-95% Ue
“Reset Delay” Resetting time 0.1-20s.

IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-18.

Protection relays
with or without neutral to control Ue per – Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for minimum
(phase to phase) pkg and maximum voltage, phase loss, neutral loss,
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] incorrect phase sequence and asymmetry
– 4 configurable rated voltage (Ue):
Three-phase system, with or without neutral. • PMV70N A240: 208-220-230-240VAC (phase-phase)
Minimum and maximum AC voltage and asymmetry. 120-127-132-138VAC (phase-neutral)
Delayed trip. • PMV70N A440: 380-400-415-440VAC (phase-phase)
Phase loss, neutral loss and incorrect phase sequence. 220-230-240-254VAC (phase-neutral)
Instantaneous trip. • PMV70N A600: 480-525-575-600VAC (phase-phase)
PMV70N A240 208-240VAC 1 0.150 277-303-332-347VAC (phase-neutral)
PMV70N A440 380-440VAC 1 0.150 – Excellent tripping accuracy
– TRMS measurements (True Root Mean Square)
PMV70N A600 480-600VAC 1 0.150 – Phase loss detection when one of the voltages is
<70% rated value
– 2 relay outputs, each with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
PMV70N... – IEC protection degree: IP40 on front (only when
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
105-115% Ue
80-95% Ue
threshold 5-15% Ue.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-18.

(phase to phase) pkg and maximum voltage, minimum and maximum
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] frequency, phase loss, neutral loss and incorrect
phase sequence
Three-phase system, with or without neutral. – 4 configurable rated voltage (Ue):
Minimum and maximum AC voltage, minimum and maximum • PMV80N A240: 208-220-230-240VAC (phase-phase)
frequency. Delayed trip. 120-127-132-138VAC (phase-neutral)
Phase loss, neutral loss and incorrect phase sequence. • PMV80N A440: 380-400-415-440VAC (phase-phase)
Instantaneous trip. 220-230-240-254VAC (phase-neutral)
PMV80N A240 208-240VAC 1 0.150 • PMV80N A600: 480-525-575-600VAC (phase-phase)
277-303-332-347VAC (phase-neutral)
PMV80N A440 380-440VAC 1 0.150
– Excellent tripping accuracy 18
PMV80N A600 480-600VAC 1 0.150 – TRMS measurements (True Root Mean Square)
rated value
PMV80N... – 2 relay outputs, each with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
– Modular DIN 43880, 3 module
– IEC protection degree: IP40 on front (only when
placed in iP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
105-115% Ue
“V min” Minimum voltage thripping threshold
80-95% Ue
“Hz min/max” Minimum/maximum frequency tripping
threshold 1-10%
“V delay” Tripping time 0.1-20s
“Hz delay” Tripping time 0.1-5s.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-18.

page 18-16 page 18-18 page 18-29 18-7
Protection relays
Voltage monitoring relays.
Voltage monitoring relay Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics
for single-phase systems to control Ue per – Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for minimum
pkg and maximum voltage
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – 4 configurable rated voltage (Ue):
• PMV55 A240: 208-220-230-240VAC
Single-phase system. • PMV55 A440: 380-400-415-440VAC
Minimum and maximum AC voltage. Delayed trip. – Excellent tripping accuracy
PMV55 A240 208-240VAC 1 0.125 – TRMS measurements (True Root Mean Square)
PMV55 A440 380-440VAC 1 0.125 – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
105-115% Ue
80-95% Ue
PMV55... “Delay” for each Tripping time 0.1-20s
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-18.
Current monitoring relay Order code Rated Auxiliary Qty Wt General characteristics
current supply per – Current monitoring relay for AC/DC maximum current
for single-phase systems Ie voltage pkg control, AC/DC multivoltage auxiliary power supply
– Direct connection up to 16A max or by current
[A] [V] n° [kg] transformer (CT)
Single-phase system. – Excellent tripping accuracy
AC/DC maximum current control. – TRMS current measurements (True Root Mean Square)
Auxiliary AC/DC power supply. – Resetting and inhibition input
Automatic or manual reset. – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
PMA20 240 5 or 16A 24-240V 1 0.121 – IEC protection degree: IP40 on front (only when
AC/DC placed in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
"Imax" Maximum current tripping threshold
5-100% Ie
"Hysteresis" Maximum hysteresis thresold
1-50%
"Trip delay" Tripping time 0.1-30s
PMA20 240 "Inhibition time" Tripping delay for external input or at
power up 1-60s
“Aut. reset delay” Automatic resetting time 0.1-30s
“Mode” • Rated current 5A or 16A,
• Relay output normally energised or
18 de-energised
• Tripping memory (Latch) On or Off.

Modular ampere monitoring relays.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-19.

18-8 page 18-16 pages 18-18 and 19 pages 18-28 and 30
Protection relays
For single-phase systems Order code Rated Auxiliary Qty Wt General characteristics
current supply per – Current monitoring relay for AC/DC minimum or
Ie voltage pkg maximum current control; AC/DC multivoltage
auxiliary power supply
[A] [V] n° [kg] – Direct connection up to 16A max or by current
Single-phase system. transformer (CT)
AC/DC minimum or maximum current control. Delayed trip. – Excellent tripping accuracy
Auxiliary AC/DC power supply. – TRMS current measurements (True Root Mean Square)
Automatic or manual reset. – Resetting and inhibition input
PMA30 240 5 or 16A 24-240V 1 0.121 – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 2 module
AC/DC – IEC protection degree: IP40 on front (only when
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
"Set point" Minimum or maximum current tripping
threshold 5-100% Ie
"Hysteresis" Minimum or maximum hysteresis
PMA30 240 threshold 1-50%
"Trip delay" Tripping time 0.1-30s
"Inhibition time" Tripping delay for external input or at
power up 1-60s
“Ie” Current scale selection: 5A or 16A
“Mode” • Min or max function
de-energised
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See pages 18-20 and 21.
Order code Rated Auxiliary Qty Wt General characteristics

current supply per – Current monioring relay for AC/DC minimum and
Ie voltage pkg maximum current control, AC/DC multivoltage auxiliary
power supply
[A] [V] n° [kg] – Direct connection up to 16A max or by current
Single-phase system. transformer (CT)
AC/DC minimum and maximum current control. Delayed trip. – Excellent tripping accuracy
Auxiliary AC/DC power supply. – TRMS current measurements (True Root Mean Square)
Automatic or manual reset. – Automatic or manual resetting (manual resetting by
power removal)
PMA40 240 0.02-0.05- 24-240V 1 0.166 – 2 relay outputs (Min and Max), configurable, each with
0.25-1-5- AC/DC 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
16A – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 3 module
PMA40 240 in iP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
"Imax" Maximum current tripping threshold
"Imin"
5-100% Ie
Minimum current tripping threshold
18
5-100% Ie
"Trip delay" Minimum and maximum current
tripping time 0.1-30s
"Inhibition time" Tripping time at power up 1-60s
“Ie” Current scale selection: 20mA, 50mA,
250mA, 1A, 5A or 16A
“Mode” • Separate or common relay outputs
de-energised

Certifications obtainee: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
Compliant with standards IEC/EN 60255-5,
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram

page 18-16 pages 18-20 to 22 page 18-30 18-9
Protection relays
Pump protection relay
For single and Order code Rated Auxiliary Qty Wt General characteristics
three-phase systems current supply per – Pump protection relay against dry running, auxiliary
Ie voltage pkg AC power supply
[A] [V] n° [kg] – Motor under-load and over-current control
– Direct connection up to 16A max or by current
Single and three-phase systems. transformer (CT)
Maximum AC current and minimum cos. Delayed trip. – Excellent tripping accuracy
Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence. Instantaneous trip. – Voltage control range 80-660VAC
Auxiliary AC power supply. – Current control range 0.1-16A
Automatic or manual reset. – Resetting and enabling consent input
PMA50 A240 5 or 16A 220-240VAC 1 0.251 – 1 relay output relay with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
PMA50 A415 380-415VAC 1 0.251 – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 3 module
PMA50 A480 440-480VAC 1 0.251 in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
"Cos min” Minimum costhreshold 0.1-0.99
(under-load/dry running)
“Imax” Maximum (over) current threshold
PMA50... 10-100%Ie
"Trip delay" Tripping time for minimum cosand
maximum current 0.1-10s
“Inhibition time” Tripping delay for external input or at
power up 1-60s
“Aut. reset delay” Automatic reset time OFF-100min
“Mode” • Rated current 5A or 16A
• Single or three phase
• External reset On or Off.

IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
18

Protection relays
Phase shift monitoring relays.
Frequency monitoring relays
Phase shift monitoring Order code Rated Auxiliary Qty Wt General characteristics
relay for single and current supply per – Minimum and maximum phase shift monitoring relay,
Ie voltage pkg AC auxiliary power supply
three-phase systems [A] [V] n° [kg] – Direct connection up to 16A max or by current
transformer (CT)
Single and three-phase systems. – Excellent tripping accuracy
Minimum and maximum cos control. Delayed trip. – Voltage control range 80-660VAC
AC auxiliary power supply. – Current control range 0.1-16A
Automatic or manual reset. – Automatic or manual resetting (manual resetting by
PMA60 A240 16A 220-240VAC 1 0.254 power removal)
PMA60 A415 380-415VAC 1 0.254 – 2 relay outputs (Min and Max), configurable, each with
1 changeover contact (SPDT)
PMA60 A480 440-480VAC 1 0.254 – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 3 module
placed in iP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
"Cos min” Minimum costhreshold
0.1-0.99 inductive
PMA60...
"Trip delay" Tripping time for minimum cos
0.1-30s
"Cos max” Maximum inductive costhreshold
0.1-0.99
“Trip delay” Tripping time for maximum cos
0.1-30s
“Inhibition time” Tripping delay at power up 1-60s
“Mode” • Single or three phase
• Relay outputs normally energised or
de-energised
Certificartions and compliance

IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
Frequency monitoring Order code Rated voltage Ue Qty Wt General characteristics

relay for single and per – Frequency monitoring relay, self powered, for
pkg minimum and maximum control
three-phase systems [V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – Rated frequency selection: 50 or 60Hz
– Tripping threshold for minimum and maximum
Single and three-phase systems. frequency
Minimum and maximum frequency. Delayed trip. – Excellent tripping accuracy
Automatic reset. – 1 relay output, configurable, with 1 changeover
PMF20 A240 220-240VAC 1 0.125 contact (SPDT)
PMF20 A415 380-415VAC 1 0.125 – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 2 module
18
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
“Hz max” Maximum frequency tripping threshold
+1 to +10%
“Hz min” Minimum frequency tripping threshold
PMF20... -1 to -10%
“Mode” • Minimum and maximum frequency
• Output relay energised at maximum
frequency
• Output relay energised at minimum
frequency
• Output relay de-energised at maximum
frequency.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
ßCSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-24.

page 18-16 pages 18-23 and 24 page 18-31 and 32 18-11
Protection relays
Interface protection system units compliant with Italian standard CEI 0-21, June 2012 edition
For low voltage Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics
Control Auxiliary per PMVF20 interface protection system (SPI) unit has been
pkg developed according to the Italian CEI 0-21 standard
[V] [V] n° [kg] prescriptions of the June 2012 edition. It is used when a
local generating system is connected in parallel with the
Three-phase system, with or without neutral, in low voltage. low-voltage power grid of a power supplier. The controls
Dual threshold minimum and maximum voltage and refer to limits of voltage and frequency monitoring.
frequency protection. In the case when either the voltage or the frequency
Flush mount type. are out of admissible limits, the SPI must step in by
PMVF 20 100-400VAC/ 1 0.568 de-energising a relay output so that the interface device
230VAC 110-250VDC (DDI) trips.
400VAC PMVF20 is equipped with 4 inputs having the following
PMVF 20 D048 12-48VDC 1 0.580
functions:
PMVF 20... – DDI status feedback
– External signal for frequency selection
(communication network malfunction)
– Local control for frequency selection
– Remote tripping (forced DDI opening independent of
voltage and frequency values)
– DDI opening and closing
Voltage threshold per CEI 0-21 Type of protection Tripping Tripping – Standby device opening (programmable: retentive
threshold time normally energised, retentive normally de-energised or
Maximum voltage 59.S2 1.15Un 0.2s adjustable pulse).
The standby device control is compulsory in installations
Maximum voltage 59.S1 1.10Un 3s with more than 20kW and consists of a signal, with a
(moving mean over 10min) 0.5s delay respect to the DDI opening command,
Minimum voltage 27.S1 0.85Un 0.4s transmitted only if the DDI fails and does not complete
Minimum voltage 27.S2 0.4Un 0.2s the disconnection.
By fitting the EXP10 03 expansion module on the
PMVF20, the following functions can be configured as:
Frequency threshold per CEI 0-21 Type of protection Tripping Tripping – Programmable alarm
threshold time – Autonomous signalling in case of power limit
unbalance (LSP), only if three CTs are also installed.
High external signal and low local control conditions.
Maximum frequency 81>.S2 51.5Hz 0.1s Operational characteristics
Minimum frequency 81<.S2 47.5Hz 0.1s – Auxiliary voltage:
• PMVF 20: 100…400VAC/110…250VDC
Low external signal and high local control conditions. • PMVF 20 D048: 12…48VDC
Maximum frequency 81>.S2 51.5Hz 1s – Voltage inputs:
Minimum frequency 81<.S2 47.5Hz 4s • 400VAC (three-phase connection)
• 230VAC (sing-phase connection)
High conditions for both external signal and local control. – Relay outputs 5A 250VAC AC1 / 5A 30VDC
Maximum frequency 81>.S2 50.5Hz 0.1s – 4 digital inputs
Minimum frequency 81<.S2 49.5Hz 0.1s – Current inputs (optional): Use via CTs with selectable
/5A or /1A secondary
NOTE: Low conditions for both external signal and local – Support of EXP series communications ports (USB,
control are not taken into consideration by the standard. RS232, RS485, Ethernet) see section 28
– Housing: Flush mount 96x96mm/3.78x3.78”
– Degree of protection: IP65 on front; IP20 on terminals
Order code Description – Predisposed for IEC/EN 61850 signal supervision
using expansion or external module.
Reference standards
Compliant with standards: Italian CEI 0-21;
18 EXPANSION MODULES FOR PMVF20. IEC/EN 60255-5, IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2,
For independent signal in case of power limit unbalance (LSP). IEC/EN 61000-6-3.
EXP10 03 2 relay outputs 5A 250VAC Note for Italian CEI 0-21 standard, June 2012 edition:
Communication ports. According to standard prescriptions, once the installation
is completed, the interface protection must be tested by
EXP10 18 IEC/EN 61850 interface the installer using a relay test box which controls the trip
EXP10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface thresholds and timing.
EXP10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface
Operational diagram
EXP10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface See page 18-25.
EXP10 13 Opto-isolated Ethernet interface
EXP10 03
Adapter for pre-existing cutout. Programming software
software is available for future PMVF20
PMVF X00 Consisting of 2 RAL 7035 finish plates for parameter configuration change and saving.
154x102.5mm/6.06x4.04” cutout and Since PMVF20 is standard-supplied pre-programmed,
fixing screws with specific default settings as per the Italian standard
IEC/EN 61850 protocol CEI 0-21, it can be put in service immediately without
The EXP10 18 module will be made available only when having to change any programming. Setup editing is
the competent authorities have established the exact password protected so that parameter settings cannot be
terms of the supervision and control of the specific tampered with by unauthorised personnel.
commands (currently under study as specified in the
Italian CEI 0-21 standard).
Accessories Expansion modules Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

18-12 page 18-15 page 28-2 page 18-16 page 18-25 page 18-34
Protection relays
Interface protection system units compliant with Italian standard CEI 0-21, June 2012 edition
For low voltage Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics
Control Auxiliary per PMVF50/PMVF51 interface protection system (SPI) unit
pkg has been developed according to the Italian CEI 0-21
[V] [V] n° [kg] standard prescriptions of the June 2012 edition. Each is
used when a local solar generating system is connected
Three-phase system, with or without neutral, in low voltage. in parallel with the low-voltage power grid of a power
Dual threshold minimum and maximum voltage and supplier. The controls refer to limits of voltage and
frequency protection. frequency monitoring.
Modular type with 4 relay outputs. In the case when either the voltage or the frequency
PMVF 50 230VAC 100-240VAC/ 1 0.615 are out of admissible limits, the SPI must step in by
400VAC 110-250VDC de-energising a relay output so that the interface device
Three-phase system with or without neutral in low voltage. (DDI) trips.
PMVF 50 PMVF50/51 is equipped with 4 inputs having the
Dual threshold minimum and maximum voltage and
frequency protection. following functions:
Modular type with 2 relay outputs. – DDI status feedback
– External signal for frequency selection
PMVF 51 230VAC 100-240VAC/ 1 0.470 (communication network malfunction)
400VAC 110-250VDC – Local control for frequency selection
– Remote tripping (forced DDI opening, independent of
voltage and frequency values)
– DDI opening and closing
– Standby device opening (programmable: retentive
normally energised, retentive normally de-energised or
adjustable pulse).
The standby device control is compulsory in installations
PMVF 51 with more than 20kW and consists of a signal, with a
0.5s delay respect to the DDI opening command,
Voltage threshold per CEI 0-21 Type of protection Tripping Tripping transmitted only if the DDI failed and did not complete
threshold time the disconnection.
Maximum voltage 59.S2 1.15Un 0.2s PMVF50 also has two additional relay outputs (optional
for PMVF51) to configure as:
Maximum voltage 59.S1 1.10Un 3s – Programmable alarm
(moving mean over 10min) – Autonomous signalling in case of power limit
Minimum voltage 27.S1 0.85Un 0.4s unbalance (LSP), only if three CTs are also installed.
Minimum voltage 27.S2 0.4Un 0.2s
– Auxiliary voltage: 100-240VAC/110-250VDC
Frequency threshold per CEI 0-21 Type of protection Tripping Tripping – Voltage inputs:
threshold time • 400VAC (three-phase connection)
• 230VAC (single-phase connection)
High external signal and low local control conditions. – Relay outputs 5A 250VAC AC1 / 5A 30VDC
Maximum frequency 81>.S2 51.5Hz 0.1s – 4 digital inputs
Maximum frequency 81<.S2 47.5Hz 0.1s – Current inputs (optional): Use via CTs with selectable
/5A or /1A secondary
Low external signal and high local control conditions. – Support of EXM series communications inputs (USB,
Maximum frequency 81>.S2 51.5Hz 1s RS232, RS485, Ethernet) see section 28
Minimum frequency 81<.S2 47.5Hz 4s – Modular housing:
• PMVF50: 8 module
High conditions for both external signal and local control. • PMVF51: 6 module
Maximum frequency 81>.S2 50.5Hz 0.1s – Degree of protection for both: IP40 on front; IP20 on
Minimum frequency 81<.S2 49.5Hz 0.1s terminals
– Predisposed for IEC/EN 61850 signal supervision
NOTE: Low conditions for both external signal and local using expansion or external module.
control are not taken into consideration by the standard.
Reference standards 18
Order code Description Compliant with standards: Italian CEI 0-21;
IEC/EN 60255-5, IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2,
IEC/EN 61000-6-3.
EXPANSION MODULES FOR PMVF50 AND PMVF51. Note for Italian CEI 0-21 standard, June 2012 edition:
Communication ports. According to standard prescriptions, once the installation
EXM10 18 IEC/EN 61850 interface is completed, the interface protection must be tested by
EXM10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface the installer using a relay test box which controls the trip
thresholds and timing.
EXM10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface
EXM10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface Operational diagram
EXM10 13 Opto-isolated Ethernet interface See pages 18-25 and 26.
Inputs and outputs for PMVF51 only. Programming software
EXM10 01 2 digital opto-isolated inputs and 2 relay software is available for future PMVF50/
outputs 5A 250VAC PMVF51 parameter configuration change and saving.
EXM10... Since PMVF50/PMVF51 is standard-supplied
IEC/EN 61850 protocol pre-programmed, with specific default factory settings as
The EXM10 18 module will be made available only when per the Italian standard CEI 0-21, it can be put in service
the competent authorities have established the exact immediately without having to change any programming.
terms of the supervision and control of the specific Setup editing is password protected so that parameter
commands (currently under study as specified in the settings cannot be tampered with by unauthorised
Italian CEI 0-21 standard). personnel.
Expansion modules Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

page 28-2 page 18-16 pages 18-25 and 26 page 18-35 18-13
Protection relays
Interface protection system units compliant with Italian standard CEI 0-16, December 2012 edition
For medium voltage Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics
Control Auxiliary per PMVF30 interface protection system (SPI) unit has been
pkg developed according to the Italian CEI 0-16 standard
[V] [V] n° [kg] prescriptions of the December 2012 edition. It is used
when a local generating system is connected in parallel
Medium-voltage system. with the medium-voltage network of a power supplier.
Dual threshold minimum and maximum voltage and The controls refer to limits of voltage and frequency
frequency protection. monitoring.
Flush mount type. In the case when either the voltage or the frequency
PMVF 30 Measure- 100-400VAC/ 1 0.566 are out of admissible limits, the SPI must step in by
ments via 110-250VDC de-energising a relay output so that the interface device
PMVF 30 D048 VTs in MV or 12-48VDC 1 0.566 (DDI) trips.
direct in LV PMVF30 is equipped with inputs having the following
functions:
– DDI status feedback
– Interface protection system exclusion
PMVF 30... – Local control
– Remote tripping (forced DDI opening, independent of
Voltage threshold per CEI 0-16 Type of protection Tripping Tripping voltage and frequency values).
threshold time In addition, there are two relay outputs to configure as:
Maximum voltage 59.S2 1.2Un 0.6s – DDI opening
– Programmable output (default factory programmed as
Maximum voltage 59.S1 1.1Un 3s standby device opening or set up for automatic
(moving mean over 10min) reclosing if the DDI is an automatic circuit breaker).
Minimum voltage 27.S1 0.85Un 0.4s
Minimum voltage 27.S2 0.4Un 0.2s Standby device opening
In installations with more than 400kW, the standard
Maximum residual 5% 3 Un 25s specifies there must be a command signal, that releases
voltage 59.V0 (59N) another standby device, given within 1 second whenever
the DDI opening fails or malfunctions.
Frequency threshold per CEI 0-16 Type of protection Tripping Tripping Automatic DDI reclosing
Frequency protection at voltage release threshold time Whenever an automatic circuit breaker is used as the
Configuration in standard conditions. DDI, the PMVF30 is capable of controlling both the
opening (according to the installation conditions
Maximum frequency 81>.S2 51.5Hz 1s indicated in the Italian CEI 0-16 standard) and the
Minimum frequency 81<.S2 47.5Hz 4s automatic reclosing. The supervision of the automatic
Limited configuration in case of local control or voltage reclosing includes defining the number of attempts and
release condition the time interval between an attempt and the subsequent
one and generating an alarm when the final closing
Maximum frequency 81>.S2 50.2Hz 0.15s malfunction so does not take place.
Minimum frequency 81<.S2 49.8Hz 0.15s This function can be carried out through a programmable
– Voltage release functions output of the PMVF30, either the built-in standard
supplied unless it is already used for the standby device
Maximum residual 5% 3 Un - operation or by installing an optional EXP10 03
voltage 59.V0 (59N) expansion module.
Minimum direct sequence 70% Un -
voltage 27.Vd Operational characteristics
Maximum inverse sequence 15% Un - – Auxiliary voltage:
voltage 59.Vi • PMVF30: 100-400VAC/110-250VDC
• PMVF30D048: 12-48VDC
– Voltage inputs (connection via VTs in MV or directly in
LV end):
Order code Description • Primary: 400-150,000V
18 • Secondary: 50-500V (for voltage/frequency);
EXPANSION MODULES FOR PMVF30. 50-150V (for residual voltage measurement)
For automatic reclosing supervision of automatic circuit – Relay outputs 5A 250VAC AC1 / 5A 30VDC
breaker (DDI). – 4 digital inputs
EXP10 03 2 relay outputs 5A 250VAC – 3 current inputs (for optional measuring): Use via CTs
with selectable /5A or /1A secondary
Communication ports. – Support of EXP series communications puts (USB,
EXP10 18 IEC/EN 61850 interface RS232, RS485, Ethernet); see section 28
EXP10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface – Housing: Flush mount 96x96mm/3.78x3.78”
– Degree of protection: IP65 on front; IP20 on terminals
EXP10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface – Predisposed for IEC/EN 61850 signal supervision
EXP10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface using expansion or external module.
EXP10...
EXP10 13 Opto-isolated Ethernet interface
Reference standards
Adapter for pre-existing cutout. Compliant with standards: Italian CEI 0-16;
PMVF X00 Consisting of 2 RAL 7035 finish plates for IEC/EN 60255-5, IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2,
154x102.5mm/6.06x4.04” cutout and IEC/EN 61000-6-3.
fixing screws
IEC/EN 61850 protocol Operational diagram
The EXP10 18 module will be made available only when See page 18-27.
the competent authorities have established the exact
terms of the supervision and control of the specific Programming software
commands (currently under study as specified in the software is available for future PMVF30
Italian CEI 0-16 standard). parameter configuration change and saving.
Since PMVF30 is standard-supplied pre-programmed,
with specific default factory settings as per the Italian
standard CEI 0-21, it can be put in service immediately
without having to change any programming. Setup
editing is password protected so that parameter settings
cannot be tampered with by unauthorised personnel.
Accessories Expansion modules Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

18-14 page 18-15 page 28-2 page 18-16 page 18-27 page 18-33
Protection relays
Accessories for PMVF20 and PMVF30.
Maximum combination
Order code Description Qty Wt General characterisics

per The adapter for pre-existing cutout is an accessory to
pkg install the PMVF20 or PMVF30 in place of other similar
n° [kg] previously mounted devices.
PMVF X00 Adapter for pre-existing 1 0.300
cutout consisting of 2
RAL 7035 finish plates for
154x102.5mm/6.06x4.04”
cutout and fixing screws
Maximum combination for PMVF 20 and PMVF 30 types

In addition to the two standard-supplied modules, another two expansion modules (one per type) can be installed from the following indicated below.
MAX
2 EXP10 03 EXP10 18
Used as: Ethernet interface
1. Unbalance limit signal (LSP) for PMVF 20 according to IEC/EN 61850
or for automatic reclosing control of circuit
breaker for PMVF 30.
2. Programmable alarm.
EXP10 10 EXP10 11 EXP10 12 EXP10 13

USB RS232 RS485 Ethernet
SLOT SLOT SLOT SLOT interface interface interface TCP/IP
1 2 3 4 interface
Maximum combination for PMVF 50 type

In addition to the two standard-supplied modules, one only other expansion module
(for communication purposes) can be installed from the following indicated.
EXM10 18 EXM10 10 EXM10 11

Ethernet interface USB RS232
per IEC/EN 61850 interface interface
MAX
1
18
EXM10 12 EXM10 13
RS485 Ethernet
interface TCP/IP
interface
Maximum combination for PMVF 51 type

In addition to the standard-supplied module (1), another two
expansion modules (one per type) can be installed from the
following indicated.
EXM10 01
Used as:
1. Unbalance limit signal (LSP).
2. Programmable alarm.
MAX
2
18-15
Protection relays
PROTECTION RELAYS
PMV10... PMV... - PMF20 PMV...N - PMA40... -
PMA20... - PMA30... PMA50... - PMA60... - PMVF10
17.5 5 35.8 5 58.1 (2.29") 5 58 (2.28")

(0.69") (0.20") 58 (2.28") (1.41") (0.20") 43.8 (1.72") 53.5 (2.11") (0.20") 43.7 (1.72")
43.7 (1.72")
104.7 (4.12")
104.7 (4.12")
104.7 (4.12")
98.3 (3.87")
)
98.3 (3.87")
98.3 (3.87")
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
(
Ø4.2 Ø4.2 59.9 (2.36")
Ø4.2 59.9 (2.36") (0.16")
(0.16")
(0.16")
INTERFACE PROTECTION SYSTEM UNITS FOR LOW VOLTAGE

PMVF 20... PMVF 50
Cutout
63 (2.48”)
43.8 (1.72”)
19 92 (3.62”) 35.8 5 42.7
26.3 144 (5.67”) (0.20”)
96 (3.78”) (1.03”) 53.2 (2.09”) (0.75”) (1.41”) (1.68”)
105.4 (4.15”)
63.5 (2.50”)
45 (1.77”)
99.5 (3.92”)
64.5 (2.54”)
90 (3.54”)
96 (3.78”)
92 (3.62”)
61.5 (2.42”) EXM 10... 36.4

EXP 10 03 (1.43”)
PMVF 51
63 (2.48”)
43.8 (1.72”)
5 42.7
108 (4.25”) 35.8 35.8 (0.20”)
(1.41”) (1.41”) (1.68”)
105.4 (4.15”)
63.5 (2.50”)
45 (1.77”)
90 (3.54”)
EXM 10... EXM 10... 36.4

(1.43”)
INTERFACE PROTECTION SYSTEM UNIT FOR MEDIUM VOLTAGE

PMVF 30 Cutout
26.3 19 92 (3.62”)
96 (3.78”) (1.03”) 53.2 (2.09”) (0.75”)
18
99.5 (3.92”)
64.5 (2.54”)
96 (3.78”)
92 (3.62”)
61.5 (2.42”)
EXP10...
Cutout adapter
PMVF X00
107 (4.21”)
(0. Ø4 1 1
16 (0.04”) (0.04”)
”)
92 (3.62”)
1 1
161 (6.34”)
177 (6.97”)
92 (3.62”)
70 (2.75”)
18-16
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Voltage monitoring relays for Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence (PMV10-PMV20-PMV30-PMV40-PMV50-PMV60- MV70)
3-phase systems without neutral Reset delay Reset delay Reset delay
PMV10 - PMV20 - PMV30 - PMV40 L1 L2
PMV50 - PMV60 - PMV70
L2 L1
L1 L3
L2 L3
L3
ON ON
L1 L2 L3
TRMS MAX MAX
MIN MIN
14 12 11
ASYMMETRY ASYMMETRY
11 14 11
14
12 12
Maximum and minimum voltage (PMV30 - PMV50 - PMV60 - PMV70)

Reset delay MAX Delay Reset delay MIN Delay Reset delay
Set up V MAX
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Set up V MIN
L1 - L2 - L3
ON
V MAX
V MIN
14
11
12
Asymmetry (PMV40 - PMV60 - PMV70)

Reset delay Trip delay Reset delay
Set point
asymmetry
Hysteresis
L1 - L2 - L3
On
ASYMMETRY
14
11
12
18
18-17
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Voltage monitoring relays for Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence (PMV50N - PMV70N - PMV80N)
3-phase systems c/w or w/o neutral Reset delay Reset delay Reset delay Reset delay
PMV50N - PMV60N - PMV70N
L1 L1
L2 L2
L1
L3 L3
L2
L3 N ❶ N
N
ON ON
TRMS
MAX MAX
Min Max MIN MIN

14 12 11 24 22 21
ASYMMETRY ASYMMETRY
14 14
V MIN relay 11 V MIN relay 11
12 12
24 24
V MAX relay 21 V MAX relay 21
22 22
❶ Neutral loss only with VL-N monitoring
Maximum and minimum voltage (PMV50N - PMV70N - PMV80N)

Reset delay Reset delay Reset delay Reset delay Reset delay
Set up V MAX
Hysteresis
Ue
Hysteresis
Set up V MIN
Ue
ON
V MAX
V MIN
14
V MIN relay 11
12
V MAX relay 21 24
22
Asymmetry (PMV70N) Maximum and minimum frequency (PMV80N)

Reset delay Trip delay Reset delay Reset delay MAX delay Reset delay MIN delay Reset delay
Max frequency
Set point asymmetry Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Hz
Hysteresis
Min frequency
Ue
ON Ue
ASYMMETRY
Hz
18 V MIN relay 11
14
12 ON
V MAX relay 21 24
22 14
V MIN relay 11
12
V MAX relay 21 24
22
Voltage monitoring relay for 1-phase systems

PMV55
A1 Reset delay MAX Delay Reset delay MIN Delay Reset delay
A2
A1 A2 Set up V MAX
TRMS Hysteresis
14 12 11 Hysteresis
Set up V MIN
V MAX
V MIN
ON
14
11
12
A1
A2
18-18
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Current monitoring relay for 1-phase systems

PMA20 Operation with tripping latch (Latch ON)
A1
Single-phase connection with CT A2
L
N O
L A ON
D
C(-)
B1
Reset A1
16A
C Y
METER
Inhibition time
Trip Max current

A1 A2 Y 14 12 11
t >trip delay t > trip delay t < trip delay
C
Inhibition or
Reset Threshold Max current
Hysteresis Max current
Single-phase direct connection

L
N(-) O Inhibition Inhibition Inhibition
L(+) A
D Positions
C(-)
D E D E
B1
C F C F
14
B G OR B G Relay ON
H H
11
16A A A
12
METER
D E D E
C F C F 14
B G OR B G Relay OFF
11
A H A H
12
A1 A2 Y 14 12 11
C
Inhibition or
Reset
Three-phase connection with CT

(1 phase control)
L1 L
L2 O
L3
A
D
Operation with no tripping latch (Latch OFF)
A1
C(-)
B1
A2
16A
METER ON
Inhibition A1
C Y
A1 A2 Y 14 12 11
Inhibition or Inhibition time

C
Reset
Trip Max current

Three-phase direct connection t < trip delay t > trip delay t < trip delay
(1 phase control) Threshold Max current
L1 L
O Hysteresis Max current
L2
A
L3 D
C(-)
B1
Inhibition Inhibition Inhibition

16A Positions
METER
18
D E D E
C F C F
Relay ON 14
B G OR B G
A H A H 11
12
A1 A2 Y 14 12 11 D E D E
C F C F
Relay OFF 14
B G OR B G
11
C
Inhibition or A H A H
Reset 12
Operation
Mode Ie Relay Latch
output
A 5A OFF OFF
B ON
C ON OFF
D ON
E 16A OFF OFF
F ON
G ON OFF
H ON
18-19
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Current monitoring relay for Maximum current control operation with tripping latch (Latch ON)
1-phase systems A1
A2
PMA30
Single-phase connection by CT ON
L
N O
L A Reset A1
D
C Y
C(-)
B1
Inhibition time
16A
METER
Trip Max current
t > trip delay t > trip delay t < trip delay
Threshold Max current
A1 A2 Y 14 12 11 Hysteresis Max current
C
Inhibition or
Reset
Positions Inhibition Inhibition Inhibition

Single-phase direct connection
D E
C F
L G
14
N(-) O
B Relay ON
A H 11
L(+) A
D 12
D E
C(-)
C F 14
B1
B G Relay OFF
11
A H
16A 12
METER
A1 A2 Y 14 12 11
C
Inhibition or
Reset
Maximum current control operation with no tripping latch (Latch OFF)
A1
Three-phase connection by CT A2
(1 phase control)
L1 L ON
L2 O
A
L3 D
Inhibition A1
C
C(-)
Y
B1
16A
Inhibition time
METER
Trip Max current

t < trip delay t > trip delay t < trip delay
A1 A2 Y 14 12 11 Threshold Max current
Inhibition or Hysteresis Max current

C
Reset

Three-phase direct connection
(1 phase control) C
D E
F
14
L B G Relay ON
L1 11
O A H
L2 12
18
A
L3 D D E
C F 14
Relay OFF
C(-)
11
B1
B G
A H 12
16A
METER
Minimum current control operation with tripping latch (Latch ON)

A1 A2 Y 14 12 11 A1
A2
C
Inhibition or
Reset
ON
Operation Reset A1
C Y
Mode Function Relay Latch
output
A Minimum OFF OFF Inhibition time
B current ON
C ON OFF Trip Min current
D ON t > trip delay t > trip delay t < trip delay
E Maximum OFF OFF
Hysteresis Min current
F current ON
Threshold Min current
G ON OFF
H ON
D E
C F 14
B G Relay ON
11
A H
12
D E
C F 14
B G Relay OFF
11
A H
12
18-20
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Minimum current control operation with no tripping latch (Latch OFF)

A1
A2
ON
Inhibition A1
C Y
Inhibition time
Trip Min current

t < trip delay t > trip delay t < trip delay

D E
C F
14
B G Relay ON
H
11
A
12
D E
C F 14
Relay OFF
B G 11
A H 12
Current monitoring relay for

1-phase systems Operation with tripping latch (Latch ON)
A1
PMA40 A2
Single-phase connection by CT ON
L
N O
L A
D Inhibition time
C(-)
B1
B2
B3
Trip Max current

16A
1A
50mA
t > trip delay t < trip delay

METER Trip Min current
MIN current MAX current
Threshold Max current
A1 A2 14 12 11 24 22 21
Single-phase direct connection Inhibition Inhibition Inhibition

L Positions
N(-) O
L(+) A
Relay 24
D 21
C
D E
F
MAX ON
22
C(-)
G Separate
B1
B2
B3
B
A H
Relay 14
MIN ON 11
16A
1A
50mA
12
METER
Relay 24
B
C
D E
F
G
MAX OFF
Separate
21
22 18
A H
A1 A2 14 12 11 24 22 21 14
Relay 11
MIN OFF
12
D E
C F
Three-phase connection by CT B G Common 14-24
(1 phase control) A H relays ON 11-21
12-22
L1 L
L2 O
A C
D E
F
L3 D
B G Common 14-24
A H
relays OFF 11-21
C(-)
12-22
B1
B2
B3
16A
1A
50mA
METER
A1 A2 14 12 11 24 22 21
18-21
Relay protection
Wiring diagrams
Three-phase direct connection Operation with no tripping latch (Latch OFF)

(1 phase control) A1
A2
L1 L
L2 O
A
L3 D ON
C(-)
B1
B2
B3
Inhibition time
16A
1A
50mA
METER Trip Max current
MIN current MAX current t > trip delay t < trip delay
Trip Min current
A1 A2 14 12 11 24 22 21 Threshold Max current


Operation
Mode Operation Relay Latch Inhibition
output Positions
A Separate OFF OFF 24
Relay
B relays ON C
D E
F
MAX ON 21
22
C ON OFF B G Separate
A H
D ON Relay 14
11
E Common OFF OFF MIN ON
12
F relays ON
G ON OFF
H ON Relay 24
D E MAX OFF 21
C F
22
B G Separate
A H
14
Relay 11
MIN OFF
12
D E
C F
B G Common 14-24
A H relays ON 11-21
12-22
D E
C F
B G Common 14-24
A H
relays OFF 11-21
12-22
Pump protection - motor under-load/over-current monitoring

PMA50 External reset disabled (OFF)
A1
A2
Three-phase connection by CT
L1 L
L2 O ON
A
L3 D
L2/N
L1/L
Reset A1
B1
L3
C
C
Y
16A 600V
METER Inhibition time
Trip Max current
18 A1 A2 Y 14 12 11 t < trip delay t > trip delay

Trip Min cosϕ
C Enable
t < trip delay t > trip delay
14
Relay
11
Three-phase direct connection 12
L1 L
O Threshold Max current
L2
A Hysteresis Max current
L3 D
L2/N
L1/L
Hysteresis Min cosϕ

B1
L3
C
Threshold Min cosϕ

16A 600V
METER
Inhibition Inhibition Inhibition
A1 A2 Y 14 12 11
C Enable
18-22
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Single-phase connection by CT External reset enabled (ON)

L1 L A1
N O A2
A
D
L2/N
L1/L ON
B1
L3
C
16A 600V
Reset A1
METER C Y
Inhibition time
A1 A2 Y 14 12 11
Trip Max current
C Enable
Trip Min cosϕ

Operation
Mode Ie Connection External 14
reset Relay
11
A 5A 1 phase OFF 12
B ON Threshold Max current
C 3 phase OFF Hysteresis Max current
D ON
E 16A 1 phase OFF
Threshold Min cosϕ
F ON
G 3 phase OFF
Inhibition Inhibition Inhibition Inhib.
H ON
Phase shift monitoring relay

PMA60
Operation with tripping latch (Latch ON)
A1
Three-phase connection by CT A2
L1 L
L2 O
A ON
L3 D
L2/N
L1/L
B1
Inhibition time
C
16A 600V
METER Trip Max cosϕ

MIN cosϕ MAX cosϕ
Trip Min cosϕ
Threshold Max cosϕ
A1 A2 14 12 11 24 22 21
Hysteresis Max cosϕ

Threshold Min cosϕ
Three-phase direct connection Inhibition Inhibition Inhibition
L1 L
L2 O
A
L3 D Positions
L2/N
L1/L
D E
B1
C F
C
B G
Relay 24
A H
MAX ON 21
16A 600V
22
METER OR
MIN cosϕ MAX cosϕ

B
C
D E
F
G
Relay
MIN ON 11
14
18
A H 12
A1 A2 14 12 11 24 22 21
D E
C F
B G 24
A H Relay
MAX OFF 21
22
OR
C
D E
F Relay 14
B G MIN OFF 11
A H 12
18-23
Relay protection
Wiring diagrams
Single-phase connection by CT Operation with no tripping latch (Latch OFF)

L1 L A1
N O A2
A
D
L2/N
L1/L
ON
B1
C
16A 600V
Inhibition time
METER
MIN cosϕ MAX cosϕ
Trip Max cosϕ
Trip Min cosϕ
A1 A2 14 12 11 24 22 21
Threshold Max cosϕ
Hysteresis Max cosϕ
Operation Hysteresis Min cosϕ

Mode Connection Relay Latch Threshold Min cosϕ
output
Inhibition
A 1 phase OFF OFF
B ON
C ON OFF Positions
D ON C
D E
F
E 3 phase OFF OFF B G
Relay 24
A H
F ON MAX ON 21
22
G ON OFF OR
D E
H ON C F Relay 14
B G MIN ON 11
A H 12
D E
C F
B G 24
A H Relay
21
MAX OFF 22
OR
C
D E
F Relay 14
B G MIN OFF 11
A H 12

PMF20 MAX-MIN, MAX or MIN function MAX function
A1
A2 Reset delay MAX Delay Reset delay MIN Delay Reset delay
A1 A2
F. Detect
Set Hz MAX
Hysteresis
14 12 11 Rated MAX Delay Reset delay

frequency
Hysteresis Set Hz MAX

Hysteresis
Set Hz MIN
Rated
frequency
A1 - A2
18 Hz MAX A1 - A2
Hz MIN Hz MAX
ON ON
14 14
Relay 11 Relay 11
12 12
18-24
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Interface protection systems compliant with Italian CEI 0-21 standard, June 2012 edition - For low voltage
PMVF 20...
Three-phase connection
LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION LINE
L1 L2 L3 N (OPTION) DDI
TA1
TA2
TA3 GENERATION
Rear view
IN1 – DDI Feedback
IN2 – Frequency window choice ON
1 2
I1 I2 I3
IN3 – Local control OPTIONAL S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
PMVF 20 IN4 – Remote tripping EXP10 03
OUTPUTS
OPTION
OPTION
INPUTS
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4
12...48VDC❶ V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 OUTPUTS OUTPUTS
100...400VAC DIGITAL INPUTS
110...250VDC I1 I2 I3
VOLTAGE
CURRENT INPUTS
--- + INPUTS
A1 A2 400VAC 11 12 14 21 22 24 + COM - IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 11 12 14 21 22 24
A1/- A2/+ V1 V2 V3 VN
LSP PROGRAMMABLE
STANDBY DEVICE PROTECTION ALARM
DDI ❷
AUXILIARY A1
SUPPLY A2
A1
For PMVF 20 D048 only.
RELAY SUPPLY
250VAC MAX A2 Local control choice.
PMVF 50
LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION LINE
L1 L2 L3 N (OPTION) DDI
TA1
TA2
TA3 GENERATION
IN1 – DDI feedback IN3 – Frequency window choice

PMVF 50 IN2 – Local control IN4 – Remote tripping
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4
V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 OUTPUTS OUTPUTS
100...240VAC
110...250VDC I1 I2 I3 DIGITAL INPUTS DIGITAL INPUTS
VOLTAGE
CURRENT INPUTS
--- + INPUTS
A1 A2 400VAC A1 A2 11 12 14 21 22 24 + IN1 IN2 – A1 A2 11 12 14 21 22 24 + ❸ IN3 IN4 –
LSP PROGRAMMABLE
STANDBY DEVICE PROTECTION ALARM
DDI ❷
Local control choice.

AUXILIARY A1 Product termination is IN1 and IN2 respectively
SUPPLY A2 for IN3 and IN4 functions.
18
Activation modes for standby device
P01.05 P01.05 P04.19 P04.17 P01.14
POWER SUPPLY
SPI
V/F OK
14
DDI OUT 1 11
12
DDI INP 1
STANDBY DEVICE
P01.13
24
MODE A 21
(default) 22
24
MODE B 21
22
24
MODE C 21
22
18-25
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Sistema di protezione di interfaccia conforme norma CEI 0-21 edizione giugno 2012 - Per bassa tensione
PMVF 51
LOW VOLTAGE
DISTRIBUTION LINE
L1 L2 L3 N
(OPTION) DDI
TA1
TA2
TA3 GENERATION
PMVF 51 EXM10 02 OPTIONAL EXM10 01
V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
100 - 240VAC I1 I2 I3
110 - 250VDC VOLTAGE CURRENT INPUTS
--- + INPUTS A1 A1 A2 A2 A1 A1 A2 A2
A1 A2 400VAC 14 11 12 24 21 22 COM IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 14 11 12 24 21 22 + IN1 IN2 -
STANDBY DEVICE
LSP GLOBAL
DDI PROTECTION ALARM
AUXILIARY A1
REMOTE TRIPPING
WINDOW CHOICE
SUPPLY
LOCAL CONTROL
A2
DDI FEEDBACK
Local control choice.

FREQUENCY

P01.05 P01.05 P04.19 P04.17 P01.14
POWER SUPPLY
SPI
V/F OK
14
DDI OUT 1 11
12
DDI INP 1
STANDBY DEVICE
P01.13
24
MODE A 21
(default) 22
24
MODE B 21
22
24
MODE C 21
18 22
18-26
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Interface protection systems compliant with Italian CEI 0-16 standard, December 2012 edition - For medium voltage
PMVF 30...
Connection through VTs in Medium Voltage
MEDIUM VOLTAGE
DISTRIBUTION LINE
L1 L2 L3 (OPTION)
Current input wiring not required
by Italian CEI 0-16
To use only with
CT connection (e.g. ARON) DDI
DG
TA1
GENERATION
Rear view
TA2
ON
1 2
I1 I2 I3
TV3 TV4 TV5 TV1 TV2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
OUTPUTS
OPTION
OPTION
INPUTS
IN1 – DDI Feedback
IN2 – Interface protection exclusion
IN3 – Local control A1/- A2/+ V1 V2 V3 VN
IN4 – Remote tripping
(OPTIONAL EXP10 03)
OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4

12...48VDC❶
V4 V5 V1 V2 V3 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 OUTPUTS OUTPUTS
100...400VAC
110...250VDC I1 I2 I3 DIGITAL INPUTS
--- + VOLTAGE INPUTS CURRENT
50 - 500V~ AC MEASUREMENTS
A1 A2 11 12 14 21 22 24 + COM - IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 11 12 14 21 22 24
STANDBY DEVICE AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMABLE

RECLOSING ALARM
DDI ❷
AUXILIARY A1
SUPPLY A2
RELAY SUPPLY A1 For PMVF 30 D048 only.

VT in MV for residual voltage measurements.
Direct connection in Low Voltage

MEDIUM VOLTAGE
DISTRIBUTION LINE
L1 L2 L3 (OPTION)
Current input wiring not required
by Italian CEI 0-16
To use only with
CT connection (e.g. ARON) DDI
DG
TA1
GENERATION
TA2
TV3 TV4 TV5

Rear view
❸
I1 I2 I3
IN1 – DDI Feedback ON
1 2
S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
IN2 – Interface protection exclusion

IN3 – Local control
OUTPUTS
OPTION
OPTION
IN4 – Remote tripping
INPUTS
(OPTIONAL EXP10 03)
OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4

12...48VDC❶
100...400VAC
110...250VDC
V4 V5 V1 V2 V3 S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
S1 S2
I3
OUTPUTS
DIGITAL INPUTS
OUTPUTS
A1/- A2/+ V1 V2 V3 VN
18
--- + VOLTAGE INPUTS CURRENT
50 - 500V~ AC MEASUREMENTS
A1 A2 11 12 14 21 22 24 + COM - IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 11 12 14 21 22 24
STANDBY DEVICE AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMABLE

RECLOSING ALARM
DDI ❷
AUXILIARY A1
SUPPLY
A2
RELAY SUPPLY A1 For PMVF 30 D048 only.

VT in MV for residual voltage measurements.

P01.05 P01.05 P04.19 P04.17 P01.14
POWER SUPPLY
SPI
V/F OK
14
DDI OUT 1 11
12
DDI INP 1
STANDBY DEVICE
P01.13
24
MODE A 21
(default) 22
24
MODE B 21
22
24
MODE C 21
22
18-27
Protection relays
TYPE Single phase PMV55 — — — —

Three phase — PMV10 PMV20 PMV30 PMV40
Three phase with/without neutral — — — — —
DESCRIPTION
Mimum and Phase loss and Minimum AC voltage, Asymmetry,
maximum AC voltage incorrect phase sequence phase loss and phase loss and
incorrect phase sequence incorrect phase sequence
CONTROL CIRCUIT
Rated voltage 208-240VAC 208-480VAC 100-240VAC 208-240VAC
to control (Ue) 380-440VAC 208-575VAC 380-575VAC
380-600VAC 600VAC
Maximum voltage set-point 105-115% Ue — — — —
Minimum voltage set-point 80-95% Ue — — 80-95% Ue —
Asymmetry set-point — — — — 5-15%Ue
Minimum and maximum –– –– –– –– ––
frequency set-point
Tripping time 0.1-20s 60ms 0.1-20s
Resetting time 0.1-20s 0.5s 0.1-20s
(0.5s at power up) (0.5s at power up)
Resetting hysteresis 3% 5% 3%
Instantaneous tripping for Ue <70% Ue configured Umin<70% Umax <70% Ue configured <70% minimum Ue
Repeat accuracy < ±0-1% < ±1% < ±0.1% < ±0.1%
POWER SUPPLY
Auxiliary voltage (Us) Self powered
Operating range 0.7-1.2Ue 0.85-1.1Ue 0.7-1.2Ue
Frequency 50/60Hz ±5%
Power consumption (maximum) 10VA (208-240VAC) 20VA 28VA 11VA (208-240VAC)
17VA (380-440VAC) 30VA (380-575VAC)
19VA (600VAC)
Power dissipation (maximum) 1.5W 2.2W 2.5W
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of relays 1
Relay state Normally enegised
De-energises at tripping
Contact arrangement 1 changeover SPDT
Rated operational voltage 250VAC
Conventional free-air thermal 8A
current (Ith)
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 B300
designation
Electrical life 105 cycles
18 (with rated load)
Indications 1 green LED for power on 1 green LED for power on 1 green LED for power on
and tripping and tripping and tripping
2 red LEDs for tripping 1 red LED for tripping
CONNECTIONS
Terminal tightening torque 0.8Nm (7lbin; 7-9lbin per UL/CSA)
(maximum)
Conductor section min-max 0.2-4.0mm2 (24-12AWG; 18-12 AWG per UL/CSA)
INSULTION (input-output)
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui 440VAC 480VAC 600VAC
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 6kV
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
HOUSING
Material Self-extinguishing polyamide
Power consumption (maximum) at 50Hz.
18-28
Protection relays
— — — — — —
PMV50 PMV60 PMV70 — — —
— — — PMV50 N PMV70 N PMV80 N
Minimum and maximum Minimum AC voltage, Minimum and maximum Minimum and maximum Minimum and maximum Minimum and maximum
AC voltage, phase loss and phase loss, AC voltage, phase loss, AC voltage, phase loss, AC voltage, phase loss, AC voltage and frequency,
incorrect phase sequence incorrect phase sequence incorrect phase sequence neutral loss and incorrect neutral loss, incorrect phase phase loss, neutral loss and
and asymmetry and asymmetry phase sequence sequence and asymmetry incorrect phase sequence
208-240VAC 208-240VAC 208-240VAC 208-240VAC 208-240VAC 208-240VAC

380-575VAC 380-575VAC 380-575VAC 380-440VAC 380-440VAC 380-440VAC
600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 480-600VAC 480-600VAC 480-600VAC
105-15% Ue — 105-115% Ue 105-115% Ue 105-115% Ue 105-115% Ue
80-95% Ue 80-95% Ue 80-95% Ue 80-95% Ue 80-95% Ue 80-95% Ue
— 5-15% Ue 5-15% Ue — 5-15% Ue ––
–– –– –– –– –– 1-10% rated frequency
0.1-20s 0.1-20s 0.1-5s frequency

0.1-20s 0,1-20s 0.5s 0.1-20s 0.5s 0.5s
(0.5s at power up) (0.5s at power up)
3% 3% 3% 3% 3% 3% 0.5% frequency
<70% Ue configured
< ±0.1%
Self powered
0.7-1.2Ue
50/60Hz ±5%
11VA (208-240VAC) 27VA max
30VA (380-575VAC)
19VA (600VAC)
2.5W 1.9W max
1 2
Normally energised
De-energises at tripping
1 changeover SPDT 2 changeover SPDT
250VAC
400VAC
8A
B300
105 cycles
18
30x106 cycles
1 green LED for power on 1 green LED for power on 1 green LED for power on
and tripping and tripping and tripping
2 red LEDs for tripping 3 red LEDs for tripping 2 red LEDs for tripping
0.8Nm (7lbin; 7-9lbin per UL/CSA - PMV...N excluded)
0.2-4.0mm2 (24-12AWG; 18-12 AWG per UL/CSA - PMV...N excluded)
600VAC
6kV
4kV
–20...+60°C
–30...+80°C
Self-extinguishing polyamide
18-29
Protection relays
TYPE PMA20 PMA30 PMA40

DESCRIPTION
Single-phase Single-phase Single-phase
maximum current minimum or maximum minimum and maximum
monitoring current monitoring current monitoring
AC/DC multiscale AC/DC multiscale AC/DC multiscale
CONTROL CIRCUIT
Rated current to be monitored Ie 5 or 16A 0.02 - 0.05 - 0.25 - 1 - 5 -16A
Rated frequency 50/60Hz ±5%
Overload capacity 50mA - 1A inputs 16A input
5 Ie for 1s 5 Ie for 1s 5 Ie for 1s
160A for 10ms 10Ie for 10ms 160A for 10ms
Constant 16A Constant 2Ie Constant 16A
Connection Direct or by current transformer
Adjustment Tripping values 5-100% f.s.
Tripping time 0.1-30s
Inhibition time 1-60s
Resetting hysteresis 1-50% 3% fixed
Resetting Automatic / Manual
External input Resetting / Inhibition —
Repeat accuracy ±1% with constant parameters
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Auxiliary supply voltage Us 24-240VAC/DC
Operating range 0.85-1.1 Us
Power consumption (maximum) 3.2VA 7VA
Power dissipation (maximum) 1.6W 1.7W
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of relays 1 2
Relay state Normally energised / de-energised (selectable)
Contact arrangement 1 changeover contact SPDT each
Maximum switching 400VAC
voltage
IEC conventional free air thermal 8A
current Ith
designation
Electrical life 105 cycles
(with rated load)
Indications 1 green LED 1 green LED for
for power on/inhibition power on/inhibition
18 1 red LED for tripping 2 red LEDs for max/min tripping
CONNECTIONS
Tightening torque 0.8Nm (7lbin; 7-9lbin per UL/CSA)
maximum
IEC power frequency withstand 2.5kV
voltage
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
HOUSING
18-30
Protection relays
Pump protection and phase shift monitoring relays
TYPE PMA50 PMA60

DESCRIPTION
Single and three-phase pump protection Single and three-phase shift control
(motor under-load and over-current control) for minimum and maximum
monitoring for max AC current, min cos cosmonitoring
phase loss and incorrect phase sequence
CURRENT AND COS CONTROL CIRCUIT
Rated current Ie 5 or 16A 16A
Overload capacity 5Ie for 1s
160A for 10ms
Constant 16A
Connection Direct or by current transformer
Adjustments End-scale value 5 or 16A 16A
Tripping for MAX current 10-100Ie —
Tripping for cos 0.1-0.99 cos (MIN) 0.1-0.99 cos (MIN and MAX)
Tripping delay 0.1-10s 0.1-30s
Inhibition time 1-60s 1-60s
Automatic resetting OFF-100min —
delay
External input Consent for running/resetting —
Repeat accuracy ±1% with constant parameters
VOLTAGE CONTROL CIRCUIT
Voltage measuring range (Ue) 80...660VAC
Tripping time for phase loss 60ms
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Auxiliary supply voltage Us 220-240VAC
380-415VAC (maximum voltage for UL/CSA)
440-480VAC
Operating range 0.85-1.1 Us 0.85-1.1 Us
Frequency range 50/60Hz ±5% 50/60Hz ±5%
Power consumption (maximum) 4.5VA 4.4VA
Power dissipation (maximum) 2.3W 2.4W
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of relays 1 2
Relay state Normally energised, Normally energised / de-energised (ON-OFF)
de-energises at tripping (configurable)
Contact arrangement 1 changeover contact SPDT each
IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith 8A
Electrical life (With rated load) 105 cycles 18
Indications 1 green LED for power on/inhibition
2 red LEDs for minimum/maximum tripping
CONNECTIONS
Tightening torque maximum 0.8Nm (7lbin; 7-9lbin per UL/CSA)
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui 600VAC
IEC power frequency withstand voltage 2.5kV
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
HOUSING
18-31
Protection relays
TYPE PMF20
DESCRIPTION Single-phase minimum and maximum frequency control
FREQUENCY CONTROL CIRCUIT
Rated frequency 50 or 60Hz selectable
Operating frequency range 40-70Hz
Adjustment MAX tripping 101-110% operating frequency
MIN tripping90-99% operating frequency
Resetting hysteresys 0.5%
Inhibition time 0.1-20s
Reset delay 0.1-20s
Resetting Automatic
Repeat accuracy < ±0.1%
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Auxiliary supply voltage Us 220-240VAC
380-415VAC
Operating range 0.85-1.1 Us
Power consumption (maximum) 10VA (220-240VAC); 17VA (380-415VAC)
Power dissipation (maximum) 1.5W
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of relays 1
Relay state Normally energised, de-energises at tripping
Contact arrangement 1 changeover contact SPDT
IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith 8A
Indications 1 green LED for power on/tripping
2 red LEDs for min-max tripping
CONNECTIONS
Tightening torque maximum 0.8Nm (7lbin; 7-9lbin per UL/CSA)
INSULATION (input - output)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
18 HOUSING
Normally de-energised, energises at tripping with MAX function configured.
18-32
Protection relays
TYPE PMVF 20 PMVF 20 D048

AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY
Rated control supply voltage Us 100–400VAC/110–250VDC 12-48VDC
Operating limits 90–440VAC/93.5-300VDC 9-70VDC
Frequency 45–55Hz ––
Power consumption AC supply 6VA at 110VAC; 8VA at 230VAC; 11VA at 400VAC ––
DC supply 25mA at 110VDC; 11mA at 250VDC 250mA at 12VDC; 120mA 24VDC; 62mA at 48VDC
Power dissipation AC supply 2.7W at 110VAC; 3W at 220V; 3.9W at 400VAC ––
DC supply 2.6W at 110VAC; 2.8W at 250VDC 3W at 12VDC; 2.9W at 24VDC; 3W at 48VDC
Micro-breaking immunity 50ms at 110VAC ; 200ms at 230VAC 15ms at 12VDC; 30ms at 24VDC; 70ms at 48VDC
Overload category III III
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Maximum rated operating voltage 400VAC L-L; 230VAC L-N 50Hz
Measuring range 20 – 480VAC L-L; 10 – 276VAC L-N
Frequency range 45 – 55Hz
Overload category IV
CURRENT INPUTS (OPTIONAL)
Rated operational current Ie 1A or 5A in AC programmable
Measuring range For 1A scale: 0.01–1.2A; for 5A scale: 0.01–6A
Type of input Shunts powered by external current transformer (low voltage) 5A max.
Type of measurement RMS
Overload capacity ±20% Ie
Overload peak 50A for 1 second
Burden (per phase) 0.6W
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of outputs 2
Type of output 1 changeover contact/SPDT each
Rated operating voltage 250VAC
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation 5A 250VAC AC1 /B300 ; 5A 30VDC
Overload category III
DIGITAL INPUTS
Number and type of inputs 4 negative (NPN)
Input voltage 24VDC isolated
Input current 7mA
SUPPLY/VOLTAGE MEASURING CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals Screw - removable
Conductor section (min - max) 0.2-2.5mm² (24-12 AWG)
Tightening torque 0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
CURRENT MEASURING CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals Screw - fixed
Number of terminals 6 for external CT connections
18
Conductor section (min - max) 0.2-4mm² (26-10 AWG)
Tightening torque 0.8Nm (7lbin)
RELAY OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
Conductor section (min - max) 0.2-2.5 mm² (24-12 AWG)
Tightening torque 0.5Nm (4.5 lbin)
INPUT CONNECTIONS – Input terminals
INPUT CONNECTIONS – COM and auxiliary voltage terminals
HOUSING
Material Polyamide
Version Flush mount 96x96mm / 3.78x3.78”
18-33
Protection relays
TYPE PMVF 50 PMVF 51

Rated control supply voltage Us 100–240VAC/110–250VDC 100–240VAC/110–250VDC
Operating limits 85–264VAC/93.5–300VDC 85–264VAC/93.5–300VDC
Frequency 45–55Hz 45–55Hz
Power consumption AC supply 8.5VA at 110VAC; 12.5VA at 230VAC 4.6VA at 110VAC; 12.5VA at 230VAC
DC supply 43mA at 110VDC; 19mA at 250VDC 23mA at 110VDC; 11mA 250VDC
Power dissipation AC supply 4.4W at 110VAC; 5W at 230VAC 2.5W at 110VAC; 2.7W at 230VAC
DC supply 4.3W at 110VAC; 4.7W at 250VDC 2.3W at 110VDC; 2.5W at 250VDC
Micro-breaking immunity 50ms at 100VAC ; 200ms at 240VAC 50ms at 100VDC; 200ms at 240VDC
Overload category II II
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Maximum rated operating voltage 400VAC L-L; 230VAC L-N 50Hz
Measuring range 20 – 480VAC L-L; 10 – 276VAC L-N
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of outputs 4 2
Type of output 1 changeover contact/SPDT each 1 changeover contact/SPDT each
Rated operating voltage 250VAC 250VAC
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation For NO contact: 5A 250VAC AC1/C300; For NO contact: 5A 250VAC AC1/C300;
5A 30VDC 5A 30VDC
For NC contact: 2A 250VAC AC1 / C300; For NC contact: 2A 250VAC AC1 / C300;
2A 30VDC 2A 30VDC
Overload category II II
DIGITAL INPUTS
Number and type of inputs 4 negative (NPN) 4 positive (PNP)
Input voltage 24VDC isolated 12VDC isolated
Input current 7mA 7mA
18 Type of terminals Screw - fixed
HOUSING
Material Polyamide Polyamide
Version Modular 8U Modular 6U
Single insulation between the two outputs. Both outputs must use the same voltage group.
18-34
Protection relays
TYPE PMVF 30
Rated control supply voltage Us 100–400VAC/110–250VDC
Operating limits 90–440VAC/93.5–300VDC
Frequency 45–55Hz
Power consumption alimentazione AC 7.5VA at 110VAC; 10VA at 230VAC; 14VA at 400VAC
alimentazione DC 35mA at 110VDC; 14mA at 250VDC
Power dissipation alimentazione AC 4W at 110VAC; 4.2W at 220V; 5W at 400VAC
alimentazione DC 3.8W at 110VAC; 4W at 250VDC
Micro-breaking immunity 30ms at 110VAC ; 140ms at 230VAC
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Maximum rated operating voltage 50-500VAC (for voltages/frequency) / 50-150V (for residual voltage measurement)
Measuring range (Un) 400-150,000V (VT primary)
Type of input Shunts powered by external current transformer (low voltage) 5A max.
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of outputs 2
Type of output 1 changeover contact/SPDT each
Rated operating voltage 250VAC
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation 5A 250VAC AC1 /B300; 5A 30VDC
DIGITAL INPUTS
Number and type of inputs 4 negative (NPN)
Input voltage 24VDC isolated
Input current 7mA
Number of terminals 2 for power supply; 5 for voltage control
Type of terminal Screw - fixed
18
Type and (number) of terminals Screw – removable (3)
Tightening torque 0.5Nm (4.5 lbin)
INPUT CONNECTIONS – COM and auxiliary voltage terminals
HOUSING
Material Polyamide
Version Flush mount 96x96mm / 3.78x3.78”
18-35
LEVEL CONTROL RELAYS ELECTRODES START-UP PRIORITY CHANGE RELAY

• For conductive liquids • Single pole • 2 outputs
• Single, dual or multivoltage • Three pole. • Single or multivoltage
• Emptying or filling functions • Modular and plug-in versions.
• Multifunction
• Automatic resetting
• Modular and plug-in versions.
Description LEVEL CONTROL RELAYS PRIORITY CHANGE RELAYS

FOR 2 MOTORS
LVM20 LVM25 LVM30 LVM40 LV1E LV2E LVMP05 LVMP10 CSP2E
Modular version (2U) (1U) (3U) (3U) (1U) (3U)
Plug-in version
(8 pin) (11 pin) (11 pin)
3 detecting electrodes

(MIN, MAX and COM)
5 detecting electrodes

(MIN1, MAX1, MIN2, MAX2 and COM)
Sensitivity adjustment 2.5...50kΩ
Fixed sensitivity: 7...8kΩ
Adjustable sensitivity full-scale value

25-50-100-200 kΩ
Separate sensitivity adjustment

of MAX probe (foam detection)
Emptying function and alarms
Filling function and alarms
Emptying function with Extra-MIN

and/or Extra-MAX alarm relays
Filling function with Extra-MIN and

Extra-MAX alarm relays
Emptying function with pump

start change control
Filling function with pump start

change control
Tank filling, well drawing functions

and alarm
Filling-emptying adjustment

selector
5 function adjustment

selector
Motor start-up priority change
Motor start-up priority change with

stand-by motor function
Page 19-2 19-3 19-4 19-6
LEVEL CONTROL RELAYS 19
Level monitoring for electrically

conductive liquids
Modular and plug-in versions
Adjustable 2.5-200kΩ sensitivity
Single and three-pole electrodes
Startup priority change relays.
SEC. - PAGE
Level monitoring relays
Modular version for conductive liquids .............................................................................................................................. 19 - 2
Modular starter kit ............................................................................................................................................................ 19 - 4
Plug-in level control relays for conductive liquids .............................................................................................................. 19 - 4
Electrodes and electrode holder. Rod probes ...................................................................................................................... 19 - 5
Start-up priority change relays
Modular version ................................................................................................................................................................. 19 - 6
Plug-in version .................................................................................................................................................................. 19 - 6
Accessories ................................................................................................................. 19 - 7
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 19 - 8
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 19 - 9
C ONTROL
AND
A UTOMATION
Level control relays
Modular version
Single-voltage relay Order code Supply Type of Qty Weight Operational characteristics
voltage output per – Use with 3 sensing electrodes, MIN, MAX and COM
contacts pkg – 2.5-50kOhm adjustable sensitivity
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – Double insulation between supply, electrodes and
output relay circuit
Automatic resetting. – Fixed probe signal delay: <1s
LVM20 A024 24VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.215 – Green LED indicator for power on
LVM20 A127 110-127VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.215 – Red LED indicator for output relay state
LVM20 A240 220-240VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.215 – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
LVM20 A415 380-415VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.215 mounted in housing or electric board with IP40);
IP20 on terminals.

Canada (cULus-File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices - Level
LVM20... control relays.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Electrodes and electrode holders

Use electrodes or electrode holders type:
SN1/PS31/PS3S/SCM/CGL or similar. See page 19-5.
Multi-voltage relay Order code Supply Type of Qty Weight Operational characteristics
[V] n° [kg] – Insensivity to stray electrode-cable capacitance
– Programming selector for emptying or filling function
Emptying or filling function. with fail-safe operation
Automatic resetting. – Double insulation between supply, electrodes and
LVM25 240 24-240VAC/DC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.095 output relay circuit
– Fixed probe signal delay: <1s
– Red LED indicator for output relay state
IP20 on terminals.
LVM25 240
control relays.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-4, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.

Dual-voltage relay Order code Supply Type of Qty Weight Operational characteristics
19 [V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – Programming selector for emptying or filling function
with fail-safe operation
Emptying or filling function. – Double insulation between each supply, electrode and
Automatic resetting. output relay circuit
LVM30 A240 24/220-240VAC 2 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.315 – Adjustable probe signal delay: 1-10s
LVM30 A415 110-127VAC 2 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.315 – Adjustable pump start delay: 0-300s
380-415VAC – Green LED indicator for power on
– Red LED indicator for output relay state
IP20 on terminals.
LVM30... Certifications and compliance

control relays.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.


19-2 page 19-8 page 19-9 page 19-12
Modular version
Single-voltage Order code Auxiliary Type of Qty Weight Operational characteristics

multifunction relay supply output per – Use with 5 sensing electrodes, MIN1, MAX1, MIN2,
voltage contacts pkg MAX2 and COM
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – 2.5-200kOhm adjustable sensitivity
– Sensitivity adjustment: 25-50-100-200kOhm
Multifunctions. – Separate sensitivity adjustment of MAX electrodes for
Automatic resetting. foam detection
LVM40 A024 24VAC 1 C/O +1 N/O 1 0.278 – Insensitivity to stray electrode-cable capacitance
LVM40 A127 110-127VAC 1 C/O +1 N/O 1 0.278 – Programming selector for 5 different functions:
• Standard emptying and alarms
LVM40 A240 220-240VAC 1 C/O +1 N/O 1 0.278 • Standard filling and alarms
LVM40 A415 380-415VAC 1 C/O +1 N/O 1 0.278 • Emptying and filling with priority start-up change
Two relay outputs; one with c/o (SPDT) and the other with N/O (SPST). control
• Filling with priority start-up change pump
• Well draining and tank filling and alarms
– Double insulation between each supply, electrodes and
output relay circuits
LVM40... – Adjustable probe signal delay: 1-10s
– Adjustable pump start delay: 0-30min
FUNCTIONS – Red LED indicators for output relay and electrode state
A- Emptying with MIN and/or EXAMPLE OF EMPTYNG OPERATION – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
MAX alarms. To achieve this type of operation, two electrodes are used mounted in housing or electric board with IP40);
to control the liquid between the fixed limits using MIN1 IP20 on terminals.
B- Filling with MIN and MAX1 and two alarm levels using MIN2 and MAX2.
and/or MAX alarms. When one of the alarm electrodes is wet, the alarm relay is Certifications and compliance
de-energised. Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed, for USA and
The alarm can be caused by pump malfunction, Canada (cULus-File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices - Level
Tank insufficient pump delivery capacity, MAX control level control relays.
Alarm
failure or MIN level electrode shorted. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60255-5,
MAX 2
Start With a proper connection, only the MIN alarm or MAX IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
MAX 1
MIN 1
Stop alarm can be activated or neither of the two can be CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Alarm
MIN 2 activated so the relative output contacts can be used for
COM pump control. Electrodes and electrode holders
C- Emptying with pump priority EXAMPLE OF EMPTYNG OPERATION

change. This operation is obtained by using four electrodes
positioned at four different levels and two relay outputs to
D- Filling with pump priority control two pumps.
change. For example, one can place the four electrodes, MIN1,
MIN2, MAX1 and MAX2, in increasing order from the
lowest to the highest levels and must control the tank
emptying. Usually. The level is controlled between the
Tank
MIN1 and MAX1 levels by starting one of the two pumps
MAX 2
but this case is different so the pumps can be mainteined
MAX 1 at the best efficiency and optimise thei wear.
MIN 2 When the liquid wets the MAX2 level and because the first
MIN 1
COM
pump is faulty or else a higher delivery capacity is needed,
the second stand-by pump is activiated to back up the first
pump. When the liquid lowers and no longer wets the
MIN2 level, the second pump is stopped and then when
the MIN1 level is no longer wet, the first pump is stopped
too. 19
E- Tank filling and well drawing EXAMPLE OF OPERATION

with alarm. Two electrodes are used in this operation to control the
tank level and another two for the well. One relay is
used to activate the pump while the other for dry
Tank running / no water alarm.
MAX 1
When the well liquid wets the MAX2 level and the
liquid wets the MIN1 tank level, the tank-filling pump
MIN 1
is activated. When the tank MAX1 level is wet, the
COM
pump is stopped.
During the tank filling, the pump could stop before the
MAX1 level is wet because the well MIN2 level is no
longer wet.
Tank Should the tank MIN1 level no longer be wet at which
the pump should restart but the well MIN2 level is also
MAX 2
no longer wet, then the alarm relay is de-energised.
MIN 2
COM

page 19-8 page 19-10 page 19-12 19-3
Modular starter kit.
Plug-in version
Starter kit Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

per LVM25 240
pkg – Use with 2 sensing electrodes, MIN and COM
[mm] n° [kg] – 2.5-50kOhm adjustable sensitivity
– Double insulation between supply, electrodes and
LVMKIT25 Level control starter kit 1 0.192 output relay circuit
complete with LVM25 240 – Fixed probe signal delay: <1s
relay and two SN1 – Green LED indicator for power on
electrodes – Red LED indicator for output relay state
IP20 on terminals.
SN1 SINGLE POLE ELECTRODE
A single pole electrode used for level control in wells or
storage tanks. It comprises an AISI 303 stainless steel
probe, a plastic (PPOX) holder and a cable gland.
A seal ring and the tightening of the cable gland prevent
water from entering the cable terminal connector and
causing its oxidation.
The external cable diameter must be 2.5 to 6mm/Ø0.1 to
0.24” to warrant perfect sealing of the PG7 gland.
Maximum cable section: 2.5mm2/14AWG.
Maximum operating temperature: +60°C.
Application: tanks and deep wells.
Level control relay only:
control relays.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-4, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Plug-in Order code Auxiliary Type of Qty Wt Operational characteristics

single-voltage relay supply output per – Used with 3 sensing electrodes, MIN, MAX and COM
voltage contact pkg – 7-8kOhm fixed sensitivity
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – Red LED indicator for output relay state
– Maximum relay-electrode cable length: 500m/547yd
Automatic reset. using single-core double insulated cables
31 LV1E 24 24VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.263 – 8-pin plug-in housing
31 LV1E 110 110-120VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.263 – Mounting on 35mm (IEC/EN 60715) DIN rail using
31 S8 socket; see page 19-7
31 LV1E 230 220-240VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.263 – Flush mounting with mount frame 31 G216 and loose
31 LV1E 400 380-415VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.263 31 L48 P8 socket; see page 19-7
Reference standards
31 LV1E...
19
Plug-in Order code Auxiliary Type of Qty Wt Operational characteristics
dual-voltage relay supply output per – Used with 3 sensing electrodes, MIN, MAX and COM
voltage contact pkg – 7-8kOhm fixed sensitivity
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – Red LED indicator for output relay state
– Maximum relay-electrode cable length: 500m/547yd
Automatic reset. using single-core double insulated cables
31 LV2E 48 24-48VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.266 – 11-pin plug-in housing
31 LV2E 220 110-120VAC/ 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.266 – Mounting on 35mm (IEC/EN 60715) DIN rail using
220-240VAC 31 S11 socket; see page 19-7
– Flush mounting using mount frame 31 G216 and
31 LV2E 400 220-240/ 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.266 loose 31 L48 P11 socket; see page 19-7
380-415VAC – IEC degree of protection: IP30.
Reference standards
31 LV2E... Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60255-5.


19-4 page 19-7 page 19-8 pages 19-9 and 11 page 19-13
Level electrodes and electrode holders for conductive liquids.
Rod probes
Electrodes and Order code Rod Rod Qty Wt General characteristics

electrode holder probe probe per SN1 SINGLE POLE ELECTRODE
included length pkg A single pole electrode used for level control in wells or
[mm/in] n° [kg] storage tanks. It comprises an AISI 303 stainless steel
probe, a plastic (PPOX) holder and a cable gland.
Single pole electrodes. A seal ring and the tightening of the cable gland PG7 prevent
11 SN1 Yes 100/3.9 10 0.050 water from entering the cable terminal connector and
causing its oxidation.
Cable connection: screw.
31 SCM 04 Yes 43/1.7 1 0.060 The external cable diameter must be 2.5 to 6mm/Ø0.1 to
31 SCM 50 Yes 500/19.7 1 0.115 0.24” to warrant perfect sealing.
31 SCM 100 Yes 1000/39.4 1 0.162 Maximum connection cable section: 2.5mm2/14 AWG.
11 SN1 Application: Tanks and deep wells.
31 CGL125 3 Yes 327/12.9 1 0.126
31 CGL125 5 Yes 500/19.7 1 0.158 SCM ELECTRODE
A single pole electrode used for level control on boilers,
31 CGL125 7 Yes 700/27.6 1 0.208 autoclaves and in general where pressure (10 bar
31 CGL125 10 Yes 1000/39.4 1 0.281 maximum) and high temperature (+100°C maximum) are
Three pole electrode. present.
It comprises an AISI 303 stainless steel probe embedded in
31 PS31 Yes 300/11.8 1 0.120 an alumina oxide body and a 3/8” GAS threaded metal
Electrode holder (for 3 rod probes). support holder.
31 PS3S No –– 1 0.184 Cable connection: Threaded rod with nut.
Application: Tanks, pressurised tanks and boilers.
31 SCM... Total electrode length.
CGL 125… ELECTRODE
A single pole electrode with AISI 302 probe, used for level
control on boilers and autoclaves and in general wherever
pressure is up to 10 bar maximum.
3/8” GAS threaded terminal.
Cable connection threaded rod with nut.
Application: Tanks, pressurised tanks and boilers.
PS31 ELECTRODE
A small electrode holder, complete with three AISI 304
31 CGL125... stainless steel probes.
Particularly suited to small containers whenever pressure is
maximum up to 2 bar.
1/2" GAS threaded coupling
Faston termination; relative lugs standard supplied
Application: Tanks and automatic dispensers.
PS3S ELECTRODE HOLDER

A thermoset resin electrode holder to be used with three
probes (rods probes to be ordered separately) and complete
31 PS31 with terminal cover.
Maximum operating temperature is +100°C.
2” GAS threaded coupling.
Cable connection: screw.
Application: tanks.
Reference standards
31 PS3S
19
Rod probes Order code Rod probe length Qty Wt General characteristics
per Stainless steel AISI 304 probes with 4M or 6M threaded
pkg extremity suitable as extensions for SCM electrode or as rod
probe for PS3S a holder.
[mm/in] n° [kg] See page 19-7 for SCM electrode extension coupler unit.
For SCM electrodes.
31 ASTA 46O MM4 460/18.11 1 0.053
31 ASTA 96O MM4 960/37.8 1 0.103
For PS3S electrode holder.
31 ASTA 46O MM6 460/18.11 1 0.100
31 ASTA 96O MM6 960/37.8 1 0.210
page 19-7 page 19-8 19-5
Start-up priority change relays
Modular version Order code Auxiliary Type of Qty Wt General characteristics

supply output per The relays are designed to balance the operating time, and
voltage contacts pkg hence the wear of pumps, compressors, generators, when
[V] n° [kg] two units – primary and stand-by – are installed.
2 outputs. AC/DC supply voltage. Operational characteristics
LVMP05 24/48VDC 2 N/O (SPST) 1 0.090 – Operating limit: 0.85-1.1 Ue
24-240VAC – Connection: permanent
– Red LED indicators for output relay state
IP20 on terminals.
LVMP05 Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (cULus-File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
Automatic starting control.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Order code Auxiliary Type of Qty Wt General characteristics

[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] two units – primary and stand-by – are installed.
2 outputs. AC supply voltage. Operational characteristics
LVMP10 A024 24VAC 2 N/O (SPST) 1 0.250 – Operating limit: 0.85-1.1 Ue
LVMP10 A127 110-127VAC 2 N/O (SPST) 1 0.250 – Connection: permanent
LVMP10 A240 220-240VAC 2 N/O (SPST) 1 0.250 – Red LED indicators for output relay state
LVMP10 A415 380-415VAC 2 N/O (SPST) 1 0.250 – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 3 module
IP20 on terminals.
LVMP10...
Canada (cULus-File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
Automatic starting control.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Plug-in version Order code Auxiliary Type of Qty Wt General characteristics

[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] two units – primary and stand-by – are installed.
2 outputs. AC supply voltage. Operational characteristics
31 CSP2E 24 24VAC 2 N/O (SPST) 1 0.150 – Operating limit: 0.85-1.1 Us
31 CSP2E 110 110VAC 2 N/O (SPST) 1 0.150 – Connection: permanent
– Voltage applied across input contacts: 15VDC not isolated
31 CSP2E 220 220VAC 2 N/O (SPST) 1 0.150 with respect to supply.
31 CSP2E 230 230/240VAC 2 N/O (SPST) 1 0.150 – Current consumption, input contacts: about 1mA.
19 – Plug-in housing for use with 31 S11 socket; suitable
for screw fixing or fixing on 35mm DIN rail.
31 CSP2E...
Reference standards

Accessories
Accessories Order code Description Qty Wt Operational characteristics

per SOCKETS
pkg – Tightening torque: 0.8Nm/7.1lbin
n° [kg] – Conductor cross-section max (2 wires): 2.5 mm2/
14 AWG.
31 RE213 Coupler unit for 1 0.008
extension rod probe
ASTA...MM4
fixing or mounting on
31 S8 35mm DIN rail
(IEC/EN 60715), used
with LV1E... relay.
Screw terminals.
fixing or mounting
on 35mm DIN rail
(IEC/EN 60715), used
with LV2E... and
CSP2E... relays.
Screw terminals.
31 S11
31 RE014 Relay-socket retention 10 0.001
bracket; S8 or S11
types only.
Screw terminals.
Screw terminals.
31 G216 Flush-mount frame 1 0.080
complete with fixing
accessories for
plug-in relays.
19
Dimensions
page 19-8 19-7
LEVEL CONTROL AND PRIORITY CHANGE RELAYS

LVM25... - LVMP05 LVM20... LVM30... - LVM40... - LVMP10 LV1E... - LV2E... - CSP2E...
58 58 58
17.5 5 5 5
(2.28”) (2.28”) (2.28”)
(0.69”) (0.20”) 35.8 (0.20”) 53.5 ( (0.20”)
43.7 (1.41”) 43.7 (2.11”) 43.7
(1.72”) (1.72”) 38 27 70
(1.72”) (1.40”) (2.75”)
(1.07”)
(2.99”)
(3.54”)
(3.87”)
(4.12”)
(4.12”)
(3.54”)
(3.87”)
(1.77)
(3.87”)
104.7
(1.77)
(4.12”)
(3.54”)
104.7
(3.87”)
98.3
76
(1.77)
104.7
98.3
98.3
90
98.3
45
90
45
90
45
14 (0.55”)
59.9 97
59.9 (2.36”) Ø4.2 Ø4.2 59.9 (2.36”) (3.82”)
Ø4.2 (0.16”) (2.36”)
(LVM25... only) (0.16”) (LVM30... and LVM40... only)
(0.16”)
Electrodes and electrode holders for conductive liquids

SN1 SCM... CGL125... PS31 PS3S
19.5 M3.5
8 (0.77”)
(0.31”) 78 28
7 (0.27”) 40 20 (3.07”) (1.10”)
(2.09”)
(1.57”) (0.79”)
(1.85”)
(1.89”)
53
47
48
18 (0.71”)
21 (0.83”)
22 (0.87”) 25 (0.98”)
2" GAS
(0.90”)
(3.94”)
3/8" GAS 1/2" GAS

100
3/8" GAS
23
(1.38”)
35
L
TYPE L TYPE L
(11.81”)
SCM04 43 (1.69”) CGL125 3 327 (12.87”)
300
L
M4 SCM50 500 (19.68”) CGL125 5 500 (19.68”)

7 (0.27”)
SCM100 1000 (39.37”) CGL125 7 700 (27.56”)
CGL125 10 1000 (39.37”)
4 (0.16”)
6 (0.24”)
Rod probes Coupler unit

ASTA 460 MM4 ASTA 460 MM6 RE213
ASTA 960 MM4 ASTA 960 MM6
M4 M6 7 (0.27”)
M4
460 (18.11”) 960 (37.79”)
460 (18.11”) 960 (37.79”)
Ø4 Ø6
(0.79”)
(0.16”) (0.24”)
20
M4
7 (0.27”)
M4 M6
Accessories
S8 - S11 L48 P8 L48 P11 RE014
38 27 43.5 20.5 47 20.5 16
(1.50”) (1.06”) (1.71”) (0.81”) (1.85”) (0.81”) (0.63”)
(1.85”)
(1.30”)
(1.30”)
(1.71”)
43.5
47
33
33
(2.56”)
65
(3.07”)
78
(2.36”)
60
19
40.5
(1.59”)
G216 Cutout
48 21 72 39
(1.89”) (0.83”) (2.83”) (1.53”)
(3.38”)
(3.78”)
(2.99”)
86
96
76
Ø4
(0.16”)
19-8
Wiring diagrams
Emptying function
LVM20 Emptying function with 3 electrodes Emptying function with 2 electrodes
COM
MAX
COM
MAX
MIN
MIN
LVM20
A1 A2 COM MAX MIN 12 14 11
24VAC
110-127VAC
220-240VAC
380-415VAC
LVM20 LVM20
A2 A2
0VAC -MAX ON ON A1
A1
-MIN
-COM
RELAY RELAY
14 14
11 11
12 12
Emptying or filling functions

LVM25 Emptying function (DOWN)
Connection with 3 electrodes Connection with 2 electrodes
LVM25
PROBE SIGNAL OR PROBE SIGNAL OR STARTING DELAY ❶
STARTING DELAY ❶ PROBE SIGNAL
COM
MAX
DELAY ❶
MIN
PROBE SIGNAL
COM
MAX
MIN
DELAY ❶
A1 A2 COM MAX MIN 12 14 11
24-240VAC/DC
0VAC -MAX
-MIN SUPPLY SUPPLY
-COM ON ON
RELAY RELAY
LVM30 24 24
❷ 21 21
22 22
LVM30
RELAY RELAY
14 14
11 11
12 12
Delay for LVM30 only.

Changeover contact (SPDT) for LVM30 only.
A1 A3 A2 COM MAX MIN 12 14 11 22 24 21
220-240VAC
380-415VAC Filling function (UP)
24VAC Connection with 3 electrodes Connection with 2 electrodes
110-127VAC
0VAC -MAX PROBE SIGNAL OR

STARTING DELAY ❶ PROBE SIGNAL OR STARTING DELAY ❶
-MIN PROBE SIGNAL DELAY ❶
-COM
PROBE SIGNAL OR PROBE SIGNAL
STARTING DELAY ❶
COM
MAX
DELAY ❶
COM
MAX
MIN
19
SUPPLY SUPPLY
ON ON
RELAY RELAY
24 24
❷ 21 21
22 22
RELAY RELAY
14 14
11 11
12 12
Delay for LVM30 only.

Changeover contact (SPDT) for LVM30 only.
19-9
Wiring diagrams
Multiple functions Emptying function + alarms

LVM40
MAX 1
MAX 2
MIN 2
MIN 1
COM
➋ ➊ ➊ ➋ ➊ ➋ ➋
LVM40
A2
A1 A2 COM MIN2 MIN1 MAX1 MAX2 13 14 22 24 21 ON A1
24VAC 14
110-127VAC 13
220-240VAC
380-415VAC
-MAX2 24
0VAC -MAX1 21
-MIN1 22
-MIN2
-COM
Filling function + alarms
MAX 1
MAX 2
MIN 2
MIN 1
COM
➊ ➋ ➊ ➋ ➋ ➋ ➋ ➋
A2
ON A1
14
13
24
21
22
Filling function + pump start change

MAX 1
MAX 2
MIN 1
MIN 2
COM
➊ ➋ ➊ ➋ ➊ ➊ ➋ ➊ ➊
A2
ON A1
14
13
5 sec
24
21
22
Filling function + pump start change

MAX 2
MAX 1
MIN 2
MIN 1
COM
➊ ➋ ➊ ➋ ➊ ➊ ➋ ➊
A2
ON A1
19 14
13
5 sec
24
21
22
Filling tank and draining well function + alarm

MAX 1
MIN 1
COM
➊ ➋ ➊ ➋ ➊
Tank
MAX 2
MIN 2
COM
Well
A2
ON A1
14
Probe signal and starting delay 13
Probe signal delay 24

21
22
19-10
Wiring diagrams
Emptying function
LV1E Emptying function with 3 electrodes Emptying function with 2 electrodes
LV1E
COM
MAX
COM
MAX
MIN
6 5 1 8 7 2 3 4
24VAC
110-120VAC LV1E LV1E
220-240VAC -MAX 5
5
380-415VAC -MIN 6
6
0VAC -COM
RELAY RELAY
LV2E
LV2E 3 3
4 4
2 2
LV2E LV2E
9-10 9-10
11 11
9 10 11 7 5 6 4 3 1
RELAY RELAY
48VAC
220-240VAC
380-415VAC 3 3
1 1
24VAC 4 4
110-120VAC -MAX
220-240VAC -MIN
0VAC -COM
Start-up priority change monitoring

LVMP05
A1 13 A1
Relay Relay A2
1 2
ON
A2 14 24
14
13
24
13
LVMP10
2-wire connection
A1 14 24 A2
ON
A1
Relay 1 Relay 2
C1 C
S1
A2 C S1 S2 C R1 R2 13 23
C2 C
C1 C2
S2
13
RELAY 1 14
C1 = Primary 23
C2 = Secondary / Standby RELAY 2 24
DELAY
3-wire connection
A1 14 24
ON
A2
A1 19
Relay 1 Relay 2
C1 C
S1
A2 C S1 S2 C R1 R2 13 23
C3 C
C1 C2 C3 C4 R1
C2 C
S2
C4 C
R2
C1 = Start Primary 13
C2 = Start Standby RELAY 1 14
C3 = Stop Primary
23
C4 = Stop Standby RELAY 2
24
DELAY
CSP2E
F1 24VAC 110VAC
220VAC 230-240VAC
2 1 11
CSP2E
Relay 1 Relay 2
10 4 6 8 5 7 3 9
C1 C2
FR1 FR2
C1 = PRIMARY
C2 = SECONDARY/STANDBY K1 K2
MOTOR 1 MOTOR 2
19-11
TYPE LVM20... LVM25... LVM30... LVM40...

DESCRIPTION
Modular
Automatic resetting
Single voltage Multi voltage Dual voltage Single voltage
Application (examples) Empting function Emptying or filling Emptying or filling Multiple functions
functions functions
Operating principle Electrical conductivity of liquids

AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Supply voltage Us 24VAC 24-240VAC/DC 24/220-240VAC 24VAC
110-127VAC 110-127/380-415VAC 110-127VAC
220-240VAC 220-240VAC
380-415VAC 380-415VAC
Operating voltage range 0.85-1.1 Ue 50/60Hz ±5%

Power consumption (maximum) 3.5VA 3VA 5.5VA 4.5VA
Power dissipation (maximum) 1.8W 1.2W 2.8W 2.8W
OUTPUTS
Number of connectable electrodes 3 3 3 5
Type of electrode Electrodes and electrode holders: SN1 / SCM / CGL / PS31 / PS3S or similar
Electrode voltage 7.5VAC 5VPP 7.5VAC 5VPP
Sensitivity 2.5-50kohm 2.5-100kohm 2.5-50kohm 2.5-200kohm
TIME DELAYS
Tripping time (minimum) ≤600ms ≤ 1s 1s 1s
Resetting time (minimum) ≤750ms ≤ 1s 1s 1s
Probe tripping delay –– –– OFF-10s 1-10s
Relay energising delay –– –– OFF-300s 0-30min
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of relays 1 1 1 2
Relay state Normally de-energised, energises at tripping
Contact arrangement 1 changeover / SPDT 1 changeover / SPDT 2 changeover / SPDT each 1 changeover / SPDT and
1 with 1 N/O - SPST
Rated utilisation voltage 250VAC
IEC conventional free air thermal 8A
current Ith
designation
Indications 1 green LED for power on 1 green LED for power on 1 green LED for power on 1 green LED for power on
1 red LED for relay state 1 red LED for relay state 1 red LED for relay state 2 red LEDs for relay state
2 red LEDs for probe state
19 CONNECTIONS
Tightening torque maximum 0.8Nm (7lbin; 7-9lbin er UL/CSA)
Conductor section min-max 0.2-4mm2 (24-12AWG; 18-12 AWG per UL/CSA)
INSULATION
IEC rated insulation 415VAC 240VAC 415VAC 415VAC
voltage Ui
IEC rated impulse wihstand 6kV 4kV 6kV 6kV
voltage Uimp
IEC power frequency withstand 4kV 2kV 4kV 4kV
voltage
Double insulation ≤250VAC ≤250VAC ≤250VAC ≤250VAC
Supply/relay/electrode
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
HOUSING
Typical configuration LVM20 + n° 3 SN1 electrodes LVM25 + n° 3 SN1 electrodes
(examples) LVM30 + n° 3 SN1 electrodes LVM40 + n° 5 SN1 electrodes
Maximum cable length
Double insulaton between supply, electrodes and output relay circuit.
Voltage applied to input contacts, not insulated at power supply.
Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
19-12
LV1E... LV2E... LVMP 05 LVMP 10 CSP2E
Plug-in Modular Plug-in

Automatic resetting Automatic resetting –– –– ––
Single voltage Dual voltage Multivoltage Multivoltage Single voltage
– Minimum-maximum level threshold Priority change relay for motors
– Maintains level between minimum and maximum
– Protection against dry pump running
Electrical conductivity of liquids ––
24VAC 24-48VAC 24-48VDC 24VAC 24VAC

110-120VAC 110-120VAC/220-240VAC 24-240VAC 110-127VAC 48VAC
220-240VAC 220-240VAC/380-415VAC 220-240VAC 110VAC
380-415VAC 380-415VAC 220VAC
0.8-1.1 Ue 50/60Hz
5.5VA 1.6VA 4.8VA 5VA
2.8W 0.9W 3W 3W
3 –– –– ––
Electrodes and electrode holders: SN1 / SCM / CGL / PS31 / PS3S / or similar –– –– ––
9VAC (voltage between probes) –– –– ––
7 - 8kohm adjustable –– –– ––
≤50ms –– –– ––
≤100ms –– –– ––
–– –– –– ––
–– –– –– ––
1 2 2 2
Normally de-energised, energises at tripping
1 changeover contact / SPDT 1 N/O - SPST 1 N/O - SPST 1 N/O - SPST
220VAC 250VAC 250VAC 250VAC

380VAC –– –– ––
5A 8A 8A 5A
B300 B300 B300 B300
2,5x105 cycles 105 cycles 105 cycles 105 cycles

6 6 6
50x10 cycles 30x10 cycles 30x10 cycles 30x106 cycles
1 red LED for relay tripping 1 green LED for power on 1 green LED for power on 1 green LED for power on
1 red LED for relay state 1 red LED for relay state 1 red LED for relay state
19
–– 0.8Nm (7lbin; 7-9lbin er UL/CSA) ––
–– 0.2-4.0mm2 (24-12AWG; 18-12 AWG per UL/CSA) ––
415VAC 250VAC 415VAC 250VAC
5kV 4kV 4kV 4kV
2kV 2kV 2.5kV 2.5kV
––
–20...+60°C
-30...+80°C
Self-extinguishing polycarbonate Self-extinguishing polyamide Self-extinguishing polyamide Self-extinguishing polycarbonate

LV1E + n° 3 SN1 electrode –– –– ––
LV2E + n° 2 SN1 electrodes + reset button
500m/547yd single-core, double insulated cables –– –– ––
19-13
Page 20-4 Page 20-4
MICRO PLCs EXPANSION AND COMMUNICATION MODULES

• 10 Inputs/Outputs (LRD10...) • 8 digital inputs/outputs
• 12 Inputs/Outputs (LRD12...) • 24VDC, 24VAC or 100-240VAC power supply
• 20 Inputs/Outputs (LRD20...) • Analog inputs, 0...10V or 0...20mA
• 12VDC, 24VDC, 24VAC or 100-240VAC • Analog outputs, 0...10V or 0...20mA
power supply • Relay or transistor outputs
• Relay or transistor outputs. • PT100 temperature sensor inputs
• Modbus®-RTU protocol slave communication
unit.
Page 20-5 Page 20-5
ACCESSORIES STARTER KITS

• Program backup memory • Complete kit to begin using micro PLCs
• Programming and supervision software • Each equipped with LRD relay,
• Power supply unit programming-supervision software and
• HMI operator panel with graphic LCD. USB connecting cable.
Micro PLCs 20
10, 12 and 20 Input-Output base

units
Expansion modules with 4 digital
Inputs and 4 digital Outputs
Expansion modules with analog
Inputs-Outputs
Modbus-RTU communication
module
RS232/USB serial interface port for
PC, HMI operator panel or program
backup memory connection
On-board programming languages:
Italian, English, Spanish, French,
German, Portuguese and Chinese
PC programming languages:
Italian, English and Spanish.
SEC. - PAGE
Micro PLCs
Base modules .................................................................................................................................................................. 20 - 4
Expansion and communication modules.......................................................................................................................... 20 - 4
Accessories ................................................................................................................. 20 - 5
Starter kits .................................................................................................................. 20 - 5
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 20 - 6
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 20 - 6
C ONTROL
AND
A UTOMATION
Micro PLCs
MICRO PLC - EXCEPTIONAL PERFORMANCE!

SYSTEM CONTROL AND SUPERVISION
- Contact status viewing in simple and small screen display
- Faculty to add the micro PLC to systems integrated on data
networks. By using supervision software, a
multiclient structure can also be managed through Web
interface.
QUICK CONTROL BOARD INSTALLATION

- Fewer number of components
- Less wiring with minor number of connections.
REPETITIVENESS
- Less errors during panel building
- Considerable time saving.
FLEXIBILITY
- Quick correction of abnormal conditions at final testing
- Fast changes on control boards.
FUNCTION BLOCKS AND MEMORY PROGRAM SIZE

Timer (T) 31 Language
(delay on/off, recycle, pulsing, ...) LADDER (contact scheme) 300 lines
Real Time Clock (RTC) 31 FBD (function blocks) 260 blocks
(daily, weekly, monthly and yearly mode)
Counter (C) 31
Analog comparator (G) 31
User’s pages (H) - 16 characters - 4 lines 31
Auxiliary relay - Scratchpad (M + N memory types) 63 + 63
Data register (DR) 240
Saving can be in memory storage of:
- Auxiliary relay
- Counter value
- Data register.
FUNCTIONS
PWM OUTPUT MULTIPLEXER

Pulse train generation with
A
programmable pulse time and
20 frequency
B
C
B
D
Selection of 1 of 4 values based
on the combination of two digital signals
HIGH SPEED INPUT SHIFT FUNCTION - activation of pulsed outputs in sequence

Out 1
2
3
Position and speed
detection 4
PID BOOLEAN LOGIC BLOCKS

IN: Heating switch on and required
Output activation based on
temperature setting
a series of digital signals In 1 In 2 In 3 In 4 Out
OUT: Current room temperature
INc: Measured room temperature in an
exact spot
OUTc: Temperature adjusting and
controlling. ... ... ... ...
20-2
Micro PLCs
OPERATOR PANEL LRX P01
HMI INTERFACE
LRX P01 is an HMI operator panel, used with many types of PLCs or
other intelligent controllers equipped with communication port.
By using the HMI, the values of both PLC inner registers and relay status
can be monitored and changed with the keys or LEDs.
In this way, machinery and equipment functioning results to be simple
and direct.
The LRX SW P01 editor software permits to make dedicated screens by
taking advantage of the graphic display to view bitmaps, bar graphs and
trend lines.
BACKLIGHT 192x64 PIXEL GRAPGIC LCD
Read numerical Static Dynamic

values text text Read status (bits) Commands
Images Display bar graphs and trend lines Write numerical values
COMMUNICATION MODES
LRX P01 supports Modbus-RTU protocol and different communication modes

can be chosen, such as RS232 and RS485.
Micro PLCs Micro PLCs Power Generating set controllers

analyzers
RS232 20
RS485
Soft starters Motor drives Power factor Transfer switch

controllers controllers
20-3
Micro PLCs
Base modules Order Auxiliary In/Out Qty Wt General characteristics

code supply per FUNCTIONS
voltage pkg – Addition-Subtraction on variables
n° [kg] – Multiplication-Division on variables
– Comparator on variables
Base modules. – HMI display for parameter viewing and programming
LRD12R D024 24VDC 8/4 relay 1 0.241 – PWM output
LRD12T D024 24VDC 8/4 transistor 1 0.220 – High speed input (1kHz)
– PID function
LRD20R D024 24VDC 12/8 relay 1 0.360 – Multiplexer
LRD20R D024 P1 24VDC 12/8 relay 1 0.360 – Analog ramp
LRD12R A024 24VAC 8/4 relay 1 0.250 – Register transfer (numerical variables and status)
LRD10... – Shift function
LRD20R A024 24VAC 12/8 relay 1 0.368 – Boolean logic blocks
LRD12...
LRD10R A240 100-240VAC 6/4 relay 1 0.242 – LRD20R D024 P1 with RS485 port onboard.
LRD20R A240 100-240VAC 12/8 relay 1 0.367
LRD20R D012 12VDC 12/8 relay 1 0.252 – 8A Ith current relay outputs for AC and DC versions
Inputs/Outputs. – 0.3A 24VDC transistor outputs for DC version
With RS485 onboard. – 0-10V analog inputs for DC version
– Version: modular for mounting on 35mm DIN rail
(IEC/EN 60715) or M4x15mm screw fixing
– Type of terminal: Screw

Certifications obtained: UL Listed, for USA and Canada
LRD20R D024 P1 (cULus - File E300049), as Programmable Controllers.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61131-2, UL508, CSA
C22.2 n°142.
Expansion and Order Auxiliary In/Out Qty Wt
communication modules code supply per
voltage pkg
n° [kg]
Expansion and communication modules.
LRE02A D024 24VDC 2 analog outputs 1 0.160
0...10V/0...20mA
LRE04A D024 24VDC 4 analog outputs 1 0.160
0...10V/0...20mA
LRE04P D024 24VDC 4 PT100 temp. 1 0.160
sensor inputs
LRE08R D024 24VDC 4/4relay 1 0.171
LRE08T D024 24VDC 4/4 transistor 1 0.151
LRE... LRE08R A024 24VAC 4/4 relay 1 0.180
LRE08R A240 100-240VAC 4/4 relay 1 0.180
LRE P00 Modbus-RTU protocol 1 0.134
communication unit
Inputs/Outputs.
The expansion modules are supplied with connector for base module.
INPUTS/OUTPUTS REFERENCE TABLE

BASE MODULES BASE +
DIGITAL EXPANSIONS
20 Type Power supply Inputs Outputs Max I/O
LRD12RD012 12VDC 8 digital + 4 digital/analog 8 relay 20 + 24
LRD12TD024 24VDC 6 digital + 2 digital/analog 4 transistor 12 + 24
LRD20RD024P1 24VDC 8 digital + 4 digital/analog 8 relay 20 + 24
LRD10RA240 100-240VAC 6 digital 4 relay 10 + 24
LRD20RA240 100-240VAC 12 digital 8 relay 20 + 24
LRD12RA024 24VAC 8 digital 4 relay 12 + 24
LRD20RA024 24VAC 12 digital 8 relay 20 + 24
EXPANSION AND COMMUNICATION MODULES
LRE02AD024 24VDC –– 2 analog ––
LRE04AD024 24VDC 4 analog –– ––
LRE04PD024 24VDC 4 PT100 –– ––
LRE08RD024 24VDC 4 digital 4 relay ––
LRE08TD024 24VDC 4 digital 4 transistor ––
LRE08RA240 100-240VAC 4 digital 4 relay ––
LRE08RA024 24VAC 4 digital 4 relay ––
LREP00 24VDC RS485 Modbus-RTU protocol slave communication unit
Expansion modules supplied at 24VDC.

20-4 page 20-6 page 20-6 page 20-7
Micro PLCs
Accessories Order Description Qty Wt Power supply unit and backup memory caracteristics
code per – The LRX 1V3 D024 power supply produces a
pkg direct-current voltage to power the base and
n° [kg] expansion modules in circumstances when 24VDC is
not available in the application. The power supply can
Accessories. also be used to power eventual 24VDC auxiliary
LRX M00 Program backup 1 0.011 circuits.
memory – The LRX M00 backup memory allows to save the
LRX C00 PC (RS232)-LRD 1 0.083 user’s program and to simply and quickly transfer it
connecting cable, to the base modules.
1.5m/5ft long
LRX P01 panel general characteristics
LRX C03 PC (USB)-LRD 1 0.080 – 24VDC power supply
LRX 1V3 D024 connecting cable, – RS232 communication port:
1.5/5ft long • Direct connection to using LRX C00
LRX SW Programming and 1 0.057 • Connection to other devices using a standard
supervision software D-SUB 9 serial cable
(CD-ROM) – RS485 communication port
LRX 1V3 D024 Power supply unit, 1 0.220 – LRX SW P01 editor software for specific pages and
LRX C00 easy use.
100-240VAC/24VDC, 1.3A
FUNCTIONS
LRX D00 User’s manual Italian 1 0.400 – Send commands
edition (paper) – Read status
LRX D01 User’s manual English 1 0.400 – Provide static and dynamic texts
edition (paper) – Write variables
LRX D02 User’s manual Spanish 1 0.400 – Read variables:
edition (paper) • Numerical value
• Bar graph
LRX D03 User’s manual French 1 0.400 • Trend line.
LRX P01 edition (paper)
LRX P01 HMI operator panel, 1 0.200 Programming
24VDC, RS232, RS485 At any time and with extreme simplicity, can be
(Modbus®-RTU Master) set up and reprogrammed to satisfy new requirements
LRX C02 PC-LRX P01 connecting 1 0.180 and improve the operation of a system.
cable Programming is simple and intuitive and can be done
directly on the base module keypad or by personal
LRX SW P01 LRX P01 editor software 1 0.057 computer, connected by LRX C00 (RS232) or LRX C03
(CD-ROM) (USB) interface and using the relative LRX SW software.
With a personal computer, two programming language
locs can be used: FBD (Function Block Diagrams) and
LADDER (contact scheme).
LRX C02
Both of the following can be accomplieshed:
– Simulate the program directly “off-line” on a personal
computer to test if it runs correctly.
Starter kits Starter kits. – Use the supervision mode to check the project
LRDKIT 12R D024 LRD starter kit complete 1 0.424 “on-line”.
with LRD12R D024 base There are 8 function keys on front, dedicated to on-
module, LRX SW software board adjustment, control and supervision of digital
and LRX C03 cable input and output status, analog input values, time and
date entry and the operation status of the itself.
LRDKIT 12R A024 LRD starter kit complete 1 0.424
with LRD12R A024 base
module, LRX SW software
Certifications obtained: UL Listed, for USA and Canada
and LRX C03 cable
(cULus - File E300049), as Programmable Controllers for
LRDKIT 10R A240 LRD starter kit complete 1 0.424 power supply and HMI units anbd base module of kits.
with LRD10R A240 base Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61131-2, UL508,
module, LRX SW software CSA C22.2 n°142.
and LRX C03 cable
Maximum combinations
20
+ - I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 A1 A2 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4
4x AC 4x AC 4x AC 4x AC 4x AC 4x AC 4x AC 4x AC
L N AC 100~2 40V L N AC 100~2 40V L N AC 100~2 40V L N AC 100~2 40V L N AC 100~2 40V L N AC 100~2 40V L N AC 100~2 40V L N AC 100~2 40V
Run Run Run Run Run Run Run Run
Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A
Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Y3 Y4 Y3 Y4 Y3 Y4 Y3 Y4 Y3 Y4 Y3 Y4 Y3 Y4 Y3 Y4
Base unit 4 inputs 4 inputs 4 inputs 4 PT100 2 outputs, 2 outputs, 4 inputs, RS485
12 inputs + + + temperature 0-10V or 0-10V or 0-10V or Modbus-RTU
+ 4 outputs 4 outputs 4 outputs sensor inputs 0-20mA 0-20mA 0-20mA
8 outputs
• 24 digital inputs (4 configurable as analog 0-10V input) • 4 analog outputs configurable as 0-10V or 0/4-20mA
• 20 digital outputs (relay, transistor or mixed) • 4 analog inputs configurable as 0-10V or 0/4-20mA
• 4 analog inputs for PT100 temperature sensors • 1 RS485 slave communication module.
N.B. The sequence of the products given above must be respected for correct operation.

page 20-6 page 20-6 page 20-7 20-5
Micro PLCs
BASE MODULES
LRD10... - LRD12... LRD20... LRE... expansion/communication module
5 54.6 (2.15”) 5 54.6 (2.15”) 38 5 54.3 (2.14”)
72 (2.83”) (0.20”) 44.3 (1.74”) 126 (4.96”) (0.20”) 44.3 (1.74”) 8 (1.50”) (0.20”) 44.3 (1.74”)
(0.31”)
106 (4.17”)
106 (4.17”)
106 (4.17”)
98 (3.86”)
90 (3.54”)
45 (1.77”)
68 (2.68”)
45 (1.77”)
98 (3.86”)
68 (2.68”)
90 (3.54”)
98 (3.86”)
45 (1.77”)
90 (3.54”)
68 (2.68”)
Ø4.5 Ø4.5 Ø4.5
(0.18”) 80 (3.15”) (0.18”)
(0.18”)
LRX1V3 D024 power supply unit LRX P01 HMI operator panel Cutout
72 (2.83”) 5 52.3 (2.06”) 179.5 (7.07”) 165 (6.50”)
60 (2.36”) (0.20”) 44.3 (1.74”)
85.5 (3.37”)
101.5(4.00”)
87 (3.42”)
97.9 (3.85”)
106 (4.17”)
45 (1.77”)
68 (2.68”)
90 (3.54”)
5.5
(0.22”)
163.5 (6.44”)
Ø4.5 33
(0.18”) (1.30”)
Wiring diagrams
BASE MODULES
LRD12R D024 LRD12T D024 LRD12R A024 LRD10R A240
24VDC DIGITAL 24VDC DIGITAL
24VDC 24VDC 0...10VDC ANALOG 24VDC 24VDC 0...10VDC ANALOG 24VAC 24VAC 100...240VAC 100...240VAC
+ – I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 A1 A2 + – I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 A1 A2 L N I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 L N I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6
DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL/ANALOG DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL/ANALOG DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL INPUT
INPUT INPUT
RELAY OUTPUT RELAY OUTPUT RELAY OUTPUT
TRANSISTOR OUTPUT
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
+ – + – + – + –
24VDC
LRD20R D012 - LRD20R D024 LRD20R D024 P1

24VDC DIGITAL 24VDC DIGITAL
24VDC 24VDC 0...10VDC ANALOG 24VDC 24VDC 0...10VDC ANALOG RS485
+ – I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 A1 A2 A3 A4 + – I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 A1 A2 A3 A4 A B
DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL/ANALOG DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL/ANALOG
INPUT INPUT
RELAY OUTPUT RELAY OUTPUT
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8
12VDC for LRD20R D012.
LRD20R A024 LRD20R A240

24VAC 24VAC 100...240VAC 100...240VAC
L N I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 IA IB IC L N I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 IA IB IC
DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL INPUT
20 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8
Expansion and communication modules

LRE02A D024 LRE04A D024 LRE04P D024 LRE08R D024
24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC
+ – + – + – + – X1 X2 X3 X4
DIGITAL INPUT
RELAY OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT ANALOG INPUT PT100 TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4
C1 V1 I1 C2 V2 I2 C1 V1 I1 C2 V2 I2 C3 V3 I3 C4 V4 I4 A1 B1 b1 A2 B2 b2 A3 B3 b3 A4 B4 b4
Accessories
LRE08T D024 LRE08R A024 LRE08R A240 LRX 1V3 D024 LRE P00 - LRX P01
24VDC 24VDC 24VAC 24VAC 100...240VAC 100...240VAC 100...240VAC 24VDC
+ – X1 X2 X3 X4 L N X1 X2 X3 X4 L N X1 X2 X3 X4 L N + –
DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL INPUT

TRANSISTOR OUTPUT
Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 OUTPUT OUTPUT
+ – + – + – + – + + – – A B S
24VDC 24VDC - 1.3A RS485
20-6
Micro PLCs
BASE MODULE TYPE LRD... D012 LRD... D024 LRD... A024 LRD... A240
POWER SUPPLY
IEC rated voltage Ue (frequency range) 12VDC 24VDC 24VAC (50-60Hz) 100-240VAC (50-60Hz)
Operating limits 10.4-14.4VDC 20.4-28.8VDC 20.4-28.8VAC (47-63Hz) 85-265VAC (47-63Hz)
Average current consumption 265mA 125mA (LRD12...) 290mA 100mA
185mA (LRD20...)
DIGITAL INPUTS
Rated voltage 12VDC 24VDC 24VAC (50-60Hz) 100-240VAC (50-60Hz)
Input voltage State 0 < 2.5VDC < 5VDC < 6VAC < 40VAC
State 1 > 7.5VDC > 15VDC > 14VAC > 79VAC
Delay time 0 to 1 4ms 4ms 90ms 50/45ms (Ue=120VAC) -
(0.5ms for high speed) (0.5ms for high speed) 22/18ms (Ue=240VAC)
1 to 0 4ms 4ms 90ms 50/45ms (Ue=120VAC) -
(0.3ms for high speed) (0.3ms for high speed) 90/85ms (Ue=240VAC)
ANALOG INPUTS FOR DC VERSIONS ONLY
Input signal range 0-10V –– ––
Display resolution 0.01V –– ––
Conversion 12bit –– ––
Current cunsumption at 10VDC < 0.17mA –– ––
Input impedance < 1kΩ –– ––
Admissible overload 14VDC 28VDC –– ––
Sampling time 5-20ms (LADDER); 2-10ms (FBD)
Maximum cable length ≤ 30m/98ft of screened type –– ––
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Type of output / IEC rated current Ith Relay / 8A (LDR...R... / LRE08R... only)
Transistor / 0.3A 24VDC (LRD...T... / LRE08T... only)
Applied voltage 12-240VAC / 12-30VDC (LDR...R... / LRE08R... only)
10-28.8VDC (LRD...T... / LRE08T... only)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Relative humidity 20-90% without condensation
HOUSING
Version Modular for mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) or M4x15mm screw fixing
Connections Type of terminal Screw
Conductor section 0.14-2.5mm2 / 26-14AWG
Tightening torque 0.6Nm / 0.4lbft
Maximum cable length ≤ 100m/328ft
EXPANSION MODULE TYPE LRE02A D024 LRE04P D024

POWER SUPPLY
IEC rated voltage Ue 24VDC 24VDC 20
Operating limits 20.4-28.8VDC 20.4-28.8VDC
ANALOGIC INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Type of channels 2 outputs configurable 4 inputs for
for voltage or current PT100 temperature sensors
Operating limits 0-10V 0-20mA -100...+600°C
Digital output 0.00-10.00V 0.00-20.00mA -100.0...+600.0°C
Resolution 10mV 40μA 0.1°C
Accuracy ±2.5% ±1%
Power consumption 70mA 70mA
20-7
Page 21-2 Page 21-3
MODULAR VERSION DIN RAIL MOUNT VERSION

• Single phase • Single, two and three phase
• Output voltage: 12 or 24VDC • Output voltage: 24VDC
• Output power: 10-100W. • Output power: 5-960W.
SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES 21
Versions: modular and 35mm DIN

rail mount
Output voltage adjustment by front
potentiometer
Short-circuit protection
Built-in input voltage surge
suppressor
Used as power supply for DC
electromechanical and electronic
equipment.
SEC. - PAGE
Modular switching power supplies
Single phase ...................................................................................................................................................................... 21 - 2
Switching power supplies
Single phase ...................................................................................................................................................................... 21 - 3
Two phase ......................................................................................................................................................................... 21 - 3
Three phase ...................................................................................................................................................................... 21 - 3
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 21 - 4
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 21 - 5
C ONTROL
AND
A UTOMATION
Modular power supplies
Order code Rated Rated Output Qty Wt General characteristics

output output power per Switching power supplies transform an AC input voltage
voltage current pkg into a DC output one. This type of equipment is used in
[V] [A] [W] n° [kg] industrial and domestic automation fields. The power
supplies are equipped with switching technology offering
Single phase. very high efficiency in an extremely compact size.
PSL1M 010 12 12VDC 0.83 10 1 0.114 Dimensions are compatible with modular consumer
PSL1M 024 12 2 24 1 0.177 panels and its plastic housing is suitable for building
automation installations as well as industrial automation
PSL1M 033 12 2.75 33 1 0.248 applications.
PSL1M 054 12 4.5 54 1 0.311 The wide range of power supply voltages and the choice
PSL1M 072 12 6 72 1 0.443 of DC current outputs provide for the best adaptability to
PSL1M 010... supply voltage needs of the most common electronic and
electromechanical devices.
PSL1M 010 24 24VDC 0.42 10 1 0.114
PSL1M 024 24 1 24 1 0.177 Protections:
– Short circuit
PSL1M 036 24 1.5 36 1 0.248 – Overload
PSL1M 060 24 2.5 60 1 0.311 – Input voltage peaks.
PSL1M 100 24 4.2 100 1 0.443
Indications:
– LED indicator for low voltage conditions
– LED indicator for power on.
– Rated supply voltage: 100-240VAC
PSL1M 033 12 – Rated output voltage: 12VDC for PSL1M...12 types;
PSL1M 036 24 24VDC for PSL1M...24 types
– Output voltage adjustment by front potentiometer
– High efficiency up to 89%
– 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) mounting
– Screw connection terminals
– Modular DIN 43880 housing; number of modules:
• 1 for PSL1M 010...
• 2 for PSL1M 024...
• 3 for PSL1M 033 12 and PSL1M 036 24
• 4 for PSL1M 054 12 and PSL1M 060 24
• 5 for PSL1M 072 12 and PSL1M 100 24
– IEC degree of protection: IP20 on terminals.

Canada (cULus-File E318016) as Power Supplies in power
circuit and motor-mounted apparatus category.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 107-1.
21

21-2 page 21-4 page 21-5 page 21-6
Order code Rated Rated Output Qty Wt General characteristics

output output power per This type of equipment is used to power supply
voltage current pkg electromechanical and electronic devices with DC control,
[V] [A] [W] n° [kg] such as contactors, time relays, sensors, PLCs, DC
motors, displays, SSRs and other equipment normally
Single phase. found in automation systems and networks.
PSL1 005 24 24VDC 0.21 5 1 0.190
PSL1 010 24 0.42 10 1 0.196 Protections:
– Short circuit
PSL1 005 24 PSL1 030 24 PSL1 018 24 0.75 18 1 0.226 – Overload
PSL1 010 24 PSL1 060 24 PSL1 030 24 1.25 30 1 0.336 – Input voltage peaks.
PSL1 018 24
PSL1 060 24 2.5 60 1 0.400
Indications:
PSL1 100 24 4.2 100 1 0.508 – LED indicator for low voltage conditions
PSL1 120 24 5 120 1 1.018 – LED indicator for power on.
PSL1 240 24 10 240 1 1.486
PSL1 300 24 12.5 300 1 1.496 – Rated supply voltage:
PSL1 480 24 20 480 1 2.348 • 100-240VAC for PSL1 005 24 - PSL1 100 24 types
Two phase. • 115/230VAC self-configurable for PSL1 120 24... -
PLS1 480 24 types
PSL2 100 24 24VDC 4.2 100 1 0.570 • 400-500VAC for PSL2... and PSL3... types
PSL1 100 24 PSL1 240 24
PSL1 120 24 PSL1 300 24 Three phase. – Rated output voltage: 24VDC
PSL3 120 24 24VDC 5 120 1 0.910 – Mains frequency: 50/60Hz
– Output voltage adjustment by front potentiometer
PSL3 240 24 10 240 1 1.190 – PFC function for types: PSL1 120 24 to PSL3 960 24
PSL3 480 24 20 480 1 1.995 – Parallel connection for types: PSL1 120 24,
PSL3 960 24 40 960 1 3.672 PSL1 240 24, PSL1 300 24, PSL1 480 24,
PSL2 100 24, PSL3 240 24, PSL3 480 24,
Two-phase connection is admissible with a 25% output power derating. PSL3 960 24
– High efficiency up to 92%
– 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) mounting
– Screw connection terminals
PSL1 480 24 – Plastic or metal housing depending on type
– IEC degree of protection: IP20 on terminals.

Canada (cULus-File E318016) as Power Supplies in power
circuit and motor-mounted apparatus category.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 107.1.
PSL2 100 24 PSL3 120 24
PSL3 240 24
21
PSL3 480 24
PSL3 960 24

page 21-4 page 21-5 page 21-7 21-3
Dimensioni [mm (in)]
MODULAR SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES

PSL1M 010... PSL1M 024... PSL1M 033 12 - PSL1M 036 24
50.6 50.6 50.6
(1.99”) (1.99”) (1.99”)
44 35 44 53 44
18 5.6 (1.73”) (1.38”) 5.6 (2.09”) 5.6 (1.73”)
(1.73”)
(0.71”) (0.22”) (0.22”) (0.22”)
(3.58”)
(1.77”)
(3.58”)
(1.77”)
(3.58”)
(1.77”)
(3.78”)
(3.78”)
(3.78”)
91
45
91
45
91
45
96
96
96
PSL1M 054 12 - PSL1M 060 24 PSL1M 72 12 - PSL1M 100 24
50.6 50.6
(1.99”) (1.99”)
72 44 90 44
(2.83”) 5.6 (1.73”) (3.54”) 5.6 (1.73”)
(0.22”) (0.22”)
(3.58”)
(3.58”)
(1.77”)
(1.77”)
(3.78”)
(3.78”)
91
91
45
45
96
96
SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES

PSL1 005 24 - PSL1 100 24
PSL2 100 24
A C
TYPE A B C
PSL1 005 24 22.5 (0.88”) 90 (3.54”) 115 (4.53”)
PSL1 010 24 22.5 (0.88”) 90 (3.54”) 115 (4.53”)
PSL1 018 24 22.5 (0.88”) 90 (3.54”) 115 (4.53”)
PSL1 030 24 40.5 (1.59”) 90 (3.54”) 115 (4.53”)
B
PSL1 060 24 40.5 (1.59”) 90 (3.54”) 115 (4.53”)

PSL1 100 24 54 (2.12”) 90 (3.54”) 115 (4.53”)
PSL2 100 24 54 (2.12”) 90 (3.54”) 115 (4.53”)
PSL1 120 24 - PSL1 480 24

PSL3...
A C
TYPE A B C
PSL1 120 24 64 (2.52”) 124.5 (4.90”) 123.6 (4.87”)
PSL1 240 24 83.5 (3.29”) 124.5 (4.90”) 123.6 (4.87”)
PSL1 300 24 83.5 (3.29”) 124.5 (4.90”) 123.6 (4.87”)
PSL1 480 24 175.5 (6.91”) 124.5 (4.90”) 123.6 (4.87”)
PSL3 120 24 74.3 (2.92”) 124 (4.88”) 118.8 (4.68”)
B
PSL3 240 24 89 (3.50”) 124 (4.88”) 118.8 (4.68”)

PSL3 480 24 150 (5.90”) 124 (4.88”) 118.8 (4.68”)
PSL3 960 24 275.8 (10.86”) 126.2 (4.97”) 118.8 (4.68”)
21
21-4
Wiring diagrams
MODULAR SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES

PSL1M 010 12 PSL1M 010 24 PSL1M 024 12 - PSL1M 033 12 PSL1M 024 24 - PSL1M 036 24
PSL1M 054 12 - PSL1M 072 12 PSL1M 060 24 - PSL1M 100 24
100...240VAC 100...240VAC 100...240VAC 100...240VAC
L N L N L N L N
OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT

+ – + – + + – – + + – –
12VDC 24VDC 12VDC 24VDC
SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES

PSL1 005 24 PSL1 030 24 PSL1 100 24 - PSL1 120 24
PSL1 010 24 PSL1 060 24 PSL1 240 24 - PSL1 300 24
PSL1 018 24 PSL1 480 24
100...240VAC 100...240VAC 115/230VAC
L N GND L N GND L N GND
OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT

+ – + + – – RDY + + – – RDY RDY
Open collector
24VDC 24VDC 24VDC
PSL2 100 24 PSL3 120 24 - PSL3 240 24

PSL3 480 24 - PSL3 900 24
400...500VAC 400...500VAC
L N GND L1 L2 L3 GND Two-phase connection is admissible with a 25% output power derating.
OUTPUT OUTPUT
+ + – – RDY RDY + + – – RDY RDY
24VDC 24VDC
21
21-5
TYPE Single phase PSL1M 010 12 - PSL1M 024 12 - PSL1M 033 12 - PSL1M 054 12 - PSL1M 072 12 -
PSL1M 010 24 PSL1M 024 24 PSL1M 036 24 PSL1M 060 24 PSL1M 100 24
Two phase — — — — —
Three phase — — — — —
INPUT CHARACTERITICS
Rated supply voltage Multivoltage 100-240VAC
Operating range 90-264VAC /

120-375VDC
Consumption ––
Frequency range 47-63Hz
PFC ––
Insulation voltage 3000VAC (4242VDC)
Input/output
Internal fuse (250VAC) T1A T2A T3A
OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Voltage 12VDC (PSL1M...12); 24VDC (PSL1M...24)
Voltage trimming (potentiometer) –– 12-14VDC (PSL1M...12)
24-28VDC (PSL1M...24)
Current 0.83A (PSL1M...12) 2A (PSL1M...12) 2.75A (PSL1M...12) 4.5A (PSL1M...12) 6A (PSL1M...12)
0.42A (PSL1M...24) 1A (PSL1M...24) 1.5A (PSL1M...24) 2.5A (PSL1M...24) 4.2A (PSL1M...24)
Temperature coefficient ±0.03%/°C
Line adjustment ±1%
Load adjustment ±1%
Efficiency 78% (PSL1M...12) 84% (PSL1M...12) 83% (PSL1M...12) 84% (PSL1M...12) 86% (PSL1M...12)
80% (PSL1M...24) 85%(PSL1M...24) 84% (PSL1M...24) 86% (PSL1M...24) 89% (PSL1M...24)
Overload protection 110-165% 120-160% 110-150% 110-150% 110-150%
Short-circuit protection Fold forward Hiccup Fold forward
Ripple noise 50mV
Parallel connection (n° of units) ––
INDICATIONS
LED indicator for power on Yes
LED indicator for low voltage Yes
Power Rdy (Ready) ––
(minimum limit)
CONNECTIONS
Type of terminal Screw
Conductor section Input
min-max 0.4-2.5mm2 0.2- 2.5mm2
Output (26-12AWG) (24-12AWG)
Stripping length 4-5mm/0.15-0.2in 7mm/0.28in

Tightening torque Input
maximum Output 0.5Nm/0.42lbft 0.6Nm/0.5lbft
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Derating >60°C 2.5%/°C
21 HOUSING
Material Plastic
No replacement by user.
Two-phase connection is possible with 25% power derating, PSL2 100 24 excluded.
Minimum load of 150mA.
Maximum surrounding temperature of 50°C for use according to UL508.
21-6
PSL1 005 24 PSL1 010 24 PSL1 018 24 PSL1 030 24 PSL1 060 24 PSL1 100 24 PSL1 120 24 PSL1 240 24 PSL1 300 24 PSL1 480 24 — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — PSL2 100 24 — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — PSL3 120 24 PSL3 240 24 PSL3 480 24 PSL3 960 24
Multivoltage 100-240VAC Self-configurable 115/230VAC Multivoltage 400-500VAC
90-264VAC / 85-264VAC / 90-264VAC 90-132VAC / 180-264VAC 90-264VAC 340-575VAC

120-375VDC 90-375VDC 120-375VDC 210-375VDC 120-375VDC 480-820VDC
200mA 300mA 500mA 800mA 1.5A 2.4A 2.8A 5.4A 6A 7A 750mA 500mA 850mA 1.4A 2.4A
47-63Hz
–– 0.7 0.97 0.55 0.65 0.8
3000VAC (4242VDC)
T2A T3.15A T6.3A T8A T10A T2A T3.15A T5A
24VDC
21.6-28.8VDC 24-28VDC 22.5-28.5VDC
0.21A 0.42A 0.75A 1.25A 2.5A 4.2A 5A 10A 12.5A 20A 4.2A 5A 10A 20A 40A
0.03%/°C 0.03%/°C
±1% 0.5% ±1% ±0.5% ±1%
±2% 0.5% ±1%
72% 76% 77% 86% 89% 88% 86% 89% 89% 87% 89% 90% 90% 92%
110-135% 110-145% 110-140% 110-150% 110-140% 110-145% 120-145% 110-140% 115-135% 120-140% 110-135% 125-145%
Hiccup Fold forward Fold forward Hiccup Fold forward Hiccup
50mV 100mV 50mV 100mV 80mV
–– 3 2 –– 2 2 2
Yes
Yes –– –– Yes
–– Yes (transistor output) Yes (relay output) Yes Yes (relay output)
(19.1VDC) (17.6VDC) (transistor) (17.6VDC)
(60VDC)
Screw
0.2-4mm2
0.4-2.5mm2 0.2-4mm2 (24-10AWG)
(26-12AWG) (24-10AWG) 0.5-10mm2
(20-6AWG)
4-5mm/0.15-0.2in 8mm/0.3in 10mm/0.4in
1Nm/0.75lbft 1Nm/0.75lbft
0.5Nm/0.42lbft 0.6Nm/0.46lbft 0.6Nm/0.46lbft 1.7Nm/
1.3lbft
-20...+71°C -25...+71°C
-25...+85°C
2.5%/°C 3.5%/°C
21
Plastic Metal Plastic Metal
21-7
Page 22-2
SWITCHING BATTERY CHARGERS

MODULAR VERSION
• For lead-acid batteries up to 50Ah rating
• Rated output current:
– 2.5 and 4.5A at 12VDC
– 1.25 and 2.5A at 24VDC
• Electronic lock for shorted battery, reverse
polarity and output overload
• Output for alarm remote indication.
Page 22-2
SWITCHING BATTERY CHARGERS

• For non-sealed and sealed lead-acid
batteries up to 150Ah
– 6A and 12A at 12VDC
– 5A and 10A at 24VDC
polarity and output overload
• Automatic reset at end of alarm conditions
Page 22-3
LINEAR BATTERY CHARGERS

• For lead-acid batteries up to 150Ah rating
– 3A, 6A, 12A at 12VDC
– 2.5A, 5A, 10A at 24VDC
• Input and output protection
polarity, output overload and disconnected
battery
AUTOMATIC BATTERY CHARGERS 22
Switching and linear technology

1 charging level
Versions for non-sealed and
sealed lead-acid batteries,
1.25 to 12A ratings
Charging current limitation
selectable.
SEC. - PAGE
Automatic battery chargers for lead-acid batteries
Switching BCF series, modular version .............................................................................................................................. 22 - 2
Switching BCG series ........................................................................................................................................................ 22 - 2
Linear BCE series .............................................................................................................................................................. 22 - 3
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 22 - 4
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 22 - 4
C ONTROL
AND
A UTOMATION
Automatic battery chargers
Switching BCF and BCG series
For lead-acid batteries. Order code Rated Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
Modular version output output per – Switching technology
current voltage pkg – Wide auxiliary supply range
in DC – Screw fixing or 35mm DIN rail mount (IEC/EN 60715).
[A] [V] n° [kg] Protection:
– Mains input fuse
1 charging level. – Battery output fuse
BCF 0250 12 2.5 1 0.332 – Electronic lock in case of short circuit on battery
12 terminals, reverse battery polarity and output overload
BCF 0450 12 4.5 1 0.332
– Automatic reset at end of alarm conditions.
LED indications:
BCF 0125 24 1.25 1 0.332 – Correct output voltage
24 – Reverse battery polarity.
BCF... BCF 0250 24 2.5 1 0.332
U VDC ON BAT LOW – Auxiliary supply voltage
Alarms GREEN LED RED LED RELAY • 100-240VAC ±10% 50/60Hz ±5%
b Correct output ON OFF Energised – Fixed charging current
Uc
a
voltage – Current limitation
Reverse ON ON Energised – Charging current according to DIN 41773 standards
0.5Uc
polarity – Fixed clamping screw terminal block with captive screws
Short circuit/ OFF OFF De-energised
Ic
Overload Alarm output circuit
I
– Type of output: 3A 250VAC AC1 duty relay, normally
a - constant current charge energised.
b - constant voltage charge Type Maximum power Internal fuse
consumption dissipation mains side
[VA] [W] [W] [A] Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Recognized for USA and
BCF 0250 12 80 40 6 2 Canada (cURus - File E360865), as Power Supplies -
BCF 0450 12 150 70 9 2 Component.
Products having this type of marking are intended for use as
BCF 0125 24 80 39 6 2 components of complete workshop-assembled equipment.
BCF 0250 24 150 77 9 2 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60950-1,
Not replaceable. IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 60950-1,
CSA C22.2 n°60950-1.
For non-sealed and sealed Order code Rated Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
output output per – Switching technology
lead-acid batteries current voltage pkg – Wide auxiliary supply range
in DC – High efficiency
– Two charging voltages selectable by DIP-switch
[A] [V] n° [kg] – Boost external control for full battery charging
1 charging level. – Hiccup function for battery recharging when its voltage
BCG 06 12 6 1 0.532 is lower than 50% rated value
12 – Charging current limiting trimmer resistor
BCG 12 12 12 1 0.710 – Screw fixing or 35mm DIN rail mount (IEC/EN 60715).
Protection:
BCG 05 24 5 1 0.532 – Input fuse on AC side
24 – Electronic lock in case of short circuit on battery
BCG 10 24 10 1 0.710 terminals, reverse battery polarity and output overload
Accessories. – Automatic reset at end of alarm conditions.
BCG... BCG X00 Adapter for DIN rail 1 0.022 LED indications:
vertical mount of – Power on
BCG 06 12 and BCG05 24 – Charging operation (I>30% Ic)
– Overload or short circuit conditions
– Reverse battery polarity.
U
Alarms ON REV ALA CHG RELAY
b GRN RED RED YEL Operational characteristics
Uc – Auxiliary supply voltage:
LED LED LED RED
a 110-240VAC ±10% 50/60Hz ±10%
Correct output ON OFF OFF OFF Energ. – Charging voltage selectable by DIP-switch
0.5Uc voltage • Non-sealed lead-acid batteries
Charging ON OFF OFF ON Energ. • Sealed lead-acid batteries
Low battery ON OFF ON ON Energ. – Maximum charging current setting by front
Ic I potentiometer: 20-100% rated value
22 a - constant current charge
voltage
Reverse OFF ON OFF OFF De-energ.
– Current limitation
b - constant voltage charge – Charging cycle according to DIN 41773 standards
polarity – IEC degree of protection: IP20.
Short circuit / ON OFF ON OFF De-energ.
Overload Alarm output circuit
Steady light if the charging current is more than approx. 30% of – Type of output: 5A 30VDC duty relay, normally
programmed current value. energised.
Flashing during Hiccup operating conditions.
Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Recognized for USA and
Type Maximum power Internal fuse Canada (cURus - File E360865), as Power Supplies -
consumption dissipation Mains side (type T) Component.
[VA] [W] [W] [A] Products having this type of marking are intended for use
BCG 06 12 230 97 14 4 as components of complete workshop-assembled
equipment.
BCG 12 12 284 290 29 6.3 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60950-1,
BCG 05 24 364 158 20 6.3 IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 60950-1,
BCG 10 24 630 311 41 8 CSA C22.2 n°60950-1.
Not replaceable.

22-2 page 22-4 page 22-4 page 22-5
Linear BCE series
For lead-acid batteries Order code Rated Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
output output per – Linear technology
current voltage pkg – Housing for internal panel mounting by screws.
in DC Protection:
[A] [V] n° [kg] – Mains input fuse (except for BCE 2V5 and BCE 03)
– Battery output fuse
1 charging level. – Electronic lock in case of short circuit on battery
31 BCE 0312 3 1 1.984 terminals, reverse battery polarity, output overload
31 BCE 0612 6 12 1 4.832 (<0.5 Ue) and disconnected battery.
LED Indications:
31 BCE 1212 12 1 8.690 – Power on
– Charge (I > 0.2 Ic)
31 BCE 2V524 2,5 1 1.992 – Alarm for protection tripping.
31 BCE 0312 31 BCE 0524 5 24 1 4.960 Operational characteristics

31 BCE 2V524 31 BCE 1024 10 1 9.560 – Auxiliary supply voltage:
220-240VAC ±10%, 50/60Hz ±5%
– Charging current: 30-100% Ie adjustable
Type Maximum power Mains – Charging cycle according to DIN 41773 standards
consumption dissipation fuse (type) – Current limitation
[VA] [W] [A] – Clamping screw terminal block with captive screws:
• Removable for BCE 03 and BCE 2V5
BCE 0312 117 24 1 (T) ext • Fixed for BCE 05, BCE 06, BCE 10 and BCE 12
BCE 0612 222 46 4 (F) int – IEC degree of protection: IP00.
BCE 1212 400 73 6.3 (F) int
Alarms
BCE 2V524 166 26 1 (T) ext Possible causes of alarm include:
31 BCE 0612 BCE 0524 317 40 4 (F) int – Low battery voltage
31 BCE 0524 BCE 1024 610 66 6.3 (F) int – Battery fuse blown
– Battery not connected
Not supplied; installed by customer. – Battery polarity inverted (reverse polarity).
BCE 2V524 - BCE 0312
These types have a static alarm output for the control of a
relay or indicator, maximum 300mA duty.
DERATING CURVES If it is connected to a relay, this must be normally
energised in absence of alarm. In alarm conditions with
BCE 2V5 - BCE 03 ALARM LED switched on or in absence of supply, the
DERATING CURVE relay de-energises.
100%
BCE 0524 - BCE 0612 - BCE 1024 - BCE 1212
95% 220 These types have a normally energised relay alarm
Charging current
240 230 VA
VA VA C
C C
output. In alarm conditions with ALARM LED switched
90%
on or in absence of supply, the relay de-energises.
85%
Alarm output circuit
80% BCE 2V524 - BCE 0312
31 BCE 1212 – Type of output:
75%
31 BCE 1024 50°C 55°C 60°C 65°C 70°C • Negative static; NPN transistor
Operating temperature • Maximum voltage applicable to load: +V battery
terminal
U • Maximum output current: 300mA
BCE 05 - BCE 06
• Maximum overload current for 1 second: 2A
b
Uc DERATING CURVE • Dynamic over-voltage protection with inductive load.
a 100%
BCE 0524 - BCE 0612 - BCE 1024 - BCE 1212

0.5Uc 95%
– Type of output
Charging current
230 220
240 VA VA
VA C C
C
90% • Relay: 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
• Rated voltage: 250VAC
Ic I 85% • IEC rated capacity in AC1 duty: 5A 250VAC Ith
• IEC rated capacity in DC13 or DC14 duty: 5A 30VDC
a - constant current charge 80%
• Electrical life: >105 cycles
b - constant voltage charge
75% • Mechanical life: >30x105 cycles.
50°C 55°C 60°C 65°C 70°C
Operating temperature The output is not overload or short-circuit protected. It is however
capable of switching on a 3W filament bulb.
BCE 10 - BCE 12
DERATING CURVE Certifications obtained: EAC. 22
100%
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60335-2-29.
Charging current
95%
230 220
VA V AC
C
90%
240
VA
C
85%
80%
75%
50°C 55°C 60°C 65°C 70°C
Operating temperature

page 22-4 page 22-4 page 22-5 22-3
BCF... BCG 0612 - BCG 0524

50.6 (1.99”) 162 (6.38”)
5.6 159 (6.26”)
90 (3.54”) (1.99”) 44 (1.73”) 149 /5.87”) 63.2 (2.49”)
45 (1.77”)
91 (3.58”)
96 (3.78”)
150.5 (5.92”)
145 (5.71”)
81.5 (3.21”)
80 (3.15”)
Mounting adapter BCG X00 BCG 1212 - BCG 1024

35 9 213 (8.38”)
136 (5.35”) (1.38”) (0.35”) 206 (8.11”)
198 (7.79”)
71 (2.79”)
145 (5.71”)
151 (5.94”)
130 (5.12”)
63 (2.48”)
BCE 0312 - BCE 2V524
134 (5.27”) 100 (3.94”)
POWER ON
CHARGE
ALARM
65 (2.56”)
93 (3.66”)
100 (3.94”)
60 70
50 80
40 90
30% 100%
BATTERY
220-240V
BATTERY
FUSE
POWER
ALARM
OUT
- - +
120.5 (4.74”)
BCE 0612 - BCE 0524 BCE 1212 - BCE 1024

192 (7.56”) 140 (5.51”) 192 (7.56”) 140 (5.51”)
POWER ON
CHARGE
130 (5.12”)
ALARM
80 (3.15”)
60 70
50 80
40 90
30% 100%
BATTERY
220-240V
POWER
ALARM
OUT
230 (9.05”)
180 (7.09”)
FUSE
BATTERY
FUSE
COM NO NC
+
POWER
POWER ON
178 (7.01”) CHARGE
ALARM
60 70
50 80
40 90
30% 100%
220-240V
BATTERY
POWER
ALARM
FUSE
OUT
BATTERY
FUSE
COM NO NC
POWER
+
-
178 (7.01”)
22
Wiring diagrams
BCF... BCG... BCE 2V5... - BCE 03... BCE 05... - BCE 06... - BCE 10... - BCE 12...
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT VOLTAGE AND CURRENT
CHARGING CONTROL CHARGING CONTROL
FUSE
FUSE
RDY RDY L N COM NO NC L N
BATTERY OUT ALARM SUPPLY BATTERY BOOST OUT ALARM SUPPLY

110-240VAC 110-240VAC
22-4
TYPE BCG... BCF... BCE...

Description Single phase automatic battery charger Single phase automatic battery charger
1 charging level for sealed and non-sealed 1 charging level for lead-acid batteries
lead-acid batteries
Supply voltage 110-240VAC ±10% 50/60Hz ±10% 100-240VAC ±10% 50/60Hz ±5% 220-240VAC ±10% 50/60Hz ±5%
Rated output voltage (Uoc) 12-24VDC
Rated charging current (Ic) 6-12A (12VDC) 2.5-4.5A (12VDC) 3-6-12A (12VDC)
5-10A (24VDC) 1.25-2.5A (24VDC) 2.5-5-10A (24VDC)
CHARGING CYCLE
Reference standards DIN 41773
Diagram U
b
Uc a - constant current charge
a
0,5Uc
b - constant voltage charge
Ic I
End charging voltage Uc 12V battery with DIP2: 12V battery: 13.6VDC (2.27V/cell) 12V battery: 13.8VDC (2.3V/cell)
– in pos. V1: 13.8V 24V battery: 27.2VDC (2.27V/cell) 24V battery: 27.6VDC (2.3V/cell)
– in pos. V2: 13.5V (default).
24V battery with DIP2:
– in pos. V1: 27.6V
– in pos. V2: 27.0V (default)
Charging current Adjustable 20% to 100% Ic Fixed Adjustable 30% to 100% Ic
(using potentiometer/trimpot) (using potentiometer)
Current limit Yes
Boost +4.4% Uc — —
PROTECTION
– Mains supply fuse – Mains supply fuse – Mains supply fuse
– Charging inhibition due to: – Charging inhibition due to: (5, 6, 10, 12A types only)
• Short circuit at battery terminals • Short circuit at battery terminals – Battery output fuse
• Reverse battery polarity • Reverse battery polarity – Charging inhibition due to:
• Low voltage at battery poles (<0.5 Uoc) • Low voltage at battery poles (<0.5 Uoc) • Short circuit at battery terminals
• Output overload • Output overload • Reverse battery polarity
• Low voltage at battery poles (<0.5 Uoc)
• Disconnected battery
ALARM OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Type of output 1 relay 1 relay Static (NPN transistor) ;
5A 30VDC 3A 250VAC AC1 relay with 1 c/o contact (SPDT),
5A 250VAC
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -30...+55°C -40...+51°C -10...+50°C
(+55...+70°C with 1-5%Ic/°C derating
by trimpot)
Storage temperature -30...+80°C -40...+85°C -30...+80°C
HOUSING
Version Internal panel mount Modular Internal panel mount
IEC degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP00
Cooling Natural
Connections Fixed terminals Fixed terminals Removable/plug-in terminals
Fixed terminals
For 2.5A and 3A types only.
For 5, 6, 10 and 12A types only.
22
22-5
Page 23-10 Page 23-15
ENERGY METERS DATA CONCENTRATORS

• Single phase, three phase with neutral, • Energy consumption data storage for network
three phase with or without neutral usage
• Direct connection or by current • Connection up to 14 energy meters equipped
transformers with static output
• MID certified versions • Photovoltaic monitoring type
• Expandable versions. • Expandable versions.
Page 23-16 Pages 23-16 and 17
DIGITAL LCD MULTIMETERS AND PORTABLE POWER ANALYZERS

POWER ANALYZERS • IP65 casing
• Graphic or icon LCD • With built-in USB interface
• Version with touch screen • GPRS/GSM communications
• Modular and panel mount types • Available kits of current clamps and cables.
• Remote display
• Expandable versions.
Page 23-18 to 24 Page 23-32
LED MEASURING INSTRUMENTS CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

• Voltmeters, ammeters, frequency meters, • Primary current: 50-4,000A
cosphi meters and wattmeters. • Secondary current: 5A
• Solid and split-core types.
DIGITAL LED MULTIMETERS
• Basic version, with energy meters,
with 2 programmable outputs, for use
with generating sets and with data-logger.
METERING INSTRUMENTS AND
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS 23
Digital voltmeters, ammeters,
wattmeters, frequency meters and
cosphi meters
Digital multimeters and power
analyzers, expandable, with
graphic LCD
Connection to single, two, three
phase systems
Ideal for distribution systems,
co-generation energy systems,
stand-by generating sets and
on-board machinery installation
High measurement accuracy
Totally programmable digital
outputs
RS485, RS232, USB, Ethernet,
Profibus DP serial interface for
remote control and data-logger.
SEC. - PAGE
Energy meters
Single phase .................................................................................................................................................................... 23 - 10
Single phase, MID certified .............................................................................................................................................. 23 - 11
Three phase with or without neutral ................................................................................................................................ 23 - 12
Three phase with neutral, MID certified ........................................................................................................................... 23 - 13
Three phase with or without neutral, UTF certified .......................................................................................................... 23 - 14
Data concentrator
General use ...................................................................................................................................................................... 23 - 15
For photovoltaic control and supervision ........................................................................................................................ 23 - 15
Digital metering instruments
Modular LCD multimeters ................................................................................................................................................ 23 - 16
Flush mount LCD multimeters ......................................................................................................................................... 23 - 18
Flush mount touch-screen LCD power analyzers ............................................................................................................ 23 - 19
Flush mount LED measuring instruments ....................................................................................................................... 23 - 20
Flush mount LED multimeters ......................................................................................................................................... 23 - 22
Modular LED measuring instruments .............................................................................................................................. 23 - 26
Modular LED multimeters ................................................................................................................................................ 23 - 28
Communication devices, protection covers, accessories .......................................................... 23 - 30
RS232/RS485 converter drive, cables, software, kits of current clamps ........................................ 23 - 31
Current transformers ...................................................................................................... 23 - 32
Dimensions.................................................................................................................. 23 - 34
Wiring diagrams............................................................................................................ 23 - 36
E NERGY M ANAGEMENT
Installation supervision
DMG 900
+ EXP 1031
Energy Quality
MV/LV per EN 50160
transformer
room
DMG 800
+ EXP 1004
Temperature
control
Primary DMG 800

DME D310 (MID)
DMG 800
distribution
DMG 700 DMG 700 (MCC)
M M M M
DMG 800 + EXP…

DMG 300 Process and ambient
210 control
Secondary 200
distribution
23
DME D310 T2 DME D300 T2 DME D100 T1 DME D110 T1 DME D120 T1
DME CD
23-2
Networks
with
software
Web browsing
of each instrument
Tablet,
connected in Ethernet
Wi-Fi Smartphone
SWITCH
Ethernet Internet VPN
EXP 1013
Ethernet
SMS,
e-mail
8+4 max with
EXM 10 …
EXP 1012 Server
Energy meters FTP
DME ... T1
DMG 300 DMG 800-900 DMG 800-900 DME CD with pulse outputs
+ + Data
EXM 1013 EXP 1013 concentrator Antenna GSM
+ CX03
EXM 1013
DMG 210
EXP 10 15
DMG 900
DMK… 8+6 max with
RS485 EXM 10 …
ETH-RS485
ETH-RS485
RS485
23
DMG 210
DMG 700
RS485
DMK…
DME CD
Data
concentrator
23-3
Grid quality verification
Energy consumption control
Quality analysis
per EN 50160
High versatility
Easy and intuitive consulting and
configuration.
DMG series multimeters

and DME series Alarms
energy meters
Boolean logic
Data acquisition of Micro PLCs

environmental conditions
23
Diagnostics and control
Protection relays
23-4
Photovoltaic DC
installation AC
management
Option for distinct values
of import and export energy DMED energy meter:

ENERGY PRODUCED
ELECTRIC LINE
DMED energy meter:

ENERGY CONSUMED
ELECTRIC PULSES
AC/DC INVERTER STATUS/ALARM
Option for 2 load Option for Ethernet

disconnection by connection by
DME CD PV1 EXM10 01 EXM10 03
data concentrator views:
– Energy
• Produced
• Consumed
• Exchanged
– Self-consuming index
– AC/DC inverter alarms,
any others. Enabling / Commands Wi-Fi®
ETHERNET
CONTROLLABLE LOADS Router
Contactors
APP: PV VIEW
23
PRIVILEGED
LOADS
Supervision option
remoted by
software (see Section 27)
If the distinct values of import and export energy need to be known, a third energy meter should be installed on the in-coming line; the exchanged energy is the difference between import and export energy with the power supplier.
The energy meters can be single or three phase based on the type of installation.
23-5
remote control and

supervision software
Main plant synoptic view Detailed pages of each user with status monitoring and
command sending
View trend lines Harmonic analysis in bar graph and table format
Alarm and event list with upload to

text or Excel file
23
Data log consulting with periodical manual

or automatic uploading
See Section 27 for details. Device parameterising
23-6
remote control
and supervision
software
Multiclient-server structure and
web-based application
with multi-language support
(including those of East Europe and Far East)
WI-FI
Only one software for many
LOVATO Electric devices ®
®
ON
DATA
Ethernet network
MENU
USB interface
Field
equipment
Multiclient structure
with three access levels
Visualizzazione trend grafici.
Simultaneous management of several channels
23
Interfaced equipment supervision See Section 27 for details.
23-7
Flush mount version
ENERGY METERS - MULTIMEASUREMENT ENERGY METERS - MULTIMEASUREMENT
Functions / Measurements DME M100 DME M100 T1 DME D100 T1 DME D110 T1 DME D115 T1 DME D120 T1 DME D121 DME D130
INSTALLATION
Connection Single phase
Direct 32A 32A 40A 40A 40A 63A 63A 63A
Through CT
MV usage
Built-in digital outputs 1 1 1 1 1
Pulse Pulse Programmable Programmable Programmable
Built-in digital inputs
Built-in communication port RS485
Expandible
MID certified version
Version with UTF certificates
Current/Votlage accuracy ±0.5%
Active energy accuracy Class 1 /
(IEC/EN 62053-21/EN 50470-3) Class B
Degree of protection IP40
MEASUREMENTS
Active energy Total
Partial
Reactive energy Total
Partial
Separate energy count
Import - Export
Voltage
Current
Power Active power

Active power max demand max demand
Power factor only
Frequency
Cos
THD (Total Harmonic Distortion)
Detailed hamonic analysis (orders)
Page 23-10/11 23-10/11 23-10 23-10/11 23-10/11
EXPANSION MODULES
Digital inputs/outputs
Analog inputs/outputs
Communication ports USB
RS232
RS485
Ethernet
Ethernet Gateway function
GPRS-GSM modem
Type of memory
23
23-8
Modular version
ENERGY METERS - MULTIMEASUREMENT MULTIMETERS - POWER ANALYZERS
DME D300 T2 DME D310 T2 DME D320 DMG 200 DMG 210 DMG 300 DMG 600 DMG 610 DMG 700 DMG 800 DMG 900 DMG 900T
Three phase Single / Three phase

63A
5A 5A 5A 5A 5-1A 5-1A 5-1A 5A 5-1A 5-1A 5-1A

2 2
Programmable Programmable
1 1
Programmable Programmable
RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 or
RS232

±0.5% ±0.5% ±0.5% ±0.5% ±0.5% ±0.2% ±0.5% ±0.5% ±0.5% ±0.2% ±0.2% ±0.2%
Class 1 / Class 1 / Class 1 Class 1 Class 2 Class 0.5S Class 1 Class 1 Class 1 Class 0.5S Class 0.5S Class 0.5S
Class B Class B
IP40 IP40 IP54 IP65

2 to 31° 2 to 31° 2 to 63° 2 to 63°
23-12 to 14 23-12 23-16 23-17 23-18 23-18 23-19

USB USB USB USB USB USB USB
RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232
RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485
Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet
Profibus Profibus
(SMS, email, Client FTP),
GPRS data connection

Data-logger Data-logger Data-logger Data-logger
+
Energy Quality
EN 50160
23
23-9
Energy meters
Single phase, Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

non expandable per The energy meters are instruments for energy consumption
pkg measurement in single-phase installations with direct
n° [kg] connection.
Mechanical meter with mechanical display. Operational characteristics
DME M100 32A direct connection, 1U 1 0.084 DME M... (mechanical display)
– Rated supply voltage: 230VAC -20...+15%
DME M100 T1 32A direct connection, 1U 1 0.088 – Direct connection
1 pulse output – 32A maximum current
Digital meter, with LCD screen. – Active energy measurements
DME D100 T1 40A direct connection, 1U 1 0.086 – Active energy accuracy: Class 1 (IEC/EN 62053-21)
1 pulse output, 220-240VAC – Mechanical meter with 6+1 digit count
– Flashing LED for consumption indication
DME D100 T1 A120 40A direct connection, 1U 1 0.086 – Static pulse output for DME M100 T1 only
DME M100 1 pulse output, 110-120VAC – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module
DME D110 T1 40A direct connection, 1U 1 0.090 – Sealable terminal blocks, standard supplied
1 programmable static output, – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front; IP20 at
multi-measurements , terminals.
220-240VAC
DME D110T1–DME D110 T1–DME D115 T1–
DME D110 T1 A120 40A direct connection, 1U 1 0.090 DME D120 T1–DME D121–DME D130
1 programmable static output, – Nominal supply voltage:
multi-measurements , • 220-240VAC for DME D…T1 - DME D1120/130
110-120VAC • 110-120VAC for DME D…T1 A120
Digital meter with backlight LCD screen. – Voltage range:
DME D115 T1 40A direct connection, 2U, 1 0.090 • 187-265VAC 50/60Hz for DME D…T1-DME D120/130
1 programmable static output, • 93-132VAC 60 Hz for DME D…T1 A120
DME D110 T1... multi-measurements , – Direct connection
220-240VAC – Maximum current: 40A for DME D100/110 T1…,
DME D115 T1; 63A for DME D120 T1… and
DME D120 T1 63A direct connection, 2U 1 0.148 DME D121/130
1 programmable static output, – Active energy measurement and accuracy: Class 1
multi-measurements , (IEC/EN 62053-21)
220-240VAC – Reactive energy measurement and accuracy: Class 2
DME D120 T1 A120 63A direct connection, 2U 1 0.148 (IEC/EN 62053-23) except for DME D115 T1
1 programmable static output, – LCD meter : With 5+1 digit count for
multi-measurements , DME D100/110 T1…; backlight with 6+1 digit
110-120VAC count for DME D115/120 T1… and DME D121/130
DME D121 63A direct connection, 2U, 1 0.148 – Metrological LED with pulse emission for
RS485 interface consumption indication
multi-measurements , – Clearable partial energy measurement except for
DME D115 DME D100/110 T1…
DME D120 T1... - DME D121 220-240VAC
– One output: Pulse for DME D100 T1; programmable
static for all other types
Single phase, Order code Description Qty Wt – Built-in RS485 port for DME D121 and optional for
expandable per DME D130; both compatible with
pkg – Modular housing, 1 module for DME D100/110 T1…;
n° [kg] 2 module for all other types
– Sealable terminal blocks, standard supplied
Digital meter with backlight LCD screen. – IEC/UL/CSA protection degree: IP51 on front; IP20 at
DME D130 63A direct connection, 2U, 1 0.148 terminals.
multi-measurements,
expandable, 220-240VAC supervision and energy management software
See Section 27.
Order code Description EXM series expansion modules
See Section 28, page 3.
DME D130 EXPANSION MODULES.
Inputs and outputs. Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
DME D130 EXM10 00 2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, Canada (File E346886), as Electrical Process Control
opto-isolated Equipment - Energy meters, for DME D... types.
EXM10 01 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61326-1 for DME M...
2 relay outputs 5A 250VAC type; EN 50470-3, IEC/EN 61010-1, UL 61010-1,
CSA C22.2 n°61010-1 for DME D... types.
EXM10 02 4 opto-isolated digital inputs and
2 relay outputs rated 5A 250VAC Multi-measurements:
Communication ports. - Total and partial active energy
EXM10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface - Total and partial reactive energy
23 EXM10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface
- Voltage
- Current
EXM10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface - Active and reactive power
EXM10 13 Opto-isolated Ethernet interface - Power factor
- Frequency
EXM10 20 Opto-isolated RS485 and 2 relay outputs - Total and partial hour counter
rated 5A 250VAC - Average active power (calculation on every last
EXM 10 10
15 minutes)
Maximum combination - Maximum demand.
Multi-measurements:
- Total and partial active energy
- Active power
- Average active power (calculation on every last
15 minutes)
MAX - Maximum demand.
1
23-10 page 23-30 and 31 page 28-3 page 23-34 page 23-36 pages 23-40 amd 41
Energy meters
MID
Single phase, non Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

expandable, MID certified per The DME series energy meters, MID certified, are needed
pkg for billing purposes between electricity supplliers and
consumers and for energy consumption measurement in
MID Digital meter with LCD display.
n° [kg]
directly connected single-phase installations.
MID is the Measuring Instruments Directive of the
DME D100 T1 MID 40A direct connection, 1U 1 0.086 European Union; instruments must be certified must be
1 pulse output, certified accordingly whenever used for monetary
230VAC transactions in this territory.
DME D110 T1 MID 40A direct connection, 1U 1 0.090
1 programmable static output, Operational characteristics
multi-measerements , Nominal supply voltage: 230VAC
230VAC – Voltage range: 187-264VAC 50Hz
– Direct connection
DME D120 T1 MID 63A direct connection, 2U 1 0.148 – Maximum current: 40A for DME D100/110 T1 MID;
1 programmable static output, 63A for DME D120 T1 MID
multi-measerements , – Measurement of 14 electrical parameters for
230VAC DME D110/120 T1 MID
– Active energy measurement and accuracy: Class B
DME D110 T1 MID (EN 50470-3)
– Reactive energy measurement and accuracy: Class 2
(IEC/EN 62053-23)
– LCD meter:
• With 5+1 digit count for DME D100/110 T1 MID
• Backlight with 6+1 digit count for DME D120 T1 MID
– Metrological LED with pulse emission for
consumption indication
– Clearable partial energy measurements in
DME D120 T1 MID
– One output: pulse for DME D100 T1 MID;
programmable static for other types
– Modular housing, 1 module for DME D100/110 T1 MID;
2 module for DME D120 T1 MID
DME D120 T1 MID – EN protection degree: IP51 on front; IP20 at terminals.

Certifications obtained: MID Class B, certifications per
module B (type tests) and per module D (production
conformity).
Compliant with standards: EN 50470-1, EN 50470-3.
Multi-measurements:
- Total and partial reactive energy
- Voltage
- Current
- Active and reactive power
- Power factor
- Frequency
- Total and partial hour counter
- Average active power (calculation on every last
15 minutes)
- Maximum demand.
23

page 23-34 page 23-36 pages 23-40 23-11
Energy meters
Three phase with or without Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics
neutral, non expandable per The energy meters are digital meters/analyzers of electric
pkg energy for systems with direct three-phase connection
n° [kg] or by CT.
Expandable with up to 3 EXM series interfaced by infrared
Digital meter for three phase with neutral. beam.
DME D300 T2 63A direct connection, 1 0.360
4U, 2 programmable Operational characteristics
static outputs, – Nominal supply voltage:
multi-measurements • 220-240VAC (L-N); 380-415VAC (L-L) for
Digital meter for three phase with or without neutral. DME D300/310 T2
• 100-240VAC / 110-250VDC for DME D320
DME D320 Connection by CT /5A 1 0.332 – Voltage range:
secondary, 4U, • 187-264VAC (L-N); 323-456VAC (L-L) 50/60Hz for
RS485 interface, DME D300/310 T2
DME D300 T2 multi-measurements • 85-264VAC 50/60Hz; 93.5-300VDC for DME D320
– Direct connection 63A for DME D300 T2
– Connection by CT /5A for DME D320 T2 and
DME D320
– Active energy measurement and accuracy: Class 1
(IEC/EN 62053-21)
(IEC/EN 62053-23)
– Voltage measurement range: 20-830VAC L-L;
10-480VAC (L-N) for DME D320
– LCD multifunction meter
– Metrological LED with pulse emission for
– Clearable partial active energy measurements
DME D320 – 1 programmable digital input except DME D320
– 2 programmable static outputs except DME D320
– Built-in RS485 port for DME D320 and optional for
Three phase with or without Order code Description Qty Wt DME D310 T2; compatible with software
neutral, expandable per – Optic interface for EXM series expansion modules
pkg with DME D310 T2
n° [kg] – Modular housing, 4 module
Digital meter for three phase with or without neutral. – IEC/UL/CSA degree of protection: IP51 on front;
DME D310 T2 Connection by CT /5A 1 0.332 IP20 at terminals.
secondary, 2 programmable
static outputs, 4U, supervision and energy management software
multi-measurements , See Section 27.
expandable
EXM series expansion modules
Order Description Certifications and compliance

DME D310 T2 Certifications obtained: EAC for all; UL Listed for USA and
code
Canada (cULus – File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices,
DME D310 T2 EXPANSION MODULES. Multimeters for DME D320.
Inputs and outputs. Compliant with standards: EN 50740-3, IEC/EN 61010-1,
EXM10 00 2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated UL508,CSA C22.2 n°14.
EXM10 01 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay outputs
rated 5A 250VAC Multi-measurements:
Communication ports. - Total and partial reactive energy
EXM10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface - Voltage
EXM10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface - Current
EXM10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface - Power factor
EXM10 13 Ethernet interface with Web server function - Frequency
EXM10 20 Opto-isolated RS485 interface and 2 relay - Total and partial hour counter
outputs rated 5A 250VAC - Average active power (calculation on every last
15 minutes)
EXM10 30 Data storage, clock-calendar (RTC) with backup - Maximum demand.
EXM 10 10 reserve energy for data logging
Maximum combination
23
MAX
3
23-12 page 23-30 and 31 page 28-3 page 23-34 page 23-36 page 23-42
Energy meters
MID
Three phase with neutral, Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics
non expandable, per The DME series energy meters, MID certified, are needed
pkg for billing purposes between electricity suppliers and
MID certified n° [kg] consumers and for energy consumption measurement in
directly or CT connected three-phase installations.
MID Digital meter for three phase with neutral.
DME D300 T2 MID 63A direct connection, 4U 1 0.360
Expandable with up to 3 EXM series interfaced by infrared
beam.
2 programmable static
outputs, non expandable, Operational characteristics
multi-measurements – Nominal supply voltage: 230VAC (L-N); 400VAC (L-L)
– Voltage range: 187-264VAC (L-N); 323-456VAC (L-L)
50Hz
– Direct connection 63A for DME D300 T2
– Connection by CT /5A for DME D320 T2
– Active energy measurement and accuracy: Class B
(EN 50470-3)
(IEC/EN 62053-23)
– LCD multifunction meter
DME D300 T2 MID – Metrological LED with pulse emission for
– Clearable partial energy measurements
Three phase with or without Order code Description Qty Wt – 1 programmable digital input
neutral, expandable, per – 2 programmable static outputs
pkg – Optic interface for EXM series expansion modules
MID certified n° [kg] with DME D310 T2 MID compatible with
software
Digital meter for three phase with or without neutral.
MID DME D310 T2 MID Connection by CT /5A 1 0.332
– Modular housing 4 module
secondary, 2 programmable – EN protection degree: IP51 on front; IP20 at
static outputs, 4U, terminals.
multi-measurements ,
expandable supervision and energy management software
See Section 27.

Order Description See Section 28, page 3.
code
DME D310 T2 MID EXPANSION MODULES. Certifications and compliance
Inputs and outputs. Certifications obtained: MID Class B, certifications per
DME D310 T2 MID EXM10 00 2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated conformity).
EXM10 01 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay outputs Compliant with standards: EN 50470-1, EN 50470-3.
rated 5A 250VAC
Communication ports. Multi-measurements:
EXM10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface - Total and partial reactive energy
EXM10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface - Voltage
EXM10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface - Current
EXM10 13 Ethernet interface with Web server function - Power factor
EXM10 20 Opto-isolated RS485 interface and 2 relay - Frequency
outputs rated 5A 250VAC - Total and partial hour counter
EXM10 30 Data storage, clock-calendar (RTC) with backup - Average active power (calculation on every last
reserve energy for data logging 15 minutes)
- Maximum demand.
EXM 10 10
Maximum combination
MAX
3
23
page 23-30 and 31 page 28-3 page 23-34 page 23-36 page 23-42 23-13
Energy meters
MID – With UTF certificates
Three phase with or without Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics
neutral, MID certified per The DME series energy meters, MID certified, are needed
pkg for billing purposes between electricity suppliers and
n° [kg] consumers and for energy consumption measurement in
directly or CT connected three-phase installations.
Digital meter for three phase with neutral, complete with Expandable with up to 3 EXM series expansion modules
UTF certificates for installations in Italy. interfaced by infrared beam.
DME D300 F MID certified type, 63A 1 0.360 MID is the Measuring Instruments Directive of the
direct connection, 4U, European Union; instruments must be certified
2 programmable static accordingly whenever used for monetary transactions in
outputs, non expandable, this territory.
multi-measurements, The UTF certificate is required for revenue tax
complete with UTF certificate purposes by Italian authorities when equipment is part
Starter kits with digital MID certified meter 4U, expandable of generating electricity installations (e.g. solar, wind)
for three phase with or without neutral and 3 current and there is electricity exchange with the power grid.
transformers, 0.5S class, all with UTF certificates for
installations in Italy. Operational characteristics
DME D300 F DME D300 F and DME D310 T2 MID of starter kits
DME D310 F060 Composed of one 1 2.100 – Nominal supply voltage: 230VAC (L-N); 400VAC (L-L)
DMED310T2MID and n°3 – Voltage range: 187-264VAC (L-N); 323-456VAC (L-L)
transformers DM5T0060 50Hz
DME D310 F080 Composed of one 1 2.200 – Direct connection 63A for DME D300 F
DMED310T2MID and n°3 – Connection by CT /5A, standard supplied, for
Starter kits transformers DM5T0080 DME D320 T2 MID
DME D310 F100 Composed of one 1 1.900 – Active energy measurement and accuracy: Class B
DMED310T2MID and n°3 (EN 50470-3)
transformers DM5T0100 – Reactive energy measurement and accuracy: Class 2
(IEC/EN 62053-23)
DME D310 F150 Composed of one 1 1.900 – LCD multifunction meter
DMED310T2MID and n°3 – Metrological LED with pulse emission for
transformers DM5T0150 consumption indication
DME D310 F200 Composed of one 1 1.900 – Clearable partial energy measurements
DMED310T2MID and n°3 – 1 programmable digital input
transformers DM5T0200 – 2 programmable static outputs
DME D310 F250 Composed of one 1 1.900 – Optic interface for EXM series expansion modules
DMED310T2MID and n°3 with DME D310 T2 MID compatible with
transformers DM5T0250 software
– Modular housing 4 module
DME D310 F300 Composed of one 1 1.900 – Sealable terminal blocks, standard supplied
DMED310T2MID and n°3 – EN protection degree: IP51 on front; IP20 at terminals.
transformers DM5T0300
NOTE: Other starter kits are available with 3 CTs up to 1600A. Multi-measurements
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside – Total and partial active energy
front cover. – Total and partial reactive energy
– Voltage
– Current
DME D310 F... – Active and reactive power
Order code Description – Power Factor
– Frequency
– Total and partial hour counter
DME D310 F EXPANSION MODULES. – Average active power (calculation on every last
Inputs and outputs. 15 minutes)
EXM10 00 2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated – Maximum demand.
EXM10 01 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay outputs DM5T CURRENT TRANSFORMERS of starter kits
rated 5A 250VAC – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
Communication ports. – Secondary output current: 5A
EXM10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface – Class 0.5S burden
– Overload withstand: 120% Ipn
EXM10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface – Rated insulation voltage Ui: 720V
EXM10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface – Rated short time thermal current Ith: 40-60Ipn for
EXM10 13 Opto-isolated Ethernet interface 1 second
– Rated dynamic current Idyn: 2.5Ith for 1 second
EXM10 20 Opto-isolated RS485 and 2 relay outputs rated – Insulation (dry type): class E
5A 250VAC – For Ø28mm/1.1” cable
– For 21.5x21.5mm/0.85x0.85”, 26x26mm/1.02x1.02”,
EXM 10 10 Maximum combination 31.5x31.5mm/1.24x1.24” busbars
– Screw fixing terminals
– Standard supplied sealable terminal covers and fixing
elements
23 – EN degree of protection: IP30.
supervision and energy management software

See Section 27.
MAX See Section 28, page 3.
3
Certifications obtained: MID Class B, certifications per
conformity) for DME D300 F and DME D310F energy
meters. UTF certificates for the DME D300F and for each
component of the starter kits are standard supplied.
Compliant with standards: EN 50470-1, EN 50470-3 for
DME D300F and DME D310 T2 MID; IEC/EN 60044-1 for
DM5T…
23-14 page 23-30 and 31 page 28-3 page 23-34 and 35 page 23-36 page 23-42
Data concentrators
Expandable Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

per DMECD is equipped with 8 inputs, which can be increased
pkg up to a maximum of 14 and allows to indirectly interface
n° [kg] devices without communication as long as they have at least
one pulse output.
Data concentrator for general use. It is capable of pulse counting that come in from the outputs
DME CD With 8 programmable 1 0.337 of meters for energy, water, gas and other types of
digital inputs, 4U, consumption: All data is viewed on its display or can also be
expandable, RS485 port, available for PCs through its built-in RS485 interface using
for data collection+pulse Synergy (STILIZZATO) software.
count from DMEM100T1 It can be expanded with up to 3 EXM series modules by
and DMED…, optic interface.
expandable With the programmable functions, average values can be
Data concentrator for photovoltaic applications. determined for instantaneous quantities, such as power,
speed, production rate, gas and water consumption, etc.
DME CD PV1 Programmed for 1 0.340
DME CD - DME CD PV1 installation control and DMECDPV1 is specific for the monitoring of solar
data collection+pulse installations and needs to be connected to at least two
count from two DMED… meters (single or three phase). The user can avail
DMED minimum, 4U, of data, such as energy produced by the generating
RS485 port, expandable installation, energy consumed by loads as well as exchanged
DME KIT CD PV1100 Starter kit composed 1 0.515 energy (difference between import and export energy) with
of one data concentrator the power supplier.
DMECDPV1 and two It is already programmed to automatically calculate the self-
energy meters consuming index, mean power values, production (total and
DMED110T1 partial values) and the operating status of the AC/DC inverter,
if it is equipped with digital outputs.
Use with DMED110T1, DMED115T1, DMED120T1, DMED300T2 and
DMED310T2. In addition, it can be customised by the user for load
supervision, using the EXM series expansion modules,
according to the defined logics and on the basis of the
energy available.
– Nominal supply voltage: 110-240VAC / 110-250VDC
– Voltage range: 85-264VAC / 93.5-300VDC
– Backlight graphic LCD
– 8 inputs, expandable with EXM… modules up to 14
– Built-in RS485 communication port
– Modbus-RTU, ASCII and TCP communication protocol
– Multifunction display
– Clearable total and partial counters for each channel
DME KIT CD PV1100 – Programmable general counters
– Calculation of derivative average values
– Mathematical operations among counters
Order code Description – Modular housing, 4 module
– IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front; IP20 at terminals.
DME CD AND DME CD PV1 EXPANSION MODULES.
Inputs and outputs. supervision and energy management software
See Section 27.
EXM10 00 2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated
EXM10 01 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay outputs EXM series expansion modules
rated 5A 250VAC See Section 28, page 3.
EXM10 02 4 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay Certifications and compliance
outputs rated 5A 250VAC Certifications obtained: EAC for all; UL listed for USA and
Communication ports. Canada (cULus – File E346886), as Electrical Process
EXM10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface Control Equipment – Data concentrator for DMECD; pending
for DMECDPV1 and DMEKITCDPV1100.
EXM 10 10
EXM10 13 Ethernet interface with Web server function
EXM10 20 Opto-isolated RS485 interface and 2 relay
outputs, rated 5A 250VAC
EXM10 30 Data storage, clock-calendar (RTC) with backup
reserve energy for data logging
Maximum combination
23
MAX
3
page 23-30 and 31 page 28-3 page 23-34 page 23-36 page 23-43 23-15
Digital measuring instruments.
Starter kits
Modular LCD multimeters Order Description Qty Wt General characteristics

non expandable code per DMG 200... and DMG 210 digital multimeters are available
pkg with a modular housing, 4 module size, and are equipped
n° [kg] with a graphic backlight LCD capable of providing extremely
clear, intuitive and flexible viewing of all electrical parameters
DMG 200 Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 0.294 of an installation. Very accurate measurements combined
auxiliary supply with their extreme compactness provide an ideal solution for
100-240VAC/110-250VDC. every type of application.
Multilanguage: Italian, The DMG 210 version is supplied with RS485 opto-isolated
English, French, Spanish built-in interface.
and Portuguese Main measurements and functions include:
DMG 200 L01 Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 0.294 – Voltage: phase, line and system values
auxiliary supply – Current: phase values (neutral current calculated)
100-240VAC/110-250VDC. – Power: apparent, active and reactive phase and total
Multilanguage: English, Czech, values
Polish, German and Russian – P.F.: Power Factor per phase and total
DMG 200 - DMG 210 – Frequency of measured voltage value
DMG 210 Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 0.300
RS485 port, auxiliary supply – HIGH-LOW-AVERAGE value functions of all
100-240VAC/110-250VDC. measurements
Multilanguage: Italian, – Maximum demand of power and current values
English, French, Spanish – Total harmonic distortion (THD) of voltage and current
and Portuguese values
– Energy meters for active, reactive and apparent values
DMG 210 L01 Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 0.300 – Hour counter for programmable total and partial hours.
RS485 port, auxiliary supply
100-240VAC/110-250VDC. Operational characteristics
Multilanguage: English, Czech, DMG200 - DMG210
Polish, German and Russian – Auxiliary supply voltage range: 85-264VAC / 93.5-300VDC
– Voltage measurement range:
20-830VAC phase-to-phase
Starter kits Order code Description Qty Wt 10-480VAC phase-neutral
per – Usage in medium and high-voltage systems with voltage
pkg transformers
– Rated input current: With external CT /5A
n° [kg] – Current measurement range with CT up to 10,000A
DMG KIT 200 060 Composed of one DMG200 1 1.035 – Frequency measurement range: 45-66Hz
multimeter and n°3 CTs – True RMS measurements for voltage and current values
60/5A for Ø22mm/0.87” – Accuracy:
cable • Voltage: ±0.5% (50-830VAC)
DMG KIT 200 080 Composed of one DMG200 1 1.035 • Current: ±0.5% (0.1-1.1 In)
multimeter and n°3 CTs • Power: ±1% f.s.
80/5A for Ø22mm/0.87” • Frequency: 0.05%
cable • Active energy: Class 1 (IEC/EN 62053-21)
• Reactive energy: Class 2 (IEC/EN 62053-23)
DMG KIT 200 100 Composed of one DMG200 1 1.035 – Non-volatile memory for data storage
multimeter and n°3 CTs – Communication protocol Modbus-RTU and ASCII for
100/5A for Ø22mm/0.87” DMG 210 only
cable – Programming and remote control by software for
DMG KIT 200 150 Composed of one DMG200 1 0.856 DMG 210 only; compatible with software
multimeter and n°3 CTs – Modular housing, 4 module
150/5A for Ø23mm/0.91” – IEC protection degree: IP40 on front; IP20 at terminals.
cable
DMG KIT 200 200 Composed of one DMG200 1 0.856 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (CTs) of starter kits
multimeter and n°3 CTs – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
200/5A for Ø23mm/0.91” – Secondary output current: 5A
DMG KIT 200 150 cable – Class 1 burden
DMG KIT 200 250 Composed of one DMG200 1 0.856 – Rated insulation voltage Ui: 720V
multimeter and n°3 CTs – Rated short time thermal current Ith: 40-60Ipn for
250/5A for Ø23mm/0.91” 1 second
cable – Rated dynamic current Idyn: 2.5Ith for 1 second
– Insulation (dry type): class E
– Faston terminals
– Standard supplied fixing elements

See Section 27.
23 Certifications and compliance

Certifications obtained: EAC for all; UL Listed for USA
and Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices -
Multimeter for DMG200/210… types.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-4, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n°14 for DMG200/210…; IEC/EN 60044-1 for
transformers of starter kits.
Software and accessories Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

23-16 pages 23-30 and 31 page 23-34 page 23-37 page 23-44
Modular LCD multimeters Order Description Qty Wt General characteristics

expandable code per DMG300 digital multimeters are available with a modular
pkg housing, 4 module size, and are equipped with a graphic
n° [kg] backlight LCD capable of providing extremely clear, intuitive
and flexible viewing of all electrical parameters of a system.
DMG 300 Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 0.320 The very accurate measurements combined with their
harmonic analysis, extreme compactness provide an ideal solution for every
auxiliary supply type of application.
100-240VAC/110-250VDC. Expandable with up to 3 EXM series modules interfaced by
Multilanguage: Italian, infrared beam.
English, French, Spanish Main measurements and functions include:
and Portuguese – Voltage: phase, line and system values
DMG 300 L01 Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 0.320 – Current: phase values (neutral current calculated)
harmonic analysis, – Power: apparent, active and reactive phase and total
auxiliary supply values
100-240VAC/110-250VDC. – P.F.: Power Factor per phase and total
Multilanguage: English, Czech, – Frequency of measured voltage value
DMG 300 Polish, German and Russian – HIGH-LOW-AVERAGE value functions for all
measuements
– Maximum demand of power and current values
– Voltage and current asymmetry
Order Description – Total harmonic distortion (THD) of voltage and current
code values
DMG 300 EXPANSION MODULES. – Harmonic analysis of voltage and current up to 31° order
Inputs and outputs. – Energy meters for active, reactive, apparent partial and
total values, programmable tariff functions
EXM10 00 2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated – Hour counter for programmable total and partial hours
EXM10 01 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay outputs – Pulse counter for general use: consumption pulse
rated 5A 250VAC counting for water, gas, etc. with expansion module only.
EXM10 02 4 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay
outputs rated 5A 250VAC Operational characteristics
– Auxiliary supply voltage range: 85-264VAC / 93.5-300VDC
Communication ports. – Voltage measurement range:
EXM10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface 20-830VAC phase-to-phase
EXM10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface 10-480VAC phase-neutral
– Usage in medium and high-voltage systems with voltage
EXM10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface transformers
EXM 10 10 EXM10 13 Ethernet interface with Web server function – Rated input current: With external CT, 5A or 1A
EXM10 20 Opto-isolated RS485 interface and 2 relay outputs – Current measurement range with CT up to 10,000A
rated 5A 250VAC – Frequency measurement range: 45-66Hz
– True RMS measurements for voltage and current values
EXM10 30 Data storage, clock-calendar (RTC) with backup – Accuracy:
battery for data logging • Voltage: ±0.2% (50-830VAC)
• Current: ±0.2% (0.1-1.1 In)
• Power: ±0.5% f.s.
Maximum combination • Power factor: ±0.5%
• Frequency: 0.05%
• Active energy: Class 0.5S (IEC/EN 62053-22)
– Non-volatile memory for data storage
– Communication protocol Modbus-RTU, ASCII and TCP
(only with communication expansion modules)
– Programming and remote control by software
(only with communication expansion modules);
compatible with software
MAX – Modular housing, 4 module
3 – IEC protection degree: IP40 on front; IP20 at terminals.

See Section 27.


Multimeters.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-4, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
23
pages 23-30 and 31 page 28-3 page 23-34 page 23-37 page 23-44 23-17
Flush mount LCD Order Description Qty Wt General characteristics

multimeters, expandable code per DMG 600, DMG 610, DMG 700 and DMG 800 digital
pkg multimeters are capable of viewing the measurements
n° [kg] with high accuracy on the wide graphic LCD, which allow
to control energy distribution networks.
DMG 600 Backlight icon LCD, 1 0.300 They are available with a flush-mount housing,
72x46mmm/2.8x1.8”, 96x96mm/3.78x3.78” size, and expansion slots to fit
auxiliary supply plug-in expansion modules (1 for DMG 600/610 and 4 for
100-400VAC / 120-250VDC, DMG 700/800) suitable for numerous applications.
front optical port The main features include an extended power supply
DMG 610 Backlight icon LCD, 1 0.350 voltage range, high measurement accuracy, expandability
72x46mmm/2.8x1.8”, and graphic interactive interface for simple use.
auxiliary supply Main measurements and functions include:
100-400VAC / 120-250VDC, – Voltage: phase, line and system values
front optical port and – Current: phase values (neutral current calculated)
RS485 port – Power: apparent, active and reactive phase and total
DMG 600 - DMG 610
DMG 700 Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 0.510 values
auxiliary supply – P.F.: Power Factor per phase and total
100-440VAC/110-250VDC. – Frequency of measured voltage value
Multilanguage: Italian, – HIGH-LOW-AVERAGE value functions for all
English, French, Spanish measurements
and Portuguese – Maximum demand of power and current values
– Voltage and current asymmetry
DMG 700 L01 Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 0.510 – Total harmonic distortion (THD): voltage and current
auxiliary supply – Harmonic analysis of voltage and current up to the
100-440VAC/110-250VDC. 31° order with DMG 800 only
Multilanguage: English, Czech, – Energy meters for active, reactive, apparent partial and
Polish, German and Russian total values with programmable tariff functions
DMG 800 Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 0.510 – Hour counter for programmable total and partial hours
harmonic analysis, – Pulse counter for general use: consumption pulse
DMG 700 - DMG 800... auxiliary supply counting for water, gas, etc., with expansion module
100-440VAC/110-250VDC. only.
Multilanguage: Italian,
English, French, Spanish Operational characteristics
and Portuguese – Auxiliary supply voltage range:
DMG 800 L01 Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 0.510 • 100-400VAC / 120-250VDC for DMG 600/610
harmonic analysis, • 90-484VAC / 93.5-300VDC for DMG 700/800
auxiliary supply • 9-70VDC for DMG 800 D048
100-440VAC/110-250VDC. – Voltage measurement range:
Multilanguage: English, Czech, • 50-720VAC for DMG600/610
Polish, German and Russian • 20-830VAC L-L / 10-480VAC L-N for DMG 700/800
– Usage in medium and high voltage systems with
DMG 800 D048 Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 0.520 voltage transformers
with harmonic analysis, – Rated input current: By external CT 5A for DMG 700;
auxiliary supply 1A or 5A for DMG 600/610 and DMG 800…
12-24-48VDC – Frequency measurement range: 45-66Hz
DMG M3 800 01 DMG 800 portable unit in 1 3.300 – True RMS measurements: for voltage and current
M3N case, prewired, – Measurement accuracy for DMG 600/610-DMG 700:
for mobile applications, • Voltage: ±0.5% (50-720VAC DMG 600/610; 50-
with USB port, without 830VAC DMG 700)
external cable (see page • Current: ±0.5% (0.1-1.1In)
23-31) • Power: ±1% f.s.
DMG M3 800 01 • Frequency: ±0.05%
• Active energy: Classe 1 (IEC/EN 62053-22)
Order Description – Measurement accuracy for DMG 800…:
code • Voltage: ±0.2% (50-830VAC)
DMG 600/610, DMG 700 AND DMG 800 EXPANSION MODULES • Current: ±0.2% (0.1-1.1In)
Inputs and outputs. • Power: ±0.5% f.s.
EXP10 00 4 opto-isolated digital inputs • Power factor: ±0.5%
• Frequency: ±0.05%
EXP10 01 4 opto-isolated static outputs • Active energy: Classe 0.5S (IEC/EN 62053-22)
EXP10 02 2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated • Reactive energy: Class 2 (IEC/EN 62053-23)
EXP10 03 2 relay outputs rated 5A 250VAC – Non-volatile memory for data storage
– Communication protocol Modbus-RTU, ASCII and TCP
EXP10 04 2 opto-isolated analog inputs 0/4-20mA or – Compatible with software
PT100 or 0-10V or 0...±5V for DMG 800 – Flush-mount housing 96x96mm/3.78x3.78”
EXP10 05 2 opto-isolated analog outputs 0/4-20mA or – IEC degree of protection: On front IP54 DMG600/610;
0-10V or 0...±5V for DMG 800 IP65 all others. All IP20 at terminals
23 EXP10 08 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay
Overall M3N case dimensions: See page 4-17.
outputs rated 5A 250VAC
EXP 10... Communication ports. supervision and energy management software
EXP10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface See Section 27.
EXP10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface
EXP series expansion modules
EXP10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface See Section 28, page 2.
EXP10 13 Opto-isolated Ethernet interface with web
server function for DMG 800 Certifications and compliance
EXP10 14 Opto-isolated Profibus-DP interface Certifications obtained: EAC for all except DMGM380001;
for DMG 800 UL listed for USA and Canada (cULus – File E93601), as
Auxiliary Devices – Multimeters for DMG… types pending
EXP10 30 Data storage, clock-calendar (RTC) with backup for DMG600/610 and excluding DMGM380001.
reserve energy for data logging for DMG 800 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61010-1,
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22-2 n°14.
23-18 pages 23-30 and 31 page 28-2 page 23-34 page 23-37 page 23-45
Flush mount LCD touch- Order Description Qty Wt General characteristics

screen power analyzers, code per DMG 900... expandable digital power analyzers are available
pkg with a flush-mount housing, 96x96mm/3.78x3.78” size. The
expandable n° [kg] wide graphic touch screen display provides extremely simple
interacting between the device and the user.
DMG 900 Graphic 128x112 pixel 1 0.566 The high performance of the power analyzers gives very
touch-screen LCD, harmonic accurate measurements and can control energy distribution
analysis, 4 current channels, networks, to detect and prevent energy problems which could
(neutral meas.) auxiliary compromise quality and supply.
supply 100-440VAC/ The main features include an extensive power supply voltage
110-250VDC. range, high measurement accuracy, expandability up to 4
Multilanguage: Italian, plug in expansion modules.
English, French, Spanish There also is available the DMG 900T measurement
and Portuguese transducer which can be used with the DMG 900RD remote
DMG 900 L01 Graphic 128x112 pixel 1 0.566 display. The DMG 900T, without display, is arranged for
touch-screen LCD, harmonic mounting inside the panel board, on 35mm DIN rail, and is an
DMG 900... analysis, 4 current channels, ideal solution for installations where the measurements of
(neutral meas.) auxiliary various multimeters must be remotely viewed.
supply 100-440VAC/ The DMG 900RD remote display connected to the DMG 900T
110-250VDC. transducer can display the measurements on the panel front
Multilanguage: English, Czech, while power connections remain inside the panel.
Polish, German and Russian Main measurements and functions include:
– Voltage: phase, phase-neutral and ground neutral-earth
DMG M3 900 01 DMG 900 portable unit in 1 3.400 – Supply voltage value for the DC supply types only
M3N case, prewired for – Current: phase values
mobile applications, with USB – Neutral current calculated and true values
port, without external cables – Power: apparent, active and reactive phase and total values
(see page 23-31) – P.F.: Power Factor per phase and total
DMG 900 D048 Graphic 128x112 pixel 1 0.580 – Cos per phase and total
touch-screen LCD, – Frequency of measured voltage value
harmonic analysis, auxiliary – Voltage and current asymmetry
supply 12-24-48VDC – Total harmonic distortion (THD) of voltage and current
DMG 900T Measurement transducer, 1 0.570 – Harmonic analysis of voltage and current up to the 63° order
harmonic analysis, – HIGH-LOW-AVERAGE value functions for all measurements
4 channels, auxiliary supply – Maximum demand of power and current values
100-440VAC/110-250VDC, – Energy meters for active, reactive, apparent partial and
RS232/RS485 ports total values with programmable tariff functions
– Hour counter for programmable total and partial hours
DMG 900T D048 Measurement transducer, 1 0.590 – Pulse counter for general use: consumption pulse
harmonic analysis, counting for water, gas, etc., with expansion module only
4 channels, auxiliary supply – Energy quality analysis to EN 50160 with expansion
12-24-48VDC, module only.
DMG M3 900 01 RS232/RS485 ports
Remote display for DMG 900T... – Auxiliary supply voltage range:
DMG 900RD Graphic 128x112 pixel touch 1 0.396 90-484VAC / 93.5-300VDC for DMG 900 and DMG 900T;
screen LCD, with 3m/9.8ft 9-70VDC for DMG 900 D048 and DMG 900T D048
long connecting cable – Voltage measurement range:
No simultaneous operations of serial ports; only one port can be used at 20-830VAC phase-to-phase
a time. Consult instructions manual for details. 10-480VAC phase-neutral
Direct link to DMG 900T dedicated port: powered directly by DMG 900T. – Usage in medium and high-voltage systems with voltage
transformers
– Rated input current: 5A or 1A by CT up to 10,000A
Order Description – Current measurement range: 0.01-10A or 0.002-1.2A
code – Frequency measurement range: 45-66Hz / 360-440Hz
DMG 900T... DMG 900 and DMG 900 T EXPANSION MODULES. – True RMS measurements for voltage and current values
Inputs and outputs. – Accuracy:
EXP10 00 4 opto-isolated digital inputs • Voltage: ±0.2% (50-830VAC)
• Current: ±0.2% (0.1-1.1In)
EXP10 01 4 opto-isolated static outputs • Power: ±0.5% f.s.
EXP10 02 2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated • Power factor: ±0.5%
• Frequency: ±0.05%
EXP10 03 2 relay outputs rated 5A 250VAC
• Active energy: Class 0.5S (IEC/EN 62053-22)
EXP10 04 2 opto-isolated analog inputs 0/4-20mA or • Reactive energy: Class 2 (IEC/EN 62053-23)
PT100 or 0-10V or 0...±5V – Non-volatile memory for data and event (last 100) storage
EXP10 05 2 opto-isolated analog outputs 0/4-20mA or – Communication protocol Modbus-RTU, ASCII and TCP
0-10V or 0...±5V with communication expansion modules only
– Programming and remote control by software with
EXP10 08 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay outputs
communication expansion modules only;
DMG 900RD rated 5A 250VAC
compatible
Communication ports. – Housing: Flush mount 96x96mm/3.78x3.78” for
EXP10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface DMG900... and DMG 900RD; 35mm DIN rail 23
(IEC/EN 60715) fixing for DMG 900T
EXP10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface – IEC protection degree: IP65 on front for DMG 900... and
EXP10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface DMG 900RD; IP20 at terminals for DMG 900... - DMG 900T.
EXP10 13 Opto-isolated Ethernet interface with Web supervision and energy management software
server function See Section 27.
EXP10 14 Opto-isolated Profibus-DP interface
EXP10 15 GPRS/GSM modem See Section 28, page 2.
EXP10 30 Data storage, clock-calendar (RTC) with backup
EXP 10... reserve energy for data logging Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC for all except DMG M3...;
EXP10 31 Data storage, with Energy Quality (EN 50160), UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601), as
clock-calendar (RTC) with backup reserve energy Auxiliary Devices-Multimeters for all except DMG M3...
for data logging Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2,
IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508, CSA C22.2 n°14.
Flush-mount LED Order Displayed Relay Qty Wt General characteristics

instruments single phase code measurements output per The DMK 0... instruments are available with flush-mount
pkg housing, 96x48mm/3.78x1.9” size.
non expandable n° n° n° [kg] Measurements are True RMS values and provide for
reliable operation even in presence of harmonics.
Voltmeter.
DMK 00 1 voltage value – 1 0.290 Operational characteristics
1 max voltage value – Auxiliary supply voltage: 220-240VAC standard;
DMK 00 R1 1 1 0.323 24VAC, 110-127VAC or 380-415AC type on request
1 min voltage value
– Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
Ammeter. – True RMS measurements
DMK 01 1 current value – 1 0.290 – HIGH and LOW measurement storage
DMK 01 R1 1 max current value 1 1 0.323 – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT) for
1 min current value DMK...R1 only
DMK 0... Voltmeter or ammeter. – Housing: Flush mount 96x48mm/3.78x1.9”
– Terminals: 4mm2
DMK 02 1 voltage or – 1 0.290 – IEC protection degree: IP54 on front; IP20 at terminals.
current value
1 maximum voltage DMK 00 - DMK 00 R1
or current value – Voltage measurement range: 15-660VAC
1 minimum voltage – Operating frequency range: 45-65Hz
or current value – Programmable VT ratio: 1.00-500.00
Frequency meter. – Accuracy: ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit
DMK 03 1 frequency value – 1 0.290
1 max frequency value 1 DMK 01 - DMK 01 R1
DMK 03 R1 1 0.323 – Current measurement range: 0.05-5.75A
1 min frequency value
– Operating frequency range: 45-65Hz
Cosphi meter. – Programmable CT ratio: 5-10,000
DMK 04 1 cosphi value – 1 0.290 – Accuracy: ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit
DMK 04 R1 1 power factor value 1 1 0.323
DMK 02
The DMK02 can operate as a voltmeter or ammeter. It is duly equipped – Voltage measurement range: 15-660VAC
with two front plates (V and A) which must be fitted by the user
depending on which instrument is required and on the wiring scheme – Current measurement range: 0.05-5.75A
used. – Operating frequency range: 45-65Hz
Relay output for control and protection functions. – Programmable VT ratio: 1.00-500.00
– Programmable CT ratio: OFF/5-10,000
– Accuracy: Voltage ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit
Current ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit
DMK 03 - DMK 03 R1
– Measurement input: 15-660VAC
– Frequency measurement range: 15-65Hz
– Accuracy: ±1 digit
DMK 04 - DMK 04 R1
– Cosphi measurement error: ±0.5° ±1 digit
– Cosphi measurement in 4 quadrants
– Accuracy: ±1° ±1 digit
Control and protection functions

DMK 00 R1
– Voltage loss or failure: OFF/5-85%
– Maximum voltage: OFF/102-120%
– Minimum voltage: OFF/70-98%
– Time delay for max-min voltage or voltage loss, phase
loss : 0.0-900.0 seconds.
DMK 01 R1
– Current loss: OFF/2-100%
– Maximum current: OFF/102-200%
– Maximum current instantaneous tripping:
OFF/110-600%
– Minimum current: OFF/5-98%
– Time delay for max-min current or current loss :
0.0-900.0 seconds.
DMK 03 R1
– Maximum frequency: OFF/101-110%
– Minimum frequency: OFF/90-99%
– Time delay for min-max frequency :
23 0.5-900.0 seconds.
DMK 04 R1
– Minimum-maximum cos thresholds in 4 quadrants
– Minimum-maximum PF thresholds in 4 quadrants
– Delay time for max or min threshold :
1-9,000 seconds.

Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices-
Multimeters.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Independent adjustable delays.

Flush-mount LED Order Displayd Relay Qty Wt General characteristics

code measurements output per The DMK 1... instruments are available with flush-mount
instruments three phase pkg housing, 96x48mm/3.78x1.9” size.
non expandable n° n° n° [kg]
Measurements are TRMS values and provide for reliable
operation even in presence of harmonics.
Voltmeter. Operational characteristics
DMK 10 3 phase voltage values – 1 0.297 – Auxiliary supply voltage: 220-240VAC standard;
3 phase to phase 24VAC, 110-127VAC or 380-415VAC type on request
DMK 10 R1 1 1 0.330 – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
voltage values
– TRMS measurements
3 maximum phase – HIGH and LOW measurement storage
voltage values – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT) for
3 maximum phase to DMK...R1 only
phase voltage values – Housing: Flush mount 96x48mm/3.78x1.9”
3 minimum phase – Terminals: 4mm2
DMK 1... voltage values – IEC protection degree: IP54 on front; IP20 at terminals.
3 minimum phase to DMK 10 - DMK 10 R1
phase voltage values – Voltage measurement range: 15-660VAC
Ammeter. – Operating frequency range: 45-65Hz
– Programmable VT ratio: 1.00-500.00
DMK 11 3 phase current values – 1 0.292 – Accuracy: ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit.
DMK 11 R1 3 maximum phase 1 1 0.336
current values DMK 11 - DMK 11 R1
3 minimum phase – Current measurement range: 0.05-5.75A
current values – Operating frequency range: 45-65Hz
– Programmable CT ratio: 5-10,000
Combined voltmeter, ammeter and wattmeter. – Accuracy: ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit.
DMK 15 3 phase voltage values – 1 0.332 DMK 15 - DMK 15 R1
DMK 15 R1 3 phase to phase 1 1 0.350 – Voltage measurement range: 35-660VAC
voltage values – Current measurement range: 0.05-5.75A
3 phase current values – Frequency measure range: 45-65Hz
4 active power values, – Programmable VT ratio: 1.00-500.00
phase and total – Programmable CT ratio: 5-10,000
3 maximum phase – Accuracy: Voltage ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit
voltage values Current ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit
3 maximum phase to Power ±1% f.s. ±1 digit.
phase voltage values Control and protection functions
3 maximum phase DMK 10 R1
current values – Phase loss or failure: OFF/5-85%
4 maximum active – Maximum voltage: OFF/102-120%
power values, – Minimum voltage: OFF/70-98%
phase and total – Asymmetry: OFF/2-20%
– Phase sequence: OFF/L1-L2-L3/L3-L2-L1
3 minimum phase
– Frequency
voltage values • Maximum frequency: OFF/101-110%
3 minimum phase to • Minimum frequency: OFF/90-99%
phase voltage values – Time delay for max-min voltage, phase loss, asymmetry
3 minimum phase and min-max frequency : 0.5-900.0 seconds.
current values
4 minimum active DMK 11 R1
power values, – Maximum current: OFF/102-200%
phase and total – Maximum current instantaneous tripping:
Connection also to single phase. OFF/110-600%
Relay output for control and protection functions. – Minimum current: OFF/5-98%
– Asymmetry: OFF/2-20%
– Time delay for max-min current or current loss and
asymmetry : 0.5-900.0 seconds.
DMK 15 R1
– Voltage
• Phase loss or failure: OFF/5-85%
• Maximum voltage: OFF/102-120%
• Minimum voltage: OFF/70-98%
• Asymmetry: OFF/2-20%
• Phase sequence: OFF/L1-L2-L3/L3-L2-L1
– Current
• Current loss: OFF/5-85%
• Maximum current: OFF/102-200%
• Maximum current instantaneous tripping:
OFF/110-600%
• Minimum current: OFF/5-98%
• Asymmetry: OFF/2-20%
– Power
• Rated power: 1-10,000
• Maximum power: OFF/101-200% 23
• Max. power instantaneous tripping: OFF/110-600%
• Minimum power: OFF/10-99%
– Freuency
• Maximum frequency: OFF/101-110%
• Minimum frequency OFF/90-99%
– Time delay for max-min voltage, max-min current or
current loss, phase loss, asymmetry and min-max
power : 0.0-900.0 seconds.
Multimeters.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.

page 23-30 page 23-34 page 23-38 page 23-47 23-21
Flush-mount LED multimeter Order Displayed Qty Wt General characteristics

three phase code measurements per The DMK 16 multimeter is available with flush-mount
non expandable n° [kg] Measurements are True RMS values and provide for
DMK 16 3 phase voltage values 1 0.350
3 phase to phase voltage Operational characteristics
values – Auxiliary supply voltage: 220-240VAC standard;
3 phase current values 24VAC, 110-127VAC or 380-415VAC type on request
4 active power values, phase – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
and total – True RMS measurements
4 reactive power values, – Accuracy: Voltage ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit
phase and total Current ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit
4 apparent power values, – Active energy accuracy: Class 2 (IEC/EN 62053-21 and
phase and total IEC/EN 62053-23)
DMK 16
3 phase power factor values – HIGH and LOW measurement storage
1 frequency value – Voltage measurement range: 35-660VAC
1 active energy value in kWh – Current measurement range: 0.05-5.75A
1 reactive energy value – Operating frequency range: 45-65Hz
in kvarh – Programmable VT ratio: 1.00-500.0
1 hour counter – Programmable CT ratio: 5-10,000
3 maximum phase voltage – Housing: Flush mount 96x48mm/3.78x1.9”
values – Terminals: 4mm2
3 maximum phase to phase – IEC protection degree: IP54 on front; IP20 at terminals.
voltage values
3 maximum phase current Certifications and compliance
values Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
4 maximum active power Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices-
values, phase and total Multimeters.
4 maximum reactive power Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61010-1,
values, phase and total IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
4 maximum apparent power CSA C22.2 n° 14.
values, phase and total
3 minimum phase voltage
values
3 minimum phase to phase
voltage values
3 minimum phase
current values
4 minimum active power
4 minimum reactive power
4 minimum apparent power
23

Flush-mount LED multimeter Order code Displayed Relay Qty Wt General characteristics
three phase measurements output per The DMK 16 R1 multimeter is available with flush-mount
DMK 16 R1 3 phase voltage 1 1 0.353
values Operational characteristics
3 phase to phase – Auxiliary supply voltage: 220-240VAC standard;
voltage values 24VAC, 110-127VAC or 380-415VAC type on request
3 phase current – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
values – True RMS measurements
4 active power values, – Accuracy: Voltage ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit
phase and total Current ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit
4 reactive power – Active energy accuracy: Class 2 (IEC/EN 62053-21
values, phase and and IEC/EN 62053-23)
DMK 16 R1
total – HIGH and LOW measurement storage
4 apparent power – Voltage measurement range: 35-660VAC
values, phase and – Current measurement range: 0.05-5.75A
total – Frequency measurement range: 45-65Hz
3 phase power factor – Programmable VT ratio: 1.00-500.0
values – Programmable CT ratio: 5-10,000
1 frequency value – 1 relay output with 1 changeover (SPDT) contact
1 active energy value – Housing: Flush mount 96x48mm/3.78x1.9”
in kWh – Terminals: 4mm2
1 reactive energy – IEC protection degree: IP54 on front; IP20 at terminals.
value in kvarh
1 hour counter PROGRAMMABLE RELAY OUTPUT
3 maximum phase – Voltage
voltage values • Phase loss or failure: OFF/5-85%
3 maximum phase to • Maximum voltage: OFF/102-120%
phase voltage • Minimum voltage: OFF/70-98%
values • Asymmetry: OFF/2-20%
3 maximum phase • Phase sequence: OFF/L1-L2-L3/L3-L2-L1
current values – Current
4 minimum and • Protection inhibition max current: OFF/2-100%
maximum active • Maximum current: OFF/102-200%
power values, • Maximum current instantaneous tripping:
phase and total OFF/110-600%
4 minimum and • Minimum current: OFF/5-98%
maximum reactive • Asymmetry: OFF/2-20%
power values, – Power factor
phase and total • Maximum power factor: 0.10-1.00
4 minimum and • Minimum power factor: 0.10-1.00
maximum apparent – Time delay for max-min voltage, max-min current or
power values, current loss, phase loss, asymmetry and min-max
phase and total power factor : 0.0-900.0 seconds.
2 minimum and
maximum power Certifications and compliance
factor values Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
Connection also to single phase.
Multimeters.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
23

Flush mount LED Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

multimeters per DMK 2... digital multimeters are available with fush-mount
pkg housing, 96x96mm/3.78x3.78” size. They monitor and view
non expandable n° [kg] reliable readings of electrical parameters, even in presence
47 electrical parameters DMK 20 Basic version, auxiliary 1 0.434
of critical operating conditions, such as voltages and
currents with high harmonic content and variable frequency.
supply 208-240VAC The total and partial hour counter feature provides an
DMK 21 Version with energy 1 0.477 interesting feature for electric panels of emergency
meters included, auxiliary generating sets.
supply 208-240VAC The diversified and accurate measurements give the
DMK 22 Version with energy 1 0.477 multimeters valuable technical and cost effective advantages
meters and RS485 port respect to traditional analog instrumentation.
included, auxiliary supply DMK2... digital multimeters view 47 electrical parameters:
208-240VAC – Voltage: phase, line and system values
– Battery voltage: 9-32VDC for DMK 25 only
DMK 25 Version for generating 1 0.350 – Current: phase values
set duty, auxiliary supply – Power: apparent phase, active and reactive values
12-24VDC – P.F.: power factor per phase
DMK 2...
– Frequency (measured voltage frequency)
– HIGH/LOW: instantaneous minimum and maximum
values of each phase voltage and current, total active
power (W), total reactive power (var) and total
apparent power (VA) values
– Total hours: non-volatile clearable log for DMK 20 and
DMK 25 only
– Partial hours: non-volatile configurable log for DMK 20
and DMK 25 only
– Active and reactive energy meters for DMK21 and
DMK22 only.
– Auxiliary supply voltage range:
• 154-288VAC for DMK 20
• 177-264VAC for DMK 21-DMK 22
• 9-32VDC for DMK 25
– Voltage measurement range: 60-830VAC phase-phase
30-480VAC phase-neutral
– Current measurement range: 0.05-6A
– Programmable CT ratio: 1.0-2,000
– Voltage accuracy: Class 0.5 ±0.35% f.s. (830V)
– Current accuracy: Class 0.5 ±0.5% f.s. (6A)
– Active energy accuracy: Class 2
– Non-volatile total and partial hour counter with
separate clearing; used as maintenance interval with
alarm display in DMK 20 - DMK 25 only
– HIGH and LOW value functions to read and log
instantaneous voltage, current and power values
– Delayed automatic resetting of default measurements
– Averaging function to slow down repetitive fluctuations
to obtain more stable readouts
– Current connection in ARON configuration by 2 current
transformers (CTs) only
– Single, two, three phase, with or without neutral, and
balanced three-phase connection
– RS485 serial port, compatible with software
– TRMS measurements up to 22° harmonic order
– IEC protection degree: IP54 on front; IP 20 at rear.

See Section 28.

Multimeters.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
23 CSA C22.2 n°14.

23-24 page 23-30 and 31 page 23-34 page 23-39 page 23-48
Flush mount LED Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

multimeters per DMK3... and DMK40 digital multimeters are available with
pkg flush-mount housing, 96x96mm/3.78x3.78” size. They
non expandable n° [kg] comprise excellent features so distorted waveform
251 electric parameters conditions, such as very disturbed supply lines having
DMK 30 Basic version, auxiliary supply 1 0.410 voltage and currents with high harmonic content and variable
100-240VAC / 110-250VDC freqeuncy, do not influence the high accuracy of DMK
DMK 31 Version with 1 relay and 1 0.480 multimeter readouts, because of the rigorous deisgn in
1 static programmable addition to the use of the latest generation of microprocessor
outputs, auxiliary supply technology. Measurement of the phase angle (cos) in
100-240VAC / 110-250VDC addition to power factor, harmonic analysis and HIGH-LOW-
MAX DEMAND functions are just a few of those which are
DMK 32 Version with 1 relay and 1 0.490 difficult to find on higher category equipment.
1 static programmable outputs The DMK 40 version includes a reliable data-logger system,
and RS485 opto-isolated port, extremely easy to use. DMK 3... and DMK 40 multimeters can
auxiliary supply display 251 electric parameters; a few of these are listed below:
100-240VAC / 110-250VDC – Voltage: phase, line and system values
DMK 32 D048 Version with 1 relay and 1 0.485 – Current: phase and system values
DMK 3... 1 static programmable outputs – Power: active, reactive, apparent phase and total values
DMK 40 and RS485 opto-isolated port, – Energy: import, export, active and reactive values
auxiliary supply 24-48VDC – P.F.: power factor per phase
– cos: angle displacement, i.e. power factor related to
DMK 40 Version with data-logger, 1 0.470 the harmonic fundamental only
RS232 and RS485 – Frequency of measured voltage value
opto-isolated ports, – Harmonics (HARM.): residual and total harmonic
auxiliary supply content for each harmonic order up to the 22° per
100-240VAC / 110-250VDC phase, both for voltage and current values
– HIGH / LOW: maximum / minimum values of phase
voltage and current and W, var and VA power
– Maximum demand (MAX): maximum current and total
active power values, both calculated on programmable
integration time.
The technical features of the DMK 40 data-logger are:
– 2Mbyte (MB) non-volatile memory for data logging
– Real Time Clock (RTC) with replaceable backup lithium
battery
– Sampling time, 1s to 24h configurable
– Number of sampling measurements, 1 to 32
configurable at a time
– Communication protocols: Modbus-RTU and
Modbus-ASCII
– Data logging of one electrical parameter in continuous
format or with begin-end by programmable thresholds
– Compatible with software
– Suspension of data acquisition at full memory or
refreshing oldest data.
– Operating auxiliary voltage range: 85-265VAC /
93.5-300VDC; 18-70VDC for DMK32 D048
– Voltage measurement range: 20-830VAC phase-phase;
– VT ratio programming: 1.0-5,000
– CT ratio programming: 1.0-2,000
– Voltage accuracy: ±0.25% f.s. (830V)
– Current accuracy: ±0.35% f.s. (6A)
– Frequency and harmonic distortion accuracy: ±1 digit
– HIGH and LOW value functions to detect and log
– Averaging function to slow down repetitive fluctuations
to obtain more stable readouts
– Current connection in ARON configuration by 2 current
transformers only
– Single, two, three phase, with or without neutral, and
balanced three-phase connection by 1 CT only
– Usage with voltage transformers for voltages >830VAC
– True RMS measurements up to 22° harmonic order
– Power factor and cos measurements
– Voltage and current harmonic analysis per phase up to
23
22° harmonic order
– Active energy meters (import-export)
– Reactive energy meters (import-export)
– IEC protection degree: IP54 on front; IP 20 at rear.
See Section 28.
Multimeters.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, CISPR11/EN 55011, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.

page 23-30 and 31 page 23-34 page 23-39 page 23-48 23-25
Modular LED instruments Order Displayed Relay Qty Wt General characteristics

single phase code measurements output per The DMK 8... instruments are available with modular
pkg housing, 3 module size.
Voltmeter.
DMK 80 1 voltage value – 1 0.237 Operational characteristics
DMK 80 R1 1 max voltage value 1 1 0.268 – Auxiliary supply voltage: 220-240VAC standard;
1 min voltage value 24VAC, 110-127VAC or 380-415VAC type on request
Ammeter. – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
– True RMS measurements
DMK 81 1 current value – 1 0.237 – HIGH and LOW measurement storage
DMK 81 R1 1 max current value 1 1 0.268 – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT) for
1 min current value DMK...R1 version only
Voltmeter or ammeter. – Terminals: 4mm2
DMK 80 DMK 80 R1 DMK 82 1 voltage or current – 1 0.241 – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 3 modules
value – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front; IP20 on
1 maximum voltage terminals.
or current value
1 minimum voltage DMK 80 - DMK 80 R1
or current value – Voltage measurement range: 15-660VAC
Frequency meter. – Programmable VT ratio: 1.00-500.00
DMK 83 1 frequency value – 1 0.237 – Accuracy: ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit
DMK 83 R1 1 max frequency value 1 1 0.268
1 min frequency value DMK 81 - DMK 81 R1
Cosphi meter. – Current measurement range: 0.05-5.75A
DMK 84 1 cosphi value – 1 0.241 – Programmable CT ratio: 5-10,000
DMK 81 DMK 81 R1 DMK 84 R1 1 power factor value 1 1 0.272 – Accuracy: ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit
The DMK82 can operate as a voltmeter or ammeter. It is duly equipped
with two front plates (V and A) which must be fitted by the user DMK 82
depending on which instrument is required and on the wiring scheme – Voltage measurement range: 15-660VAC
used. – Current measurement range: 0.05-5.75A
Relay output with control and protection functions. – Operating frequency range: 45-65Hz
– Programmable VT ratio: 1.00-500.00
– Programmable CT ratio: OFF/5-10,000
DMK 83 - DMK 83 R1
– Measurement input: 15-660VAC
DMK 82 DMK 82 – Frequency measurement range: 50-60Hz ±10%
– Measurement accuracy: ±1 digit
– Accuracy: ±1 digit
DMK 84 - DMK 84 R1
– Cosphi measurement error: ±0.5° ±1 digit
– Cosphi measurement in 4 quadrants
– Accuracy: ±1° ±1 digit
Control and protection functions

DMK 80 R1
– Voltage loss or failure: OFF/5-85%
DMK 83 DMK 83 R1 – Minimum voltage: OFF/70-98%
– Time delay for max-min voltage or voltage loss, phase
loss : 0.0-900.0 seconds.
DMK 81 R1
OFF/110-600%
– Time delay for max-min current or current loss :
0.0-900.0 seconds.
DMK 83 R1
DMK 84 DMK 84 R1
23 – Maximum frequency: OFF/101-110%
– Time delay for min-max frequency :
0.5-900.0 seconds.
DMK 84 R1
– Minimum-maximum cos thresholds in 4 quadrants
– Minimum-maximum PF thresholds in 4 quadrants
– Delay time for max or min threshold :
1-9,000 seconds.

IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3.

23-26 page 23-35 page 23-38 page 23-46
Modular LED instruments Order Displayed Relay Qty Wt General characteristics

code measurements output per The DMK 7... instruments are available with modular
three phase pkg housing, 3 module size.
non expandable n° n° n° [kg]
Measurements are True RMS values and provide for
Voltmeter.
DMK 70 3 phase voltage values – 1 0.233 – Auxiliary supply voltage: 220-240VAC standard;
DMK 70 R1 3 phase to phase 1 1 0.264 24VAC, 110-127VAC or 380-415VAC type on request
voltage values – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
3 max phase voltage – True RMS measurements
values – HIGH and LOW measurement storage
3 max phase to phase – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT) for
voltage values DMK...R1 version only
3 min phase voltage – Terminals: 4mm2
values
– IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front; IP20 on
DMK 70 DMK 70 R1 3 min phase to phase terminals.
voltage values
DMK 70 - DMK 70 R1
Ammeter.
– Voltage measurement range: 15-660VAC
DMK 71 3 phase current values – 1 0.241 – Operating frequency range: 45-65Hz
DMK 71 R1 3 max phase current 1 1 0.272 – Programmable VT ratio: 1.00-500.00
values – Accuracy: ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit
3 min phase current DMK 71 - DMK 71 R1
values – Current measurement range: 0.05-5.75A
Combined voltmeter, ammeter and wattmeter. – Operating frequency range: 45-65Hz
– Programmable CT ratio: 5-10,000
DMK 75 3 phase voltage values – 1 0.271
– Accuracy: ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit
DMK 75 R1 3 phase to phase 1 1 0.280
voltage values DMK 75 - DMK 75 R1
DMK 71 DMK 71 R1 3 phase current values – Voltage measurement range: 35-660VAC
4 active power values, – Current measurement range: 0.05-5.75A
phase and total – Frequency measure range: 45-65Hz
3 maximum phase – Programmable VT ratio: 1.00-500.00
voltage values – Programmable CT ratio: 5-10,000
3 maximum phase to
phase voltage values
3 maximum phase Control and protection functions
current values DMK 70 R1
4 max active power, – Phase loss or failure: OFF/5-85%
phase and total – Maximum voltage: OFF/102-120%
3 minimum phase – Minimum voltage: OFF/70-98%
voltage values – Asymmetry: OFF/2-20%
3 minimum phase to – Phase sequence: OFF/L1-L2-L3/L3-L2-L1
DMK 75 DMK 75 R1 – Maximum frequency: OFF/101-110%
phase voltage values
3 minimum phase – Time delay for max-min voltage, phase loss,
current values asymmetry and min-max frequency :
4 min active power, 0.0-900.0 seconds.
phase and total
DMK 71 R1
Connection also to single phase. – Current loss: OFF/2-100%
Relay output with control and protection functions. – Maximum current: OFF/102-200%
OFF/110-600%
– Time delay for max-min current or current loss and
asymmetry : 0.0-900.0 seconds.
DMK 75 R1
Voltage
– Phase loss or failure: OFF/5-85%
– Minimum voltage: OFF/70-98%
– Phase sequence: OFF/L1-L2-L3/L3-L2-L1
Current
OFF/110-600%
Power
– Rated power: 1-10,000
23
– Maximum power: OFF/101-200%
– Maximum power instantaneous tripping:
OFF/110-600%
– Minimum power: OFF/10-99%
Frequency
– Maximum frequency: OFF/101-110%
– Time delay for max-min voltage, max-min current or
current loss, phase loss, asymmetry and min-max
power : 0.0-900.0 seconds.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3.

page 23-35 page 23-38 page 23-47 23-27
Digital measuring instruments.
Starter kits
Modular LED multimeters Order Description Qty Wt General characteristics

non expandable code per DMK 5... digital multimeters are available with modular
pkg housing, 6 module size. They monitor and view reliable
47 electric parameters n° [kg] readings of electric parameters, even in presence of
critical operating conditions, such as voltages and
DMK 50 Basic version, 1 0.398 currents with high harmonic content and variable
auxiliary supply frequency.
208-240VAC The total and partial hour counter feature provides an
DMK 51 Version with energy 1 0.420 interesting feature for electric panels of emergency
meters included, generating sets.
auxiliary supply The diversified and accurate measurements give the
208-240VAC multimeters valuable technical and cost effective
DMK 52 Version with energy meters 1 0.420 advantages respect to traditional analog instrumentation.
and RS485 port, The digital multimeters DMK 5... view 47 electric
auxiliary supply parameters:
208-240VAC – Voltage: phase, line and system values
– Current: phase values
DMK 5... – Power: apparent phase, active and reactive values
– P.F.: power factor per phase
– Frequency of measured voltage value
– HIGH/LOW: instantaneous minimum and maximum
values of each phase voltage and current, total active
power (W), total reactive power (var) and total
apparent power (VA) values
– Total hours: non-volatile clearable log for DMK 50 only
Starter kits Order Description Qty Wt – Partial hours: non-volatile configurable log for
code per DMK 50 only
pkg – Active and reactive energy meters for DMK 51 and
n° [kg] DMK 52 only.
DMKKIT 51 060 Kit composed of one 1 1.020 Operational characteristics
DMK 51 multimeter and DMK 50 - DMK 51 - DMK 52
three 60/5A CTs – Auxiliary supply voltage range:
for Ø22mm/0.87” cable • 154-288VAC for DMK 50
DMKKIT 51 080 Kit composed of one 1 1.020 • 177-264VAC for DMK 51-DMK 52
DMK 51 multimeter and – Voltage measurement range:
three 80/5A CTs 60-830VAC phase-phase; 30-480VAC phase-neutral
for Ø22mm/0.87” cable – Current measurement range: 0.05-6A
DMKKIT 51 100 Kit composed of one 1 1.020 – Frequency measurement range: 45-65Hz
DMK 51 multimeter and – Programmable CT ratio: 1.0-2,000
three 100/5A CTs – Accuracy: Voltage-class 0.5 ±0.35% f.s. (830V)
DMKKIT 51 060 for Ø22mm/0.87” cable Current-class 0.5% ±0.5% f.s. (6A)
DMKKIT 51 080 – Active energy accuracy: Class 2
DMKKIT 51 100 DMKKIT 51 150 Kit composed of one 1 0.810 – Non-volatile total and partial hour counter with
DMK 51 multimeter and separate clearing; used as maintenance interval with
three 150/5A CTs alarm display in DMK 50 only
for Ø23mm/0.91” cable – HIGH and LOW value functions to read and log
DMKKIT 51 200 Kit composed of one 1 0.810 instantaneous voltage, current and power values
DMK 51 multimeter and – Delayed automatic resetting of default measurements
three 200/5A CTs – Averaging function to slow down repetitive
for Ø23mm/0.91” cable fluctuations to obtain more stable readouts
DMKKIT 51 250 Kit composed of one 1 8.210 – Current connection in ARON configuration by 2 current
DMK 51 multimeter and transformers (CTs) only
three 250/5A CTs – Single, two, three phase with or without neutral
for Ø23mm/0.91” cable – True RMS measurements up to 22° harmonic order
– RS485 serial port, software compatible for
DMK 52
– IEC degree of protection: IP41 on front; IP 20 on
DMKKIT 51 150 terminals.
DMKKIT 51 200
DMKKIT 51 250 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (CTs) of starter kits
– Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
– Secondary output current: 5A
– Class 1 burden
– Rated insulation voltage Ui: 720V
– Rated short time thermal current Ith: 40-60Ipn for 1
second
– Rated dynamic current Idyn: 2.5Ith for 1 second
23 – Insulation (dry type): class E
– Faston terminals
– Standard supplied fixing elements
See Section 27.
Certifications obtained: EAC for DMK 5...; UL Listed, for
USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary
Devices - Multimeters for DMK5... types, in the starter
kits as well.
Compliant with standards, IEC/EN 61010-1,
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14 for DMK5…; IEC/EN 60044-1 for
transformers of starter kits.

Modular LED multimeters Order Description Qty Wt General characteristics

non expandable code per DMK6... digital multimeters are avaibalble with modular
pkg housing, 6 module size. They comprise excellent
251 electric parameters n° [kg] features, superior to devices of the same category
currently on the marketplace. Distorted waveform
DMK 60 Basic version, 1 0.290 conditions, such as very disturbed electric lines having
auxiliary supply voltage and currents with high harmonic content and
100-240VAC/110-250VDC variable frequency, do not influence the high accuracy
DMK 61 Version with 1 relay and 1 0.300 DMK multimeter readouts because of rigorous design in
1 static programmable addition to the use of the latest generation of
outputs, auxiliary supply microprocessor technology. Measurement of the phase
100-240VAC / 110-250VDC angle (cos) in addition to power factor, harmonics
DMK 62 Version with 1 relay and 1 0.320 analysis and HIGH-LOW-MAX functions are just a few of
1 static programmable outputs, those which are difficult to find on higher category
and RS485 port, auxiliary supply equipment.
100-240VAC / 110-250VDC DMK 6... digital multimeter can display 251 electric
DMK 6... parameters; a few of these are listed below.
– Voltage: phase, line and system values
– Current: phase and system values
– Power: active, reactive, apparent phase and total values
– Energy: active, reactive import and export values
– P.F.: power factor per phase
– cos: angle displacement, i.e. power factor related to
the harmonic fundamental only
– Frequency of measured voltage value
– Harmonics (HARM.): residual and total harmonic
content for each harmonic order up to the 22° per
phase, both for voltage and current values
– HIGH / LOW: maximum / minimum values of phase
voltage and current and W, var and VA power
– Maximum (MAX): maximum current and total active
power values, both calculated on programmable
integration time.
– Auxiliary supply voltage range:
85-265VAC/93.5-300VDC
– Voltage measurement range: 20-830VAC phase-phase
– VT ratio programming: 1.0-5,000
– CT ratio programming: 1.0-2000
– Accuracy: Voltage ±0.25% f.s. (830V)
Current ±0.35% f.s. (6A)
Frequency and harmonic distortion ±1 digit
– HIGH and LOW value functions to detect and log
– Averaging function to slow down repetitive
fluctuations to obtain more stable readouts
– Current connection in ARON configuration via 2
current transformers only
– Single, two, three phase with or without neutral and
balanced three-phase connection via 1 current
transformer only
– Usage with voltage transformers for voltages >830VAC
– True RMS measurements up to 22° harmonic order,
class 1 accuracy
– Power factor and cos measurement
– Voltage and current harmonic analysis per phase up
to 22° harmonic order
– Active energy meters (import-export)
– Reactive energy meters (import-export)
– RS485 serial port, compatible with software
for DMK 62
– IEC degree of protection: IP41 on front; IP 20 on
terminals.

23
See Section 27.

Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices -
Multimeters.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN
61000-6-2, CISPR11/EN55011, UL508, CSA C22.2 n°14.

Communication devices, coves and accessories for measuring instruments
Communication devices Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

per Communication devices for connection of LOVATO
pkg Electric products to personal computers, smartphones
n° [kg] and tablets.
CX 01 USB/optical dongle with 1 0.090 CX 01
PC LOVATO Electric product The USB/optical dongle, complete with cable, allows the
connecting cable, for connection of products compatible with PCs without
programming, data download, having to disconnect the power supply from the electric
diagnostics and firmware panel.
upgrade The PC identifies the connection as a standard USB.
CX 01
CX 02 Wi-Fi dongle for PC LOVATO 1 0.090
Electric product programming, CX 02
data download, diagnostics and By Wi-Fi connection, compatible LOVATO Electric
cloning products can be viewed on PCs, smartphones and
CX 03 GSM/GPRS quad-band antenna 1 0.090 tablets with no need for cabling.
(800/900/1800/199Mhz) for
EXP1015 expansion module CX 03
Antenna compatible with the major part of worldwide
CX 02 mobile networks thanks to the available frequencies at
800/900/1800/1900MHz.
IEC degree of protection: IP67. Fixing by Ø12mm/0.04”
drilling.
For dimensions, wiring schemes and technical

characteristics, refer to technical instructions in
CX 03 Downloads of local or global websites or consult
Customer Service. See contact details on the inside
front cover.
Protection covers Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

per When a higher front IP protection degree is needed, the
pkg covers can be installed on the corresponding devices
and also provide a sealing feature.
n° [kg]
PA 96X48 Front protection cover, IEC IP65 1 0.048
for DMK 0… and DMK 1…
31 PA 96X96 Front protection cover, IEC IP54 1 0.077
for DMK 2…, DMK 3… and
DMK 40
Accessories Order code Description Qty Wt

per
pkg
n° [kg]
EXP80 00 Plastic insert for customising 10 0.005
label fixing for DMG 600/610
EXP80 00 EXM80 04 Set of sealable terminal covers 1 0.020
for DMG 200/210/300
23
23-30
Converter drive, cables, clamp kits and software for measuring instruments
RS232-RS485 Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

converter drive per RS232-RS485 CONVERTER DRIVE
pkg It can interface “slave” devices connected in an RS485
n° [kg] bus with a “master” equipped with RS232 interface port.
When configured appropriately, it can also be used as
4 PX1 RS2322/RS485 converter 1 0.600 RS485 repeater whenever the devices connected to the
drive, opto-isolated, bus are many or the maximum distance among the bus
220-240VAC devices is longer than the allowed.
RS232/RS485 opto-isolated converter drive, 38,400 Baud rate maximum,
automatic or manual TRANSMIT line supervision, CONNECTING CABLES 51 C…
4 PX1 220-240VAC ±10% (110-120VAC supply on request). To connect energy meters and/or multimeters with:
– Personal computers
– Modems
– Bus converters.
Connecting cables Order code Description Qty Wt
per Electrical safety for DMG M3…
pkg (IEC/EN 61010-1 and IEC/EN 61010-2-032)
CURRENT CLAMPS
n° [kg] – 600V category III (industrial and services) with anti-
Connecting cables. slip protection and conductor
51 C2 For PCmultimeter RS232 1 0.090 anti-pinching system
port, 1.8m/2yd long – 300V category IV.
VOLTAGE MEASURING CABLES
51 C4 For PC4 PX1 converter drive, 1 0.147 – 1000V category III (industrial and services).
1.8m/2yd long
51 C5 For analog modemmultimeter 1 0.111 DMK SW SOFTWARE
51 C4 RS232 port, Remote control software for DMK 22, DMK 32, DMK 40,
1.8m/2yd long DMK 52, DMK 62, DMG 210, DMG 300, DMG 700,
51 C9 For 4PX 1 converter 1 0.137 DMG 800, DMG 900 and DMG 900T.
driveanalog modem, This software is capable of controlling a maximum of
1.8m/2yd long 250 digital multimeters remotely connected to one RS485
bus.
Current clamp kits for DMG M3…. portable devices. The DMK SW is subdivided into modules which warrant
DMG M3 KIT01 Composed by 3 current 1 6.900 simple and easy use:
clamps 1000/1 and 4 alligator – Main synoptic page which includes the most important
clip cables for voltage in-coming data of the various DMK/DMG connected
measurements – Detailed page with data related to the selected
DMG M3 KIT02 Composed by 1 current 1 0.860 DMK/DMG unit
clamps 1000/1 and 1 alligator – Data log which consents to store sampled
DMG M3 KIT... measurements on disk (max 128 measurements)
clip cable for voltage
measurements. – Events / alarms log with alarm data acquisition of the
For DMGM3900, if measuring various DMKs/DMGs as well as the elaborated analysis
inputs for neutral-earth/ground – Trend graphs to control electric parameters status
and neutral current are used too – Harmonic content analysis bar graph
– Energy count to periodically view energy counters of
the various instruments and monitor energy
Software Order code Description Qty Wt consumption.
per
pkg DMK SW10 SOFTWARE
Data-logger and remote control for DMK 40 and DMG...
n° [kg] with memory modules.
Software. The DMK SW10 includes the data-logger software and
DMK SW Remote control software for 1 0.246 the remote control DMK SW software, two applications
PC-DMK 22/32/40/52/62 and with separate installation.
PC-DMG 210/200/600/800/900 The data-logger software permits:
having Modbus-RTU and ASCII – To configure multimeter parameters for data logging
protocols, complete with 51 C4 and installation parameters (VT and CT ratio, etc.)
connecting cable – To view and print acquired data from the multimeter
storage memory in table or trend graph format.
DMK SW10 DMK SW 10 Data-logger software complete 1 0.400 No data-logger configuration or stored data viewing is
with 31 C2 connecting cable. obtainable on the unit front
Remote control and supervision – To download data in ACCESS, EXCEL or TEXT file
Software for PC-DMK / DMG – To view all actual electric parameter measurements on
(as above) having Modbus-RTU a virtual multimeter display (DMK only)
and ASCII protocols, complete – To program the multimeter clock-calendar (RTC - Real
with 51 C4 connecting cable Time Clock) to automatically manage daylight saving
time
– To connect directly or via modem with the multimeters.

See Section 27.
23
Reference standards
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
For dimensions, wiring schemes and technical

characteristics, refer to technical instructions in
Downloads of local or global websites or consult
Customer Service. See contact details on the inside front
cover.
23-31
Current transformers
Solid-core Order code Primary Burden Qty Weight General characteristics

current Class Class per The DM... series current transformers (CTs) are installed
Ipn 0.5 1 pkg in electric installations to reduce the line current to a
/5 [A] [VA] [VA] n° [kg] secondary value of 5A, which is compatible with current
inputs of digital multimeters or protection relays.
For Ø22mm/0.9” cable. These are without primary winding and are used for high
DM0T 0050 50 — 1.25 1 0.200 primary current values from 50A upward.
DM0T 0060 60 — 1.5 1 0.200 The number of loops of the primary cable does not
modify the accuracy but converts the primary current
DM0T 0080 80 — 1.5 1 0.200 value proportional to secondary current.
DM0T 0100 100 — 1.5 1 0.200
DM0T 0150 150 — — 1 0.200
For Ø23mm/0.9” cable. 300/5A
DM0T...
For 30x10mm/1.2x0.4”, 25x12.5mm/1x0.5”,
20x15mm/0.8x0.4” busbars. S2
L n°=1
DM2T 0100 100 — 1.5 1 0.130
S1
K
DM2T 0150 150 — 1.5 1 0.130 300 / 5A
DM2T 0200 200 — 2.5 1 0.130 9
J-2 K
1 loop = 300 / 5A
-
P1
DM2T 0250 250 — 2.5 1 0.130
DM2T 0300 300 1.5 3 1 0.130
DM2T 0400 400 2 3 1 0.130 300:n/5A
For Ø30mm/1.2” cable. 300:1/5A=300/5A
DM2T...
For 40x10mm/1.6x0.4”, 30x20mm/1.2x0.8”,
25x25mm/1x1” busbars.
DM3T 0200 200 — 5 1 0.260 300/5A
DM3T 0250 250 — 5 1 0.260
DM3T 0300 300 2.5 5 1 0.260 S2
L
n°=2
DM3T 0400 400 2.5 5 1 0.260 S1
K
DM3T 0500 500 2.5 5 1 0.260 300 / 5A
DM3T 0600 600 5 10 1 0.260 9
J-2 K 2 loops = 150 / 5A
-
P1
DM3T 0800 800 5 10 1 0.260
DM3T 1000 1000 5 10 1 0.260
DM3T...
300:n/5A
For Ø86mm/3.4” cable.
For 100x30mm/3.9x1.2”, 80x50mm/3.1x2”, 300:2/5A=150/5A
70x60mm/2.8x2.4” busbars.
DM4T 1000 1000 10 20 1 0,700
DM4T 1200 1200 15 30 1 0.700 300/5A
DM4T 1250 1250 15 30 1 0.760
S2
DM4T 1500 1500 30 30 1 0.760 L
n°=3
DM4T 1600 1600 30 30 1 0.800 S1
K
300 / 5A
DM4T 2000 2000 45 45 1 0.840
9
J-2 K
3 loops = 100 / 5A
DM4T 2500 2500 45 45 1 0.900 P1
-
DM4T 3000 3000 45 45 1 0.900

DM4T...
DM4T 3500 3500 50 50 1 0.900 300:n/5A
DM4T 4000 4000 50 50 1 0.900 300:3/5A=100/5A
Order code Primary Burden Qty Weight – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
current Class Class per – Secondary output current: 5A
Ipn 0.5S 0.5 pkg – Overload withstand: 120% Ipn
/5 [A] [VA] [VA] n° [kg] – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 720V
– IEC rated short-time thermal current Ith:
For Ø28mm/1.1” cable. 40-60 Ipn for 1 second
For 20x10mm/0.8x0.4“ and 30x10mm/1.2x0.4” busbars. – IEC rated dynamic current Idyn: 2.5 Ith for 1 second
DM5T 0060 60 1.5 1.5 1 0.560 – Insulation (dry type): Class E
DM5T 0080 80 2.5 2.5 1 0.580 – Terminals:
• Faston for DM2T and DM3T types
DM5T 0100 100 2.5 3.75 1 0.480 • Screw for DM0T, DM4T and DM5T types
DM5T 0150 150 2.5 3.75 1 0.480 – Sealable terminal covers for DM0T, DM4T and DM5T
23 DM5T 0200 200 2.5 3.75 1 0.460 types
– Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) or by screws
DM5T... DM5T 0250 250 2.5 5 1 0.480 (fixing elements standard supplied with the product)
DM5T 0300 300 2.5 5 1 0.480 – IEC degree of protection: IP30
Versions with Italian UTF certificates Consult Customer Service to query about versions with Italian UTF – Ambient conditions
on request. certificates; see contact details on inside front cover. • Operating temperature: -25 ... +50°C
• Storage temperature: -40 ... +80°C.
• Relative humidity, non condensing: 90%.
Reference standards
The UTF certificate is required for revenue tax

purposes by Italian authorities when equipment is part
of generating electricity installations (e.g. solar, wind)
and there is electricity exchange with the power grid.
Dimensions
23-32 page 23-35
Split-core Order code Primary Burden Qty Weight General characteristics

current Class Class per The DM... series current transformers (CTs) are installed
Ipn 0.5 1 pkg in electric installations to reduce the line current to a
/5 [A] [VA] [VA] n° [kg] secondary value of 5A, which is compatible with current
inputs of digital multimeters or protection relays.
For 50x60mm/2x2.4” busbar. These are without primary winding and are used for high
DM1TA 0250 250 1 2 1 0.900 primary current values from 250A upward.
DM1TA 0300 300 1.5 3 1 0.900
DM1TA 0400 400 1.5 3 1 0.900 – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
DM1TA 0500 500 2.5 5 1 0.900 – Secondary output current: 5A
DM1TA 0600 600 2.5 5 1 0.900 – Overload withstand: 120% Ipn
DM1TA 0750 750 3 6 1 0.900 – IEC rated short-time thermal current Ith:
DM1TA 0800 800 3 7.5 1 0.900 40-60 Ipn for 1 second
DM1TA... – IEC rated dynamic current Idyn: 2.5 Ith for 1 second
DM1TA 1000 1000 5 10 1 0.900
– Insulation (dry type): Class E
For 80x80mm/3.1x3.1” busbar. – Screw terminals
DM2TA 0250 250 1 2 1 1.050 – Sealable terminal covers
DM2TA 0300 300 1.5 3 1 1.050 – Screw fixing (fixing elements standard supplied with
the product)
DM2TA 0400 400 1.5 3 1 1.050 – IEC degree of protection: IP30
DM2TA 0500 500 2.5 5 1 1.050 – Ambient conditions
DM2TA 0600 600 2.5 5 1 1.050 • Operating temperature: -25 ... +50°C
• Storage temperature: -40 ... +80°C.
DM2TA 0750 750 3 6 1 1.050 • Relative humidity, non condensing: 90%.
DM2TA 0800 800 3 7.5 1 1.050
DM2TA 1000 1000 5 10 1 1.050 Reference standards
DM2TA... Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60044-1.
For 80x120mm/3.1x4.7” busbar.
DM3TA 0500 500 — 4 1 1.250
DM3TA 0600 600 — 5 1 1.250
DM3TA 0750 750 2.5 6 1 1.250
DM3TA 0800 800 3 7.5 1 1.250
DM3TA 1000 1000 5 10 1 1.250
DM3TA 1200 1200 6 12.5 1 1.250
DM3TA 1250 1250 7.5 15 1 1.250
DM3TA 1500 1500 8 17 1 1.250
For 80x160mm/3.1x6.3” busbar.
DM4TA 2000 2000 15 20 1 3.160
DM4TA 2500 2500 15 20 1 3.340
DM3TA...
DM4TA 3000 3000 20 25 1 3.500
DM4TA 4000 4000 20 25 1 3.760
DM4TA...
23
Dimensions
page 23-35 23-33
ENERGY METERS
Mechanical meter DME M100... Digital meter DME D115 T1 - DME D120 T1... Digital meter DME D300 T2... - DME D300 F -
Digital meter DME D100... - DME D110... DME D121 - DME D130 DME D310 F... - DME D310 T2... - DME D320
Data concentrator DME CD - DME CD PV1...
35.8 5 58 (2.28") 5 58 (2.28")
59.9 (2.35") (1.41") (0.20") 43.7 (1.72") 71.6 (2.82") (0.20") 43.7 (1.72")
17.5
(0.69") 43.8 (1.72")
104.7 (4.12")
104.7 (4.12")
98.3 (3.87")
98.3 (3.87")
45 (1.77")
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
85 (3.35")
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
5
(0.20") Ø4.2 Ø4.2
(0.16") (0.16")
MULTIMETERS
DMG 200 - DMG 210 - DMG 300 Expansion modules EXM...
63 (2.48")
43.8 (1.72") 11
5 42.7 (1.68") (0.43")
71.6 (2.82") (0.20") 35.8 63 (2.48")
(1.41") 43.8 (1.72")
63.5 (2.50")
105.4 (4.15")
63.5 (2.50")
93.4 (3.68")
45 (1.77")
95 (3.74")
90 (3.54")
90 (3.54")
45 (1.77")
36.4
(1.43")
DMG 600 - DMG 610 DMG 700 - DMG 800... - DMG 900... with expansion modules EXP...
65 (2.56") 8.5 26.3 19
96 (3.78") 92 (3.62") 92 (3.62")
55 (2.16") (0.33") 96 (3.78") (1.03") 53.2 (2.09") (0.75")
99.5 (3.92")
64.5 (2.54")
96 (3.78")
92 (3.62")
92 (3.62")
EXP 10... 61.5 (2.42")
EXP 10...
Transducer DMG 900T with expansion modules EXP... DMG 900RD remote display Cutout
115 (4.53")
96 (3.78")
20 28.8 24
(0.79") 5 (1.13") 19 92 (3.62")
(0.20") (0.94")
37.3 96 (3.78") (0.75")
43.5 (1.71”)
(1.47”)
101.3 (3.99")
110 (4.33")
90.8 (3.57")
96 (3.78")
64.5 (2.54”)
96.3 (3.79”)
92 (3.62")
91.7 (3.61") EXP 10...

54 (2.12")
91.6 (3.61")
INSTRUMENTS
DMK 0... - DMK 1...
9 92 (3.62")
24 (0.35")
96 (3.78") (0.94") 81 (3.19")
45 (1.77")
48 (1.89")
44 (1.73")
23
MULTIMETERS
DMK 2... DMK 3... - DMK 40
14 6 92 (3.62") 12 6 92 (3.62")
(0.55") (0.24") (0.47") (0.24")
96 (3.78") 62 (2.44") 96 (3.78") 82 (3.23")
96 (3.78")
90 (3.54")
92 (3.62")
92 (3.62")
96 (3.78")
90 (3.54")
23-34
INSTRUMENTS
DMK 7... - DMK 8... Multimetri DMK 5... - DMK 6...
5 58.1 (2.29")
53.5 (2.11") (0.20") 43.8 (1.72") 60 (2.36")
105 (4.13") 55 (2.16")
36
105.4 (4.15")
63.5 (2.50")
99 (3.90")
90 (3.54")
45 (1.77")
45 (1.77")
95 (3.74")
90 (3.54")
1
Ø4.2
(0.16")
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Solid core DM0T... DM2T... DM3T...
(0.37")
(0.37")
9.5
9.5
32 52 (2.05") 46.5 (1.83") 62.5 (2.46")
(1.26”) 71 (2.79")
(0.49")
12.5
65.5 (2.58")
66 (2.60”)
56.5 (2.22")
81.5 (3.19")
3
72.5 (2.85")
Ø2 0")
40 (1.57")
2
Ø2 7”) (0.
9
(1.10")
(0.
8 Ø30 ")
(0.59")
28
8
(0.39")
15 (1.1
(1.44")
10
36.5
20 (0.79")
10 (0.39")
20 27.5
44 (1.73”) 30 (1.08")
(1.18”) 25 (0.79")
(0.79") 25 44.5 (1.75")
30 (0.98")
(1.18") 30
DM4T... (1.18")
104 (4.09") 53 (2.08") 40 (1.57")
DM5T...
60 (2.36”)
45 (1.77”)
Ø8 8")
(3.
(0.43”)
155 (6.10")
6
3
51 (2.01")
61 (2.40")
71 (2.79")
81 (3.19")
11
(1.22")
31
98.5 (3.88”)
(0.85”) Ø2
(1.24”)
(1.02”)
21.5
31.5
(1 8
26
.10
”)
74 (2.91")
(0.65”)
16.5
31.5 40
(1.24”) (1.18”)
51 (2.01") 74.5 (2.93”)
101 (3.98")
121 (4.76")
140 (5.51")
Split core DM1TA... DM2TA... DM3TA...

114 (4.49") 50 (1.97") 142 (5.59") 50 (1.97") 142 (5.59") 50 (1.97")
S2 P2 S2 P2 S2 P2
144 (5.67")
144 (5.67")
80 (3.15")
80 (3.15")
184 (7.24")
120 (4.72")
(1.26")
(1.26")
32
P2
32
P2
52 (2.05") 32 80 (3.15") 32
(1.26") (1.26")
(1.26")
78 (3.07") 109 (4.29")

32
P2
DM4TA... 32
184 (7.24") 68 (2.68") 80 (3.15")
(1.26")
109 (4.29")
(1.26")
47 (1.85")
P2
32
S2
23
175 (6.89")
245 (9.64")
160 (6.30")
(1.50")
(1.50")
38
38
32
80 (3.15") (1.26")
120 (4.72") 52 (2.05")
23-35
Wiring diagrams
ENERGY METERS
Mechanical DME M100 DME M100 T1
L L
230VAC 230VAC
N N
L N L N
5
640 pulses/kWh
METER METER Vce max: 35V
Imax: 20mA
6
L N L N
LOAD LOAD
Digital DME D100 T1... - DME D110 T1... DME D115 T1 - DME D120 T1... - DME D130 DME D121
N N N N
N O1+ O1- N N O1+ O1- N A B
Static Static RS485
LINE LOAD LINE LOAD LINE LOAD

METER METER 220...240VAC METER
L L L L L L
L L L L L L
110-120VAC DMED...A120; 220-240VAC DMED...; 230V 50Hz DMED... T1 MID.
DME D300 T2... - DME D300 F DME D310 T2... - DME D310 F...
LINE L1
380-415V (L-L) 380-415V (L-L) L2
220-240V (L-N) 220-240V (L-N) L3
Tariff input N
100...240VAC
V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
L1 L2 L3 N I3
I1
I2
T1 T2
METER
Static
Static
O1 O2
+ – + – T1 T2 O1+ O1- O2+ O2-
L1 L2 L3 Pulse output
Pulse output 30VDC 50mA
LOAD 30VDC 50mA
230V 50Hz (L-N), 400V 50Hz (L-L) DMED... T2 MID / DMED... F.
DME D320
Single phase Two phase Three phase with or without neutral
CT1 CT1 CT1
L L L
O CT2 O CT2 O
N A A A
CT3
D N D D
N
110...250VDC 110...250VDC
100...240VAC 100...240VAC 110...250VDC
100...240VAC
A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2

I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE
CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT
Three phase without neutral in ARON connection

CT1 CT1
L L
CT2 O O
A CT3 A
D D
110...250VDC 110...250VDC
100...240VAC 100...240VAC
A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE
CURRENT CURRENT
23 Data concentrator DME CD - DME CD PV1

100...240VAC
110...250VDC
100...240VAC
110VDC
SG
TR
A1
A2
T1
T2
A
B
Aux Tariff
Supply Input RS485
2 x 4 groups
Insulated inputs
COM1
COM2
COM3
COM4
I1.1
I1.2
I2.1
I2.2
I3.1
I3.2
I4.1
I4.2
23-36
Wiring diagrams
MULTIMETERS DMG 200 - DMG 210 - DMG 300

CT1 CT1 CT1
L L L
O CT2 O CT2 O
N A A A
CT3
D N D D
N
110...250VDC 110...250VDC 110...250VDC
100...240VAC 100...240VAC 100...240VAC
A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2

I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3

CT1 CT1
L L
CT2 O O
A CT3 A
D D
110...250VDC 110...250VDC
100...240VAC 100...240VAC
A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3
CURRENT CURRENT
MULTIMETRI DMG 700 - DMG 800... DMG 900...

Single phase Two phase Single phase Two phase
CT1 CT1 CT1 CT1
L L L L
O CT2 O O CT2 O
N A A N A A
D N D D N D
12-24-48VDC ❶ 12-24-48VDC ❶ 12-24-48VDC ❷ 12-24-48VDC ❷

110...250VDC 110...250VDC 110...250VDC 110...250VDC
100...440VAC 100...440VAC 100...440VAC 100...440VAC
A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 V4 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 V4 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2

I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3 I4 I1 I2 I3 I4
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE
CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT
Three phase with or without neutral Three phase with or without neutral
CT1 CT1
L L
CT2 O CT2 O
CT3 A CT3 A
D D
N N
12-24-48VDC ❶ 12-24-48VDC ❷
110...250VDC 110...250VDC
100...440VAC 100...440VAC
A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 V4 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3 I4
CURRENT CURRENT
Three phase without neutral in ARON connection Three phase without neutral in ARON connection
CT1 CT1 CT1
L L L
CT2 O CT2 O O
A A CT3 A
D D D
12-24-48VDC ❶ 12-24-48VDC ❷ 12-24-48VDC ❷

110...250VDC 110...250VDC 110...250VDC
100...440VAC 100...440VAC 100...440VAC
A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 V4 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 V4 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2

I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3 I4 I1 I2 I3 I4
23
CT1
L
Two phase with neutral. Measurement of Three phase with neutral. Measurement of
O
A
neutral current and neutral-earth voltage neutral current and neutral-earth voltage
CT3
D
CT1 CT1
L L
12-24-48VDC ❶ CT2 O CT2 O
110...250VDC A A
CT4 CT3
100...440VAC N D D
CT4
12-24-48VDC ❷ N
110...250VDC
100...440VAC
12-24-48VDC ❷
110...250VDC
A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 100...440VAC
I1 I2 I3
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE
CURRENT
A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 V4 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 GND V1 V2 V3 V4 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
I1 I2 I3 I4 I1 I2 I3 I4
For DMG 800 D048 only. CURRENT CURRENT
For DMG 900... D048 only.
23-37
Wiring diagrams
INSTRUMENTS DMK 02
DMK 00 - DMK 00 R1 DMK 01 - DMK 01 R1 Voltmeter Ammeter
L L L L L L
L O O O
L O L/N A L/N A L/N A
A D D D
L/N
D
1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6
600V~ 5A~ 600V~ 5A~
METER METER METER METER
1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3 1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3 1.1 1.2 1.1 1.2
220...240VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC
For DMK 00 R1 only For DMK 01 R1 only
DMK 03 - DMK 03 R1 DMK 04 - DMK 04 R1

L1 L L1 L
L2 O L2 O
L L3 A L3 A
L O N D N D
L/N A
D
1.3 1.4 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6
600V~ 45/65Hz 600V~ 5A~ 600V~ 5A~
METER METER METER
1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3 1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3 1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3
220...240VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC
For DMK 03 R1 only For DMK 04 R1 only For DMK 04 R1 only
Input for other supply voltages on request.
DMK 10 - DMK 10 R1 DMK 11 - DMK 11 R1 DMK 15 - DMK 15 R1 DMK 16 - DMK 16 R1

L1 L1 L1
L L L
L1 L2 L2 O L2
L O O
L2 O L3 A L3 A L3 A
L3 A N D N D N D
N D
1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
600V~ 5A~ 600V~ 5A~ 600V~ 5A~
1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3 1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3 1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3 1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3
220...240VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC
For DMK 10 R1 only For DMK 11 R1 only For DMK 15 R1 only For DMK 16 R1 only
DMK 80 - DMK 80 R1 DMK 81 - DMK 81 R1 DMK 82

Voltmeter Ammeter
L L L L L L
O O O
L L A A A
O L/N L/N L/N
D D D
L/N A
D
L L/N S1 S2 L L/N S1 S2 L L/N S1 S2
600V~ 5A~ 600V~ 5A~
A1 A2 14 12 11 A1 A2 14 12 11 A1 A2 A1 A2
220...240VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC
For DMK 80 R1 only For DMK 81 R1 only
DMK 83 - DMK 83 R1 DMK 84 - DMK 84 R1

L1 L L1 L
L2 O L2 O
L L3 A L3 A
L O N D N D
L/N A
D
L L/N L L/N S1 S2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6
600V~ 45/65Hz 600V~ 5A~ 600V~ 5A~
METER METER METER
A1 A2 14 12 11 A1 A2 14 12 11 1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3

220...240VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC
DMK 70 - DMK 70 R1 DMK 71 - DMK 71 R1 DMK 75 - DMK 75 R1

23 L1
L L1
L
L1 L L2 L2
O O
L2 O L3 A L3 A
L3 A N D N D
N D
L1 L2 L3 N I1 I2 I3 COM L1 L2 L3 N I1 I2 I3 COM
600V~ 5A~ 600V~ 5A~
METER METER METER
A1 A2 14 12 11 A1 A2 14 12 11 A1 A2 14 13
220...240VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC
23-38
Wiring diagrams
MULTIMETERS DMK2...
CT1 L CT1 CT1
L O L1 L
CT2 L1
A O CT2 L
N L2
D A L2 O
N D CT3
L3 A
D
N
DMK 2... 208...240VAC DMK 2... 208...240VAC
DMK 25 12...24VDC DMK 25 12...24VDC DMK 2... 208...240VAC
DMK 25 12...24VDC
L N L1 L2 L3 N I1 I2 I3 C L N L1 L2 L3 N I1 I2 I3 C
L N L1 L2 L3 N I1 I2 I3 C
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT

CT1 CT1
L1 L L1 L
CT2 O
L2 O
A L2
CT3 A
L3 D L3 D
DMK 2... 208...240VAC

DMK 2... 208...240VAC
DMK 25 12...24VDC
DMK 25 12...24VDC
DMK3... - DMK40 - DMK6...

CT1 CT1 CT1
L L L
O CT2 O CT2 O
N A A A
CT3
D N D D
N
24...48VDC ❶ 24...48VDC ❶ 24...48VDC ❶

100...240VAC 100...240VAC 100...240VAC
110...250VDC 110...250VDC 110...250VDC
+ – GND L1 L2 L3 N S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 + – GND L1 L2 L3 N S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 + – GND L1 L2 L3 N S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2

I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3
DMK 3... - DMK 40 DMK 3... - DMK 40 DMK 3... - DMK 40

CT1 CT1
L L
CT2 O O
A CT3 A
D D
24...48VDC ❶ 24...48VDC ❶
100...240VAC 100...240VAC
110...250VDC 110...250VDC
+ – GND L1 L2 L3 N S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 + – GND L1 L2 L3 N S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE For DMK 32 D048 only.
CURRENT CURRENT
DMK 3... - DMK 40 DMK 3... - DMK 40
DMK5...
CT1 CT1 CT1
L1 L1 L1
L CT2 L CT2 L
O L2 O L2 O
CT3
A A L3 A
D D D
N N N
100...240VAC 100...240VAC 100...240VAC
110...250VDC 110...250VDC 110...250VDC
--
- + V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 --
- + V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 --
- + V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
A1 A2 I1 I2 I3 A1 A2 I1 I2 I3 A1 A2 I1 I2 I3
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT

CT1 CT1
23
L1 L L1 L
CT2 O O
L2 L2
A CT3 A
L3 D L3 D
100...240VAC 100...240VAC
110...250VDC 110...250VDC
--
- + V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 -
-- + V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
A1 A2 I1 I2 I3 A1 A2 I1 I2 I3
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT
23-39
Single-phase energy meters
TYPE DME M100... DME D100 T1 DME D100 T1 A120 DME D100 T1 MID DME D110 T1 DME D110 T1 A120
Single phase Single phase Single phase Single phase Monofase Monofase
mechanical digital digital MID certified digital digital
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated voltage Ue 230VAC 220...240VAC 110...120VAC 230VAC 220...240VAC 110...120VAC
Operating voltage range 184...264VAC 187...264VAC 93...132VAC 187...264VAC 187...264VAC 93...132VAC
Rated frequency 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 60Hz 50Hz 50/60Hz 60Hz
Maximum power consumption <7VA 7VA
Maximum power dissipation − 0.45W
CURRENT
IEC maximum current Imax 32A 40A
IEC minimum current Imin − 0.25A
IEC rated current Iref/Ib 5A 5A
IEC start current Ist 20mA 20mA
Transition current Itr − 0.5A
ACCURACY
Active energy (per IEC/EN 62053-21) Class 1 Class 1 Class B (per EN 50470-3) Class 1
OUTPUTS
LED rate 640 flashes/kWh 1000 flashes/kWh
Pulse rate 640 pulses/kWh 1000 pulses/kWh
(Vce=35VImax=20mA)
DME M...T1 only
Pulse duration − 30ms
STATIC OUTPUTS
Pulse rate − 10 pulses/kWh 1-10-100-1000 pulses/kWh
programmable
Pulse duration − 100ms
External voltage − 10...30VDC
Maximum current − 50mA
INSULATION
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui − 250VAC
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp − 6kV
IEC power frequency withstand voltage − 4kV
SUPPLY/MEASUREMENT CONNECTION CIRCUIT
Type of terminals Fixed Fixed
Conductor section min - max 2.5-6mm2 1.5-10mm2 (16-6 AWG)
Maximum tightening torque 1.2Nm 1.5Nm (14lbin)

PULSE OUTPUT CONNECTION
Conductor section min-max 1-1.5mm2 0.2-4mm2 (24-12AWG)
for DME M100 T1
only
Maximum tightening torque 0.6Nm 0.8Nm (7lbin)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -25...+55°C -25...+55°C
Storage temperature -30...+80°C -25...+70°C
Relative humidity − <80%
Maximum pollution degree 2 2
Overvoltage category – III
Mechanical environment − − − Class M1 − −
Magnetic environment − − − Class E1 − −
HOUSING
23
23-40
Single-phase energy meters
DME D110 T1 MID DME D115 T1 DME D120 T1 DME D120 T1 A120 DME D120 T1 MID DME D121 DME D130
Single phase Single phase Single phase Single phase Single phase Single phase Single phase
MID certified digital digital RS485 MID certified RS485 expandable
230VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC 110...120VAC 230VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC

187...264VAC 187...264VAC 187...264VAC 93...132VAC 187...264VAC 187...264VAC 187...264VAC
50Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 60Hz 50Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz
7VA 7VA 4.8VA
0.45W 0.45W 1.4W
40A 63A 63A

0.25A 0.5A 0.5A
5A 10A 10A
20mA 40mA 40mA
0.5A 1A 1A
Class B (per EN 50470-3) Class 1 Class B (per EN 50470-3) Class 1
1000 flashes/kWh 1000 flashes/kWh 1000 flashes/kWh

1000 pulses/kWh 1000 pulses/kWh 1000 pulses/kWh
30ms 30ms 30ms
1-10-100-1000 pulses/kWh 1-10-100-1000 pulses/kWh –

programmable programmable
100ms 100ms –
10...30VDC 10...30VDC –
50mA 50mA –
250VAC 250VAC 250VAC

6kV 6kV 6kV
4kV 4kV 4kV
Fixed Fixed Fixed

1.5-10mm2 (16-6 AWG) 2.5...16mm2 (14...6AWG stranded; 2.5...16mm2 (14...6AWG stranded;
14...10AWG solid) 14...10AWG solid)
1.5Nm (14lbin) 2Nm (26.5lbin) 2Nm (26.5lbin)
Fixed Fixed Fixed

0.2-4mm2 (24-12AWG) 0.5-4mm2 (20-11AWG) 0.5-4mm2 (20-11AWG)
0.8Nm (7lbin) 1.3Nm (12.1lbin) 1.3Nm (12.1lbin)
-25...+55°C -25...+55°C -25...+55°C

-25...+70°C -25...+70°C -25...+70°C
<80% <80% <80%
2 2 2
III III III
Class M1 − − − Class M1 − −
Class E1 − − − Class E1 − −
Polyamide Polyamide Polyamide

23
23-41
Three-phase energy meters
TYPE DME D300 T2 DME D300 T2 MID / F DME D310 T2 DME D310 T2 MID / F DME D320
3 phase with neutral 3 phase with neutral 3 phase c/w and 3 phase c/w and 3 phase c/w and
MID certified w/o neutral w/o neutral MID certified w/o neutral
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated voltage Ue 220-240VAC phase-neutral 230VAC phase-neutral 220-240VAC phase-neutral 230VAC phase-neutral 100-240VAC
380-415VAC phase-phase 400VAC phase-phase 380-415VAC phase-phase 400VAC phase-phase 110-250VDC
Voltage range 187-264VAC phase-neutral 85-264VAC
323-456VAC phase-phase 93.5-300VDC
Rated frequency 50/60Hz 50Hz 50/60Hz 50Hz 45...66Hz
Maximum power consumption 20VA 2.1VA 4.5VA
Maximum power dissipation 1.35W 0.8W 1.7W
CURRENT
IEC maximum current Imax 63A 5A 5A
IEC minimum current Imin 0.5A 0.05A 0.01A
IEC rated current Iref/Ib 10A 5A ––
IEC start current Ist 40mA 0.01A ––
IEC transition current It 1A 0.25A ––
ACCURACY
Active energy (per IEC/EN 62053-21) Class 1 Class B (EN50470-3) Class 1 Class B (EN50470-3) Class 1
TARIFF CIRCUIT INPUT
Rated voltage Uc 100-240VAC 100-240VAC ––
Voltage range 85-264VAC 85-264VAC ––
Frequency 50/60Hz 50/60Hz ––
Maximum power consumption 0.25VA 0.25VA ––
Maximum power dissipation 0.18W 0.18W ––
OUTPUTS
LED rate 1000 flashes/kWh 10000 flashes/kWh ––
Pulse rate 1000 pulses/kWh 10000 pulses/kWh ––
Pulse duration 30ms 30ms ––
STATIC OUTPUTS
Pulse rate Programmable 1-10-100-1000 pulses/kWh Programmable 0.1-1-10-100 pulses/kWh ––
Pulse duration 100ms for 1-10-100 pulse rates; 100ms ––
60ms for 1000 pulse rate
External voltage 10-30VDC 10-30VDC ––
Maximum current 50mA ––
INSULATION
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui 250VAC 250VAC 690VAC
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 6kV 6kV 9.5kV
IEC power frequency withstand voltage 4kV 4kV 5.2kV
SUPPLY/MEASURMENT CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS
Conductor section min-max 2.5-16mm2 (16-6 AWG) 0.2-4mm2 (24-12 AWG) for supply/voltage measurement;
0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12 AWG) for current measurement
Maximum tightening torque 2Nm (14lbin) 0.8Nm (7lbin)
TARIFF CONTROL CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS
Conductor section min-max 0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12AWG) 0.2-4mm2 (24-12AWG)
Maximum tightening torque 0.49Nm (4.4lbin) 0.8Nm (7lbin)
PULSE OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals Fixed Fixed ––
Conductor section min-max 0.2-1.3mm2 (24-16AWG) 0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12AWG) ––
Maximum tightening torque 0.15Nm (1.7lbin) 0.44Nm (4lbin) ––
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
23 Operating temperature -25...+55°C -25...+55°C -20...+60°C
Storage temperature -25...+70°C -25...+70°C -30...+80°C
Relative humidity <80% non condensing <80% non condensing <90%
Maximum pollution degree 2 2 2
Overvoltage capacity III III III
Mechanical environment –– Class M1 –– Class M1 ––
Magnetic environment –– Class E1 –– Class E1 ––
HOUSING
23-42
Data concentrator
TYPE DME CD DME CD PV1

AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated voltage Us 100-240VAC/110-250VDC
Operating range 85-264VAC/93.5-300VDC
Maximum power consumption 8.8VA
Maximum power dissipation 3.6W
ENERGY METER INPUTS
Number of inputs 8
Input separation 2 for 4 pairs (insulated between each pair 500VRMS)
Type of input Negative (NPN)
Maximum voltage at inputs 15VDC
Maximum input current 18mA (15mA typical)
High input signal 7.6V
Low input signal 2V
Maximum frequency 2000Hz
TARIFF CONTROL CIRCUIT
Rated voltage Uc 100-240VAC/110VDC
Voltage range 85-264VAC/93.5-140VDC
Frequency 50/60Hz
Maximum power consumption 0.25VA
Maximum power dissipation 0.18W
RS485 SERIAL INTERFACE
Baud rate Programmable 1200-38400bps
Insulation 1500VAC towards energy meter inputs. Double insulation towards supply and tariff inputs
INSULATION
SUPPLY CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals Fixed
Conductor section min-max 0.2-4mm2 (24-12 AWG)
Maximum tightening torque 0.8Nm (7lbin)
TARIFF INPUT CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS
RS485 CONNECTION
ENERGY METER INPUT CONNECTIONS
Conductor section min-max 0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12 AWG)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Relative humidity <90%
Overvoltage capacity III
HOUSING
Material Polyamide 23
23-43
LCD multimeters and power analyzers
TYPE DMG 200 DMG 210 DMG 300

AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated voltage Us 100-240VAC /
110-250VDC
Voltage range 85-264VAC /
93.5-300VDC
Maximum power consumption 3.5VA 4.5VA 4.2VA
Maximum power dissipation 1.2W 1.7W 1.3W
Microbreaking immunity 50ms 50ms 50ms
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Type of input Three phase + neutral
Maximum rated voltage Ue 690VAC phase-phase (400VAC phase-neutral)
Measurement range 20-830VAC phase-phase (10-480VAC phase-neutral)
Method of measurement True RMS
Method of connection Single, two, three phase with or without neutral, balanced three phase systems
CURRENT INPUTS
Rated current Ie 5A 5A 1A / 5A
Measurement range 0.01-6A 0.01-6A 0.01-1.2A / 0.01-6A
Method of measurement True RMS
Overload capacity +20% Ie through external CT with 5A secondary
Overload peak 50A for 1s
INSULATION
SUPPLY CIRCUIT/VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT CONNECTIONS
Type of terminal Fixed
CURRENT MEASUREMENT CIRCUIT AND RS485 CONNECTIONS
Type of terminal Fixed
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Measurement class III
Overload capacity III
HOUSING
Material Polyamide
RS485 communication port for DMG 210 and DMG 900T only.
For DMG 800 D048, DMG 900 D048 and DMG 900T D048 only.
23
23-44
LCD multimeters and power analyzers
DMG 600 DMG 610 DMG 700 DMG 800 DMG 900 DMG 900 T
100-400VAC 100-440VAC /
120-250VDC 110-250VDC - (12-48VDC)
100-400VAC 90-484VAC /
120-250VDC 93.5-300VDC - (9-70VDC)
45-65Hz 45-66Hz
9.5VA 3.9VA
3.5W 3.4W
50ms 50ms
Three phase + neutral Three phase + neutral

600VACL-L (300VAC L-N) 690VAC L-L (400VAC L-N)
50-720VAC L-L (30-360 L-N) 20-830VAC L-L (10-480VAC L-N)
45-66Hz 45-66Hz 45-66Hz e 360-440Hz
True RMS True RMS
Single, two, three phase c/w or w/o neutral Single, two, three phase with or without neutral, balanced three phase systems
5A 5A 1A/5A 1A/5A
0.01-6A 0.01-6A 0.01-1.2A / 0.01-6A 0.002-1.2A / 0,01-10A
True RMS True RMS
– +20% Ie by external CT with 5A secondary
– 50A for 1s
600VAC 690VAC
9.5kV 9.5kV
5.2kV 5.2kV
Removable / Plug-in
0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12AWG)
0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
Fixed Fixed
0.2-1,5mm2 (24-12 AWG) 0.5-4mm2 (26-10 AWG); 0.2-1.5mm2 (24-12 AWG) for RS485
0.8Nm (7lbin) 0.8Nm (7lbin)
-20...+60°C
-30...+80°C
<90%
2
III
III
Polyamide
23
23-45
Measuring instruments
TYPE DMK 00 - DMK 00 R1 DMK 01 - DMK 01 R1 DMK 02 DMK 03 - DMK 03 R1 DMK 04 - DMK 04 R1
DMK 80 - DMK 80 R1 DMK 81 - DMK 81 R1 DMK 82 DMK 83 - DMK 83 R1 DMK 84 - DMK 84 R1
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated voltage Us 24VAC
110-127VAC
220-240VAC
380-415VAC
Rated frequency 50-60Hz ±10%
Maximum power consumption 3.3VA (DMK...) 3.3VA 3.3VA (DMK...)
3.6VA (DMK... R1) 3.6VA (DMK... R1)
Maximum power dissipation 1.5W (DMK...) 1.5W 1.5W (DMK...)
1.8W (DMK... R1) 1.8W (DMK... R1)
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Rated voltage Ue 600VAC –– 600VAC –– 600VAC
Operating voltage range 15-660VAC –– 15-660VAC –– ––
Operating voltage range, phase-phase –– –– –– –– 15-660VAC (DMK...)
25-660VAC (DMK... R1)
Rated frequency 50-60Hz ±10% –– 50-60Hz ±10% –– 50-60Hz ±10%
Method of measuring TRMS –– TRMS –– TRMS
CURRENT INPUTS
Rated current Ie –– 5A –– 5A
Measuring range –– 0.05-5.75A –– 0.05-5.75A (DMK...)
0.1-5.75A (DMK... R1)
Rated frequency –– 50-60Hz ±10% –– 50-60Hz ±10%
Type of input –– Shunts connected by –– Shunts connected by
external low voltage CT 5A max external low voltage CT
5A max
Type of measuring –– TRMS –– TRMS
Overload capacity –– +20% Ie –– +20% Ie
FREQUENCY INPUTS
Measuring range and type –– –– –– 15-65Hz ±10% TRMS ––
Voltage range –– –– –– 15-660VAC ––
Input rated voltage –– –– –– 600VAC ––
MEASURING ACCURACY
Measurement conditions cos –– –– –– –– ± 1° ±1 digit
(Temperature +23°C ±1°C) voltage ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit –– ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit –– ––
(Relative humidity
45 ±15% R.H.) current –– ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit –– ––
frequency –– –– –– ±1 digit ––
ADDITIONAL ERRORS
Relative humidity ±1 digit 60-90% R.H..
Temperature ±1 digit -20...+60°C
RELAY OUTPUT FOR DMK... R1 TYPES ONLY
Number and tyoe of contact 1 changeover (SPDT)
Rated voltage 250VAC
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 8A 250VAC in AC1 / B300
designation
Electrical life 105
Mechanical life 30x106
INSULATION
Rated insulation voltage Ui 600VAC 415VAC 600VAC
CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals Fixed (DMK 8...);
Removable (DMK 0...)
Maximum tightening torque 0.8Nm (7lbin) for DMK 0... / 0.5Nm (4.5lbin for DMK 8...)
23 Conductor section min-max 0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12 AWG) for DMK 0...
0.2-4.0mm2 (24-12 AWG) for DMK 8...
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
HOUSING
Material Thermoplastic (DMK 0...) / Polyamide (DMK 8...)
On specific request.
23-46
Measuring instruments
TYPE DMK 10 - DMK 10 R1 DMK 11 - DMK 11 R1 DMK 15 - DMK 15 R1 DMK 16

DMK 70 - DMK 70 R1 DMK 71 - DMK 71 R1 DMK 75 - DMK 75 R1 DMK 16 R1
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated voltage Us 24VAC
110-127VAC
220-240VAC
380-415VAC
Rated frequency 50-60Hz ±10%
Maximum power consumption 3.3VA (DMK...) 3.3VA (DMK...) 3.3VA (DMK...) 3.6VA (DMK...)
3.6VA (DMK... R1) 3.6VA (DMK... R1) 3.6VA (DMK... R1) 3.9VA (DMK... R1)
Maximum power dissipation 1.5W (DMK...) 1.5W (DMK...) 1.5W (DMK...) 1.8W (DMK...)
1.8W (DMK... R1) 1.8W (DMK... R1) 1.8W (DMK... R1) 2.1W (DMK... R1)
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Rated voltage Ue phase-phase 600VAC –– 600VAC 600VAC
phase-neutral 347VAC –– 347VAC 347VAC
Operating voltage range phase-phase 15-660VAC –– 35-660VAC 35-660VAC
phase-neutral 10-382VAC –– 20-382VAC 20-382VAC
Frequency range 50-60Hz ±10% –– 50-60Hz ±10% 50-60Hz ±10%
Method of measuring TRMS –– TRMS TRMS
CURRENT INPUTS
Rated current Ie –– 5A 5A 5A
Measuring range –– 0.05-6A 0.05-5.75A 0.05-5.75A
Frequency range –– 50-60Hz ±10% 50-60Hz ±10% 50-60Hz ±10%
Type of input –– Shunts connected by
external low voltage CT 5A max
Type of measuring –– TRMS TRMS TRMS
Overload capacity –– +20% Ie +20% Ie +20% Ie
MEASURING ACCURACY
Measurement conditions
(Temperature +23°C ±1°C) voltage ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit –– ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit
(Relative humidity current –– ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit
45 ±15% R.H.)
power –– –– 1% f.s. ±1 digit 1% f.s. ±1 digit
energy –– –– –– Classe 2
frequency –– –– ±1 digit ±1 digit
RELAY OUTPUT FOR DMK... R1 TYPES ONLY
Number and type of contact 1 changeover (SPDT) 1 changeover (SPDT) 1 changeover (SPDT) 1 changeover (SPDT)
Rated voltage 250VAC 250VAC 250VAC 250VAC
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation AC1 8A 250VAC / B300 AC1 8A 250VAC / B300 AC1 8A 250VAC / B300 AC1 8A 250VAC / B300
Electrical life 105 105 105 105
Mechanical life 30x106 30x106 30x106 30x106
INSULATION
Rated insulation voltage Ui 600VAC 415VAC 600VAC 600VAC
CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals Removable (DMK 1...); Fixed (DMK 7...)
Maximum tightening torque 0.5Nm (4.5lbin) for DMK 0...; 0.8Nm (7lbin) for DMK 7...
Conductor section min-max 0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12 AWG) for DMK 0...
0.2-4.0mm2 (24-12 AWG) for DMK 7...
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
HOUSING
Material Polyamide (DMK 7...) / Thermoplastic (DMK 1...)
On specific request.
One N/O (SPST) contact for DMK 75 R1.
23
23-47
Multimeters
TYPE DMK 20 - DMK 21 - DMK 22 DMK 25

AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated supply voltage Us 208-240VAC 12-24VDC from battery
Operating voltage range 154-288VAC for DMK 20 9-32VDC
177-264VAC for DMK 21 - DMK 22
Frequency 45...65Hz —
Maximum power consumption 5.5VA (Us=240V) for DMK 20 - DMK 21 1.1W maximum
6VA (Us=240) for DMK 22
Maximum power dissipation 2.5W (Us=240V) for DMK 20 - DMK 21 1.1W maximum
2.8W (Us=240) for DMK 22
Immunity time of microbreakings 20ms 500ms
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Maximum rated voltage Ue 690VAC phase-phase
(400VAC phase-neutral)
Operating voltage range 60-830V phase-phase
(30-480VAC phase-neutral)
Method of measuring True RMS value
Measuring input impedance >1.1M phase-phase and >570k phase-neutral
Method of connections Single phase, two-phase, three-phase
or balanced three-phase system
Measuring error ±0.25% full scale ±1digit (Class 0.5)
CURRENT INPUTS
Rated current Ie Standard 5A (1A on request)
Measuring range 0.05...6A
Method of measuring True RMS value
Overload capacity +20% Ie by external CT with 5A secondary
Overload peak 50A for 1s
Dynamic peak 125A for 10ms
Power consumption <0.6W per phase
Measuring error Class 0.5 ±0.25% f.s. ±1digit
MEASURING ACCURACY
Measurement conditions voltage Class 0.5 ±0.35% f.s. (830V)
(Temperature +23°C ±1°C current Class 0.5 ±0.5% f.s. (6A)
Humidity 45 ±15% R.H.)
active energy Class 2
frequency ––
harmonic distorsion ––
OUTPUTS
Relay —
Static —
INSULATION
CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals Removable
Maximum tightening torque 0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
MAximum pollution degree 2
HOUSING
Material Self-extinguishing black plastic
23 For DMK 32D 048 only.
23-48
Multimeters
DMK 30 - DMK 31 - DMK 32 DMK 40 DMK 50 - DMK 51 - DMK 52 DMK 60 - DMK 61 - DMK 62
24-48VDC/100-240VAC/110-250VDC 208-240VAC 100-240VAC/110-250VDC

18-70VDC 154-288VAC for DMK 50 85-265VAC/93.5-300VDC
85-265VAC/93.5-300VDC 177-264VAC for DMK 51 - DMK 52
45-450Hz 45-65Hz 45-450Hz
10VA/4W 5.5VA (Us=240V) for DMK 50 - DMK 51 10VA/4W
6VA (Us=240) for DMK 52
3W (DMK 30) 4W 2.5W (Us=240V) for DMK 50 - DMK 51 3W for DMK 60
4W (DMK 31 - DMK 32) 2.8W (Us=240) for DMK 52 4W for DMK 61 - DMK 62
20ms
690VAC phase-phase (400VAC phase-neutral)
20-830V phase-phase 60-830V phase-phase 20-830V phase-phase

(10-480VAC phase-neutral) (30-480VAC phase-neutral) (10-480VAC phase-neutral)
45...65Hz
True RMS value
>1.1M phase-phase and >570k phase-neutral
Single phase, two-phase, three-phase Single phase, two-phase, three-phase Single phase, two-phase, three-phase
systems with or without neutral or balanced three-phase system systems with or without neutral
Class 0.5 ±0.25% full scale ±1digit
standard 5A (1A on request)

0.02-6A 0.05-6A 0.02-6A
True RMS value
+20% Ie by external CT with 5A secondary
50A for 1s
125A for 10ms
<0.3VA <0.6W per phase <0.3VA
Class 0.5 ±0.25% full scale ±1digit
0.25% f.s. (830V) Class 0.5 ±0.35% f.s. (830V) 0.25% f.s. (830V)
0.35% f.s. (6A) Class 0.5 ±0.5% f.s. (6A) 0.35% f.s. (6A)
Class 1 Class 2 Class 1
±1 digit –– ±1 digit
±1 digit –– ±1 digit
5A - 250VAC in AC1 for DMK 31 - DMK 32 — — 5A - 250VAC in AC1 for DMK 61 - DMK 62
55mA - 60VAC/DC in AC1 — — 55mA - 60VAC/DC in AC1
for DMK 31 - DMK 32 for DMK 61 - DMK 62
690V
Removable Fixed
0.5Nm (4.5lbin) 0.45Nm (4lbin)
0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12AWG) 0.2-1.5mm2 (24-16 AWG)
-20...+60°C
-30...+80°C
<90%
2
Self-extinguishing black plastic Self-extinguishing grey plastic

23
23-49
Page 24-6 Page 24-7
DCRM SERIES DCRL SERIES (EXPANDABLE

• 2 steps in modular housing • 3 or 5 steps in 96x96mm housing
• Settings by front adjustment expandable up to 7 steps maximum
potentiometers • Expandable with EXP series modules,
• 3 LED indications. such as outputs, step increment,
communication port, etc.
• Backlight graphic display, 128x80 pixels
• Optic interface port for programming,
data download and diagnostics
• Independent voltage measurement input
• Capacitor overload protection
• Internal panel temperature sensor
• Voltage and current harmonic-content
measurement up to 15° order
• Configurable alarms
• Suitable for medium-voltage installations
• Compact and easy installation.
Page 24-8
DCRG SERIES (EXPANDABLE)

• 8, 10, 12, 14 or 16 steps in 144x144mm housing
• Expandable with EXP series modules such as
inputs and outputs, step increment, capacitor
protection, communication port, etc.
• Backlight graphic display, 128x80 pixels
• Optic interface port for programming, data
download and diagnostics
• Independent voltage measurement input
• Capacitor overload protection
• Internal and external panel temperature sensor
• Voltage and current harmonic-content
measurement up to 31° order
• Event logging
• Configurable alarms
• Suitable for medium-voltage installations
• Suitable for dynamic power factor correction.
Page 24-11
THYRISTOR MODULES
• 30, 50, 100kvar step units
• Suitable for dynamic power factor
correction
• Current flow zero-crossing controlled
connection-disconnection
• Over-temperature protection
• Over-current protection at capacitor
switching.
AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR CONTROLLERS
AND THYRISTOR MODULES 24
Microprocessor supervision and

control
Accurate TRMS measurement
circuit
Automatic intelligent adjustment
system
Versions with 3, 5, 7, 8, 12,
14 and 16 steps
Versions with static outputs
Use in co-generation and
medium-voltage systems
USB, serial, Ethernet
communication interfaces
ASCII and Modbus-RTU
communication protocols
Thyristor modules for dynamic
correction.
SEC. - PAGE
Reactive current controller
DCRM series ..................................................................................................................................................................... 24 - 6
Automatic power factor controllers
DCRL series ...................................................................................................................................................................... 24 - 7
DCRG series ..................................................................................................................................................................... 24 - 8
Software and accessories ................................................................................................................................................ 24 - 8
Communication devices .................................................................................................................................................. 24 - 10
Thyristors modules......................................................................................................... 24 - 11
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 24 - 12
Wiring schemes ............................................................................................................ 24 - 13
E NERGY M ANAGEMENT
Automatic power factor controllers and thyristor modules
Automatic power factor

controllers
DCRL DCRG
Number of steps DCRL 3: 3 (5 with EXP10 06) 8
DCRL 5: 5 (7 with EXP10 06) (10, 12, 14, 16 with EXP...)
ON FRONT / HOUSING
Display Backlight icon LCD Backlight graphic 128x80 pixel LCD
Languages 6 10
Scrolling text only of alarm codes Italian, English, Spanish, French,
in Italian, English, Spanish, French, German, Czech, Polish, Russian,
German, Portuguese Portuguese and 1 customisable
Dimensions 96x96mm / 3.8x3.8” 144x44mm / 5.7x5.7”
IEC degree of protection IP54 IP54
Expandable with EXP… module
CONTROL/FUNCTIONS
Automatic recognition of current flow direction
4-quadrant operation
Master-slave architecture
Independent auxiliary supply input
Three-phase voltage control
Current input 1 (by CT, /5A or 1A) 3 (by CTs, 5A or 1A)
Dynamic (FAST) power factor correction usage (with EXP10 01 8 steps)
Medium-voltage usage
Independent power factor correction per phase
Phase-neutral connection in three-phase systems
Programmable input as function or (with EXP10 04 module)
external temperature sensor
USB communication interface (with EXP10 10 module) (with EXP10 10 module)
RS232 communication interface (with EXP10 11 module) (with EXP10 11 module)
Opto-isolated RS485 communication interface (with EXP10 12 module) (with EXP10 12 module)
Ethernet communication interface with web server function (with EXP10 13 module)
Optical USB communication port on front (with CX 01 dongle) (with CX 01 dongle)
Optical Wi-Fi communication port on front (with CX 02 dongle) (with CX 02 dongle)
Fast setting of current transformer
Setup software with automatic panel test available
Remote control software available
Calendar-clock (RTC) with backup reserve energy
Event logging: Alarms, setup changes, etc.
MEASUREMENTS
Rated measurement voltage 600VAC max 600VAC max
Measurement voltage range 50-720VAC 50-720VAC
Instantaneous cos (power factor displacement)
Instantaneous and average weekly power factor values
Voltage and current
Reactve power to reach set-point and total values
Capacitor overload
Electric panel temperature
Maximum voltage and current value
Maximum capacitor overload value
Maximum panel temperature value
Maximum capaitor temperature value (with EXP10 04 module)
Active and apparent power value
Current and voltage harmonic analysis up to 15° order up to 31° order
24 Var-measured value per step
Number of switching per step
24-2
Automatic power factor controllers and thryristor modules
Automatic power factor

controllers
DCRL DCRG
PROTECTION
Voltage too high and too low
Current too high and too low
Over compensation (all capacitors disconnected and cos
value higher than set-point)
Under compensation (all capacitors connected and cos
value lower than set-point)
Capacitor overload
Capacitor overload on all 3 phases
Over temperature
Mains micro-breakings
Capacitor bank failure
Over maximum harmonic distortion level limit
Programmable alarm property
(enable, trip delay, relay energising, etc.)
L1
L2
L3
Automatic
power factor
controllers
Fuse holders
Fuse
holders
Contactors
Switch
disconnectors
24
24-3
DCRG series
THE SOLUTION FOR ALL APPLICATIONS!

OPTICAL COMMUNICATION PORT
The optical port on the front using a standard USB or
Wi-Fi point, permits to communicate with a PC,
smartphone and tablet, to carry out programming,
BACKLIGHT diagnostics, and data download without removing power
GRAPHIC DISPLAY to the electric panel.
128x80 pixels with excellent
legibility, with adjustable
brightness and contrast.
CUSTOMISING OPTION
There is a customising slot available on the panel front
to show controller brand name, logo, trademark, part
number, brief indication or wording, etc.
COMPACT SIZE FIXING SYSTEM EXPANDABILITY
44mm
9mm
MAX
4
Basic controller functionality can be easily extended using the EXP series
Trim frame profile and reduced The fixing system with metal expansion modules:
total depth simplify installation of screws guarantees excellent - Relay outputs to increase the number of steps
the controller also in very compact adhesion over time. - Opto-isolated static outputs also for synamic correction
electric panels. - Capacitor protection
- Digital and analog inputs and outputs
- Opto-isolated RS232 interface
44 HIGH PROTECTION DEGREE - Opto-isolated RS485 interface
The controller front and the rear - Opto-isolated Ethernet interface with web server function
seal have been designed to warrant - Opto-isolated Profibus-DP interface
an IP54 protection degree.
24 - GPRS/GSM modem.
137
144
64.5
73 9
EXP 10...
24-4
Automatic power factor controllers and thryristor modules
DCRG series
SUITABLE FOR POWER FACTOR CORRECTION

USING CONTACTORS OR THYRISTOR MODULES
SMS SENDING FOR ALARM CONDITIONS
DATA SENDING BY EMAIL OR FTP SERVER
WEB SERVER FOR DATA READING
STREAMLINE DESIGN
The DCRG controller has an ergonomic design and, at the same time,
particular care has been given to details.
MASTER-SLAVE FUNCTION WEB SERVER FUNCTION GSM/GPRS MODEM SUITABLE FOR MEDIUM-VOLTAGE
The DCRG controller can control the By fitting the EXP10 15 expansion SYSTEMS
outputs of other analog controllers in module, the controller is The controllers can be installed in
addition to its own steps. In this way, automatically equipped and medium-voltage systems thanks to
it offers a master-slave architecture. configures a GSM/GPRS modem. its configuration for voltage
Up to 8 slaves can be controlled to This simplifies installation and transformer ratio, thereby obtaining
obtain a system with a total of 32 wiring. measurements with regards to the
steps. Once a data-enabled SIM card is transformer primary value both for
inserted, alarm or event SMS, the correction adjustment and the
By installing the Ethernet expansion email messages and latest logged display readouts.
module EXP10 13, the main data can be transmitted by the
measured values of the controller controller to FTP servers.
can be viewed by most common SUITABLE FOR DYNAMIC (FAST)
web-client compatibles, on the POWER FACTOR CORRECTION
market, using Java platform and With the EXP10 01 static output
with no need to install any 5A AND 1A BOTH ON THE SAME expansion module installed, the
additional PC software. CONTROLLER controller can be used in dynamic
By configuring an apposite power factor correction systems
Master parameter, the controller can be where the reactive load quickly
enabled for use with either a 5A or varies over time.
CAPACITOR PROTECTION 1A secondary current transformer. Also taking advantage of the built-in
By adding the apposite EXP10 16 controller relay outputs, a mixed
expansion module, the DCRG system of traditional relay and
controller can be equipped with dynamic type of correction steps
additional capacitor protection GRAPHS AND TEXT IN 10 can be obtained.
functions. The module can measure LANGUAGES
the harmonic current values and the
capacitor temperature on-site along
with detecting any phase
Slave 1 malfunction.
THREE CURRENT INPUTS

- Independent power factor
correction of each step can be
done. Viewing of waveforms, text, trend
- Analysis of all electrical and bar graphs in 10 languages:
parameters of the installation by a
multimeter.
Italian, English, Spanish, French,
German, Czech, Polish, Russian,
24
Slave 2 Portuguese and one customisable.
WIDE RANGE OF RATED VOLTAGE

MEASUREMENTS
The wide measurement range
between 100 to 690VAC allows
using the controller in most types
of applications.
Slave 8
24-5
Reactive current controller
DCRM series Order code Steps Auxiliary supply Qty Wt General characteristics
voltage per DCRM2 permits to control the reactive current of a plant,
pkg eliminating it from the total current drawn from the
n° [V] n° [kg] mains and correcting the cos-phi of the load to the best
possible value.
Single and three-phase low-voltage systems. It can control the connection of two capacitor banks
DCRM 2 2 380-415VAC 1 0.166 maximum. Each one of the two banks can be individually
enabled and its power can be set through a dedicated
potentiometer.
It is also possible to adjust the time for connection and
disconnection of the capacitor banks, thereby modifying
the reaction speed of the system.
The controller can be used both in single-phase and
three-phase wiring.
DCRM 2 Operational characteristics

– Auxiliary supply voltage: 380-415VAC standard stock;
220-240VAC and 440-480VAC on request
– Rated frequency: 50/60Hz
– Voltage measurement input range: 80-528VAC
50/60Hz ±1% self configurable
– Current input:
• By CT /5A
• Measurement range: 0.1-6A
• TRMS measurements (True Root Mean Square)
• Automatic identification of CT polarity connection
(direct-reverse)
– Relay outputs
• 2 outputs, each with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
rated 8A-250VAC (in AC1 IEC) / B300
• Independent enabling of each
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
“C/K Step 1” C/K ratio threshold for step 1
OFF/0.15-2
“C/K Step 2” C/K ratio threshold for step 2
OFF/0.15-2
“Connection delay” Step connection delay 1-60s
“Disconnection delay” Step disconnection delay
1-60s
“System configuration” Wiring selection for single or
three-phase system 1PH-3PH.
INDICATIONS
– 1 green LED for power on and inhibition time
– 2 red LEDs for step connection.

Certifications obained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (File E93601), as Auxliary Devices-Modular
ampere monitoring relays (with 415VAC maximum only).
IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n°14.
Contactors for power factor correction

24

24-6 page 24-12 page 24-13 page 24-15
DCRL series Order code Steps Flush-mount Qty Wt General characteristics

housing per DCRL series has been developed with advanced
size pkg functionality and made with a dedicated ultra compact
n° [mm/in] n° [kg] housing. It combines modern front design with mounting
and expandability ease. The LCD screen provides a clear
Single and three-phase low and medium-voltage systems. and intuitive user interface.
DCRL 3 3 96x96/3.8x3.8 1 0.300 Main features include:
DCRL 5 5 96x96/3.8x3.8 1 0.350 – Backlight icon LCD with excellent information viewing
– Alarm codes with scrolling tests, programmable in 6
Accessory. languages (Italian, English, Spanish, French, German
EXP80 00 Plastic insert for fixing 10 0.050 and Portuguese)
customised labels – Connection in single or three phase lines and
co-generation systems with 4-quadrant operation
DCRL 3 - DCRL 5 – Independent voltage measurement input which can be
used in medium-voltage lines with VTs
Order code Description – Extreme reduction of the number of switching
operations
EXPANSION MODULES – Balanced use of steps with same power rating
Snap in fixing of only one module on DCRL… rear. – Reactive power measurement per step installed
EXP80 00 – Capacitor over-current protection
Inputs and outputs.
– Panel over-temperature protection by internal sensor
EXP10 06 2 relay outputs to increase number of – Accurate no-voltage release protection
capacitor steps – Extensive choice of available measurements, including
EXP10 03 2 relay outputs rated 5A 250VAC voltage and current THD with single harmonic analysis
Communication ports. up to 15° order.
– Wide voltage measurement range
EXP10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface – High accuracy measurement (TRMS)
EXP10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface – Front optical USB (with CX01 dongle) or Wi-Fi (with
EXP10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface CX02 dongle) communication port for PC, smartphone
and tablet connection
– DCRJ SW setup software
EXP… expansion module fixing – Compatible with supervision software
EXP 10... DCRL 3 - DCRL 5 – Front label customising facility.
– Voltage circuit:
• Auxiliary supply: 100-440VAC
• Frequency: 50/60Hz ±10%
– Voltage input:
• Rated voltage: 600VAC L-L (346VAC L-N)
• Frequency range: 45-65Hz
– Current input:
MAX • Single phase connection
• Rated current: 1A or 5A configurable
1
– Measurement and control
• Power factor adjustment: 0.5 ind to 0.5 cap
• Voltage measurement range: 50-720VAC L-L;
50-415VAC L-N
Backlight icon LDC screen • Current measurement range: 0.025-1.2A for 1A full
scale; 0.025-6A for 5A full scale
• Type of voltage and current measurement: TRMS
Inductive / Automatic Cooling fan – Relay outputs (steps)
Capacitive mode status • DCRL3: 3 outputs
• DCRL5: 5 outputs
• Output arrangement: Normally Open (NO / SPST)
Manual mode Output status contact; except the last being a changeover (SPDT)
• Rated capacity: 5A 250VAC (UL/CSA B300 general
use)
Step status – Flush-mount housing: 96x96mm/3.8x3.8”
Main display – IEC degree of protection: IP54 on front; IP20 at
Active alarm terminals.
Bar graph conditions
Certifications and compliance:
Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listing for USA and
Power factor controllers.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n°14.
Secondary display Alphanumeric display Contactors for power factor correction
supervision software
24
See Section 27.

Serie DCRG Order code Steps Flush-mount Qty Wt General characteristics

housing per DCRG8 controller has been designed to satisfy technical
size pkg requirements of modern electrical installations in industry.
n° [mm(in)] n° [kg] Main power factor controller characteristics include:
reliability, capability of working in all conditions and the
Single and three-phase low and medium-voltage systems.
ability to detect critical operating conditions, all this to
DCRG 8 8 144x144 (5.7x5.7) 1 0.980 protect the power factor correction system.
Accessories. DCRG8 can to satisfy these requirements and with the
option to extend its own functionality by using EXP series
NTC 01 External/remote temperature 1 0.150
expansion modules. A standard-supplied USB optic port
sensor, with 3m/3.3yd long cable
is also available for controller programming, diagnostics
and data downloads.
Order code Description User interface is easy thanks to the backlight graphic LCD
that contributes to excellent data reading even with bad
EXPANSION MODULES lighting conditions and to view information clearly and
DCRG 8 comprehensively.
Snap in fixing of 4 modules on DCRG 8 rear.
Inputs and outputs. Main features are:

00generalcatalogue201415 01 14

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

00generalcatalogue201415 01 14

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Index

Motor protection circuit breakers 1

Pushbuttons and selector switches 7

Control and Signal towers and beacons 8

Fuse holders and fuses 12

Earth leakage relays

Automation Level control relays 19

Metering instruments and current transformers 23

Energy Automatic transfer switch controllers 25

• New GE series handles

Since 1922 Italian design

Leading-edge manufacturing facilities

Highly qualified technical assistance

Machine builders Pumping, irrigation Power factor Lifting systems

• Contactors • Motor protection circuit • Motor protection circuit • Soft starters

LOVATO Electric S.p.A. was among the first Italian

also maintaining an Environment

General catalogue Pushbuttons and selector switches

Flush mount LCD touch-

Graphic 128x112 pixel 1

Youtube Channel Social Networks

Page 1-2 Page 1-3

Page 1-3 Page 1-10

Wide adjustment range

Short-circuit tripping indicator, standard supplied

11 SM1C 40 9-14 25 12.5 5 0.352 TES

Maximum UL/CSA horsepower rating

Add-on blocks/Accessories Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

Certifications and compliance

Maximum UL/CSA horsepower rating

Add-on blocks/Accessories Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

Order code Characteristics Qty Wt General and operational characteristics

Dimensions Wiring diagrams

Order code Characteristics Qty Wt General and operational characteristics

Dimensions Wiring diagrams

SMX1311 SMX12... SMX1311 SMX12...

Not suitable for use with SM1C type.

Three-phase connection busbars

Three-phase connection busbar,

Dimensions Wiring diagrams

Padlockable attachment Adjuster sealing kit Padlockable door coupling handle

Surface mount enclosure SMX17 11 complete with

Flush mount enclosure SMX17 20 SMX17 11

For BF09A-BF25A contactors.

Dimensions Wiring diagrams

Order code Characteristics Qty Wt General and operational characteristics

Dimensions Wiring diagrams

Padlockable door coupling rotary actuator SMX28 05 - SMX28 10

Minimum 75mm distance from door edge

Dimensions Wiring diagrams

Certifications and compliance

Maximum UL/CSA horsepower rating

Add-on blocks/Accessories Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

Order code Characteristics Qty Wt General and operational characteristics

Dimensions Wiring diagrams

Breakers SM1A - SM1B SM1A - SM1B

44.5 4.8 44.4

SMX17 20 with SMX17 30 or SMX17 35 handle Cutout

SM2A with SMX28 05 or SMX28 10 door coupling handle

Mounting on DIN rail.

SM3A with SMX28 05 or SMX28 10 door coupling handle

Mounting on DIN rail.

Manual starters LMS25 Enclosures LMZ111 - LMZ112 LMZ113 - LMZ114

BFX10 02 BFX10 04 G485... G222... BFX50 02 G269 2 G418... G428... BFX12 02

11 G318 48 48VAC/DC (Varistor) 10 0.010 Maximum assembly combination of add-on blocks

G481... Mounting not possible if front lateral